diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916-0.txt | 6810 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 119228 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916-8.txt | 6810 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 118676 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 206968 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916-h/39916-h.htm | 8412 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg | bin | 0 -> 62446 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916-h/images/illus-tpg.jpg | bin | 0 -> 21112 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916.txt | 6810 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39916.zip | bin | 0 -> 118658 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
13 files changed, 28858 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/39916-0.txt b/39916-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4096787 --- /dev/null +++ b/39916-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6810 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves, by +Claude A. Labelle + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves + +Author: Claude A. Labelle + +Release Date: June 4, 2012 [EBook #39916] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + + + + + +[Illustration: The guard let them out, and warned them that any attempt +at flight would be followed immediately by a shot.] + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES + +By CLAUDE A. LABELLE + +Author of + + “The Ranger Boys to the Rescue,” + “The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit,” + “The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers,” + “The Ranger Boys and Their Reward.” + +[Illustration] + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +Publishers New York + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS SERIES + +A Series of Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years of Age + +By CLAUDE A. LABELLE + + The Ranger Boys to the Rescue + The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit + The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers + The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves + The Ranger Boys and Their Reward + +Copyright, 1922 + +By A. L. BURT COMPANY + +Made in “U. S. A.” + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES. + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE START OF NEW ADVENTURES + + +“Bangor, Bangor, all change for Portland, Boston and way stations,” +shouted the trainman. + +“Here we are, boys,” shouted Garry Boone. “Wake up, Dick, let’s get our +packs and rifles. We will be in the station in a few seconds now. My, +but I’ll be glad to see Dad again. And he promises us some real action, +too. I wonder what trouble he is in. You remember he hinted at something +of the sort in the letter that he wrote us at Hobart.” + +“Well, we’ll know in a few minutes now, for your father will be waiting +for us at the Bangor House. Don’t fret over what he wants, Garry, just +be glad that we have a chance to get into action of some kind. These +past few weeks have gotten me so that I am not happy if we don’t have a +few scrapes to get in and out of,” remarked the second of the trio of +boys. + +Dick Wallace, a plump, heavyset chap, yawned and rubbed the sleep from +his eyes, and then got up and stretched his cramped limbs. He had been +napping for more than an hour. + +At that moment the train drew into the station with a screeching of +brakes, and the boys, having dug out their knapsacks and rifles from +between the seats where they had stowed them, soon were off the train +and walking briskly toward the Bangor House. + +“Why not take a car, there ought to be one along in a minute or two,” +half grumbled Dick. It must be explained that Dick, because of his +weight, took the easiest method of doing anything whenever possible. + +This does not mean that he ever shirked his duty, or that he was +incapable of walking whenever he had to. As a matter of fact, he had +made long hikes in the woods without ever batting an eyelash, but he +believed in doing such things only when they were necessary. + +“Trust Dick to want a street car and something to eat the minute he gets +to a city,” laughed Garry. + +“Yes, I bet he is starving right now,” jibed Phil Durant. “All he has +had to eat since lunchtime is an apple, three bananas, and I don’t know +how many bags of peanuts. If the train boy hadn’t made a sale all the +afternoon except to Dick he would have made a day’s pay anyway.” + +“That reminds me that it is almost supper time now,” said Dick. He had +heard his chums rag him so many times about his appetite, that their +remarks rolled off him as does water off a duck’s back. “I move we +postpone hearing what Dad Boone has to tell us until after we have +eaten. Then he can tell us what he wants, and after that perhaps we can +all go to a movie show.” + +There was no car in sight, so they continued their walk, and soon were +at the doors of the Bangor House, a large, well-appointed hotel. The +boys cut a strange figure as they walked through the lobby, for they +were clad in broad brimmed Stetson army hats, khaki coats cut like +hunters’ jackets, with big roomy pockets, and khaki trousers stuffed +into the tops of shoepacks, which are nothing more than heavy moccasins +with an extra leather sole. + +Each boy carried a knapsack on his back, and attached to this was a +lariat. In addition, a stout forest hatchet was thrust through the belt +that girdled them, and each boy carried a rifle. + +Many curious looks were cast in their direction as they walked to the +desk where Garry asked if Mr. Boone was registered there. + +In a few moments the clerk had telephoned up to Garry’s father and +immediately was told to send the boys up. Following in the wake of the +bell boy they ascended to the room, where Mr. Boone was waiting. + +He greeted the boys heartily and commented on their healthy appearance, +for the sun and open air had made them as tanned as any woodsman. + +Greetings over, Mr. Boone remarked: + +“Before I tell you boys why I have sent for you, I suggest that we get +our dinner and then come back to the room.” + +“Welcome words!” uttered Dick enthusiastically. + +“I thought that would about hit the spot with you, Dick,” laughed Mr. +Boone. + +“Yes,” said Garry, “he is starving to death; he hasn’t had anything to +eat for nearly an hour and a half.” + +Leading the way, Mr. Boone headed the boys toward the dining room, while +they unanimously ordered a fine steak, and soon were busily eating. + +As they eat, let us look them over and get acquainted with them. Those +of our readers who have read the three volumes preceding this one, “The +Ranger Boys to the Rescue,” “The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit,” and “The +Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers,” already know our heroes. Others +must be introduced. + +The leader of the trio is Garfield Boone. He is generally known as +Garry. The stout boy with the long distance appetite is Dick Wallace, +close friend of Garry, and ward of Mr. Boone. The third is Phil Durant, +a boy of French Canadian parentage. The three boys live in a small Maine +town, only a few miles from Portland, the principal city of the Pine +Tree State, as our northernmost commonwealth is known. + +They have just completed their junior year in high school, and it has +been decided that Garry and Dick shall go to a military school the +coming fall, while Phil will have to remain and finish at the high +school. + +Hence they wanted to spend their last vacation together, and had picked +on the idea of taking a camping trip to the woods. Mr. Boone, father of +Garry, who owned extensive lumber tracts in the Maine woods and was +connected with some of the big paper mills of the state, came to bat +with an idea that pleased the boys immensely. + +It was to this effect. That instead of going on a mere camping trip +which might prove to be tiresome before it was concluded, that the boys +become attached to the Forest Ranger Service as an extraordinary Unit of +this woodcraft outfit. + +Their duties would be the same as those of the older Rangers; that is, +to guard the forests from the fire peril that constantly menaced the +timber lands of the state. In this service there were two branches, the +men who act as lookouts, having an unchanged station, and the patrol men +who travel over a certain set course watching that fire does not start +and keeping careless campers from starting fires in dangerous spots. + +In a few days the boys had outfitted themselves and were on their way to +their first station on the Sourdehunq Mountain, a tract of timberland +owned by Mr. Boone. They had no thought of any adventure other than that +which might be caused by the discovery of a fire, but on their second +night on the trail they find the guide they had hired, one Jean LeBlanc, +a French Canadian halfbreed, trying to steal their supplies. + +They drive him away, and later find the halfbreed is inimical to them +because of a fancied grievance he has against the elder Boone. They also +make a staunch friend in the person of Nate Webster, an old Maine guide. +Later Webster replaces the Deputy Ranger, Anderson by name, who has +proved incompetent, and Anderson joins forces with LeBlanc and becomes +an enemy of the Ranger Boys, and nearly succeeds in doing them great +harm. + +Another friend is made in the person of an old hermit, who on several +occasions warns the boys of impending peril by sending them cryptic +notes. + +On one occasion Jean LeBlanc kidnaps the little daughter of a family by +the name of Graham, who are camping in the woods. With the aid of a note +from the hermit, the boys are able to rescue her and capture LeBlanc. +The latter, however, escapes and makes much trouble for the boys, +finally setting fire to the woods. + +He and Anderson escape by climbing a sheer cliff. Still later the boys +are asked by the Customs Secret Service to get evidence of a gang of +smugglers on the Canadian border. This they do and the gang is seized, +all except LeBlanc who dodges back across the boundary and is hence safe +from arrest since he is on Canadian territory and not amenable to the +United States law. + +During a rainy season, they seek out the hermit and find him; that is, +Dick finds him. One of their greatest adventures during the search for +the gang of border smugglers is the finding, with the aid of an old map, +of a tourmaline mine. The boys get a deed to the mineral rights of the +land, and plan at a later date to mine the gems and make a handsome +income for themselves. + +It must also be explained that there is a mystery connected with Dick. +His father was a college professor of geology and botany, and a +classmate of Mr. Boone. He had a fall from a horse that destroyed his +memory, and before an operation could be performed, disappeared. Dick’s +mother had died when he was a baby, and so being without parents or +home, Mr. Boone had become his guardian, bringing him up with his own +son, Garry. + +Now that we have a brief sketch of the boys and their previous +activities, let us see what Mr. Boone’s need of them is. + +“Here is the whole story, boys,” said Mr. Boone as they finished their +dinner and returned to his room. “As you know, I have extensive +interests not only in the timberland but in the mills that manufacture +paper. Recently I severed connections with several of the mills, and put +all my eggs in one basket, so to speak, by investing my funds all in one +mill. Of course it is impossible to do business on a big scale without +making many business enemies, or at least determined rivals. I have a +good many such, and I have been given to understand that several of them +have pooled their resources and become connected with the mills from +which I withdrew my money. + +“Of course I have not enough work in my one mill to take care of all the +timber that I can cut, so I contract to supply other mills, necessarily +becoming a rival of some of the other timber owners. + +“Then, too, I have recently decided to start an experiment in summer +lumbering. You know, of course, that Maine’s lumber cutting season has +always been in the winter because the logs could be cut and hauled over +the snow to the rivers and then when the spring unleashed the ice-bound +rivers, the logs could be driven down to the mills. However, I am +figuring on getting out lumber for building during the summer and in the +winter getting the logs for the pulp mills to grind ready for the making +of paper. I have several important contracts with a time limit; that is, +the necessary amount of lumber must be gotten out by a certain date else +I forfeit my profit and large damages besides. + +“Lately I have seen from my reports that the lumber is not being gotten +out on schedule time. Whenever I come and look it over, or send a +representative, everything goes like clockwork, but the moment that I +turn my back a saw breaks, making a week’s delay, or a tractor is +broken, or something else happens. Unfortunately my financial affairs at +the present time are in such shape that I must devote the greater part +of my time to keeping the wheels going. This necessitates my being much +of the time in Boston and New York, hence I cannot be at the cutting +operations all the time. + +“I have changed managers, but still no good comes of it. Now I am +confident that the morale of my camp is being undermined by some +business rivals, and that there is underground work of some sort going +on. Since your success in getting that gang of smugglers, the complete +story of which I have already heard, I believe that you boys can find +out what is going on at the camp to hinder my contracts. + +“I have thought that you boys might go to the vicinity of the cutting +and sawmills and camp there. You would have the freedom of the camp, as +I would write the manager who you were, and then you could use your eyes +and ears and see what was what. + +“I should suggest that you display a great deal of ignorance about +lumbering operations and sawmill work, so that your presence would not +excite undue suspicion. Further than that I can give you no +instructions, for if I knew what the matter was I would not have to call +on you for assistance. I am simply relying on you to be able to do as +good a job for me as you have done for the Ranger Service and the +Customs Department. In other words, you will have to work out your own +salvation, and I am sure that you can produce for me the results that I +want.” + +Mr. Boone concluded his long explanation and then leaned back, letting +the matter sink in. Then he asked, “Well, boys, what do you think of the +proposition? Are you willing to undertake it? Not that there will be any +danger attached, but do you feel yourselves confident of making a +success of the venture?” + +The eyes of the three boys sparkled. They discounted Mr. Boone’s belief +that there would be no danger attached, for they felt that the +proposition offered a chance for much excitement, and this was what they +wanted. Thrilling adventures were for them the spice of life after what +they had experienced that summer. Garry answered for the others. “Will +we do it? You bet we will, and we’ll succeed!” + + + + +CHAPTER II + +TO THE RESCUE + + +After the conclusion of their talk with Mr. Boone, the boys went out to +take in a motion picture show, after finding there would be time to see +the last performance. + +On the way to the theatre, they stopped for a moment to watch a street +fakir selling knives under the flaring light of a gasoline torch. + +“Here you are, here’s a fine knife with your name and address inlaid in +the handle!” he was shouting. + +“I think I’ll get one of those for myself,” said Dick to his chums. + +“What do you want of one, you have your good heavy scout knife, haven’t +you?” queried Garry. + +“Oh, I just want it as a curiosity for use when we come out of the +woods; we won’t want to carry a great knife like that in civilian +clothes,” replied Dick. + +“We’ll miss the first of the show if you wait,” remarked Garry. + +“Let the youngster have his way, Garry,” interrupted Phil with a laugh. + +The street salesman made the name plate and quickly screwed the +transparent handle back on the knife. Dick handed over the money and +soon they were on the way to the movies. + +They received a fine surprise when they reached there, for the picture +being shown was one in which they had taken small parts when they +encountered a crew of motion picture actors while they were at their +first station in the woods, and when they had some stirring adventures +the time Jean LeBlanc set fire to the woods, the motion picture people +had been rescued by the boys. The picture was a decidedly good one and +they enjoyed it. + +The chums chattered during the play in a subdued tone, especially when +there flashed on the screen the parts where they were playing roles. The +water scene where Dick did some fine swimming was particularly good. + +After the picture was over, they edged out through the crowd and +returned to the hotel and were about to go up to their rooms when Garry +had an idea. + +“Say, boys, we are not going on such a secret affair now that we cannot +have Sandy with us, so I am going to telegraph Nate and ask if he will +bring us the dog tomorrow, or let us know by wire if he cannot.” + +Sandy was the big Airedale dog owned by Garry, a canine that possessed +almost as much sense as some humans. When they had gone on their mission +to the border to capture the smugglers, they had left the dog in Nate’s +keeping, as they were afraid that the sight of the dog would bring to +mind who they were to any of their enemies, and they had made several in +the course of their sojourn in the Maine woods. + +To speak was to act with Garry, and he promptly made his way to the desk +where the familiar blue lettered lamp was aglow. + +The work of writing the message was short and then they went to their +rooms, first stopping in to say good night to Mr. Boone, and advising +him to see the motion picture the next day so that he could see them in +their small parts. + +This Mr. Boone promised to do, and soon all were sleeping the sound +sleep of healthy boys with never a worry or care. + +Morning came, and with it the boys arose and hastened to the dining room +to make the most of the brief opportunity that they would have for the +excellent hotel fare. They spent a part of the forenoon in overhauling +and looking over their radio-phone equipment to see that it was all in +perfect condition, for they had a hunch that it would come in very +useful when they arrived at the cutting tract. This was to be proven +true at a later date. + +About ten o’clock they received a wire from Nate saying that he would +arrive in Bangor about noon and would bring the Airedale with him. True +to his promise in the telegram, the old guide appeared at the hotel +shortly after the noon hour set in and with him was Sandy. The boys were +seated in some of the arm chairs that dotted the lobby, and in less than +a moment the dog had found his friends, and nearly knocked over half a +dozen people in his haste and eagerness to reach the trio, for despite +the fact that an Airedale is called a one man dog, he distributed his +friendship equally among the three chums. + +The boys were fully as glad to see their four-footed friend as he was to +welcome them, and they cuffed and patted him strenuously. + +“Wall, boys, there’s your pup, safe and sound as the day I took charge +of him. And let me tell you, he is some dog. Saved me a considerable sum +of money tother day, too,” announced Nate. + +“Tell us about it,” asked Garry, as the three crowded around the old +“State of Mainer” and shook hands with him heartily. + +“There ain’t a whole lot to tell, ’cepting that a few days ago I sold a +small tract of land that I had to a queer old codger who doesn’t believe +in banks, and who paid me in bills. I believe in banks myself, but it +was late when I made the deal so I had to stow the money away in the +house. I locked it up as well as I could in a small desk in the sitting +room, and went on to bed. ’Bout twelve o’clock I heard a tearing around +downstairs and Sandy barking fit to raise the dead. I hopped downstairs +as soon as I could reach for a rifle that stood in the corner of my +bedroom, just in time to see Sandy going through an open window. I +chased out after him, but someone was just driving away in an automobile +as I got out of the window. Sandy ran the car down the road a piece, but +came back beaten and tuckered out. He was fast, but not quite fast +enough to catch the car, going at the rate it was. Well, I got back in +through the window and looked around. The window had been forced open, +and the burglar was just evidently about to force open the desk, for +there were scratches about the lock and a heavy screwdriver was laying +on the floor. I figure Sandy heard him from the kitchen, where he +generally slept, and came in and drove him off just in time to save my +money. So that’s all there is to that, but he is a mighty fine dog, and +I hate to let go of him, even to his owner.” + +The boys patted Sandy again and again as they listened to Nate’s story. + +“Did you find any trace of the robber?” asked Garry. + +“Nary a sign except the footprints on the lawn under the window. I +figure it must have been someone that knew I got paid for the land that +evening, and that I kept a little valuable stuff in the desk, but there +is no proof or nothing to work on to determine who it might be. I don’t +care anyway, as long as the invader didn’t get my money,” replied Nate. + +The boys invited Nate to lunch with them, and this invitation he +accepted, and calling Mr. Boone they went into the dining room. In a few +moments they were joined by “Moose” Boone and the greeting between the +two old friends was pleasant to see. + +During the luncheon hour they told Nate of the new work the boys were +going on, and while he expressed himself as sorry that they were not +immediately going back on the fire patrol, he agreed that they, if +anyone, could solve the mystery of the stolen timber and mishaps at the +logging camp. + +After luncheon the boys decided that since a day or two extra would not +make any great difference in their plans, they would walk to the camp +instead of riding in the hot stuffy train. They decided to start that +afternoon, as soon as the sun began to lower, and make about ten miles +of their fifty mile journey, sleeping out under the open as soon as it +got too dark to walk any farther. + +Garry’s father agreed that they could take what little extra time was +needed to walk, and so it was settled. + +The first business of the afternoon was to visit a large grocery store +and purchase enough provisions to last them on the trip, for they would +do their cooking over an open fire along the way. + +“We’ll just buy enough to carry us over for two days, for we ought to +reach the logging camp by late afternoon of the day after tomorrow,” +announced Garry, the chosen leader of the trio on all expeditions. + +“This suits me to a T,” remarked Dick. “Then we won’t have to carry so +much extra stuff in our packs, and in this hot weather a few pounds +saved is a boon.” + +“Trust Dick not to want to carry too heavy a pack,” laughed Phil. + +“That’s nothing to laugh about,” protested Dick hotly, “that’s just good +common sense. It’s——” + +Then he perceived that his chums were ragging him a bit so he grinned +and turning on his heel started for the door, followed by the two +laughing boys. + +The buying of the groceries took but a short time, and soon the bags +were packed and they were ready for their trip. + +Goodbyes were said to Nate and Mr. Boone, and the trio set out on their +long hike. + +“Good luck, boys, and I sincerely hope that you find what you are +looking for, because my affairs are in a ticklish position just at +present and unless I find the cause of the disturbance and thefts at the +camp, I will be in a very serious way,” said Mr. Boone as he shook hands +with the three boys. + +“Guess they can settle the matter if anyone can,” remarked Nate as he +bade the boys goodbye. “They have done some pretty fine work for boys +lately and I look to see them get to the nigger in the wood-pile and +roust him out pretty shortly. Then mebbe they can come back and take +over the patrol for the rest of the summer. + +“We’re good for about eight miles tonight, fellows,” said Garry as they +started, “for it will be at least three hours before it gets too dark to +walk any farther,” said Garry. + +“Have you the route all set in your mind?” asked Phil. + +“Yes, I looked over a road map very carefully this morning, and the +manager at the hotel garage gave me some other directions so that we +cannot go very far wrong,” answered Garry. + +They passed well out of Bangor and were going along a country road, just +as the sun was setting, when a chugging automobile was heard back of +them. Soon a ramshackle old flivver drew up near them, driven by a young +farmer lad. + +He sized up the boys, then stopped his machine and asked: + +“Going far?” + +“On to Colter,” answered Garry. + +“Gosh, that’s a pretty good spell to walk,” answered the farmer boy. +“I’m going on about four miles more; would you like a lift for that +distance?” + +“You bet we would,” broke in Dick. + +This brought a laugh from the others, and they accepted the lift, for it +meant saving almost an hour on their way. + +They piled into the old flivver, and soon were rolling speedily along +the road. Despite its aged and decrepit appearance the car made +excellent time, and the boys commented on this. + +“Yep, she’s a pretty good old boat,” answered the boy. “I don’t have +much time to tinker with the looks of the thing on the outside, but I +manage to keep the engine in pretty good condition. You can’t keep a +farm car looking up to time every minute. Well, I turn in here in a +minute, so I guess this is as far as you can ride, unless another car +comes along. Will you come in and have a bite to eat?” + +The chums thanked him cordially but refused his invitation, saying that +they would cook their own meal an hour or so later. + +Garry looked up at the sun and then remarked to his chums: + +“It will be dark in two hours, and we can make just about six miles in +that time without exerting ourselves too much. We haven’t done much of +anything all day so if we want to let out a bit we can tack on an extra +mile in that time and so save ourselves a bit of extra walking tomorrow. +Let’s go.” + +Hitching up their packs, the trio of chums set off at a brisk pace. The +setting of the sun made it much cooler and the walking was pleasant. +They passed through a small village and were well on the outskirts where +the houses were beginning to get scattered, and they were deciding how +far to proceed before picking a spot to camp for the night when they +heard a call for help and the sounds of a scuffle. In the gathering +gloom they could not see where the trouble was, but hastening towards +the spot from where the voices seemed to come, they approached a bend in +the road, and turning, saw two men attacking a third. + +The attackers seemed to be rough specimens of humanity, while the third +was a young man, fairly well dressed. This gave the affair the aspect of +a robbery instead of a quarrel among a lot of ruffians, so calling his +chums to hurry, Garry threw his rifle to his shoulder and shouted to the +attacking party to throw up their hands. + +The surprised thugs took one look at the business-like rifle in Garry’s +hands, and then deciding that they might perchance overpower him seemed +to be on the verge of rushing toward him when Phil and Dick turned the +bend in the road. Seeing that they were outnumbered, and with no thought +of the fact that the boys might fire on them, they turned on their heels +and ran. Garry was about to send a shot flying after them when the young +man who had been the subject of the attack called to Garry to let them +go. + +Just then he toppled over and fell at full length at Garry’s feet. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +A NEW ALLY + + +Garry hastily unstrapped his canteen and unloosing the stopper, poured +some of the water on the man’s face. At the same time, Dick, showing a +surprising amount of speed for one so undeniably stout, sprang to help +Garry and unloosed the man’s shirt collar. + +In a few moments the man had been revived, and when he had come to, +Garry asked him if he had been shot or stabbed or wounded in any way. + +“No,” replied the man weakly. “One of those jacks hit me on the head +with a club, and I guess I just got groggy. I wonder if you boys could +help me home, I live a few hundred yards down the road.” + +“Indeed we will, you wait just a moment and we will improvise something +to carry you on,” replied Phil. + +“No, you won’t have to do that, just give me an arm to lean on; that +will do very nicely.” + +The boys did as he wished, and in a few minutes of easy walking they +came to a neat little cottage, set back a few yards from the door with a +number of flower beds scattered over the little lawn. + +“Oh Grace,” called the man, and soon a pretty young woman came to the +door. When she saw her husband, for so he proved to be, leaning on the +arm of Garry she flew down the path and asked anxiously what was the +matter. + +“Nothing at all. Just wait till we get in the house and I will tell you +all about it,” said the stranger. Then turning to the boys, he asked +them to come in. + +Anxious to hear what the cause of attack was, and why the man had wanted +the rascals to escape, the trio accepted his invitation, and soon were +sitting in the attractive little living room of the cottage. + +“Now I suppose you boys who so kindly helped me out of a nasty hole +would like to know what the whole business is about, wouldn’t you?” +asked the owner of the cottage. + +“We are rather curious,” answered Garry speaking for the others. + +“My name is Howells, Arthur first name, generally called Art by my +friends, and I am a timber scaler by occupation. I am scaling on the +Boone cutting a few miles from here, and the chaps who attacked me were, +until a few days ago, lumber jacks employed on the cutting. One morning +I found them ‘spiking a tree,’ and forthwith sent a report to the office +with a demand that they be fired. For that reason they met me tonight +and attempted to get satisfaction by giving me a sound beating. Perhaps +it would have been worse had you boys not come along so opportunely. I +don’t think they would have murdered me, but could have easily put me +out of commission so that I could not work, and that is one thing that I +must do now of all times.” + +“But why did you want us to let them escape. I should think you would +have wanted them put safely under lock and key for such an unwarranted +attack,” demanded Garry. + +“Yes, Arthur,” chimed in his wife. “I would have had them arrested and +given a good long sentence. They might have killed you or crippled you.” + +“There’s just one reason. One of them was Dave Pingree, son of old Daddy +Pingree who lives in the village near here. You know the son is a +worthless scoundrel, but old Daddy has had so much trouble that I didn’t +want to bring any more on him by having his son arrested, bad as he is, +and as richly as he deserves to be jailed. The other one was a stranger +to these parts, half breed Canadian by the name of LeBlanc, who picked +up Pingree somewhere in the woods, and who has been his constant +companion for the past few weeks, at least since the cutting operations +of the Boone tract were started,” concluded Howells. + +The three boys were so startled at the sound of the name LeBlanc that +they jumped to their feet simultaneously and asked Howells to repeat the +name. + +“LeBlanc is the name. But why does that surprise you so?” queried Mr. +Howells in surprise. + +“What is his first name,” demanded Garry without answering the question. + +“On the payroll he is listed as Baptiste.” + +“We did not get a very good look at him in the dusk,” said Garry. “Would +you mind describing him for us, please. This is a peculiar situation, +and we will tell you about it after you have described the man,” +answered Garry rather agitatedly. + +“Why he is a swarthy chap about twenty-seven or eight, just about the +same age as Pingree. He has black hair and mustache, and a jagged scar +on one side of his neck, probably a knife wound from some lumber camp +fight,” answered Howells. + +Garry sank back with a sigh of relief. + +“At any rate he is not the man we think he is. The scar and the age +settle that, although the rest of the description fits him well enough +to make him a brother to Jean LeBlanc, the one man we do want to run +across in this neck of the woods,” replied Garry. + +“Well, not that I want to raise any apprehension on your part, or tell +you something that is displeasing to you, he is a brother of a man +called Jean LeBlanc. I happen to know that this is so, for one night the +lumberjacks were wrestling in front of the bunkhouse and boasting about +their exploits, when this Baptiste came up and succeeded in throwing +several of the men with a rather vicious hold. After he had thrown +several of them he started boasting about his brother Jean, who had +taught him the hold. I was standing at one side watching the wrestling, +which is how I happened to overhear the matter. But why does the name of +LeBlanc bother you so?” he asked in conclusion. + +“That’s a rather long story,” answered Garry “and perhaps I had better +start by telling you our names. These are my chums, Phil Durant and Dick +Wallace, while my name is Garfield Boone, generally called Garry for +short.” + +“I don’t suppose you are any relation to the Mr. Boone who owns this +tract where the summer logging is going on are you? Most people of that +name in this state are somewhat related. In fact I am a second or third +cousin of his myself,” said Howells with a smile. + +“Yes, I happen to be his son,” answered Garry. + +“Well, that is a coincidence. I suppose you are going on to take a look +at the cutting aren’t you. This being your vacation time probably you +are camping and travelling around a bit,” and Howells glanced at the +knapsacks and rifles which the boys had stacked near the door in the +hall and which could be plainly seen from the living room. + +Dick was about to say something when he caught a meaning glance from +Garry, which was also seen by Phil, and which the boys interpreted as a +desire on the part of Garry to do any necessary explaining that might +have to be done. + +“Yes, we were in this vicinity and thought that we would like to see how +the experiment in summer cutting was coming along,” he told Howells. + +“That’s fine, then I shall see you around there a good deal as I am +scaling. Of course coming from a lumbering family, I don’t need to tell +you that scaling means measuring the timber that is cut. I also do quite +a bit of timber cruising, which, as you know, means travelling through +the cutting, marking the trees that are fit to be cut. Your father is +very particular about his lumbering, and he doesn’t do as many of the +other timber owners do, sweep clean through a tract of land, and make it +worthless as timber land for years to come. His having certain trees +marked for cutting means that every year there will be a growth suitable +to cut and market and thus he is assured of a steady income from his +tracts.” + +“Perhaps if you are not too busy every day, you could show us something +of the lumbering operations. Although as you say, I come from a ‘lumber +family,’ I don’t know a great deal about timber cutting. About the only +time I have ever been at the camps was at the spring drive, just to see +the fight for the river, and neither of my chums know any more about it +than I do. The first thing I would like to know is what did you mean by +‘spiking a tree’?” asked Garry. + +“I don’t know that I can explain that to you without having you near a +piece of big timber to demonstrate what I mean, but I will try and tell +you as best I can. There is a certain way to cut a tree, or rather there +is a certain place where one always starts to cut. This place is +determined by the diameter of the tree. If the tree is two feet thick, +the cutter measures up two feet from the ground to start his cut. Of +course he does not measure it exactly, but long experience has taught +him to estimate almost within an inch where to start. You know some +trees are cut by axe; those are the smaller ones, but the bigger ones +are sawed nearly all the way through, and then the axemen cut through +just enough with their axes to cause the tree to break off and fall. +‘Spiking a tree’ means to take an estimate where the sawyers will start, +and then drive several spikes in, using a nail set to drive them into +the tree out of sight. The hole left will close up very rapidly, or a +little dirt and moss can be stuck in so cleverly as to defy detection.” + +“But what harm does that do? I suppose it might kill the tree, but what +difference does that make, since it is going to be cut down directly?” +quizzed Phil who was an interested listener. + +“It doesn’t harm an old tree, but this is what it does, or rather figure +it out for yourselves. What happens when the saw strikes three or four +heavy spikes, set in the tree just in the path of the blade?” asked +Howells. + +The truth flashed over the three boys in an instant, and immediately +they felt that they accomplished one purpose of their mission to the +woods. They had discovered one of the reasons for the delay in the +cutting. If several saws were to be spoiled that meant a delay in +getting new ones. + +“Now here are two other things that a spike in a tree will do. If spikes +are driven in young trees, several of them, that is trees that won’t be +cut for a few years, it means that it will cause the core or heart of +the tree to rot or break the grain. Then when the tree is finally cut, a +part of the lower trunk, or best part of the tree for lumber purposes, +shatters just like so much glass when it falls. That’s one thing a spike +will do. Now here’s another thing. Suppose that the mischief maker does +not drive his spikes in the tree where the cut will be made, but climbs +up twenty or thirty feet or so, and drives a dozen or two in different +parts of the trunk of the tree. The tree trunk is cut safely and then it +is drawn to the sawmill where it is sawed into planks. What happens when +one of the big, expensive circular saws rips through a dozen spikes? +It’s just goodbye to the saw and goodbye to a lot of money, and means a +delay of several minutes until the saw can be replaced with another. And +when you are cutting timber on a time contract with a penalty for every +day’s delay overtime that you take, a half an hour or so lost through +trouble with your sawmill means a big thing. Then there are two other +dangers. One is that the saw will fly off and hurt the millmen when it +hits the spikes, and the other is that it sometimes will cause serious +defects in the entire machinery, so that instead of just a few minutes’ +delay to change saws, you waste a day or maybe two in repairing the +machinery. So that’s that.” Howells concluded his long description of +all the trouble one little handful of spikes could do, and then he +looked rather searchingly at the boys. Finally he seemed to have decided +in his own mind to say what he was thinking and he looked at Garry. + +“I wonder if your father has any idea that someone is trying to hurt his +business? I don’t believe for an instant that those two scoundrels were +driving those spikes just to make mischief. There is something deeper +than that behind the whole business. There are scores of petty accidents +occurring every week that all mean delay. Sometimes when the delays are +totalled up they equal nearly half a day, and in one summer that means a +long delay, a matter perhaps of two weeks. That two weeks is sufficient +to spoil the contract and take all the profit away, but more than that, +it means a loss of capital invested, for I happen to know that your +father is cutting under a contract that provides a heavy penalty for +failure to deliver goods as they are called for.” + +Garry debated with himself for a few moments, wondering whether or not +to take Howells into his confidence and enlist his help. He realized +that Howells, if he were honest as he seemed, would be an invaluable aid +in discovering what the trouble at the camp was. His knowledge of +timbering was extensive, Garry could see that with half an eye, and +Garry understood that he and his chums could see lots of things +happening right under their noses and never guess the malicious +significance of the happenings. + +As he thought, Mrs. Howells settled the question for him. Reaching down +to one of the shelves in the library table about which they were +sitting, she produced an album. + +“We are just old fashioned enough to have a family album,” she laughed. +“I thought perhaps you would like to see a picture taken of your father +a great many years ago,” and turning to one of the pages she showed +Garry a picture that he recognized immediately. It showed his father +with a sweet faced woman. “That is your father and Mr. Howells’ mother. +She was his favorite cousin and she died a long time ago. This has +always been in Arthur’s possession.” + +Garry remembered having seen a counterpart of the picture at home a long +time ago, and he decided that the timber sealer was not claiming any +false relationship. + +“I wonder how it is that we have never seen you before,” he asked, +turning to Howells. + +“Easy, we went west when I was a youngster, and it was only this spring +that we came back to Maine. I did not say anything about my +relationship, for I want to go on my own hook. I am a graduate of a +forestry school, and I wanted to get actual experience in the woods, +which was why I asked for and received the position of timber sealer. I +like to stand in my own shoes, and so I said nothing about my +relationship to the manager at the camp. Then, too, I need money, as I +have a small interest in a little tract of young timber, and I am paying +on it a little at a time. By the time it is completely paid for it will +be ready to cut, and there will be a handsome profit on the investment,” +he answered. + +For a boy of his age, Garry was a pretty shrewd judge of character, and +he had been sizing up young Howells while he was talking. So he made up +his mind to take him into his confidence in a limited way, and so +remarked: + +“Yes, my father does know that there is something wrong at the camp, but +he cannot put his finger on the spot where the trouble is. Every time he +visits the camp things go along as smooth as clockwork, but it is +impossible to put in all this time at this one thing when he has so many +other irons in the fire. We thought that perhaps we could visit the camp +for a while and find out what is wrong, and report to him so that he +could remedy the trouble. But after hearing your story of the attempted +spiking, I am beginning to think that the job is almost too much for us +to handle. That would have been something I would never have dreamed of, +and if the enemies in the camp, for enemies there must be, know a trick +like that, they must have a bagfull of others of which we know nothing. +So you see that in a way we are helpless, and I am going to ask that you +aid us in this. I can promise for my father that in case your aid is +instrumental in locating the trouble that it will not be forgotten. What +do you say? Will you help us?” + +“Indeed I will,” and Howells thrust forward his hand. “You can count on +me to the last ditch!” + +“Thanks,” said Garry as he took the proffered hand. “Now there is one +thing to do, and that is to make sure that Baptiste LeBlanc is not in +these parts any more, for wherever the name of LeBlanc gets hitched up +with us there is trouble brewing!” + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +THE PERIL OF THE CIRCUS + + +Mrs. Howells pressed the boys to remain for supper, saying they would +find it much more pleasant to eat in the house than to cook by the +roadside somewhere. It had got quite dark at this time, and so they +decided to accept the invitation so cordially given. + +The fine meal was soon served, and as they ate, Garry told of some of +their adventures with Jean LeBlanc, in order to explain why they were so +startled when that name was first mentioned by Howells. + +Supper over they talked for some time and then Garry proposed to his +chums that they get their packs and journey on for a bit till they could +find a place to throw their blankets for the night. + +The Howells protested vigorously at this, but could offer them nothing +as their cottage was not large enough to accommodate them. + +The boys laughed and said they were so used to sleeping in the open that +it would never hurt them. “If you are bound to sleep outdoors you can +use the back yard or you can spread your blankets on the living room +floor,” said Howells. “One can take the couch there. You’ll have to toss +for it, though.” + +After much pressure the boys decided to do this, and accordingly +goodnights were said. It was a custom of the boys to draw lots to settle +all arguments, so hustling into the kitchen Garry raided the broom of +three straws of unequal length and then brought them back for his chums +to draw. + +Dick was the lucky chap to get the couch. With a grin he spread his +blankets and remarked to the others that he hoped the floor would not be +too hard. + +“What’s the diff?” inquired Phil. “There isn’t much difference between +the ground and a floor and we aren’t in the woods so we can’t cut +branches to make one of nature’s mattresses with. Stop your chatter. I’m +off to sleep,” and indeed he was in a few moments. + +To Garry however, sleep did not come so easily for he was thinking of +the events of the evening, and wondering what he and his chums could do +to checkmate the schemes of the unknown enemies that were causing all +the trouble at the lumber camp. But Garry was a healthy growing boy, and +not to be denied his sleep, so soon he consigned the cares of the day to +oblivion and in a few moments was fast asleep. + +Howells was up before the boys, and started the coffee, and in a few +moments his wife was downstairs and busying herself about the breakfast. +They let the boys sleep until it was almost ready, then awoke them. The +boys protested against all the trouble they were causing their hosts, +but their protests were only half hearted for the smell of the boiling +coffee and the frying bacon were so tempting that it would have taken a +team of horses to drive them away without eating. + +Breakfast over, they took their leave, first inquiring about the way +that lay ahead. They found that they would go nearly twenty-five miles +before coming to another town, as the way ran through the last of the +farming country before striking the edge of the big timber country. + +“The camp is ten miles or so beyond the village that you will come to, +and it will take you at least a day to get to the village, so you will +not reach the camp until nearly noon of tomorrow. There’s a good chance +that you will get a lift, however, for there is a circus there today, +and you should find a great many people on the road. Don’t be bashful +about hailing them and asking for a lift. It is a customary thing to do +in this part of the country. I will see you in a couple of days, as I +will go back on duty at the camp then,” said Howells. + +“Just one thing if you don’t mind,” interposed Garry. “When you come to +the camp, do not let on that you are already acquainted with us, because +if we are to work together we can do a lot better if there is no inkling +of our acquaintance.” + +“That’s a good idea, and that way it’ll be,” agreed Howells. + +“What say, let’s take this in a hurry and see how many miles we can +cover this morning,” suggested Dick. + +The others stopped short in their tracks. + +“Listen, Phil, unstrap your canteen while I feel his pulse. There’s +something the matter with Dick. He wants to hurry. If it was later in +the day I would say that he had been a bit touched by the sun, but it is +early and cool, and I think he is just sick,” said Garry solicitously. + +“Lazy Dick wants to hurry!” ejaculated Phil in amazement. “What’s the +big idea?” + +Dick turned red and lunged at his chums. He was used to their ragging +him on account of his willingness to take the easiest way of doing +things. Of course they knew that he never shirked his duty when called +upon, and they never questioned his bravery at any time, but he always +got so fussed when they ragged him about his weight and his easy way of +taking life, that they never let an opportunity pass to tease him about +it. After a short scuffle, they stopped laughing and Garry said: + +“Seriously, Dick, why do you want to hurry? We are well up on our +schedule and you don’t need to rush like mad.” + +“I just wanted to see what we could do if we had to,” said Dick; “and +furthermore, I wanted to show you for once that I could walk as fast and +as long as either of you chaps, that’s all. Let’s go.” + +Dick set off at a swinging pace, and kept it up. The boys fell in and +kept pace with him, thinking that he would soon tire of it; but when +they had covered three miles, and Dick had not abated a whit his speed, +Garry and Phil saw that he was in earnest. Not to be outdone by him, +they bent to their walking and made excellent time. They were passing a +barn, when suddenly Garry stopped dead short, gave a shout and then fell +to laughter with all his might. This time it was Dick’s turn to assume a +sarcastic attitude, and make side remarks to Phil. Finally when Garry +had controlled his laughter so that he could speak, he said to Phil: + +“What do you think of me for a regular little Sherlock Holmes? I’ve +found out why Dick is trying to set a pedestrian record this morning. +Just look at that barn!” + +Phil took one look at the glaring posters pasted on the wall, then gave +a shout. + +“Aha, the boy wants to go to the circus!” + +“Marvelous,” grunted Dick. “Own up, wouldn’t you fellows like to see it +yourself?” + +The boys teased him for a few minutes, then they perceived that there +was method in Dick’s madness and they decided that it would be good fun +to see the circus if they could get there on time. + +“Only reason I wanted you chaps to hurry a little was because I figured +that if we covered a good number of miles we would get to a point where +people would be on the way to the circus and we could get a lift and +arrive in time to see the show this afternoon. Then we could get another +start right after it let out, and so fix it as to arrive at the camp +fairly early in the morning, covering our last ten miles while it was +early and cool,” he explained. + +“That’s pretty good dope at that, Dick. Let’s go. We’ll see the circus +and not waste any time doing it, either.” And Garry set the pace as he +finished talking. + +They stopped at noon and prepared a hasty lunch by the side of the road, +after Dick had stopped at a farm house and had his canteen filled with +fresh milk. + +By this time scores of automobiles and teams were on the road, but +practically every one of them was filled to overflowing with adults and +children, all presumably bound for the circus. Finishing their meal, +they rested fifteen minutes, then Garry, glancing at his watch, +remarked: “We have still ten miles to go, and it is now half-past +twelve. The circus probably begins at half-past two, so that unless we +get a ride we won’t get there in time to see the show. We couldn’t cover +the ten miles in two hours, especially after having come as far as we +have this morning.” + +“I’m going to see that circus, though, even if we have to wait for the +evening performance,” announced Dick. “What do you fellows think?” + +“I guess it would be all right,” answered Garry. “There is no life or +death matter to make us arrive early in the morning at the camp, so we +might as well take it easy for the rest of the way.” Luck was with them, +however, for they had gone little more than a mile when they heard a car +coming behind them. It proved to contain only a single occupant who, as +he neared the boys, slowed down and asked if they did not want a ride. +They were unanimous in their answer. + +“On the way to the circus?” asked the driver. + +“We’re going beyond that, but we thought that we would stop and see it +if we reached there on time, otherwise we would have seen the evening +performance.” + +“Lucky thing that I came along and happen to be going to that place +myself then,” chuckled the driver, “for there isn’t going to be any +evening show. You see I happen to be connected with the circus, and we +have such a long jump for tomorrow’s show that we cannot give a +performance here tonight.” + +“Good thing you came along then, for if we had walked all this distance +for nothing, I would have given up in disgust,” remarked Dick. + +“How far have you come?” asked the circus man. + +“We left Hilton this morning,” answered Garry. + +The driver looked somewhat incredulous at this statement, then sizing up +the appearance of the boys, who were wearing their customary khaki +semi-uniform that they used as Rangers in the forest, decided that they +were hiking for the summer and probably used to walking good distances +in a short time. + +“What are you chaps doing, walking across the state or something?” + +Garry explained that they were forest rangers off duty temporarily and +were bound for a lumber camp to pay it a visit. + +As they drove along they asked several questions about the circus and +circus life, and considerably amused the man by referring to many things +in a way that circus people did not. The circus man told them of the +many strange phrases employed by circus people, and the boys learned +much of the talk of the circus. + +They found, for instance, that circus people never speak of the tent. It +is always called a top. There are the big top and the little tops. The +only thing on the circus lot to be called a tent is the cook tent. + +Several of the names applied to the performers were amusing. A clown is +always called a joy, and if he is a new man with the circus he is called +a First of May, because it is on that date that many contracts are made +in the circus. Acrobats are called kinkers, and the people who do work +on the high trapeze are called casters, and their work is called a +casting act. + +“Then there is the high diver, only we call it a tank diving act. You +won’t see that this afternoon, for the diver fell a couple of days ago +and broke his arm. Funny; he’s been diving forty feet into an eight foot +tank for several years, and never got a scratch, and then he slips on a +banana peeling and breaks his arm. It’s too bad, too, for the diving act +always goes big in these small towns. I’d give twenty-five dollars for a +diver this afternoon,” concluded the man. + +“Hand over the twenty-five,” said Dick suddenly. + +“What do you mean,” asked the circus man in surprise. + +“Just that you give me the twenty-five dollars and I’ll do your high +dive for you this afternoon.” + +The circus man looked at the other two boys as if he doubted his ears, +and Garry and Phil immediately assured them that Dick was a first class +swimmer and diver. + +“Forty feet is not so much to Dick. He’s often done better than that in +the river at home,” Garry told the circus man. + +“Yes, but you want to remember that this is an eight foot square tank, +and only eight feet deep,” he told Dick. + +“That’s nothing, I’ll turn easily in eight feet. Have done it in a +little less,” Dick assured him. + +“All right. I’ll take you to see the owner when we get there, and he and +you can fix things up. He’ll be glad to pay you that amount for the +work, for it’s a big attraction and we have advertised it a lot. That’s +my business with the circus—to do the advertising.” + +In a little less than half an hour they had arrived at the circus lot, +and true to his word, the advertising man carried Dick round to the +ticket wagon and introduced him to the manager and owner. + +It took Dick but a short time to convince the owner that he could dive, +particularly when he offered to give an exhibition for him before the +show started. The only thing that the manager insisted on was that Dick +sign a statement relieving the circus from any responsibility in case +any accident occurred. + +Dick readily signed this, and then promising to be back in a short time +to get some tights and get dressed, they wandered around the lot. They +left their rifles and knapsacks in the ticket wagon, but Garry kept his +lariat with him. + +“What’s the idea?” asked Phil. + +“There’s very little chance of anything happening, but I don’t want any +of those riders to walk off with this lariat by mistake,” he replied. + +This decided the boys to keep theirs with them also, and accordingly +they slung them over one shoulder. Several curious glances were cast at +them as they wandered from show to show. The owner had given them passes +to everything, and they didn’t waste any of them. + +Soon a bugle was heard blowing and in a moment they met the advertising +man who informed them that called all the performers to be ready in a +few moments. “Your act will be the fourth on the program, so you’d +better go and get your togs on and be ready,” he told Dick. + +Garry and Phil elected to go to their seats and watch their chum do his +act with the rest of the spectators. + +“I’ll come and hunt you up as soon as I do the dive and collect that +twenty-five good old dollars. I can use it very nicely one of these +days,” Dick said as he turned to follow the circus man to the dressing +place. + +While the circus was a small one, it boasted of rather better things +than the average road circus, and among other things was a fairly good +menagerie. Garry and Phil looked at all the animals as they passed +through to the “big top.” + +Two cages contained unusually fine specimens of lions, and near one was +a caretaker, waiting for the lions to be taken into the big performing +cage, after which he would clean the cage and have it ready on the +shaggy maned animal’s return from the ring. + +“Wicked looking beast, isn’t he,” Garry remarked to the man who stood +near the cage. + +“He is that, boss,” answered the man. “He’s a a new one, and we don’t +know him very well. We had a nice old chap before him, too old and tired +and toothless to do any harm, but this one is young and vicious. The +trainer has a lot of trouble with him, too.” + +A sound of band music made the boys hurry to their seats, and soon the +“Grand entry” was on. + +Several of the usual acts were put on, and then razorbacks, as the +circus workers are called, pulled away some of the planking of the +platform in the center of the arena, disclosing a tank filled with +water. + +Soon the boys espied Dick advancing to the platform, his chubby body +enclosed in a glaring red bathing suit. He mounted to the tank, and the +chums could see him gazing about trying to locate them, but this he +failed to do. + +The ringmaster made a short speech, telling a lot of stuff about Dick +that made the chums grin. + +“Guess one has to be a blood relation of Ananias to be a ringmaster,” +laughed Garry. “The only diving Dick has ever done before the crowned +heads of Europe was before they were crowned.” + +After the laudatory speech, Dick climbed up the high ladder and stood +perched on the little square platform at the top. As he had been told to +do outside the big top, he dropped a handkerchief which slowly fluttered +down to the ground below. This is an old trick of high divers and is +done merely to accentuate the distance. + +Then the drummer started a long ruffle, and casting one downward look, +Dick tipped off the platform. Both Phil and Garry were just a trifle +nervous as he leaped, although they were well aware of his ability. + +But Dick hit the water as clean as a knife, and it was only a matter of +seconds before he appeared on the surface of the water and climbed out +dripping. A mighty round of applause was given not only for the fact +that he had made a fine dive, but his youth made him popular with the +audience. + +The acts went on, and in a little while Dick came wandering into the +tent. The boys hailed him as he neared the place where they were +sitting, and in a trice he had climbed up the rattling board seats to a +place beside his chums. + +“Well, I got my twenty-five, and we’ll have a party with it some time. +Also, I received an offer to stay with the circus, which, naturally, I +turned down. So you see, Phil, you are not the only one to have jobs +offered them.” He alluded to the time that a big league baseball scout +had offered a contract to Phil after seeing him pitch one game at +Commencement time at high school in his home town. The music stopped and +the ringmaster made his customary speech about the next act, which was +the lion taming act. + +The music had just started again, when there was a piercing shriek from +a woman, and then some one screamed: + +“The lion is loose!” + + + + +CHAPTER V + +EXTRA ENEMIES + + +Hundreds of people joined in the shrieking, and a stampede from the +seats started. Scores were trampled. The music had stopped for an +instant until the leader, true to tradition, called the men to order, +and the musicians swung into a stirring march. Circus hands, aided by +the performers who were on the platforms and in the rings, ran to the +sides of the tracks and endeavored to keep the people in their seats. + +The three chums were aghast for a minute, then Phil and Dick +instinctively turned to Garry to see what he would do. Garry had taken +one look and saw the beast at the far end of the tent, lashing his tail +and surveying the crowd, as though making up its mind as to what course +to pursue. + +The boys saw that Garry was hastily slipping his lasso from his +shoulder, and in a moment they had understood what he was going to +attempt, and followed suit. + +“Now fellows, let’s try it. We may save a lot of lives. I’ll try for his +head, and you two try for a foot each. I think we can catch him all +right. Let’s go!” and Garry led the way. + +Calling to everyone to sit still as they ran, and swinging their lariats +over their heads, they struggled to the ground. Several people seeing +them make their way there, thought that it was perhaps a part of the +circus, and began to shout to each other that it was a feature of the +program. The sight of the three boys making their way fearlessly toward +the beast did more than anything else to quiet the people. Many sat back +in their seats, although others were escaping under the canvas wall of +the tent. + +It was to Phil, however, that the greatest honor was to come. As he ran, +swinging one arm, his hand hit against a pocket in his coat, and he felt +a hard lump within. In an instant he remembered that he bought pepper +the day before to replenish the condiment can that he generally carried +in his knapsack, but had not thought to take it out and transfer the +contents from the package to the can. He reached into his pocket and +brought out the can. Hastily opening the top, he kept on his way toward +the lion, holding the package out in front of him. The chums approached +within a few feet of the lion, who was showing signs of springing +suddenly at them. The effect of the boys’ advance on him was to make him +forget the crowds and center all his attention on those that were +nearest him—the chums. + +The boys stopped short and were swinging their lariats, when suddenly +Phil darted ahead almost up to the lion, and, with a well directed aim, +emptied the contents of the pepper package straight on the eyes of the +lion. + +The infuriated beast gave a roar of pain and sprang, then fell to earth +and stuck a great paw into his eyes, as though to rub away the torturing +stuff that was blinding him. + +Garry, quick-witted, divined what Phil had done, and at the same moment +that the lion struck the ground, ran forward and threw the noose of the +lariat over the animal’s head. + +The animal was nearly helpless, owing to its inability to see, and in +another moment the boys had the rest of their lariats noosed about his +feet. + +By this time the trainer and a number of the circus helpers had arrived +on the scene, and, dashing in, they tied the lariats securely about the +animal’s feet. + +The crowd seeing that the animal was securely fastened and helpless, +first breathed a sigh of relief and then became suddenly quiet. Many +still thought it was a part of the program, but a majority felt sure +that it was a striking piece of bravery that they had just witnessed. + +Then cheer on cheer rolled through the tent, as the audience applauded +the brave trio of chums. All the foregoing had taken much less time than +the minutes necessary to describe it. In a moment the owner came puffing +on the scene, and when he saw who had accomplished the capture, he was +speechless for the moment. + +Then he said to the chums, as they stood watching the animal being +loaded into its cage: + +“This is twice today that you boys have done me a good turn, but this +second time far outmatches the first. Will you please come back to the +ticket wagon with me.” Then to the menagerie head, who had joined them: +“I’d like you to come, too, please, Jones.” + +The little group made its way to the ticket office, where the owner +first asked for an account of how the beast had made its escape. + +“The only man who can tell you that is the roustabout who cleans the +animal’s cage. He was gashed by the lion evidently as its escape was +being made, and that and very likely a heart stroke killed him quickly. +I think perhaps he thought it was near time for the transfer to the +arena cage to be made and had unlocked the cage door, and the lion +pushed its way out, sir,” said Jones. + +The manager was silent for a moment. Then he said: + +“No one can know how sorry I am that the man lost his life, but I am +thankful that the lion did no other damage, either by starting a great +panic or by attacking some one of the audience. As for you boys, I +propose to make you a substantial reward.” + +“I assure you, sir,” began Garry, “we have no thought of any reward for +doing what we did. It was luck on our part that enabled us to lasso him, +and we get our satisfaction in knowing that we perhaps saved a great +many lives.” + +“I hope you will accept something as a recompense for your services. Had +the lion done great damage, I would have had to pay out many thousands +of dollars,” insisted the owner. + +“Let us ask you one question first. Was the workman that was killed a +family man?” asked Garry. + +“I can tell you that in a minute.” Turning to the ticket seller, he told +him to look the man up. A record of all the workers with their home +addresses was kept in a card index and in a moment the ticket seller had +ascertained that the dead man had a wife living in a small town in New +York State. + +“Of course we will take care of the widow, as we have every worker +insured, and then the management always adds to the insurance,” said the +head of the circus. + +“Then I wish that you would just take whatever you had thought of +offering us in the way of a reward and add to the amount. I think my +chums agree with me that this is the best thing that could be done. Is +that right?” and Garry turned to his friends. Both Dick and Phil were +emphatic in their agreement. + +“Well, if that is the way you boys feel about it, I will do so, but I +will find some way to show you that I appreciate the great service that +you have done me.” + +The owner asked them several other questions and took their names and +addresses, and again he offered to take the boys along with them on the +tour. Of course they refused, explaining that they were of the Ranger +Service of the State and were only on detached duty at the time. + +They remained for supper at the cook tent, and watched the circus torn +down and loaded in the teams preparatory to travelling to the next stop. + +After a hearty goodbye from the manager and owner they took their leave, +and hiking beyond the town spread their blankets for the night. + +They woke with the rising of the sun, and building a fire soon had +coffee, spider bread and bacon going, and made a hearty breakfast. + +“According to my reckoning we are about ten miles from the camp, and the +woods will begin in about a mile or two, so we had better get going. It +is now six o’clock and with three hours of easy hiking we will make our +destination,” said Garry. “Now I think we ought to hold a council of war +as to how we shall conduct ourselves when we get to the camp. I think it +best that we just go to the manager and tell him we are going to camp +there for awhile, either right at the lumber camp, or a short distance +in the woods. Of course we shall give no inkling of the nature of our +visit, not even to the manager, at least until we have sized him up. To +my mind, everyone will be under suspicion until he has proven that the +suspicion is unfounded. We can go all over the camp and keep our eyes +open, getting all the information we can. When we ask questions we +should ask them simply as though it were from idle curiosity. I figure +that in a short time we ought to be able to tell who is acting +suspiciously and then bend all our efforts to watch them and frustrate +any mischief that they may be up to. We shall, of course, get a lot of +help from Howells when he arrives, but even then I think we ought to do +everything possible ourselves to find out what is the trouble at the +camp.” + +They walked steadily but easily, and true to their reckoning arrived at +the camp a little after nine o’clock. The boys looked about them +curiously. There were only three buildings, built of logs. One, the +smallest, was evidently the officers’ bunkhouse and offices; the other +was apparently the cookhouse, for the boys could see a youth sitting on +an upturned tub in front of the door peeling potatoes, and a thin wisp +of smoke issued from the chimney. Since it was mid-summer and hot, there +would be no need for a stove in any place but the kitchen. The third +house was a long, low log affair, bigger by far than either of the +others. This they decided was the bunk house, where the lumberjacks +lived. + +They made their way to the office and inquired for the manager. On +hearing the word “manager,” a thin, sharpfaced man approached them, and +giving them a hasty glance, said in a sharp tone: + +“If you’re here to ask for permission to camp on this tract you’re out +of luck. This is a lumber operation and not a free camp site for every +fool from the city.” + +“Just a minute, please. Hadn’t you better find out our business before +you make up your mind as to what you will or won’t do?” asked Garry, as +an angry red flush overspread his face. Garry was an extremely civil +boy, and expected others to be the same, and when he received +uncourteous attention was apt to resent it deeply. + +“Well, what do you want?” asked the manager, still in an ungracious +tone. + +“My name is Boone, and the owner of these cuttings happens to be my +father. Didn’t you get a letter from him telling of our expected +arrival?” + +A great change came over the manner of the manager. A smirking smile +took the place of the frown and he advanced with outstretched hand. + +“I hope you will pardon me. I have been bothered to death for the past +few days by summer campers asking to pitch tents and build cabins and +what not on the cutting, and I thought from your appearance that you +boys were more of the same tribe,” he said with an attempt to smooth out +the awkward situation and make up by a show of cordiality the blunder he +realized he had made. + +Privately, Garry thought him very ill-mannered and felt he should have +made more inquiries before showing his temper. Still he said nothing and +accepted the hand of the manager, who said his name was Barrows. + +Garry then introduced his chums and explained that they intended to stay +awhile and camp somewhere in the vicinity and watch the lumbering as +well as getting some fishing. + +“I understand that there are two lakes in the neighborhood,” remarked +Garry, “and so we ought to get some good fishing.” At the mention of the +word lakes, Barrows looked sharply at the boys, then said: + +“Oh, yes, you will get plenty of fishing, but you will find that the +small lake to the west of here is better than the big one that lies to +the north of us. The state stocked the little lake sometime ago by +special request of your father, and I hear there are some very good bass +and pickerel to be found there. The reports about the larger lake are +not so encouraging. Also there are two or three small streams,—brooks +perhaps it would be better to call them,—where you will find some +excellent trout. Then at the small lake there is a good stretch of sandy +beach where you can swim whenever you want to. Altogether you will find +the small lake is the most likely place for a summer playground.” + +For a moment Garry wondered at the insistence of the manager in always +bringing the “small” lake into the conversation, but dismissed the +matter with the thought that the manager was simply trying to make +amends for his ungraciousness of the previous moment by showing them +where they could best enjoy themselves. Later he was to find that he was +mistaken. + +The manager asked them what they intended to do for living quarters. “I +am sorry that I can’t offer you quarters in the bunkhouse here, but they +are just built to accommodate the officers of the camp; that is myself, +the sealer, the timekeeper and the bookkeeper. Of course you would not +want to live in the bunkhouse with the men, for they are a rough lot. +All I can suggest is that we makeshift for you some way and I will send +to town and dig up a tent for you.” + +“If you will just loan us an axe apiece, and tell us which spot we can +cut a little timber from, we can throw ourselves up a cabin in a short +time, so don’t bother about a tent. If necessary we can sleep in the +open till we get our shack fixed up,” answered Garry. + +“Why, I can do better than that. I can let you have a couple or three +men to help you and do the work if you can direct them as to the kind of +cabin you want.” + +“I don’t want to take any of the men away from their work,” Garry told +him, “but if we could have two or three for a few minutes to help us +throw up the cabin after we cut the stuff it would help greatly.” + +“I will go and mark out some of the trees that you can cut. There is a +small growth here that isn’t exceptionally good lumber, it's rather +scrubby, but will do very well for a cabin. I’ll have to go myself, for +I left the cruiser go a few days to do some business he had waiting him, +and I have been scaling myself. In fact I do that often. Whenever he is +cruising to mark trees for cutting I do the measuring and that saves a +lot of time, also it saves the pay of an extra man. You ought to have a +good bit done by noontime and then after dinner I will detail a couple +of men to help you,” and the manager led the way to the cookhouse, where +there were several extra axes. + +When they arrived at the cookhouse, they looked about with quite a bit +of curiosity. Two great ranges stood at one end of the kitchen, and on +one of the ranges were two enormous kettles. The boys could smell +appetizing pea soup and judged that one of the kettles contained this. + +The cook was an enormous man with a pair of fierce black moustaches, and +the one man on the whole range who was regarded as being just a little +bit better than the boss or even the owner of the timber tract. +Lumberjacks always took care never to pick a quarrel with him, and this +went the same for the manager and the camp officers. + +This is the same in every logging camp, for a cook can pay up any +grievances by cooking the food in an inferior fashion. Camp owners and +managers always pay the greatest attention to the sort of man they pick +for this position, for while in a lumber camp, there is never a widely +varied menu, it must be well cooked and plentiful. + +Nothing will drive the men away from a camp quicker than poor cooking. + +The manager introduced the boys to the cook, who shook hands with them, +offering a hairy hand which the chums privately thought resembled a ham. +For all his fierce looks he proved to be a genial chap, and the three +boys wondered whether he was one of the ring of trouble makers or not. +They reserved any decision in their own minds to await future +developments, but they had decided that everyone was under suspicion +until he proved that he was clear of any blame in the mysterious +occurrences that retarded progress at the lumber camp. + +In every camp there is a cookee, as the helper to the cook is +universally called. His duty is to peel potatoes, wash dishes, wait on +the table—rather set the tables than wait, for everything is piled on +at the beginning of the meal, and the only helping that is done is when +a dish has to be re-filled. + +The cookee was a surly looking chap of about twenty-one years of age. He +was slight of build and had violent red hair. He just mumbled a word or +two when he was introduced, and went on with his work, which was slicing +bread for the dinner hour that was near at hand. Garry and his friends +mentally put him down as one that might bear watching as soon as they +had located themselves. + +While the manager was asking the cook about borrowing a couple of the +axes that were stacked in the corner, a black-browed chap came to the +door and asked for a pail of water to take out to where several of the +men were trimming trees. The cookee brought the water and stepped +outside with the man. Garry and Phil were talking with the manager and +the cook, but Phil happened to be standing near the door. + +He heard the sound of talking in the French language and strained his +ears to catch what was being said. Phil was not eavesdropping because of +a natural desire to do so; it was merely that he was on the watch every +moment for a possible clue that would lead them to the solution that +they were in quest of,—the riddle of the mishaps at the lumber camp. + +What Phil heard was this: + +“Baptiste will be at the usual place at midnight tonight.” + +Phil determined then and there that he would be at the rendezvous, +wherever it was, and hear what transpired. He could hardly wait to get +the others with him so that he could impart to them the information that +he had just overheard. + +He hoped that something else would be said, but at this moment the cook +called for his helper, who came hustling back into the shanty, and went +about preparing for the serving of the dinner. + +Phil went back to join his chums just in time to hear the manager say: + +“Unless you boys want the fun of throwing up a log house, I would +suggest a much easier and quicker way. You can cut enough poles for the +supports of the house, and then I’ll have some sawed boards brought to +the spot. Also there is some tarred paper here that was brought here +when the camp started just for such an emergency. That would mean that +you could be all located before nightfall. As for heat, I have a Sibley +stove, one of those small ones such as they use in army camps for tents, +that will do very well. It isn’t likely that you will want it often, for +we are in the hottest part of the summer, and only on a cold, wet night +will you require heat. You won’t be here such a long time, I presume, +and we are in for a spell of good weather according to the cook here, +who is the camp weather prophet.” + +Garry thought for a moment, and wondered what made the manager presume +they would be there only a short time. He was anxious to get going about +the camp as soon as possible and see what there was to pick up in the +way of information, so he decided that the board house would do as well +as one built entirely of logs. + +“That is a fine suggestion and we will accept. Building a hut is nothing +new to us, and we are anxious to begin fishing and wandering about, so +if you will show us where we can cut enough good heavy saplings for +supports, we will start right at it. We can have them cut and in place +before dinner and then the men can bring us the boards after dinner and +we will be all shipshape by nightfall,” said Garry. + +“I think that is the best thing to do,” the manager answered. “It is +about an hour to dinner time, and you will have ample time to do all +that can be done this forenoon.” + +So saying, Barrows led the way to a spot near the camp, where there was +a clump of saplings that were not big enough to be used for sawed +lumber. + +“You might as well pitch your shanty here as anywhere, and it will save +you from dragging your saplings to any great distance. I’ll gash each of +the saplings that you will need. You will only want ten as I figure it.” + +“No, we will want twelve so that we may have a window,” interposed +Garry. + +“That’s a fact,” answered the manager, looking sharply at Garry. “I see +that you know rather a bit about shanty building. Do you know much about +logging operations? I suppose you do, however, since you are of a family +that has always made logging a business.” + +Garry felt that the manager was asking this question for a purpose, but +he promptly answered: + +“No, we know very little about logging, surprising as that may seem, +since as you say it ought to run in the blood. About the only thing we +understand about timbering operations is the log drive in the spring. We +were up once to watch the fight for the river, and had a mighty exciting +time, but the entire business is something new to all of us.” + +Garry finished speaking and then looked sharply but guardedly at +Barrows. He thought he noticed a relieved expression on the face of the +manager. + +The three boys set about felling the saplings, swinging their axes with +a sure arm and hand. Barrows lingered to watch them at work, although +Phil was on tenterhooks to have him get away in order that he might +impart to his chums the information that he had gained from the sentence +he had overheard at the cook shanty. + +The poles being cut, four of them were erected in an upright manner to +form the main support of the house. At the tops of these, four more were +placed horizontally to support the roof. Then in the center of the +front, two were erected to form the sides of the door, while at a side +two others, in vertical position, allowed the making of a window. + +Still the manager made no show of leaving until fortunately for Phil, +who would have almost exploded had he been forced to keep silent any +longer, he was called by the red headed cookee. + +“Now quick fellows, while I have a chance to tell you. I have found one +of the traitors in the camp; it is the cookee. He is going to meet some +one tonight to hatch something out, and you chaps have one guess as to +who it is.” + +“Barrows?” hazarded Dick. + +“Wrong. Baptiste LeBlanc!” + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE LUMBER CAMP + + +“The LeBlancs again!” exploded Garry. “I thought that we had seen the +last of that outfit. It seems that we are destined to run afoul of them. +Fortunately this Baptiste does not know about us, unless he has run +across his brother lately. That does not seem likely, for Jean is safely +beyond the border still. There are few places where he is safe, for he +is wanted in several different parts of the state. Still we must not +take anything for granted. We probably were seen by Baptiste when we +were instrumental in saving Howells from a bad beating or worse the +other night.” + +“How are we going to find out where the rendezvous is tonight?” asked +Dick. + +“It seems to me that the best thing to do is to keep watch of the red +headed cookee; that is, you two chaps do that, while I will watch for +the man that told him of the appointment. You boys haven’t seen him, so +you cannot keep on his trail. You can take turns keeping in the vicinity +of the cookee. If possible you might try and make acquaintance with him, +although I doubt if you will go very far, since he seems to be a surly +sort of a chap. Still, there’s no harm in trying. When it comes time for +the meeting, I should say that it would be best only for me to follow +them. I can understand what they are saying, and one of us could follow +unobserved, where three would be spotted in a minute. You chaps can +plead to being tired after your hike and the work of building the shack, +and that will give us a chance to get to the new shanty early, and so be +unobserved.” + +At that moment they heard the sound of a tin pan being vigorously beaten +with a stick, and immediately Dick set up a shout: + +“There’s the dinner signal, or my ears and stomach fail me.” + +“For once I am ready to eat a good big meal. You are not the only one +with an appetite today, Dick,” said Garry, and the three raced for the +cookhouse. + +As they neared the cook tent, they saw the lumberjacks piling towards +the place to eat. They were a sizable group of men, brawny of arm and +large of frame. + +Most of them gave the boys a curious glance as they flocked into the +shanty. The boys thought that they were to eat in the common dining +room, but found that they were to eat in a separate room that had been +partitioned off from the large room. Here ate the manager, the +timekeeper and cashier, and when he was present, the timber scaler. + +The food that was served them was the same as that given the men. +Barrows explained this by saying that it kept the men in a better humor +if they knew that the bosses were getting the same fare as they. + +“Lumberjacks are just like so many children,” Barrows said. “They are +always on the lookout for something to quarrel about, and are almost as +temperamental as grand opera stars. Just now work is scarce, so they +keep better behaved; but in the winter time, when all the camps are +going full blast, you have to be careful and treat them properly, else +they will simply depart for some city where there is a woods agency and +be sent off to another camp. That is one of the evils of lumbering, the +agencies. They often try to breed trouble in the camps so that the men +will quit. Then they pack them off to another logging tract and collect +a commission from the camp owner for furnishing him with men. If this +was winter I would think that was what was the trouble here.” + +Garry looked up in surprise. He had no idea that Barrows would admit +that everything was not as it should be at the camp. + +He knew that the eyes of the manager were on him, nevertheless he felt +that an answer was expected of him, or rather a question. + +“Why, is there anything the trouble at this camp? From what I’ve seen I +should say that everyone was working busily and everything was lovely.” + +At this the manager brightened up considerably. It seemed to be that +this was the kind of a remark that he was looking for, and he made haste +to answer: + +“Oh, there is nothing radically wrong here, I only meant that +occasionally there seemed to be a sort of dissatisfied air on the part +of the men, but it may only be worry on my part.” + +Garry was certain that the entire conversation was brought about in a +manner to delve into the feelings of the boys, and see how they regarded +everything. Garry did not believe that their mission was penetrated, but +thought that the guilty conscience of the manager would make him see an +enemy in every person he did not know. + +The dinner was plain but good. It consisted of pea soup, potatoes, some +roasted beef, and coffee. The fare at a lumber camp is anything but +varied. The aforementioned articles, roast pork, stew and beans, with +either white bread baked at the camp, or great slabs of johnny cake with +molasses in lieu of syrup was the general thing. Coffee was served at +every meal. + +“For breakfast we have bacon and toast and coffee in our dining room, +because the men have all eaten and started for work by the time we are +ready for breakfast,” said Barrows. “Now we will go into the other room, +and I will give you boys a general introduction to the men. That will +save you any annoyance when you go about the camp.” + +He led the way into the larger room, and stepping on a bench announced: + +“Men, these three boys are going to camp here for awhile. This one,” +pointing to Garry, “is the son of the owner. The other two are his +friends. I wanted you to meet them so that you may do all you can to +make their visit here a good one.” + +Garry thought to himself, “Yes, you are also showing us to those in your +crew so they will watch their step while we are around.” A good many of +the men just sized the boys up, a few hollered good-natured remarks at +them, while several pressed forward and shook the hands of the boys, +remarking they had worked many years for Mr. Boone and were glad to meet +his son and his friends. + +The three chums took especial care to fix these men in their minds, for +the same thought came to them all,—that if trouble arose, it was likely +that these men would prove loyal friends in need. Barrows detailed some +of the men to bring back the necessary lumber for the shanty, and then +the men went back to their work for the afternoon. + +Soon they heard a chugging sound and presently a tractor hove into +sight, dragging a broad-wheeled cart on which was the lumber. The +manager came up, leading a couple of men with some heavy rolls of tarred +paper, and all was ready to build the shanty. + +Sandy, the big Airedale, was gravely watching the boys when the men with +the tar paper arrived, and one of them seeing the dog, remarked: + +“How would you chaps like to go coon hunting tonight, that is if your +pup will trail a coon?” + +This was just what the boys did not want to do that night, so Garry +hastily made the excuse that they were tired from their march and the +work of throwing up the shanty, but said they would be glad to go the +following night. + +This seemed all right to the men, who proceeded to make friends with +Sandy, that is as much as that sedate dog would let them, for an +Airedale makes few friends outside of his own family circle. + +The work of putting up the shanty was done in a short time since there +were so many workers, and the addition of two bunks made it complete. + +Barrows volunteered the information that there was a spare table in the +office, and a bench and a couple of chairs that could be taken from the +dining room. + +“Then all we have to do is to cut some balsam boughs for our bunks and +we will be as snug as bugs in a rug,” announced Phil. + +Phil and Dick were dispatched to get the boughs, while Garry talked of +inconsequential matters with Barrows until their return. + +The rest of the afternoon was spent in wandering about the cutting. It +was a revelation to the boys, the sight of the great timber falling in +the exact direction that it was wanted. The boys noted that the cut was +made just as Howells had told them, and they wondered whether or not any +spikes would be encountered. + +The felling of a tree is an interesting process. The swing begins on the +side where the cutters do not want the tree to fall. Then when the saw +is better than two-thirds of the way through the trees, the swampers or +axemen take their stand at either side of the tree, and make a cut a +trifle under the line where the saw is coming through. This is done to +cause the tree to fall on that side. The axemen work like clockwork, +using a double bitted axe,—that is one that has two blades,—and make +the chips positively fly, one drawing his axe away just in time to let +the other man make a blow. Just as the moment comes for the tree to +fall, the cry of “tim-ber-r-r-r” is raised by one of the axemen and this +is the signal for all to be out of the way as the great tree falls with +a crash that shakes the ground for many feet around. + +Following the falling of the timber, the trimmers begin their work. +Starting at the base end of the tree, one on each side, they walk up the +sides of the fallen monarch of the forest, and trim the branches off as +far as they are able. Many of the branches on the under side of the tree +are broken in the fall, others are only splintered and many of them are +just bent. A dozen men then seize their peavy sticks, as they are called +in Maine, or cant dogs in some other places where lumbering is done, and +roll the tree over. A peavy stick is a heavy pole about six feet long, +with a sharp iron point at the end. About a foot from this point is +attached a loose curved iron arm very much like one side of an ice-man’s +tongs. This swings back and forth from the handle. The men prod the iron +point into the trunk of the tree, and then catch the swinging end of the +hook into the trunk. This gives them almost a handle to the tree, and +the long pole furnishes them the necessary leverage. At a word from the +man on the end, all give a mighty heave, and the tree is rolled over, +when the remaining branches are lopped off. + +The lumberjacks are experts in the use of the peavy stick, and it is a +pretty sight to see them load a great trunk onto a flat car to be drawn +away. The method is almost the same as that used in turning over a +trunk,—only just half of the men fix their sticks. They give it half a +turn and then hold it in position on the skids, while the other half get +a grip and start turning. In this way, turn and turn about, they roll +the log right up the skids and onto the car. + +In this instance the trunks were not hauled to the mill on a car; a +chain was attached instead, and then one of the baby tractors was used +to drag it over the ground to the mill. There were a half a dozen of +these tractors at the camp. Three were constantly employed in dragging +the cut timber to the mill, while the other three were used to draw the +flat cars to the railroad tracks, a half a dozen miles from the camp. + +After watching the felling of several trees, the boys essayed trimming, +and while they were by no means unskillful at it, caused many a laugh +among the men because of the time they took. Whereas they often took two +or three strokes to take off a branch, the skilled woodsmen with one +swift, clean cut, lopped off a good thick branch. + +The boys took their chaffing good naturedly and thereby won a lot of +regard from the jacks, many of whom were ready to sneer at “city chaps.” + +From the timbering they went to the sawmill. Here they found a busy whir +of activity. Logs were rolled onto the carriage and sent down the plane, +while the great circular saw bit its way through the length of the tree +like a hot knife through a pat of butter. + +The carriage then runs back to where it started, while a mechanical +device shoves the log sideways as many inches as is desired and the +carriage starts on its journey again. This is done until the log has +been “sliced into planks.” These are then piled on one side, waiting for +the flat cars to be loaded and hauled away by the tractor. + +This operation that has been described entails more labor than the +winter logging, for then the trees are simply cut and rolled to one side +of the river. This continues throughout the winter until the cutting has +been complete and then they wait for the ice to go out. As soon as the +ice breaks up, the logs are tumbled into the river and floated down the +stream. For days they float down the river to the mills below, which are +always located on the river banks, and here they are ground up and made +into pulp from which paper is later manufactured. + +The logs are distinguished one from another when they reach their +journey’s end by branding, much as the horses that roam the feeding +places in the West are known by their brand. Every lumberman has his +mark, and a gash is made at one end of the log, and on this is made the +mark. + +For example, Garry’s father had his mark AB, which stood for his +initials. In this instance it was not necessary to brand the lumber, for +it all came from the same cutting and was transported directly to the +same destination. + +After supper that night, the men gathered outside their bunkhouses, +playing cards or simply leaning back against the wall and smoking. One +of the French Canadian lumberjacks produced a mouth organ, and another a +battered guitar, and those who spoke the French joined in an old +“chanson” or song. + +Soon one of the Americans, seizing on a lull in the conversation and +singing, struck up an old-time lumberjack song, and in a moment the +whole camp had joined in. The lumberjack songs are mostly about camp +events, the fight for the river at the spring flood, some great battle +that took place between two rival lumber camps, for your true lumberjack +is as ready to fight as to eat. + +Where these songs come from, no one knows. They are as old as the +lumbering industry in Maine, and generally are written with a chorus at +the end. One man sings the verse and then the camp joins in the chorus +in a thundering tone. There is generally more noise than melody, at +least in the choruses, for a man that has a fair voice always sings the +verse part. Some of these songs are of a seemingly endless duration, but +the lumberjacks never tire of singing them. + +As the men sang the moon came up, and made a scene that was long to be +remembered by the boys. In spite of their enjoying the evening, they +kept a sharp eye on the movements of the red haired cookee, although he +made no move to disappear. The boys figured that he probably would not +until the camp was asleep. Soon the men began to yawn, and turn into the +bunkhouse, while the boys bade goodnight to the manager and repaired to +their own shack. They turned in, and as soon as all seemed quiet, Phil +started out, and walking in the shadows, made for the spot he had picked +that afternoon as being a safe place to watch the exit from the +bunkhouse. + +Garry and Dick dropped off to sleep, and were only awakened some time +later by hearing Phil climb into his bunk. In a moment they were wide +awake. + +“What news,” whispered Garry. + +“Go on to sleep,” advised Phil in a disappointed tone. “The LeBlanc +never showed up, and I’ve lost three hours’ sleep for nothing. +Goodnight!” + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +A NOCTURNAL VISITOR + + +It was in that dark hour that precedes the dawn, which for some reason +or other is always the blackest of the night. The three boys were +sleeping soundly. Suddenly Phil awoke and sniffed the air. For a moment +or two he was dazed, then he gave a shout. + +His cry of alarm woke the others, and they were about to leap from their +beds when Phil’s warning shout prevented them. + +“What’s the trouble, Phil?” asked Garry. “Are there snakes in the shack +or are you just having a nightmare? Whew!” Garry had no need to ask any +further questions. + +The nocturnal visitor was nothing more nor less than a polecat, that +little animal of the woods about the size of a cat, but commonly called +a skunk. + +Phil retained his presence of mind, and reached to the bottom of his +bunk and hauled out one of his heavy shoepacks. With a well directed aim +he heaved it at the unwelcome little intruder, which at that moment was +near the door. The force of the blow carried the animal out into the +night, and then the boys hopped out of their bunks and seized their +clothes. Keeping a wary eye, they dashed through the door and out of the +way. The animal by this time was scampering away. + +Going back to the shack was almost out of the question, for he had left +his unmistakable scent behind him. + +“There goes my night’s sleep all shot to pieces,” exclaimed Phil in an +aggravated tone. “First I go on a wild goose chase to hear a plot and +hear nothing, then this comes up, and blooie, there is goodbye to rest. +Bet you I take a nap this morning. Wonder if that smell will evaporate +or will we have to build a new shack. Also there is going to be a door +on the next one. I don’t want any more night visitors like that chap.” + +“Hush a minute,” whispered Garry. To the ears of the boys, trained by +their work in the woods to catch the slightest sound, came the soft +noise as of someone walking towards the bunkhouse. In a moment Garry was +flat on the ground, wiggling along as does an Indian on the war path in +a manner that the boys had often practiced when they were Scouts. + +He was back in about five minutes. The others were all curious to know +what had made him act in such a mysterious manner. + +“Someone was prowling about, and just a moment ago went into the +bunkhouse. I could hear him when he dropped his shoes as he got ready to +crawl into the bunk. Here’s what I think. That wood pussy may have +wandered into the shack all by his lonesome, but for my part I think it +is the first event in a campaign to make things so unpleasant for us +that we will cut short our visit and go away,” whispered Garry. + +“They couldn’t have picked on anything much better to make it +unpleasant,” answered Dick. “What will we do now?” + +By this time the first faint streaks of dawn appeared, and in a little +while the camp would be astir. + +“It is almost morning, and now that we are wide awake and up, we might +as well stay so,” answered Garry. “First thing we do this morning is to +get a few more boards and fashion a door for this shack. Also I saw some +heavy screening yesterday,—you notice that all the windows are +screened,—and we will tack a double thickness of that over the window. +That will afford us some slight protection against the invasion of more +friends such as the one that paid us an unwelcome call.” + +In a little while the camp was starting to come to life. First appeared +the cookee who favored the boys with a knowing grin, then came the cook, +who immediately started the work of getting breakfast. Finally, +struggling into their clothes as they came yawning through the doors, +appeared the lumberjacks. + +Garry cautioned his chums to say nothing for the moment about their +experience of the night. They passed several moments in chatting with +those of the lumberjacks with whom they thought they might make friends +that would perhaps stand them in good stead later on. Garry was telling +a funny story and at its conclusion the men burst into a roar of +laughter. + +The red headed cookee happened to be passing just as the men began to +laugh, and he looked sharply at the boys. While he was serving them +breakfast in the smaller room,—they happened to be alone as Barrows had +not yet arisen,—he remarked: + +“Understand you chaps didn’t sleep very well last night.” + +“No, we didn’t,” answered Garry, looking up quickly. + +“Well, better luck next time,” and still grinning the cookee shambled +out of the room. + +“Well!” exploded Garry. “If that chap didn’t go and give himself clean +away first shot out of the gun!” + +“Looks as though your hunch about its being a part of the campaign of +ruthlessness was a fact,” said Dick with a laugh. + +“Only question in my mind,” said Phil, “is did he think of it himself as +a sort of a practical joke, or was he put up to it by Barrows?” + +“Looks pretty certain to me that Barrows was the instigator of the +matter,” answered Garry. + +When Barrows appeared, the boys explained the matter to him, and asked +him for the necessary lumber with which to construct a door, also some +screening for the window. Barrows told them they could go to the saw +mill and select whatever they wanted in the way of boards. + +As they were getting the boards, an old grizzled lumberman chatted with +them. He asked why they wanted a door in that kind of weather, and Garry +told him the story. + +“They do leave a reg’lar trail behind them, don’t they?” laughed the old +man. “I’ll tell you what you can do, though, and it will fix things up +pretty well. I always keep some sulphur on hand when I’m in the woods. +Occasionally you get a rash from the browntail moths in the woods, and +the best thing for a cure is a poultice made with a little sulphur. When +you put your door on, take a few extra boards and board up your window. +Then take the sulphur that I give you and put it in a pan and set it on +fire with a hot coal from the kitchen range. Then you hop out and let +the shack get thoroughly filled with the fumes o’ the sulphur, and +you’ll find after a couple or three hours that you’ll have your place +fumigated as pretty as if you had ten boards of health do the job for +you.” + +The boys thanked the old timer, and left with their lumber. A few +minutes later he appeared on the scene with his sulphur, and the work of +boarding the window and making a door being completed, they did as he +had directed and went on a tour of the camp. + +As they were wandering about, with Sandy at their heels, they were again +approached by the man who had wanted to go on a coon hunt. This time +they accepted his invitation, and arranged to go that night. + +The day passed quickly, for there were many things about the camp to +attract their attention, and they asked numerous questions of such of +the lumberjacks as seemed inclined to spend a moment or two to answer +them. + +As soon as it got dark, the coon hunter appeared and asked if they were +ready to go. He was accompanied by one or two of his friends, and Garry +noticed that one of them carried a burlap bag. + +The boys secured their rifles, and were about to join the party, when +one of the men, noticing the guns, said: + +“You don’t need your rifles, although you can carry ’em if you want. We +were aiming to catch the coon alive and see if we couldn’t tame him for +a sort of pet around the camp. That’s what we brought the bag for.” + +“Good,” answered Garry. “We aren’t much on shooting animals just for the +sake of shooting.” + +The trio of men led the way to where the man called Tom had said he had +seen a raccoon a few days before. Sandy was eagerly sniffing at the +ground, and soon he gave vent to a low growl. + +“By gosh, I believe he’s got the scent already,” chuckled one of the +men. “It may be some other kind of an animal, but I doubt it. All I’ve +seen around here is the raccoon, although there were a few rabbits at +different times. Still the raccoon is the most likely to be out prowling +at this time of night.” + +Soon Sandy was off, with his nose close to the ground. After a few +moments he had left them entirely, and they followed only by means of +his occasional barks. After almost half a mile of chasing, they heard a +series of wild barks, and knew that Sandy had driven something to bay. + +In a few moments they had caught up to the dog, and there sure enough he +had something treed and was venting his pleasure by loud and vociferous +barks. + +They peered up into the tree and could see nothing. In the meantime one +of the men had discovered a hole at the foot of the tree. + +“Now one of you fellows get some branches, dry ones of course, and we’ll +soon have Mr. Coon all trapped as nice as you please.” + +One of the men, assisted by Dick, soon gathered an armful of dry sticks. +Getting a boost from his friend, Tom soon shinnied up the tree, and +stopped after he had gotten about fifteen feet up well into the +branches, for it was a small tree. + +“Here’s the upper end of the hollow,” he called down. “Now you fellows +start your fire at the hole down there, while I spread the bag over this +hole.” + +The smudge was soon started, and fanning it with their coats, they drove +the smoke into the hollow tree trunk. They were always careful not to +let the flames of the fire get to the tree, or they might have started a +forest fire that would have been disastrous. As a matter of fact, +several bad forest fires have started from an unskillful attempt to +smoke some animal out of a tree. + +Soon there was a shout from the man up the tree. “I’ve got him!” + +The smoke had proved too much for Brer Raccoon, and he had sought to +escape by the hole at the top, only to walk into the bag. In a moment +more Tom had descended the tree with a squirming, snarling animal safely +tied up in the bag. + +On their return to the camp they were greeted by several of the jacks +who had not yet gone to bed. The catch was exhibited, and one of the men +produced an old dog collar from the bunkhouse. The collar was snapped on +the coon’s neck, a stout rope was attached to the ring in the corner to +be later tied securely to a nail at the corner of the bunkhouse. + +“There,” remarked Tom, surveying the result of the night’s catch. “If +you fellows will lay off and not tease him, and shinny out a little food +for him once in a while, he’ll get tame as a kitten, and they are a lot +of fun when they get tame. Almost as good as a monkey.” + +“We’ll have to keep Sandy tied up for a while when he is not with us, or +he’ll make short work of that coon,” remarked Garry. + +“Oh, I’ll have ’em as friendly as two brothers in a few days,” was Tom’s +verdict. + +The boys later found that the man Tom had a reputation for being quite a +hand with animals of every description, but future events will show why +Sandy and the coon never got well acquainted. Things were on the verge +of beginning to hum for all hands. + +When the boys woke in the morning, they made two startling discoveries. +The first one was that repeated calls failed to bring Sandy to them, and +the boys had never remembered the morning when Sandy went so far abroad +that a few whistles did not bring him back on the run to join his +companions. + +The second surprise was found when Garry noticed a familiar looking roll +of birch bark at the entrance to the cabin, weighted down by a stone! + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +WORD FROM THE HERMIT + + +“Look here, you chaps,” called Garry, as he gazed at the little roll of +bark, which he had not yet picked up. The boys crowded around and looked +at him in amazement. + +“Without making any rash bets,” announced Garry, “I’ll wager my best +rifle against a plugged nickel, that one of our friends has been in this +vicinity within the past few hours. Cast your eyes on that roll of bark, +and tell me if you dare that we won’t find a funny cryptic little +message in it!” + +“The Hermit!” burst out Dick and Phil almost in one breath. + +“That’s my guess. Now we’ll see if we are right,” and Garry stooped and +picked up the little roll from its resting place beneath the stone. +“It’s the Hermit, and it’s just the kind of a note I expected to find. +Listen to this. ‘Unseen watchers often give the best aid. When you need +me most, I’ll be with you.’ And it’s signed with his old mark, the lone +pine with the crossmarked boulder,” said Garry as he had finished +reading. + +“Well, if that doesn’t beat anything I ever heard of,” said Dick. “How +in the name of all that’s wonderful did he ever find us in this part of +the country?” + +“I think I can answer that,” interrupted Phil. “He must have run across +Nate Webster and asked about us. It is likely that Nate told him where +we were going, and since he knew that we were good friends, might have +given him an inkling of the business that we were here on. The thing +that puzzles me is why he should not have waited and seen us, or even +waked us up to say howdy.” + +“Well, you know what a queer old codger he was, and this latest stunt is +typical of him. Much as I would like to see him, I confess I would have +been a little bit disappointed if he had not done something out of the +ordinary,” replied Garry. + +“Wonder where he went after he left the note?” queried Dick. + +“Oh, he’s probably somewhere out in the woods, you know life in the open +woods is nothing to him, after all the years that he must have lived in +them. The main question now, since we can do nothing about our friend +the Hermit, as he will come in his own good time, is to see what has +happened to Sandy. I cannot understand his going away. He may have +chased up some animal, and if so he will be back. But it is unusual for +him ever to stir away from where we are sleeping until he knows that we +are up and about.” + +Throughout the morning they searched every nook and corner of the camp, +going almost to the edge of the cutting operations, asking all the +workers they met whether or not the dog had been seen. Their search was +of no avail. The day dragged on, still no Sandy, and each passing hour +made the chums more downcast. + +“I’m beginning to think that this is step number two to drive us out,” +gritted Garry between his teeth. “I tell you this, boys, if it is so, +and I’m inclined to believe it more and more, if any harm comes to Sandy +through the machinations of this crew that are trying to ruin Dad’s +business, there’s going to be one of the sweetest little wars started +that Barrows and his whole crew ever even dreamed of.” + +“I’m with you, Garry. That dog was more than human, and the best friend +that a bunch of chums like us could ever hope to have,” replied Dick as +he patted his friend on the shoulder. Phil said nothing, but the others +could see by the tightening of the corners of his mouth,—the danger +signal when Phil was really aroused over anything,—that he was with +them to the end. + +“There doesn’t seem to be anything that we can do. I’ve looked carefully +over the ground for any signs of a struggle, but I can find nothing. +There was some trickery of some kind to get Sandy away. It may have been +done only to steal him and possibly sell him, but it may be that there +was a foul purpose in getting the dog away from us. The time has come +for real action. Let’s get going early in the morning and keep our eyes +and ears sharply on the lookout. Phil, you watch the cookee closely and +see if there are any more midnight appointments to be made. Dick, you +look out for the sawmill, and see if there is any funny business being +done with the saw. You know enough about machinery to be able to detect +if it is working properly, and your common sense will tell you if there +seems to be a slackening up of production. It stands to reason that the +boss of the sawmill must be in on this scheme, for more delay can be +caused here than anywhere else. It is unlikely that there are many men +in on this plot. Too many would make it unsafe for the conspirators, +they couldn’t all keep their mouths shut. I’ll keep an eye on Barrows +and see what conferences he holds with the men. I hope that Howells gets +back here soon, I feel that we need immediate advice from someone who is +more experienced in the lumbering business than we are. Now let’s hop to +it.” + +The two boys did as their leader had directed. Phil ambled off to the +cookhouse with the intention of offering his services in peeling +potatoes to the cookee in order that he might have an excuse for keeping +near the fellow. Dick at once made for the sawmill. + +When he arrived there, the busy hum of activity seemed to be all about +him. But as he watched he became conscious of the fact that there seemed +to be several things that delayed the game. The man who drove one of the +tractors seemed to be having continual trouble with the engine, and +several minutes on each trip were consumed in needless repairs. Dick +could see with half an eye that there was little the trouble with the +engine except that which was created by the driver himself. The man kept +up a continual stream of grumbling at the way the engine was acting, +evidently to make the trouble appear to be real. + +Once Dick saw that there was a loose wire connection which the driver +purposely overlooked, and after he had watched the man waste ten minutes +in needless overhauling, he stepped up and offered his services. + +The man refused with a growl and an oath. Dick managed to restrain his +temper, although he wanted to tell the man how evident his stalling +around was. + +“Oh, all right, I don’t mean to interfere with your business, but your +wire to your battery is unconnected,” and Dick turned on his heel. + +Seeing that Dick really knew what he was talking about, the driver +attached the wire and in a moment or two was off for another load of +logs. + +“If he wastes that much time every trip,” thought Dick to himself, “he +might just as well try to bring in the logs on his back. In the course +of a week that would mean almost a day’s production gone to waste, and I +haven’t watched long enough to know how much time he takes on his trip.” + +Quite frequently the saw would be stopped for a moment while the boss +sawyer oiled up different parts of the machinery. He did not seem to +like Dick’s watching him, but he was evidently a little wiser than the +driver, and attempted an explanation. + +“This is the last saw we have in the camp,” he told Dick. “The ones that +we ordered haven’t shown up yet, and if anything goes wrong with this +one, we are hurt and hurt bad.” + +Dick pretended a great deal of ignorance about the saw, but he could see +that the sawyer regarded him with some suspicion. + +Dick kept in the sawmill, but stayed as much as possible in the +background. After nearly an hour of watching, a great log was rolled +onto the carriage, and glancing at his watch, the boss sawyer called an +assistant and gave him charge of the saw. Then he hastened from the mill +and started in the direction of the camp, evidently to hold a conference +with Barrows. Dick was turning to saunter out when he heard a terrific +tearing sound as of steel being ground between heavy rollers, then a cry +of pain from the sawyer. Dick turned and rushed to the scene. The saw +was still grinding into the obstruction that was causing the noise, and +several pieces of flying steel were in the air. The sawyer had his hands +clasped to his face, and the blood was streaming from between his +fingers. + +Dick saw that there was no one with presence of mind enough to throw the +lever that shut off the saw, and he ran and threw off the lever. Then he +returned to the injured man. The flying teeth of the saw had cut his +face in several places, but fortunately his eyes were uninjured. That he +had escaped being blinded was almost a miracle. + +The thought that flashed through Dick’s mind that here was an instance +of what Howells had told them, of the spiking a tree in the upper part +where it would hit the saw. Dick asked the old man who had told them how +to fumigate their shack the day before if he could roll back the saw +without starting up the engine and causing more teeth to be broken and +start flying about the place. + +In a few minutes the old timer had worked the saw back so that Dick +could examine it. It required only a moment to see that the saw was +irreparably ruined. Most of the teeth had been bent or broken off, and a +further examination showed that several parts of the saw carriage and +control had been broken or strained by the unwonted burden that had been +put on them. + +At this moment the boss sawyer and Barrows, the manager, had come +rushing up to the mill to inquire what was the trouble. Garry was with +them, and Dick gave him a significant look, unobserved by the others. + +“What’s all the trouble?” inquired Barrows needlessly, for he could see +with half an eye the damage that had been wrought. + +“Seems as if your saw was a total wreck,” answered Dick. “Must have +struck a ton of metal in the heart of that tree to do all that damage.” + +“Nonsense,” cried Barrows. “Whoever heard of metal in a tree?” + +“Could it have been a defective saw?” inquired Garry soberly, for the +purpose of hearing what reply Barrows would make. + +“Yes, that’s what it must have been, a defective saw,” repeated the +manager, parrot fashion. + +“Defective saw me eye,” broke in the old helper. “That tree has been +spiked and spiked good and plenty. That’s the second saw that went that +way this summer. Tother time it nearly killed the sawyer when the belt +flew off and almost got him tangled up in the machinery. There’s one +sure way to find out what caused it, and that’s to roll her off the +carriage and split off that place where the saw started to eat through. +If there isn’t a spike there, you can have my month’s wages.” + +“You seem to know all about it, and perhaps we shall find out why you +know so much about the matter,” and Barrows favored the old man with a +look that boded no good to him. + +In the face of the old timer’s statement, and because Dick and Garry +were looking at the manager as though they expected him to take speedy +action, there was nothing for Barrows to do but follow the suggestion +and order the log rolled off. This was done, and then several wedges +were driven in, and using the backs of single bitted axes, the section +of tree was soon split open. There plainly revealed to view were several +bent, cut and twisted spikes! + +“That’s what broke your saw,” exclaimed the old man. “Shame, too, a nice +saw like that ruined and the only one in the camp at that!” + +“That will do, Collins,” cut in Barrows sharply. “Your opinion wasn’t +asked. Besides, I am still wondering how your knowledge of the spiking +seemed to prove so accurate.” + +“I was raised in the woods, and I know all the little tricks. There’s +dirty work afoot here somewhere,” returned old Collins staunchly. + +“Yes, I guess you do know all the tricks, but I know a good one, too; +you go and get your pay from the timekeeper and start on your way,” +ground out the manager. + +“Isn’t that just a trifle hasty, Mr. Barrows?” cut in Garry. + +“Listen, my boy. With all due respect to the son of my employer, I must +say that I am manager of this camp, and what I say goes. You know I am +protecting your father’s business, and there has been so much funny +business going on lately that something must be done, and I am going to +begin by cutting out all the suspicious characters. In my judgment +Collins is such a character.” + +“Huh,” muttered Dick in an undertone. “A fine protector you are, and you +know that Collins is innocent. He knows too much, that’s all.” + +Old Collins marched out of the mill section and started toward the +office. A moment later Dick unobtrusively followed him. In a few seconds +he had caught up with the man and said goodbye to him. + +“Goodbye, my lad, and let me give you a warning. Tell your pal that his +father’s business is going to pot here. There’s something underfoot, I +don’t know what it is or why, but it’s there. Too many accidents. You +watch that Barrows and watch the timekeeper, and keep an eye on the two +drivers with the moustaches. Throw in the cookee for good measure, and +you’ll have a precious lot of rascals.” + +Dick tried to elicit further information, but found that the old fellow +either did not know anything specific, or was crotchety and would not +tell. + +There being nothing that could be done further, the manager and Dick +returned to the office, while Garry went to the bunkhouse to see if he +could render any aid to the man who had been cut by the flying particles +of the saw. + +At the office they found waiting their acquaintance of the attempted +holdup, Arthur Howells. He acted according to the agreement and waited +till they had been introduced. + +“This is our scaler and cruiser,” announced Barrows. + +Upon the boys professing ignorance of what the duties of a scaler were, +they received an invitation from Howells to come with him after dinner +and watch the operations. Barrows heartily advised the boys to go with +him and learn something of the way in which the trees were spotted and +the lumber measured. + +The chums knew well that the invitation was solely for the purpose of +getting them away from the camp so that they could confer on what was +going on. + +After dinner they sought out Howells, and after he had armed himself +with a scaling stick, marked off in measurements, which was used to +measure the trees, they wandered into the woods. + +“Now, boys, what news?” he asked. + +In a few words they told him of the events that had transpired since +their arrival. + +Howells was especially interested in the matter of the spiked tree, and +was indignant at the fact that Collins had been discharged. + +“Why, the old man was as honest as the day is long. He used to know your +father a good many years ago, Garry, and he would never do anything that +would harm him or his business,” Howells said vehemently. + +“Next thing on the docket,” said Garry, “is to ask what news you have.” + +“I have something that will knock the feet almost out from under you. In +addition to the trouble caused by the breakage and wasting, there is +something even deeper yet. I always get the reports from the receiving +stations of the amount of lumber that is sent out. I know after +measuring, just how much has gone out. Today my reports show that all +the timber that is cut here does not arrive at its destination. + +“What do you mean?” said Garry. + +“Just what I mean is this. Somewhere, somehow, your father’s lumber is +being stolen en route to its destination!” + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +THE BOYS LOSE AN ALLY + + +The words of Howells stunned the boys for a moment. Then Garry delivered +himself of a few vehement words regarding the thieves. + +“We have been here only a couple of days or so, and yet we find that +this logging camp is a hive of rascals and thieves. And still we have +done nothing. We must get to work and nip this thing in the bud, else +the whole summer’s work at the camp here will have gone for naught, to +say nothing of the irreparable financial loss that will be caused to +Dad, not only from the penalties for failure to live up to his +contracts, but the money loss from the stolen timber will mount up well +into the hundreds I am afraid. Now we must put a stop to this thing. I +believe that I will go out tomorrow and go to town and ’phone Father +that he had better make a cleanup here at the camp. Perhaps we don’t +know just who the guilty parties are, but if we get rid of the whole +shooting match we can stop it. How much timber would you estimate has +been stolen?” he concluded, turning to Howells. + +“I can’t say as to that. This last report is the only one that I have +received direct. Generally I have been given what was supposed to be a +duplicate copy of the one sent to Barrows. This time I happened to get +the mail myself at the postoffice. Generally one of Barrow’s men gets +the mail, and it is distributed. This letter was addressed to me +personally, and I have no doubt that the others were also, but were +opened and doctored up to appear all right. That’s a prime bit of +evidence if we can secure the proof. Tampering with Uncle Sam’s mail is +a serious crime, and draws a long prison term. Now as for your going out +of the woods tomorrow and ’phoning your father, Garry, I would advise +against it. Nothing very serious can happen in the next few days. Little +work can be done until a new saw comes, and there will be little +shipping of timber except that which has been waiting to be transported. +In the meantime, if, as your father is led to believe, this whole matter +is a move on the part of the big interests to crush him in the lumber +business, the firing of the present manager and crew will have little +effect. Your dad evidently trusted Barrows, else he would not have sent +him here. If he is guilty, you may be sure that the enemy, for such we +must call them, made it mighty well worth his while to turn traitor. +What is to prevent the next manager from being affected in the same way? +And even if a trustworthy manager were secured, the big interests can +always bribe enough of the laborers to do all the necessary damage that +would be required to spoil the season. My advice is to lay low for a few +days and get evidence that will get the ‘man higher up,’ the one who is +the instigator of this whole thing. Once you can spike his guns, there +will be no further danger of trouble here, and also it will enable your +father to take court action that will restore him damages for the stolen +timber, and will also give him a chance to sue those who have harmed him +so that he can make the penalties that will be inflicted in case enough +damage has already been done to make him forfeit his contracts. I should +say now that he was a good three weeks behind his shipments, and that is +a whole lot in one season. He has guaranteed to deliver a certain amount +of timber at its destination by the last of September. It is the middle +of August now, and he must make every minute count from now on to get +out the required amount. Get the man responsible for this business and +you will have accomplished what you have set out to. What do you think +of my advice?” + +“Sounds logical, and I think we will follow it. In the meantime I have a +hunch now in regard to that stolen timber. I think I can hitch up a few +things Barrows has tried to dissuade us from doing, and a certain lake +in this vicinity. That’s our next work. Now what do you propose to do, +Mr. Howells?” asked Garry. + +“First thing I’m going to do is to go straight to Barrows and tell him +about the deficiency shown by the records. That will do one of two +things, I believe; either show him up for a crook, or else show that he +is straight and start him investigating the thefts. If the latter +happens, which I am frank to say I do not think will, then we have +accomplished a great deal of good.” + +Howells, however, had barely finished speaking, when the red haired +cookee appeared at the shack and told him that Barrows wanted to see him +at the camp office immediately. + +Having delivered the message, the cookee sauntered off, and Howells +looked at the boys with a puzzled stare. + +“Wonder what’s up now. Thought that we talked over everything there was +a little while ago. Well, there’s no use in wondering. I’m off to see +his Royal Highness and find out what he wants. I’ll see you after a +little while.” + +Howells hustled off to the office and left the boys to talk things over +among themselves. + +“What did you mean, Garry, when you said that you had a hunch about +lakes and things?” inquired Phil. + +“Why, you remember how insistent Barrows has been that we make a sort of +playground out of the little lake, setting forth its advantages about +swimming, fishing and all that, and has done everything that he can do +to discourage us from going near the big lake. I have let him believe +that we took everything he said for granted, so I thought that tonight, +if possible, we would make a trip to the big lake and see what’s what,” +Garry answered. + +“I’m wondering if Barrows is clever enough to play the old trick used by +conjurers and magicians?” mused Phil. + +“What do you mean, magician?” queried Garry with a puzzled look at his +friend. + +“Why, you know a magician always directs the attention of his audience +to the thing that he is generally going to do, figuring that the people +will be on the watch for a trick, and will be so busy trying to find the +hidden trick, that they look everywhere but where the magician tells ’em +to, and in the meantime he has done his trick.” + +“I see,” exclaimed Garry. “You mean that Barrows may figure that we will +guess he has been discouraging us about the big lake for the very +purpose of making us go there rather than to the smaller body of water, +where some sort of villainy may be going on.” + +“That’s it exactly,” returned Phil. + +“I think you have a good hunch there, Phil, although I rather think that +Barrows is not clever enough to dope out that trick. Still, there can be +no harm in watching both lakes. Suppose that we take a little trip today +to the small one, and then tomorrow night we will hustle over to the big +one after the camp has turned in for the night. Guess that will be our +best plan. Now let’s wait for Barrows and Howells to finish their +conversation, and we will trot over while I ask a few leading +questions.” + +They waited a few minutes, talking over their probable course of action, +and were about to set out for the office, when Howells appeared on the +scene. Rage and disappointment were depicted in his face, and the boys +were quick to take notice of this. + +“What’s the matter? You look as though you had bad news to bring us,” +said Garry. + +“Well, it’s bad news for me, at any rate, and I think also for you. I +believe I have proof enough that Barrows is a crook from the word go. I +have been discharged from my job as cruiser and scaler and ordered to +leave the place immediately.” + +“Why, I can hardly believe you, what’s it all about?” asked Phil. + +“Well, it’s a short story. I had hardly gotten inside the office, when +Barrows told me I was through. Naturally all other thoughts left my +head, that is about my errand, and I asked him why. He replied that when +he hired me he thought he was getting an accurate scaler, and that the +reports showed that the amount of timber I had reported was cut had not +been delivered. Immediately I knew that he was on to the fact that I was +aware of the shortage and was spiking my guns before I could do or say +anything. Now I know that I have accurately measured all the timber that +was cut in this tract. I was at school long enough to learn how to scale +if I never learned anything else. Of course we had words, and I forgot +myself and accused him of knowing that timber was disappearing, and he +was covering up by throwing the blame on me. Of course there was nothing +that I could do, so I told him a few wholesome truths and walked out of +the office.” + +“Then that definitely settles Barrows’ status here,” said Garry. “He +knows that timber is being stolen, and he wants to cover it up. I hope +you did not connect us in any way with you while you were telling +Barrows what you thought of him, did you Art?” + +“You bet I didn’t. I kept my head that much, at any rate.” + +“Well, we have lost a valuable ally since you must go away. I suppose, +though, we could hire you as a guide and keep you here. Barrows could +make no objection then,” said Garry. + +“No, that would be the worst thing that you could do. It would put +Barrows on his guard, for he would immediately leap to the conclusion +that I had told you everything. No, the wisest thing for me to do is to +hop out and go back to town. Then in a few days I could get back here +and see what I could dig up in the way of stolen timber. I think the +most advisable thing to do would be to find out from some of the railway +stations near here where timber is being shipped from, and in that way +we could get a line on where it is going. Then you chaps on the inside +can browse about a bit and find out how it is stolen. Between us we can +secure evidence that will uncover the whole plot. I’m going out now, +before they get onto the fact that we have had time to talk things over. +In the meantime, take my advice, and keep your eyes open every minute. +Eternal vigilance on your part is going to be the price of success. Not +that I believe any harm will come to you. Barrows would not dare attempt +that; but he could move so stealthily that you could not find out +anything. Now I’ll say goodbye and trot along. Good luck to you, and I +will contrive some way to get word to you of what is going on.” + +Howells shook hands with the boys, and then loped off to get his +dunnage. The boys watched his departure sadly, for they had counted a +great deal on the help that the young timberman could give them. + +“Well, fellows, that puts it directly up to us again. We will have to +work on our own hook and get to the bottom of this. Now let’s have +action. Tomorrow morning—it is too late now to do anything—we will +take a little trip to the small lake, Kanamo Lake I think they call it; +Dutton is the name of the big one, and start our search there. We will +simply say that we are going off for some fishing and swimming. Now +we’ll go to the office, and remember, not a word about knowing that +Howells was discharged.” And concluding his talk, Garry led the way to +the office. + +Barrows watched them narrowly as they came in, but said nothing. + +“Thought we’d get a little information about Kanamo Lake,” said Phil, as +they seated themselves. + +“Yes,” chimed in Garry. “We are going off there early tomorrow and have +a little fishing and perhaps a swim or two. We haven’t done anything +since we got here but watch the timber cutting, and that isn’t a novelty +any longer. What we especially want to find out is whether there is any +canoe or boat on either of the lakes that we could use to get some +really good fishing.” + +“There isn’t a boat or canoe of any sort on either Dutton or Kanamo,” +answered the manager. “But you will find that will not interfere with +your fishing. Part of the banks are well covered with reeds, and early +in the morning and after the sun has gone down you can catch a fine mess +of pickerel. Throughout the day the bass can be caught from the bank if +you boys are any hand at making a good long cast. I suppose as soon as +the timber cutting is done, the tourists will begin to swarm here for +summer camping, and then there will be plenty of boats and few fish. +That’s generally the way.” The manager talked heartily as though +relieved that the conversation had taken the turn that it had, and +perhaps because of the information that the boys were going to get away +from the camp. It was likely that he had expected some questioning +because of the discharge of the scaler. Evidently thinking over the +matter, he decided something in his mind, and turning to Garry, remarked +casually: “I had hoped that the arrival of the scaler would give me a +little extra time so that I could do some fishing with you and act as +guide around here, but I regret to say that I found him incompetent and +was obliged to discharge him. He was careless about his measurements, or +else did not know how to measure properly, and all our records are +messed up so that it will take me several days to get them straightened +out. Fortunately I know pretty well what’s been shipped and can check +against the bills of lading. Well, there goes the cook’s supper call.” + +Following supper, the boys made excuses that they wanted to get their +fishing tackle in order and retired early to their shack. They got to +sleep early, as they expected a strenuous day on the morrow, and also +hoped to be able to make a trip to Dutton Lake at night, hence wanted +sleep. + +Just as they were undressing, Dick uttered an exclamation of disgust. + +“What’s the matter, Dick, lose a button?” inquired Phil. + +“No, confound it, lost that nice knife with my name on it that I bought +in Bangor.” + +“That’s too bad, lost your nice toy. Well, you should worry, as you have +your sensible scout knife that will cut even if it hasn’t a nice name on +it,” laughed Phil. + +Early morning found them routed out with the dawn, and as they hurried +for the cookhouse to get some supplies with which to cook a luncheon at +the lake, they heard the cook and his helper talking about some marauder +that had been captured the night before and was locked up in the +storehouse. + +Neither seemed to know much about it, but the boys could see that the +cookee was on tenterhooks, and several times tried to get out, only to +be called by the cook and set to doing some necessary task toward the +getting of breakfast. This uneasiness on the part of the cookee made the +boys think that possibly Baptiste LeBlanc had been caught, and decided +that when they had eaten they would have a look at the prisoner. + +Barrows appeared when they were half way through breakfast, and the +chums at once began to question him regarding the capture of the unknown +man and what he might have wanted there. + +“Perhaps he is the one who has been causing a lot of trouble around +here,” said Barrows. “I haven’t seen him yet. Couple of the men found +him snooping around the office last night, and after locking him up, +woke me up and told me about him. After I eat I am going to question +him, and if you want to get a little later start on your fishing trip, +you can come and take a look at him.” + +This was exactly what the boys wanted, and they thanked Barrows for the +invitation. They made a hurried meal, and then after Barrows had posted +the notices for the section bosses for the day, they went to the +storehouse, which was the most solid looking building in the camp, being +built of great logs with a thick double hasp and padlocks on the door. +Inside were kept the cooking supplies for the camp. + +The manager produced a key, and throwing open the door, called to the +prisoner to come out. + +The three chums pressed forward eagerly to see if they were right in +their guess that LeBlanc or his evil associate had been captured. + +What they did finally see nearly knocked them off their feet. There was +a shuffling sound as of some one getting up, and then through the door +into the sunlight, walked The Hermit! + + + + +CHAPTER X + +THE FIRST HIKE + + +It was nearly a minute before the boys could find their tongues. The +hermit stood there blinking in the sunlight, for it had been pitch black +inside of the storehouse. + +Finally Garry shouted: + +“Hello, Hermit. Where did you come from?” + +Barrows stared at the boys in surprise. + +“Do you know this man?” he asked sharply. + +“Of course we do,” replied the boys, almost simultaneously. “It isn’t so +long ago that he was of great aid to us in our work on the fire patrol,” +added Garry. Immediately he could have kicked himself, for he had by +this statement let Barrows know that the man might be of help to them +again. + +“What are you trying to do around here?” snapped Barrows, turning to the +hermit. “Trying to steal something, or set fire to the camp or something +of that sort?” + +“That will be just about enough, Mr. Barrows,” interrupted Garry. “We +happen to know this old man, and I’ll vouch for him personally. It is +probable that he came here to visit us, and was wandering about when +your men, naturally thinking him to be a marauder, seized him. You can +take my word for it that he’s all right.” + +Barrows evidently resented the way in which Garry had spoken to him. “I +think I am the best judge of what to do in this camp, young man. I am +not satisfied with his presence here, and it is my intention to have him +taken to town and lodged in jail there until I find out what’s at the +bottom of the broken saws and such occurrences in the camp.” + +“Now just one moment, Barrows,” said Garry with a determined ring in his +voice, and a snap in his eyes that boded little good for Barrows. “I am +not one who will naturally trade on his being the son of the man who +owns this camp, but I give you ample warning that if my word is doubted +in this matter, and this old man, who is as harmless as a rabbit, is not +freed immediately, I will go to town this morning and take steps that +will cause your instant removal from this camp. I have never asked my +father to back me in anything that I was not absolutely sure of, and you +can rely on the fact that he will take my word in this case, knowing me +as he does. Now Mr. Barrows, you may take your choice in this matter and +decide quickly.” + +The manager hesitated a moment, evidently trying to decide just who had +the upper hand in the situation. Seeing this, Garry turned to Phil and +Dick, and said: + +“Boys, go pack up your dunnage and get ready to leave in fifteen +minutes.” + +The two chums turned on their heels without a word, and were starting +for the shack when Barrows, seeing that he was beaten, called: + +“Never mind, boys, the old man will go free this minute.” + +He said it with a bad grace, and the glances that he covertly cast at +the boys showed that he was enraged at the turn affairs had taken. What +made him still angrier was the fact that the cook and two or three men +had gathered around and seen him come out second best in the battle of +words. + +He determined to make the best of a bad situation. + +“I am afraid that I spoke a little too hastily in this thing,” he said, +coming closer to Garry. “I want you to remember that I am always trying +to protect your father’s interests here; that is what he pays me for, +and I thought that there might be something peculiar in this chap’s +showing up here in the dead of night.” + +Garry, having won his point, and for the sake of future peace and +freedom from interference, resolved to mollify the manager. + +“That’s all right, Mr. Barrows. Only I want to tell you this,” and here +Garry lowered his voice: “The old chap is mentally unbalanced, and it +was largely for that reason that I did not want him to be annoyed. He +lives near a tract of wild land where we patrolled early this summer, +and was very decent to us, tanning skins of animals that we shot, and +leaving us rabbits for eating. It is a pet trick of his to wander about +at night, and appear very mysteriously, and as I propose to have him +stay with us a few days, I wish you would pass the word that he is +afflicted and caution the men not to tease or annoy him.” + +Barrows assented grudgingly and then marched off to the office. + +Left alone with the hermit, for the cook and the others had departed for +their customary tasks, the boys eagerly asked the hermit what he meant +by his note, and if he had anything to tell them. + +“I didn’t mean to get caught,” he said. “I know what you boys are here +for. Nate told me a little and I can make two and two equal four. I was +creeping through the woods last night to come and leave a letter for +you, when I heard some men talking, and crept up to listen to them. They +were just getting ready to leave and all I heard was a man saying that +his brother would soon be there and that he would know how to deal with +those spies. I couldn’t get a good look at the man, but he spoke with an +accent, and was a heavy, strongly built man. That’s what I was going to +write to you, for I believe you are the ones that the men in the secret +meeting meant when they referred to spies.” + +The boys looked aghast at each other when they heard the concluding +words of their friend the hermit. At once the same thought leaped into +the minds of all three. Man with an accent, heavily built and strong +appearing. Brother was coming to help him. All put together it meant +only one thing, and that was voiced by Dick. + +“Jean LeBlanc!” + +The others echoed the name of their Nemesis after Dick. + +“What’s that, did you speak of LeBlanc?” inquired the hermit. + +“That’s just what we did,” replied Garry grimly. “That man you +described, unless we are very badly mistaken, was Baptiste, a brother of +Jean. And if Jean is on the way, we must guard ourselves every minute. +And we must make every moment count, for once he gets here he will make +strenuous efforts to get us in trouble, if not on his own hook, then in +cahoots with Barrows. Now let’s break for the small lake. Suppose you +stay with us a few days, Hermit, and help us in our work.” + +“No, that would not be good tactics,” was the reply of the hermit. “It +would cause trouble to you boys with that man who wished me lodged in +durance vile.” + +As was usual, the words of the hermit were anything but those that would +be naturally used by a man that had lived the greater part of his life +in the deep woods, far removed from all human beings. But the aged +hermit was always surprising them, if not by his talk, by his unusual +actions. + +Garry had often thought that the old man was wise in his conclusions, so +he asked what could be suggested. + +“I would say that you should go to the manager and tell him that I had +been offended by my reception and consequently had refused to stay and +visit you, going off in a huff. Then that will give me a chance to +return to the forest and watch for the coming of LeBlanc. I will +guarantee that I will not be captured again. I was too sure of myself +last night, since I did not know that the camp was full of night spies, +who held rendezvous in the dark of the night. I will warn you in the +usual way if LeBlanc approaches. In the meantime, my instinct tells me +that the man with whom you quarreled, Garry, is not to be trusted. Watch +him. Now I will go if you will give me some food to carry with me for +breakfast. I am hungry.” + +“There’s one thing I wish you would do first, Hermit,” said Garry, +calling him by the only name they knew, and which appeared to please +rather than offend the old recluse, “and that is go to the nearest town +and mail a letter for us. There is no one in the camp now that I would +trust with a message, and none of us who could get away. I should have +thought to do it yesterday when Howells left, but forgot it in the +excitement of his being discharged.” + +Borrowing Dick’s ever ready notebook, Garry scribbled off a brief note +to his father, advising him to check carefully the shipments of timber, +and telling him in guarded words, that he had several clues that +properly trailed down would soon lead to the unmasking of the traitors +in the camp. He folded the note and gave the hermit money with which to +buy a stamped envelope, and on another leaf of paper wrote the address +to which the note should be sent. + +This the hermit promised to do at the earliest possible opportunity. He +then proposed that they walk a few hundred yards out of the camp with +him, so that they might select a spot where notes could be left without +his having to penetrate the dangers of the camp at night. + +This the boys agreed to do, and after a brisk walk selected a tree with +a hollow, half concealed in it, and established that as the +“postoffice.” The hermit then took up his journey, while the boys +returned to the office to tell the manager, as they had agreed to do, +about the hermit’s leaving. When Barrows heard their story he seemed +relieved and was apparently only too anxious to ingratiate himself with +the boys again, for he realized that he had overstepped the mark a bit +in his words with Garry a short time previous. + +“You should have brought the old chap back, and perhaps I could have +persuaded him that it was all a mistake,” but the boys were quick to +detect the false ring in his tone. + +“Now we are off to Kanamo Lake for our delayed fishing trip, and so that +you may not get uneasy if we do not return by nightfall, let us tell you +that we are used to making camp wherever we happen to be, and so will be +all right. I only wish there was a canoe on the lake, and we would take +a three or four-day hike, canoeing from spot to spot on the lake, and +camping wherever we saw fit,” concluded Garry. + +“Sorry there isn’t. You might make a flatboat out of some lumber, but +there is nothing with which to calk the seams, and the task of dragging +the lumber to the water would be almost too much to bother with for the +short time that you are going to stay here,” replied Barrows. + +As the boys set out on their seven-mile hike to the lake, they discussed +the way in which Barrows was continually bringing into the conversation +the suggestion that they were not going to stay very long. + +“I wonder if that is a warning unintentionally given, or is the wish +just father to the thought?” asked Garry. “I don’t remember ever saying +anything to Barrows about the length of time that we intended to spend +here.” + +“Maybe it is just the wish coming to surface as you say. At any rate, +let’s not worry about that for awhile. We will have bridges enough to +cross when we come to them.” + +The chums pursued their way through the fragrant woods, spicy with the +smell of pine and balsam. Occasionally they heard the whirr of wings as +a covey of grouse or partridge, frightened at the sound of approaching +footsteps, took wing and flew away from the cover where they had been +hiding. The sound of the birds brought to the minds of the trio the sad +thought of the missing Sandy, for he had the canine instinct of most +dogs to flush a bird. He had so often hunted with the boys that they had +taught him to retrieve a bird as does a regular pointer or hunting dog. + +“Tell you what we’ll do when we get back to the camp tonight,” announced +Phil. “We’ll offer a reward for the finding of Sandy. I think myself +that some of the lumberjacks, perhaps that chap that took us coon +hunting, recognized the value of Sandy and stole him, determined to sell +him and make a few dishonest dollars. Sandy is worth more to us than +many people would want to pay for him, and I think if we offered a big +enough reward we might get him back.” + +This was agreed on by the boys, and chatting merrily of many things, +they trekked through the forest to the lake. + +They took turns setting the pace and so made brisk time, even Dick +keeping up without grumbling, although there was no circus at the end of +the trail to lure him on to greater speed. However, Dick smelled +adventure in the air, and hence all his seemingly lazy ways dropped and +he dug to the trail as if his life depended on it. + +Soon they reached the lake, which lay like a jewel in the midst of the +forest. For the most part it was surrounded by trees, thick and green. +At the end of the trail was a slightly open spot, and a stretch of sandy +beach that seemed to beckon the boys irresistibly. + +“Let’s take a short dip before we start exploring. I haven’t had a swim +for days, and I think it would do us all a lot of good.” Garry had been +sweeping the edges of the lake with his field glasses, which he had +brought along, and could see nothing other than an unbroken expanse of +forest. Far down at the end of the lake was a slight opening which Garry +judged was the outlet of the lake, although since he had not consulted a +map, he could not tell much about it as regarded its direction and size. + +The others were also of Garry’s opinion, and Phil then came to bat with +another suggestion. + +“We must do a little fishing, also; for if we go back empty handed from +a lake that is supposed to be filled with fish, we are apt to excite +suspicion in the mind of Barrows, and set him asking us questions as to +what we did while we were away. We don’t need to spend the whole day at +it, just catch a decent mess and quit.” + +“Right you are, Phil,” answered Garry. “Now for a swim, and last man in +is no good.” + +The boys ripped off their clothes, and so used were they to speedy +disrobing, that all hit the water with almost the same splash. + +“See that spot up the bank about three hundred yards, where the ground +begins to rise?” inquired Dick, as he splashed about in the water. “Bet +you fellows anything I’ve got against anything you have that I can give +you chaps ten yards’ start and then beat you there.” + +“Well, you sure thing artist, splash him good, Phil,” shouted Garry, for +Dick was an expert swimmer, much better than either of the others, +although they were not unskilled in the aquatic art. + +Dick was thoroughly splashed, and with two against one, was soon forced +to holler quits. + +“Tell you what I’m going to do; I’m going to swim up to that place and +back, anyway. You fellows can come or not, as you please,” and with a +long, sweeping, underhand stroke, his head almost buried in the water, +Dick sped away. The remaining two contented themselves with paddling +about and noting the clearness of the water and the fine sandy bottom. +They got a stone and amused themselves by throwing it some distance and +then swimming under water after it and recovering it. They had been +doing this for some moments, when suddenly Garry, thinking that Dick, +with his speed, had been gone long enough to have done that distance +twice over, began to worry a bit, and called Phil’s attention to the +lapse of time. They decided to swim up there and seek their missing +comrade, who, although they had perfect faith in his prowess as a +swimmer, might easily have been overtaken with a cramp, and met with +disaster. + +It was generally a rule that they keep an eye on each other in the +water, and it was a strict regulation that a call for help be never made +in jest. + +“Let’s go,” called Garry, and away they started. They had made less than +fifty yards, when borne on the breeze came the sound of Dick’s voice. + +Garry stopped swimming for a moment, and began to tread water, while he +looked toward the spot that had been Dick’s goal when he swam away. Dick +could be seen standing on the bank beckoning wildly to them. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A LUCKY FIND + + +“Guess it’s nothing serious, Garry,” said Phil, who had followed Garry’s +lead and stopped swimming long enough to see what the cause of the call +was. “It looks as though he had made a discovery of some sort.” + +The chums put on an extra burst of speed, and soon had reached the spot +where Dick was standing. + +“What’s all the commotion about?” inquired Garry half breathlessly, as +they clambered up on to the bank. “We thought you were calling for +help.” + +“I am truly sorry I frightened you, but I just found something that we +may need before our stay at the camp is done,” and Dick led the way into +the woods for a few feet. “I got out on the bank to rest a bit, and +thought I saw signs of a camp having been here at one time or another, +so I nosed around and tucked away in the brush I found this,” and +displacing some of the debris that had fallen around the object, Dick +disclosed a birch-bark canoe, made after Indian fashion. + +“I should say that was a find,” exclaimed Garry. “Now we can do all the +exploring around here that we want to, and if we find nothing here we +can portage the canoe across the woods to Dutton Lake and continue our +investigation.” + +They were disappointed, however, for on dragging out the canoe, they +found that a great hole had been torn in the bottom. + +“Now wouldn’t that jar you. I wish I had looked at it more carefully +before I called to you,” said Dick in a disappointed tone. + +“Let your Uncle Dudley take a look,” ordered Garry. After a few moment’s +investigation, he straightened up. “It can be repaired easily with what +simple tools we have and a little help from old Mother Nature. Our only +trouble will be a swim of about four miles. Two across to the point that +I noted when I looked through my glasses, and two back to where we want +to do our work, which had better be here.” + +“I think I begin to see faint glimmerings of what you intend to do,” +said Phil, as he scanned the end of the lake that came within his +vision. Phil had abnormally keen eyes, and could often see things that +the other boys required a glass to discern. + +“Well, Sherlock, what do I intend to do?” asked Garry with a laugh. + +“It seems to me, if my eyes don’t fail me, that I can see a sort of a +white clump of woods about two miles distant, at least the sunshine +casts a brighter glare than it does on the green of the pines and +spruces. Now to me that spells b-i-r-c-h. Am I right?” + +“Right again. That’s just what I have in mind. Let’s start. We ought to +be able to have a fine canoe by noon if we don’t loiter.” + +They swam back to where they had left their clothes, and it was decided +that Phil should stay behind to guard their clothes, packs and rifles. +Garry got his hatchet and sheath off his belt, and tucked his knife +safely into the sheath of the axe blade. Then by knotting two of the +bandanna handkerchiefs that they customarily wore about their necks, he +made a sort of a strap affair and tied the axe securely on his back +between his shoulder blades. This left his arms perfectly free for +swimming, and then he and Dick set out with easy strokes for their +destination across the lake. They took plenty of time and occasionally +rolled over to float on their backs so that they could rest. At last, +after several resting spells, which were mainly for Garry’s benefit, as +Dick could have done the whole distance without fatiguing himself in the +slightest, they reached the clump of birches. + +Resting a few moments on the bank, they proceeded to strip a good +section of bark from one of the birches. This was a simple matter, as +all that was necessary to do was to cut a girdle around the tree a few +inches from the bottom, and another about three feet above. Then a +vertical cut was made between the two girdles, and after about twenty +minutes of prying the bark from the trunk with the knife, the two taking +turns at the task, they had the roll of bark neatly cut off. + +“Now if we could only find a swampy place around here where there would +be some tamarack trees, we could get a couple of the crooked roots for +which the tamarack is noted, and that would furnish us with a rib for +the canoe. As it is, we will have to makeshift with that twisted birch +branch that I see, which Nature seemed to have put there for our +particular use today,” and Garry proceeded to get the branch as he +spoke. + +“We can roll this up and tie it with a strip of handkerchief, and push +it along with us on the return swim. Then it will be a small job to +repair the canoe.” + +“What are you going to use to attach it to the bottom of the canoe where +it is broken,” asked Dick. + +“I have something in my knapsack. For some reason or other, while in +Bangor, I bought a ball of extra fine linen cord, and one day while we +were in the woods at Sourdehunq I needed some shoemaker’s wax, and +didn’t have it, so last time we were in town I bought a piece. I never +expected to use it to repair a boat with, however, just bought the stuff +in case an occasion arose where we might need it. Now it will come in +handy,” and as he finished, Garry slipped back into the water. The +return trip occupied somewhat longer, as the bark was a bit unwieldy as +they pushed it ahead of them. + +When they returned to the spot where they had left Phil, the sun was +almost in the center of the sky, denoting it was near noon. They found +that Phil had improved the time while they were absent and had started a +fire and caught several good bass. + +“Best fishing here I ever saw. I don’t believe a line has been thrown in +this patch of water for years, the fish just jump at the bait,” shouted +Phil with the true Isaac Walton enthusiasm. + +“I also got a couple of pickerel that were so foolish as to leap at my +bait, and have enough for dinner and some to take back to the camp with +us tonight.” + +All were so eager to get at the business of fixing the boat, that they +hurried through lunch with extra speed. Then they sped through the woods +to the spot where the old canoe had been found. + +As Garry prepared to repair the boat, he began to laugh at something +that seemed to be amusing him greatly. + +“Let us in on the joke,” asked Phil. “You are grinning there to yourself +like a Cheshire cat.” + +“I was just thinking that either Barrows is a fool or takes us for +brainless idiots. The idea of telling us that there was nothing in the +camp with which a boat could be calked, and there are only some hundreds +of square miles in the state just full of the finest thing in the world. +Nothing more than the pitch on the pine trees all around us.” + +“I noticed it this morning when the manager remarked about it, but +thought it just as well to keep my knowledge to myself,” remarked Dick. + +“All right, then, you fellows set to work with your knives and dig a lot +of those pitch lumps off the trees and then start a fire and melt it in +your drinking cup. It will spoil the cup, but we can easily get another +one,” directed Garry. + +The boys immediately set about doing his bidding, and as they worked, +Garry got out his knapsack and proceeded to rummage through it for the +linen cord and the shoemaker’s wax. Having found them, he set to work to +wax the cord thoroughly, making it less likely to shrink. Next he +examined the broken rib of the canoe, and determined how much of the +birch branch he would need to repair it. He took his knife and shaved a +long diagonal slant on the piece of rib in the canoe, then matched the +slant on the piece of branch. Having fixed them so they would fit, he +took a piece of fishing line and wound it carefully around the joint, +starting several inches above where the two pieces joined, and +continuing for several inches onto the firm wood beyond the spot where +the repair was made. This is called “splicing.” Most boys have spliced a +fishing pole or a broken bat in much the same way. + +The rib having been spliced, the next step was the patching of the hole. +Garry got the birch bark, and laid it over the gaping rent in the bottom +of the craft, and marked a line around so that it overlapped the hole by +about four inches. The extra bark was then trimmed away, and he was +ready to sew it on. He took the awl blade of his knife and punched a +series of holes around, piercing both the patch and the bark of the +canoe. Having done this, he called for the hot pitch and poured it on +around the edge of the hole. Then he firmly laid the patch on, and as +the pitch cooled it formed a sort of a natural mucilage. Garry had +previously waxed one end of the cord so that it would be easy to stick +it through the holes, and working swiftly he threaded the cord in. When +the job was completed, he reversed his steps, so that the result was a +firmly sewn patch. + +Nothing else remained to do but to daub hot pitch liberally over the +seam on both sides, and calk the edges where the patch was attached to +the craft. + +“There,” said Garry, as he stepped back and proudly surveyed his +handiwork. “That’s a craft that will be as seaworthy, or rather as +lakeworthy, if there is such a word, as one could want.” + +“Um, let me see,” mused Dick aloud, as he looked over the canoe. +“There’s one other quite necessary thing to be done.” + +“Well, smarty, what is there to be done,” asked Garry a trifle hotly. + +“I was just wondering whether we would rig up a sail or have you a gas +engine in your knapsack with which to make this gallant ship navigate?” +asked Dick as he burst into laughter, in which he was joined, first by +Phil, and a bit later by Garry, when he saw that the joke was on him. + +“Phil, you’re the handy man with the knife, what say to a couple of +paddles?” asked Garry after the laughter had subsided. + +“Have ’em for you in an hour. That’s quick work, however, and I won’t +promise you a very handsome product.” + +“We won’t bother about looks as long as they will propel the canoe +through the water. That remark of Dick’s about the sail, although it was +intended to be humorous, isn’t such a bad idea either, only there is no +way that I can think of right now to make a sail. We’ll browse around +the camp when we get back and see if we can dig up a bit of canvas and +make one of those lateen sails, you know those triangular shaped affairs +such as the boats in the Mediterranean use,” said Garry. + +While he was talking, Phil had already set to work to make a pair of +paddles. “Now you chaps watch me, and after I have fixed one with the +axe, or as much as one can do with an axe blade, I’ll get to work with +the knife,” he said. + +Phil selected spruce about five inches in diameter and felled it to the +ground. + +“I hate to spoil a perfectly good tree, but in this case certainly +necessity knows no law.” + +He chopped off two sections a little over five feet in length, and then +proceeded to hew one swiftly into a board. This took some little time, +despite the fact that he worked at top speed every moment. His last work +with the axe was to fashion very crudely the handle. + +“Now I am going to whittle just the top and a place where the hand will +come in contact with the neck or shaft of the paddle. To try and smooth +it up would take too long, and all that really needs to be smooth are +the places where we will have to hold it. If it was left rough we would +soon accumulate a crop of blisters. While I am whittling, you chaps can +fashion that other section into form as I did.” + +After he had whittled enough, Phil sprang to his feet and said, “If I am +not mistaken, I saw an old bottle near the remains of a campfire, and +that will be just what I want.” He sped away to where he had seen the +vestiges of some fisherman’s fire, and soon found what he required. He +smashed this against a stone, and with the fragments scraped the spots +he had whittled smooth and free from lumps. + +The second paddle was not long in the making, but the entire job had +taken well over three hours. “We have about three hours before it is +time to eat, and we might as well put our canoe to the test, and see if +it works,” announced Dick. + +“Time to eat! Don’t you ever think of anything but eating?” demanded +Garry. + +“Yes, sir; when I’m not thinking about time to eat, I’m thinking about +what to eat,” responded Dick promptly. + +“Say, Phil, he’s hopeless. What say we make for that outlet at the far +end of the lake. We might just as well do that as anything, since we +have no real plan of action. Then tomorrow we can make a complete tour +of the lake, and thus get a comprehensive idea of the whole body of +water.” + +The canoe was launched, and the boys climbed in. Garry and Phil elected +to paddle, leaving Dick to sit in the middle. + +“If that patch will hold Dick up, you can be sure it’s a good job, +Garry,” laughed Phil, as they pushed off. + +“So that was why you chaps were so kind as to do all the paddling. I’m +to be the happy little subject of the experiment. Well, if I get a +ducking there is some consolation in the fact that you two will follow +suit,” said Dick good naturedly. + +Garry had done a fine bit of work, however, and the craft proved to be +all that they hoped it would. They made it dance through the water and +were delighted to find that they could make much better speed than in +the ordinary wooden canoe. The only thing necessary, however, was to +keep perfectly quiet, as the balance of a bark craft is a much more +precarious thing than that of a solid factory made canoe. + +It took them but a short time to reach the outlet, and they beached +their boat and started on a tour down the stream, which was a shallow, +weedy affair. + +Their early scout training, and their need of vigilance during their +patrolling of the woods when on duty as fire rangers had made their +powers of observation especially keen, and it was second nature almost +for them to note signs of trail that would be unseen by one unversed in +the lore of the woods and forests. + +They had walked about a quarter of a mile, when Phil’s exclamation made +them pause. + +“There’s fresh trail there, or I’m no good at sign reading any more,” +remarked Phil. The boys gazed at the ground and quickly saw that Phil +was right. + +With no wasted words, they turned and followed the slightly outlined +trail. It took only a few minutes for them to reach a crude log shack, +one that had evidently been constructed early that summer, as the fresh +cut logs showed. + +The door swung loose on crude rope hinges, and after debating a moment +they decided to enter: They found practically nothing in the way of +furniture. There were no bunks, but a pile of boughs had been thrown in +each corner, and a rough table had been built in a corner of the hut. On +this reposed several dirty tin dishes. The remains of the food were +still fresh, showing that someone had eaten there within the past day or +so. + +“That means that they are apt to be back at any time, and so we’d better +light out. It may be some camper and it may be some enemy. I am inclined +to think it the latter, for a camper would have taken some pains to make +things just a little bit more comfortable,” said Garry. “I think, +however, we will plan to keep watch of this place and see who happens to +occupy it.” + +“Well, I can tell you right now that it is someone from the logging +camp. One of those who are mixed up in the trouble there. Look under +that table on the floor!” + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +DICK DISAPPEARS + + +The others bent forward curiously and gazed at the floor. There, laying +in a little mess of debris, as though it had slipped from the pocket of +some one who had been sitting at the table, was the knife with Dick’s +name on it, that he had bought of the sidewalk merchant in Bangor! + +“Isn’t that conclusive proof that it’s someone from the camp?” demanded +Dick as he rescued the knife. + +“It surely is, and they are up to no good. Why should anyone from the +cutting have a place over here? It’s a signal for us to get out and get +out quick. There’s one good thing, though, we can set the hermit to +watching over here and leave ourselves free to go about other business. +We’ll pace out the distances and draw a rough map and leave it in the +tree postoffice so that the old fellow can come over here and keep +watch,” said Garry. + +Being careful to leave no traces of having been in the cabin, they +hastened outside. They had hardly gone two feet, though, when Dick +darted back. He rejoined his companions almost instantly, and answered +their puzzled stare with this explanation: + +“I’ve just sacrificed my good knife. The thought came to me that one of +them, the man who found it, might have remembered dropping it there, and +would at once know that someone had been in the cabin if it was +missing.” + +“Good headwork, Dick,” said Garry approvingly. + +They took it on the run back to where their canoe was beached, and soon +were on their way back across the lake. + +“I wish that we had more time without fear of interruption,” said Garry, +“for it is likely that the occupants of the cabin have a canoe hidden +somewhere along the bank of the lake. Safest thing now, however, is to +get back to the other side of the lake, where we have an excuse for +being.” + +“I am afraid that there will be little use in watching that cabin, +however, for it is quite probable that Barrows will warn those who are +living there that we are swimming and fishing around the lake, and +advise them to seek a new hiding place,” observed Phil. + +“That’s a fact,” answered Garry. “Still, there’s no harm in trying. It +was only by extreme carefulness in watching for signs that we discovered +that trail. It was probably the one that the men use to get water, and +the cabin is well hidden. One would not stumble on it casually in a long +time.” + +It was sundown by this time, and they held a council to decide whether +they would camp there for the night or go back to the lumber camp. They +were all anxious to visit the big lake, however, and so it was decided +to return. + +“After the camp is quiet we can skip out and visit our other objective,” +said Garry. + +Taking their fish out of the water, where they had been placed to keep +fresh, they trekked towards home. It was about dark when they reached +the camp, and about the first person they met was Barrows. He was all +curiosity to know how they had spent the day, and they returned +equivocal answers, being careful to make no mention of the canoe which +they had carefully hidden before starting away from the lake. + +The manager admired the fish, and thanked the boys for offering them to +provide breakfast on the coming day. Pleading their strenuous walk and +day as an excuse, they retired early to the shack. + +Here a campaign was speedily decided on. Dick was to go back to the +office and chat for a few moments, while the others slipped out of camp. +This would make it appear that they were in the neighborhood, and after +a reasonable time, Dick could return and retire for the night. + +Dick wandered back to the office to engage the manager in a talk about +fishing and the possibility of a long hike to extend over a week or +more, while Garry and Phil made for the lake. + +The tote road that had been made to transport the sawed lumber ran for a +short distance along the lakeside. Here there was a slightly wider place +made so that the tractors that met each other could pass with ease. The +ground was here covered with broken branches and debris of all sorts, +well tramped into the ground. Garry flashed his lamp about and searched +for signs of any sort, but seemed to find none. Then he went to the lake +edge and peered about. + +Some peculiar formation of rock made a sort of a ledge that stood about +three feet above the water. This ledge interested Garry immensely, but +he said nothing as he wanted more time to puzzle out the situation +before coming to any definite conclusions. At the point where the tote +road had been widened, there was a triple string of broad wheeled flat +cars loaded with lumber. + +“Now I wonder why these cars were left here,” asked Phil. + +“That’s easy. The drivers knock off work at a regular hour, and when +that time comes, if they have not gone very far on their trip, they +simply come back to the camp and wait until morning. That is to prevent +accidents which running in the dark might bring about,” said Garry. + +“Hush, what’s that?” asked Phil. Both boys listened intently. Far off +across the lake they heard a faint chugging noise. Sometimes it seemed +to cease altogether, then as the breeze stirred they could hear it, +getting fainter and fainter. + +“Phil, I’ve discovered the secret of the stolen timber or I’m a +Chinaman. That noise solves the whole proposition. That sound that we +heard is the engine of a powerful motor boat. And Barrows insisted that +there was no kind of water transportation on either lake. Now why should +he lie about it unless he had some ulterior motive in covering up the +presence of a boat? This is the answer or I’ll return from our mission +and tell Dad I’m not bright enough to solve the mystery.” + +“What have you doped out,” asked Phil, as Garry paused for a moment. + +“Just this. I’ll bet you a dollar to a doughnut that the drivers that +are in on this timber stealing business have it so arranged that there +is always a load of cars waiting here overnight. That’s step number one. +Now we have a rock formation here that makes a perfectly good wharf. +Next you have noticed that all the chips and bits of broken branches +strewn between the turnout here and that strip of rock. That’s just to +hide the footprints that are made by the thieves. So far so good. How +does this strike you? That motor boat that we heard is a big one, at +least it had immense pulling strength. I know enough about engines to +tell from the sound how good they are. That boat is probably used to +draw a raft across the lake. Just after midnight, or some safe time +during the dark hours, a raft can be backed against that natural wharf +there, and in half an hour enough lumber can be carried from the flat +cars to the raft to make it a profitable night’s work. Why, the whole +thing is as plain as a pikestaff. Phil, we’ve got everything nearly dead +to rights now!” + +“What’s the next step then, old timer? Shall we hike out and write, or +wire your father to come on so we can show him what’s going on?” +questioned Phil. + +“Not yet a bit, there’s still something else we must find out. Is this a +part of the treachery to ruin Dad’s enterprise here, or is it a private +bit of work on the part of Barrows?” + +“How’s this for a guess? The people that are behind Barrows, meaning +those that have bribed him to play false to the trust your father put in +him, may have outlined this whole scheme, and offered to give Barrows as +his pay what he can make off the stolen timber. At the rate that it has +been disappearing, one-fifth and one-quarter at a time, as the report +that Howells received would show, and at the price which lumber is +bringing today, that would be pretty good pay for one summer. Chances +are that the interests that are opposing Mr. Boone are paying all the +expenses. Their only idea is to put him out of business for breaking up +their combination and going into business on his own hook. If that’s the +kind of men they are, I don’t blame your father for getting out of the +combination.” + +“I think you have the right idea, Phil. My, I wish we had our canoe over +here. We could paddle across the lake and investigate the other side and +see what is done with the timber once it is rafted over the water,” said +Garry. + +“No use in wishing. Best thing we can do is hike for home and turn in. +Then tomorrow we can make arrangements to go on, say a three day hike. +We can portage the canoe across country, and hide out along the bank +until nightfall. The moon is in its last quarter now, and by night after +tomorrow it will be dark. We can paddle out well into the lake and wait +for what transpires. When we hear the raft and motor boat coming we can +paddle far enough to be unobserved and then follow it by sound. The boat +will probably travel without lights for two reasons. First, it is safe +enough as there is probably no other craft on the lake, and secondly, +they will not want to attract any undue attention. Then we can note the +spot where the raft docks, and in the morning can follow it to whatever +rail spur the stuff is taken. With what help Howells may be able to give +us on the outside, we ought to have the thing pretty well in hand. What +do you think of my suggestion?” asked Phil almost breathlessly, as he +concluded. + +“Phew, that’s the longest speech I ever heard you make, Phil, but you +sure said something every minute. That’s what we’ll do. Now let’s get +back.” + +The whole occurrence had taken less than an hour and a half, and when +they reached the camp they noted that a light was still burning in the +manager’s office. On arriving at their shack they were somewhat +surprised to find that Dick was not there. + +“He’s doing a good job,” laughed Garry. “Either he is really interested +in what Barrows has to say, or he is playing to give us time to do what +we wanted to. Well, he can stay there all night if he wants to, I’m +going to roll into my blanket and dream sweet dreams. Dick’s a night +hawk anyway most of the time. Goodnight.” And Garry yawned and soon was +fast asleep. Later development will show that it would have been wise on +the part of the boys to look in on the manager at that time. Had they +done so, their work would have been greatly simplified. However, they +were not mind readers and so days of trouble were in store for them. + +Morning came, and when Garry, always the first one to awake, tumbled out +of bed, he cast one look at Dick’s bunk, and then rushing over to the +other side of the shack, vigorously shook Phil. + +“What’s the matter?” demanded Phil in a startled voice, sitting upright +in his bunk. “Anything the trouble?” + +“That’s what I cannot tell you right this minute, Phil, but Dick hasn’t +been here all night!” + +Phil leaped out of his bunk and looked at the spot where their companion +usually slept. The blankets were still neatly in place, and it needed +only a glance to see that no one had used it that night. + +The boys hurried into their clothes and rushed to the office building +where Barrows and the camp officers slept. No one was stirring, and +Garry was about to pound on the door when he saw the cookee coming from +the cookhouse with a pail in each hand for the morning cooking water. + +Garry called to him and asked if he had seen Dick that morning. + +“Naw,” was the grouchy answer. “Why should I have seen him? I don’t know +anything about him.” + +The sound of the voices awakened Barrows and he came and stuck his head +out of the window. + +“What’s the matter?” he asked. + +“Why, Dick hasn’t been around all night, and we were looking for him. +Have you seen him since last night?” asked Garry. + +“I haven’t seen him since the three of you went to your shack last +night!” + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE CIPHER + + +The boys were dumbfounded by Barrows’ answer. + +“What’s that you say?” demanded Garry. + +“I said I had not seen him since the three of you went to your shack +last night to turn in. Isn’t that plain enough?” reiterated the manager. + +“Well, all we know is that just after we got to the shack, Dick left to +come back here and have a chat with you and get some information about +the country, as we had some little thought of taking a week’s hike up +into the wild lands that lie to the northwest.” + +“If he started for this office he never got here, for I sat up late +trying to straighten out the tangle that Howells left behind him. No one +came near the office all that time. Perhaps your chum has gone off on +some little private expedition.” + +Garry was quick to notice that there was a malicious ring in the +manager’s voice. At once the uncomfortable feeling overcame him that +their night’s work had been discovered. Garry was at a loss what course +to pursue. He could make no accusation of any kind, for Dick might have +stumbled on some clue that took him off on the trail. + +“Well, you can understand that we are a little bit worried over the +matter, especially since this is strange country to Dick. He might have +wandered into the woods and got lost.” Garry knew that this was next to +impossible, but he could think of nothing better to say at the moment. + +“My advice is that you wait a bit, and you will probably find that he is +all right. He’ll very likely show up in a little while. I wouldn’t +worry,” said Barrows. + +There was nothing to do for the moment but take the manager’s advice, +and the boys returned to the shack. + +“Phil, there’s bad business afoot here somewhere. At such a time as +this, Dick would not have gone off to follow a clue without leaving us +some sort of a note or even a sign. He could leave a half a dozen +different signs that we all know to denote trouble. He hasn’t taken +anything with him. His rifle is still there and so is his pack. If it +were some mission of danger that he had gone on he would at least have +taken his rifle. Now what shall we do?” + +“Let’s give him till noon in case it was such a hurried matter that he +had not time to run back for his rifle. We might even wait until six +o’clock. You know we have always made it a rule that we should never be +gone more than twenty-four hours on a search without letting the others +know in some way that we are safe. Sundown tonight would not be exactly +twenty-four hours, but it would be near enough,” advised Phil. Garry +agreed that this was sound advice and they went off to breakfast. They +found Barrows was almost through. + +“Why don’t you fellows start out this morning and look for him? One of +you could go in one direction and one in the other. If you know anything +of the woods, you could soon find signs of him if he were wandering +about,” suggested Barrows. + +Garry told him that they had decided to wait until nightfall before +getting really worried. At this the manager allowed a satisfied gleam to +show in his eyes. Both the boys were narrowly watching him, and noted +this. After breakfast they came back to the shack, and once safe inside, +Garry whispered to Phil: + +“Watch every move from now on. That business of Barrows telling us to go +in different directions on such a wild goose chase was entirely too +obvious. He wants us to get separated. Keep your rifle close by you +every minute, and tonight we’ll establish a watch same as we have done +in the woods when there was danger near. First thing this morning is to +go to the spot where we agreed to leave notes for the hermit, and leave +a letter telling him what has happened and asking him to take a look at +the shack on the other side of Kanamo Lake.” + +Hastily writing the note, and watching that they were not followed they +slipped out of the camp and ran to the appointed postoffice. + +Garry reached his hand in as a matter of course, and was surprised to +find that there was a note in the natural receptacle. + +He brought it out, and with Phil leaning over his shoulder, read it. It +contained a distinct shock for both. Here was what they read: + +“Attacked by men and letter to your father stolen. Hit on head and left +lying in road. Use all caution. The Bear is in the woods.” + +The usual lone pine symbol was attached. + +“Well, we are discovered, Garry,” said Phil. “Barrows must have had the +hermit followed and has read the letter. I wouldn’t be a bit surprised +if he knew what we talked about last night. Question now is whether he +was instrumental in bringing about Dick’s absence.” + +“I am afraid that we have sort of made a mess of things, Phil. We +haven’t given Barrows enough credit, or else we have been too sure of +ourselves. There is a good chance, however, and this note makes me think +it highly likely that Jean LeBlanc may have captured Dick again. You +know he seems determined to do him harm, even more so than us, for he +and Dick have tangled up three or four times now, and each time Dick has +managed to elude him and make more or less of a fool of him. This +naturally would make an even more implacable enemy of the vengeful +halfbreed. Let’s get back to camp and wait awhile. We will pry about the +entire camp to see if there is any sign of Dick, and also we will be +safer for the time being. Don’t think I am cowardly, only we want to +take no chances if we are to help Dick and at the same time complete our +mission here.” + +They returned to the camp, and as they walked, Garry tore the hermit’s +note into tiny, indistinguishable fragments, throwing each tiny particle +to the winds. + +The day dragged on, although they tried to make it pass quickly by +searching through the camp. Night came at last, and they turned in. +Before retiring they arranged for alternate watches, and also decided +that on the morrow they would insist that a message be sent for Mr. +Boone. The boys had almost decided that rather than allow Dick to fall +into greater danger by protracting the time of a systematic search, they +would tell what they had learned to Mr. Boone and let him force the +issue of the stolen timber. + +It was nearly eleven o’clock and Phil, who was on watch, was about to +wake Garry for his turn at sentry duty, when he heard a cautious +fumbling at the door, and the sound of a low malediction when the +intruder found that it was locked. There was silence for a moment, and +then Phil heard the sound of someone breathing heavily at the window. He +crept noiselessly to Garry’s bunk, and holding his hand over his chum’s +mouth lest he make a sudden noise, shook him awake. Garry was aroused in +an instant, and all sleep vanished. He knew from feeling Phil’s hands +against his mouth that caution was needed. + +Having roused Garry, Phil crept back to the window just in time to hear +a faint swish. Instantly he knew that the intruder was cutting the +double thickness of heavy mosquito bar with a knife, and guided by the +sound, clubbed his rifle and brought it down with full force. There was +a howl of pain, and the sound of someone running away at top speed. + +“Must have clipped that chap either on the head or the hand,” whispered +Phil. “Guess he won’t be here again tonight.” + +“Looks as though the war was on. You roll in and I’ll watch for a couple +of hours now. Good thing we used our old trick of sentry work, or we +might be in a bad position right now,” answered Garry. + +For another hour nothing happened. Then there was a pounding at the door +and Barrows’ voice was heard calling the names of Garry and Phil. +Suspecting a trick, both boys reached for their rifles, and after +lighting a candle, Garry covered the door with his rifle while Phil +opened it. + +Barrows stepped in and seemed to be taken back by the sight of the rifle +leveled at his head. + +“Why the military greeting?” he asked with an attempt at good humor. + +“Taking no chances,” answered Garry briefly, for he had a feeling that +it was almost time to tear the mask away. “We had one visitor here +tonight, and we didn’t know what to expect.” + +Garry explained his statement about the visitor by briefly telling of +the attempt that had been made to enter the cabin an hour previously. +Barrows passed this off by offering the suggestion that some of the +lumbermen were naturally ruffians, and might have wanted to commit +burglary. + +“What I woke you up for was to tell you that a man has come here with a +note that he refuses to deliver to anyone but you boys. He’s at my +office now, and all he will say is that your friend Dick’s safety +depends on obeying what is in the note. Of course I could have summoned +some of the men and had him overpowered, but thought you boys might like +to handle the matter for yourselves.” + +The boys put on their shoes and coats, for they had gone to bed almost +fully dressed, and prepared to follow Barrows. + +“Careful now,” whispered Garry, as he passed Phil. + +There seemed to be little need for caution, however, for they were +unmolested on their way. At the office they found an unkempt dirty +looking individual. + +“Be these the boys,” he asked of Barrows, pointing a dirty finger at +Garry and Phil. + +“Yes, these are the ones. Now state your business and do it quick,” +snapped Barrows. + +“This letter tells the hull story,” answered the man in a hoarse voice, +and he handed a crumpled piece of paper to Garry. + +The leader of the Rangers took the note and read it in silence, then +handed it over to Phil. + +What they read was this: + + “Have been captured by Jean LeBlanc. Have been forced to write this + letter to you. LeBlanc wants a thousand dollars for my freedom. You + are either to bring it with you, or make arrangements for its + delivery at a spot known to the bearer of this letter. Warn you that + any attempt to molest bearer will result in serious injury or worse + to me. You know I would not ask this unless I were in grave peril. + Don’t fail me. Follow bearer’s directions. + + “Being emergency will ask ransom emphatically. + + “Dick Wallace.” + +“That’s Dick’s writing, sure enough. He must have been tortured into +writing that letter, else he would never have done it,” said Garry +between his teeth. “Now Barrows, the time has come for a showdown. What +do you know about this matter? Speak up, and speak up quick!” + +“What should I know about it. I don’t know what’s in the letter about +your friend,” answered Barrows taken back by the tone of Garry’s grim +voice. + +“How do you know it’s about our friend?” demanded Garry quick as a +flash. + +“Why, the bearer here told me that it had to do with one of the three +boys who were staying here,” answered Barrows weakly. + +“I think you’re lying, Barrows, but I can’t prove it. Here, read the +letter.” + +He handed the crumpled note over to the manager, who took it and read it +in silence. Then he burst into a protest. + +“I never heard of this Jean LeBlanc. Why do you connect me with the +matter? I never even heard the name LeBlanc.” + +“You had a Baptiste LeBlanc working for you until Howells insisted that +he be discharged, didn’t you?” continued Garry implacably. + +“Why, there may have been a man of that name. I remember Howells +insisting that a man be discharged, but I never pay much attention to +the names of the lumberjacks, at least to their last names. I leave that +to the timekeeper and the section bosses. You misunderstand me entirely. +I am ready to give you all my help. What do you propose to do?” + +“First place I am going to start back with this man here and look into +the matter. Of course we have no money to take with us, but I am going +to be assured that Dick is safe. You will get the necessary ransom from +the bank at town, and thirty-six hours from now you will start with it +to some place where this man will appoint. We will be there at the time +with Dick. In the meantime telegraph my father to get here with all +speed. Now, Barrows, I’m putting this matter up to you. If you fail in +any way it will be so much the worse for you. I’m trusting you only +because I have to in an emergency. Don’t fall down, or we’ll make you +the sorriest man you could ever dream of being. Phil, keep these men +covered with your rifle until I go back and get our packs. Don’t let +them stir out of your sight or move a finger.” + +Garry concluded his words, and tearing a leaf from his notebook, wrote +hastily for several moments, then left the cabin. Barrows made as though +he would follow, but a menacing gesture from Phil made him keep his +seat. + +Once outside the cabin, Garry sped away into the woods like a deer. He +was extremely cautious with every step, however, lest a snag or root +trip him and disable him at this crucial moment. The note that he had +written contained explicit directions to the hermit to get word to Mr. +Boone by telegraph, and then see if he could pick up their trail and +follow them. He knew the old man was an expert at trailing, and Garry +wrote that he would leave signs on the way from the hollow tree +postoffice. + +The return to the camp was somewhat slower, for he stopped occasionally +to blaze an X in a tree, or dig a slight hole in the ground with his +toe. He wished that he had time to make a more distinct trail, but there +was the danger that a plain one might be noted by one of Barrows’ aides, +and obliterated. He was trusting that the hermit could find it, versed +as he was in all the lore of the woods. + +Back at the office with his knapsack and that of Phil, he asked what had +transpired while he was gone. Phil told him that a meeting place had +been agreed on. + +“Now,” said Garry sharply, “can you lead us where you came from in the +dark?” + +“Guess I can, came here in the dark,” was the surly response of the +guide. + +“Then start travelling. Now, Barrows, first sign of any treachery from +anyone in the camp will mean that first I’ll shoot this guide and second +anyone within range of my rifle. Now hike,” this last remark being +addressed to the man. + +Out of the camp toward the northeast led the way, and as they walked +Indian file, they took every step as though it were a path strewn with +glass. Once outside the camp, having been bothered by no one, Garry +called a halt. + +Keeping a sharp eye on the guide, Garry whispered to Phil: + +“Notice anything funny about that note of Dick’s?” + +“Not particularly, except that I took exceptional care to be sure that +it was Dick’s writing,” answered Phil. + +“Did you remember the last line?” he questioned further. + +“I think I could repeat it over by heart.” + +“Then use your head and look for the very obvious code in the last six +words,” said Garry. + +Phil repeated them aloud two or three times, then fell silent. Then he +gave vent to a low exclamation. + +“Why, it’s as plain as the nose on your face. It’s just the first +initials and they spell Beware!” + +“Exactly; that’s step number one. Now the second thing is the note +itself. It was written on brown paper. Safe thing to write such a letter +on, anyone might have it in his possession. The queer part is that on +the shelf high over Barrows’ desk was a bundle of report blanks wrapped +in the same identical kind of paper, only the wrapper was torn. I +couldn’t think of any way to clear the office, but I bet I could have +matched this scrap to the torn place in the report!” + +“Then you think that Dick has been at the camp all the time?” queried +Phil half incredulously. + +“Don’t think it, I’m sure of it.” + +“What are we to do, then?” asked Phil. + +“I have that all doped out. We’ll let this chap lead us a couple of +miles or so further on and then overpower him and tie him up and leave +him there while we double back and search the camp.” + +Garry gave the order to march again, and they started on their way. Had +Garry been gifted with second sight, he would never have left the spot +where they had held the conference, for they had gone only a short +distance when the guide asked them to halt. + +“What’s it worth to you fellows if I tell you all about this business? +You ain’t going to meet your friend where I’m taking you; it was just to +get you away from the camp that I led you out here. But you can’t make +me tell anything, or LeBlanc would kill me. But I’ll take a chance for +money.” + +This sudden development puzzled Garry. He did not know exactly what to +make of it, so he decided to temporize for a few minutes, and gain time +to think. + +“Where is LeBlanc now?” he asked. + +“Right there at the camp was where I last saw him.” + +The answer was such a surprise that Garry’s guard was lowered for a +moment, then there was a scurry and rush of feet, and a half a dozen +forms leaped out from behind the trees near them, and before either boy +could make a move with his rifle, they were in the hands of the enemy. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +DICK’S MISFORTUNE + + +Now what of Dick all this time? Let us go back to the night when Garry +and Phil had started for the Dutton Lake to see what could be found out +about the stolen timber. + +Barrows, of course, had not told the truth when he said that he had not +seen Dick after they had gone to their shack. + +He had come into the office as had been agreed upon, and engaged Barrows +in conversation about fishing. Barrows had chatted cordially for a brief +while, and then excused himself for a moment to give orders to one of +the section bosses whom he heard outside. + +Dick heard him give the order to work on the coming day, delivered in a +loud tone of voice, and almost instantly after the close of the +conversation he came into the office again. + +The conversation was picked up where they had left off, and they chatted +like old friends for nearly a half an hour. + +Finally, Dick heard the cookie calling for Barrows to come out a moment, +and Barrows obeyed the summons. Knowing that the cookie was suspected of +being in league with the traitors in the camp, Dick walked softly to the +door and tried to hear what was being said, but as they were several +feet from the entrance to the office, and speaking in the most cautious +whispers, he could distinguish nothing that was being said. Suddenly the +cookie darted away, and Barrows re-entered the cabin and stood leaning +against the door. + +“Speaking about fish,” he remarked, looking malevolently at Dick, “they +are foolish things since they always take bait. Now did you three boys +take me for a fool entirely, and did you think that I would take any +bait that was offered me? I know every move you made since you have been +here, including your letter to Boone. Why, you poor, useless boy, I am +playing for too big stakes here to let a pack of mere children balk me. +Your work was clever if it had been against an ignorant man, but you’re +done now.” + +Dick’s heart sank. He knew that a cog had slipped somewhere. They had +been too sure of themselves. Barrows kept on talking in the same strain +until Dick began to realize that he was merely talking against time. He +rose to his feet and prepared to make a dash for the door, but +realization came too late, for the door was thrown open and in stepped +the arch enemy of the boys, Jean LeBlanc. + +“So, mon ami, we meet again. This is a mos’ pleasant meeting, but you +are not to escape so easily this time.” + +There was hatred in the halfbreed’s voice and in his eyes. Dick shivered +inwardly, although he let no sign of fear be shown in his face or +actions. + +“All the better to have you here this time, LeBlanc, you just walk into +our hands; and this time you will see the inside of a jail for sure,” +said Dick boldly. + +LeBlanc’s face darkened with rage. He made as though to reach for the +knife that hung in his belt, but Barrows stopped him. + +“That will do, LeBlanc, I’ll handle this matter in my own way. Remember +you’re working for me, and you do as I say or get out, and I’ll find +another man for the job.” + +Dick was astonished at the way LeBlanc subsided. Evidently Barrows was a +much braver man than they had given him credit for being; at any rate, +he seemed to be the absolute master of the halfbreed. + +“Yes, ma frien’, you are the boss, but perhaps another time, when I am +not working for you, I will take care of this one. Now what we do with +him.” + +“We will put him in the cellar under the storehouse for the present, +then when we have captured his friends, we will have them taken to +Misery Camp.” + +“Taking the others will be an easy matter, will it not? We shall just +surround them like that and take them,” and he snapped his fingers with +a derisive gesture. + +“That’s just what we won’t do. Why do you suppose I am going to the +trouble of all this secrecy for? If it had been merely a matter of +capturing them, it would have been done long ago. But they have been on +their guard most of the time, and this camp is full of lumberjacks that +worked for old man Boone. If they got wise to anything, they would have +me strung up to a tree in no time, and one of the worst riots in the +history of the lumber business would have been pulled off in this camp. +No, sir, I am saving my skin.” + +“Why not get rid of those who would help them?” inquired Jean. + +“I am, just as fast as I can. Everything was all right till these boys +showed up to play amateur detective. Now we must make a grand cleanup +and work fast. Things are getting too hot.” + +“I, Jean LeBlanc, am giving you warning. The bes’ thing to do is to slip +a knife in a place where it would do the most good. Every time they have +cross my path, they have won, and Jean LeBlanc is not one who is easily +beaten in anything.” + +“Bah, you make me tired, LeBlanc. They may have had a little luck and a +lot of help, or else you didn’t know how to do your work. I’m here to +tell you that Gene Barrows will not be fooled.” + +Dick had been sitting silently all this time, drinking in the +conversation of the two men. They seemed not to be noticing him, and in +a desperate attempt to make his escape, he darted for the door and +succeeded in getting outside. But his triumph was short lived, for he +had no more than attained the outside air, when he was seized by an iron +grip by two men, and hauled ignominiously back into the office. He saw +at once that his captors were LeBlanc’s brother, Baptiste, and the +unknown chap who had been implicated with Baptiste in the attack on +Howells. + +Dick reddened with rage at the laughter of his enemies, and vowed to +himself that somehow, somewhere, he would pay them for their taunts. + +“Come, we are wasting time; the others may be back from their little +spying expedition at any moment. Grab him, you two,” directed Barrows. +Baptiste and the unknown, whose name Dick later learned was Fearon, +seized him in no gentle grasp. One of them clasped a hard, dirty hand +over his mouth to prevent any outcry, and they walked him across the +camp to the storehouse. + +Barrows produced the key and threw open the door. Once inside, the door +was carefully closed, and Barrows produced a candle which he lighted. +Dick was searched and his knife and matches were taken away. + +Two heavy molasses barrels were rolled away, disclosing a trap in the +floor. This was raised and a rude ladder was seen to lead below. Dick +was mercilessly bundled down the hole, little care being taken as to +whether or not he broke his neck as he slipped down the damp ladder. + +Then he heard the clatter of the trap door as it fell, and he was left +alone in the dark. + +Once before Dick had been in a tight hole, and the lack of knife and +matches had almost been his undoing. Thereafter he had guarded against +this happening again. To this end he had contrived a secret pocket in +the lapel of his coat, where a knife always reposed. Also inside of the +sweatband of his hat were several matches rolled tightly in waterproof +silk. + +He got out the matches, and lighting one, looked about him. He surveyed +the room with a quick glance, for the matches were too precious to use +too many of them. His quick survey showed that the underground room was +bare of any furnishing; there was not even a blanket to sleep on. He +lighted a second match and inspected the floor, discovering that both +floor and walls were constructed of hand-hewed logs, and knew that it +would take a week to dig through them with nothing but a pocket knife +with which to work. + +The underground room was damp and musty, and Dick shivered. + +He wondered how long it would be before they took him out, and he began +to do calisthenics vigorously to restore some warmth to his already +chilled body. + +For a time he thought of crawling up the ladder and trying out his knife +on the trap door, but he had noted that it was of triple thickness of +inch boards and would probably blunt and dull his knife without making +any great impression. + +There was one hope that someone might come into the storehouse above and +he could rap on the door and let them know he was a prisoner there. + +After some moments of reflection, he decided that this would also be +unavailing, for the cook must also be one of the traitors. It was not +possible that he would be unaware of the secret room, and was in all +probability a member of the gang. + +Dick was a healthy boy, and soon his eyes grew drowsy with sleep. He +laid himself down on the hard floor, and as soon as his bones got +accustomed to the floor, dropped off to sleep, sensibly refusing to +worry and letting the morrow bring what it would. + +His last thought as he fell asleep was the hope that his companions +would not fall into a trap as he had, although he half expected that he +would be awakened any moment by the sound of the trap door opening, and +the entry of his chums as prisoners. + +But when he awoke in the morning, he found that he was still alone. He +unscrewed the cover of his watch face, and felt the hands, finding that +it was nearly eight o’clock. So far no one had come, and he wondered if +he was to be given anything to eat. Two weary hours dragged on, and then +the trap was opened, and a pack of food lowered to him, together with a +pail of coffee. He looked up and saw the cook and cookee peering down at +him. Evidently they were going to take no chances of a surprise on his +part, hence their coming in pairs. + +Dick called to them to ask when he was to be taken out, but they had +evidently been instructed to hold no words with him, for they quickly +lowered the trap and the barrels were again rolled into place. Dick’s +last sight as the trap closed was the leering face of the cookee. He +managed to eat his food in the dark, and resolved to ask for a blanket +when next they came to bring him food. + +The day dragged as though on leaden feet, but no one appeared again. +Dick thought that dinner would be brought to him, but none came, and he +figured that perhaps there were too many watchers who would be +inquisitive if they saw cooked food being carried to the storehouse. +Perhaps Garry and Phil were on the watch. This gave Dick a thrill, for +if his thoughts were true it meant that they had not been trapped in any +way. + +Frequently he unscrewed the face of his watch and felt the hands to note +the time. He resolved that his first step when he got back to +civilization would be to buy a watch that had a radium dial so he could +tell time in the dark. + +Dick had no idea but that he would get out, for he was one whose courage +did not fail. Then, too, he trusted in the cleverness of his companions +to get him out of the scrape. + +He was squatting on the floor Hindu fashion, about eleven o’clock, +thinking that he would soon lie down and try to get some sleep, when the +trap was opened, and Barrows’ voice bade him come up the ladder. + +He obeyed only too gladly, for the darkness and the chill of the cellar +were beginning to get his nerve. In the storehouse he found that Barrows +was accompanied by the LeBlanc brothers. This made any chance of a rough +and tumble fight with the manager and possible dash for freedom out of +the question. + +“Now there will be no fooling on your part, but you will sit down at +this case here and write a note to your friends telling them that you +have been captured by LeBlanc and are being held for ransom. That will +please them, eh, Jean?” + +LeBlanc gave a wolfish grin. “At least it make them hurry to rescue +their friend. They do not like me, those boys, any more than I like +them.” + +“Suppose I refuse to write that note, what then?” demanded Dick. + +“Why, I think we will let LeBlanc handle that end of it,” said Barrows. + +Jean LeBlanc’s face wore a diabolic smile as he took from his mouth the +big-bowled pipe that he was smoking. + +“Once I saw an Indian torture a man to get from him a secret,” he said. +“It was oh, so easy. All that he did was to thrust the man’s fingers, +one by one, into the pipe bowl, and after the fifth finger, the man gave +in.” + +Dick shuddered in spite of himself. He had heard of this Indian method +of torture, and knew that LeBlanc was not only capable of doing it, but +would take a fiendish pleasure in the operation. + +“Then if that fails, which I doubt, I give you warning that your chums +will be seized on some pretext and sent out seemingly to jail with +LeBlanc as their guard, and once away from the camp, will be given to +him to do as he pleases,” said Barrows. “Now do you think you will write +that letter?” + +Dick had resolved on submitting to the torture before writing the +letter, but this last threat made him change his mind. He could afford +to take no chances with the safety, and perhaps the lives, of his chums, +by refusing to write. In the meantime his mind was busy trying to +conjure up some way of warning them that it was a trap. + +He took the scrap of paper that was offered to him, and began to write. +As the letter drew near its close, he hastily constructed the cryptogram +which our readers are already aware of. + +Barrows took the note and read it carefully, turning it over to see that +there was not other writing on the back, and scanning it for some sign +of warning. Dick was afraid that he would decipher the simple code, but +was relieved when Barrows crumpled the note to give it the appearance of +having been carried some few hours, and then put it in his pocket. + +He was ordered back into the cellar, and there was nothing to do but +obey. The trap was closed and he heard the rolling of barrels, then all +was still. + +Dick wondered what plot was in the wind, but was unable to puzzle it +out. He finally decided that it was only another private scheme of +Barrows to get money, and a thousand dollars would be a pretty good +haul. + +He gave up trying to solve the riddle, and lying on the floor stared +into the darkness. + +There was one chance in a thousand that one of them might come alone in +the morning to bring him food, and he resolved to climb up the ladder +the moment he heard footsteps above him, and with his pocket knife try +to fight his way to freedom. + +With this comforting thought, he dropped off to sleep. + +Following the writing of the note, Barrows slipped back to his office +and told LeBlanc to make one attempt to seize the boys, then if that +failed, they would use their ruse to attract them from the camp. + +How this attempt succeeded has already been told, and all LeBlanc got +for his pains was a smash on the hand where Phil’s clubbed rifle had hit +him. + +He hastened back cursing, and told Barrows of the failure, and after +being upbraided was told to go to the rendezvous where the capture of +the boys was to be made. + +Barrows then went to the cookhouse, where the unkempt individual that +was to act as bearer was waiting, and gave him his final instructions. + +“Now,” said the vindictive manager, “we shall see who wins, a pack of +mere children, or Gene Barrows!” + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +MISERY CAMP + + +Now let us return to Garry and Phil, whom we left struggling in the +hands of their captors. Only one voice did they recognize in the orders +that were given, but this was enough to let them know that they were in +the worst kind of trouble. It was the voice of LeBlanc. + +“Phil, that’s LeBlanc’s voice or I’m crazy,” ejaculated Garry. + +“Absolutement, ma frien’s. It is LeBlanc. Once again I have you, and I +think this time you do not go until we have settled several old scores +that I have mark up against you.” + +As he spoke, several men took hold of the boys even more roughly, and in +a few moments their hands had been bound tightly behind their backs. + +LeBlanc gave the order to march, and the strange procession wended its +way through the woods. It was almost pitch dark, but they seemed to be +following a well defined trail, and the leader was sure of every step. +An unknown man grasped the arm of each boy and guided them so that they +would not bump into a tree, and at the same time prevented a chance of +escape. + +The boys took things philosophically, for there was nothing that could +be done with so many odds against them, and the darkness would have +hindered any chance of flight. They knew that they could not take more +than a dozen steps without smashing into the trees, and would soon be +captured. They resolved, the same train of thought running through the +minds of both of the captives, to wait for daylight before sizing +matters up. + +LeBlanc kept hurrying the men along, and they covered nearly a half a +dozen miles before a halt was called. Now the first flush of day was +appearing in the sky, and soon there would be light enough for them to +see in what manner of hands they had fallen. + +When dawn finally broke, both boys looked in amazement at the strange +figures that the light of day revealed. + +LeBlanc, of course, they recognized at once, and they had half expected +to see his brother. But all the others,—there were half a dozen not +counting the halfbreed,—were total strangers. The men were for the most +part large and swarthy, unkempt of hair and ragged as to clothes. Their +garments were torn and dirty, and here and there was a raggedly sewn +patch where the clothes threatened to give way entirely. + +They were taciturn men, and said little or nothing to each other, and +when they did, it was in a low tone. They paid absolutely no attention +to any order of LeBlanc, always turning to one of their number for +confirmation. + +This man, evidently the leader, was a perfect giant of a man. He stood, +so the boys judged, at least six feet four inches, and was +correspondingly large of frame. + +His face, what could be seen of it, for he wore a black, flowing, +tangled beard, was tanned by the sun, as one who lived entirely in the +open. His followers evidently respected, or at least feared him, for +whenever he gave an order, they sprang to do his bidding. + +Garry and Phil wondered who they were and what their business +was,—whether they were hunters or what. + +A fire was built and a meagre breakfast made. Phil and Garry were glad +of the food, for they were both hungry and tired. The eating done, +evident preparations were made to continue the march. Both boys were +cruelly tired. They had passed a strenuous day and night, and now they +wanted to sleep. But this was evidently not to be. + +They were slightly surprised also when they learned from the +conversation that LeBlanc was not to continue to the destination of the +others. + +“Now, King, you will take these boys to Misery Camp, and keep them until +you hear from those who have given you instructions. They will let you +know what to do, and you will be ver’ careful not to let them make the +conge, to get away, for then you will have me, Jean LeBlanc, to deal +with.” + +“I’ll keep my bargain, fer the fact that I give my word, an’ a King +allers keeps his word; but never think that I fear ye, Frenchman, fer I +fear no man livin’!” + +LeBlanc kept silence, and took his way back to the camp, while the weary +march forward was resumed. Short rests were given at long intervals and +the boys were thankful for the scant few minutes that were allowed. + +The men walked with the long swinging lope of the true woodsman, and +often the boys thought they would drop by the side of the road from +weariness. + +At noon a halt was called, and one of the men disappeared, to return +after several minutes with a half dozen grouse. The boys then knew +immediately that these men were outlaws of some sort, who paid no +attention to the law, for the close season was on all grouse and +pheasant. + +A fire was built and one of the men skinned the birds preparatory to +roasting them over the coals. Coffee was made and they were about to +drink it black, when Garry bethought himself of the sugar and condensed +milk in his knapsack. Thinking that a few favors on his part would +perhaps return to them later on, he offered it to the men. The boy’s +hands were untied, and he rummaged through his pack until he found the +articles. + +The men took them without a word and used them. They divided the food +fairly with all present. + +Garry tried to engage the men in conversation, but all attempts failed. +The rest and the dinner occupied about an hour and then the march began +again. + +“See here,” said Garry to the man addressed as King. “When are you going +to give us a decent rest? We’re played out.” + +“Well, you can be played out ef you want; you’ve got eight miles ahead +of you yet till we get to Misery Camp,” answered King. + +“What is Misery Camp, and who are you fellows anyway?” again asked +Garry. + +“Misery Camp is where we live, and we fellows be squatters. Now shut up +and walk,” and King relapsed into silence. + +Light instantly broke over the boys. They had often heard of the +squatters scattered over the woods of Maine, queer nomadic people, who +gleaned a precarious and lean living from the woods. Game and fish laws +meant nothing to them. Birds of all sorts were shot, and woe be unto the +deer that ran across the path of the squatter. Some little cultivation +was carried on, in the way of corn and potatoes. + +Wearily they trudged on. The last mile was almost agony to Phil and +Garry, but they clenched their teeth and carried on, determined if +possible to show no sign of weakening in front of these strange +creatures of the woods. + +At last Misery Camp was sighted. It was a patch of land that had been +cleared away, evidently the logs that were cut being used to make the +habitations of the squatters. A score of ragged children and some +slatternly women came out to meet them, looking curiously at the boys. +They were thrust into one of the cabins, and a guard established at the +door. + +The weary boys dropped on the rude pallets and fell asleep almost +instantly. So tired were they that it was the following morning before +they awoke. They stretched their arms and legs, and then tried to open +the door. The guard let them out, and warned them that any attempt at +flight would be followed immediately by a shot. + +“An’ I ain’t missed a squirrel in five year,” boasted their guard, who +was a boy of about their own age. + +Privately the boys resolved to make an escape as soon as possible, but +not while the rifle of the guard was trained on them, for they doubted +neither his ability to shoot as well as he said he could, nor the fact +that he would not hesitate to do as he threatened. + +They looked over the clearing with some curiosity. It fitted its name +well, for misery seemed to be on every side. King, who appeared to be +that in fact as well as in name, called the boys to his own shack for +breakfast. Here they found that the squatter leader had opened their +knapsacks, and the contents were strewn over a rude table. + +Both boys jumped to see if their wireless ’phone had been broken by the +curious squatter, but were relieved to find that it had not been +touched. + +“What’s that there contrivance?” asked King, pointing to the +radio-phone. + +“That’s a wireless telephone,” answered Garry. As he answered he had a +vision of a way out of their difficulty, but subsequent conversation +soon proved that they would not be able to put the plan into execution. + +“I seen a telephone onct,” said the squatter, “but it had wires. You +don’t mean that that thing will talk without a wire, do you?” + +“Yes it does. Would you like to have us set it up, and talk through it, +and have a message come through the air?” asked Garry, eagerly awaiting +the answer, for he thought that if he could get the wireless up he could +signal some way for help. + +“No, I don’t. I don’t believe that ye can talk through the air without a +wire, but ye might be able to an’ I ain’t agoin’ to take no chances.” + +The squatter did not seem interested in the contents of the knapsack +except for the little medicine case that Garry always carried. The boy +noted, too, that all the foodstuff was gone. + +“What be these things, medicine?” asked King. + +“Yes,” answered Garry briefly. + +“Got anything that’s good for chills and fever?” demanded the man. + +“Not that I know of; most of that stuff is for use in an accident. You +see it’s mostly antiseptic and bandage and stuff,” answered Garry. + +King picked up a bottle that was marked poison and had the familiar +skull and crossbones in red ink. + +“What’s this stuff with the red printin’?” he questioned. + +“That’s iodine; can’t you read?” Phil broke into the conversation. + +“No, can’t read, never went to school. What’s it for?” + +“Why, it’s to put on bad cuts so that you won’t get blood poisoning, and +it’s good if you strain your wrist or finger or something like that.” +answered Garry. + +“Wall, you don’t say so. Wonder if ’twould do this finger o’ mine any +good? I hurt it the other day when I slipped near the brook where I was +getting water. It’s my trigger finger too, and that’s a bad one to have +hurt.” + +Garry assured him that there was nothing better than the iodine and +offered to paint it for him. + +The squatter evidently decided that it could do no harm, and so Garry +inspected the swollen finger and liberally painted it. + +“That will help take the swelling out, and it will be all right in a +couple of days,” said Garry, as he put the cork back in the bottle and +laid it on the table. + +Then he noticed that a ragged youngster about three years old had been +watching the process with wide open eyes. Inquiry developed that it was +the squatter’s child, and it was evident that the youngster was the one +thing that the squatter king was really fond of. He told Garry and Phil +that the mother had died a year before, when they had been driven off a +timber tract by the lumbermen. Here the squatter launched into a tirade +against the lumber owners. + +The squatter idea is a peculiar one. They claim that the woods were made +for man to take as he found them and could not understand the right of +anyone to drive them out; yet they are responsible for great damage to +the woods. As, for instance, at this place, a couple of acres of fine +timber had been ruthlessly cut to make cabins for the nesters or +squatters, and to provide a place for the scanty crop of potatoes and +corn. Then too, many of the great forest fires are started by the +squatters. There is one case on record in Maine where the squatters set +fire to a whole mountain side, because they said that the blueberries +would grow better on the burned-over ground. + +Also the depredations against deer are numerous. Many a fine moose or +stag has been brought down to provide food for the nomads. + +The talk went back to the medicine again, and the squatter asked what +the skull meant on the bottle. + +“That’s put on to warn you that it’s poison,” Garry informed him. + +The work of painting his finger seemed to mollify the old man somewhat, +and he drew a little out of his shell, and Garry, seeing the +opportunity, asked him why they had been brought there. + +The squatter then told them that LeBlanc had appeared on the scene a day +or two before and told them that unless they agreed to keep some boys +who would be brought there prisoners, they would be driven from the +clearing by the lumberjacks. The squatters knew what this meant, since +they had planted their corn for the summer, and moving meant that the +lumberjacks would burn down the cabins and start them away. They knew +from experience that it was useless to fight, for the enemy, so they +considered the lumberjacks, would outnumber them ten to one. + +Garry saw through the whole scheme and guessed that Barrows had known of +their presence at the clearing and had kept them in mind for some time +when he might require them to help in some of his schemes. + +The squatter king took his rifle and offered to show the boys where +their planting was done, and more for the sake of getting a little +exercise than for any especial desire to see the corn patch, they +agreed. + +The other squatters eyed them as they passed in company with old King, +but said nothing. Some of the youngsters started to follow, but a mere +threatening look was enough to set them scurrying away. + +“You seem to be the boss around here,” remarked Garry. + +“Yes, I’m a King by name, and I aim to be king of these people so long +as I breathe,” answered the man gravely; and Garry, looking at his +immense frame and stern eye, thought he had a good chance of continuing +in his royal capacity. + +They were looking at the corn patch with only a pretended interest, when +they heard a scream from King’s cabin. + +“That’s my baby,” said King in a frightened tone. “Something’s hurt +her!” + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +GARRY SAVES A LIFE + + +They rushed back to the cabin and a sight met their eyes that stunned +them all. + +The youngster with childish curiosity, had climbed up on the table and +captured the bottle of iodine. It was immediately evident that the child +had drunk some of the poison, for its lips were stained. There was no +telling how much the child had drunk, for the bottle had fallen to the +floor, spilling some of the liquid over the floor. + +The old man seized his child in his arms, and tears began to roll down +his cheeks. + +“Oh, she’s going to die, she’s going to die,” he moaned. + +Garry’s brain spun with thought. + +“Quick,” he shouted to the old man. “There’s one thing that will save +her. What did you do with that foodstuff you took out of the pack +there?” + +The sharpness of his tone startled the old man into activity. The words +of Garry that there was one way to save her galvanized him into action. + +“It’s up there on the shelf back of you. Can ye save my baby? Hurry! +Save her an’ there’s nothin’ on this earth I won’t do for ye!” + +Garry had fortunately remembered that he had in his knapsack a package +of cornstarch that they had brought to make thickening for gravy in case +they did any cooking. Garry, and for that matter both of his chums, were +pastmasters in the art of first aid to the injured. They knew that the +antidote for iodine was cornstarch. + +Rushing to the shelf, Garry snatched the package and tore open the top. +His eyes fell on a can of mustard and he seized that. + +On the ground outside the door Garry had noted a campfire with an old +tin pail swung across it on a branch held up by forked sticks. Working +with the speed of an express train, he dashed through the door and +grabbed the pail of hot water. + +Back in the cabin, he took a tin cup from the table, and hastily melting +some of the mustard, made an emetic. This he gently forced the +frightened child to swallow. Soon the emetic had the desired effect, and +by this time Garry had moistened the cornstarch to the consistency of +cream. + +While the frightened squatter looked on helplessly, Garry fed the +cornstarch to the baby, who seemed instinctively to trust the boy, and +made little fuss over taking the pasty drink. + +Throughout the morning Garry, with almost the skill of a trained nurse, +watched the child’s breathing and kept count of her pulse. As nothing +developed to show that the child was in any danger, Garry privately +formed the opinion that the iodine had not gotten much further than the +inside of her mouth, and that the burn of the poison had prevented her +from drinking any great quantity of it. Then, too, the stain on the +floor, where the liquid had sunk into the rough boards, was large enough +to denote that most of the contents of the small bottle were on the +floor and had not been swallowed by the child. + +As the youngster brightened up, the relief of the father was almost +pitiful to see. He grasped the hand of Garry and in broken, halting +words thanked him for saving the life of the baby. At the door was a +throng of curious squatters, and when they saw that the King baby was +going to live, gradually broke away and returned to their duties. All +this time Phil had stood by ready to lend a hand, in case Garry needed +assistance. + +“Boys,” said the old man, “I’ve never broken my word before, but this is +one time that I’m going to. It will mean that we’ll be driven off here, +but that can’t be helped. You can go away whenever you want to. My +promise to that Frenchman ain’t nothin’ to me since you’ve saved my +baby.” + +This was what Garry had hoped would happen. He did not want to trade the +baby’s safety for freedom, but there was still Dick to consider. He +might be and probably was in grave danger at that moment, and it +behooved the boys to return as speedily as possible to the lumber camp +to set in motion the machinery to effect Dick’s release, for they had +decided that Dick was probably a prisoner at the camp. Of course they +did not know of the hidden room under the storehouse, where, at that +moment, their friend was still languishing. + +“I’ll make you a promise now,” said Garry. “It happens that my father +owns this tract of land, and I’ll give you my word that you will not be +forced to move from here for the rest of the summer. Of course the +logging will soon extend in this direction and you will be forced off, +but until that happens you can stay here unmolested. Now we’re going +back to start a young war at the camp, and release a chum of ours who is +held prisoner there.” + +“You better stay here for awhile, for part of the word of the Frenchman +was that another boy would be brought here to be kept. Now if you boys +stay here and pretend to be prisoners when LeBlanc comes with your +friend, you can wait till he goes and then all be freed together. In +case there’s any trouble comes, I guess my men and I can take care of +it.” + +“That’s fine,” said Garry. “I don’t think there’s anything better that +can be done. When did you expect LeBlanc to come with the other boy?” + +“The Frenchman was aiming to get back here by tomorrow night,” replied +King. “He’d have to start in the night time, which will probably be +tonight, and get here some time tomorrow afternoon.” + +“How will LeBlanc be able to find his way in the dark?” asked Garry. + +“I left one of my men behind to meet him and guide him,” answered the +old man. Then a thought struck him, and he asked: + +“What are you all such powerful enemies for?” + +Garry then told him some of the adventures that they had encountered, +and the part that the halfbreed had played in them. When he came to the +tale of how LeBlanc had kidnapped little Patty Graham, the old man’s +eyes flashed fire. + +“He’s a treacherous weazel, that halfbreed. I don’t mind some of the +other things he did, but any man that will steal a person’s baby ought +to be cut into pieces. I’ll tell you that. When he comes here with your +friend, we’ll just tie him up and keep him here and you can do what you +want to with him.” + +This seemed like a stroke of real luck for the boys. It would mean +LeBlanc would be safely held until time for them to have him taken to +prison to pay the much deserved penalty for his crimes, and at the same +time would rid them of a dangerous enemy, as well as lessening by one +the allies of the rascally Barrows. + +The rest of the day passed quickly, and they told the squatter king many +of the things of the outside world. He had heard little or nothing of +the great cities, and had never seen a moving picture nor ridden in a +railroad train. But he knew the woods as few men do, except perhaps the +Hermit, although there was no comparison between this giant of the +woods, who could neither read nor write, and the old recluse, who was +eternally surprising the boys with a quotation from some poet, or a +snatch of Latin. + +“Now, Phil,” said Garry, when they were left alone for awhile by the +squatter, “let’s plan a war campaign. As soon as Dick gets here, we will +let him have a good rest, and then hike for the camp. We’ll make it to +get to the small lake without anyone seeing us, and there we’ll get the +canoe and portage it through the woods to the other lake. There we can +hide out and get the dope on the timber thieves. Once we have done that, +we have only to draw in the strings, and we’ll have the whole job done.” + +Phil assented to this as the wisest course to follow, and night coming +on, they turned in. The squatter had insisted on giving up his own cabin +to them, which although poor and bare, was the best one on the clearing. + +They whiled away the next day waiting the arrival of Dick, and hoping +that no change would be made in the plans of Barrows to prevent Dick’s +being sent to Misery Camp. + +It was late afternoon when a man whom the squatter king had sent into +the woods to act as lookout came running back. + +“He’s got a young fellow with him,” he told the squatter leader. + +“Is it the Frenchman?” demanded the old man. + +“Yes, it’s a Frenchman, but,” and here the boys met with a +disappointment. “It’s not the one that came the other time, but a fellow +that looks like him.” + +“Tough luck; that’s Baptiste, not Jean. Look King, I’ve changed my mind +about having him captured. Let him go back and let the camp think that +we are held prisoners safely here. That will allow us to work with +greater freedom. Now we’ll duck under cover and you meet the halfbreed +and bring Dick here.” + +“Just as you say,” said the old man. “All you have to do around here +from now on is to say the word, and everyone in Misery will do just as +you order. I will, and I’ll see to it that the others toe the line.” + +“Funny he don’t come,” muttered Garry. + +“Oh, he won’t be here for a time yet,” said the chap who had brought the +warning. “I was in a tree top, and could see way down to a clearing, and +saw them there taking a rest. Ain’t nobody on the clearin’ here that can +run as fast as I can, and I came quicker than ever to tell you about +it.” + +“Had we better let Baptiste see us so that he will know we are still +here, Garry?” asked Phil. + +“That’s a good suggestion. Suppose you station a guard with a rifle +outside the door, King, and let Baptiste have a peek at us when he gets +here,” directed Garry turning to the squatter. + +“That’s what I’ll do. Here you, Job,” turning to the youth who had +brought news of the coming of Baptiste and Dick. “You take your stand +outside there like as if you were guardin’t the door. Now I’ll get out +o’ here and meet them.” + +The squatter king hastened out, while Job stood before the shack door +with his rifle clutched in his hands. Garry and Phil, with some +excitement, waited the coming of Dick. + +In a few moments they heard someone approaching, and King threw open the +door. “Here’s your friend,” he whispered, and thrust someone in. +Bewilderment spread over the faces of the boys. + +It was not Dick who entered the cabin, but Art Howells! + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +A GOOD DEED REWARDED + + +The dumbfounded boys could only stare at Howells. + +“Where did you come from and where is Dick?” cried Garry, when he had +recovered his voice sufficiently to speak. + +“If you will untie my hands first, I will feel better and be able to +think. My wrists are all raw from trying to work the ropes off, but the +man that tied me up knew his business too well,” said Howells. + +Since the boys’ belongings had been restored them by King, they had +their knives, and it was a small matter to cut the bonds. + +“Now what do you mean by Dick being with me?” asked Howells. + +“Why, Dick has been a prisoner at the camp, and we were given to +understand that he was to be brought here to join us. We were prisoners +here ourselves; fell into a foolish trap because we were too sure of +ourselves. Fortunately, because of a good turn that we were able to do, +we have been set free by the squatter chief,” answered Garry. + +“What do you mean free, with an armed guard outside the door?” demanded +Art. “I should say you were pretty closely kept in confinement.” + +“That is only a ruse so the suspicion of whoever brought any prisoner +here would not be raised. As soon as he goes we will be free to do what +we please. Now how did you come to be captured?” went on Garry. + +“Oh, I made a fool blunder too. I wanted to see you chaps to tell you +that a lot of lumber was being shipped from a place called Harrison. +It’s about five miles away from Dutton Lake, so that seems to show that +the lake figures in the stealing of the timber. I crawled into camp one +night and went to your shack, and walked in expecting to find you +sleeping there. Instead I ran right into the arms of a couple of huskies +who had me overpowered before I knew what was going on. I found out in a +few minutes that the pair were LeBlanc and that precious scoundrel that +tried to do me up that night you chaps appeared so providentially on the +scene.” + +“Did Barrows say anything about what had been going on in the camp, or +drop any word that would give us a hint as to his plans?” put in Phil. + +“No, he was very closemouthed. There was a swarthy chap with him, who +from your description I take to be Jean LeBlanc. All that was said was +that I should be taken to a place called Misery Camp. From the looks of +this place I judge that is where I am now. What have you run into, a +squatter camp?” + +“Yes, you’ve hit the nail on the head.” + +Garry was about to speak further, when the door opened and the squatter +chief came in. + +“That fellow is gone, and you kin come out any time you want,” was the +welcome news that he brought. The three followed him into the sunlight +and then decided that a start should be made for the lumber camp at +once. + +“That is, unless you are too tired to start now, Art,” said Garry. + +“Oh, I’m feeling fit as a fiddle. I don’t know that I’d care to walk all +the way back, but we can save time by going part of the way,” remarked +Art cheerfully. + +The packs were brought out and soon all was ready for the return trip. +They were surprised at the appearance of King with his rifle, and feared +for a moment that he had thought better of allowing them to go and was +going to make them prisoners again. + +“Just decided that I’ll go with you fellows. If there’s goin’t to be +fightin’, and I think there is, I want to be in it. Besides, you won’t +be safe wanderin’ around through strange country alone. I’ll see that +you get where you want to go in safety, and mebbe you’ll find that a +little bit of extra help won’t come in amiss? Do you want me to come?” +concluded King. + +The light of battle was in the old man’s eyes, and Garry at once decided +that he might prove a valuable ally in case trouble arose and welcomed +him to come with them. + +“We’ll take a little different way back, so we won’t be liable to run +into any of that gang from the camp. We’ll go until you fellows get +tired, then eat, and you can roll in while I watch for you.” + +This was what they wanted to do, and so they agreed to follow his advice +entirely on the return trip. + +“What about some of the men coming to your place to see if we are all +right, or if they bring Dick with them, what then?” questioned Garry. + +“In case any o’ them come here from now on, they’ll get a treat they +won’t like. I told my men to seize anyone who came, and if the fat boy +comes, he is to be guided to a place where me and my men know, and then +he can join us,” answered King. + +The squatter seemed to have covered everything necessary, and off +started the quartet. King led them on a roundabout trail, and they +walked until darkness fell, when Howells declared that he would like to +rest. + +For fear of possible detection by some prowler from the camp, no fire +was built, and a cold bite was eaten. King refused to let any of the +others do any work, and himself gathered enough boughs for them all to +sleep on. Garry insisted that when King had watched for a while, he +waken either himself or Phil, and they could provide a relief for a +while. King protested that he was able to watch the entire night, but +Garry reminded him that on the coming day there might be strenuous work, +and he would not want to be handicapped by fatigue. This finally made +the old man agree to waken Garry at midnight and let him stand a watch. + +True to his word, King shook Garry about midnight. + +“Don’t believe there’s any real need o’ watchin’, everything been quiet +so far; but there’s nothin’ like bein’ on the safe side.” + +Garry looked to see that his rifle was loaded and ready, then took a +seat under a tree where he could be comfortable and yet hear anything. +King laid down on the ground, scorning the boughs, and was fast asleep +in a moment. + +After about two hours Garry began to feel drowsy, and rather than run +the risk of dropping off to sleep, he woke Phil, who had had a good +sleep and was able to stand sentry for the rest of the night. + +After they had eaten in the morning, the old man asked what the next +step was. + +Garry had been thinking it over as they ate, and so he asked King if he +knew the region around Kanamo Lake. King answered that he knew every +inch of the territory in that part of the state, and so it was decided +that he lead them by a roundabout route to the lake shore. Here they +could hide out in a safe place, and after dark could portage the canoe +across the timberland to Dutton Lake. Garry was determined to try and +catch the thieves at work that night. Then plans could be made for a +raid on the camp and the rescue of Dick could be effected. + +It was almost nightfall when they reached the lake shore, and they +thought best to turn in for a while before making for the spot where +they had concealed the canoe. + + * * * * * + +To return now to Dick, who had been left all this time in the cellar. +Food was brought to him on occasion, but always by two or three in +company, and he had no opportunity of trying to fight his way from the +cellar. Once when the cook and cookee came, he attempted to bribe them +to let him escape, but they turned a deaf ear to his words. + +Back at the office, Barrows was having a council with his henchmen. +These consisted of the two LeBlancs, the cookee and the boss sawyer. + +“Things are beginning to get too brisk here, so we’ll make a good +cleanup and light out,” said Barrows. “I didn’t expect when we started +this thing that there would be all the trouble that has since come upon +us. We’ve all done enough now to land us in prison, what with this +kidnapping and everything. Catching Howells around here was what has +made me suspicious. There’s no telling what he has done on the outside. +He may have written to Boone and told him what was going on, and that +would sure spill the beans, for Boone would probably order me off the +place and give me my walking papers. Then we would be all done. What I +propose is this: We have already cut a good bit of timber and that has +been sawed, thanks to the saw I had hidden in the storehouse. We would +have wasted time, as usual, waiting for another, but this suits my ends +better. All this timber has been left on the tote road, and tonight +we’ll make a number of trips and clean it up. Tomorrow night we’ll make +a grand cleanup and then fire the sawmill and wreck the machinery and +light out. By the time they have things ready to fix up, Boone will be +too late to keep his contracts and my work will have been done,” Barrows +concluded as he rubbed his hands in evil satisfaction over his +treachery. + +“And the boys?” inquired Jean LeBlanc softly. + +“I know what’s on your mind, LeBlanc. Ugh, I’d hate to have you for an +enemy. I suppose you want to stick a knife in them and put them out of +the way.” + +“That would be safest. They know too much,” answered the halfbreed. + +“Well, I have a better plan than that. You remember we wrote a letter to +decoy them away and mentioned a ransom. What’s to prevent us from really +getting one from old man Boone? We could stick him up for a big sum, and +that would be clear profit aside from what the Carson people are paying +us. King will keep them till we arrange things and then we could free +them. After that, LeBlanc, you can do what you like; it will be out of +my hands then. Now we’ll start for the lake. Will the boat be there at +the usual time?” and he turned to the boss sawyer. + +“Usual time,” laconically answered the man. + +The door was thrown open, and a man walked into the room. + +“So it’s the Carson people that are back of you this time, eh, Barrows? +Guess I got here just in time!” + +The men gasped in amazement, for there stood “Moose” Boone. + +In the face of this crisis, the only one to keep his head was LeBlanc. + +“Seize him,” he whispered sibilantly to his brother, in French. + +Before Mr. Boone could make a move, he was grabbed by the powerful +brothers. One of them clasped a hand over his mouth, and without a word, +as though they had practiced for this very moment, Jean snatched a +soiled bandanna from his pocket, and in another minute Mr. Boone was +effectually gagged. + +Barrows also had sprung into action. Rummaging around under the pine +table that served as a desk, he brought forth a length of rope, and soon +Boone was tightly bound. + +“Carry him over to the storehouse. Don’t put him in the cellar. This +makes things better. We can keep him prisoner for several days and clean +up. Lively now,” ordered Barrows. + +“Moose” Boone was carried to the storehouse and unceremoniously dumped. +He lay on the floor thinking how foolish he had been to come alone to a +camp where he knew there was treachery afoot, but now it was too late to +cry over spilled milk. He wondered where the boys were, since he had +seen no sign of them about the camp. + +His reason for coming was the note that Garry had sent him, and which +the hermit had succeeded in having posted. + +He twisted around several times in an effort to relieve the pain in his +arms and feet from lying tied on the hard floor. + +Nearly two hours passed, and then the door was softly unlocked and +opened. In stepped the cook. Mr. Boone wondered what was to happen now, +and he received the surprise of his life when the cook fished out his +knife and proceeded to cut the bonds that bound him. + +“Have you come to the conclusion that this was a fool thing to do? I am +thankful, of course, and will see that you are let go when the rest of +this gang is rounded up,” said Boone. + +The cook did not speak until he had cut the bonds. + +“First, Mr. Boone, I’ll tell you something and then I’ll show you +someone. I don’t suppose you will remember a cold spring day nearly +twenty-five years ago on the Umculcos, when you risked your own life to +save a lumberjack that was trying to ride a log and fell into the river +with the logs crushing down about him?” + +Boone’s mind travelled swiftly back to the day, although he had not +given it a thought for years. + +“Yes, I remember pulling a man out, and then falling sick from the cold, +and when I got well the man I had pulled out was gone,” he answered. + +“Well, I was the man you pulled out. I left the camp because I was only +a fool young fellow and they made so much fun of me for falling in that +I picked up and got out. I never knew you were the man until I saw you +tonight and hitched your name up with the man who saved me. Now I’ll +show you something like I promised.” + +He rolled the barrels away and raised the trap. “Come up,” he called +into the darkness. + +Dick awoke from a troubled sleep and painfully crawled up the ladder. It +took a few moments for his eyes to get accustomed to the light, and then +he looked as though he saw a ghost. + +“Uncle,” he almost shouted, for so it was that he always addressed Mr. +Boone. + +They clasped hands with a hearty good will and were about to exchange +notes when the door was thrown open and Barrows and the two LeBlancs +entered. + +Each held a revolver with a steady hand. + +“So, cook, you’ve turned traitor, have you? Well, it just makes another +prisoner. Now Boone, it’s no use trying to do anything. Most of the men +in the camp are in my pay, and just to be sure that we clean up tonight +and tomorrow night as we had planned, we have seized all the men we are +not sure of and have them herded in the bunkhouse and under heavy guard. +This time we’ll succeed!” + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +THE CAPTURE + + +We left Garry, Phil and Howells with the squatter king on the lake shore +waiting for darkness. When it fell, they retrieved the canoe from its +hiding place and started across the timberland to Dutton Lake. The trip +occupied nearly three hours, although they made excellent speed. + +The faint light of the stars pierced the blackness of the forest, so +they did not have to stumble along, although the greatest of caution was +exercised every moment. + +They reached the lake without encountering a person, and then launched +the canoe. They did not dare trust the weight of the four to the frail +craft, and so it was planned that King and Phil should remain behind, +while Art and Garry paddled out into the lake. They did not have to wait +a great while until the chugging of the powerful engine in the motor +boat was heard. + +Paddling with the noiseless stroke of the Indians, they followed after a +reasonable time had elapsed. They had taken only a few strokes when Art +whispered: + +“Here, we’re going at this thing wrong. When that raft is loaded and +starts back across the water, it will make too much speed for us to +follow. Suppose we start now for the other side of the lake. Then we can +lie off shore and wait for its arrival and see who meets the raft to +unload it. That will complete your evidence, and we’ll duck out for the +camp and somehow get hold of Dick. What say?” + +Without a word, Garry, who was paddling stern, gave his paddle a twist +and the canoe turned in its course. They reached the other side and then +lay off shore as agreed, giving the paddles an occasional twist to keep +the canoe from drifting, for a gentle breeze was stirring the lake. + +After a long wait they heard the approach of the motor boat, which, as +was customary, was running without lights. Far down the shore they saw a +light appear as though some one were flashing a lamp. It was probably to +guide the boat to its destination in the darkness. When the boat reached +its objective point, they paddled noiselessly to within a few feet of +it, and beached the canoe. Walking with the stealth of Indians, they +came close to where the boat was being unloaded. + +“By jove, I know that voice,” whispered Garry, as he heard a man ask: + +“So this is how the trick is done? Pretty clever, I call it. Steal the +timber and then raft it across to where you have your trucks waiting and +hustle it to the railroad spur. Mighty good work on the part of Barrows. + +“That’s Carson himself; used to be associated with Father,” whispered +Garry. He and Howells were hiding back of a tree, well away from danger +of being seen. At that moment Carson struck a match to light his pipe. + +“Get a good look at him, we will want to identify him in court if +necessary,” said Garry. Howells nudged him to make him understand that +he had done so. + +“Now wait here,” whispered Garry. Howells watched in amazement as Garry +crept to the water’s edge and noiselessly waded in. He made no sound as +he swam. When he came back, dripping wet, Howells wanted to ask a score +of questions, but forebore for fear of being heard. + +He was about to come closer and whisper, when a form crept up to them +and a low voice said: + +“So we meet again.” + +It was Baptiste LeBlanc. The Frenchman then lifted his voice and called +for the others. But he did not get very far. Howells struck with all his +strength and his hard knuckles took the halfbreed on the point of the +jaw. LeBlanc dropped like a stone. + +“Come, Garry, this way quick,” called Art. There was no need of +whispering now, for the men who had been unloading had heard the alarm +and there was the sound of rushing feet. + +“Into the canoe, Art. They can’t follow us,” said Garry. + +Howells had intended a dash into the woods, where there was less +likelihood of being caught, but he obeyed Garry, knowing that he had +some plan in view. They pushed the canoe into the water, springing into +it as they did. It was lucky that Howells was an experienced canoeist, +else the frail boat would have been overturned. As it was, they got a +good start, and in a moment were bending to their paddles with all their +might and strength. + +“What’s to stop them following us in the motor boat? We should have +taken to the woods,” remonstrated Art. + +“Faster, I’ll tell you later,” answered Garry breathlessly. At that +minute they heard loud imprecations from the shore. + +By this time they were well away from shore and out of danger of a +possible shot. + +Garry began to laugh. + +“No wonder they are shouting and cursing there. I swam to the boat that +time I left you and cut the wires on the engine; and to be sure, I took +out the spark plugs, and have them in my pocket. It will be some time +before they get that boat into condition to chase us!” + +“Good boy,” said Art admiringly. + +The return across the lake was without eventful occurrence, however, for +with them was the hermit. + +Garry greeted him warmly. “What news?” he asked. + +“I fear I am the bearer of bad news,” said the hermit. + +“Your father has come to the camp and been caught, so I judge from what +I heard said by two men a while ago as I lay close to the road that +leads here. Also many of the lumberjacks are kept captive in one of the +shacks, and a heavy guard has been set over them. I think we had better +go for help; we can’t battle them alone, our numbers are too few.” + +Garry was for going at once to the rescue of his father, but the others +restrained him. + +“We can’t do anything there, and we can be of great help on the outside. +There is a sheriff in town, and we can get word to him, and have him +round up a posse sufficiently large to capture the whole outfit,” +advised Art. + +Reluctantly Garry agreed that this was the wisest thing to do. + +“King, guide us around so that we can avoid the camp, but get to the +road that leads to town. We’ll get a posse and give them a battle,” +directed Garry. + +Without a word, King led the way, and the others followed. + + * * * * * + +In the meantime, Mr. Boone and Dick had been led from the storehouse and +taken to the bunkhouse, where the rest of the prisoners were. + +There were shouts of welcome when some of the old woodsmen saw Mr. +Boone. Although he was the owner of the timber tract, and their +employer, they hailed him as “Moose” and shook his hand energetically. + +“By gosh. I’m ashamed to look you in the face, Moose,” cried one of the +lumberjacks. “To think we let a bunch like that crowd outside there put +it over on us; men that have fought with rifle and peavy stick when some +crowd tried to steal the river from us. Gosh, if we had a few axes and +peavy sticks now we could get out there and make that bunch look sick, +but all have rifles and revolvers. Barrows must’ve had a regular armory +with him.” + +They were still talking and trying without success to puzzle a way out +of their predicament, when Dick gave a shout of joy. + +“There’s my knapsack. That lets me see light right now!” + +The men looked at him in astonishment. How a mere knapsack could help +them was not to be understood. + +“That was chucked in here by one of the men yesterday, before we were +captured. He saw it in the shack, and remembering it belonged to one of +you, took it for safe keeping. It was Tom there, who brought it.” + +Tom was the man who had taken them on the coon hunt, and one they had +been suspicious of, but here he was with the loyal men. + +Dick hurriedly opened the knapsack. Yes, there it was, safe and sound, +the wireless outfit! + +“Now one of you fellows get up there and dig a hole in the roof; it only +need be a small one, that I can slide this aerial up through. It ought +not to take more than an hour.” + +“We haven’t any knife,” said one of the men. “They took away all our +knives and matches from us.” + +Dick secured his knife from its secret pocket in the lapel, and handed +it to one of the men. + +“One of you set to work, and the others keep talking so that the guards +outside will not become suspicious and look in here.” + +“Are you going to try something with the radio-phone,” asked Mr. Boone, +who was the only one who grasped what Dick’s intentions were. + +“Yes; it’s our only chance. I happened to notice that there were two +aerials over houses in the last town we passed through before coming to +the camp, and I saw some radio apparatus in a store window, so evidently +some one there has an outfit. Fortunately I have the receiving apparatus +here as well as a sender, and we can find out if my message is received +by anyone.” + +As he talked, he adjusted the apparatus, ready to send his plea for help +through space and hope that someone would be listening in. + +“Hurry!” he called to the man who was boring through the board roof with +the knife. “It’s almost time for the usual radio broadcasting stations +to stop sending, and I want to get someone while they are still +listening in, just as the broadcasting station closes.” + +“There, guess that’s all right, unless you want it a little bigger,” +said the man who had been working. + +Dick looked up at the hole and saw that it would do all right. + +Most of the men were frankly incredulous. The thought of talking through +a ’phone that had no wires was a riddle to them, as few or none of them +knew anything about radio. + +One of them suggested that instead of wasting time with such a “fool +contrivance,” they try to tear away the boards from the roof and take a +chance on overpowering the guards. This was discouraged by the others +who, though they were by no means cowardly, knew it would be foolhardy +to face guns with only their bare hands. + +“Let’s give the boy a chance with his infernal machine first,” advised a +grizzled old lumberjack. “Then if it don’t work, we can try something +else.” + +Dick adjusted the aerial, and then tuning up, got ready to talk into the +transmitter. + +“Some of you men keep talking over there by the door, and the rest of +you get near the windows and block anyone from seeing in. Don’t talk too +loud, just enough to cover my voice.” + +For nearly ten minutes Dick repeated over and over again: + +“S. O. S. Send a sheriff with large posse to Boone’s camp. Owner and +some of men held prisoners. Answer if you get message.” + +Then there was a crackling sound in the receivers that were clasped to +his head, and with a thrill he knew that someone was trying to get him. + +He adjusted the tuning apparatus with trembling fingers. The voice still +sputtered and crackled. Finally he got the right wave length, and heard +a welcome voice. + +“Hello, are you sending help call?” + +“Yes,” almost shouted Dick. “Who are you?” + +“Brown talking. My father is sheriff. Are you in earnest?” + +“Yes, surely. Hurry posse on way. You’ll need thirty or forty men. We +are held prisoners in bunkhouse here. Captors are all armed. Be careful. +This is last call; act quick, as I’m going to pack up radio for fear I +will be discovered and apparatus broken. Goodnight.” + +“Going for Dad now, goodnight,” came the voice. There was a sputter, +then silence. + +Dick turned to the men, his face gleaming with pleasure. + +“There will be a posse on the way in a short time. The radio worked,” he +announced. + +The little group of men burst into a cheer and were silenced only by the +threat of the guards outside to come in and make them stop. + +Feeling that they had done all that could be done, they prepared to turn +in and wait the coming of the morn with its posse headed by Sheriff +Brown. + +The men rolled in, but Dick was too excited to sleep, and he told Mr. +Boone, in a low tone, of all that had transpired since they had reached +the camp. Of course he was unable to tell of the way in which the timber +was stolen, as he had not seen his chums when they returned from their +expedition that night he was captured. + +Mr. Boone was silent for some few minutes after Dick had concluded his +talk. He was worried about Garry and Phil, and Dick, noting his silence, +asked him what the trouble was. + +When he found the reason for Mr. Boone’s worry, he endeavored to cheer +him up. + +“The chances are that they have not fallen into the hands of anyone at +the camp here, else they would have been brought here with us. I am +certain that they have discovered some clue and are following it up. +Very likely they are searching for me, as they of course do not know I +am here.” + +Being ignorant of all that had transpired, Dick did not know how near at +that moment his chums were. + +As they talked, they were being guided towards the road by King. It was +necessary to make a wide detour in order to avoid running into a stray +member of the camp traitors’ party. + +Garry was well satisfied with part of the night’s work. In the first +place, he had proof that Carson, his father’s business enemy, was at the +bottom of the whole mess, and in the second place, he felt that he had +so effectively disabled the motor launch that no more timber would be +stolen that night. By the next day, he expected to have the whole gang +rounded up. + +They finally reached the road, and were half way to the town, when they +heard the sound of what they thought was a large auto truck coming +towards them. + +When they drew near the truck, they saw a dozen rifles leveled at them, +and a stern voice told them to halt. They feared for a moment that they +had walked into a new trap. + +One of the men leaped from the truck and asked them who they were and +what their business was. + +“My name is Boone,” answered Garry, acting as the spokesman for his +little party. “I am on my way to try and locate the sheriff of the +county, as my father and friends are held prisoner at the Boone lumber +cutting camp.” + +“Well, I’m the sheriff, and I’m on my way there now. We’ll look you over +in a moment and see if you’re all right.” + +The words of the sheriff surprised Garry. + +“How did you know that you were wanted at the camp?” + +“My boy picked a message out of the air with his radio, and that’s how +we found out,” answered the sheriff. + +Garry gave a shout of joy. “Good for Dick, he managed somehow to get a +chance to use his wireless.” + +“Now,” said the sheriff, “lower the muzzles of those rifles and come +forward slowly. My men have you covered and you have no chance for any +monkey business.” + +Knowing that they could soon convince the sheriff of their statements, +they did as they were bade. When they came into the light cast by the +headlights of the truck, the sheriff at once recognized Art Howells. + +“Hello, Art, guess that is all I want to know. These fellows all right? +I know you well enough to take your word for it.” + +“They are absolutely O.K., Sheriff,” answered Art. “We were on our way +to summon you when you met us.” + +Howells’ words satisfied the sheriff, and they proceeded to get +acquainted all around. Garry asked if that was the pretext of the posse, +for he counted only fifteen men, and was relieved when he was told that +another truck with the same number of men was following them, but had +been obliged to stop for a short time on account of engine trouble. + +As they spoke they heard the rumble of an engine and a short time later +the second truck hove into view. + +“It lacks about an hour and a half of daylight, so I think we ought to +be getting on. If possible we can surprise them in the dark, that would +win half the battle for us. Not that I expect there will be much of a +fight, when they see that the law is after them,” said the sheriff. + +“I don’t think I would trust the authority of the law half as much as +our rifles,” said Garry. “Those men are desperate, some of them, and if +they see prison staring them in the face, they will fight all the +harder, figuring that they might as well be taken for sheep as for +lambs,” said Garry. “Besides, they have two bad men with them, meaning +the two halfbreeds, Jean and Baptiste LeBlanc. Jean is already wanted +for a half a dozen serious crimes, including kidnapping and setting fire +to forests; also he is an escaped jail bird. With that kind, it means +fight to the end before being taken.” + +“Come to think of it, I’ve seen a notice in my office offering a reward +for his capture. I’d like to get that chap, and I could use the reward,” +said the sheriff. + +They had ridden as they talked, and soon were on the outskirts of the +camp. + +But something had gone wrong. A volley of shots whistled at them from +cover, and they were forced to beat a short retreat instead of springing +a surprise on their quarry as they had intended to do. + +“Now, that’s funny; how did they get on to that?” muttered the sheriff. + +It later developed that Barrows had posted sentinels in the woods along +the road, and as soon as their approach was noted, they had, by a +pre-arranged signal, passed the word of the coming to the posse. + +This word having been received at the camp, hasty preparations had been +made to receive them. The prisoners, about twenty in all, had been +marched at the points of guns to the storehouse, and there were forced +to enter the storehouse. There was hardly room enough for them, and +little air, but they were crowded in like so many sardines in a can, +while the enemy fortified themselves in the log bunkhouse. + +The opening volley of shots had come from the sentinels who had closed +in and fired as they ran for shelter to the bunkhouse. + +“Well, we’re stumped for a minute now,” said the sheriff. “They could +hold us off for a long time in that bunkhouse. It is built of solid +logs, and bullets, unless they were aimed at the windows, would have no +effect on that wood. We’ve got to think up some way of rushing ’em or +smoking ’em out. Anyone got a plan in mind?” + +“Yes, sir, I think I have,” spoke up Phil. “As soon as it gets just a +little bit lighter we can rush one of the trucks back through the woods +to the sawmill, and there we can sheath the truck with some of that +timber. A very thick bulwark can be made, and that will halt the +bullets. Half of the men can stay near the bunkhouse drawing fire with +their rifles while the truck is being fixed.” + +“But what good is that going to do us?” broke in the sheriff. + +“Just let me finish. I know that there are three or four sticks of +dynamite at the sawmill, that were part of the lot bought to blast away +the stumps where the mill and camp shacks were built. With what wire I +have in my pack, and some of the batteries from my wireless, I can rig +up a small mine at the side of the log hut, where there is no window. +The shield on the truck would be to allow us to get there in safety.” + +“But wouldn’t that be an awful thing to do, Phil?” asked Garry. “We +couldn’t blow those men up without warning.” + +“No, that isn’t my idea. I would have one of the party carry a flag of +truce into the camp and explain to the men what had been done, and give +them two minutes to surrender. If they did not, then go ahead and blow +her up. Few would be hurt, and those only slightly. The blast would make +a breach in the wall through which we could wage a more even battle, if +it comes to an actual fight. But I think the fear of the dynamite would +be enough to do the trick. Besides, we could promise that the +lumberjacks would be allowed to go in peace; only the principals would +be held. If those jacks were the kind that would play traitor to the +camp they were working for, they would double cross Barrows to save +their own skins.” + +“By gosh, boy, I believe you have struck the very idea. At any rate, +it’s worth a trial. I’ll go with you in the truck with some of the men, +and leave the deputy here with the others.” + +The plan was put into execution, and the truck made a dash over the +uneven ground past the bunkhouse. A volley of shots greeted them as they +tore past, and two of the men uttered exclamations of pain. Fortunately +they had only the merest flesh wounds, which Phil bound for them with a +small first aid bandage that he had in his pocket. + +The barrier was built in record time at the sawmill, and Phil rescued +the dynamite from its hiding place. He had feared for a moment that it +might have been removed, but evidently in the haste of fortifying +themselves in the bunkhouse, no one of the enemy had thought of it. + +The return to the bunkhouse then started. When within a striking +distance of it, the truck was turned around and, throwing his clutch +into reverse, the driver skillfully backed it towards the log house. + +Several shots were fired, then there was a silence. Evidently those +inside the building were at loss to understand what this peculiar form +of attack meant. + +Phil knew that his job would be a perilous one, but he knew his duty was +to do what he had planned. The barrier was raised up and he slipped to +the ground. He felt a measure of safety in the thought that the enemy +could see what was going on, and would be unlikely to send spies out, +since the men of the posse in the other truck could pick them off if +they came out. + +Phil raided his radio set for the necessary wire, and fixed the dynamite +against the log house. There was only one detonator left, and Phil was +not sure it was a good one, but he felt so certain that there would be +no need of setting it off that he did not particularly care. + +His plan was for the man who bore the flag of truce to promise safe +conduct for one man to go and look at the arrangement and then go back +and tell the others that it was so. The inspector would be under cover +of the rifles of the posse all the time, so would have no chance of +wrecking the dynamite mine. + +When it was finally in place, he gave the order for the truck to back +away slowly, paying out the wire that was to be used to set off the +detonator from the battery at the other end if the need really arose. + +Garry then volunteered to act as the truce bearer, but here King stepped +in. + +“I’ve been athinkin’ that you shouldn’t go. Suppose they once got you in +the shack; they could send a man out and tell us that they would harm +you if you didn’t give orders to git out o’ the way. They know that your +pa would rather lose the whole camp than have you harmed. Now with me it +would be different; they’d know that I didn’t count for much with you +folks, I’d be like one o’ the sheriff’s men only, and could bargain +better. Better let me go, only promise if anythin’ happens to me you’ll +take care of my baby.” + +The crude logic of the old timer appealed to them all except Garry, who +felt that he should take the danger, since Phil had done his share in +braving bullets to fix the charge. + +However, the sheriff decided the matter, and since he was the real head +of the posse and the law representative of the county, his decision +went. + +One of the men produced a white handkerchief and tied it to a stick. +Then holding the flag of truce aloft, King, the squatter, headed for the +log house. The posse held their breaths for a moment, thinking that +those in the shack would fear a trick and shoot him; but he advanced in +safety and they saw the door of the shack open long enough to admit him. + +When King arrived at the shack, he was met by Barrows, who demanded to +know what message was sent. In a few words King told them, then he added +some words of his own. These were directed to the lumberjacks. King spun +a yarn out of whole cloth and told the jacks, who by this time were +almost ready to desert the ship, that another posse was on the way. + +Barrows was for disregarding the message as a trick, but King clinched +the argument by offering immunity to all the lumberjacks except the +bosses and camp officers. They demanded that one of their number go and +see if the dynamite was really there. + +Barrows and his lieutenants were not strong enough to cope with the +lumberjacks, and it was finally agreed that one lumberjack and the red +headed cookee go and inspect the blasting apparatus. Each faction—for +there were two now in the log house—insisted on having a representative +sent, for neither was willing to trust the word of the other. King +agreed to remain behind as a hostage for the safety of the messengers. + +The two set out on their quest, and in a few minutes were back, post +haste. + +“It’s there, boss; enough to blow us all into the next world,” gasped +the cookee, who was now frightened half to death. + +His words being corroborated, the lumberjacks insisted on an immediate +surrender. Barrows saw that the jig was up, and he ordered an +evacuation. Jean LeBlanc’s face was livid, and he spat out a torrent of +abuse at Barrows. But for all his braggadocio, Barrows was a coward +under the skin, and he saw there was nothing to be gained by a fight +except a longer prison term. Even now he was figuring on bargaining with +Mr. Boone for his freedom, by giving away the interests who had hired +him to do their dirty work. + +Once outside the door, they found the guns of the men in the trucks +trained on them, and they were marching quietly to be disarmed and +probably bound, when suddenly, with a loud scream of defiance, Jean +LeBlanc turned and bounded away with the speed of a stricken deer. A +dozen shots flew after him, and one must have struck him, for they heard +him give a screech of pain, then he reached the sanctuary of the woods, +and dodging for safety from tree to tree dashed for the lake. Three of +the men took after him, but he had taken them by such great surprise +when he fled, that he got a flying start. + +LeBlanc reached the lake and dived in. He had seen at the same moment as +the men who were following, the one chance to save his hide. The motor +boat had been repaired, and in it were three or four of the men +concerned in the timber thefts. Among them was Jean’s brother Baptiste. + +Swimming under water, the halfbreed made for the craft. The men in the +launch opened fire on the pursuers. A rope was thrown to Jean by his +brother, which he grasped, and then without taking the time to haul him +aboard, the boat put about and made for the other side of the lake. + +Shot after shot was exchanged, but LeBlanc, as well as those in the +motor boat, seemed to bear charmed lives. + +Once again, Jean LeBlanc had foiled justice and made his escape. + +The chagrined pursuers returned to the late scene of hostilities, and +found that order had been restored. The lumberjacks who had been +promised immunity had been disarmed and herded together, waiting the +word to leave the camp. + +The ringleaders had been tied up to prevent any more escapes, and Mr. +Boone and Dick, together with the other prisoners, had been removed from +the stifling air of the storehouse. + +Warm was the greeting between father and son and between the chums who +were together once again, unharmed and happy. After the greetings were +over, the traitorous lumberjacks were ordered to get their packs and +leave within fifteen minutes under the guidance of the posse, while the +prisoners were put on the trucks to be taken to the county jail. + +“So ends the battle of Boone’s camp, and all the excitement. My boys, I +can’t tell you how proud I am of you; but had I known the perils that +were in store for you, I would never have started you on this mission. +But you have covered yourselves with glory, and I’m proud of you. Now I +must get a manager that will serve my interests, get this camp going and +do what I can to try and retrieve what I have lost through the rascally +Barrows. I am afraid that I am financially hurt unless we can bring +Carson to book and make him stand this loss.” + +“With our evidence I think you can,” said Garry. “And now what would you +give for a real manager that would serve you and no one else?” + +“I don’t know, but I would give almost anything in reason for such a +man.” + +“Then,” said Garry, “there’s your man,” and he pointed to Art Howells. + +Garry’s father heartily agreed. + +“Now,” said Mr. Boone, “I’d like to get a look at this hermit of yours.” + +The boys looked around for the old man, but, mysterious as ever, he had +disappeared! + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +CONCLUSION + + +So the quest of the boys to discover the Timber Thieves was ended. Mr. +Boone hailed Garry’s suggestion with delight, and Howells, who protested +that he had done nothing to deserve the big promotion, was installed as +camp manager, with the faithful lumberjacks as a nucleus, to get the +camp going full blast again. + +“And you can depend, Moose Boone, on our doing everything we can to make +up for what has happened before,” one of the old timers shouted. + +Only one remained to be rewarded for his help. That was King, the +squatter. Mr. Boone immediately agreed when Garry told him of the +promise that had been made, and offered to send some food and clothes to +Misery Camp. + +A suggestion by Dick proved good. He asked why the Misery Camp men could +not be hired to take some of the places left vacant by the men who had +turned traitor. This was put to King and he thought it over a minute. + +Then he said: + +“Squatters hain’t lazy; it’s just that every man’s hand is turned +against ’em because they haven’t got homes and land o’ their own; but +you people seem different. I’ll have all the men here in a couple o’ +days, ready to go to work and earn a livin’.” + +It took some time for all to tell their stories. Since Garry and Phil +had worked separately from Dick, they had to tell him all that befell +them since the evening they had left to go and visit the scene of the +timber stealing; and Dick was made to tell how he had become a captive. + +In the telling of their stories to each other, the whole story was +unfolded to Mr. Boone, and at the end of the stories he again +congratulated them on the successful way in which they had carried out +his mission. + +“Now I suppose it’s back to the patrol on Sourdehunq,” said Garry. “We +have forgotten for some time that we are Rangers, and we still have a +month or so to work for the protection of the forests. It will seem kind +of quiet there after all this excitement, for I don’t believe that much +can happen there now.” + +But further adventures were in store for the boys—how they were given +another mission to accomplish; the great good fortune that came to Phil; +the explanation of the mystery that surrounded the hermit, and the final +reward for their summer’s work. All will be told in the next and last +book of the Ranger Boys series, entitled, “The Ranger Boys and Their +Reward.” + +THE END + + + + +The Ranger Boys Series + +BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE + +A new series of copyright titles telling of the adventures of three boys +with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE + THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT + THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS + THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES + THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Radio Boys Series + +BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + +A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER + THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS + THE RADIO BOYS' SEARCH FOR THE INCA'S TREASURE + THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Boy Troopers Series + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +Author of the Famous "Boy Allies" Series. + +The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police. + +All Copyrighted Titles. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL + THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST + THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY + THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY 114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Golden Boys Series + +By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D. Dean of Pennsylvania Military College. + +A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School +Age. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL + THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS + THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS + THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS + THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Boy Scouts Series + +BY HERBERT CARTER + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +New Stories of Camp Life + + THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMPFIRE; + or, Scouting With The Silver Fox Patrol. + THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; + or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners. + THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; + or, Scouting through the Big Game Country. + THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; + or, The New Test for the Silver Fox Patrol. + THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; + or, The Search for the Lost Tenderfoot. + THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; + or, The Secret of the Hidden Silver Mine. + THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; + or, Marooned Among the Game-Fish Poachers. + THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; + or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp. + THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA; + A story of Burgoyne's Defeat in 1777. + THE BOY SCOUTS ALONG THE SUSQUEHANNA; + or, The Silver Fox Patrol Caught in a Flood. + THE BOY SCOUTS ON WAR TRAILS IN BELGIUM; + or, Caught Between Hostile Armies. + THE BOY SCOUTS AFOOT IN FRANCE; + or, With The Red Cross Corps at the Marne. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +Our Young Aeroplane Scout Series + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +BY HORACE PORTER + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +A Series of Remarkable Stories of the Adventures of Two Boy Flyers in +The European War Zone. + + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN FRANCE AND BELGIUM; + or, Saving The Fortunes of the Trouvilles. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN GERMANY. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN RUSSIA; + or, Lost on the Frozen Steppes. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN TURKEY; + or, Bringing the Light to Yusef. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ENGLAND; + or, Twin Stars In the London Sky Patrol. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ITALY; + or, Flying with the War Eagles of the Alps. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT VERDUN; + or, Driving Armored Meteors Over Flaming Battle Fronts. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE BALKANS; + or, Wearing the Red Badge of Courage Among Warring Legions. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE WAR ZONE; + or, Serving Uncle Sam In the Great Cause of the Allies. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS FIGHTING TO THE FINISH; + or Striking Hard Over the Sea for the Stars and Stripes. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT THE MARNE; + or, Hurrying the Huns from Allied Battle Planes. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN AT THE VICTORY; + or, Speedy High Flyers Smashing the Hindenburg Line. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Jack Lorimer Series + +BY WINN STANDISH + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +CAPTAIN JACK LORIMER; or, The Young Athlete of Millvale High. + + Jack Lorimer is a fine example of the all-around American high-school + boys. His fondness for clean, honest sport of all kinds will strike a + chord of sympathy among athletic youths. + +JACK LORIMER'S CHAMPIONS; or, Sports on Land and Lake. + + There is a lively story woven in with the athletic achievements, which + are all right, since the book has been O.K'd. by Chadwick, the Nestor + of American Sporting Journalism. + +JACK LORIMER'S HOLIDAYS; or, Millvale High in Camp. + + It would be well not to put this book into a boy's hands until the + chores are finished, otherwise they might be neglected. + +JACK LORIMER'S SUBSTITUTE; or, The Acting Captain of the Team. + + On the sporting side, this book takes up football, wrestling, and + tobogganing. There is a good deal of fun in this book and plenty of + action. + +JACK LORIMER, FRESHMAN; or, From Millvale High to Exmouth. + + Jack and some friends he makes crowd innumerable happenings into an + exciting freshman year at one of the leading Eastern colleges. The + book is typical of the American college boy's life, and there is a + lively story, interwoven with feats on the gridiron, hockey, + basketball and other clean honest sports for which Jack Lorimer + stands. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Navy + +BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other +in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place +them on board the British cruiser, "The Sylph," and from there on, they +share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, +the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably +the many exciting adventures of the two boys. + + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL; + or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet. + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS; + or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON; + or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA; + or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16. + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA; + or, The Vanishing Submarine. + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC; + or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar. + THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND; + or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM'S CRUISERS; + or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32; + or, The Fall of the Russian Empire. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS; + or, The Fall of the German Navy. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Army + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to +leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the +Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and +escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every +boy loves. + + THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE; + or, Through Lines of Steel. + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE; + or, Twelve Days Battle Along the Marne. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS; + or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians. + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES; + or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Alsne. + THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL; + or, With the Italian Army In the Alps. + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN; + or, The Struggle to Save a Nation. + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME; + or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded. + THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN; + or, Saving France from the Enemy. + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES; + or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS; + or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE; + or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE GREAT ADVANCE; + or, Driving the Enemy Through France and Belgium. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH; + or, The Closing Days of the Great World War. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Navy Boys Series + +A series of excellent stories of adventure on sea and land, selected +from the works of popular writers; each volume designed for boys' +reading. + +Handsome Cloth Bindings + + THE NAVY BOYS IN DEFENCE OF LIBERTY. + A story of the burning of the British schooner Gaspee in 1772. + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS ON LONG ISLAND SOUND. + A story of the Whale Boat Navy of 1776. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS AT THE SIEGE OF HAVANA. + Being the experience of three boys serving under Israel Putnam + in 1772. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS WITH GRANT AT VICKSBURG. + A boy's story of the siege of Vicksburg. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH PAUL JONES. + A boy's story of a cruise with the Great Commodore in 1776. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS ON LAKE ONTARIO. + The story of two boys and their adventures in the War of 1812. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE ON THE PICKERING. + A boy's story of privateering in 1780. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS IN NEW YORK BAY. + A story of three boys who took command of the schooner "The Laughing + Mary," the first vessel of the American Navy. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS IN THE TRACK OF THE ENEMY. + The story of a remarkable cruise with the Sloop of War "Providence" + and the Frigate "Alfred." + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS' DARING CAPTURE. + The story of how the navy boys helped to capture the British Cutter + "Margaretta," in 1775. + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE TO THE BAHAMAS. + The adventures of two Yankee Middies with the first cruise of an + American Squadron in 1775. + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH COLUMBUS. + The adventures of two boys who sailed with the great Admiral in the + discovery of America. + By Frederick A. Ober. + + + + +The Boy Spies Series + +These stories are based on important historical events, scenes wherein +boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of +history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home +life, and accurate in every particular. + +Handsome Cloth Bindings + + THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS. + A story of the part they took in its defence. + By William P. Chipman. + THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY. + A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL. + A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT. + A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE. + The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY. + The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS. + The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots + to drive the British from that State. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX. + The story of General Marion and his young spies. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN. + The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette + in the Siege of Yorktown. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA. + The story of how the young spies helped the Continental + Army at Valley Forge. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD. + The story of the part they took in its brave defence. + By William P. Chipman. + THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK. + The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of + General Washington. + By James Otis. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street, New York + + + + +The Girl Chum's Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives, +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + + BENHURST CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning. + BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris. + BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison. + DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row. + FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham. + HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings. + JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage. + KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow. + LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder. + MAJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright. + MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning. + MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring Corning. + MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow. + ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning. + PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright. + RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne. + THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street, New York + + + + +The Girl Comrade's Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + + A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER By I. R. Thurston. + ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fanny E. Newberry. + ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie B. Newberry. + COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry. + DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + HELEN BEATON. COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S. Robbins. + NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street. New York + + + + +Marjorie Dean High School Series + +BY PAULINE LESTER + +Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean College Series + +These are clean, wholesome stories that will be of great interest to all +girls of high school age. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL FRESHMAN + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SOPHOMORE + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL JUNIOR + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SENIOR + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +Marjorie Dean College Series + +BY PAULINE LESTER. + +Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean High School Series. + +Those who have read the Marjorie Dean High School Series will be eager +to read this new series, as Marjorie Dean continues to be the heroine in +these stories. + +All Clothbound. Copyright Titles. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE FRESHMAN + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SOPHOMORE + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE JUNIOR + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SENIOR + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Girl Scouts Series + +BY EDITH LAVELL + +A new copyright series of Girl Scouts stories by an author of wide +experience in Scouts' craft, as Director of Girl Scouts of Philadelphia. + +Clothbound, with Attractive Color Designs. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE GIRL SCOUTS AT MISS ALLEN'S SCHOOL + THE GIRL SCOUTS AT CAMP + THE GIRL SCOUTS' GOOD TURN + THE GIRL SCOUTS' CANOE TRIP + THE GIRL SCOUTS' RIVALS + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber +Thieves, by Claude A. Labelle + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 39916-0.txt or 39916-0.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/9/9/1/39916/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/39916-0.zip b/39916-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f7d14a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/39916-0.zip diff --git a/39916-8.txt b/39916-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e9f380 --- /dev/null +++ b/39916-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6810 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves, by +Claude A. Labelle + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves + +Author: Claude A. Labelle + +Release Date: June 4, 2012 [EBook #39916] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + + + + + +[Illustration: The guard let them out, and warned them that any attempt +at flight would be followed immediately by a shot.] + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES + +By CLAUDE A. LABELLE + +Author of + + "The Ranger Boys to the Rescue," + "The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit," + "The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers," + "The Ranger Boys and Their Reward." + +[Illustration] + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +Publishers New York + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS SERIES + +A Series of Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years of Age + +By CLAUDE A. LABELLE + + The Ranger Boys to the Rescue + The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit + The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers + The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves + The Ranger Boys and Their Reward + +Copyright, 1922 + +By A. L. BURT COMPANY + +Made in "U. S. A." + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES. + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE START OF NEW ADVENTURES + + +"Bangor, Bangor, all change for Portland, Boston and way stations," +shouted the trainman. + +"Here we are, boys," shouted Garry Boone. "Wake up, Dick, let's get our +packs and rifles. We will be in the station in a few seconds now. My, +but I'll be glad to see Dad again. And he promises us some real action, +too. I wonder what trouble he is in. You remember he hinted at something +of the sort in the letter that he wrote us at Hobart." + +"Well, we'll know in a few minutes now, for your father will be waiting +for us at the Bangor House. Don't fret over what he wants, Garry, just +be glad that we have a chance to get into action of some kind. These +past few weeks have gotten me so that I am not happy if we don't have a +few scrapes to get in and out of," remarked the second of the trio of +boys. + +Dick Wallace, a plump, heavyset chap, yawned and rubbed the sleep from +his eyes, and then got up and stretched his cramped limbs. He had been +napping for more than an hour. + +At that moment the train drew into the station with a screeching of +brakes, and the boys, having dug out their knapsacks and rifles from +between the seats where they had stowed them, soon were off the train +and walking briskly toward the Bangor House. + +"Why not take a car, there ought to be one along in a minute or two," +half grumbled Dick. It must be explained that Dick, because of his +weight, took the easiest method of doing anything whenever possible. + +This does not mean that he ever shirked his duty, or that he was +incapable of walking whenever he had to. As a matter of fact, he had +made long hikes in the woods without ever batting an eyelash, but he +believed in doing such things only when they were necessary. + +"Trust Dick to want a street car and something to eat the minute he gets +to a city," laughed Garry. + +"Yes, I bet he is starving right now," jibed Phil Durant. "All he has +had to eat since lunchtime is an apple, three bananas, and I don't know +how many bags of peanuts. If the train boy hadn't made a sale all the +afternoon except to Dick he would have made a day's pay anyway." + +"That reminds me that it is almost supper time now," said Dick. He had +heard his chums rag him so many times about his appetite, that their +remarks rolled off him as does water off a duck's back. "I move we +postpone hearing what Dad Boone has to tell us until after we have +eaten. Then he can tell us what he wants, and after that perhaps we can +all go to a movie show." + +There was no car in sight, so they continued their walk, and soon were +at the doors of the Bangor House, a large, well-appointed hotel. The +boys cut a strange figure as they walked through the lobby, for they +were clad in broad brimmed Stetson army hats, khaki coats cut like +hunters' jackets, with big roomy pockets, and khaki trousers stuffed +into the tops of shoepacks, which are nothing more than heavy moccasins +with an extra leather sole. + +Each boy carried a knapsack on his back, and attached to this was a +lariat. In addition, a stout forest hatchet was thrust through the belt +that girdled them, and each boy carried a rifle. + +Many curious looks were cast in their direction as they walked to the +desk where Garry asked if Mr. Boone was registered there. + +In a few moments the clerk had telephoned up to Garry's father and +immediately was told to send the boys up. Following in the wake of the +bell boy they ascended to the room, where Mr. Boone was waiting. + +He greeted the boys heartily and commented on their healthy appearance, +for the sun and open air had made them as tanned as any woodsman. + +Greetings over, Mr. Boone remarked: + +"Before I tell you boys why I have sent for you, I suggest that we get +our dinner and then come back to the room." + +"Welcome words!" uttered Dick enthusiastically. + +"I thought that would about hit the spot with you, Dick," laughed Mr. +Boone. + +"Yes," said Garry, "he is starving to death; he hasn't had anything to +eat for nearly an hour and a half." + +Leading the way, Mr. Boone headed the boys toward the dining room, while +they unanimously ordered a fine steak, and soon were busily eating. + +As they eat, let us look them over and get acquainted with them. Those +of our readers who have read the three volumes preceding this one, "The +Ranger Boys to the Rescue," "The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit," and "The +Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers," already know our heroes. Others +must be introduced. + +The leader of the trio is Garfield Boone. He is generally known as +Garry. The stout boy with the long distance appetite is Dick Wallace, +close friend of Garry, and ward of Mr. Boone. The third is Phil Durant, +a boy of French Canadian parentage. The three boys live in a small Maine +town, only a few miles from Portland, the principal city of the Pine +Tree State, as our northernmost commonwealth is known. + +They have just completed their junior year in high school, and it has +been decided that Garry and Dick shall go to a military school the +coming fall, while Phil will have to remain and finish at the high +school. + +Hence they wanted to spend their last vacation together, and had picked +on the idea of taking a camping trip to the woods. Mr. Boone, father of +Garry, who owned extensive lumber tracts in the Maine woods and was +connected with some of the big paper mills of the state, came to bat +with an idea that pleased the boys immensely. + +It was to this effect. That instead of going on a mere camping trip +which might prove to be tiresome before it was concluded, that the boys +become attached to the Forest Ranger Service as an extraordinary Unit of +this woodcraft outfit. + +Their duties would be the same as those of the older Rangers; that is, +to guard the forests from the fire peril that constantly menaced the +timber lands of the state. In this service there were two branches, the +men who act as lookouts, having an unchanged station, and the patrol men +who travel over a certain set course watching that fire does not start +and keeping careless campers from starting fires in dangerous spots. + +In a few days the boys had outfitted themselves and were on their way to +their first station on the Sourdehunq Mountain, a tract of timberland +owned by Mr. Boone. They had no thought of any adventure other than that +which might be caused by the discovery of a fire, but on their second +night on the trail they find the guide they had hired, one Jean LeBlanc, +a French Canadian halfbreed, trying to steal their supplies. + +They drive him away, and later find the halfbreed is inimical to them +because of a fancied grievance he has against the elder Boone. They also +make a staunch friend in the person of Nate Webster, an old Maine guide. +Later Webster replaces the Deputy Ranger, Anderson by name, who has +proved incompetent, and Anderson joins forces with LeBlanc and becomes +an enemy of the Ranger Boys, and nearly succeeds in doing them great +harm. + +Another friend is made in the person of an old hermit, who on several +occasions warns the boys of impending peril by sending them cryptic +notes. + +On one occasion Jean LeBlanc kidnaps the little daughter of a family by +the name of Graham, who are camping in the woods. With the aid of a note +from the hermit, the boys are able to rescue her and capture LeBlanc. +The latter, however, escapes and makes much trouble for the boys, +finally setting fire to the woods. + +He and Anderson escape by climbing a sheer cliff. Still later the boys +are asked by the Customs Secret Service to get evidence of a gang of +smugglers on the Canadian border. This they do and the gang is seized, +all except LeBlanc who dodges back across the boundary and is hence safe +from arrest since he is on Canadian territory and not amenable to the +United States law. + +During a rainy season, they seek out the hermit and find him; that is, +Dick finds him. One of their greatest adventures during the search for +the gang of border smugglers is the finding, with the aid of an old map, +of a tourmaline mine. The boys get a deed to the mineral rights of the +land, and plan at a later date to mine the gems and make a handsome +income for themselves. + +It must also be explained that there is a mystery connected with Dick. +His father was a college professor of geology and botany, and a +classmate of Mr. Boone. He had a fall from a horse that destroyed his +memory, and before an operation could be performed, disappeared. Dick's +mother had died when he was a baby, and so being without parents or +home, Mr. Boone had become his guardian, bringing him up with his own +son, Garry. + +Now that we have a brief sketch of the boys and their previous +activities, let us see what Mr. Boone's need of them is. + +"Here is the whole story, boys," said Mr. Boone as they finished their +dinner and returned to his room. "As you know, I have extensive +interests not only in the timberland but in the mills that manufacture +paper. Recently I severed connections with several of the mills, and put +all my eggs in one basket, so to speak, by investing my funds all in one +mill. Of course it is impossible to do business on a big scale without +making many business enemies, or at least determined rivals. I have a +good many such, and I have been given to understand that several of them +have pooled their resources and become connected with the mills from +which I withdrew my money. + +"Of course I have not enough work in my one mill to take care of all the +timber that I can cut, so I contract to supply other mills, necessarily +becoming a rival of some of the other timber owners. + +"Then, too, I have recently decided to start an experiment in summer +lumbering. You know, of course, that Maine's lumber cutting season has +always been in the winter because the logs could be cut and hauled over +the snow to the rivers and then when the spring unleashed the ice-bound +rivers, the logs could be driven down to the mills. However, I am +figuring on getting out lumber for building during the summer and in the +winter getting the logs for the pulp mills to grind ready for the making +of paper. I have several important contracts with a time limit; that is, +the necessary amount of lumber must be gotten out by a certain date else +I forfeit my profit and large damages besides. + +"Lately I have seen from my reports that the lumber is not being gotten +out on schedule time. Whenever I come and look it over, or send a +representative, everything goes like clockwork, but the moment that I +turn my back a saw breaks, making a week's delay, or a tractor is +broken, or something else happens. Unfortunately my financial affairs at +the present time are in such shape that I must devote the greater part +of my time to keeping the wheels going. This necessitates my being much +of the time in Boston and New York, hence I cannot be at the cutting +operations all the time. + +"I have changed managers, but still no good comes of it. Now I am +confident that the morale of my camp is being undermined by some +business rivals, and that there is underground work of some sort going +on. Since your success in getting that gang of smugglers, the complete +story of which I have already heard, I believe that you boys can find +out what is going on at the camp to hinder my contracts. + +"I have thought that you boys might go to the vicinity of the cutting +and sawmills and camp there. You would have the freedom of the camp, as +I would write the manager who you were, and then you could use your eyes +and ears and see what was what. + +"I should suggest that you display a great deal of ignorance about +lumbering operations and sawmill work, so that your presence would not +excite undue suspicion. Further than that I can give you no +instructions, for if I knew what the matter was I would not have to call +on you for assistance. I am simply relying on you to be able to do as +good a job for me as you have done for the Ranger Service and the +Customs Department. In other words, you will have to work out your own +salvation, and I am sure that you can produce for me the results that I +want." + +Mr. Boone concluded his long explanation and then leaned back, letting +the matter sink in. Then he asked, "Well, boys, what do you think of the +proposition? Are you willing to undertake it? Not that there will be any +danger attached, but do you feel yourselves confident of making a +success of the venture?" + +The eyes of the three boys sparkled. They discounted Mr. Boone's belief +that there would be no danger attached, for they felt that the +proposition offered a chance for much excitement, and this was what they +wanted. Thrilling adventures were for them the spice of life after what +they had experienced that summer. Garry answered for the others. "Will +we do it? You bet we will, and we'll succeed!" + + + + +CHAPTER II + +TO THE RESCUE + + +After the conclusion of their talk with Mr. Boone, the boys went out to +take in a motion picture show, after finding there would be time to see +the last performance. + +On the way to the theatre, they stopped for a moment to watch a street +fakir selling knives under the flaring light of a gasoline torch. + +"Here you are, here's a fine knife with your name and address inlaid in +the handle!" he was shouting. + +"I think I'll get one of those for myself," said Dick to his chums. + +"What do you want of one, you have your good heavy scout knife, haven't +you?" queried Garry. + +"Oh, I just want it as a curiosity for use when we come out of the +woods; we won't want to carry a great knife like that in civilian +clothes," replied Dick. + +"We'll miss the first of the show if you wait," remarked Garry. + +"Let the youngster have his way, Garry," interrupted Phil with a laugh. + +The street salesman made the name plate and quickly screwed the +transparent handle back on the knife. Dick handed over the money and +soon they were on the way to the movies. + +They received a fine surprise when they reached there, for the picture +being shown was one in which they had taken small parts when they +encountered a crew of motion picture actors while they were at their +first station in the woods, and when they had some stirring adventures +the time Jean LeBlanc set fire to the woods, the motion picture people +had been rescued by the boys. The picture was a decidedly good one and +they enjoyed it. + +The chums chattered during the play in a subdued tone, especially when +there flashed on the screen the parts where they were playing roles. The +water scene where Dick did some fine swimming was particularly good. + +After the picture was over, they edged out through the crowd and +returned to the hotel and were about to go up to their rooms when Garry +had an idea. + +"Say, boys, we are not going on such a secret affair now that we cannot +have Sandy with us, so I am going to telegraph Nate and ask if he will +bring us the dog tomorrow, or let us know by wire if he cannot." + +Sandy was the big Airedale dog owned by Garry, a canine that possessed +almost as much sense as some humans. When they had gone on their mission +to the border to capture the smugglers, they had left the dog in Nate's +keeping, as they were afraid that the sight of the dog would bring to +mind who they were to any of their enemies, and they had made several in +the course of their sojourn in the Maine woods. + +To speak was to act with Garry, and he promptly made his way to the desk +where the familiar blue lettered lamp was aglow. + +The work of writing the message was short and then they went to their +rooms, first stopping in to say good night to Mr. Boone, and advising +him to see the motion picture the next day so that he could see them in +their small parts. + +This Mr. Boone promised to do, and soon all were sleeping the sound +sleep of healthy boys with never a worry or care. + +Morning came, and with it the boys arose and hastened to the dining room +to make the most of the brief opportunity that they would have for the +excellent hotel fare. They spent a part of the forenoon in overhauling +and looking over their radio-phone equipment to see that it was all in +perfect condition, for they had a hunch that it would come in very +useful when they arrived at the cutting tract. This was to be proven +true at a later date. + +About ten o'clock they received a wire from Nate saying that he would +arrive in Bangor about noon and would bring the Airedale with him. True +to his promise in the telegram, the old guide appeared at the hotel +shortly after the noon hour set in and with him was Sandy. The boys were +seated in some of the arm chairs that dotted the lobby, and in less than +a moment the dog had found his friends, and nearly knocked over half a +dozen people in his haste and eagerness to reach the trio, for despite +the fact that an Airedale is called a one man dog, he distributed his +friendship equally among the three chums. + +The boys were fully as glad to see their four-footed friend as he was to +welcome them, and they cuffed and patted him strenuously. + +"Wall, boys, there's your pup, safe and sound as the day I took charge +of him. And let me tell you, he is some dog. Saved me a considerable sum +of money tother day, too," announced Nate. + +"Tell us about it," asked Garry, as the three crowded around the old +"State of Mainer" and shook hands with him heartily. + +"There ain't a whole lot to tell, 'cepting that a few days ago I sold a +small tract of land that I had to a queer old codger who doesn't believe +in banks, and who paid me in bills. I believe in banks myself, but it +was late when I made the deal so I had to stow the money away in the +house. I locked it up as well as I could in a small desk in the sitting +room, and went on to bed. 'Bout twelve o'clock I heard a tearing around +downstairs and Sandy barking fit to raise the dead. I hopped downstairs +as soon as I could reach for a rifle that stood in the corner of my +bedroom, just in time to see Sandy going through an open window. I +chased out after him, but someone was just driving away in an automobile +as I got out of the window. Sandy ran the car down the road a piece, but +came back beaten and tuckered out. He was fast, but not quite fast +enough to catch the car, going at the rate it was. Well, I got back in +through the window and looked around. The window had been forced open, +and the burglar was just evidently about to force open the desk, for +there were scratches about the lock and a heavy screwdriver was laying +on the floor. I figure Sandy heard him from the kitchen, where he +generally slept, and came in and drove him off just in time to save my +money. So that's all there is to that, but he is a mighty fine dog, and +I hate to let go of him, even to his owner." + +The boys patted Sandy again and again as they listened to Nate's story. + +"Did you find any trace of the robber?" asked Garry. + +"Nary a sign except the footprints on the lawn under the window. I +figure it must have been someone that knew I got paid for the land that +evening, and that I kept a little valuable stuff in the desk, but there +is no proof or nothing to work on to determine who it might be. I don't +care anyway, as long as the invader didn't get my money," replied Nate. + +The boys invited Nate to lunch with them, and this invitation he +accepted, and calling Mr. Boone they went into the dining room. In a few +moments they were joined by "Moose" Boone and the greeting between the +two old friends was pleasant to see. + +During the luncheon hour they told Nate of the new work the boys were +going on, and while he expressed himself as sorry that they were not +immediately going back on the fire patrol, he agreed that they, if +anyone, could solve the mystery of the stolen timber and mishaps at the +logging camp. + +After luncheon the boys decided that since a day or two extra would not +make any great difference in their plans, they would walk to the camp +instead of riding in the hot stuffy train. They decided to start that +afternoon, as soon as the sun began to lower, and make about ten miles +of their fifty mile journey, sleeping out under the open as soon as it +got too dark to walk any farther. + +Garry's father agreed that they could take what little extra time was +needed to walk, and so it was settled. + +The first business of the afternoon was to visit a large grocery store +and purchase enough provisions to last them on the trip, for they would +do their cooking over an open fire along the way. + +"We'll just buy enough to carry us over for two days, for we ought to +reach the logging camp by late afternoon of the day after tomorrow," +announced Garry, the chosen leader of the trio on all expeditions. + +"This suits me to a T," remarked Dick. "Then we won't have to carry so +much extra stuff in our packs, and in this hot weather a few pounds +saved is a boon." + +"Trust Dick not to want to carry too heavy a pack," laughed Phil. + +"That's nothing to laugh about," protested Dick hotly, "that's just good +common sense. It's----" + +Then he perceived that his chums were ragging him a bit so he grinned +and turning on his heel started for the door, followed by the two +laughing boys. + +The buying of the groceries took but a short time, and soon the bags +were packed and they were ready for their trip. + +Goodbyes were said to Nate and Mr. Boone, and the trio set out on their +long hike. + +"Good luck, boys, and I sincerely hope that you find what you are +looking for, because my affairs are in a ticklish position just at +present and unless I find the cause of the disturbance and thefts at the +camp, I will be in a very serious way," said Mr. Boone as he shook hands +with the three boys. + +"Guess they can settle the matter if anyone can," remarked Nate as he +bade the boys goodbye. "They have done some pretty fine work for boys +lately and I look to see them get to the nigger in the wood-pile and +roust him out pretty shortly. Then mebbe they can come back and take +over the patrol for the rest of the summer. + +"We're good for about eight miles tonight, fellows," said Garry as they +started, "for it will be at least three hours before it gets too dark to +walk any farther," said Garry. + +"Have you the route all set in your mind?" asked Phil. + +"Yes, I looked over a road map very carefully this morning, and the +manager at the hotel garage gave me some other directions so that we +cannot go very far wrong," answered Garry. + +They passed well out of Bangor and were going along a country road, just +as the sun was setting, when a chugging automobile was heard back of +them. Soon a ramshackle old flivver drew up near them, driven by a young +farmer lad. + +He sized up the boys, then stopped his machine and asked: + +"Going far?" + +"On to Colter," answered Garry. + +"Gosh, that's a pretty good spell to walk," answered the farmer boy. +"I'm going on about four miles more; would you like a lift for that +distance?" + +"You bet we would," broke in Dick. + +This brought a laugh from the others, and they accepted the lift, for it +meant saving almost an hour on their way. + +They piled into the old flivver, and soon were rolling speedily along +the road. Despite its aged and decrepit appearance the car made +excellent time, and the boys commented on this. + +"Yep, she's a pretty good old boat," answered the boy. "I don't have +much time to tinker with the looks of the thing on the outside, but I +manage to keep the engine in pretty good condition. You can't keep a +farm car looking up to time every minute. Well, I turn in here in a +minute, so I guess this is as far as you can ride, unless another car +comes along. Will you come in and have a bite to eat?" + +The chums thanked him cordially but refused his invitation, saying that +they would cook their own meal an hour or so later. + +Garry looked up at the sun and then remarked to his chums: + +"It will be dark in two hours, and we can make just about six miles in +that time without exerting ourselves too much. We haven't done much of +anything all day so if we want to let out a bit we can tack on an extra +mile in that time and so save ourselves a bit of extra walking tomorrow. +Let's go." + +Hitching up their packs, the trio of chums set off at a brisk pace. The +setting of the sun made it much cooler and the walking was pleasant. +They passed through a small village and were well on the outskirts where +the houses were beginning to get scattered, and they were deciding how +far to proceed before picking a spot to camp for the night when they +heard a call for help and the sounds of a scuffle. In the gathering +gloom they could not see where the trouble was, but hastening towards +the spot from where the voices seemed to come, they approached a bend in +the road, and turning, saw two men attacking a third. + +The attackers seemed to be rough specimens of humanity, while the third +was a young man, fairly well dressed. This gave the affair the aspect of +a robbery instead of a quarrel among a lot of ruffians, so calling his +chums to hurry, Garry threw his rifle to his shoulder and shouted to the +attacking party to throw up their hands. + +The surprised thugs took one look at the business-like rifle in Garry's +hands, and then deciding that they might perchance overpower him seemed +to be on the verge of rushing toward him when Phil and Dick turned the +bend in the road. Seeing that they were outnumbered, and with no thought +of the fact that the boys might fire on them, they turned on their heels +and ran. Garry was about to send a shot flying after them when the young +man who had been the subject of the attack called to Garry to let them +go. + +Just then he toppled over and fell at full length at Garry's feet. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +A NEW ALLY + + +Garry hastily unstrapped his canteen and unloosing the stopper, poured +some of the water on the man's face. At the same time, Dick, showing a +surprising amount of speed for one so undeniably stout, sprang to help +Garry and unloosed the man's shirt collar. + +In a few moments the man had been revived, and when he had come to, +Garry asked him if he had been shot or stabbed or wounded in any way. + +"No," replied the man weakly. "One of those jacks hit me on the head +with a club, and I guess I just got groggy. I wonder if you boys could +help me home, I live a few hundred yards down the road." + +"Indeed we will, you wait just a moment and we will improvise something +to carry you on," replied Phil. + +"No, you won't have to do that, just give me an arm to lean on; that +will do very nicely." + +The boys did as he wished, and in a few minutes of easy walking they +came to a neat little cottage, set back a few yards from the door with a +number of flower beds scattered over the little lawn. + +"Oh Grace," called the man, and soon a pretty young woman came to the +door. When she saw her husband, for so he proved to be, leaning on the +arm of Garry she flew down the path and asked anxiously what was the +matter. + +"Nothing at all. Just wait till we get in the house and I will tell you +all about it," said the stranger. Then turning to the boys, he asked +them to come in. + +Anxious to hear what the cause of attack was, and why the man had wanted +the rascals to escape, the trio accepted his invitation, and soon were +sitting in the attractive little living room of the cottage. + +"Now I suppose you boys who so kindly helped me out of a nasty hole +would like to know what the whole business is about, wouldn't you?" +asked the owner of the cottage. + +"We are rather curious," answered Garry speaking for the others. + +"My name is Howells, Arthur first name, generally called Art by my +friends, and I am a timber scaler by occupation. I am scaling on the +Boone cutting a few miles from here, and the chaps who attacked me were, +until a few days ago, lumber jacks employed on the cutting. One morning +I found them 'spiking a tree,' and forthwith sent a report to the office +with a demand that they be fired. For that reason they met me tonight +and attempted to get satisfaction by giving me a sound beating. Perhaps +it would have been worse had you boys not come along so opportunely. I +don't think they would have murdered me, but could have easily put me +out of commission so that I could not work, and that is one thing that I +must do now of all times." + +"But why did you want us to let them escape. I should think you would +have wanted them put safely under lock and key for such an unwarranted +attack," demanded Garry. + +"Yes, Arthur," chimed in his wife. "I would have had them arrested and +given a good long sentence. They might have killed you or crippled you." + +"There's just one reason. One of them was Dave Pingree, son of old Daddy +Pingree who lives in the village near here. You know the son is a +worthless scoundrel, but old Daddy has had so much trouble that I didn't +want to bring any more on him by having his son arrested, bad as he is, +and as richly as he deserves to be jailed. The other one was a stranger +to these parts, half breed Canadian by the name of LeBlanc, who picked +up Pingree somewhere in the woods, and who has been his constant +companion for the past few weeks, at least since the cutting operations +of the Boone tract were started," concluded Howells. + +The three boys were so startled at the sound of the name LeBlanc that +they jumped to their feet simultaneously and asked Howells to repeat the +name. + +"LeBlanc is the name. But why does that surprise you so?" queried Mr. +Howells in surprise. + +"What is his first name," demanded Garry without answering the question. + +"On the payroll he is listed as Baptiste." + +"We did not get a very good look at him in the dusk," said Garry. "Would +you mind describing him for us, please. This is a peculiar situation, +and we will tell you about it after you have described the man," +answered Garry rather agitatedly. + +"Why he is a swarthy chap about twenty-seven or eight, just about the +same age as Pingree. He has black hair and mustache, and a jagged scar +on one side of his neck, probably a knife wound from some lumber camp +fight," answered Howells. + +Garry sank back with a sigh of relief. + +"At any rate he is not the man we think he is. The scar and the age +settle that, although the rest of the description fits him well enough +to make him a brother to Jean LeBlanc, the one man we do want to run +across in this neck of the woods," replied Garry. + +"Well, not that I want to raise any apprehension on your part, or tell +you something that is displeasing to you, he is a brother of a man +called Jean LeBlanc. I happen to know that this is so, for one night the +lumberjacks were wrestling in front of the bunkhouse and boasting about +their exploits, when this Baptiste came up and succeeded in throwing +several of the men with a rather vicious hold. After he had thrown +several of them he started boasting about his brother Jean, who had +taught him the hold. I was standing at one side watching the wrestling, +which is how I happened to overhear the matter. But why does the name of +LeBlanc bother you so?" he asked in conclusion. + +"That's a rather long story," answered Garry "and perhaps I had better +start by telling you our names. These are my chums, Phil Durant and Dick +Wallace, while my name is Garfield Boone, generally called Garry for +short." + +"I don't suppose you are any relation to the Mr. Boone who owns this +tract where the summer logging is going on are you? Most people of that +name in this state are somewhat related. In fact I am a second or third +cousin of his myself," said Howells with a smile. + +"Yes, I happen to be his son," answered Garry. + +"Well, that is a coincidence. I suppose you are going on to take a look +at the cutting aren't you. This being your vacation time probably you +are camping and travelling around a bit," and Howells glanced at the +knapsacks and rifles which the boys had stacked near the door in the +hall and which could be plainly seen from the living room. + +Dick was about to say something when he caught a meaning glance from +Garry, which was also seen by Phil, and which the boys interpreted as a +desire on the part of Garry to do any necessary explaining that might +have to be done. + +"Yes, we were in this vicinity and thought that we would like to see how +the experiment in summer cutting was coming along," he told Howells. + +"That's fine, then I shall see you around there a good deal as I am +scaling. Of course coming from a lumbering family, I don't need to tell +you that scaling means measuring the timber that is cut. I also do quite +a bit of timber cruising, which, as you know, means travelling through +the cutting, marking the trees that are fit to be cut. Your father is +very particular about his lumbering, and he doesn't do as many of the +other timber owners do, sweep clean through a tract of land, and make it +worthless as timber land for years to come. His having certain trees +marked for cutting means that every year there will be a growth suitable +to cut and market and thus he is assured of a steady income from his +tracts." + +"Perhaps if you are not too busy every day, you could show us something +of the lumbering operations. Although as you say, I come from a 'lumber +family,' I don't know a great deal about timber cutting. About the only +time I have ever been at the camps was at the spring drive, just to see +the fight for the river, and neither of my chums know any more about it +than I do. The first thing I would like to know is what did you mean by +'spiking a tree'?" asked Garry. + +"I don't know that I can explain that to you without having you near a +piece of big timber to demonstrate what I mean, but I will try and tell +you as best I can. There is a certain way to cut a tree, or rather there +is a certain place where one always starts to cut. This place is +determined by the diameter of the tree. If the tree is two feet thick, +the cutter measures up two feet from the ground to start his cut. Of +course he does not measure it exactly, but long experience has taught +him to estimate almost within an inch where to start. You know some +trees are cut by axe; those are the smaller ones, but the bigger ones +are sawed nearly all the way through, and then the axemen cut through +just enough with their axes to cause the tree to break off and fall. +'Spiking a tree' means to take an estimate where the sawyers will start, +and then drive several spikes in, using a nail set to drive them into +the tree out of sight. The hole left will close up very rapidly, or a +little dirt and moss can be stuck in so cleverly as to defy detection." + +"But what harm does that do? I suppose it might kill the tree, but what +difference does that make, since it is going to be cut down directly?" +quizzed Phil who was an interested listener. + +"It doesn't harm an old tree, but this is what it does, or rather figure +it out for yourselves. What happens when the saw strikes three or four +heavy spikes, set in the tree just in the path of the blade?" asked +Howells. + +The truth flashed over the three boys in an instant, and immediately +they felt that they accomplished one purpose of their mission to the +woods. They had discovered one of the reasons for the delay in the +cutting. If several saws were to be spoiled that meant a delay in +getting new ones. + +"Now here are two other things that a spike in a tree will do. If spikes +are driven in young trees, several of them, that is trees that won't be +cut for a few years, it means that it will cause the core or heart of +the tree to rot or break the grain. Then when the tree is finally cut, a +part of the lower trunk, or best part of the tree for lumber purposes, +shatters just like so much glass when it falls. That's one thing a spike +will do. Now here's another thing. Suppose that the mischief maker does +not drive his spikes in the tree where the cut will be made, but climbs +up twenty or thirty feet or so, and drives a dozen or two in different +parts of the trunk of the tree. The tree trunk is cut safely and then it +is drawn to the sawmill where it is sawed into planks. What happens when +one of the big, expensive circular saws rips through a dozen spikes? +It's just goodbye to the saw and goodbye to a lot of money, and means a +delay of several minutes until the saw can be replaced with another. And +when you are cutting timber on a time contract with a penalty for every +day's delay overtime that you take, a half an hour or so lost through +trouble with your sawmill means a big thing. Then there are two other +dangers. One is that the saw will fly off and hurt the millmen when it +hits the spikes, and the other is that it sometimes will cause serious +defects in the entire machinery, so that instead of just a few minutes' +delay to change saws, you waste a day or maybe two in repairing the +machinery. So that's that." Howells concluded his long description of +all the trouble one little handful of spikes could do, and then he +looked rather searchingly at the boys. Finally he seemed to have decided +in his own mind to say what he was thinking and he looked at Garry. + +"I wonder if your father has any idea that someone is trying to hurt his +business? I don't believe for an instant that those two scoundrels were +driving those spikes just to make mischief. There is something deeper +than that behind the whole business. There are scores of petty accidents +occurring every week that all mean delay. Sometimes when the delays are +totalled up they equal nearly half a day, and in one summer that means a +long delay, a matter perhaps of two weeks. That two weeks is sufficient +to spoil the contract and take all the profit away, but more than that, +it means a loss of capital invested, for I happen to know that your +father is cutting under a contract that provides a heavy penalty for +failure to deliver goods as they are called for." + +Garry debated with himself for a few moments, wondering whether or not +to take Howells into his confidence and enlist his help. He realized +that Howells, if he were honest as he seemed, would be an invaluable aid +in discovering what the trouble at the camp was. His knowledge of +timbering was extensive, Garry could see that with half an eye, and +Garry understood that he and his chums could see lots of things +happening right under their noses and never guess the malicious +significance of the happenings. + +As he thought, Mrs. Howells settled the question for him. Reaching down +to one of the shelves in the library table about which they were +sitting, she produced an album. + +"We are just old fashioned enough to have a family album," she laughed. +"I thought perhaps you would like to see a picture taken of your father +a great many years ago," and turning to one of the pages she showed +Garry a picture that he recognized immediately. It showed his father +with a sweet faced woman. "That is your father and Mr. Howells' mother. +She was his favorite cousin and she died a long time ago. This has +always been in Arthur's possession." + +Garry remembered having seen a counterpart of the picture at home a long +time ago, and he decided that the timber sealer was not claiming any +false relationship. + +"I wonder how it is that we have never seen you before," he asked, +turning to Howells. + +"Easy, we went west when I was a youngster, and it was only this spring +that we came back to Maine. I did not say anything about my +relationship, for I want to go on my own hook. I am a graduate of a +forestry school, and I wanted to get actual experience in the woods, +which was why I asked for and received the position of timber sealer. I +like to stand in my own shoes, and so I said nothing about my +relationship to the manager at the camp. Then, too, I need money, as I +have a small interest in a little tract of young timber, and I am paying +on it a little at a time. By the time it is completely paid for it will +be ready to cut, and there will be a handsome profit on the investment," +he answered. + +For a boy of his age, Garry was a pretty shrewd judge of character, and +he had been sizing up young Howells while he was talking. So he made up +his mind to take him into his confidence in a limited way, and so +remarked: + +"Yes, my father does know that there is something wrong at the camp, but +he cannot put his finger on the spot where the trouble is. Every time he +visits the camp things go along as smooth as clockwork, but it is +impossible to put in all this time at this one thing when he has so many +other irons in the fire. We thought that perhaps we could visit the camp +for a while and find out what is wrong, and report to him so that he +could remedy the trouble. But after hearing your story of the attempted +spiking, I am beginning to think that the job is almost too much for us +to handle. That would have been something I would never have dreamed of, +and if the enemies in the camp, for enemies there must be, know a trick +like that, they must have a bagfull of others of which we know nothing. +So you see that in a way we are helpless, and I am going to ask that you +aid us in this. I can promise for my father that in case your aid is +instrumental in locating the trouble that it will not be forgotten. What +do you say? Will you help us?" + +"Indeed I will," and Howells thrust forward his hand. "You can count on +me to the last ditch!" + +"Thanks," said Garry as he took the proffered hand. "Now there is one +thing to do, and that is to make sure that Baptiste LeBlanc is not in +these parts any more, for wherever the name of LeBlanc gets hitched up +with us there is trouble brewing!" + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +THE PERIL OF THE CIRCUS + + +Mrs. Howells pressed the boys to remain for supper, saying they would +find it much more pleasant to eat in the house than to cook by the +roadside somewhere. It had got quite dark at this time, and so they +decided to accept the invitation so cordially given. + +The fine meal was soon served, and as they ate, Garry told of some of +their adventures with Jean LeBlanc, in order to explain why they were so +startled when that name was first mentioned by Howells. + +Supper over they talked for some time and then Garry proposed to his +chums that they get their packs and journey on for a bit till they could +find a place to throw their blankets for the night. + +The Howells protested vigorously at this, but could offer them nothing +as their cottage was not large enough to accommodate them. + +The boys laughed and said they were so used to sleeping in the open that +it would never hurt them. "If you are bound to sleep outdoors you can +use the back yard or you can spread your blankets on the living room +floor," said Howells. "One can take the couch there. You'll have to toss +for it, though." + +After much pressure the boys decided to do this, and accordingly +goodnights were said. It was a custom of the boys to draw lots to settle +all arguments, so hustling into the kitchen Garry raided the broom of +three straws of unequal length and then brought them back for his chums +to draw. + +Dick was the lucky chap to get the couch. With a grin he spread his +blankets and remarked to the others that he hoped the floor would not be +too hard. + +"What's the diff?" inquired Phil. "There isn't much difference between +the ground and a floor and we aren't in the woods so we can't cut +branches to make one of nature's mattresses with. Stop your chatter. I'm +off to sleep," and indeed he was in a few moments. + +To Garry however, sleep did not come so easily for he was thinking of +the events of the evening, and wondering what he and his chums could do +to checkmate the schemes of the unknown enemies that were causing all +the trouble at the lumber camp. But Garry was a healthy growing boy, and +not to be denied his sleep, so soon he consigned the cares of the day to +oblivion and in a few moments was fast asleep. + +Howells was up before the boys, and started the coffee, and in a few +moments his wife was downstairs and busying herself about the breakfast. +They let the boys sleep until it was almost ready, then awoke them. The +boys protested against all the trouble they were causing their hosts, +but their protests were only half hearted for the smell of the boiling +coffee and the frying bacon were so tempting that it would have taken a +team of horses to drive them away without eating. + +Breakfast over, they took their leave, first inquiring about the way +that lay ahead. They found that they would go nearly twenty-five miles +before coming to another town, as the way ran through the last of the +farming country before striking the edge of the big timber country. + +"The camp is ten miles or so beyond the village that you will come to, +and it will take you at least a day to get to the village, so you will +not reach the camp until nearly noon of tomorrow. There's a good chance +that you will get a lift, however, for there is a circus there today, +and you should find a great many people on the road. Don't be bashful +about hailing them and asking for a lift. It is a customary thing to do +in this part of the country. I will see you in a couple of days, as I +will go back on duty at the camp then," said Howells. + +"Just one thing if you don't mind," interposed Garry. "When you come to +the camp, do not let on that you are already acquainted with us, because +if we are to work together we can do a lot better if there is no inkling +of our acquaintance." + +"That's a good idea, and that way it'll be," agreed Howells. + +"What say, let's take this in a hurry and see how many miles we can +cover this morning," suggested Dick. + +The others stopped short in their tracks. + +"Listen, Phil, unstrap your canteen while I feel his pulse. There's +something the matter with Dick. He wants to hurry. If it was later in +the day I would say that he had been a bit touched by the sun, but it is +early and cool, and I think he is just sick," said Garry solicitously. + +"Lazy Dick wants to hurry!" ejaculated Phil in amazement. "What's the +big idea?" + +Dick turned red and lunged at his chums. He was used to their ragging +him on account of his willingness to take the easiest way of doing +things. Of course they knew that he never shirked his duty when called +upon, and they never questioned his bravery at any time, but he always +got so fussed when they ragged him about his weight and his easy way of +taking life, that they never let an opportunity pass to tease him about +it. After a short scuffle, they stopped laughing and Garry said: + +"Seriously, Dick, why do you want to hurry? We are well up on our +schedule and you don't need to rush like mad." + +"I just wanted to see what we could do if we had to," said Dick; "and +furthermore, I wanted to show you for once that I could walk as fast and +as long as either of you chaps, that's all. Let's go." + +Dick set off at a swinging pace, and kept it up. The boys fell in and +kept pace with him, thinking that he would soon tire of it; but when +they had covered three miles, and Dick had not abated a whit his speed, +Garry and Phil saw that he was in earnest. Not to be outdone by him, +they bent to their walking and made excellent time. They were passing a +barn, when suddenly Garry stopped dead short, gave a shout and then fell +to laughter with all his might. This time it was Dick's turn to assume a +sarcastic attitude, and make side remarks to Phil. Finally when Garry +had controlled his laughter so that he could speak, he said to Phil: + +"What do you think of me for a regular little Sherlock Holmes? I've +found out why Dick is trying to set a pedestrian record this morning. +Just look at that barn!" + +Phil took one look at the glaring posters pasted on the wall, then gave +a shout. + +"Aha, the boy wants to go to the circus!" + +"Marvelous," grunted Dick. "Own up, wouldn't you fellows like to see it +yourself?" + +The boys teased him for a few minutes, then they perceived that there +was method in Dick's madness and they decided that it would be good fun +to see the circus if they could get there on time. + +"Only reason I wanted you chaps to hurry a little was because I figured +that if we covered a good number of miles we would get to a point where +people would be on the way to the circus and we could get a lift and +arrive in time to see the show this afternoon. Then we could get another +start right after it let out, and so fix it as to arrive at the camp +fairly early in the morning, covering our last ten miles while it was +early and cool," he explained. + +"That's pretty good dope at that, Dick. Let's go. We'll see the circus +and not waste any time doing it, either." And Garry set the pace as he +finished talking. + +They stopped at noon and prepared a hasty lunch by the side of the road, +after Dick had stopped at a farm house and had his canteen filled with +fresh milk. + +By this time scores of automobiles and teams were on the road, but +practically every one of them was filled to overflowing with adults and +children, all presumably bound for the circus. Finishing their meal, +they rested fifteen minutes, then Garry, glancing at his watch, +remarked: "We have still ten miles to go, and it is now half-past +twelve. The circus probably begins at half-past two, so that unless we +get a ride we won't get there in time to see the show. We couldn't cover +the ten miles in two hours, especially after having come as far as we +have this morning." + +"I'm going to see that circus, though, even if we have to wait for the +evening performance," announced Dick. "What do you fellows think?" + +"I guess it would be all right," answered Garry. "There is no life or +death matter to make us arrive early in the morning at the camp, so we +might as well take it easy for the rest of the way." Luck was with them, +however, for they had gone little more than a mile when they heard a car +coming behind them. It proved to contain only a single occupant who, as +he neared the boys, slowed down and asked if they did not want a ride. +They were unanimous in their answer. + +"On the way to the circus?" asked the driver. + +"We're going beyond that, but we thought that we would stop and see it +if we reached there on time, otherwise we would have seen the evening +performance." + +"Lucky thing that I came along and happen to be going to that place +myself then," chuckled the driver, "for there isn't going to be any +evening show. You see I happen to be connected with the circus, and we +have such a long jump for tomorrow's show that we cannot give a +performance here tonight." + +"Good thing you came along then, for if we had walked all this distance +for nothing, I would have given up in disgust," remarked Dick. + +"How far have you come?" asked the circus man. + +"We left Hilton this morning," answered Garry. + +The driver looked somewhat incredulous at this statement, then sizing up +the appearance of the boys, who were wearing their customary khaki +semi-uniform that they used as Rangers in the forest, decided that they +were hiking for the summer and probably used to walking good distances +in a short time. + +"What are you chaps doing, walking across the state or something?" + +Garry explained that they were forest rangers off duty temporarily and +were bound for a lumber camp to pay it a visit. + +As they drove along they asked several questions about the circus and +circus life, and considerably amused the man by referring to many things +in a way that circus people did not. The circus man told them of the +many strange phrases employed by circus people, and the boys learned +much of the talk of the circus. + +They found, for instance, that circus people never speak of the tent. It +is always called a top. There are the big top and the little tops. The +only thing on the circus lot to be called a tent is the cook tent. + +Several of the names applied to the performers were amusing. A clown is +always called a joy, and if he is a new man with the circus he is called +a First of May, because it is on that date that many contracts are made +in the circus. Acrobats are called kinkers, and the people who do work +on the high trapeze are called casters, and their work is called a +casting act. + +"Then there is the high diver, only we call it a tank diving act. You +won't see that this afternoon, for the diver fell a couple of days ago +and broke his arm. Funny; he's been diving forty feet into an eight foot +tank for several years, and never got a scratch, and then he slips on a +banana peeling and breaks his arm. It's too bad, too, for the diving act +always goes big in these small towns. I'd give twenty-five dollars for a +diver this afternoon," concluded the man. + +"Hand over the twenty-five," said Dick suddenly. + +"What do you mean," asked the circus man in surprise. + +"Just that you give me the twenty-five dollars and I'll do your high +dive for you this afternoon." + +The circus man looked at the other two boys as if he doubted his ears, +and Garry and Phil immediately assured them that Dick was a first class +swimmer and diver. + +"Forty feet is not so much to Dick. He's often done better than that in +the river at home," Garry told the circus man. + +"Yes, but you want to remember that this is an eight foot square tank, +and only eight feet deep," he told Dick. + +"That's nothing, I'll turn easily in eight feet. Have done it in a +little less," Dick assured him. + +"All right. I'll take you to see the owner when we get there, and he and +you can fix things up. He'll be glad to pay you that amount for the +work, for it's a big attraction and we have advertised it a lot. That's +my business with the circus--to do the advertising." + +In a little less than half an hour they had arrived at the circus lot, +and true to his word, the advertising man carried Dick round to the +ticket wagon and introduced him to the manager and owner. + +It took Dick but a short time to convince the owner that he could dive, +particularly when he offered to give an exhibition for him before the +show started. The only thing that the manager insisted on was that Dick +sign a statement relieving the circus from any responsibility in case +any accident occurred. + +Dick readily signed this, and then promising to be back in a short time +to get some tights and get dressed, they wandered around the lot. They +left their rifles and knapsacks in the ticket wagon, but Garry kept his +lariat with him. + +"What's the idea?" asked Phil. + +"There's very little chance of anything happening, but I don't want any +of those riders to walk off with this lariat by mistake," he replied. + +This decided the boys to keep theirs with them also, and accordingly +they slung them over one shoulder. Several curious glances were cast at +them as they wandered from show to show. The owner had given them passes +to everything, and they didn't waste any of them. + +Soon a bugle was heard blowing and in a moment they met the advertising +man who informed them that called all the performers to be ready in a +few moments. "Your act will be the fourth on the program, so you'd +better go and get your togs on and be ready," he told Dick. + +Garry and Phil elected to go to their seats and watch their chum do his +act with the rest of the spectators. + +"I'll come and hunt you up as soon as I do the dive and collect that +twenty-five good old dollars. I can use it very nicely one of these +days," Dick said as he turned to follow the circus man to the dressing +place. + +While the circus was a small one, it boasted of rather better things +than the average road circus, and among other things was a fairly good +menagerie. Garry and Phil looked at all the animals as they passed +through to the "big top." + +Two cages contained unusually fine specimens of lions, and near one was +a caretaker, waiting for the lions to be taken into the big performing +cage, after which he would clean the cage and have it ready on the +shaggy maned animal's return from the ring. + +"Wicked looking beast, isn't he," Garry remarked to the man who stood +near the cage. + +"He is that, boss," answered the man. "He's a a new one, and we don't +know him very well. We had a nice old chap before him, too old and tired +and toothless to do any harm, but this one is young and vicious. The +trainer has a lot of trouble with him, too." + +A sound of band music made the boys hurry to their seats, and soon the +"Grand entry" was on. + +Several of the usual acts were put on, and then razorbacks, as the +circus workers are called, pulled away some of the planking of the +platform in the center of the arena, disclosing a tank filled with +water. + +Soon the boys espied Dick advancing to the platform, his chubby body +enclosed in a glaring red bathing suit. He mounted to the tank, and the +chums could see him gazing about trying to locate them, but this he +failed to do. + +The ringmaster made a short speech, telling a lot of stuff about Dick +that made the chums grin. + +"Guess one has to be a blood relation of Ananias to be a ringmaster," +laughed Garry. "The only diving Dick has ever done before the crowned +heads of Europe was before they were crowned." + +After the laudatory speech, Dick climbed up the high ladder and stood +perched on the little square platform at the top. As he had been told to +do outside the big top, he dropped a handkerchief which slowly fluttered +down to the ground below. This is an old trick of high divers and is +done merely to accentuate the distance. + +Then the drummer started a long ruffle, and casting one downward look, +Dick tipped off the platform. Both Phil and Garry were just a trifle +nervous as he leaped, although they were well aware of his ability. + +But Dick hit the water as clean as a knife, and it was only a matter of +seconds before he appeared on the surface of the water and climbed out +dripping. A mighty round of applause was given not only for the fact +that he had made a fine dive, but his youth made him popular with the +audience. + +The acts went on, and in a little while Dick came wandering into the +tent. The boys hailed him as he neared the place where they were +sitting, and in a trice he had climbed up the rattling board seats to a +place beside his chums. + +"Well, I got my twenty-five, and we'll have a party with it some time. +Also, I received an offer to stay with the circus, which, naturally, I +turned down. So you see, Phil, you are not the only one to have jobs +offered them." He alluded to the time that a big league baseball scout +had offered a contract to Phil after seeing him pitch one game at +Commencement time at high school in his home town. The music stopped and +the ringmaster made his customary speech about the next act, which was +the lion taming act. + +The music had just started again, when there was a piercing shriek from +a woman, and then some one screamed: + +"The lion is loose!" + + + + +CHAPTER V + +EXTRA ENEMIES + + +Hundreds of people joined in the shrieking, and a stampede from the +seats started. Scores were trampled. The music had stopped for an +instant until the leader, true to tradition, called the men to order, +and the musicians swung into a stirring march. Circus hands, aided by +the performers who were on the platforms and in the rings, ran to the +sides of the tracks and endeavored to keep the people in their seats. + +The three chums were aghast for a minute, then Phil and Dick +instinctively turned to Garry to see what he would do. Garry had taken +one look and saw the beast at the far end of the tent, lashing his tail +and surveying the crowd, as though making up its mind as to what course +to pursue. + +The boys saw that Garry was hastily slipping his lasso from his +shoulder, and in a moment they had understood what he was going to +attempt, and followed suit. + +"Now fellows, let's try it. We may save a lot of lives. I'll try for his +head, and you two try for a foot each. I think we can catch him all +right. Let's go!" and Garry led the way. + +Calling to everyone to sit still as they ran, and swinging their lariats +over their heads, they struggled to the ground. Several people seeing +them make their way there, thought that it was perhaps a part of the +circus, and began to shout to each other that it was a feature of the +program. The sight of the three boys making their way fearlessly toward +the beast did more than anything else to quiet the people. Many sat back +in their seats, although others were escaping under the canvas wall of +the tent. + +It was to Phil, however, that the greatest honor was to come. As he ran, +swinging one arm, his hand hit against a pocket in his coat, and he felt +a hard lump within. In an instant he remembered that he bought pepper +the day before to replenish the condiment can that he generally carried +in his knapsack, but had not thought to take it out and transfer the +contents from the package to the can. He reached into his pocket and +brought out the can. Hastily opening the top, he kept on his way toward +the lion, holding the package out in front of him. The chums approached +within a few feet of the lion, who was showing signs of springing +suddenly at them. The effect of the boys' advance on him was to make him +forget the crowds and center all his attention on those that were +nearest him--the chums. + +The boys stopped short and were swinging their lariats, when suddenly +Phil darted ahead almost up to the lion, and, with a well directed aim, +emptied the contents of the pepper package straight on the eyes of the +lion. + +The infuriated beast gave a roar of pain and sprang, then fell to earth +and stuck a great paw into his eyes, as though to rub away the torturing +stuff that was blinding him. + +Garry, quick-witted, divined what Phil had done, and at the same moment +that the lion struck the ground, ran forward and threw the noose of the +lariat over the animal's head. + +The animal was nearly helpless, owing to its inability to see, and in +another moment the boys had the rest of their lariats noosed about his +feet. + +By this time the trainer and a number of the circus helpers had arrived +on the scene, and, dashing in, they tied the lariats securely about the +animal's feet. + +The crowd seeing that the animal was securely fastened and helpless, +first breathed a sigh of relief and then became suddenly quiet. Many +still thought it was a part of the program, but a majority felt sure +that it was a striking piece of bravery that they had just witnessed. + +Then cheer on cheer rolled through the tent, as the audience applauded +the brave trio of chums. All the foregoing had taken much less time than +the minutes necessary to describe it. In a moment the owner came puffing +on the scene, and when he saw who had accomplished the capture, he was +speechless for the moment. + +Then he said to the chums, as they stood watching the animal being +loaded into its cage: + +"This is twice today that you boys have done me a good turn, but this +second time far outmatches the first. Will you please come back to the +ticket wagon with me." Then to the menagerie head, who had joined them: +"I'd like you to come, too, please, Jones." + +The little group made its way to the ticket office, where the owner +first asked for an account of how the beast had made its escape. + +"The only man who can tell you that is the roustabout who cleans the +animal's cage. He was gashed by the lion evidently as its escape was +being made, and that and very likely a heart stroke killed him quickly. +I think perhaps he thought it was near time for the transfer to the +arena cage to be made and had unlocked the cage door, and the lion +pushed its way out, sir," said Jones. + +The manager was silent for a moment. Then he said: + +"No one can know how sorry I am that the man lost his life, but I am +thankful that the lion did no other damage, either by starting a great +panic or by attacking some one of the audience. As for you boys, I +propose to make you a substantial reward." + +"I assure you, sir," began Garry, "we have no thought of any reward for +doing what we did. It was luck on our part that enabled us to lasso him, +and we get our satisfaction in knowing that we perhaps saved a great +many lives." + +"I hope you will accept something as a recompense for your services. Had +the lion done great damage, I would have had to pay out many thousands +of dollars," insisted the owner. + +"Let us ask you one question first. Was the workman that was killed a +family man?" asked Garry. + +"I can tell you that in a minute." Turning to the ticket seller, he told +him to look the man up. A record of all the workers with their home +addresses was kept in a card index and in a moment the ticket seller had +ascertained that the dead man had a wife living in a small town in New +York State. + +"Of course we will take care of the widow, as we have every worker +insured, and then the management always adds to the insurance," said the +head of the circus. + +"Then I wish that you would just take whatever you had thought of +offering us in the way of a reward and add to the amount. I think my +chums agree with me that this is the best thing that could be done. Is +that right?" and Garry turned to his friends. Both Dick and Phil were +emphatic in their agreement. + +"Well, if that is the way you boys feel about it, I will do so, but I +will find some way to show you that I appreciate the great service that +you have done me." + +The owner asked them several other questions and took their names and +addresses, and again he offered to take the boys along with them on the +tour. Of course they refused, explaining that they were of the Ranger +Service of the State and were only on detached duty at the time. + +They remained for supper at the cook tent, and watched the circus torn +down and loaded in the teams preparatory to travelling to the next stop. + +After a hearty goodbye from the manager and owner they took their leave, +and hiking beyond the town spread their blankets for the night. + +They woke with the rising of the sun, and building a fire soon had +coffee, spider bread and bacon going, and made a hearty breakfast. + +"According to my reckoning we are about ten miles from the camp, and the +woods will begin in about a mile or two, so we had better get going. It +is now six o'clock and with three hours of easy hiking we will make our +destination," said Garry. "Now I think we ought to hold a council of war +as to how we shall conduct ourselves when we get to the camp. I think it +best that we just go to the manager and tell him we are going to camp +there for awhile, either right at the lumber camp, or a short distance +in the woods. Of course we shall give no inkling of the nature of our +visit, not even to the manager, at least until we have sized him up. To +my mind, everyone will be under suspicion until he has proven that the +suspicion is unfounded. We can go all over the camp and keep our eyes +open, getting all the information we can. When we ask questions we +should ask them simply as though it were from idle curiosity. I figure +that in a short time we ought to be able to tell who is acting +suspiciously and then bend all our efforts to watch them and frustrate +any mischief that they may be up to. We shall, of course, get a lot of +help from Howells when he arrives, but even then I think we ought to do +everything possible ourselves to find out what is the trouble at the +camp." + +They walked steadily but easily, and true to their reckoning arrived at +the camp a little after nine o'clock. The boys looked about them +curiously. There were only three buildings, built of logs. One, the +smallest, was evidently the officers' bunkhouse and offices; the other +was apparently the cookhouse, for the boys could see a youth sitting on +an upturned tub in front of the door peeling potatoes, and a thin wisp +of smoke issued from the chimney. Since it was mid-summer and hot, there +would be no need for a stove in any place but the kitchen. The third +house was a long, low log affair, bigger by far than either of the +others. This they decided was the bunk house, where the lumberjacks +lived. + +They made their way to the office and inquired for the manager. On +hearing the word "manager," a thin, sharpfaced man approached them, and +giving them a hasty glance, said in a sharp tone: + +"If you're here to ask for permission to camp on this tract you're out +of luck. This is a lumber operation and not a free camp site for every +fool from the city." + +"Just a minute, please. Hadn't you better find out our business before +you make up your mind as to what you will or won't do?" asked Garry, as +an angry red flush overspread his face. Garry was an extremely civil +boy, and expected others to be the same, and when he received +uncourteous attention was apt to resent it deeply. + +"Well, what do you want?" asked the manager, still in an ungracious +tone. + +"My name is Boone, and the owner of these cuttings happens to be my +father. Didn't you get a letter from him telling of our expected +arrival?" + +A great change came over the manner of the manager. A smirking smile +took the place of the frown and he advanced with outstretched hand. + +"I hope you will pardon me. I have been bothered to death for the past +few days by summer campers asking to pitch tents and build cabins and +what not on the cutting, and I thought from your appearance that you +boys were more of the same tribe," he said with an attempt to smooth out +the awkward situation and make up by a show of cordiality the blunder he +realized he had made. + +Privately, Garry thought him very ill-mannered and felt he should have +made more inquiries before showing his temper. Still he said nothing and +accepted the hand of the manager, who said his name was Barrows. + +Garry then introduced his chums and explained that they intended to stay +awhile and camp somewhere in the vicinity and watch the lumbering as +well as getting some fishing. + +"I understand that there are two lakes in the neighborhood," remarked +Garry, "and so we ought to get some good fishing." At the mention of the +word lakes, Barrows looked sharply at the boys, then said: + +"Oh, yes, you will get plenty of fishing, but you will find that the +small lake to the west of here is better than the big one that lies to +the north of us. The state stocked the little lake sometime ago by +special request of your father, and I hear there are some very good bass +and pickerel to be found there. The reports about the larger lake are +not so encouraging. Also there are two or three small streams,--brooks +perhaps it would be better to call them,--where you will find some +excellent trout. Then at the small lake there is a good stretch of sandy +beach where you can swim whenever you want to. Altogether you will find +the small lake is the most likely place for a summer playground." + +For a moment Garry wondered at the insistence of the manager in always +bringing the "small" lake into the conversation, but dismissed the +matter with the thought that the manager was simply trying to make +amends for his ungraciousness of the previous moment by showing them +where they could best enjoy themselves. Later he was to find that he was +mistaken. + +The manager asked them what they intended to do for living quarters. "I +am sorry that I can't offer you quarters in the bunkhouse here, but they +are just built to accommodate the officers of the camp; that is myself, +the sealer, the timekeeper and the bookkeeper. Of course you would not +want to live in the bunkhouse with the men, for they are a rough lot. +All I can suggest is that we makeshift for you some way and I will send +to town and dig up a tent for you." + +"If you will just loan us an axe apiece, and tell us which spot we can +cut a little timber from, we can throw ourselves up a cabin in a short +time, so don't bother about a tent. If necessary we can sleep in the +open till we get our shack fixed up," answered Garry. + +"Why, I can do better than that. I can let you have a couple or three +men to help you and do the work if you can direct them as to the kind of +cabin you want." + +"I don't want to take any of the men away from their work," Garry told +him, "but if we could have two or three for a few minutes to help us +throw up the cabin after we cut the stuff it would help greatly." + +"I will go and mark out some of the trees that you can cut. There is a +small growth here that isn't exceptionally good lumber, it's rather +scrubby, but will do very well for a cabin. I'll have to go myself, for +I left the cruiser go a few days to do some business he had waiting him, +and I have been scaling myself. In fact I do that often. Whenever he is +cruising to mark trees for cutting I do the measuring and that saves a +lot of time, also it saves the pay of an extra man. You ought to have a +good bit done by noontime and then after dinner I will detail a couple +of men to help you," and the manager led the way to the cookhouse, where +there were several extra axes. + +When they arrived at the cookhouse, they looked about with quite a bit +of curiosity. Two great ranges stood at one end of the kitchen, and on +one of the ranges were two enormous kettles. The boys could smell +appetizing pea soup and judged that one of the kettles contained this. + +The cook was an enormous man with a pair of fierce black moustaches, and +the one man on the whole range who was regarded as being just a little +bit better than the boss or even the owner of the timber tract. +Lumberjacks always took care never to pick a quarrel with him, and this +went the same for the manager and the camp officers. + +This is the same in every logging camp, for a cook can pay up any +grievances by cooking the food in an inferior fashion. Camp owners and +managers always pay the greatest attention to the sort of man they pick +for this position, for while in a lumber camp, there is never a widely +varied menu, it must be well cooked and plentiful. + +Nothing will drive the men away from a camp quicker than poor cooking. + +The manager introduced the boys to the cook, who shook hands with them, +offering a hairy hand which the chums privately thought resembled a ham. +For all his fierce looks he proved to be a genial chap, and the three +boys wondered whether he was one of the ring of trouble makers or not. +They reserved any decision in their own minds to await future +developments, but they had decided that everyone was under suspicion +until he proved that he was clear of any blame in the mysterious +occurrences that retarded progress at the lumber camp. + +In every camp there is a cookee, as the helper to the cook is +universally called. His duty is to peel potatoes, wash dishes, wait on +the table--rather set the tables than wait, for everything is piled on +at the beginning of the meal, and the only helping that is done is when +a dish has to be re-filled. + +The cookee was a surly looking chap of about twenty-one years of age. He +was slight of build and had violent red hair. He just mumbled a word or +two when he was introduced, and went on with his work, which was slicing +bread for the dinner hour that was near at hand. Garry and his friends +mentally put him down as one that might bear watching as soon as they +had located themselves. + +While the manager was asking the cook about borrowing a couple of the +axes that were stacked in the corner, a black-browed chap came to the +door and asked for a pail of water to take out to where several of the +men were trimming trees. The cookee brought the water and stepped +outside with the man. Garry and Phil were talking with the manager and +the cook, but Phil happened to be standing near the door. + +He heard the sound of talking in the French language and strained his +ears to catch what was being said. Phil was not eavesdropping because of +a natural desire to do so; it was merely that he was on the watch every +moment for a possible clue that would lead them to the solution that +they were in quest of,--the riddle of the mishaps at the lumber camp. + +What Phil heard was this: + +"Baptiste will be at the usual place at midnight tonight." + +Phil determined then and there that he would be at the rendezvous, +wherever it was, and hear what transpired. He could hardly wait to get +the others with him so that he could impart to them the information that +he had just overheard. + +He hoped that something else would be said, but at this moment the cook +called for his helper, who came hustling back into the shanty, and went +about preparing for the serving of the dinner. + +Phil went back to join his chums just in time to hear the manager say: + +"Unless you boys want the fun of throwing up a log house, I would +suggest a much easier and quicker way. You can cut enough poles for the +supports of the house, and then I'll have some sawed boards brought to +the spot. Also there is some tarred paper here that was brought here +when the camp started just for such an emergency. That would mean that +you could be all located before nightfall. As for heat, I have a Sibley +stove, one of those small ones such as they use in army camps for tents, +that will do very well. It isn't likely that you will want it often, for +we are in the hottest part of the summer, and only on a cold, wet night +will you require heat. You won't be here such a long time, I presume, +and we are in for a spell of good weather according to the cook here, +who is the camp weather prophet." + +Garry thought for a moment, and wondered what made the manager presume +they would be there only a short time. He was anxious to get going about +the camp as soon as possible and see what there was to pick up in the +way of information, so he decided that the board house would do as well +as one built entirely of logs. + +"That is a fine suggestion and we will accept. Building a hut is nothing +new to us, and we are anxious to begin fishing and wandering about, so +if you will show us where we can cut enough good heavy saplings for +supports, we will start right at it. We can have them cut and in place +before dinner and then the men can bring us the boards after dinner and +we will be all shipshape by nightfall," said Garry. + +"I think that is the best thing to do," the manager answered. "It is +about an hour to dinner time, and you will have ample time to do all +that can be done this forenoon." + +So saying, Barrows led the way to a spot near the camp, where there was +a clump of saplings that were not big enough to be used for sawed +lumber. + +"You might as well pitch your shanty here as anywhere, and it will save +you from dragging your saplings to any great distance. I'll gash each of +the saplings that you will need. You will only want ten as I figure it." + +"No, we will want twelve so that we may have a window," interposed +Garry. + +"That's a fact," answered the manager, looking sharply at Garry. "I see +that you know rather a bit about shanty building. Do you know much about +logging operations? I suppose you do, however, since you are of a family +that has always made logging a business." + +Garry felt that the manager was asking this question for a purpose, but +he promptly answered: + +"No, we know very little about logging, surprising as that may seem, +since as you say it ought to run in the blood. About the only thing we +understand about timbering operations is the log drive in the spring. We +were up once to watch the fight for the river, and had a mighty exciting +time, but the entire business is something new to all of us." + +Garry finished speaking and then looked sharply but guardedly at +Barrows. He thought he noticed a relieved expression on the face of the +manager. + +The three boys set about felling the saplings, swinging their axes with +a sure arm and hand. Barrows lingered to watch them at work, although +Phil was on tenterhooks to have him get away in order that he might +impart to his chums the information that he had gained from the sentence +he had overheard at the cook shanty. + +The poles being cut, four of them were erected in an upright manner to +form the main support of the house. At the tops of these, four more were +placed horizontally to support the roof. Then in the center of the +front, two were erected to form the sides of the door, while at a side +two others, in vertical position, allowed the making of a window. + +Still the manager made no show of leaving until fortunately for Phil, +who would have almost exploded had he been forced to keep silent any +longer, he was called by the red headed cookee. + +"Now quick fellows, while I have a chance to tell you. I have found one +of the traitors in the camp; it is the cookee. He is going to meet some +one tonight to hatch something out, and you chaps have one guess as to +who it is." + +"Barrows?" hazarded Dick. + +"Wrong. Baptiste LeBlanc!" + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE LUMBER CAMP + + +"The LeBlancs again!" exploded Garry. "I thought that we had seen the +last of that outfit. It seems that we are destined to run afoul of them. +Fortunately this Baptiste does not know about us, unless he has run +across his brother lately. That does not seem likely, for Jean is safely +beyond the border still. There are few places where he is safe, for he +is wanted in several different parts of the state. Still we must not +take anything for granted. We probably were seen by Baptiste when we +were instrumental in saving Howells from a bad beating or worse the +other night." + +"How are we going to find out where the rendezvous is tonight?" asked +Dick. + +"It seems to me that the best thing to do is to keep watch of the red +headed cookee; that is, you two chaps do that, while I will watch for +the man that told him of the appointment. You boys haven't seen him, so +you cannot keep on his trail. You can take turns keeping in the vicinity +of the cookee. If possible you might try and make acquaintance with him, +although I doubt if you will go very far, since he seems to be a surly +sort of a chap. Still, there's no harm in trying. When it comes time for +the meeting, I should say that it would be best only for me to follow +them. I can understand what they are saying, and one of us could follow +unobserved, where three would be spotted in a minute. You chaps can +plead to being tired after your hike and the work of building the shack, +and that will give us a chance to get to the new shanty early, and so be +unobserved." + +At that moment they heard the sound of a tin pan being vigorously beaten +with a stick, and immediately Dick set up a shout: + +"There's the dinner signal, or my ears and stomach fail me." + +"For once I am ready to eat a good big meal. You are not the only one +with an appetite today, Dick," said Garry, and the three raced for the +cookhouse. + +As they neared the cook tent, they saw the lumberjacks piling towards +the place to eat. They were a sizable group of men, brawny of arm and +large of frame. + +Most of them gave the boys a curious glance as they flocked into the +shanty. The boys thought that they were to eat in the common dining +room, but found that they were to eat in a separate room that had been +partitioned off from the large room. Here ate the manager, the +timekeeper and cashier, and when he was present, the timber scaler. + +The food that was served them was the same as that given the men. +Barrows explained this by saying that it kept the men in a better humor +if they knew that the bosses were getting the same fare as they. + +"Lumberjacks are just like so many children," Barrows said. "They are +always on the lookout for something to quarrel about, and are almost as +temperamental as grand opera stars. Just now work is scarce, so they +keep better behaved; but in the winter time, when all the camps are +going full blast, you have to be careful and treat them properly, else +they will simply depart for some city where there is a woods agency and +be sent off to another camp. That is one of the evils of lumbering, the +agencies. They often try to breed trouble in the camps so that the men +will quit. Then they pack them off to another logging tract and collect +a commission from the camp owner for furnishing him with men. If this +was winter I would think that was what was the trouble here." + +Garry looked up in surprise. He had no idea that Barrows would admit +that everything was not as it should be at the camp. + +He knew that the eyes of the manager were on him, nevertheless he felt +that an answer was expected of him, or rather a question. + +"Why, is there anything the trouble at this camp? From what I've seen I +should say that everyone was working busily and everything was lovely." + +At this the manager brightened up considerably. It seemed to be that +this was the kind of a remark that he was looking for, and he made haste +to answer: + +"Oh, there is nothing radically wrong here, I only meant that +occasionally there seemed to be a sort of dissatisfied air on the part +of the men, but it may only be worry on my part." + +Garry was certain that the entire conversation was brought about in a +manner to delve into the feelings of the boys, and see how they regarded +everything. Garry did not believe that their mission was penetrated, but +thought that the guilty conscience of the manager would make him see an +enemy in every person he did not know. + +The dinner was plain but good. It consisted of pea soup, potatoes, some +roasted beef, and coffee. The fare at a lumber camp is anything but +varied. The aforementioned articles, roast pork, stew and beans, with +either white bread baked at the camp, or great slabs of johnny cake with +molasses in lieu of syrup was the general thing. Coffee was served at +every meal. + +"For breakfast we have bacon and toast and coffee in our dining room, +because the men have all eaten and started for work by the time we are +ready for breakfast," said Barrows. "Now we will go into the other room, +and I will give you boys a general introduction to the men. That will +save you any annoyance when you go about the camp." + +He led the way into the larger room, and stepping on a bench announced: + +"Men, these three boys are going to camp here for awhile. This one," +pointing to Garry, "is the son of the owner. The other two are his +friends. I wanted you to meet them so that you may do all you can to +make their visit here a good one." + +Garry thought to himself, "Yes, you are also showing us to those in your +crew so they will watch their step while we are around." A good many of +the men just sized the boys up, a few hollered good-natured remarks at +them, while several pressed forward and shook the hands of the boys, +remarking they had worked many years for Mr. Boone and were glad to meet +his son and his friends. + +The three chums took especial care to fix these men in their minds, for +the same thought came to them all,--that if trouble arose, it was likely +that these men would prove loyal friends in need. Barrows detailed some +of the men to bring back the necessary lumber for the shanty, and then +the men went back to their work for the afternoon. + +Soon they heard a chugging sound and presently a tractor hove into +sight, dragging a broad-wheeled cart on which was the lumber. The +manager came up, leading a couple of men with some heavy rolls of tarred +paper, and all was ready to build the shanty. + +Sandy, the big Airedale, was gravely watching the boys when the men with +the tar paper arrived, and one of them seeing the dog, remarked: + +"How would you chaps like to go coon hunting tonight, that is if your +pup will trail a coon?" + +This was just what the boys did not want to do that night, so Garry +hastily made the excuse that they were tired from their march and the +work of throwing up the shanty, but said they would be glad to go the +following night. + +This seemed all right to the men, who proceeded to make friends with +Sandy, that is as much as that sedate dog would let them, for an +Airedale makes few friends outside of his own family circle. + +The work of putting up the shanty was done in a short time since there +were so many workers, and the addition of two bunks made it complete. + +Barrows volunteered the information that there was a spare table in the +office, and a bench and a couple of chairs that could be taken from the +dining room. + +"Then all we have to do is to cut some balsam boughs for our bunks and +we will be as snug as bugs in a rug," announced Phil. + +Phil and Dick were dispatched to get the boughs, while Garry talked of +inconsequential matters with Barrows until their return. + +The rest of the afternoon was spent in wandering about the cutting. It +was a revelation to the boys, the sight of the great timber falling in +the exact direction that it was wanted. The boys noted that the cut was +made just as Howells had told them, and they wondered whether or not any +spikes would be encountered. + +The felling of a tree is an interesting process. The swing begins on the +side where the cutters do not want the tree to fall. Then when the saw +is better than two-thirds of the way through the trees, the swampers or +axemen take their stand at either side of the tree, and make a cut a +trifle under the line where the saw is coming through. This is done to +cause the tree to fall on that side. The axemen work like clockwork, +using a double bitted axe,--that is one that has two blades,--and make +the chips positively fly, one drawing his axe away just in time to let +the other man make a blow. Just as the moment comes for the tree to +fall, the cry of "tim-ber-r-r-r" is raised by one of the axemen and this +is the signal for all to be out of the way as the great tree falls with +a crash that shakes the ground for many feet around. + +Following the falling of the timber, the trimmers begin their work. +Starting at the base end of the tree, one on each side, they walk up the +sides of the fallen monarch of the forest, and trim the branches off as +far as they are able. Many of the branches on the under side of the tree +are broken in the fall, others are only splintered and many of them are +just bent. A dozen men then seize their peavy sticks, as they are called +in Maine, or cant dogs in some other places where lumbering is done, and +roll the tree over. A peavy stick is a heavy pole about six feet long, +with a sharp iron point at the end. About a foot from this point is +attached a loose curved iron arm very much like one side of an ice-man's +tongs. This swings back and forth from the handle. The men prod the iron +point into the trunk of the tree, and then catch the swinging end of the +hook into the trunk. This gives them almost a handle to the tree, and +the long pole furnishes them the necessary leverage. At a word from the +man on the end, all give a mighty heave, and the tree is rolled over, +when the remaining branches are lopped off. + +The lumberjacks are experts in the use of the peavy stick, and it is a +pretty sight to see them load a great trunk onto a flat car to be drawn +away. The method is almost the same as that used in turning over a +trunk,--only just half of the men fix their sticks. They give it half a +turn and then hold it in position on the skids, while the other half get +a grip and start turning. In this way, turn and turn about, they roll +the log right up the skids and onto the car. + +In this instance the trunks were not hauled to the mill on a car; a +chain was attached instead, and then one of the baby tractors was used +to drag it over the ground to the mill. There were a half a dozen of +these tractors at the camp. Three were constantly employed in dragging +the cut timber to the mill, while the other three were used to draw the +flat cars to the railroad tracks, a half a dozen miles from the camp. + +After watching the felling of several trees, the boys essayed trimming, +and while they were by no means unskillful at it, caused many a laugh +among the men because of the time they took. Whereas they often took two +or three strokes to take off a branch, the skilled woodsmen with one +swift, clean cut, lopped off a good thick branch. + +The boys took their chaffing good naturedly and thereby won a lot of +regard from the jacks, many of whom were ready to sneer at "city chaps." + +From the timbering they went to the sawmill. Here they found a busy whir +of activity. Logs were rolled onto the carriage and sent down the plane, +while the great circular saw bit its way through the length of the tree +like a hot knife through a pat of butter. + +The carriage then runs back to where it started, while a mechanical +device shoves the log sideways as many inches as is desired and the +carriage starts on its journey again. This is done until the log has +been "sliced into planks." These are then piled on one side, waiting for +the flat cars to be loaded and hauled away by the tractor. + +This operation that has been described entails more labor than the +winter logging, for then the trees are simply cut and rolled to one side +of the river. This continues throughout the winter until the cutting has +been complete and then they wait for the ice to go out. As soon as the +ice breaks up, the logs are tumbled into the river and floated down the +stream. For days they float down the river to the mills below, which are +always located on the river banks, and here they are ground up and made +into pulp from which paper is later manufactured. + +The logs are distinguished one from another when they reach their +journey's end by branding, much as the horses that roam the feeding +places in the West are known by their brand. Every lumberman has his +mark, and a gash is made at one end of the log, and on this is made the +mark. + +For example, Garry's father had his mark AB, which stood for his +initials. In this instance it was not necessary to brand the lumber, for +it all came from the same cutting and was transported directly to the +same destination. + +After supper that night, the men gathered outside their bunkhouses, +playing cards or simply leaning back against the wall and smoking. One +of the French Canadian lumberjacks produced a mouth organ, and another a +battered guitar, and those who spoke the French joined in an old +"chanson" or song. + +Soon one of the Americans, seizing on a lull in the conversation and +singing, struck up an old-time lumberjack song, and in a moment the +whole camp had joined in. The lumberjack songs are mostly about camp +events, the fight for the river at the spring flood, some great battle +that took place between two rival lumber camps, for your true lumberjack +is as ready to fight as to eat. + +Where these songs come from, no one knows. They are as old as the +lumbering industry in Maine, and generally are written with a chorus at +the end. One man sings the verse and then the camp joins in the chorus +in a thundering tone. There is generally more noise than melody, at +least in the choruses, for a man that has a fair voice always sings the +verse part. Some of these songs are of a seemingly endless duration, but +the lumberjacks never tire of singing them. + +As the men sang the moon came up, and made a scene that was long to be +remembered by the boys. In spite of their enjoying the evening, they +kept a sharp eye on the movements of the red haired cookee, although he +made no move to disappear. The boys figured that he probably would not +until the camp was asleep. Soon the men began to yawn, and turn into the +bunkhouse, while the boys bade goodnight to the manager and repaired to +their own shack. They turned in, and as soon as all seemed quiet, Phil +started out, and walking in the shadows, made for the spot he had picked +that afternoon as being a safe place to watch the exit from the +bunkhouse. + +Garry and Dick dropped off to sleep, and were only awakened some time +later by hearing Phil climb into his bunk. In a moment they were wide +awake. + +"What news," whispered Garry. + +"Go on to sleep," advised Phil in a disappointed tone. "The LeBlanc +never showed up, and I've lost three hours' sleep for nothing. +Goodnight!" + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +A NOCTURNAL VISITOR + + +It was in that dark hour that precedes the dawn, which for some reason +or other is always the blackest of the night. The three boys were +sleeping soundly. Suddenly Phil awoke and sniffed the air. For a moment +or two he was dazed, then he gave a shout. + +His cry of alarm woke the others, and they were about to leap from their +beds when Phil's warning shout prevented them. + +"What's the trouble, Phil?" asked Garry. "Are there snakes in the shack +or are you just having a nightmare? Whew!" Garry had no need to ask any +further questions. + +The nocturnal visitor was nothing more nor less than a polecat, that +little animal of the woods about the size of a cat, but commonly called +a skunk. + +Phil retained his presence of mind, and reached to the bottom of his +bunk and hauled out one of his heavy shoepacks. With a well directed aim +he heaved it at the unwelcome little intruder, which at that moment was +near the door. The force of the blow carried the animal out into the +night, and then the boys hopped out of their bunks and seized their +clothes. Keeping a wary eye, they dashed through the door and out of the +way. The animal by this time was scampering away. + +Going back to the shack was almost out of the question, for he had left +his unmistakable scent behind him. + +"There goes my night's sleep all shot to pieces," exclaimed Phil in an +aggravated tone. "First I go on a wild goose chase to hear a plot and +hear nothing, then this comes up, and blooie, there is goodbye to rest. +Bet you I take a nap this morning. Wonder if that smell will evaporate +or will we have to build a new shack. Also there is going to be a door +on the next one. I don't want any more night visitors like that chap." + +"Hush a minute," whispered Garry. To the ears of the boys, trained by +their work in the woods to catch the slightest sound, came the soft +noise as of someone walking towards the bunkhouse. In a moment Garry was +flat on the ground, wiggling along as does an Indian on the war path in +a manner that the boys had often practiced when they were Scouts. + +He was back in about five minutes. The others were all curious to know +what had made him act in such a mysterious manner. + +"Someone was prowling about, and just a moment ago went into the +bunkhouse. I could hear him when he dropped his shoes as he got ready to +crawl into the bunk. Here's what I think. That wood pussy may have +wandered into the shack all by his lonesome, but for my part I think it +is the first event in a campaign to make things so unpleasant for us +that we will cut short our visit and go away," whispered Garry. + +"They couldn't have picked on anything much better to make it +unpleasant," answered Dick. "What will we do now?" + +By this time the first faint streaks of dawn appeared, and in a little +while the camp would be astir. + +"It is almost morning, and now that we are wide awake and up, we might +as well stay so," answered Garry. "First thing we do this morning is to +get a few more boards and fashion a door for this shack. Also I saw some +heavy screening yesterday,--you notice that all the windows are +screened,--and we will tack a double thickness of that over the window. +That will afford us some slight protection against the invasion of more +friends such as the one that paid us an unwelcome call." + +In a little while the camp was starting to come to life. First appeared +the cookee who favored the boys with a knowing grin, then came the cook, +who immediately started the work of getting breakfast. Finally, +struggling into their clothes as they came yawning through the doors, +appeared the lumberjacks. + +Garry cautioned his chums to say nothing for the moment about their +experience of the night. They passed several moments in chatting with +those of the lumberjacks with whom they thought they might make friends +that would perhaps stand them in good stead later on. Garry was telling +a funny story and at its conclusion the men burst into a roar of +laughter. + +The red headed cookee happened to be passing just as the men began to +laugh, and he looked sharply at the boys. While he was serving them +breakfast in the smaller room,--they happened to be alone as Barrows had +not yet arisen,--he remarked: + +"Understand you chaps didn't sleep very well last night." + +"No, we didn't," answered Garry, looking up quickly. + +"Well, better luck next time," and still grinning the cookee shambled +out of the room. + +"Well!" exploded Garry. "If that chap didn't go and give himself clean +away first shot out of the gun!" + +"Looks as though your hunch about its being a part of the campaign of +ruthlessness was a fact," said Dick with a laugh. + +"Only question in my mind," said Phil, "is did he think of it himself as +a sort of a practical joke, or was he put up to it by Barrows?" + +"Looks pretty certain to me that Barrows was the instigator of the +matter," answered Garry. + +When Barrows appeared, the boys explained the matter to him, and asked +him for the necessary lumber with which to construct a door, also some +screening for the window. Barrows told them they could go to the saw +mill and select whatever they wanted in the way of boards. + +As they were getting the boards, an old grizzled lumberman chatted with +them. He asked why they wanted a door in that kind of weather, and Garry +told him the story. + +"They do leave a reg'lar trail behind them, don't they?" laughed the old +man. "I'll tell you what you can do, though, and it will fix things up +pretty well. I always keep some sulphur on hand when I'm in the woods. +Occasionally you get a rash from the browntail moths in the woods, and +the best thing for a cure is a poultice made with a little sulphur. When +you put your door on, take a few extra boards and board up your window. +Then take the sulphur that I give you and put it in a pan and set it on +fire with a hot coal from the kitchen range. Then you hop out and let +the shack get thoroughly filled with the fumes o' the sulphur, and +you'll find after a couple or three hours that you'll have your place +fumigated as pretty as if you had ten boards of health do the job for +you." + +The boys thanked the old timer, and left with their lumber. A few +minutes later he appeared on the scene with his sulphur, and the work of +boarding the window and making a door being completed, they did as he +had directed and went on a tour of the camp. + +As they were wandering about, with Sandy at their heels, they were again +approached by the man who had wanted to go on a coon hunt. This time +they accepted his invitation, and arranged to go that night. + +The day passed quickly, for there were many things about the camp to +attract their attention, and they asked numerous questions of such of +the lumberjacks as seemed inclined to spend a moment or two to answer +them. + +As soon as it got dark, the coon hunter appeared and asked if they were +ready to go. He was accompanied by one or two of his friends, and Garry +noticed that one of them carried a burlap bag. + +The boys secured their rifles, and were about to join the party, when +one of the men, noticing the guns, said: + +"You don't need your rifles, although you can carry 'em if you want. We +were aiming to catch the coon alive and see if we couldn't tame him for +a sort of pet around the camp. That's what we brought the bag for." + +"Good," answered Garry. "We aren't much on shooting animals just for the +sake of shooting." + +The trio of men led the way to where the man called Tom had said he had +seen a raccoon a few days before. Sandy was eagerly sniffing at the +ground, and soon he gave vent to a low growl. + +"By gosh, I believe he's got the scent already," chuckled one of the +men. "It may be some other kind of an animal, but I doubt it. All I've +seen around here is the raccoon, although there were a few rabbits at +different times. Still the raccoon is the most likely to be out prowling +at this time of night." + +Soon Sandy was off, with his nose close to the ground. After a few +moments he had left them entirely, and they followed only by means of +his occasional barks. After almost half a mile of chasing, they heard a +series of wild barks, and knew that Sandy had driven something to bay. + +In a few moments they had caught up to the dog, and there sure enough he +had something treed and was venting his pleasure by loud and vociferous +barks. + +They peered up into the tree and could see nothing. In the meantime one +of the men had discovered a hole at the foot of the tree. + +"Now one of you fellows get some branches, dry ones of course, and we'll +soon have Mr. Coon all trapped as nice as you please." + +One of the men, assisted by Dick, soon gathered an armful of dry sticks. +Getting a boost from his friend, Tom soon shinnied up the tree, and +stopped after he had gotten about fifteen feet up well into the +branches, for it was a small tree. + +"Here's the upper end of the hollow," he called down. "Now you fellows +start your fire at the hole down there, while I spread the bag over this +hole." + +The smudge was soon started, and fanning it with their coats, they drove +the smoke into the hollow tree trunk. They were always careful not to +let the flames of the fire get to the tree, or they might have started a +forest fire that would have been disastrous. As a matter of fact, +several bad forest fires have started from an unskillful attempt to +smoke some animal out of a tree. + +Soon there was a shout from the man up the tree. "I've got him!" + +The smoke had proved too much for Brer Raccoon, and he had sought to +escape by the hole at the top, only to walk into the bag. In a moment +more Tom had descended the tree with a squirming, snarling animal safely +tied up in the bag. + +On their return to the camp they were greeted by several of the jacks +who had not yet gone to bed. The catch was exhibited, and one of the men +produced an old dog collar from the bunkhouse. The collar was snapped on +the coon's neck, a stout rope was attached to the ring in the corner to +be later tied securely to a nail at the corner of the bunkhouse. + +"There," remarked Tom, surveying the result of the night's catch. "If +you fellows will lay off and not tease him, and shinny out a little food +for him once in a while, he'll get tame as a kitten, and they are a lot +of fun when they get tame. Almost as good as a monkey." + +"We'll have to keep Sandy tied up for a while when he is not with us, or +he'll make short work of that coon," remarked Garry. + +"Oh, I'll have 'em as friendly as two brothers in a few days," was Tom's +verdict. + +The boys later found that the man Tom had a reputation for being quite a +hand with animals of every description, but future events will show why +Sandy and the coon never got well acquainted. Things were on the verge +of beginning to hum for all hands. + +When the boys woke in the morning, they made two startling discoveries. +The first one was that repeated calls failed to bring Sandy to them, and +the boys had never remembered the morning when Sandy went so far abroad +that a few whistles did not bring him back on the run to join his +companions. + +The second surprise was found when Garry noticed a familiar looking roll +of birch bark at the entrance to the cabin, weighted down by a stone! + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +WORD FROM THE HERMIT + + +"Look here, you chaps," called Garry, as he gazed at the little roll of +bark, which he had not yet picked up. The boys crowded around and looked +at him in amazement. + +"Without making any rash bets," announced Garry, "I'll wager my best +rifle against a plugged nickel, that one of our friends has been in this +vicinity within the past few hours. Cast your eyes on that roll of bark, +and tell me if you dare that we won't find a funny cryptic little +message in it!" + +"The Hermit!" burst out Dick and Phil almost in one breath. + +"That's my guess. Now we'll see if we are right," and Garry stooped and +picked up the little roll from its resting place beneath the stone. +"It's the Hermit, and it's just the kind of a note I expected to find. +Listen to this. 'Unseen watchers often give the best aid. When you need +me most, I'll be with you.' And it's signed with his old mark, the lone +pine with the crossmarked boulder," said Garry as he had finished +reading. + +"Well, if that doesn't beat anything I ever heard of," said Dick. "How +in the name of all that's wonderful did he ever find us in this part of +the country?" + +"I think I can answer that," interrupted Phil. "He must have run across +Nate Webster and asked about us. It is likely that Nate told him where +we were going, and since he knew that we were good friends, might have +given him an inkling of the business that we were here on. The thing +that puzzles me is why he should not have waited and seen us, or even +waked us up to say howdy." + +"Well, you know what a queer old codger he was, and this latest stunt is +typical of him. Much as I would like to see him, I confess I would have +been a little bit disappointed if he had not done something out of the +ordinary," replied Garry. + +"Wonder where he went after he left the note?" queried Dick. + +"Oh, he's probably somewhere out in the woods, you know life in the open +woods is nothing to him, after all the years that he must have lived in +them. The main question now, since we can do nothing about our friend +the Hermit, as he will come in his own good time, is to see what has +happened to Sandy. I cannot understand his going away. He may have +chased up some animal, and if so he will be back. But it is unusual for +him ever to stir away from where we are sleeping until he knows that we +are up and about." + +Throughout the morning they searched every nook and corner of the camp, +going almost to the edge of the cutting operations, asking all the +workers they met whether or not the dog had been seen. Their search was +of no avail. The day dragged on, still no Sandy, and each passing hour +made the chums more downcast. + +"I'm beginning to think that this is step number two to drive us out," +gritted Garry between his teeth. "I tell you this, boys, if it is so, +and I'm inclined to believe it more and more, if any harm comes to Sandy +through the machinations of this crew that are trying to ruin Dad's +business, there's going to be one of the sweetest little wars started +that Barrows and his whole crew ever even dreamed of." + +"I'm with you, Garry. That dog was more than human, and the best friend +that a bunch of chums like us could ever hope to have," replied Dick as +he patted his friend on the shoulder. Phil said nothing, but the others +could see by the tightening of the corners of his mouth,--the danger +signal when Phil was really aroused over anything,--that he was with +them to the end. + +"There doesn't seem to be anything that we can do. I've looked carefully +over the ground for any signs of a struggle, but I can find nothing. +There was some trickery of some kind to get Sandy away. It may have been +done only to steal him and possibly sell him, but it may be that there +was a foul purpose in getting the dog away from us. The time has come +for real action. Let's get going early in the morning and keep our eyes +and ears sharply on the lookout. Phil, you watch the cookee closely and +see if there are any more midnight appointments to be made. Dick, you +look out for the sawmill, and see if there is any funny business being +done with the saw. You know enough about machinery to be able to detect +if it is working properly, and your common sense will tell you if there +seems to be a slackening up of production. It stands to reason that the +boss of the sawmill must be in on this scheme, for more delay can be +caused here than anywhere else. It is unlikely that there are many men +in on this plot. Too many would make it unsafe for the conspirators, +they couldn't all keep their mouths shut. I'll keep an eye on Barrows +and see what conferences he holds with the men. I hope that Howells gets +back here soon, I feel that we need immediate advice from someone who is +more experienced in the lumbering business than we are. Now let's hop to +it." + +The two boys did as their leader had directed. Phil ambled off to the +cookhouse with the intention of offering his services in peeling +potatoes to the cookee in order that he might have an excuse for keeping +near the fellow. Dick at once made for the sawmill. + +When he arrived there, the busy hum of activity seemed to be all about +him. But as he watched he became conscious of the fact that there seemed +to be several things that delayed the game. The man who drove one of the +tractors seemed to be having continual trouble with the engine, and +several minutes on each trip were consumed in needless repairs. Dick +could see with half an eye that there was little the trouble with the +engine except that which was created by the driver himself. The man kept +up a continual stream of grumbling at the way the engine was acting, +evidently to make the trouble appear to be real. + +Once Dick saw that there was a loose wire connection which the driver +purposely overlooked, and after he had watched the man waste ten minutes +in needless overhauling, he stepped up and offered his services. + +The man refused with a growl and an oath. Dick managed to restrain his +temper, although he wanted to tell the man how evident his stalling +around was. + +"Oh, all right, I don't mean to interfere with your business, but your +wire to your battery is unconnected," and Dick turned on his heel. + +Seeing that Dick really knew what he was talking about, the driver +attached the wire and in a moment or two was off for another load of +logs. + +"If he wastes that much time every trip," thought Dick to himself, "he +might just as well try to bring in the logs on his back. In the course +of a week that would mean almost a day's production gone to waste, and I +haven't watched long enough to know how much time he takes on his trip." + +Quite frequently the saw would be stopped for a moment while the boss +sawyer oiled up different parts of the machinery. He did not seem to +like Dick's watching him, but he was evidently a little wiser than the +driver, and attempted an explanation. + +"This is the last saw we have in the camp," he told Dick. "The ones that +we ordered haven't shown up yet, and if anything goes wrong with this +one, we are hurt and hurt bad." + +Dick pretended a great deal of ignorance about the saw, but he could see +that the sawyer regarded him with some suspicion. + +Dick kept in the sawmill, but stayed as much as possible in the +background. After nearly an hour of watching, a great log was rolled +onto the carriage, and glancing at his watch, the boss sawyer called an +assistant and gave him charge of the saw. Then he hastened from the mill +and started in the direction of the camp, evidently to hold a conference +with Barrows. Dick was turning to saunter out when he heard a terrific +tearing sound as of steel being ground between heavy rollers, then a cry +of pain from the sawyer. Dick turned and rushed to the scene. The saw +was still grinding into the obstruction that was causing the noise, and +several pieces of flying steel were in the air. The sawyer had his hands +clasped to his face, and the blood was streaming from between his +fingers. + +Dick saw that there was no one with presence of mind enough to throw the +lever that shut off the saw, and he ran and threw off the lever. Then he +returned to the injured man. The flying teeth of the saw had cut his +face in several places, but fortunately his eyes were uninjured. That he +had escaped being blinded was almost a miracle. + +The thought that flashed through Dick's mind that here was an instance +of what Howells had told them, of the spiking a tree in the upper part +where it would hit the saw. Dick asked the old man who had told them how +to fumigate their shack the day before if he could roll back the saw +without starting up the engine and causing more teeth to be broken and +start flying about the place. + +In a few minutes the old timer had worked the saw back so that Dick +could examine it. It required only a moment to see that the saw was +irreparably ruined. Most of the teeth had been bent or broken off, and a +further examination showed that several parts of the saw carriage and +control had been broken or strained by the unwonted burden that had been +put on them. + +At this moment the boss sawyer and Barrows, the manager, had come +rushing up to the mill to inquire what was the trouble. Garry was with +them, and Dick gave him a significant look, unobserved by the others. + +"What's all the trouble?" inquired Barrows needlessly, for he could see +with half an eye the damage that had been wrought. + +"Seems as if your saw was a total wreck," answered Dick. "Must have +struck a ton of metal in the heart of that tree to do all that damage." + +"Nonsense," cried Barrows. "Whoever heard of metal in a tree?" + +"Could it have been a defective saw?" inquired Garry soberly, for the +purpose of hearing what reply Barrows would make. + +"Yes, that's what it must have been, a defective saw," repeated the +manager, parrot fashion. + +"Defective saw me eye," broke in the old helper. "That tree has been +spiked and spiked good and plenty. That's the second saw that went that +way this summer. Tother time it nearly killed the sawyer when the belt +flew off and almost got him tangled up in the machinery. There's one +sure way to find out what caused it, and that's to roll her off the +carriage and split off that place where the saw started to eat through. +If there isn't a spike there, you can have my month's wages." + +"You seem to know all about it, and perhaps we shall find out why you +know so much about the matter," and Barrows favored the old man with a +look that boded no good to him. + +In the face of the old timer's statement, and because Dick and Garry +were looking at the manager as though they expected him to take speedy +action, there was nothing for Barrows to do but follow the suggestion +and order the log rolled off. This was done, and then several wedges +were driven in, and using the backs of single bitted axes, the section +of tree was soon split open. There plainly revealed to view were several +bent, cut and twisted spikes! + +"That's what broke your saw," exclaimed the old man. "Shame, too, a nice +saw like that ruined and the only one in the camp at that!" + +"That will do, Collins," cut in Barrows sharply. "Your opinion wasn't +asked. Besides, I am still wondering how your knowledge of the spiking +seemed to prove so accurate." + +"I was raised in the woods, and I know all the little tricks. There's +dirty work afoot here somewhere," returned old Collins staunchly. + +"Yes, I guess you do know all the tricks, but I know a good one, too; +you go and get your pay from the timekeeper and start on your way," +ground out the manager. + +"Isn't that just a trifle hasty, Mr. Barrows?" cut in Garry. + +"Listen, my boy. With all due respect to the son of my employer, I must +say that I am manager of this camp, and what I say goes. You know I am +protecting your father's business, and there has been so much funny +business going on lately that something must be done, and I am going to +begin by cutting out all the suspicious characters. In my judgment +Collins is such a character." + +"Huh," muttered Dick in an undertone. "A fine protector you are, and you +know that Collins is innocent. He knows too much, that's all." + +Old Collins marched out of the mill section and started toward the +office. A moment later Dick unobtrusively followed him. In a few seconds +he had caught up with the man and said goodbye to him. + +"Goodbye, my lad, and let me give you a warning. Tell your pal that his +father's business is going to pot here. There's something underfoot, I +don't know what it is or why, but it's there. Too many accidents. You +watch that Barrows and watch the timekeeper, and keep an eye on the two +drivers with the moustaches. Throw in the cookee for good measure, and +you'll have a precious lot of rascals." + +Dick tried to elicit further information, but found that the old fellow +either did not know anything specific, or was crotchety and would not +tell. + +There being nothing that could be done further, the manager and Dick +returned to the office, while Garry went to the bunkhouse to see if he +could render any aid to the man who had been cut by the flying particles +of the saw. + +At the office they found waiting their acquaintance of the attempted +holdup, Arthur Howells. He acted according to the agreement and waited +till they had been introduced. + +"This is our scaler and cruiser," announced Barrows. + +Upon the boys professing ignorance of what the duties of a scaler were, +they received an invitation from Howells to come with him after dinner +and watch the operations. Barrows heartily advised the boys to go with +him and learn something of the way in which the trees were spotted and +the lumber measured. + +The chums knew well that the invitation was solely for the purpose of +getting them away from the camp so that they could confer on what was +going on. + +After dinner they sought out Howells, and after he had armed himself +with a scaling stick, marked off in measurements, which was used to +measure the trees, they wandered into the woods. + +"Now, boys, what news?" he asked. + +In a few words they told him of the events that had transpired since +their arrival. + +Howells was especially interested in the matter of the spiked tree, and +was indignant at the fact that Collins had been discharged. + +"Why, the old man was as honest as the day is long. He used to know your +father a good many years ago, Garry, and he would never do anything that +would harm him or his business," Howells said vehemently. + +"Next thing on the docket," said Garry, "is to ask what news you have." + +"I have something that will knock the feet almost out from under you. In +addition to the trouble caused by the breakage and wasting, there is +something even deeper yet. I always get the reports from the receiving +stations of the amount of lumber that is sent out. I know after +measuring, just how much has gone out. Today my reports show that all +the timber that is cut here does not arrive at its destination. + +"What do you mean?" said Garry. + +"Just what I mean is this. Somewhere, somehow, your father's lumber is +being stolen en route to its destination!" + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +THE BOYS LOSE AN ALLY + + +The words of Howells stunned the boys for a moment. Then Garry delivered +himself of a few vehement words regarding the thieves. + +"We have been here only a couple of days or so, and yet we find that +this logging camp is a hive of rascals and thieves. And still we have +done nothing. We must get to work and nip this thing in the bud, else +the whole summer's work at the camp here will have gone for naught, to +say nothing of the irreparable financial loss that will be caused to +Dad, not only from the penalties for failure to live up to his +contracts, but the money loss from the stolen timber will mount up well +into the hundreds I am afraid. Now we must put a stop to this thing. I +believe that I will go out tomorrow and go to town and 'phone Father +that he had better make a cleanup here at the camp. Perhaps we don't +know just who the guilty parties are, but if we get rid of the whole +shooting match we can stop it. How much timber would you estimate has +been stolen?" he concluded, turning to Howells. + +"I can't say as to that. This last report is the only one that I have +received direct. Generally I have been given what was supposed to be a +duplicate copy of the one sent to Barrows. This time I happened to get +the mail myself at the postoffice. Generally one of Barrow's men gets +the mail, and it is distributed. This letter was addressed to me +personally, and I have no doubt that the others were also, but were +opened and doctored up to appear all right. That's a prime bit of +evidence if we can secure the proof. Tampering with Uncle Sam's mail is +a serious crime, and draws a long prison term. Now as for your going out +of the woods tomorrow and 'phoning your father, Garry, I would advise +against it. Nothing very serious can happen in the next few days. Little +work can be done until a new saw comes, and there will be little +shipping of timber except that which has been waiting to be transported. +In the meantime, if, as your father is led to believe, this whole matter +is a move on the part of the big interests to crush him in the lumber +business, the firing of the present manager and crew will have little +effect. Your dad evidently trusted Barrows, else he would not have sent +him here. If he is guilty, you may be sure that the enemy, for such we +must call them, made it mighty well worth his while to turn traitor. +What is to prevent the next manager from being affected in the same way? +And even if a trustworthy manager were secured, the big interests can +always bribe enough of the laborers to do all the necessary damage that +would be required to spoil the season. My advice is to lay low for a few +days and get evidence that will get the 'man higher up,' the one who is +the instigator of this whole thing. Once you can spike his guns, there +will be no further danger of trouble here, and also it will enable your +father to take court action that will restore him damages for the stolen +timber, and will also give him a chance to sue those who have harmed him +so that he can make the penalties that will be inflicted in case enough +damage has already been done to make him forfeit his contracts. I should +say now that he was a good three weeks behind his shipments, and that is +a whole lot in one season. He has guaranteed to deliver a certain amount +of timber at its destination by the last of September. It is the middle +of August now, and he must make every minute count from now on to get +out the required amount. Get the man responsible for this business and +you will have accomplished what you have set out to. What do you think +of my advice?" + +"Sounds logical, and I think we will follow it. In the meantime I have a +hunch now in regard to that stolen timber. I think I can hitch up a few +things Barrows has tried to dissuade us from doing, and a certain lake +in this vicinity. That's our next work. Now what do you propose to do, +Mr. Howells?" asked Garry. + +"First thing I'm going to do is to go straight to Barrows and tell him +about the deficiency shown by the records. That will do one of two +things, I believe; either show him up for a crook, or else show that he +is straight and start him investigating the thefts. If the latter +happens, which I am frank to say I do not think will, then we have +accomplished a great deal of good." + +Howells, however, had barely finished speaking, when the red haired +cookee appeared at the shack and told him that Barrows wanted to see him +at the camp office immediately. + +Having delivered the message, the cookee sauntered off, and Howells +looked at the boys with a puzzled stare. + +"Wonder what's up now. Thought that we talked over everything there was +a little while ago. Well, there's no use in wondering. I'm off to see +his Royal Highness and find out what he wants. I'll see you after a +little while." + +Howells hustled off to the office and left the boys to talk things over +among themselves. + +"What did you mean, Garry, when you said that you had a hunch about +lakes and things?" inquired Phil. + +"Why, you remember how insistent Barrows has been that we make a sort of +playground out of the little lake, setting forth its advantages about +swimming, fishing and all that, and has done everything that he can do +to discourage us from going near the big lake. I have let him believe +that we took everything he said for granted, so I thought that tonight, +if possible, we would make a trip to the big lake and see what's what," +Garry answered. + +"I'm wondering if Barrows is clever enough to play the old trick used by +conjurers and magicians?" mused Phil. + +"What do you mean, magician?" queried Garry with a puzzled look at his +friend. + +"Why, you know a magician always directs the attention of his audience +to the thing that he is generally going to do, figuring that the people +will be on the watch for a trick, and will be so busy trying to find the +hidden trick, that they look everywhere but where the magician tells 'em +to, and in the meantime he has done his trick." + +"I see," exclaimed Garry. "You mean that Barrows may figure that we will +guess he has been discouraging us about the big lake for the very +purpose of making us go there rather than to the smaller body of water, +where some sort of villainy may be going on." + +"That's it exactly," returned Phil. + +"I think you have a good hunch there, Phil, although I rather think that +Barrows is not clever enough to dope out that trick. Still, there can be +no harm in watching both lakes. Suppose that we take a little trip today +to the small one, and then tomorrow night we will hustle over to the big +one after the camp has turned in for the night. Guess that will be our +best plan. Now let's wait for Barrows and Howells to finish their +conversation, and we will trot over while I ask a few leading +questions." + +They waited a few minutes, talking over their probable course of action, +and were about to set out for the office, when Howells appeared on the +scene. Rage and disappointment were depicted in his face, and the boys +were quick to take notice of this. + +"What's the matter? You look as though you had bad news to bring us," +said Garry. + +"Well, it's bad news for me, at any rate, and I think also for you. I +believe I have proof enough that Barrows is a crook from the word go. I +have been discharged from my job as cruiser and scaler and ordered to +leave the place immediately." + +"Why, I can hardly believe you, what's it all about?" asked Phil. + +"Well, it's a short story. I had hardly gotten inside the office, when +Barrows told me I was through. Naturally all other thoughts left my +head, that is about my errand, and I asked him why. He replied that when +he hired me he thought he was getting an accurate scaler, and that the +reports showed that the amount of timber I had reported was cut had not +been delivered. Immediately I knew that he was on to the fact that I was +aware of the shortage and was spiking my guns before I could do or say +anything. Now I know that I have accurately measured all the timber that +was cut in this tract. I was at school long enough to learn how to scale +if I never learned anything else. Of course we had words, and I forgot +myself and accused him of knowing that timber was disappearing, and he +was covering up by throwing the blame on me. Of course there was nothing +that I could do, so I told him a few wholesome truths and walked out of +the office." + +"Then that definitely settles Barrows' status here," said Garry. "He +knows that timber is being stolen, and he wants to cover it up. I hope +you did not connect us in any way with you while you were telling +Barrows what you thought of him, did you Art?" + +"You bet I didn't. I kept my head that much, at any rate." + +"Well, we have lost a valuable ally since you must go away. I suppose, +though, we could hire you as a guide and keep you here. Barrows could +make no objection then," said Garry. + +"No, that would be the worst thing that you could do. It would put +Barrows on his guard, for he would immediately leap to the conclusion +that I had told you everything. No, the wisest thing for me to do is to +hop out and go back to town. Then in a few days I could get back here +and see what I could dig up in the way of stolen timber. I think the +most advisable thing to do would be to find out from some of the railway +stations near here where timber is being shipped from, and in that way +we could get a line on where it is going. Then you chaps on the inside +can browse about a bit and find out how it is stolen. Between us we can +secure evidence that will uncover the whole plot. I'm going out now, +before they get onto the fact that we have had time to talk things over. +In the meantime, take my advice, and keep your eyes open every minute. +Eternal vigilance on your part is going to be the price of success. Not +that I believe any harm will come to you. Barrows would not dare attempt +that; but he could move so stealthily that you could not find out +anything. Now I'll say goodbye and trot along. Good luck to you, and I +will contrive some way to get word to you of what is going on." + +Howells shook hands with the boys, and then loped off to get his +dunnage. The boys watched his departure sadly, for they had counted a +great deal on the help that the young timberman could give them. + +"Well, fellows, that puts it directly up to us again. We will have to +work on our own hook and get to the bottom of this. Now let's have +action. Tomorrow morning--it is too late now to do anything--we will +take a little trip to the small lake, Kanamo Lake I think they call it; +Dutton is the name of the big one, and start our search there. We will +simply say that we are going off for some fishing and swimming. Now +we'll go to the office, and remember, not a word about knowing that +Howells was discharged." And concluding his talk, Garry led the way to +the office. + +Barrows watched them narrowly as they came in, but said nothing. + +"Thought we'd get a little information about Kanamo Lake," said Phil, as +they seated themselves. + +"Yes," chimed in Garry. "We are going off there early tomorrow and have +a little fishing and perhaps a swim or two. We haven't done anything +since we got here but watch the timber cutting, and that isn't a novelty +any longer. What we especially want to find out is whether there is any +canoe or boat on either of the lakes that we could use to get some +really good fishing." + +"There isn't a boat or canoe of any sort on either Dutton or Kanamo," +answered the manager. "But you will find that will not interfere with +your fishing. Part of the banks are well covered with reeds, and early +in the morning and after the sun has gone down you can catch a fine mess +of pickerel. Throughout the day the bass can be caught from the bank if +you boys are any hand at making a good long cast. I suppose as soon as +the timber cutting is done, the tourists will begin to swarm here for +summer camping, and then there will be plenty of boats and few fish. +That's generally the way." The manager talked heartily as though +relieved that the conversation had taken the turn that it had, and +perhaps because of the information that the boys were going to get away +from the camp. It was likely that he had expected some questioning +because of the discharge of the scaler. Evidently thinking over the +matter, he decided something in his mind, and turning to Garry, remarked +casually: "I had hoped that the arrival of the scaler would give me a +little extra time so that I could do some fishing with you and act as +guide around here, but I regret to say that I found him incompetent and +was obliged to discharge him. He was careless about his measurements, or +else did not know how to measure properly, and all our records are +messed up so that it will take me several days to get them straightened +out. Fortunately I know pretty well what's been shipped and can check +against the bills of lading. Well, there goes the cook's supper call." + +Following supper, the boys made excuses that they wanted to get their +fishing tackle in order and retired early to their shack. They got to +sleep early, as they expected a strenuous day on the morrow, and also +hoped to be able to make a trip to Dutton Lake at night, hence wanted +sleep. + +Just as they were undressing, Dick uttered an exclamation of disgust. + +"What's the matter, Dick, lose a button?" inquired Phil. + +"No, confound it, lost that nice knife with my name on it that I bought +in Bangor." + +"That's too bad, lost your nice toy. Well, you should worry, as you have +your sensible scout knife that will cut even if it hasn't a nice name on +it," laughed Phil. + +Early morning found them routed out with the dawn, and as they hurried +for the cookhouse to get some supplies with which to cook a luncheon at +the lake, they heard the cook and his helper talking about some marauder +that had been captured the night before and was locked up in the +storehouse. + +Neither seemed to know much about it, but the boys could see that the +cookee was on tenterhooks, and several times tried to get out, only to +be called by the cook and set to doing some necessary task toward the +getting of breakfast. This uneasiness on the part of the cookee made the +boys think that possibly Baptiste LeBlanc had been caught, and decided +that when they had eaten they would have a look at the prisoner. + +Barrows appeared when they were half way through breakfast, and the +chums at once began to question him regarding the capture of the unknown +man and what he might have wanted there. + +"Perhaps he is the one who has been causing a lot of trouble around +here," said Barrows. "I haven't seen him yet. Couple of the men found +him snooping around the office last night, and after locking him up, +woke me up and told me about him. After I eat I am going to question +him, and if you want to get a little later start on your fishing trip, +you can come and take a look at him." + +This was exactly what the boys wanted, and they thanked Barrows for the +invitation. They made a hurried meal, and then after Barrows had posted +the notices for the section bosses for the day, they went to the +storehouse, which was the most solid looking building in the camp, being +built of great logs with a thick double hasp and padlocks on the door. +Inside were kept the cooking supplies for the camp. + +The manager produced a key, and throwing open the door, called to the +prisoner to come out. + +The three chums pressed forward eagerly to see if they were right in +their guess that LeBlanc or his evil associate had been captured. + +What they did finally see nearly knocked them off their feet. There was +a shuffling sound as of some one getting up, and then through the door +into the sunlight, walked The Hermit! + + + + +CHAPTER X + +THE FIRST HIKE + + +It was nearly a minute before the boys could find their tongues. The +hermit stood there blinking in the sunlight, for it had been pitch black +inside of the storehouse. + +Finally Garry shouted: + +"Hello, Hermit. Where did you come from?" + +Barrows stared at the boys in surprise. + +"Do you know this man?" he asked sharply. + +"Of course we do," replied the boys, almost simultaneously. "It isn't so +long ago that he was of great aid to us in our work on the fire patrol," +added Garry. Immediately he could have kicked himself, for he had by +this statement let Barrows know that the man might be of help to them +again. + +"What are you trying to do around here?" snapped Barrows, turning to the +hermit. "Trying to steal something, or set fire to the camp or something +of that sort?" + +"That will be just about enough, Mr. Barrows," interrupted Garry. "We +happen to know this old man, and I'll vouch for him personally. It is +probable that he came here to visit us, and was wandering about when +your men, naturally thinking him to be a marauder, seized him. You can +take my word for it that he's all right." + +Barrows evidently resented the way in which Garry had spoken to him. "I +think I am the best judge of what to do in this camp, young man. I am +not satisfied with his presence here, and it is my intention to have him +taken to town and lodged in jail there until I find out what's at the +bottom of the broken saws and such occurrences in the camp." + +"Now just one moment, Barrows," said Garry with a determined ring in his +voice, and a snap in his eyes that boded little good for Barrows. "I am +not one who will naturally trade on his being the son of the man who +owns this camp, but I give you ample warning that if my word is doubted +in this matter, and this old man, who is as harmless as a rabbit, is not +freed immediately, I will go to town this morning and take steps that +will cause your instant removal from this camp. I have never asked my +father to back me in anything that I was not absolutely sure of, and you +can rely on the fact that he will take my word in this case, knowing me +as he does. Now Mr. Barrows, you may take your choice in this matter and +decide quickly." + +The manager hesitated a moment, evidently trying to decide just who had +the upper hand in the situation. Seeing this, Garry turned to Phil and +Dick, and said: + +"Boys, go pack up your dunnage and get ready to leave in fifteen +minutes." + +The two chums turned on their heels without a word, and were starting +for the shack when Barrows, seeing that he was beaten, called: + +"Never mind, boys, the old man will go free this minute." + +He said it with a bad grace, and the glances that he covertly cast at +the boys showed that he was enraged at the turn affairs had taken. What +made him still angrier was the fact that the cook and two or three men +had gathered around and seen him come out second best in the battle of +words. + +He determined to make the best of a bad situation. + +"I am afraid that I spoke a little too hastily in this thing," he said, +coming closer to Garry. "I want you to remember that I am always trying +to protect your father's interests here; that is what he pays me for, +and I thought that there might be something peculiar in this chap's +showing up here in the dead of night." + +Garry, having won his point, and for the sake of future peace and +freedom from interference, resolved to mollify the manager. + +"That's all right, Mr. Barrows. Only I want to tell you this," and here +Garry lowered his voice: "The old chap is mentally unbalanced, and it +was largely for that reason that I did not want him to be annoyed. He +lives near a tract of wild land where we patrolled early this summer, +and was very decent to us, tanning skins of animals that we shot, and +leaving us rabbits for eating. It is a pet trick of his to wander about +at night, and appear very mysteriously, and as I propose to have him +stay with us a few days, I wish you would pass the word that he is +afflicted and caution the men not to tease or annoy him." + +Barrows assented grudgingly and then marched off to the office. + +Left alone with the hermit, for the cook and the others had departed for +their customary tasks, the boys eagerly asked the hermit what he meant +by his note, and if he had anything to tell them. + +"I didn't mean to get caught," he said. "I know what you boys are here +for. Nate told me a little and I can make two and two equal four. I was +creeping through the woods last night to come and leave a letter for +you, when I heard some men talking, and crept up to listen to them. They +were just getting ready to leave and all I heard was a man saying that +his brother would soon be there and that he would know how to deal with +those spies. I couldn't get a good look at the man, but he spoke with an +accent, and was a heavy, strongly built man. That's what I was going to +write to you, for I believe you are the ones that the men in the secret +meeting meant when they referred to spies." + +The boys looked aghast at each other when they heard the concluding +words of their friend the hermit. At once the same thought leaped into +the minds of all three. Man with an accent, heavily built and strong +appearing. Brother was coming to help him. All put together it meant +only one thing, and that was voiced by Dick. + +"Jean LeBlanc!" + +The others echoed the name of their Nemesis after Dick. + +"What's that, did you speak of LeBlanc?" inquired the hermit. + +"That's just what we did," replied Garry grimly. "That man you +described, unless we are very badly mistaken, was Baptiste, a brother of +Jean. And if Jean is on the way, we must guard ourselves every minute. +And we must make every moment count, for once he gets here he will make +strenuous efforts to get us in trouble, if not on his own hook, then in +cahoots with Barrows. Now let's break for the small lake. Suppose you +stay with us a few days, Hermit, and help us in our work." + +"No, that would not be good tactics," was the reply of the hermit. "It +would cause trouble to you boys with that man who wished me lodged in +durance vile." + +As was usual, the words of the hermit were anything but those that would +be naturally used by a man that had lived the greater part of his life +in the deep woods, far removed from all human beings. But the aged +hermit was always surprising them, if not by his talk, by his unusual +actions. + +Garry had often thought that the old man was wise in his conclusions, so +he asked what could be suggested. + +"I would say that you should go to the manager and tell him that I had +been offended by my reception and consequently had refused to stay and +visit you, going off in a huff. Then that will give me a chance to +return to the forest and watch for the coming of LeBlanc. I will +guarantee that I will not be captured again. I was too sure of myself +last night, since I did not know that the camp was full of night spies, +who held rendezvous in the dark of the night. I will warn you in the +usual way if LeBlanc approaches. In the meantime, my instinct tells me +that the man with whom you quarreled, Garry, is not to be trusted. Watch +him. Now I will go if you will give me some food to carry with me for +breakfast. I am hungry." + +"There's one thing I wish you would do first, Hermit," said Garry, +calling him by the only name they knew, and which appeared to please +rather than offend the old recluse, "and that is go to the nearest town +and mail a letter for us. There is no one in the camp now that I would +trust with a message, and none of us who could get away. I should have +thought to do it yesterday when Howells left, but forgot it in the +excitement of his being discharged." + +Borrowing Dick's ever ready notebook, Garry scribbled off a brief note +to his father, advising him to check carefully the shipments of timber, +and telling him in guarded words, that he had several clues that +properly trailed down would soon lead to the unmasking of the traitors +in the camp. He folded the note and gave the hermit money with which to +buy a stamped envelope, and on another leaf of paper wrote the address +to which the note should be sent. + +This the hermit promised to do at the earliest possible opportunity. He +then proposed that they walk a few hundred yards out of the camp with +him, so that they might select a spot where notes could be left without +his having to penetrate the dangers of the camp at night. + +This the boys agreed to do, and after a brisk walk selected a tree with +a hollow, half concealed in it, and established that as the +"postoffice." The hermit then took up his journey, while the boys +returned to the office to tell the manager, as they had agreed to do, +about the hermit's leaving. When Barrows heard their story he seemed +relieved and was apparently only too anxious to ingratiate himself with +the boys again, for he realized that he had overstepped the mark a bit +in his words with Garry a short time previous. + +"You should have brought the old chap back, and perhaps I could have +persuaded him that it was all a mistake," but the boys were quick to +detect the false ring in his tone. + +"Now we are off to Kanamo Lake for our delayed fishing trip, and so that +you may not get uneasy if we do not return by nightfall, let us tell you +that we are used to making camp wherever we happen to be, and so will be +all right. I only wish there was a canoe on the lake, and we would take +a three or four-day hike, canoeing from spot to spot on the lake, and +camping wherever we saw fit," concluded Garry. + +"Sorry there isn't. You might make a flatboat out of some lumber, but +there is nothing with which to calk the seams, and the task of dragging +the lumber to the water would be almost too much to bother with for the +short time that you are going to stay here," replied Barrows. + +As the boys set out on their seven-mile hike to the lake, they discussed +the way in which Barrows was continually bringing into the conversation +the suggestion that they were not going to stay very long. + +"I wonder if that is a warning unintentionally given, or is the wish +just father to the thought?" asked Garry. "I don't remember ever saying +anything to Barrows about the length of time that we intended to spend +here." + +"Maybe it is just the wish coming to surface as you say. At any rate, +let's not worry about that for awhile. We will have bridges enough to +cross when we come to them." + +The chums pursued their way through the fragrant woods, spicy with the +smell of pine and balsam. Occasionally they heard the whirr of wings as +a covey of grouse or partridge, frightened at the sound of approaching +footsteps, took wing and flew away from the cover where they had been +hiding. The sound of the birds brought to the minds of the trio the sad +thought of the missing Sandy, for he had the canine instinct of most +dogs to flush a bird. He had so often hunted with the boys that they had +taught him to retrieve a bird as does a regular pointer or hunting dog. + +"Tell you what we'll do when we get back to the camp tonight," announced +Phil. "We'll offer a reward for the finding of Sandy. I think myself +that some of the lumberjacks, perhaps that chap that took us coon +hunting, recognized the value of Sandy and stole him, determined to sell +him and make a few dishonest dollars. Sandy is worth more to us than +many people would want to pay for him, and I think if we offered a big +enough reward we might get him back." + +This was agreed on by the boys, and chatting merrily of many things, +they trekked through the forest to the lake. + +They took turns setting the pace and so made brisk time, even Dick +keeping up without grumbling, although there was no circus at the end of +the trail to lure him on to greater speed. However, Dick smelled +adventure in the air, and hence all his seemingly lazy ways dropped and +he dug to the trail as if his life depended on it. + +Soon they reached the lake, which lay like a jewel in the midst of the +forest. For the most part it was surrounded by trees, thick and green. +At the end of the trail was a slightly open spot, and a stretch of sandy +beach that seemed to beckon the boys irresistibly. + +"Let's take a short dip before we start exploring. I haven't had a swim +for days, and I think it would do us all a lot of good." Garry had been +sweeping the edges of the lake with his field glasses, which he had +brought along, and could see nothing other than an unbroken expanse of +forest. Far down at the end of the lake was a slight opening which Garry +judged was the outlet of the lake, although since he had not consulted a +map, he could not tell much about it as regarded its direction and size. + +The others were also of Garry's opinion, and Phil then came to bat with +another suggestion. + +"We must do a little fishing, also; for if we go back empty handed from +a lake that is supposed to be filled with fish, we are apt to excite +suspicion in the mind of Barrows, and set him asking us questions as to +what we did while we were away. We don't need to spend the whole day at +it, just catch a decent mess and quit." + +"Right you are, Phil," answered Garry. "Now for a swim, and last man in +is no good." + +The boys ripped off their clothes, and so used were they to speedy +disrobing, that all hit the water with almost the same splash. + +"See that spot up the bank about three hundred yards, where the ground +begins to rise?" inquired Dick, as he splashed about in the water. "Bet +you fellows anything I've got against anything you have that I can give +you chaps ten yards' start and then beat you there." + +"Well, you sure thing artist, splash him good, Phil," shouted Garry, for +Dick was an expert swimmer, much better than either of the others, +although they were not unskilled in the aquatic art. + +Dick was thoroughly splashed, and with two against one, was soon forced +to holler quits. + +"Tell you what I'm going to do; I'm going to swim up to that place and +back, anyway. You fellows can come or not, as you please," and with a +long, sweeping, underhand stroke, his head almost buried in the water, +Dick sped away. The remaining two contented themselves with paddling +about and noting the clearness of the water and the fine sandy bottom. +They got a stone and amused themselves by throwing it some distance and +then swimming under water after it and recovering it. They had been +doing this for some moments, when suddenly Garry, thinking that Dick, +with his speed, had been gone long enough to have done that distance +twice over, began to worry a bit, and called Phil's attention to the +lapse of time. They decided to swim up there and seek their missing +comrade, who, although they had perfect faith in his prowess as a +swimmer, might easily have been overtaken with a cramp, and met with +disaster. + +It was generally a rule that they keep an eye on each other in the +water, and it was a strict regulation that a call for help be never made +in jest. + +"Let's go," called Garry, and away they started. They had made less than +fifty yards, when borne on the breeze came the sound of Dick's voice. + +Garry stopped swimming for a moment, and began to tread water, while he +looked toward the spot that had been Dick's goal when he swam away. Dick +could be seen standing on the bank beckoning wildly to them. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A LUCKY FIND + + +"Guess it's nothing serious, Garry," said Phil, who had followed Garry's +lead and stopped swimming long enough to see what the cause of the call +was. "It looks as though he had made a discovery of some sort." + +The chums put on an extra burst of speed, and soon had reached the spot +where Dick was standing. + +"What's all the commotion about?" inquired Garry half breathlessly, as +they clambered up on to the bank. "We thought you were calling for +help." + +"I am truly sorry I frightened you, but I just found something that we +may need before our stay at the camp is done," and Dick led the way into +the woods for a few feet. "I got out on the bank to rest a bit, and +thought I saw signs of a camp having been here at one time or another, +so I nosed around and tucked away in the brush I found this," and +displacing some of the debris that had fallen around the object, Dick +disclosed a birch-bark canoe, made after Indian fashion. + +"I should say that was a find," exclaimed Garry. "Now we can do all the +exploring around here that we want to, and if we find nothing here we +can portage the canoe across the woods to Dutton Lake and continue our +investigation." + +They were disappointed, however, for on dragging out the canoe, they +found that a great hole had been torn in the bottom. + +"Now wouldn't that jar you. I wish I had looked at it more carefully +before I called to you," said Dick in a disappointed tone. + +"Let your Uncle Dudley take a look," ordered Garry. After a few moment's +investigation, he straightened up. "It can be repaired easily with what +simple tools we have and a little help from old Mother Nature. Our only +trouble will be a swim of about four miles. Two across to the point that +I noted when I looked through my glasses, and two back to where we want +to do our work, which had better be here." + +"I think I begin to see faint glimmerings of what you intend to do," +said Phil, as he scanned the end of the lake that came within his +vision. Phil had abnormally keen eyes, and could often see things that +the other boys required a glass to discern. + +"Well, Sherlock, what do I intend to do?" asked Garry with a laugh. + +"It seems to me, if my eyes don't fail me, that I can see a sort of a +white clump of woods about two miles distant, at least the sunshine +casts a brighter glare than it does on the green of the pines and +spruces. Now to me that spells b-i-r-c-h. Am I right?" + +"Right again. That's just what I have in mind. Let's start. We ought to +be able to have a fine canoe by noon if we don't loiter." + +They swam back to where they had left their clothes, and it was decided +that Phil should stay behind to guard their clothes, packs and rifles. +Garry got his hatchet and sheath off his belt, and tucked his knife +safely into the sheath of the axe blade. Then by knotting two of the +bandanna handkerchiefs that they customarily wore about their necks, he +made a sort of a strap affair and tied the axe securely on his back +between his shoulder blades. This left his arms perfectly free for +swimming, and then he and Dick set out with easy strokes for their +destination across the lake. They took plenty of time and occasionally +rolled over to float on their backs so that they could rest. At last, +after several resting spells, which were mainly for Garry's benefit, as +Dick could have done the whole distance without fatiguing himself in the +slightest, they reached the clump of birches. + +Resting a few moments on the bank, they proceeded to strip a good +section of bark from one of the birches. This was a simple matter, as +all that was necessary to do was to cut a girdle around the tree a few +inches from the bottom, and another about three feet above. Then a +vertical cut was made between the two girdles, and after about twenty +minutes of prying the bark from the trunk with the knife, the two taking +turns at the task, they had the roll of bark neatly cut off. + +"Now if we could only find a swampy place around here where there would +be some tamarack trees, we could get a couple of the crooked roots for +which the tamarack is noted, and that would furnish us with a rib for +the canoe. As it is, we will have to makeshift with that twisted birch +branch that I see, which Nature seemed to have put there for our +particular use today," and Garry proceeded to get the branch as he +spoke. + +"We can roll this up and tie it with a strip of handkerchief, and push +it along with us on the return swim. Then it will be a small job to +repair the canoe." + +"What are you going to use to attach it to the bottom of the canoe where +it is broken," asked Dick. + +"I have something in my knapsack. For some reason or other, while in +Bangor, I bought a ball of extra fine linen cord, and one day while we +were in the woods at Sourdehunq I needed some shoemaker's wax, and +didn't have it, so last time we were in town I bought a piece. I never +expected to use it to repair a boat with, however, just bought the stuff +in case an occasion arose where we might need it. Now it will come in +handy," and as he finished, Garry slipped back into the water. The +return trip occupied somewhat longer, as the bark was a bit unwieldy as +they pushed it ahead of them. + +When they returned to the spot where they had left Phil, the sun was +almost in the center of the sky, denoting it was near noon. They found +that Phil had improved the time while they were absent and had started a +fire and caught several good bass. + +"Best fishing here I ever saw. I don't believe a line has been thrown in +this patch of water for years, the fish just jump at the bait," shouted +Phil with the true Isaac Walton enthusiasm. + +"I also got a couple of pickerel that were so foolish as to leap at my +bait, and have enough for dinner and some to take back to the camp with +us tonight." + +All were so eager to get at the business of fixing the boat, that they +hurried through lunch with extra speed. Then they sped through the woods +to the spot where the old canoe had been found. + +As Garry prepared to repair the boat, he began to laugh at something +that seemed to be amusing him greatly. + +"Let us in on the joke," asked Phil. "You are grinning there to yourself +like a Cheshire cat." + +"I was just thinking that either Barrows is a fool or takes us for +brainless idiots. The idea of telling us that there was nothing in the +camp with which a boat could be calked, and there are only some hundreds +of square miles in the state just full of the finest thing in the world. +Nothing more than the pitch on the pine trees all around us." + +"I noticed it this morning when the manager remarked about it, but +thought it just as well to keep my knowledge to myself," remarked Dick. + +"All right, then, you fellows set to work with your knives and dig a lot +of those pitch lumps off the trees and then start a fire and melt it in +your drinking cup. It will spoil the cup, but we can easily get another +one," directed Garry. + +The boys immediately set about doing his bidding, and as they worked, +Garry got out his knapsack and proceeded to rummage through it for the +linen cord and the shoemaker's wax. Having found them, he set to work to +wax the cord thoroughly, making it less likely to shrink. Next he +examined the broken rib of the canoe, and determined how much of the +birch branch he would need to repair it. He took his knife and shaved a +long diagonal slant on the piece of rib in the canoe, then matched the +slant on the piece of branch. Having fixed them so they would fit, he +took a piece of fishing line and wound it carefully around the joint, +starting several inches above where the two pieces joined, and +continuing for several inches onto the firm wood beyond the spot where +the repair was made. This is called "splicing." Most boys have spliced a +fishing pole or a broken bat in much the same way. + +The rib having been spliced, the next step was the patching of the hole. +Garry got the birch bark, and laid it over the gaping rent in the bottom +of the craft, and marked a line around so that it overlapped the hole by +about four inches. The extra bark was then trimmed away, and he was +ready to sew it on. He took the awl blade of his knife and punched a +series of holes around, piercing both the patch and the bark of the +canoe. Having done this, he called for the hot pitch and poured it on +around the edge of the hole. Then he firmly laid the patch on, and as +the pitch cooled it formed a sort of a natural mucilage. Garry had +previously waxed one end of the cord so that it would be easy to stick +it through the holes, and working swiftly he threaded the cord in. When +the job was completed, he reversed his steps, so that the result was a +firmly sewn patch. + +Nothing else remained to do but to daub hot pitch liberally over the +seam on both sides, and calk the edges where the patch was attached to +the craft. + +"There," said Garry, as he stepped back and proudly surveyed his +handiwork. "That's a craft that will be as seaworthy, or rather as +lakeworthy, if there is such a word, as one could want." + +"Um, let me see," mused Dick aloud, as he looked over the canoe. +"There's one other quite necessary thing to be done." + +"Well, smarty, what is there to be done," asked Garry a trifle hotly. + +"I was just wondering whether we would rig up a sail or have you a gas +engine in your knapsack with which to make this gallant ship navigate?" +asked Dick as he burst into laughter, in which he was joined, first by +Phil, and a bit later by Garry, when he saw that the joke was on him. + +"Phil, you're the handy man with the knife, what say to a couple of +paddles?" asked Garry after the laughter had subsided. + +"Have 'em for you in an hour. That's quick work, however, and I won't +promise you a very handsome product." + +"We won't bother about looks as long as they will propel the canoe +through the water. That remark of Dick's about the sail, although it was +intended to be humorous, isn't such a bad idea either, only there is no +way that I can think of right now to make a sail. We'll browse around +the camp when we get back and see if we can dig up a bit of canvas and +make one of those lateen sails, you know those triangular shaped affairs +such as the boats in the Mediterranean use," said Garry. + +While he was talking, Phil had already set to work to make a pair of +paddles. "Now you chaps watch me, and after I have fixed one with the +axe, or as much as one can do with an axe blade, I'll get to work with +the knife," he said. + +Phil selected spruce about five inches in diameter and felled it to the +ground. + +"I hate to spoil a perfectly good tree, but in this case certainly +necessity knows no law." + +He chopped off two sections a little over five feet in length, and then +proceeded to hew one swiftly into a board. This took some little time, +despite the fact that he worked at top speed every moment. His last work +with the axe was to fashion very crudely the handle. + +"Now I am going to whittle just the top and a place where the hand will +come in contact with the neck or shaft of the paddle. To try and smooth +it up would take too long, and all that really needs to be smooth are +the places where we will have to hold it. If it was left rough we would +soon accumulate a crop of blisters. While I am whittling, you chaps can +fashion that other section into form as I did." + +After he had whittled enough, Phil sprang to his feet and said, "If I am +not mistaken, I saw an old bottle near the remains of a campfire, and +that will be just what I want." He sped away to where he had seen the +vestiges of some fisherman's fire, and soon found what he required. He +smashed this against a stone, and with the fragments scraped the spots +he had whittled smooth and free from lumps. + +The second paddle was not long in the making, but the entire job had +taken well over three hours. "We have about three hours before it is +time to eat, and we might as well put our canoe to the test, and see if +it works," announced Dick. + +"Time to eat! Don't you ever think of anything but eating?" demanded +Garry. + +"Yes, sir; when I'm not thinking about time to eat, I'm thinking about +what to eat," responded Dick promptly. + +"Say, Phil, he's hopeless. What say we make for that outlet at the far +end of the lake. We might just as well do that as anything, since we +have no real plan of action. Then tomorrow we can make a complete tour +of the lake, and thus get a comprehensive idea of the whole body of +water." + +The canoe was launched, and the boys climbed in. Garry and Phil elected +to paddle, leaving Dick to sit in the middle. + +"If that patch will hold Dick up, you can be sure it's a good job, +Garry," laughed Phil, as they pushed off. + +"So that was why you chaps were so kind as to do all the paddling. I'm +to be the happy little subject of the experiment. Well, if I get a +ducking there is some consolation in the fact that you two will follow +suit," said Dick good naturedly. + +Garry had done a fine bit of work, however, and the craft proved to be +all that they hoped it would. They made it dance through the water and +were delighted to find that they could make much better speed than in +the ordinary wooden canoe. The only thing necessary, however, was to +keep perfectly quiet, as the balance of a bark craft is a much more +precarious thing than that of a solid factory made canoe. + +It took them but a short time to reach the outlet, and they beached +their boat and started on a tour down the stream, which was a shallow, +weedy affair. + +Their early scout training, and their need of vigilance during their +patrolling of the woods when on duty as fire rangers had made their +powers of observation especially keen, and it was second nature almost +for them to note signs of trail that would be unseen by one unversed in +the lore of the woods and forests. + +They had walked about a quarter of a mile, when Phil's exclamation made +them pause. + +"There's fresh trail there, or I'm no good at sign reading any more," +remarked Phil. The boys gazed at the ground and quickly saw that Phil +was right. + +With no wasted words, they turned and followed the slightly outlined +trail. It took only a few minutes for them to reach a crude log shack, +one that had evidently been constructed early that summer, as the fresh +cut logs showed. + +The door swung loose on crude rope hinges, and after debating a moment +they decided to enter: They found practically nothing in the way of +furniture. There were no bunks, but a pile of boughs had been thrown in +each corner, and a rough table had been built in a corner of the hut. On +this reposed several dirty tin dishes. The remains of the food were +still fresh, showing that someone had eaten there within the past day or +so. + +"That means that they are apt to be back at any time, and so we'd better +light out. It may be some camper and it may be some enemy. I am inclined +to think it the latter, for a camper would have taken some pains to make +things just a little bit more comfortable," said Garry. "I think, +however, we will plan to keep watch of this place and see who happens to +occupy it." + +"Well, I can tell you right now that it is someone from the logging +camp. One of those who are mixed up in the trouble there. Look under +that table on the floor!" + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +DICK DISAPPEARS + + +The others bent forward curiously and gazed at the floor. There, laying +in a little mess of debris, as though it had slipped from the pocket of +some one who had been sitting at the table, was the knife with Dick's +name on it, that he had bought of the sidewalk merchant in Bangor! + +"Isn't that conclusive proof that it's someone from the camp?" demanded +Dick as he rescued the knife. + +"It surely is, and they are up to no good. Why should anyone from the +cutting have a place over here? It's a signal for us to get out and get +out quick. There's one good thing, though, we can set the hermit to +watching over here and leave ourselves free to go about other business. +We'll pace out the distances and draw a rough map and leave it in the +tree postoffice so that the old fellow can come over here and keep +watch," said Garry. + +Being careful to leave no traces of having been in the cabin, they +hastened outside. They had hardly gone two feet, though, when Dick +darted back. He rejoined his companions almost instantly, and answered +their puzzled stare with this explanation: + +"I've just sacrificed my good knife. The thought came to me that one of +them, the man who found it, might have remembered dropping it there, and +would at once know that someone had been in the cabin if it was +missing." + +"Good headwork, Dick," said Garry approvingly. + +They took it on the run back to where their canoe was beached, and soon +were on their way back across the lake. + +"I wish that we had more time without fear of interruption," said Garry, +"for it is likely that the occupants of the cabin have a canoe hidden +somewhere along the bank of the lake. Safest thing now, however, is to +get back to the other side of the lake, where we have an excuse for +being." + +"I am afraid that there will be little use in watching that cabin, +however, for it is quite probable that Barrows will warn those who are +living there that we are swimming and fishing around the lake, and +advise them to seek a new hiding place," observed Phil. + +"That's a fact," answered Garry. "Still, there's no harm in trying. It +was only by extreme carefulness in watching for signs that we discovered +that trail. It was probably the one that the men use to get water, and +the cabin is well hidden. One would not stumble on it casually in a long +time." + +It was sundown by this time, and they held a council to decide whether +they would camp there for the night or go back to the lumber camp. They +were all anxious to visit the big lake, however, and so it was decided +to return. + +"After the camp is quiet we can skip out and visit our other objective," +said Garry. + +Taking their fish out of the water, where they had been placed to keep +fresh, they trekked towards home. It was about dark when they reached +the camp, and about the first person they met was Barrows. He was all +curiosity to know how they had spent the day, and they returned +equivocal answers, being careful to make no mention of the canoe which +they had carefully hidden before starting away from the lake. + +The manager admired the fish, and thanked the boys for offering them to +provide breakfast on the coming day. Pleading their strenuous walk and +day as an excuse, they retired early to the shack. + +Here a campaign was speedily decided on. Dick was to go back to the +office and chat for a few moments, while the others slipped out of camp. +This would make it appear that they were in the neighborhood, and after +a reasonable time, Dick could return and retire for the night. + +Dick wandered back to the office to engage the manager in a talk about +fishing and the possibility of a long hike to extend over a week or +more, while Garry and Phil made for the lake. + +The tote road that had been made to transport the sawed lumber ran for a +short distance along the lakeside. Here there was a slightly wider place +made so that the tractors that met each other could pass with ease. The +ground was here covered with broken branches and debris of all sorts, +well tramped into the ground. Garry flashed his lamp about and searched +for signs of any sort, but seemed to find none. Then he went to the lake +edge and peered about. + +Some peculiar formation of rock made a sort of a ledge that stood about +three feet above the water. This ledge interested Garry immensely, but +he said nothing as he wanted more time to puzzle out the situation +before coming to any definite conclusions. At the point where the tote +road had been widened, there was a triple string of broad wheeled flat +cars loaded with lumber. + +"Now I wonder why these cars were left here," asked Phil. + +"That's easy. The drivers knock off work at a regular hour, and when +that time comes, if they have not gone very far on their trip, they +simply come back to the camp and wait until morning. That is to prevent +accidents which running in the dark might bring about," said Garry. + +"Hush, what's that?" asked Phil. Both boys listened intently. Far off +across the lake they heard a faint chugging noise. Sometimes it seemed +to cease altogether, then as the breeze stirred they could hear it, +getting fainter and fainter. + +"Phil, I've discovered the secret of the stolen timber or I'm a +Chinaman. That noise solves the whole proposition. That sound that we +heard is the engine of a powerful motor boat. And Barrows insisted that +there was no kind of water transportation on either lake. Now why should +he lie about it unless he had some ulterior motive in covering up the +presence of a boat? This is the answer or I'll return from our mission +and tell Dad I'm not bright enough to solve the mystery." + +"What have you doped out," asked Phil, as Garry paused for a moment. + +"Just this. I'll bet you a dollar to a doughnut that the drivers that +are in on this timber stealing business have it so arranged that there +is always a load of cars waiting here overnight. That's step number one. +Now we have a rock formation here that makes a perfectly good wharf. +Next you have noticed that all the chips and bits of broken branches +strewn between the turnout here and that strip of rock. That's just to +hide the footprints that are made by the thieves. So far so good. How +does this strike you? That motor boat that we heard is a big one, at +least it had immense pulling strength. I know enough about engines to +tell from the sound how good they are. That boat is probably used to +draw a raft across the lake. Just after midnight, or some safe time +during the dark hours, a raft can be backed against that natural wharf +there, and in half an hour enough lumber can be carried from the flat +cars to the raft to make it a profitable night's work. Why, the whole +thing is as plain as a pikestaff. Phil, we've got everything nearly dead +to rights now!" + +"What's the next step then, old timer? Shall we hike out and write, or +wire your father to come on so we can show him what's going on?" +questioned Phil. + +"Not yet a bit, there's still something else we must find out. Is this a +part of the treachery to ruin Dad's enterprise here, or is it a private +bit of work on the part of Barrows?" + +"How's this for a guess? The people that are behind Barrows, meaning +those that have bribed him to play false to the trust your father put in +him, may have outlined this whole scheme, and offered to give Barrows as +his pay what he can make off the stolen timber. At the rate that it has +been disappearing, one-fifth and one-quarter at a time, as the report +that Howells received would show, and at the price which lumber is +bringing today, that would be pretty good pay for one summer. Chances +are that the interests that are opposing Mr. Boone are paying all the +expenses. Their only idea is to put him out of business for breaking up +their combination and going into business on his own hook. If that's the +kind of men they are, I don't blame your father for getting out of the +combination." + +"I think you have the right idea, Phil. My, I wish we had our canoe over +here. We could paddle across the lake and investigate the other side and +see what is done with the timber once it is rafted over the water," said +Garry. + +"No use in wishing. Best thing we can do is hike for home and turn in. +Then tomorrow we can make arrangements to go on, say a three day hike. +We can portage the canoe across country, and hide out along the bank +until nightfall. The moon is in its last quarter now, and by night after +tomorrow it will be dark. We can paddle out well into the lake and wait +for what transpires. When we hear the raft and motor boat coming we can +paddle far enough to be unobserved and then follow it by sound. The boat +will probably travel without lights for two reasons. First, it is safe +enough as there is probably no other craft on the lake, and secondly, +they will not want to attract any undue attention. Then we can note the +spot where the raft docks, and in the morning can follow it to whatever +rail spur the stuff is taken. With what help Howells may be able to give +us on the outside, we ought to have the thing pretty well in hand. What +do you think of my suggestion?" asked Phil almost breathlessly, as he +concluded. + +"Phew, that's the longest speech I ever heard you make, Phil, but you +sure said something every minute. That's what we'll do. Now let's get +back." + +The whole occurrence had taken less than an hour and a half, and when +they reached the camp they noted that a light was still burning in the +manager's office. On arriving at their shack they were somewhat +surprised to find that Dick was not there. + +"He's doing a good job," laughed Garry. "Either he is really interested +in what Barrows has to say, or he is playing to give us time to do what +we wanted to. Well, he can stay there all night if he wants to, I'm +going to roll into my blanket and dream sweet dreams. Dick's a night +hawk anyway most of the time. Goodnight." And Garry yawned and soon was +fast asleep. Later development will show that it would have been wise on +the part of the boys to look in on the manager at that time. Had they +done so, their work would have been greatly simplified. However, they +were not mind readers and so days of trouble were in store for them. + +Morning came, and when Garry, always the first one to awake, tumbled out +of bed, he cast one look at Dick's bunk, and then rushing over to the +other side of the shack, vigorously shook Phil. + +"What's the matter?" demanded Phil in a startled voice, sitting upright +in his bunk. "Anything the trouble?" + +"That's what I cannot tell you right this minute, Phil, but Dick hasn't +been here all night!" + +Phil leaped out of his bunk and looked at the spot where their companion +usually slept. The blankets were still neatly in place, and it needed +only a glance to see that no one had used it that night. + +The boys hurried into their clothes and rushed to the office building +where Barrows and the camp officers slept. No one was stirring, and +Garry was about to pound on the door when he saw the cookee coming from +the cookhouse with a pail in each hand for the morning cooking water. + +Garry called to him and asked if he had seen Dick that morning. + +"Naw," was the grouchy answer. "Why should I have seen him? I don't know +anything about him." + +The sound of the voices awakened Barrows and he came and stuck his head +out of the window. + +"What's the matter?" he asked. + +"Why, Dick hasn't been around all night, and we were looking for him. +Have you seen him since last night?" asked Garry. + +"I haven't seen him since the three of you went to your shack last +night!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE CIPHER + + +The boys were dumbfounded by Barrows' answer. + +"What's that you say?" demanded Garry. + +"I said I had not seen him since the three of you went to your shack +last night to turn in. Isn't that plain enough?" reiterated the manager. + +"Well, all we know is that just after we got to the shack, Dick left to +come back here and have a chat with you and get some information about +the country, as we had some little thought of taking a week's hike up +into the wild lands that lie to the northwest." + +"If he started for this office he never got here, for I sat up late +trying to straighten out the tangle that Howells left behind him. No one +came near the office all that time. Perhaps your chum has gone off on +some little private expedition." + +Garry was quick to notice that there was a malicious ring in the +manager's voice. At once the uncomfortable feeling overcame him that +their night's work had been discovered. Garry was at a loss what course +to pursue. He could make no accusation of any kind, for Dick might have +stumbled on some clue that took him off on the trail. + +"Well, you can understand that we are a little bit worried over the +matter, especially since this is strange country to Dick. He might have +wandered into the woods and got lost." Garry knew that this was next to +impossible, but he could think of nothing better to say at the moment. + +"My advice is that you wait a bit, and you will probably find that he is +all right. He'll very likely show up in a little while. I wouldn't +worry," said Barrows. + +There was nothing to do for the moment but take the manager's advice, +and the boys returned to the shack. + +"Phil, there's bad business afoot here somewhere. At such a time as +this, Dick would not have gone off to follow a clue without leaving us +some sort of a note or even a sign. He could leave a half a dozen +different signs that we all know to denote trouble. He hasn't taken +anything with him. His rifle is still there and so is his pack. If it +were some mission of danger that he had gone on he would at least have +taken his rifle. Now what shall we do?" + +"Let's give him till noon in case it was such a hurried matter that he +had not time to run back for his rifle. We might even wait until six +o'clock. You know we have always made it a rule that we should never be +gone more than twenty-four hours on a search without letting the others +know in some way that we are safe. Sundown tonight would not be exactly +twenty-four hours, but it would be near enough," advised Phil. Garry +agreed that this was sound advice and they went off to breakfast. They +found Barrows was almost through. + +"Why don't you fellows start out this morning and look for him? One of +you could go in one direction and one in the other. If you know anything +of the woods, you could soon find signs of him if he were wandering +about," suggested Barrows. + +Garry told him that they had decided to wait until nightfall before +getting really worried. At this the manager allowed a satisfied gleam to +show in his eyes. Both the boys were narrowly watching him, and noted +this. After breakfast they came back to the shack, and once safe inside, +Garry whispered to Phil: + +"Watch every move from now on. That business of Barrows telling us to go +in different directions on such a wild goose chase was entirely too +obvious. He wants us to get separated. Keep your rifle close by you +every minute, and tonight we'll establish a watch same as we have done +in the woods when there was danger near. First thing this morning is to +go to the spot where we agreed to leave notes for the hermit, and leave +a letter telling him what has happened and asking him to take a look at +the shack on the other side of Kanamo Lake." + +Hastily writing the note, and watching that they were not followed they +slipped out of the camp and ran to the appointed postoffice. + +Garry reached his hand in as a matter of course, and was surprised to +find that there was a note in the natural receptacle. + +He brought it out, and with Phil leaning over his shoulder, read it. It +contained a distinct shock for both. Here was what they read: + +"Attacked by men and letter to your father stolen. Hit on head and left +lying in road. Use all caution. The Bear is in the woods." + +The usual lone pine symbol was attached. + +"Well, we are discovered, Garry," said Phil. "Barrows must have had the +hermit followed and has read the letter. I wouldn't be a bit surprised +if he knew what we talked about last night. Question now is whether he +was instrumental in bringing about Dick's absence." + +"I am afraid that we have sort of made a mess of things, Phil. We +haven't given Barrows enough credit, or else we have been too sure of +ourselves. There is a good chance, however, and this note makes me think +it highly likely that Jean LeBlanc may have captured Dick again. You +know he seems determined to do him harm, even more so than us, for he +and Dick have tangled up three or four times now, and each time Dick has +managed to elude him and make more or less of a fool of him. This +naturally would make an even more implacable enemy of the vengeful +halfbreed. Let's get back to camp and wait awhile. We will pry about the +entire camp to see if there is any sign of Dick, and also we will be +safer for the time being. Don't think I am cowardly, only we want to +take no chances if we are to help Dick and at the same time complete our +mission here." + +They returned to the camp, and as they walked, Garry tore the hermit's +note into tiny, indistinguishable fragments, throwing each tiny particle +to the winds. + +The day dragged on, although they tried to make it pass quickly by +searching through the camp. Night came at last, and they turned in. +Before retiring they arranged for alternate watches, and also decided +that on the morrow they would insist that a message be sent for Mr. +Boone. The boys had almost decided that rather than allow Dick to fall +into greater danger by protracting the time of a systematic search, they +would tell what they had learned to Mr. Boone and let him force the +issue of the stolen timber. + +It was nearly eleven o'clock and Phil, who was on watch, was about to +wake Garry for his turn at sentry duty, when he heard a cautious +fumbling at the door, and the sound of a low malediction when the +intruder found that it was locked. There was silence for a moment, and +then Phil heard the sound of someone breathing heavily at the window. He +crept noiselessly to Garry's bunk, and holding his hand over his chum's +mouth lest he make a sudden noise, shook him awake. Garry was aroused in +an instant, and all sleep vanished. He knew from feeling Phil's hands +against his mouth that caution was needed. + +Having roused Garry, Phil crept back to the window just in time to hear +a faint swish. Instantly he knew that the intruder was cutting the +double thickness of heavy mosquito bar with a knife, and guided by the +sound, clubbed his rifle and brought it down with full force. There was +a howl of pain, and the sound of someone running away at top speed. + +"Must have clipped that chap either on the head or the hand," whispered +Phil. "Guess he won't be here again tonight." + +"Looks as though the war was on. You roll in and I'll watch for a couple +of hours now. Good thing we used our old trick of sentry work, or we +might be in a bad position right now," answered Garry. + +For another hour nothing happened. Then there was a pounding at the door +and Barrows' voice was heard calling the names of Garry and Phil. +Suspecting a trick, both boys reached for their rifles, and after +lighting a candle, Garry covered the door with his rifle while Phil +opened it. + +Barrows stepped in and seemed to be taken back by the sight of the rifle +leveled at his head. + +"Why the military greeting?" he asked with an attempt at good humor. + +"Taking no chances," answered Garry briefly, for he had a feeling that +it was almost time to tear the mask away. "We had one visitor here +tonight, and we didn't know what to expect." + +Garry explained his statement about the visitor by briefly telling of +the attempt that had been made to enter the cabin an hour previously. +Barrows passed this off by offering the suggestion that some of the +lumbermen were naturally ruffians, and might have wanted to commit +burglary. + +"What I woke you up for was to tell you that a man has come here with a +note that he refuses to deliver to anyone but you boys. He's at my +office now, and all he will say is that your friend Dick's safety +depends on obeying what is in the note. Of course I could have summoned +some of the men and had him overpowered, but thought you boys might like +to handle the matter for yourselves." + +The boys put on their shoes and coats, for they had gone to bed almost +fully dressed, and prepared to follow Barrows. + +"Careful now," whispered Garry, as he passed Phil. + +There seemed to be little need for caution, however, for they were +unmolested on their way. At the office they found an unkempt dirty +looking individual. + +"Be these the boys," he asked of Barrows, pointing a dirty finger at +Garry and Phil. + +"Yes, these are the ones. Now state your business and do it quick," +snapped Barrows. + +"This letter tells the hull story," answered the man in a hoarse voice, +and he handed a crumpled piece of paper to Garry. + +The leader of the Rangers took the note and read it in silence, then +handed it over to Phil. + +What they read was this: + + "Have been captured by Jean LeBlanc. Have been forced to write this + letter to you. LeBlanc wants a thousand dollars for my freedom. You + are either to bring it with you, or make arrangements for its + delivery at a spot known to the bearer of this letter. Warn you that + any attempt to molest bearer will result in serious injury or worse + to me. You know I would not ask this unless I were in grave peril. + Don't fail me. Follow bearer's directions. + + "Being emergency will ask ransom emphatically. + + "Dick Wallace." + +"That's Dick's writing, sure enough. He must have been tortured into +writing that letter, else he would never have done it," said Garry +between his teeth. "Now Barrows, the time has come for a showdown. What +do you know about this matter? Speak up, and speak up quick!" + +"What should I know about it. I don't know what's in the letter about +your friend," answered Barrows taken back by the tone of Garry's grim +voice. + +"How do you know it's about our friend?" demanded Garry quick as a +flash. + +"Why, the bearer here told me that it had to do with one of the three +boys who were staying here," answered Barrows weakly. + +"I think you're lying, Barrows, but I can't prove it. Here, read the +letter." + +He handed the crumpled note over to the manager, who took it and read it +in silence. Then he burst into a protest. + +"I never heard of this Jean LeBlanc. Why do you connect me with the +matter? I never even heard the name LeBlanc." + +"You had a Baptiste LeBlanc working for you until Howells insisted that +he be discharged, didn't you?" continued Garry implacably. + +"Why, there may have been a man of that name. I remember Howells +insisting that a man be discharged, but I never pay much attention to +the names of the lumberjacks, at least to their last names. I leave that +to the timekeeper and the section bosses. You misunderstand me entirely. +I am ready to give you all my help. What do you propose to do?" + +"First place I am going to start back with this man here and look into +the matter. Of course we have no money to take with us, but I am going +to be assured that Dick is safe. You will get the necessary ransom from +the bank at town, and thirty-six hours from now you will start with it +to some place where this man will appoint. We will be there at the time +with Dick. In the meantime telegraph my father to get here with all +speed. Now, Barrows, I'm putting this matter up to you. If you fail in +any way it will be so much the worse for you. I'm trusting you only +because I have to in an emergency. Don't fall down, or we'll make you +the sorriest man you could ever dream of being. Phil, keep these men +covered with your rifle until I go back and get our packs. Don't let +them stir out of your sight or move a finger." + +Garry concluded his words, and tearing a leaf from his notebook, wrote +hastily for several moments, then left the cabin. Barrows made as though +he would follow, but a menacing gesture from Phil made him keep his +seat. + +Once outside the cabin, Garry sped away into the woods like a deer. He +was extremely cautious with every step, however, lest a snag or root +trip him and disable him at this crucial moment. The note that he had +written contained explicit directions to the hermit to get word to Mr. +Boone by telegraph, and then see if he could pick up their trail and +follow them. He knew the old man was an expert at trailing, and Garry +wrote that he would leave signs on the way from the hollow tree +postoffice. + +The return to the camp was somewhat slower, for he stopped occasionally +to blaze an X in a tree, or dig a slight hole in the ground with his +toe. He wished that he had time to make a more distinct trail, but there +was the danger that a plain one might be noted by one of Barrows' aides, +and obliterated. He was trusting that the hermit could find it, versed +as he was in all the lore of the woods. + +Back at the office with his knapsack and that of Phil, he asked what had +transpired while he was gone. Phil told him that a meeting place had +been agreed on. + +"Now," said Garry sharply, "can you lead us where you came from in the +dark?" + +"Guess I can, came here in the dark," was the surly response of the +guide. + +"Then start travelling. Now, Barrows, first sign of any treachery from +anyone in the camp will mean that first I'll shoot this guide and second +anyone within range of my rifle. Now hike," this last remark being +addressed to the man. + +Out of the camp toward the northeast led the way, and as they walked +Indian file, they took every step as though it were a path strewn with +glass. Once outside the camp, having been bothered by no one, Garry +called a halt. + +Keeping a sharp eye on the guide, Garry whispered to Phil: + +"Notice anything funny about that note of Dick's?" + +"Not particularly, except that I took exceptional care to be sure that +it was Dick's writing," answered Phil. + +"Did you remember the last line?" he questioned further. + +"I think I could repeat it over by heart." + +"Then use your head and look for the very obvious code in the last six +words," said Garry. + +Phil repeated them aloud two or three times, then fell silent. Then he +gave vent to a low exclamation. + +"Why, it's as plain as the nose on your face. It's just the first +initials and they spell Beware!" + +"Exactly; that's step number one. Now the second thing is the note +itself. It was written on brown paper. Safe thing to write such a letter +on, anyone might have it in his possession. The queer part is that on +the shelf high over Barrows' desk was a bundle of report blanks wrapped +in the same identical kind of paper, only the wrapper was torn. I +couldn't think of any way to clear the office, but I bet I could have +matched this scrap to the torn place in the report!" + +"Then you think that Dick has been at the camp all the time?" queried +Phil half incredulously. + +"Don't think it, I'm sure of it." + +"What are we to do, then?" asked Phil. + +"I have that all doped out. We'll let this chap lead us a couple of +miles or so further on and then overpower him and tie him up and leave +him there while we double back and search the camp." + +Garry gave the order to march again, and they started on their way. Had +Garry been gifted with second sight, he would never have left the spot +where they had held the conference, for they had gone only a short +distance when the guide asked them to halt. + +"What's it worth to you fellows if I tell you all about this business? +You ain't going to meet your friend where I'm taking you; it was just to +get you away from the camp that I led you out here. But you can't make +me tell anything, or LeBlanc would kill me. But I'll take a chance for +money." + +This sudden development puzzled Garry. He did not know exactly what to +make of it, so he decided to temporize for a few minutes, and gain time +to think. + +"Where is LeBlanc now?" he asked. + +"Right there at the camp was where I last saw him." + +The answer was such a surprise that Garry's guard was lowered for a +moment, then there was a scurry and rush of feet, and a half a dozen +forms leaped out from behind the trees near them, and before either boy +could make a move with his rifle, they were in the hands of the enemy. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +DICK'S MISFORTUNE + + +Now what of Dick all this time? Let us go back to the night when Garry +and Phil had started for the Dutton Lake to see what could be found out +about the stolen timber. + +Barrows, of course, had not told the truth when he said that he had not +seen Dick after they had gone to their shack. + +He had come into the office as had been agreed upon, and engaged Barrows +in conversation about fishing. Barrows had chatted cordially for a brief +while, and then excused himself for a moment to give orders to one of +the section bosses whom he heard outside. + +Dick heard him give the order to work on the coming day, delivered in a +loud tone of voice, and almost instantly after the close of the +conversation he came into the office again. + +The conversation was picked up where they had left off, and they chatted +like old friends for nearly a half an hour. + +Finally, Dick heard the cookie calling for Barrows to come out a moment, +and Barrows obeyed the summons. Knowing that the cookie was suspected of +being in league with the traitors in the camp, Dick walked softly to the +door and tried to hear what was being said, but as they were several +feet from the entrance to the office, and speaking in the most cautious +whispers, he could distinguish nothing that was being said. Suddenly the +cookie darted away, and Barrows re-entered the cabin and stood leaning +against the door. + +"Speaking about fish," he remarked, looking malevolently at Dick, "they +are foolish things since they always take bait. Now did you three boys +take me for a fool entirely, and did you think that I would take any +bait that was offered me? I know every move you made since you have been +here, including your letter to Boone. Why, you poor, useless boy, I am +playing for too big stakes here to let a pack of mere children balk me. +Your work was clever if it had been against an ignorant man, but you're +done now." + +Dick's heart sank. He knew that a cog had slipped somewhere. They had +been too sure of themselves. Barrows kept on talking in the same strain +until Dick began to realize that he was merely talking against time. He +rose to his feet and prepared to make a dash for the door, but +realization came too late, for the door was thrown open and in stepped +the arch enemy of the boys, Jean LeBlanc. + +"So, mon ami, we meet again. This is a mos' pleasant meeting, but you +are not to escape so easily this time." + +There was hatred in the halfbreed's voice and in his eyes. Dick shivered +inwardly, although he let no sign of fear be shown in his face or +actions. + +"All the better to have you here this time, LeBlanc, you just walk into +our hands; and this time you will see the inside of a jail for sure," +said Dick boldly. + +LeBlanc's face darkened with rage. He made as though to reach for the +knife that hung in his belt, but Barrows stopped him. + +"That will do, LeBlanc, I'll handle this matter in my own way. Remember +you're working for me, and you do as I say or get out, and I'll find +another man for the job." + +Dick was astonished at the way LeBlanc subsided. Evidently Barrows was a +much braver man than they had given him credit for being; at any rate, +he seemed to be the absolute master of the halfbreed. + +"Yes, ma frien', you are the boss, but perhaps another time, when I am +not working for you, I will take care of this one. Now what we do with +him." + +"We will put him in the cellar under the storehouse for the present, +then when we have captured his friends, we will have them taken to +Misery Camp." + +"Taking the others will be an easy matter, will it not? We shall just +surround them like that and take them," and he snapped his fingers with +a derisive gesture. + +"That's just what we won't do. Why do you suppose I am going to the +trouble of all this secrecy for? If it had been merely a matter of +capturing them, it would have been done long ago. But they have been on +their guard most of the time, and this camp is full of lumberjacks that +worked for old man Boone. If they got wise to anything, they would have +me strung up to a tree in no time, and one of the worst riots in the +history of the lumber business would have been pulled off in this camp. +No, sir, I am saving my skin." + +"Why not get rid of those who would help them?" inquired Jean. + +"I am, just as fast as I can. Everything was all right till these boys +showed up to play amateur detective. Now we must make a grand cleanup +and work fast. Things are getting too hot." + +"I, Jean LeBlanc, am giving you warning. The bes' thing to do is to slip +a knife in a place where it would do the most good. Every time they have +cross my path, they have won, and Jean LeBlanc is not one who is easily +beaten in anything." + +"Bah, you make me tired, LeBlanc. They may have had a little luck and a +lot of help, or else you didn't know how to do your work. I'm here to +tell you that Gene Barrows will not be fooled." + +Dick had been sitting silently all this time, drinking in the +conversation of the two men. They seemed not to be noticing him, and in +a desperate attempt to make his escape, he darted for the door and +succeeded in getting outside. But his triumph was short lived, for he +had no more than attained the outside air, when he was seized by an iron +grip by two men, and hauled ignominiously back into the office. He saw +at once that his captors were LeBlanc's brother, Baptiste, and the +unknown chap who had been implicated with Baptiste in the attack on +Howells. + +Dick reddened with rage at the laughter of his enemies, and vowed to +himself that somehow, somewhere, he would pay them for their taunts. + +"Come, we are wasting time; the others may be back from their little +spying expedition at any moment. Grab him, you two," directed Barrows. +Baptiste and the unknown, whose name Dick later learned was Fearon, +seized him in no gentle grasp. One of them clasped a hard, dirty hand +over his mouth to prevent any outcry, and they walked him across the +camp to the storehouse. + +Barrows produced the key and threw open the door. Once inside, the door +was carefully closed, and Barrows produced a candle which he lighted. +Dick was searched and his knife and matches were taken away. + +Two heavy molasses barrels were rolled away, disclosing a trap in the +floor. This was raised and a rude ladder was seen to lead below. Dick +was mercilessly bundled down the hole, little care being taken as to +whether or not he broke his neck as he slipped down the damp ladder. + +Then he heard the clatter of the trap door as it fell, and he was left +alone in the dark. + +Once before Dick had been in a tight hole, and the lack of knife and +matches had almost been his undoing. Thereafter he had guarded against +this happening again. To this end he had contrived a secret pocket in +the lapel of his coat, where a knife always reposed. Also inside of the +sweatband of his hat were several matches rolled tightly in waterproof +silk. + +He got out the matches, and lighting one, looked about him. He surveyed +the room with a quick glance, for the matches were too precious to use +too many of them. His quick survey showed that the underground room was +bare of any furnishing; there was not even a blanket to sleep on. He +lighted a second match and inspected the floor, discovering that both +floor and walls were constructed of hand-hewed logs, and knew that it +would take a week to dig through them with nothing but a pocket knife +with which to work. + +The underground room was damp and musty, and Dick shivered. + +He wondered how long it would be before they took him out, and he began +to do calisthenics vigorously to restore some warmth to his already +chilled body. + +For a time he thought of crawling up the ladder and trying out his knife +on the trap door, but he had noted that it was of triple thickness of +inch boards and would probably blunt and dull his knife without making +any great impression. + +There was one hope that someone might come into the storehouse above and +he could rap on the door and let them know he was a prisoner there. + +After some moments of reflection, he decided that this would also be +unavailing, for the cook must also be one of the traitors. It was not +possible that he would be unaware of the secret room, and was in all +probability a member of the gang. + +Dick was a healthy boy, and soon his eyes grew drowsy with sleep. He +laid himself down on the hard floor, and as soon as his bones got +accustomed to the floor, dropped off to sleep, sensibly refusing to +worry and letting the morrow bring what it would. + +His last thought as he fell asleep was the hope that his companions +would not fall into a trap as he had, although he half expected that he +would be awakened any moment by the sound of the trap door opening, and +the entry of his chums as prisoners. + +But when he awoke in the morning, he found that he was still alone. He +unscrewed the cover of his watch face, and felt the hands, finding that +it was nearly eight o'clock. So far no one had come, and he wondered if +he was to be given anything to eat. Two weary hours dragged on, and then +the trap was opened, and a pack of food lowered to him, together with a +pail of coffee. He looked up and saw the cook and cookee peering down at +him. Evidently they were going to take no chances of a surprise on his +part, hence their coming in pairs. + +Dick called to them to ask when he was to be taken out, but they had +evidently been instructed to hold no words with him, for they quickly +lowered the trap and the barrels were again rolled into place. Dick's +last sight as the trap closed was the leering face of the cookee. He +managed to eat his food in the dark, and resolved to ask for a blanket +when next they came to bring him food. + +The day dragged as though on leaden feet, but no one appeared again. +Dick thought that dinner would be brought to him, but none came, and he +figured that perhaps there were too many watchers who would be +inquisitive if they saw cooked food being carried to the storehouse. +Perhaps Garry and Phil were on the watch. This gave Dick a thrill, for +if his thoughts were true it meant that they had not been trapped in any +way. + +Frequently he unscrewed the face of his watch and felt the hands to note +the time. He resolved that his first step when he got back to +civilization would be to buy a watch that had a radium dial so he could +tell time in the dark. + +Dick had no idea but that he would get out, for he was one whose courage +did not fail. Then, too, he trusted in the cleverness of his companions +to get him out of the scrape. + +He was squatting on the floor Hindu fashion, about eleven o'clock, +thinking that he would soon lie down and try to get some sleep, when the +trap was opened, and Barrows' voice bade him come up the ladder. + +He obeyed only too gladly, for the darkness and the chill of the cellar +were beginning to get his nerve. In the storehouse he found that Barrows +was accompanied by the LeBlanc brothers. This made any chance of a rough +and tumble fight with the manager and possible dash for freedom out of +the question. + +"Now there will be no fooling on your part, but you will sit down at +this case here and write a note to your friends telling them that you +have been captured by LeBlanc and are being held for ransom. That will +please them, eh, Jean?" + +LeBlanc gave a wolfish grin. "At least it make them hurry to rescue +their friend. They do not like me, those boys, any more than I like +them." + +"Suppose I refuse to write that note, what then?" demanded Dick. + +"Why, I think we will let LeBlanc handle that end of it," said Barrows. + +Jean LeBlanc's face wore a diabolic smile as he took from his mouth the +big-bowled pipe that he was smoking. + +"Once I saw an Indian torture a man to get from him a secret," he said. +"It was oh, so easy. All that he did was to thrust the man's fingers, +one by one, into the pipe bowl, and after the fifth finger, the man gave +in." + +Dick shuddered in spite of himself. He had heard of this Indian method +of torture, and knew that LeBlanc was not only capable of doing it, but +would take a fiendish pleasure in the operation. + +"Then if that fails, which I doubt, I give you warning that your chums +will be seized on some pretext and sent out seemingly to jail with +LeBlanc as their guard, and once away from the camp, will be given to +him to do as he pleases," said Barrows. "Now do you think you will write +that letter?" + +Dick had resolved on submitting to the torture before writing the +letter, but this last threat made him change his mind. He could afford +to take no chances with the safety, and perhaps the lives, of his chums, +by refusing to write. In the meantime his mind was busy trying to +conjure up some way of warning them that it was a trap. + +He took the scrap of paper that was offered to him, and began to write. +As the letter drew near its close, he hastily constructed the cryptogram +which our readers are already aware of. + +Barrows took the note and read it carefully, turning it over to see that +there was not other writing on the back, and scanning it for some sign +of warning. Dick was afraid that he would decipher the simple code, but +was relieved when Barrows crumpled the note to give it the appearance of +having been carried some few hours, and then put it in his pocket. + +He was ordered back into the cellar, and there was nothing to do but +obey. The trap was closed and he heard the rolling of barrels, then all +was still. + +Dick wondered what plot was in the wind, but was unable to puzzle it +out. He finally decided that it was only another private scheme of +Barrows to get money, and a thousand dollars would be a pretty good +haul. + +He gave up trying to solve the riddle, and lying on the floor stared +into the darkness. + +There was one chance in a thousand that one of them might come alone in +the morning to bring him food, and he resolved to climb up the ladder +the moment he heard footsteps above him, and with his pocket knife try +to fight his way to freedom. + +With this comforting thought, he dropped off to sleep. + +Following the writing of the note, Barrows slipped back to his office +and told LeBlanc to make one attempt to seize the boys, then if that +failed, they would use their ruse to attract them from the camp. + +How this attempt succeeded has already been told, and all LeBlanc got +for his pains was a smash on the hand where Phil's clubbed rifle had hit +him. + +He hastened back cursing, and told Barrows of the failure, and after +being upbraided was told to go to the rendezvous where the capture of +the boys was to be made. + +Barrows then went to the cookhouse, where the unkempt individual that +was to act as bearer was waiting, and gave him his final instructions. + +"Now," said the vindictive manager, "we shall see who wins, a pack of +mere children, or Gene Barrows!" + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +MISERY CAMP + + +Now let us return to Garry and Phil, whom we left struggling in the +hands of their captors. Only one voice did they recognize in the orders +that were given, but this was enough to let them know that they were in +the worst kind of trouble. It was the voice of LeBlanc. + +"Phil, that's LeBlanc's voice or I'm crazy," ejaculated Garry. + +"Absolutement, ma frien's. It is LeBlanc. Once again I have you, and I +think this time you do not go until we have settled several old scores +that I have mark up against you." + +As he spoke, several men took hold of the boys even more roughly, and in +a few moments their hands had been bound tightly behind their backs. + +LeBlanc gave the order to march, and the strange procession wended its +way through the woods. It was almost pitch dark, but they seemed to be +following a well defined trail, and the leader was sure of every step. +An unknown man grasped the arm of each boy and guided them so that they +would not bump into a tree, and at the same time prevented a chance of +escape. + +The boys took things philosophically, for there was nothing that could +be done with so many odds against them, and the darkness would have +hindered any chance of flight. They knew that they could not take more +than a dozen steps without smashing into the trees, and would soon be +captured. They resolved, the same train of thought running through the +minds of both of the captives, to wait for daylight before sizing +matters up. + +LeBlanc kept hurrying the men along, and they covered nearly a half a +dozen miles before a halt was called. Now the first flush of day was +appearing in the sky, and soon there would be light enough for them to +see in what manner of hands they had fallen. + +When dawn finally broke, both boys looked in amazement at the strange +figures that the light of day revealed. + +LeBlanc, of course, they recognized at once, and they had half expected +to see his brother. But all the others,--there were half a dozen not +counting the halfbreed,--were total strangers. The men were for the most +part large and swarthy, unkempt of hair and ragged as to clothes. Their +garments were torn and dirty, and here and there was a raggedly sewn +patch where the clothes threatened to give way entirely. + +They were taciturn men, and said little or nothing to each other, and +when they did, it was in a low tone. They paid absolutely no attention +to any order of LeBlanc, always turning to one of their number for +confirmation. + +This man, evidently the leader, was a perfect giant of a man. He stood, +so the boys judged, at least six feet four inches, and was +correspondingly large of frame. + +His face, what could be seen of it, for he wore a black, flowing, +tangled beard, was tanned by the sun, as one who lived entirely in the +open. His followers evidently respected, or at least feared him, for +whenever he gave an order, they sprang to do his bidding. + +Garry and Phil wondered who they were and what their business +was,--whether they were hunters or what. + +A fire was built and a meagre breakfast made. Phil and Garry were glad +of the food, for they were both hungry and tired. The eating done, +evident preparations were made to continue the march. Both boys were +cruelly tired. They had passed a strenuous day and night, and now they +wanted to sleep. But this was evidently not to be. + +They were slightly surprised also when they learned from the +conversation that LeBlanc was not to continue to the destination of the +others. + +"Now, King, you will take these boys to Misery Camp, and keep them until +you hear from those who have given you instructions. They will let you +know what to do, and you will be ver' careful not to let them make the +conge, to get away, for then you will have me, Jean LeBlanc, to deal +with." + +"I'll keep my bargain, fer the fact that I give my word, an' a King +allers keeps his word; but never think that I fear ye, Frenchman, fer I +fear no man livin'!" + +LeBlanc kept silence, and took his way back to the camp, while the weary +march forward was resumed. Short rests were given at long intervals and +the boys were thankful for the scant few minutes that were allowed. + +The men walked with the long swinging lope of the true woodsman, and +often the boys thought they would drop by the side of the road from +weariness. + +At noon a halt was called, and one of the men disappeared, to return +after several minutes with a half dozen grouse. The boys then knew +immediately that these men were outlaws of some sort, who paid no +attention to the law, for the close season was on all grouse and +pheasant. + +A fire was built and one of the men skinned the birds preparatory to +roasting them over the coals. Coffee was made and they were about to +drink it black, when Garry bethought himself of the sugar and condensed +milk in his knapsack. Thinking that a few favors on his part would +perhaps return to them later on, he offered it to the men. The boy's +hands were untied, and he rummaged through his pack until he found the +articles. + +The men took them without a word and used them. They divided the food +fairly with all present. + +Garry tried to engage the men in conversation, but all attempts failed. +The rest and the dinner occupied about an hour and then the march began +again. + +"See here," said Garry to the man addressed as King. "When are you going +to give us a decent rest? We're played out." + +"Well, you can be played out ef you want; you've got eight miles ahead +of you yet till we get to Misery Camp," answered King. + +"What is Misery Camp, and who are you fellows anyway?" again asked +Garry. + +"Misery Camp is where we live, and we fellows be squatters. Now shut up +and walk," and King relapsed into silence. + +Light instantly broke over the boys. They had often heard of the +squatters scattered over the woods of Maine, queer nomadic people, who +gleaned a precarious and lean living from the woods. Game and fish laws +meant nothing to them. Birds of all sorts were shot, and woe be unto the +deer that ran across the path of the squatter. Some little cultivation +was carried on, in the way of corn and potatoes. + +Wearily they trudged on. The last mile was almost agony to Phil and +Garry, but they clenched their teeth and carried on, determined if +possible to show no sign of weakening in front of these strange +creatures of the woods. + +At last Misery Camp was sighted. It was a patch of land that had been +cleared away, evidently the logs that were cut being used to make the +habitations of the squatters. A score of ragged children and some +slatternly women came out to meet them, looking curiously at the boys. +They were thrust into one of the cabins, and a guard established at the +door. + +The weary boys dropped on the rude pallets and fell asleep almost +instantly. So tired were they that it was the following morning before +they awoke. They stretched their arms and legs, and then tried to open +the door. The guard let them out, and warned them that any attempt at +flight would be followed immediately by a shot. + +"An' I ain't missed a squirrel in five year," boasted their guard, who +was a boy of about their own age. + +Privately the boys resolved to make an escape as soon as possible, but +not while the rifle of the guard was trained on them, for they doubted +neither his ability to shoot as well as he said he could, nor the fact +that he would not hesitate to do as he threatened. + +They looked over the clearing with some curiosity. It fitted its name +well, for misery seemed to be on every side. King, who appeared to be +that in fact as well as in name, called the boys to his own shack for +breakfast. Here they found that the squatter leader had opened their +knapsacks, and the contents were strewn over a rude table. + +Both boys jumped to see if their wireless 'phone had been broken by the +curious squatter, but were relieved to find that it had not been +touched. + +"What's that there contrivance?" asked King, pointing to the +radio-phone. + +"That's a wireless telephone," answered Garry. As he answered he had a +vision of a way out of their difficulty, but subsequent conversation +soon proved that they would not be able to put the plan into execution. + +"I seen a telephone onct," said the squatter, "but it had wires. You +don't mean that that thing will talk without a wire, do you?" + +"Yes it does. Would you like to have us set it up, and talk through it, +and have a message come through the air?" asked Garry, eagerly awaiting +the answer, for he thought that if he could get the wireless up he could +signal some way for help. + +"No, I don't. I don't believe that ye can talk through the air without a +wire, but ye might be able to an' I ain't agoin' to take no chances." + +The squatter did not seem interested in the contents of the knapsack +except for the little medicine case that Garry always carried. The boy +noted, too, that all the foodstuff was gone. + +"What be these things, medicine?" asked King. + +"Yes," answered Garry briefly. + +"Got anything that's good for chills and fever?" demanded the man. + +"Not that I know of; most of that stuff is for use in an accident. You +see it's mostly antiseptic and bandage and stuff," answered Garry. + +King picked up a bottle that was marked poison and had the familiar +skull and crossbones in red ink. + +"What's this stuff with the red printin'?" he questioned. + +"That's iodine; can't you read?" Phil broke into the conversation. + +"No, can't read, never went to school. What's it for?" + +"Why, it's to put on bad cuts so that you won't get blood poisoning, and +it's good if you strain your wrist or finger or something like that." +answered Garry. + +"Wall, you don't say so. Wonder if 'twould do this finger o' mine any +good? I hurt it the other day when I slipped near the brook where I was +getting water. It's my trigger finger too, and that's a bad one to have +hurt." + +Garry assured him that there was nothing better than the iodine and +offered to paint it for him. + +The squatter evidently decided that it could do no harm, and so Garry +inspected the swollen finger and liberally painted it. + +"That will help take the swelling out, and it will be all right in a +couple of days," said Garry, as he put the cork back in the bottle and +laid it on the table. + +Then he noticed that a ragged youngster about three years old had been +watching the process with wide open eyes. Inquiry developed that it was +the squatter's child, and it was evident that the youngster was the one +thing that the squatter king was really fond of. He told Garry and Phil +that the mother had died a year before, when they had been driven off a +timber tract by the lumbermen. Here the squatter launched into a tirade +against the lumber owners. + +The squatter idea is a peculiar one. They claim that the woods were made +for man to take as he found them and could not understand the right of +anyone to drive them out; yet they are responsible for great damage to +the woods. As, for instance, at this place, a couple of acres of fine +timber had been ruthlessly cut to make cabins for the nesters or +squatters, and to provide a place for the scanty crop of potatoes and +corn. Then too, many of the great forest fires are started by the +squatters. There is one case on record in Maine where the squatters set +fire to a whole mountain side, because they said that the blueberries +would grow better on the burned-over ground. + +Also the depredations against deer are numerous. Many a fine moose or +stag has been brought down to provide food for the nomads. + +The talk went back to the medicine again, and the squatter asked what +the skull meant on the bottle. + +"That's put on to warn you that it's poison," Garry informed him. + +The work of painting his finger seemed to mollify the old man somewhat, +and he drew a little out of his shell, and Garry, seeing the +opportunity, asked him why they had been brought there. + +The squatter then told them that LeBlanc had appeared on the scene a day +or two before and told them that unless they agreed to keep some boys +who would be brought there prisoners, they would be driven from the +clearing by the lumberjacks. The squatters knew what this meant, since +they had planted their corn for the summer, and moving meant that the +lumberjacks would burn down the cabins and start them away. They knew +from experience that it was useless to fight, for the enemy, so they +considered the lumberjacks, would outnumber them ten to one. + +Garry saw through the whole scheme and guessed that Barrows had known of +their presence at the clearing and had kept them in mind for some time +when he might require them to help in some of his schemes. + +The squatter king took his rifle and offered to show the boys where +their planting was done, and more for the sake of getting a little +exercise than for any especial desire to see the corn patch, they +agreed. + +The other squatters eyed them as they passed in company with old King, +but said nothing. Some of the youngsters started to follow, but a mere +threatening look was enough to set them scurrying away. + +"You seem to be the boss around here," remarked Garry. + +"Yes, I'm a King by name, and I aim to be king of these people so long +as I breathe," answered the man gravely; and Garry, looking at his +immense frame and stern eye, thought he had a good chance of continuing +in his royal capacity. + +They were looking at the corn patch with only a pretended interest, when +they heard a scream from King's cabin. + +"That's my baby," said King in a frightened tone. "Something's hurt +her!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +GARRY SAVES A LIFE + + +They rushed back to the cabin and a sight met their eyes that stunned +them all. + +The youngster with childish curiosity, had climbed up on the table and +captured the bottle of iodine. It was immediately evident that the child +had drunk some of the poison, for its lips were stained. There was no +telling how much the child had drunk, for the bottle had fallen to the +floor, spilling some of the liquid over the floor. + +The old man seized his child in his arms, and tears began to roll down +his cheeks. + +"Oh, she's going to die, she's going to die," he moaned. + +Garry's brain spun with thought. + +"Quick," he shouted to the old man. "There's one thing that will save +her. What did you do with that foodstuff you took out of the pack +there?" + +The sharpness of his tone startled the old man into activity. The words +of Garry that there was one way to save her galvanized him into action. + +"It's up there on the shelf back of you. Can ye save my baby? Hurry! +Save her an' there's nothin' on this earth I won't do for ye!" + +Garry had fortunately remembered that he had in his knapsack a package +of cornstarch that they had brought to make thickening for gravy in case +they did any cooking. Garry, and for that matter both of his chums, were +pastmasters in the art of first aid to the injured. They knew that the +antidote for iodine was cornstarch. + +Rushing to the shelf, Garry snatched the package and tore open the top. +His eyes fell on a can of mustard and he seized that. + +On the ground outside the door Garry had noted a campfire with an old +tin pail swung across it on a branch held up by forked sticks. Working +with the speed of an express train, he dashed through the door and +grabbed the pail of hot water. + +Back in the cabin, he took a tin cup from the table, and hastily melting +some of the mustard, made an emetic. This he gently forced the +frightened child to swallow. Soon the emetic had the desired effect, and +by this time Garry had moistened the cornstarch to the consistency of +cream. + +While the frightened squatter looked on helplessly, Garry fed the +cornstarch to the baby, who seemed instinctively to trust the boy, and +made little fuss over taking the pasty drink. + +Throughout the morning Garry, with almost the skill of a trained nurse, +watched the child's breathing and kept count of her pulse. As nothing +developed to show that the child was in any danger, Garry privately +formed the opinion that the iodine had not gotten much further than the +inside of her mouth, and that the burn of the poison had prevented her +from drinking any great quantity of it. Then, too, the stain on the +floor, where the liquid had sunk into the rough boards, was large enough +to denote that most of the contents of the small bottle were on the +floor and had not been swallowed by the child. + +As the youngster brightened up, the relief of the father was almost +pitiful to see. He grasped the hand of Garry and in broken, halting +words thanked him for saving the life of the baby. At the door was a +throng of curious squatters, and when they saw that the King baby was +going to live, gradually broke away and returned to their duties. All +this time Phil had stood by ready to lend a hand, in case Garry needed +assistance. + +"Boys," said the old man, "I've never broken my word before, but this is +one time that I'm going to. It will mean that we'll be driven off here, +but that can't be helped. You can go away whenever you want to. My +promise to that Frenchman ain't nothin' to me since you've saved my +baby." + +This was what Garry had hoped would happen. He did not want to trade the +baby's safety for freedom, but there was still Dick to consider. He +might be and probably was in grave danger at that moment, and it +behooved the boys to return as speedily as possible to the lumber camp +to set in motion the machinery to effect Dick's release, for they had +decided that Dick was probably a prisoner at the camp. Of course they +did not know of the hidden room under the storehouse, where, at that +moment, their friend was still languishing. + +"I'll make you a promise now," said Garry. "It happens that my father +owns this tract of land, and I'll give you my word that you will not be +forced to move from here for the rest of the summer. Of course the +logging will soon extend in this direction and you will be forced off, +but until that happens you can stay here unmolested. Now we're going +back to start a young war at the camp, and release a chum of ours who is +held prisoner there." + +"You better stay here for awhile, for part of the word of the Frenchman +was that another boy would be brought here to be kept. Now if you boys +stay here and pretend to be prisoners when LeBlanc comes with your +friend, you can wait till he goes and then all be freed together. In +case there's any trouble comes, I guess my men and I can take care of +it." + +"That's fine," said Garry. "I don't think there's anything better that +can be done. When did you expect LeBlanc to come with the other boy?" + +"The Frenchman was aiming to get back here by tomorrow night," replied +King. "He'd have to start in the night time, which will probably be +tonight, and get here some time tomorrow afternoon." + +"How will LeBlanc be able to find his way in the dark?" asked Garry. + +"I left one of my men behind to meet him and guide him," answered the +old man. Then a thought struck him, and he asked: + +"What are you all such powerful enemies for?" + +Garry then told him some of the adventures that they had encountered, +and the part that the halfbreed had played in them. When he came to the +tale of how LeBlanc had kidnapped little Patty Graham, the old man's +eyes flashed fire. + +"He's a treacherous weazel, that halfbreed. I don't mind some of the +other things he did, but any man that will steal a person's baby ought +to be cut into pieces. I'll tell you that. When he comes here with your +friend, we'll just tie him up and keep him here and you can do what you +want to with him." + +This seemed like a stroke of real luck for the boys. It would mean +LeBlanc would be safely held until time for them to have him taken to +prison to pay the much deserved penalty for his crimes, and at the same +time would rid them of a dangerous enemy, as well as lessening by one +the allies of the rascally Barrows. + +The rest of the day passed quickly, and they told the squatter king many +of the things of the outside world. He had heard little or nothing of +the great cities, and had never seen a moving picture nor ridden in a +railroad train. But he knew the woods as few men do, except perhaps the +Hermit, although there was no comparison between this giant of the +woods, who could neither read nor write, and the old recluse, who was +eternally surprising the boys with a quotation from some poet, or a +snatch of Latin. + +"Now, Phil," said Garry, when they were left alone for awhile by the +squatter, "let's plan a war campaign. As soon as Dick gets here, we will +let him have a good rest, and then hike for the camp. We'll make it to +get to the small lake without anyone seeing us, and there we'll get the +canoe and portage it through the woods to the other lake. There we can +hide out and get the dope on the timber thieves. Once we have done that, +we have only to draw in the strings, and we'll have the whole job done." + +Phil assented to this as the wisest course to follow, and night coming +on, they turned in. The squatter had insisted on giving up his own cabin +to them, which although poor and bare, was the best one on the clearing. + +They whiled away the next day waiting the arrival of Dick, and hoping +that no change would be made in the plans of Barrows to prevent Dick's +being sent to Misery Camp. + +It was late afternoon when a man whom the squatter king had sent into +the woods to act as lookout came running back. + +"He's got a young fellow with him," he told the squatter leader. + +"Is it the Frenchman?" demanded the old man. + +"Yes, it's a Frenchman, but," and here the boys met with a +disappointment. "It's not the one that came the other time, but a fellow +that looks like him." + +"Tough luck; that's Baptiste, not Jean. Look King, I've changed my mind +about having him captured. Let him go back and let the camp think that +we are held prisoners safely here. That will allow us to work with +greater freedom. Now we'll duck under cover and you meet the halfbreed +and bring Dick here." + +"Just as you say," said the old man. "All you have to do around here +from now on is to say the word, and everyone in Misery will do just as +you order. I will, and I'll see to it that the others toe the line." + +"Funny he don't come," muttered Garry. + +"Oh, he won't be here for a time yet," said the chap who had brought the +warning. "I was in a tree top, and could see way down to a clearing, and +saw them there taking a rest. Ain't nobody on the clearin' here that can +run as fast as I can, and I came quicker than ever to tell you about +it." + +"Had we better let Baptiste see us so that he will know we are still +here, Garry?" asked Phil. + +"That's a good suggestion. Suppose you station a guard with a rifle +outside the door, King, and let Baptiste have a peek at us when he gets +here," directed Garry turning to the squatter. + +"That's what I'll do. Here you, Job," turning to the youth who had +brought news of the coming of Baptiste and Dick. "You take your stand +outside there like as if you were guardin't the door. Now I'll get out +o' here and meet them." + +The squatter king hastened out, while Job stood before the shack door +with his rifle clutched in his hands. Garry and Phil, with some +excitement, waited the coming of Dick. + +In a few moments they heard someone approaching, and King threw open the +door. "Here's your friend," he whispered, and thrust someone in. +Bewilderment spread over the faces of the boys. + +It was not Dick who entered the cabin, but Art Howells! + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +A GOOD DEED REWARDED + + +The dumbfounded boys could only stare at Howells. + +"Where did you come from and where is Dick?" cried Garry, when he had +recovered his voice sufficiently to speak. + +"If you will untie my hands first, I will feel better and be able to +think. My wrists are all raw from trying to work the ropes off, but the +man that tied me up knew his business too well," said Howells. + +Since the boys' belongings had been restored them by King, they had +their knives, and it was a small matter to cut the bonds. + +"Now what do you mean by Dick being with me?" asked Howells. + +"Why, Dick has been a prisoner at the camp, and we were given to +understand that he was to be brought here to join us. We were prisoners +here ourselves; fell into a foolish trap because we were too sure of +ourselves. Fortunately, because of a good turn that we were able to do, +we have been set free by the squatter chief," answered Garry. + +"What do you mean free, with an armed guard outside the door?" demanded +Art. "I should say you were pretty closely kept in confinement." + +"That is only a ruse so the suspicion of whoever brought any prisoner +here would not be raised. As soon as he goes we will be free to do what +we please. Now how did you come to be captured?" went on Garry. + +"Oh, I made a fool blunder too. I wanted to see you chaps to tell you +that a lot of lumber was being shipped from a place called Harrison. +It's about five miles away from Dutton Lake, so that seems to show that +the lake figures in the stealing of the timber. I crawled into camp one +night and went to your shack, and walked in expecting to find you +sleeping there. Instead I ran right into the arms of a couple of huskies +who had me overpowered before I knew what was going on. I found out in a +few minutes that the pair were LeBlanc and that precious scoundrel that +tried to do me up that night you chaps appeared so providentially on the +scene." + +"Did Barrows say anything about what had been going on in the camp, or +drop any word that would give us a hint as to his plans?" put in Phil. + +"No, he was very closemouthed. There was a swarthy chap with him, who +from your description I take to be Jean LeBlanc. All that was said was +that I should be taken to a place called Misery Camp. From the looks of +this place I judge that is where I am now. What have you run into, a +squatter camp?" + +"Yes, you've hit the nail on the head." + +Garry was about to speak further, when the door opened and the squatter +chief came in. + +"That fellow is gone, and you kin come out any time you want," was the +welcome news that he brought. The three followed him into the sunlight +and then decided that a start should be made for the lumber camp at +once. + +"That is, unless you are too tired to start now, Art," said Garry. + +"Oh, I'm feeling fit as a fiddle. I don't know that I'd care to walk all +the way back, but we can save time by going part of the way," remarked +Art cheerfully. + +The packs were brought out and soon all was ready for the return trip. +They were surprised at the appearance of King with his rifle, and feared +for a moment that he had thought better of allowing them to go and was +going to make them prisoners again. + +"Just decided that I'll go with you fellows. If there's goin't to be +fightin', and I think there is, I want to be in it. Besides, you won't +be safe wanderin' around through strange country alone. I'll see that +you get where you want to go in safety, and mebbe you'll find that a +little bit of extra help won't come in amiss? Do you want me to come?" +concluded King. + +The light of battle was in the old man's eyes, and Garry at once decided +that he might prove a valuable ally in case trouble arose and welcomed +him to come with them. + +"We'll take a little different way back, so we won't be liable to run +into any of that gang from the camp. We'll go until you fellows get +tired, then eat, and you can roll in while I watch for you." + +This was what they wanted to do, and so they agreed to follow his advice +entirely on the return trip. + +"What about some of the men coming to your place to see if we are all +right, or if they bring Dick with them, what then?" questioned Garry. + +"In case any o' them come here from now on, they'll get a treat they +won't like. I told my men to seize anyone who came, and if the fat boy +comes, he is to be guided to a place where me and my men know, and then +he can join us," answered King. + +The squatter seemed to have covered everything necessary, and off +started the quartet. King led them on a roundabout trail, and they +walked until darkness fell, when Howells declared that he would like to +rest. + +For fear of possible detection by some prowler from the camp, no fire +was built, and a cold bite was eaten. King refused to let any of the +others do any work, and himself gathered enough boughs for them all to +sleep on. Garry insisted that when King had watched for a while, he +waken either himself or Phil, and they could provide a relief for a +while. King protested that he was able to watch the entire night, but +Garry reminded him that on the coming day there might be strenuous work, +and he would not want to be handicapped by fatigue. This finally made +the old man agree to waken Garry at midnight and let him stand a watch. + +True to his word, King shook Garry about midnight. + +"Don't believe there's any real need o' watchin', everything been quiet +so far; but there's nothin' like bein' on the safe side." + +Garry looked to see that his rifle was loaded and ready, then took a +seat under a tree where he could be comfortable and yet hear anything. +King laid down on the ground, scorning the boughs, and was fast asleep +in a moment. + +After about two hours Garry began to feel drowsy, and rather than run +the risk of dropping off to sleep, he woke Phil, who had had a good +sleep and was able to stand sentry for the rest of the night. + +After they had eaten in the morning, the old man asked what the next +step was. + +Garry had been thinking it over as they ate, and so he asked King if he +knew the region around Kanamo Lake. King answered that he knew every +inch of the territory in that part of the state, and so it was decided +that he lead them by a roundabout route to the lake shore. Here they +could hide out in a safe place, and after dark could portage the canoe +across the timberland to Dutton Lake. Garry was determined to try and +catch the thieves at work that night. Then plans could be made for a +raid on the camp and the rescue of Dick could be effected. + +It was almost nightfall when they reached the lake shore, and they +thought best to turn in for a while before making for the spot where +they had concealed the canoe. + + * * * * * + +To return now to Dick, who had been left all this time in the cellar. +Food was brought to him on occasion, but always by two or three in +company, and he had no opportunity of trying to fight his way from the +cellar. Once when the cook and cookee came, he attempted to bribe them +to let him escape, but they turned a deaf ear to his words. + +Back at the office, Barrows was having a council with his henchmen. +These consisted of the two LeBlancs, the cookee and the boss sawyer. + +"Things are beginning to get too brisk here, so we'll make a good +cleanup and light out," said Barrows. "I didn't expect when we started +this thing that there would be all the trouble that has since come upon +us. We've all done enough now to land us in prison, what with this +kidnapping and everything. Catching Howells around here was what has +made me suspicious. There's no telling what he has done on the outside. +He may have written to Boone and told him what was going on, and that +would sure spill the beans, for Boone would probably order me off the +place and give me my walking papers. Then we would be all done. What I +propose is this: We have already cut a good bit of timber and that has +been sawed, thanks to the saw I had hidden in the storehouse. We would +have wasted time, as usual, waiting for another, but this suits my ends +better. All this timber has been left on the tote road, and tonight +we'll make a number of trips and clean it up. Tomorrow night we'll make +a grand cleanup and then fire the sawmill and wreck the machinery and +light out. By the time they have things ready to fix up, Boone will be +too late to keep his contracts and my work will have been done," Barrows +concluded as he rubbed his hands in evil satisfaction over his +treachery. + +"And the boys?" inquired Jean LeBlanc softly. + +"I know what's on your mind, LeBlanc. Ugh, I'd hate to have you for an +enemy. I suppose you want to stick a knife in them and put them out of +the way." + +"That would be safest. They know too much," answered the halfbreed. + +"Well, I have a better plan than that. You remember we wrote a letter to +decoy them away and mentioned a ransom. What's to prevent us from really +getting one from old man Boone? We could stick him up for a big sum, and +that would be clear profit aside from what the Carson people are paying +us. King will keep them till we arrange things and then we could free +them. After that, LeBlanc, you can do what you like; it will be out of +my hands then. Now we'll start for the lake. Will the boat be there at +the usual time?" and he turned to the boss sawyer. + +"Usual time," laconically answered the man. + +The door was thrown open, and a man walked into the room. + +"So it's the Carson people that are back of you this time, eh, Barrows? +Guess I got here just in time!" + +The men gasped in amazement, for there stood "Moose" Boone. + +In the face of this crisis, the only one to keep his head was LeBlanc. + +"Seize him," he whispered sibilantly to his brother, in French. + +Before Mr. Boone could make a move, he was grabbed by the powerful +brothers. One of them clasped a hand over his mouth, and without a word, +as though they had practiced for this very moment, Jean snatched a +soiled bandanna from his pocket, and in another minute Mr. Boone was +effectually gagged. + +Barrows also had sprung into action. Rummaging around under the pine +table that served as a desk, he brought forth a length of rope, and soon +Boone was tightly bound. + +"Carry him over to the storehouse. Don't put him in the cellar. This +makes things better. We can keep him prisoner for several days and clean +up. Lively now," ordered Barrows. + +"Moose" Boone was carried to the storehouse and unceremoniously dumped. +He lay on the floor thinking how foolish he had been to come alone to a +camp where he knew there was treachery afoot, but now it was too late to +cry over spilled milk. He wondered where the boys were, since he had +seen no sign of them about the camp. + +His reason for coming was the note that Garry had sent him, and which +the hermit had succeeded in having posted. + +He twisted around several times in an effort to relieve the pain in his +arms and feet from lying tied on the hard floor. + +Nearly two hours passed, and then the door was softly unlocked and +opened. In stepped the cook. Mr. Boone wondered what was to happen now, +and he received the surprise of his life when the cook fished out his +knife and proceeded to cut the bonds that bound him. + +"Have you come to the conclusion that this was a fool thing to do? I am +thankful, of course, and will see that you are let go when the rest of +this gang is rounded up," said Boone. + +The cook did not speak until he had cut the bonds. + +"First, Mr. Boone, I'll tell you something and then I'll show you +someone. I don't suppose you will remember a cold spring day nearly +twenty-five years ago on the Umculcos, when you risked your own life to +save a lumberjack that was trying to ride a log and fell into the river +with the logs crushing down about him?" + +Boone's mind travelled swiftly back to the day, although he had not +given it a thought for years. + +"Yes, I remember pulling a man out, and then falling sick from the cold, +and when I got well the man I had pulled out was gone," he answered. + +"Well, I was the man you pulled out. I left the camp because I was only +a fool young fellow and they made so much fun of me for falling in that +I picked up and got out. I never knew you were the man until I saw you +tonight and hitched your name up with the man who saved me. Now I'll +show you something like I promised." + +He rolled the barrels away and raised the trap. "Come up," he called +into the darkness. + +Dick awoke from a troubled sleep and painfully crawled up the ladder. It +took a few moments for his eyes to get accustomed to the light, and then +he looked as though he saw a ghost. + +"Uncle," he almost shouted, for so it was that he always addressed Mr. +Boone. + +They clasped hands with a hearty good will and were about to exchange +notes when the door was thrown open and Barrows and the two LeBlancs +entered. + +Each held a revolver with a steady hand. + +"So, cook, you've turned traitor, have you? Well, it just makes another +prisoner. Now Boone, it's no use trying to do anything. Most of the men +in the camp are in my pay, and just to be sure that we clean up tonight +and tomorrow night as we had planned, we have seized all the men we are +not sure of and have them herded in the bunkhouse and under heavy guard. +This time we'll succeed!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +THE CAPTURE + + +We left Garry, Phil and Howells with the squatter king on the lake shore +waiting for darkness. When it fell, they retrieved the canoe from its +hiding place and started across the timberland to Dutton Lake. The trip +occupied nearly three hours, although they made excellent speed. + +The faint light of the stars pierced the blackness of the forest, so +they did not have to stumble along, although the greatest of caution was +exercised every moment. + +They reached the lake without encountering a person, and then launched +the canoe. They did not dare trust the weight of the four to the frail +craft, and so it was planned that King and Phil should remain behind, +while Art and Garry paddled out into the lake. They did not have to wait +a great while until the chugging of the powerful engine in the motor +boat was heard. + +Paddling with the noiseless stroke of the Indians, they followed after a +reasonable time had elapsed. They had taken only a few strokes when Art +whispered: + +"Here, we're going at this thing wrong. When that raft is loaded and +starts back across the water, it will make too much speed for us to +follow. Suppose we start now for the other side of the lake. Then we can +lie off shore and wait for its arrival and see who meets the raft to +unload it. That will complete your evidence, and we'll duck out for the +camp and somehow get hold of Dick. What say?" + +Without a word, Garry, who was paddling stern, gave his paddle a twist +and the canoe turned in its course. They reached the other side and then +lay off shore as agreed, giving the paddles an occasional twist to keep +the canoe from drifting, for a gentle breeze was stirring the lake. + +After a long wait they heard the approach of the motor boat, which, as +was customary, was running without lights. Far down the shore they saw a +light appear as though some one were flashing a lamp. It was probably to +guide the boat to its destination in the darkness. When the boat reached +its objective point, they paddled noiselessly to within a few feet of +it, and beached the canoe. Walking with the stealth of Indians, they +came close to where the boat was being unloaded. + +"By jove, I know that voice," whispered Garry, as he heard a man ask: + +"So this is how the trick is done? Pretty clever, I call it. Steal the +timber and then raft it across to where you have your trucks waiting and +hustle it to the railroad spur. Mighty good work on the part of Barrows. + +"That's Carson himself; used to be associated with Father," whispered +Garry. He and Howells were hiding back of a tree, well away from danger +of being seen. At that moment Carson struck a match to light his pipe. + +"Get a good look at him, we will want to identify him in court if +necessary," said Garry. Howells nudged him to make him understand that +he had done so. + +"Now wait here," whispered Garry. Howells watched in amazement as Garry +crept to the water's edge and noiselessly waded in. He made no sound as +he swam. When he came back, dripping wet, Howells wanted to ask a score +of questions, but forebore for fear of being heard. + +He was about to come closer and whisper, when a form crept up to them +and a low voice said: + +"So we meet again." + +It was Baptiste LeBlanc. The Frenchman then lifted his voice and called +for the others. But he did not get very far. Howells struck with all his +strength and his hard knuckles took the halfbreed on the point of the +jaw. LeBlanc dropped like a stone. + +"Come, Garry, this way quick," called Art. There was no need of +whispering now, for the men who had been unloading had heard the alarm +and there was the sound of rushing feet. + +"Into the canoe, Art. They can't follow us," said Garry. + +Howells had intended a dash into the woods, where there was less +likelihood of being caught, but he obeyed Garry, knowing that he had +some plan in view. They pushed the canoe into the water, springing into +it as they did. It was lucky that Howells was an experienced canoeist, +else the frail boat would have been overturned. As it was, they got a +good start, and in a moment were bending to their paddles with all their +might and strength. + +"What's to stop them following us in the motor boat? We should have +taken to the woods," remonstrated Art. + +"Faster, I'll tell you later," answered Garry breathlessly. At that +minute they heard loud imprecations from the shore. + +By this time they were well away from shore and out of danger of a +possible shot. + +Garry began to laugh. + +"No wonder they are shouting and cursing there. I swam to the boat that +time I left you and cut the wires on the engine; and to be sure, I took +out the spark plugs, and have them in my pocket. It will be some time +before they get that boat into condition to chase us!" + +"Good boy," said Art admiringly. + +The return across the lake was without eventful occurrence, however, for +with them was the hermit. + +Garry greeted him warmly. "What news?" he asked. + +"I fear I am the bearer of bad news," said the hermit. + +"Your father has come to the camp and been caught, so I judge from what +I heard said by two men a while ago as I lay close to the road that +leads here. Also many of the lumberjacks are kept captive in one of the +shacks, and a heavy guard has been set over them. I think we had better +go for help; we can't battle them alone, our numbers are too few." + +Garry was for going at once to the rescue of his father, but the others +restrained him. + +"We can't do anything there, and we can be of great help on the outside. +There is a sheriff in town, and we can get word to him, and have him +round up a posse sufficiently large to capture the whole outfit," +advised Art. + +Reluctantly Garry agreed that this was the wisest thing to do. + +"King, guide us around so that we can avoid the camp, but get to the +road that leads to town. We'll get a posse and give them a battle," +directed Garry. + +Without a word, King led the way, and the others followed. + + * * * * * + +In the meantime, Mr. Boone and Dick had been led from the storehouse and +taken to the bunkhouse, where the rest of the prisoners were. + +There were shouts of welcome when some of the old woodsmen saw Mr. +Boone. Although he was the owner of the timber tract, and their +employer, they hailed him as "Moose" and shook his hand energetically. + +"By gosh. I'm ashamed to look you in the face, Moose," cried one of the +lumberjacks. "To think we let a bunch like that crowd outside there put +it over on us; men that have fought with rifle and peavy stick when some +crowd tried to steal the river from us. Gosh, if we had a few axes and +peavy sticks now we could get out there and make that bunch look sick, +but all have rifles and revolvers. Barrows must've had a regular armory +with him." + +They were still talking and trying without success to puzzle a way out +of their predicament, when Dick gave a shout of joy. + +"There's my knapsack. That lets me see light right now!" + +The men looked at him in astonishment. How a mere knapsack could help +them was not to be understood. + +"That was chucked in here by one of the men yesterday, before we were +captured. He saw it in the shack, and remembering it belonged to one of +you, took it for safe keeping. It was Tom there, who brought it." + +Tom was the man who had taken them on the coon hunt, and one they had +been suspicious of, but here he was with the loyal men. + +Dick hurriedly opened the knapsack. Yes, there it was, safe and sound, +the wireless outfit! + +"Now one of you fellows get up there and dig a hole in the roof; it only +need be a small one, that I can slide this aerial up through. It ought +not to take more than an hour." + +"We haven't any knife," said one of the men. "They took away all our +knives and matches from us." + +Dick secured his knife from its secret pocket in the lapel, and handed +it to one of the men. + +"One of you set to work, and the others keep talking so that the guards +outside will not become suspicious and look in here." + +"Are you going to try something with the radio-phone," asked Mr. Boone, +who was the only one who grasped what Dick's intentions were. + +"Yes; it's our only chance. I happened to notice that there were two +aerials over houses in the last town we passed through before coming to +the camp, and I saw some radio apparatus in a store window, so evidently +some one there has an outfit. Fortunately I have the receiving apparatus +here as well as a sender, and we can find out if my message is received +by anyone." + +As he talked, he adjusted the apparatus, ready to send his plea for help +through space and hope that someone would be listening in. + +"Hurry!" he called to the man who was boring through the board roof with +the knife. "It's almost time for the usual radio broadcasting stations +to stop sending, and I want to get someone while they are still +listening in, just as the broadcasting station closes." + +"There, guess that's all right, unless you want it a little bigger," +said the man who had been working. + +Dick looked up at the hole and saw that it would do all right. + +Most of the men were frankly incredulous. The thought of talking through +a 'phone that had no wires was a riddle to them, as few or none of them +knew anything about radio. + +One of them suggested that instead of wasting time with such a "fool +contrivance," they try to tear away the boards from the roof and take a +chance on overpowering the guards. This was discouraged by the others +who, though they were by no means cowardly, knew it would be foolhardy +to face guns with only their bare hands. + +"Let's give the boy a chance with his infernal machine first," advised a +grizzled old lumberjack. "Then if it don't work, we can try something +else." + +Dick adjusted the aerial, and then tuning up, got ready to talk into the +transmitter. + +"Some of you men keep talking over there by the door, and the rest of +you get near the windows and block anyone from seeing in. Don't talk too +loud, just enough to cover my voice." + +For nearly ten minutes Dick repeated over and over again: + +"S. O. S. Send a sheriff with large posse to Boone's camp. Owner and +some of men held prisoners. Answer if you get message." + +Then there was a crackling sound in the receivers that were clasped to +his head, and with a thrill he knew that someone was trying to get him. + +He adjusted the tuning apparatus with trembling fingers. The voice still +sputtered and crackled. Finally he got the right wave length, and heard +a welcome voice. + +"Hello, are you sending help call?" + +"Yes," almost shouted Dick. "Who are you?" + +"Brown talking. My father is sheriff. Are you in earnest?" + +"Yes, surely. Hurry posse on way. You'll need thirty or forty men. We +are held prisoners in bunkhouse here. Captors are all armed. Be careful. +This is last call; act quick, as I'm going to pack up radio for fear I +will be discovered and apparatus broken. Goodnight." + +"Going for Dad now, goodnight," came the voice. There was a sputter, +then silence. + +Dick turned to the men, his face gleaming with pleasure. + +"There will be a posse on the way in a short time. The radio worked," he +announced. + +The little group of men burst into a cheer and were silenced only by the +threat of the guards outside to come in and make them stop. + +Feeling that they had done all that could be done, they prepared to turn +in and wait the coming of the morn with its posse headed by Sheriff +Brown. + +The men rolled in, but Dick was too excited to sleep, and he told Mr. +Boone, in a low tone, of all that had transpired since they had reached +the camp. Of course he was unable to tell of the way in which the timber +was stolen, as he had not seen his chums when they returned from their +expedition that night he was captured. + +Mr. Boone was silent for some few minutes after Dick had concluded his +talk. He was worried about Garry and Phil, and Dick, noting his silence, +asked him what the trouble was. + +When he found the reason for Mr. Boone's worry, he endeavored to cheer +him up. + +"The chances are that they have not fallen into the hands of anyone at +the camp here, else they would have been brought here with us. I am +certain that they have discovered some clue and are following it up. +Very likely they are searching for me, as they of course do not know I +am here." + +Being ignorant of all that had transpired, Dick did not know how near at +that moment his chums were. + +As they talked, they were being guided towards the road by King. It was +necessary to make a wide detour in order to avoid running into a stray +member of the camp traitors' party. + +Garry was well satisfied with part of the night's work. In the first +place, he had proof that Carson, his father's business enemy, was at the +bottom of the whole mess, and in the second place, he felt that he had +so effectively disabled the motor launch that no more timber would be +stolen that night. By the next day, he expected to have the whole gang +rounded up. + +They finally reached the road, and were half way to the town, when they +heard the sound of what they thought was a large auto truck coming +towards them. + +When they drew near the truck, they saw a dozen rifles leveled at them, +and a stern voice told them to halt. They feared for a moment that they +had walked into a new trap. + +One of the men leaped from the truck and asked them who they were and +what their business was. + +"My name is Boone," answered Garry, acting as the spokesman for his +little party. "I am on my way to try and locate the sheriff of the +county, as my father and friends are held prisoner at the Boone lumber +cutting camp." + +"Well, I'm the sheriff, and I'm on my way there now. We'll look you over +in a moment and see if you're all right." + +The words of the sheriff surprised Garry. + +"How did you know that you were wanted at the camp?" + +"My boy picked a message out of the air with his radio, and that's how +we found out," answered the sheriff. + +Garry gave a shout of joy. "Good for Dick, he managed somehow to get a +chance to use his wireless." + +"Now," said the sheriff, "lower the muzzles of those rifles and come +forward slowly. My men have you covered and you have no chance for any +monkey business." + +Knowing that they could soon convince the sheriff of their statements, +they did as they were bade. When they came into the light cast by the +headlights of the truck, the sheriff at once recognized Art Howells. + +"Hello, Art, guess that is all I want to know. These fellows all right? +I know you well enough to take your word for it." + +"They are absolutely O.K., Sheriff," answered Art. "We were on our way +to summon you when you met us." + +Howells' words satisfied the sheriff, and they proceeded to get +acquainted all around. Garry asked if that was the pretext of the posse, +for he counted only fifteen men, and was relieved when he was told that +another truck with the same number of men was following them, but had +been obliged to stop for a short time on account of engine trouble. + +As they spoke they heard the rumble of an engine and a short time later +the second truck hove into view. + +"It lacks about an hour and a half of daylight, so I think we ought to +be getting on. If possible we can surprise them in the dark, that would +win half the battle for us. Not that I expect there will be much of a +fight, when they see that the law is after them," said the sheriff. + +"I don't think I would trust the authority of the law half as much as +our rifles," said Garry. "Those men are desperate, some of them, and if +they see prison staring them in the face, they will fight all the +harder, figuring that they might as well be taken for sheep as for +lambs," said Garry. "Besides, they have two bad men with them, meaning +the two halfbreeds, Jean and Baptiste LeBlanc. Jean is already wanted +for a half a dozen serious crimes, including kidnapping and setting fire +to forests; also he is an escaped jail bird. With that kind, it means +fight to the end before being taken." + +"Come to think of it, I've seen a notice in my office offering a reward +for his capture. I'd like to get that chap, and I could use the reward," +said the sheriff. + +They had ridden as they talked, and soon were on the outskirts of the +camp. + +But something had gone wrong. A volley of shots whistled at them from +cover, and they were forced to beat a short retreat instead of springing +a surprise on their quarry as they had intended to do. + +"Now, that's funny; how did they get on to that?" muttered the sheriff. + +It later developed that Barrows had posted sentinels in the woods along +the road, and as soon as their approach was noted, they had, by a +pre-arranged signal, passed the word of the coming to the posse. + +This word having been received at the camp, hasty preparations had been +made to receive them. The prisoners, about twenty in all, had been +marched at the points of guns to the storehouse, and there were forced +to enter the storehouse. There was hardly room enough for them, and +little air, but they were crowded in like so many sardines in a can, +while the enemy fortified themselves in the log bunkhouse. + +The opening volley of shots had come from the sentinels who had closed +in and fired as they ran for shelter to the bunkhouse. + +"Well, we're stumped for a minute now," said the sheriff. "They could +hold us off for a long time in that bunkhouse. It is built of solid +logs, and bullets, unless they were aimed at the windows, would have no +effect on that wood. We've got to think up some way of rushing 'em or +smoking 'em out. Anyone got a plan in mind?" + +"Yes, sir, I think I have," spoke up Phil. "As soon as it gets just a +little bit lighter we can rush one of the trucks back through the woods +to the sawmill, and there we can sheath the truck with some of that +timber. A very thick bulwark can be made, and that will halt the +bullets. Half of the men can stay near the bunkhouse drawing fire with +their rifles while the truck is being fixed." + +"But what good is that going to do us?" broke in the sheriff. + +"Just let me finish. I know that there are three or four sticks of +dynamite at the sawmill, that were part of the lot bought to blast away +the stumps where the mill and camp shacks were built. With what wire I +have in my pack, and some of the batteries from my wireless, I can rig +up a small mine at the side of the log hut, where there is no window. +The shield on the truck would be to allow us to get there in safety." + +"But wouldn't that be an awful thing to do, Phil?" asked Garry. "We +couldn't blow those men up without warning." + +"No, that isn't my idea. I would have one of the party carry a flag of +truce into the camp and explain to the men what had been done, and give +them two minutes to surrender. If they did not, then go ahead and blow +her up. Few would be hurt, and those only slightly. The blast would make +a breach in the wall through which we could wage a more even battle, if +it comes to an actual fight. But I think the fear of the dynamite would +be enough to do the trick. Besides, we could promise that the +lumberjacks would be allowed to go in peace; only the principals would +be held. If those jacks were the kind that would play traitor to the +camp they were working for, they would double cross Barrows to save +their own skins." + +"By gosh, boy, I believe you have struck the very idea. At any rate, +it's worth a trial. I'll go with you in the truck with some of the men, +and leave the deputy here with the others." + +The plan was put into execution, and the truck made a dash over the +uneven ground past the bunkhouse. A volley of shots greeted them as they +tore past, and two of the men uttered exclamations of pain. Fortunately +they had only the merest flesh wounds, which Phil bound for them with a +small first aid bandage that he had in his pocket. + +The barrier was built in record time at the sawmill, and Phil rescued +the dynamite from its hiding place. He had feared for a moment that it +might have been removed, but evidently in the haste of fortifying +themselves in the bunkhouse, no one of the enemy had thought of it. + +The return to the bunkhouse then started. When within a striking +distance of it, the truck was turned around and, throwing his clutch +into reverse, the driver skillfully backed it towards the log house. + +Several shots were fired, then there was a silence. Evidently those +inside the building were at loss to understand what this peculiar form +of attack meant. + +Phil knew that his job would be a perilous one, but he knew his duty was +to do what he had planned. The barrier was raised up and he slipped to +the ground. He felt a measure of safety in the thought that the enemy +could see what was going on, and would be unlikely to send spies out, +since the men of the posse in the other truck could pick them off if +they came out. + +Phil raided his radio set for the necessary wire, and fixed the dynamite +against the log house. There was only one detonator left, and Phil was +not sure it was a good one, but he felt so certain that there would be +no need of setting it off that he did not particularly care. + +His plan was for the man who bore the flag of truce to promise safe +conduct for one man to go and look at the arrangement and then go back +and tell the others that it was so. The inspector would be under cover +of the rifles of the posse all the time, so would have no chance of +wrecking the dynamite mine. + +When it was finally in place, he gave the order for the truck to back +away slowly, paying out the wire that was to be used to set off the +detonator from the battery at the other end if the need really arose. + +Garry then volunteered to act as the truce bearer, but here King stepped +in. + +"I've been athinkin' that you shouldn't go. Suppose they once got you in +the shack; they could send a man out and tell us that they would harm +you if you didn't give orders to git out o' the way. They know that your +pa would rather lose the whole camp than have you harmed. Now with me it +would be different; they'd know that I didn't count for much with you +folks, I'd be like one o' the sheriff's men only, and could bargain +better. Better let me go, only promise if anythin' happens to me you'll +take care of my baby." + +The crude logic of the old timer appealed to them all except Garry, who +felt that he should take the danger, since Phil had done his share in +braving bullets to fix the charge. + +However, the sheriff decided the matter, and since he was the real head +of the posse and the law representative of the county, his decision +went. + +One of the men produced a white handkerchief and tied it to a stick. +Then holding the flag of truce aloft, King, the squatter, headed for the +log house. The posse held their breaths for a moment, thinking that +those in the shack would fear a trick and shoot him; but he advanced in +safety and they saw the door of the shack open long enough to admit him. + +When King arrived at the shack, he was met by Barrows, who demanded to +know what message was sent. In a few words King told them, then he added +some words of his own. These were directed to the lumberjacks. King spun +a yarn out of whole cloth and told the jacks, who by this time were +almost ready to desert the ship, that another posse was on the way. + +Barrows was for disregarding the message as a trick, but King clinched +the argument by offering immunity to all the lumberjacks except the +bosses and camp officers. They demanded that one of their number go and +see if the dynamite was really there. + +Barrows and his lieutenants were not strong enough to cope with the +lumberjacks, and it was finally agreed that one lumberjack and the red +headed cookee go and inspect the blasting apparatus. Each faction--for +there were two now in the log house--insisted on having a representative +sent, for neither was willing to trust the word of the other. King +agreed to remain behind as a hostage for the safety of the messengers. + +The two set out on their quest, and in a few minutes were back, post +haste. + +"It's there, boss; enough to blow us all into the next world," gasped +the cookee, who was now frightened half to death. + +His words being corroborated, the lumberjacks insisted on an immediate +surrender. Barrows saw that the jig was up, and he ordered an +evacuation. Jean LeBlanc's face was livid, and he spat out a torrent of +abuse at Barrows. But for all his braggadocio, Barrows was a coward +under the skin, and he saw there was nothing to be gained by a fight +except a longer prison term. Even now he was figuring on bargaining with +Mr. Boone for his freedom, by giving away the interests who had hired +him to do their dirty work. + +Once outside the door, they found the guns of the men in the trucks +trained on them, and they were marching quietly to be disarmed and +probably bound, when suddenly, with a loud scream of defiance, Jean +LeBlanc turned and bounded away with the speed of a stricken deer. A +dozen shots flew after him, and one must have struck him, for they heard +him give a screech of pain, then he reached the sanctuary of the woods, +and dodging for safety from tree to tree dashed for the lake. Three of +the men took after him, but he had taken them by such great surprise +when he fled, that he got a flying start. + +LeBlanc reached the lake and dived in. He had seen at the same moment as +the men who were following, the one chance to save his hide. The motor +boat had been repaired, and in it were three or four of the men +concerned in the timber thefts. Among them was Jean's brother Baptiste. + +Swimming under water, the halfbreed made for the craft. The men in the +launch opened fire on the pursuers. A rope was thrown to Jean by his +brother, which he grasped, and then without taking the time to haul him +aboard, the boat put about and made for the other side of the lake. + +Shot after shot was exchanged, but LeBlanc, as well as those in the +motor boat, seemed to bear charmed lives. + +Once again, Jean LeBlanc had foiled justice and made his escape. + +The chagrined pursuers returned to the late scene of hostilities, and +found that order had been restored. The lumberjacks who had been +promised immunity had been disarmed and herded together, waiting the +word to leave the camp. + +The ringleaders had been tied up to prevent any more escapes, and Mr. +Boone and Dick, together with the other prisoners, had been removed from +the stifling air of the storehouse. + +Warm was the greeting between father and son and between the chums who +were together once again, unharmed and happy. After the greetings were +over, the traitorous lumberjacks were ordered to get their packs and +leave within fifteen minutes under the guidance of the posse, while the +prisoners were put on the trucks to be taken to the county jail. + +"So ends the battle of Boone's camp, and all the excitement. My boys, I +can't tell you how proud I am of you; but had I known the perils that +were in store for you, I would never have started you on this mission. +But you have covered yourselves with glory, and I'm proud of you. Now I +must get a manager that will serve my interests, get this camp going and +do what I can to try and retrieve what I have lost through the rascally +Barrows. I am afraid that I am financially hurt unless we can bring +Carson to book and make him stand this loss." + +"With our evidence I think you can," said Garry. "And now what would you +give for a real manager that would serve you and no one else?" + +"I don't know, but I would give almost anything in reason for such a +man." + +"Then," said Garry, "there's your man," and he pointed to Art Howells. + +Garry's father heartily agreed. + +"Now," said Mr. Boone, "I'd like to get a look at this hermit of yours." + +The boys looked around for the old man, but, mysterious as ever, he had +disappeared! + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +CONCLUSION + + +So the quest of the boys to discover the Timber Thieves was ended. Mr. +Boone hailed Garry's suggestion with delight, and Howells, who protested +that he had done nothing to deserve the big promotion, was installed as +camp manager, with the faithful lumberjacks as a nucleus, to get the +camp going full blast again. + +"And you can depend, Moose Boone, on our doing everything we can to make +up for what has happened before," one of the old timers shouted. + +Only one remained to be rewarded for his help. That was King, the +squatter. Mr. Boone immediately agreed when Garry told him of the +promise that had been made, and offered to send some food and clothes to +Misery Camp. + +A suggestion by Dick proved good. He asked why the Misery Camp men could +not be hired to take some of the places left vacant by the men who had +turned traitor. This was put to King and he thought it over a minute. + +Then he said: + +"Squatters hain't lazy; it's just that every man's hand is turned +against 'em because they haven't got homes and land o' their own; but +you people seem different. I'll have all the men here in a couple o' +days, ready to go to work and earn a livin'." + +It took some time for all to tell their stories. Since Garry and Phil +had worked separately from Dick, they had to tell him all that befell +them since the evening they had left to go and visit the scene of the +timber stealing; and Dick was made to tell how he had become a captive. + +In the telling of their stories to each other, the whole story was +unfolded to Mr. Boone, and at the end of the stories he again +congratulated them on the successful way in which they had carried out +his mission. + +"Now I suppose it's back to the patrol on Sourdehunq," said Garry. "We +have forgotten for some time that we are Rangers, and we still have a +month or so to work for the protection of the forests. It will seem kind +of quiet there after all this excitement, for I don't believe that much +can happen there now." + +But further adventures were in store for the boys--how they were given +another mission to accomplish; the great good fortune that came to Phil; +the explanation of the mystery that surrounded the hermit, and the final +reward for their summer's work. All will be told in the next and last +book of the Ranger Boys series, entitled, "The Ranger Boys and Their +Reward." + +THE END + + + + +The Ranger Boys Series + +BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE + +A new series of copyright titles telling of the adventures of three boys +with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE + THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT + THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS + THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES + THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Radio Boys Series + +BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + +A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER + THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS + THE RADIO BOYS' SEARCH FOR THE INCA'S TREASURE + THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Boy Troopers Series + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +Author of the Famous "Boy Allies" Series. + +The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police. + +All Copyrighted Titles. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL + THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST + THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY + THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY 114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Golden Boys Series + +By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D. Dean of Pennsylvania Military College. + +A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School +Age. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL + THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS + THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS + THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS + THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Boy Scouts Series + +BY HERBERT CARTER + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +New Stories of Camp Life + + THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMPFIRE; + or, Scouting With The Silver Fox Patrol. + THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; + or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners. + THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; + or, Scouting through the Big Game Country. + THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; + or, The New Test for the Silver Fox Patrol. + THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; + or, The Search for the Lost Tenderfoot. + THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; + or, The Secret of the Hidden Silver Mine. + THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; + or, Marooned Among the Game-Fish Poachers. + THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; + or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp. + THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA; + A story of Burgoyne's Defeat in 1777. + THE BOY SCOUTS ALONG THE SUSQUEHANNA; + or, The Silver Fox Patrol Caught in a Flood. + THE BOY SCOUTS ON WAR TRAILS IN BELGIUM; + or, Caught Between Hostile Armies. + THE BOY SCOUTS AFOOT IN FRANCE; + or, With The Red Cross Corps at the Marne. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +Our Young Aeroplane Scout Series + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +BY HORACE PORTER + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +A Series of Remarkable Stories of the Adventures of Two Boy Flyers in +The European War Zone. + + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN FRANCE AND BELGIUM; + or, Saving The Fortunes of the Trouvilles. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN GERMANY. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN RUSSIA; + or, Lost on the Frozen Steppes. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN TURKEY; + or, Bringing the Light to Yusef. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ENGLAND; + or, Twin Stars In the London Sky Patrol. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ITALY; + or, Flying with the War Eagles of the Alps. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT VERDUN; + or, Driving Armored Meteors Over Flaming Battle Fronts. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE BALKANS; + or, Wearing the Red Badge of Courage Among Warring Legions. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE WAR ZONE; + or, Serving Uncle Sam In the Great Cause of the Allies. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS FIGHTING TO THE FINISH; + or Striking Hard Over the Sea for the Stars and Stripes. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT THE MARNE; + or, Hurrying the Huns from Allied Battle Planes. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN AT THE VICTORY; + or, Speedy High Flyers Smashing the Hindenburg Line. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Jack Lorimer Series + +BY WINN STANDISH + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +CAPTAIN JACK LORIMER; or, The Young Athlete of Millvale High. + + Jack Lorimer is a fine example of the all-around American high-school + boys. His fondness for clean, honest sport of all kinds will strike a + chord of sympathy among athletic youths. + +JACK LORIMER'S CHAMPIONS; or, Sports on Land and Lake. + + There is a lively story woven in with the athletic achievements, which + are all right, since the book has been O.K'd. by Chadwick, the Nestor + of American Sporting Journalism. + +JACK LORIMER'S HOLIDAYS; or, Millvale High in Camp. + + It would be well not to put this book into a boy's hands until the + chores are finished, otherwise they might be neglected. + +JACK LORIMER'S SUBSTITUTE; or, The Acting Captain of the Team. + + On the sporting side, this book takes up football, wrestling, and + tobogganing. There is a good deal of fun in this book and plenty of + action. + +JACK LORIMER, FRESHMAN; or, From Millvale High to Exmouth. + + Jack and some friends he makes crowd innumerable happenings into an + exciting freshman year at one of the leading Eastern colleges. The + book is typical of the American college boy's life, and there is a + lively story, interwoven with feats on the gridiron, hockey, + basketball and other clean honest sports for which Jack Lorimer + stands. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Navy + +BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other +in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place +them on board the British cruiser, "The Sylph," and from there on, they +share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, +the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably +the many exciting adventures of the two boys. + + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL; + or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet. + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS; + or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON; + or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA; + or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16. + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA; + or, The Vanishing Submarine. + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC; + or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar. + THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND; + or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM'S CRUISERS; + or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32; + or, The Fall of the Russian Empire. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS; + or, The Fall of the German Navy. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Army + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to +leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the +Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and +escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every +boy loves. + + THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE; + or, Through Lines of Steel. + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE; + or, Twelve Days Battle Along the Marne. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS; + or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians. + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES; + or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Alsne. + THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL; + or, With the Italian Army In the Alps. + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN; + or, The Struggle to Save a Nation. + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME; + or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded. + THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN; + or, Saving France from the Enemy. + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES; + or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS; + or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE; + or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE GREAT ADVANCE; + or, Driving the Enemy Through France and Belgium. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH; + or, The Closing Days of the Great World War. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Navy Boys Series + +A series of excellent stories of adventure on sea and land, selected +from the works of popular writers; each volume designed for boys' +reading. + +Handsome Cloth Bindings + + THE NAVY BOYS IN DEFENCE OF LIBERTY. + A story of the burning of the British schooner Gaspee in 1772. + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS ON LONG ISLAND SOUND. + A story of the Whale Boat Navy of 1776. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS AT THE SIEGE OF HAVANA. + Being the experience of three boys serving under Israel Putnam + in 1772. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS WITH GRANT AT VICKSBURG. + A boy's story of the siege of Vicksburg. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH PAUL JONES. + A boy's story of a cruise with the Great Commodore in 1776. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS ON LAKE ONTARIO. + The story of two boys and their adventures in the War of 1812. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE ON THE PICKERING. + A boy's story of privateering in 1780. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS IN NEW YORK BAY. + A story of three boys who took command of the schooner "The Laughing + Mary," the first vessel of the American Navy. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS IN THE TRACK OF THE ENEMY. + The story of a remarkable cruise with the Sloop of War "Providence" + and the Frigate "Alfred." + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS' DARING CAPTURE. + The story of how the navy boys helped to capture the British Cutter + "Margaretta," in 1775. + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE TO THE BAHAMAS. + The adventures of two Yankee Middies with the first cruise of an + American Squadron in 1775. + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH COLUMBUS. + The adventures of two boys who sailed with the great Admiral in the + discovery of America. + By Frederick A. Ober. + + + + +The Boy Spies Series + +These stories are based on important historical events, scenes wherein +boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of +history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home +life, and accurate in every particular. + +Handsome Cloth Bindings + + THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS. + A story of the part they took in its defence. + By William P. Chipman. + THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY. + A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL. + A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT. + A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE. + The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY. + The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS. + The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots + to drive the British from that State. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX. + The story of General Marion and his young spies. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN. + The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette + in the Siege of Yorktown. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA. + The story of how the young spies helped the Continental + Army at Valley Forge. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD. + The story of the part they took in its brave defence. + By William P. Chipman. + THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK. + The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of + General Washington. + By James Otis. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street, New York + + + + +The Girl Chum's Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives, +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + + BENHURST CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning. + BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris. + BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison. + DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row. + FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham. + HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings. + JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage. + KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow. + LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder. + MAJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright. + MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning. + MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring Corning. + MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow. + ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning. + PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright. + RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne. + THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street, New York + + + + +The Girl Comrade's Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + + A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER By I. R. Thurston. + ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fanny E. Newberry. + ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie B. Newberry. + COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry. + DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + HELEN BEATON. COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S. Robbins. + NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street. New York + + + + +Marjorie Dean High School Series + +BY PAULINE LESTER + +Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean College Series + +These are clean, wholesome stories that will be of great interest to all +girls of high school age. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL FRESHMAN + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SOPHOMORE + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL JUNIOR + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SENIOR + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +Marjorie Dean College Series + +BY PAULINE LESTER. + +Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean High School Series. + +Those who have read the Marjorie Dean High School Series will be eager +to read this new series, as Marjorie Dean continues to be the heroine in +these stories. + +All Clothbound. Copyright Titles. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE FRESHMAN + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SOPHOMORE + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE JUNIOR + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SENIOR + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Girl Scouts Series + +BY EDITH LAVELL + +A new copyright series of Girl Scouts stories by an author of wide +experience in Scouts' craft, as Director of Girl Scouts of Philadelphia. + +Clothbound, with Attractive Color Designs. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE GIRL SCOUTS AT MISS ALLEN'S SCHOOL + THE GIRL SCOUTS AT CAMP + THE GIRL SCOUTS' GOOD TURN + THE GIRL SCOUTS' CANOE TRIP + THE GIRL SCOUTS' RIVALS + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber +Thieves, by Claude A. Labelle + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 39916-8.txt or 39916-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/9/9/1/39916/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/39916-8.zip b/39916-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7956f47 --- /dev/null +++ b/39916-8.zip diff --git a/39916-h.zip b/39916-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..106e150 --- /dev/null +++ b/39916-h.zip diff --git a/39916-h/39916-h.htm b/39916-h/39916-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3762ffd --- /dev/null +++ b/39916-h/39916-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8412 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> + <meta http-equiv='Content-Type' content='text/html; charset=utf-8' /> + <meta name='author' content='Claude A. Labelle' /> + <meta name='generator' content='ph.py (version 20120603)' /> + <title>The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves</title> + <style type='text/css'> + body { margin:2em 7%; text-align: justify; } + h1 { text-align: center; font-size: large; margin-top:3em; margin-bottom:1.5em;} + h2 { text-align: center; font-size: medium; font-weight: normal; margin-top:3em; margin-bottom:1.5em;} + hr.pb { border:none;border-bottom:1px solid #cccccc; margin: 30px auto; } + </style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves, by +Claude A. Labelle + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves + +Author: Claude A. Labelle + +Release Date: June 4, 2012 [EBook #39916] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<div align='center'> +<img alt='' src='images/illus-fpc.jpg' /> +<p style='width:380px'>The guard let them out, and warned them that any attempt at flight would be followed immediately by a shot.</p> +</div> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<h1>THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES</h1> + +<p style='text-align:center; font-size:large;'>By<br/>CLAUDE A. LABELLE</p> + +<p style='text-align:center'>Author of<br/> +“The Ranger Boys to the Rescue,”<br/> +“The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit,”<br/> +“The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers,”<br/> +“The Ranger Boys and Their Reward.”</p> + +<div align='center'> +<img alt='' src='images/illus-tpg.jpg' /> +</div> + +<p style='text-align:center'>A. L. BURT COMPANY<br/> +Publishers New York</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<div style='text-align:center'> +<p><b>THE RANGER BOYS SERIES</b></p> + +<p>A Series of Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years of Age</p> + +<p>By CLAUDE A. LABELLE</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>The Ranger Boys to the Rescue</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>The Ranger Boys and Their Reward</p> + +<p>Copyright, 1922<br/> +By A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p style='font-size:smaller'>Made in “U. S. A.”</p> +</div> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p style='text-align:center; font-size:larger;'>THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES.</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER I<br/>THE START OF NEW ADVENTURES</h2> + +<p>“Bangor, Bangor, all change for Portland, Boston +and way stations,” shouted the trainman.</p> + +<p>“Here we are, boys,” shouted Garry Boone. +“Wake up, Dick, let’s get our packs and rifles. We +will be in the station in a few seconds now. My, +but I’ll be glad to see Dad again. And he promises +us some real action, too. I wonder what trouble he +is in. You remember he hinted at something of the +sort in the letter that he wrote us at Hobart.”</p> + +<p>“Well, we’ll know in a few minutes now, for +your father will be waiting for us at the Bangor +House. Don’t fret over what he wants, Garry, just +be glad that we have a chance to get into action of +some kind. These past few weeks have gotten me +so that I am not happy if we don’t have a few +scrapes to get in and out of,” remarked the second +of the trio of boys.</p> + +<p>Dick Wallace, a plump, heavyset chap, yawned +and rubbed the sleep from his eyes, and then got up +and stretched his cramped limbs. He had been napping +for more than an hour.</p> + +<p>At that moment the train drew into the station +with a screeching of brakes, and the boys, having +dug out their knapsacks and rifles from between the +seats where they had stowed them, soon were off +the train and walking briskly toward the Bangor +House.</p> + +<p>“Why not take a car, there ought to be one along +in a minute or two,” half grumbled Dick. It must +be explained that Dick, because of his weight, took +the easiest method of doing anything whenever +possible.</p> + +<p>This does not mean that he ever shirked his duty, +or that he was incapable of walking whenever he +had to. As a matter of fact, he had made long hikes +in the woods without ever batting an eyelash, but +he believed in doing such things only when they +were necessary.</p> + +<p>“Trust Dick to want a street car and something +to eat the minute he gets to a city,” laughed Garry.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I bet he is starving right now,” jibed Phil +Durant. “All he has had to eat since lunchtime is +an apple, three bananas, and I don’t know how +many bags of peanuts. If the train boy hadn’t +made a sale all the afternoon except to Dick he +would have made a day’s pay anyway.”</p> + +<p>“That reminds me that it is almost supper time +now,” said Dick. He had heard his chums rag him +so many times about his appetite, that their remarks +rolled off him as does water off a duck’s back. “I +move we postpone hearing what Dad Boone has to +tell us until after we have eaten. Then he can tell +us what he wants, and after that perhaps we can all +go to a movie show.”</p> + +<p>There was no car in sight, so they continued their +walk, and soon were at the doors of the Bangor +House, a large, well-appointed hotel. The boys cut +a strange figure as they walked through the lobby, +for they were clad in broad brimmed Stetson army +hats, khaki coats cut like hunters’ jackets, with big +roomy pockets, and khaki trousers stuffed into the +tops of shoepacks, which are nothing more than +heavy moccasins with an extra leather sole.</p> + +<p>Each boy carried a knapsack on his back, and +attached to this was a lariat. In addition, a stout +forest hatchet was thrust through the belt that girdled +them, and each boy carried a rifle.</p> + +<p>Many curious looks were cast in their direction +as they walked to the desk where Garry asked if +Mr. Boone was registered there.</p> + +<p>In a few moments the clerk had telephoned up to +Garry’s father and immediately was told to send the +boys up. Following in the wake of the bell boy +they ascended to the room, where Mr. Boone was +waiting.</p> + +<p>He greeted the boys heartily and commented on +their healthy appearance, for the sun and open air +had made them as tanned as any woodsman.</p> + +<p>Greetings over, Mr. Boone remarked:</p> + +<p>“Before I tell you boys why I have sent for you, +I suggest that we get our dinner and then come +back to the room.”</p> + +<p>“Welcome words!” uttered Dick enthusiastically.</p> + +<p>“I thought that would about hit the spot with +you, Dick,” laughed Mr. Boone.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said Garry, “he is starving to death; he +hasn’t had anything to eat for nearly an hour and +a half.”</p> + +<p>Leading the way, Mr. Boone headed the boys +toward the dining room, while they unanimously +ordered a fine steak, and soon were busily eating.</p> + +<p>As they eat, let us look them over and get acquainted +with them. Those of our readers who +have read the three volumes preceding this one, +“<span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The Ranger Boys to the Rescue</span>,” “<span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The +Ranger Boys Find the Hermit</span>,” and “<span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The +Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers</span>,” already +know our heroes. Others must be introduced.</p> + +<p>The leader of the trio is Garfield Boone. He is +generally known as Garry. The stout boy with the +long distance appetite is Dick Wallace, close friend +of Garry, and ward of Mr. Boone. The third is +Phil Durant, a boy of French Canadian parentage. +The three boys live in a small Maine town, only a +few miles from Portland, the principal city of the +Pine Tree State, as our northernmost commonwealth +is known.</p> + +<p>They have just completed their junior year in +high school, and it has been decided that Garry and +Dick shall go to a military school the coming fall, +while Phil will have to remain and finish at the high +school.</p> + +<p>Hence they wanted to spend their last vacation +together, and had picked on the idea of taking a +camping trip to the woods. Mr. Boone, father of +Garry, who owned extensive lumber tracts in the +Maine woods and was connected with some of the +big paper mills of the state, came to bat with an +idea that pleased the boys immensely.</p> + +<p>It was to this effect. That instead of going on a +mere camping trip which might prove to be tiresome +before it was concluded, that the boys become +attached to the Forest Ranger Service as an extraordinary +Unit of this woodcraft outfit.</p> + +<p>Their duties would be the same as those of the +older Rangers; that is, to guard the forests from +the fire peril that constantly menaced the timber +lands of the state. In this service there were two +branches, the men who act as lookouts, having an +unchanged station, and the patrol men who travel +over a certain set course watching that fire does not +start and keeping careless campers from starting +fires in dangerous spots.</p> + +<p>In a few days the boys had outfitted themselves +and were on their way to their first station on the +Sourdehunq Mountain, a tract of timberland owned +by Mr. Boone. They had no thought of any adventure +other than that which might be caused by the +discovery of a fire, but on their second night on the +trail they find the guide they had hired, one Jean +LeBlanc, a French Canadian halfbreed, trying to +steal their supplies.</p> + +<p>They drive him away, and later find the halfbreed +is inimical to them because of a fancied grievance +he has against the elder Boone. They also +make a staunch friend in the person of Nate Webster, +an old Maine guide. Later Webster replaces +the Deputy Ranger, Anderson by name, who has +proved incompetent, and Anderson joins forces with +LeBlanc and becomes an enemy of the Ranger +Boys, and nearly succeeds in doing them great +harm.</p> + +<p>Another friend is made in the person of an old +hermit, who on several occasions warns the boys of +impending peril by sending them cryptic notes.</p> + +<p>On one occasion Jean LeBlanc kidnaps the little +daughter of a family by the name of Graham, who +are camping in the woods. With the aid of a note +from the hermit, the boys are able to rescue her and +capture LeBlanc. The latter, however, escapes and +makes much trouble for the boys, finally setting fire +to the woods.</p> + +<p>He and Anderson escape by climbing a sheer cliff. +Still later the boys are asked by the Customs Secret +Service to get evidence of a gang of smugglers on +the Canadian border. This they do and the gang is +seized, all except LeBlanc who dodges back across +the boundary and is hence safe from arrest since he +is on Canadian territory and not amenable to the +United States law.</p> + +<p>During a rainy season, they seek out the hermit +and find him; that is, Dick finds him. One of their +greatest adventures during the search for the gang +of border smugglers is the finding, with the aid of +an old map, of a tourmaline mine. The boys get a +deed to the mineral rights of the land, and plan at +a later date to mine the gems and make a handsome +income for themselves.</p> + +<p>It must also be explained that there is a mystery +connected with Dick. His father was a college professor +of geology and botany, and a classmate of +Mr. Boone. He had a fall from a horse that destroyed +his memory, and before an operation could +be performed, disappeared. Dick’s mother had died +when he was a baby, and so being without parents +or home, Mr. Boone had become his guardian, +bringing him up with his own son, Garry.</p> + +<p>Now that we have a brief sketch of the boys and +their previous activities, let us see what Mr. Boone’s +need of them is.</p> + +<p>“Here is the whole story, boys,” said Mr. Boone +as they finished their dinner and returned to his +room. “As you know, I have extensive interests +not only in the timberland but in the mills that manufacture +paper. Recently I severed connections +with several of the mills, and put all my eggs in +one basket, so to speak, by investing my funds all in +one mill. Of course it is impossible to do business +on a big scale without making many business enemies, +or at least determined rivals. I have a good +many such, and I have been given to understand +that several of them have pooled their resources and +become connected with the mills from which I withdrew +my money.</p> + +<p>“Of course I have not enough work in my one +mill to take care of all the timber that I can cut, so +I contract to supply other mills, necessarily becoming +a rival of some of the other timber owners.</p> + +<p>“Then, too, I have recently decided to start an +experiment in summer lumbering. You know, of +course, that Maine’s lumber cutting season has +always been in the winter because the logs could be +cut and hauled over the snow to the rivers and then +when the spring unleashed the ice-bound rivers, the +logs could be driven down to the mills. However, +I am figuring on getting out lumber for building +during the summer and in the winter getting the +logs for the pulp mills to grind ready for the making +of paper. I have several important contracts +with a time limit; that is, the necessary amount of +lumber must be gotten out by a certain date else I +forfeit my profit and large damages besides.</p> + +<p>“Lately I have seen from my reports that the +lumber is not being gotten out on schedule time. +Whenever I come and look it over, or send a representative, +everything goes like clockwork, but the +moment that I turn my back a saw breaks, making +a week’s delay, or a tractor is broken, or something +else happens. Unfortunately my financial affairs at +the present time are in such shape that I must devote +the greater part of my time to keeping the +wheels going. This necessitates my being much of +the time in Boston and New York, hence I cannot +be at the cutting operations all the time.</p> + +<p>“I have changed managers, but still no good +comes of it. Now I am confident that the morale +of my camp is being undermined by some business +rivals, and that there is underground work of some +sort going on. Since your success in getting that +gang of smugglers, the complete story of which I +have already heard, I believe that you boys can find +out what is going on at the camp to hinder my contracts.</p> + +<p>“I have thought that you boys might go to the +vicinity of the cutting and sawmills and camp there. +You would have the freedom of the camp, as I +would write the manager who you were, and then +you could use your eyes and ears and see what was +what.</p> + +<p>“I should suggest that you display a great deal of +ignorance about lumbering operations and sawmill +work, so that your presence would not excite undue +suspicion. Further than that I can give you no instructions, +for if I knew what the matter was I +would not have to call on you for assistance. I am +simply relying on you to be able to do as good a +job for me as you have done for the Ranger Service +and the Customs Department. In other words, you +will have to work out your own salvation, and I am +sure that you can produce for me the results that I +want.”</p> + +<p>Mr. Boone concluded his long explanation and +then leaned back, letting the matter sink in. Then +he asked, “Well, boys, what do you think of the +proposition? Are you willing to undertake it? +Not that there will be any danger attached, but do +you feel yourselves confident of making a success +of the venture?”</p> + +<p>The eyes of the three boys sparkled. They discounted +Mr. Boone’s belief that there would be no +danger attached, for they felt that the proposition +offered a chance for much excitement, and this was +what they wanted. Thrilling adventures were for +them the spice of life after what they had experienced +that summer. Garry answered for the others. +“Will we do it? You bet we will, and we’ll succeed!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER II<br/>TO THE RESCUE</h2> + +<p>After the conclusion of their talk with Mr. +Boone, the boys went out to take in a motion picture +show, after finding there would be time to see +the last performance.</p> + +<p>On the way to the theatre, they stopped for a +moment to watch a street fakir selling knives under +the flaring light of a gasoline torch.</p> + +<p>“Here you are, here’s a fine knife with your name +and address inlaid in the handle!” he was shouting.</p> + +<p>“I think I’ll get one of those for myself,” said +Dick to his chums.</p> + +<p>“What do you want of one, you have your good +heavy scout knife, haven’t you?” queried Garry.</p> + +<p>“Oh, I just want it as a curiosity for use when +we come out of the woods; we won’t want to carry +a great knife like that in civilian clothes,” replied +Dick.</p> + +<p>“We’ll miss the first of the show if you wait,” +remarked Garry.</p> + +<p>“Let the youngster have his way, Garry,” interrupted +Phil with a laugh.</p> + +<p>The street salesman made the name plate and +quickly screwed the transparent handle back on the +knife. Dick handed over the money and soon they +were on the way to the movies.</p> + +<p>They received a fine surprise when they reached +there, for the picture being shown was one in which +they had taken small parts when they encountered +a crew of motion picture actors while they were at +their first station in the woods, and when they had +some stirring adventures the time Jean LeBlanc set +fire to the woods, the motion picture people had +been rescued by the boys. The picture was a decidedly +good one and they enjoyed it.</p> + +<p>The chums chattered during the play in a subdued +tone, especially when there flashed on the +screen the parts where they were playing roles. The +water scene where Dick did some fine swimming +was particularly good.</p> + +<p>After the picture was over, they edged out +through the crowd and returned to the hotel and +were about to go up to their rooms when Garry had +an idea.</p> + +<p>“Say, boys, we are not going on such a secret +affair now that we cannot have Sandy with us, so +I am going to telegraph Nate and ask if he will +bring us the dog tomorrow, or let us know by wire +if he cannot.”</p> + +<p>Sandy was the big Airedale dog owned by Garry, +a canine that possessed almost as much sense as +some humans. When they had gone on their mission +to the border to capture the smugglers, they +had left the dog in Nate’s keeping, as they were +afraid that the sight of the dog would bring to mind +who they were to any of their enemies, and they +had made several in the course of their sojourn in +the Maine woods.</p> + +<p>To speak was to act with Garry, and he promptly +made his way to the desk where the familiar blue +lettered lamp was aglow.</p> + +<p>The work of writing the message was short and +then they went to their rooms, first stopping in to +say good night to Mr. Boone, and advising him to +see the motion picture the next day so that he could +see them in their small parts.</p> + +<p>This Mr. Boone promised to do, and soon all +were sleeping the sound sleep of healthy boys with +never a worry or care.</p> + +<p>Morning came, and with it the boys arose and +hastened to the dining room to make the most of +the brief opportunity that they would have for the +excellent hotel fare. They spent a part of the forenoon +in overhauling and looking over their radio-phone +equipment to see that it was all in perfect +condition, for they had a hunch that it would come +in very useful when they arrived at the cutting +tract. This was to be proven true at a later date.</p> + +<p>About ten o’clock they received a wire from Nate +saying that he would arrive in Bangor about noon +and would bring the Airedale with him. True to +his promise in the telegram, the old guide appeared +at the hotel shortly after the noon hour set in and +with him was Sandy. The boys were seated in +some of the arm chairs that dotted the lobby, and +in less than a moment the dog had found his friends, +and nearly knocked over half a dozen people in his +haste and eagerness to reach the trio, for despite the +fact that an Airedale is called a one man dog, he +distributed his friendship equally among the three +chums.</p> + +<p>The boys were fully as glad to see their four-footed +friend as he was to welcome them, and they +cuffed and patted him strenuously.</p> + +<p>“Wall, boys, there’s your pup, safe and sound as +the day I took charge of him. And let me tell you, +he is some dog. Saved me a considerable sum of +money tother day, too,” announced Nate.</p> + +<p>“Tell us about it,” asked Garry, as the three +crowded around the old “State of Mainer” and +shook hands with him heartily.</p> + +<p>“There ain’t a whole lot to tell, ’cepting that a +few days ago I sold a small tract of land that I +had to a queer old codger who doesn’t believe in +banks, and who paid me in bills. I believe in banks +myself, but it was late when I made the deal so I +had to stow the money away in the house. I locked +it up as well as I could in a small desk in the sitting +room, and went on to bed. ’Bout twelve o’clock I +heard a tearing around downstairs and Sandy barking +fit to raise the dead. I hopped downstairs as +soon as I could reach for a rifle that stood in the +corner of my bedroom, just in time to see Sandy +going through an open window. I chased out after +him, but someone was just driving away in an automobile +as I got out of the window. Sandy ran the +car down the road a piece, but came back beaten +and tuckered out. He was fast, but not quite fast +enough to catch the car, going at the rate it was. +Well, I got back in through the window and looked +around. The window had been forced open, and +the burglar was just evidently about to force open +the desk, for there were scratches about the lock +and a heavy screwdriver was laying on the floor. I +figure Sandy heard him from the kitchen, where he +generally slept, and came in and drove him off just +in time to save my money. So that’s all there is to +that, but he is a mighty fine dog, and I hate to let +go of him, even to his owner.”</p> + +<p>The boys patted Sandy again and again as they +listened to Nate’s story.</p> + +<p>“Did you find any trace of the robber?” asked +Garry.</p> + +<p>“Nary a sign except the footprints on the lawn +under the window. I figure it must have been +someone that knew I got paid for the land that +evening, and that I kept a little valuable stuff in the +desk, but there is no proof or nothing to work on +to determine who it might be. I don’t care anyway, +as long as the invader didn’t get my money,” replied +Nate.</p> + +<p>The boys invited Nate to lunch with them, and +this invitation he accepted, and calling Mr. Boone +they went into the dining room. In a few moments +they were joined by “Moose” Boone and the greeting +between the two old friends was pleasant to see.</p> + +<p>During the luncheon hour they told Nate of the +new work the boys were going on, and while he +expressed himself as sorry that they were not immediately +going back on the fire patrol, he agreed +that they, if anyone, could solve the mystery of the +stolen timber and mishaps at the logging camp.</p> + +<p>After luncheon the boys decided that since a day +or two extra would not make any great difference +in their plans, they would walk to the camp instead +of riding in the hot stuffy train. They decided to +start that afternoon, as soon as the sun began to +lower, and make about ten miles of their fifty mile +journey, sleeping out under the open as soon as it +got too dark to walk any farther.</p> + +<p>Garry’s father agreed that they could take what +little extra time was needed to walk, and so it was +settled.</p> + +<p>The first business of the afternoon was to visit +a large grocery store and purchase enough provisions +to last them on the trip, for they would do +their cooking over an open fire along the way.</p> + +<p>“We’ll just buy enough to carry us over for two +days, for we ought to reach the logging camp by +late afternoon of the day after tomorrow,” announced +Garry, the chosen leader of the trio on all +expeditions.</p> + +<p>“This suits me to a T,” remarked Dick. “Then +we won’t have to carry so much extra stuff in our +packs, and in this hot weather a few pounds saved +is a boon.”</p> + +<p>“Trust Dick not to want to carry too heavy a +pack,” laughed Phil.</p> + +<p>“That’s nothing to laugh about,” protested Dick +hotly, “that’s just good common sense. It’s<span style='letter-spacing: -4px;'>——</span>”</p> + +<p>Then he perceived that his chums were ragging +him a bit so he grinned and turning on his heel +started for the door, followed by the two laughing +boys.</p> + +<p>The buying of the groceries took but a short time, +and soon the bags were packed and they were ready +for their trip.</p> + +<p>Goodbyes were said to Nate and Mr. Boone, and +the trio set out on their long hike.</p> + +<p>“Good luck, boys, and I sincerely hope that you +find what you are looking for, because my affairs +are in a ticklish position just at present and unless +I find the cause of the disturbance and thefts at the +camp, I will be in a very serious way,” said Mr. +Boone as he shook hands with the three boys.</p> + +<p>“Guess they can settle the matter if anyone can,” +remarked Nate as he bade the boys goodbye. “They +have done some pretty fine work for boys lately and +I look to see them get to the nigger in the wood-pile +and roust him out pretty shortly. Then mebbe they +can come back and take over the patrol for the rest +of the summer.</p> + +<p>“We’re good for about eight miles tonight, fellows,” +said Garry as they started, “for it will be at +least three hours before it gets too dark to walk any +farther,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>“Have you the route all set in your mind?” asked +Phil.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I looked over a road map very carefully this +morning, and the manager at the hotel garage gave +me some other directions so that we cannot go very +far wrong,” answered Garry.</p> + +<p>They passed well out of Bangor and were going +along a country road, just as the sun was setting, +when a chugging automobile was heard back of +them. Soon a ramshackle old flivver drew up near +them, driven by a young farmer lad.</p> + +<p>He sized up the boys, then stopped his machine +and asked:</p> + +<p>“Going far?”</p> + +<p>“On to Colter,” answered Garry.</p> + +<p>“Gosh, that’s a pretty good spell to walk,” answered +the farmer boy. “I’m going on about four +miles more; would you like a lift for that distance?”</p> + +<p>“You bet we would,” broke in Dick.</p> + +<p>This brought a laugh from the others, and they +accepted the lift, for it meant saving almost an hour +on their way.</p> + +<p>They piled into the old flivver, and soon were +rolling speedily along the road. Despite its aged and +decrepit appearance the car made excellent time, +and the boys commented on this.</p> + +<p>“Yep, she’s a pretty good old boat,” answered the +boy. “I don’t have much time to tinker with the +looks of the thing on the outside, but I manage to +keep the engine in pretty good condition. You can’t +keep a farm car looking up to time every minute. +Well, I turn in here in a minute, so I guess this is +as far as you can ride, unless another car comes +along. Will you come in and have a bite to eat?”</p> + +<p>The chums thanked him cordially but refused his +invitation, saying that they would cook their own +meal an hour or so later.</p> + +<p>Garry looked up at the sun and then remarked to +his chums:</p> + +<p>“It will be dark in two hours, and we can make +just about six miles in that time without exerting +ourselves too much. We haven’t done much of anything +all day so if we want to let out a bit we can +tack on an extra mile in that time and so save ourselves +a bit of extra walking tomorrow. Let’s go.”</p> + +<p>Hitching up their packs, the trio of chums set +off at a brisk pace. The setting of the sun made it +much cooler and the walking was pleasant. They +passed through a small village and were well on the +outskirts where the houses were beginning to get +scattered, and they were deciding how far to proceed +before picking a spot to camp for the night +when they heard a call for help and the sounds of +a scuffle. In the gathering gloom they could not +see where the trouble was, but hastening towards +the spot from where the voices seemed to come, they +approached a bend in the road, and turning, saw two +men attacking a third.</p> + +<p>The attackers seemed to be rough specimens of +humanity, while the third was a young man, fairly +well dressed. This gave the affair the aspect of a +robbery instead of a quarrel among a lot of ruffians, +so calling his chums to hurry, Garry threw his rifle +to his shoulder and shouted to the attacking party +to throw up their hands.</p> + +<p>The surprised thugs took one look at the business-like +rifle in Garry’s hands, and then deciding that +they might perchance overpower him seemed to be +on the verge of rushing toward him when Phil and +Dick turned the bend in the road. Seeing that they +were outnumbered, and with no thought of the fact +that the boys might fire on them, they turned on +their heels and ran. Garry was about to send a shot +flying after them when the young man who had +been the subject of the attack called to Garry to let +them go.</p> + +<p>Just then he toppled over and fell at full length at +Garry’s feet.</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER III<br/>A NEW ALLY</h2> + +<p>Garry hastily unstrapped his canteen and unloosing +the stopper, poured some of the water on the +man’s face. At the same time, Dick, showing a surprising +amount of speed for one so undeniably stout, +sprang to help Garry and unloosed the man’s shirt +collar.</p> + +<p>In a few moments the man had been revived, and +when he had come to, Garry asked him if he had +been shot or stabbed or wounded in any way.</p> + +<p>“No,” replied the man weakly. “One of those +jacks hit me on the head with a club, and I guess I +just got groggy. I wonder if you boys could help +me home, I live a few hundred yards down the +road.”</p> + +<p>“Indeed we will, you wait just a moment and we +will improvise something to carry you on,” replied +Phil.</p> + +<p>“No, you won’t have to do that, just give me an +arm to lean on; that will do very nicely.”</p> + +<p>The boys did as he wished, and in a few minutes +of easy walking they came to a neat little cottage, set +back a few yards from the door with a number of +flower beds scattered over the little lawn.</p> + +<p>“Oh Grace,” called the man, and soon a pretty +young woman came to the door. When she saw +her husband, for so he proved to be, leaning on the +arm of Garry she flew down the path and asked anxiously +what was the matter.</p> + +<p>“Nothing at all. Just wait till we get in the house +and I will tell you all about it,” said the stranger. +Then turning to the boys, he asked them to come in.</p> + +<p>Anxious to hear what the cause of attack was, +and why the man had wanted the rascals to escape, +the trio accepted his invitation, and soon were sitting +in the attractive little living room of the cottage.</p> + +<p>“Now I suppose you boys who so kindly helped +me out of a nasty hole would like to know what +the whole business is about, wouldn’t you?” asked +the owner of the cottage.</p> + +<p>“We are rather curious,” answered Garry speaking +for the others.</p> + +<p>“My name is Howells, Arthur first name, generally +called Art by my friends, and I am a timber +scaler by occupation. I am scaling on the Boone cutting +a few miles from here, and the chaps who attacked +me were, until a few days ago, lumber jacks +employed on the cutting. One morning I found +them ‘spiking a tree,’ and forthwith sent a report +to the office with a demand that they be fired. For +that reason they met me tonight and attempted to +get satisfaction by giving me a sound beating. Perhaps +it would have been worse had you boys not +come along so opportunely. I don’t think they +would have murdered me, but could have easily put +me out of commission so that I could not work, and +that is one thing that I must do now of all times.”</p> + +<p>“But why did you want us to let them escape. +I should think you would have wanted them put +safely under lock and key for such an unwarranted +attack,” demanded Garry.</p> + +<p>“Yes, Arthur,” chimed in his wife. “I would +have had them arrested and given a good long sentence. +They might have killed you or crippled +you.”</p> + +<p>“There’s just one reason. One of them was Dave +Pingree, son of old Daddy Pingree who lives in +the village near here. You know the son is a worthless +scoundrel, but old Daddy has had so much +trouble that I didn’t want to bring any more on +him by having his son arrested, bad as he is, and +as richly as he deserves to be jailed. The other +one was a stranger to these parts, half breed Canadian +by the name of LeBlanc, who picked up Pingree +somewhere in the woods, and who has been +his constant companion for the past few weeks, at +least since the cutting operations of the Boone tract +were started,” concluded Howells.</p> + +<p>The three boys were so startled at the sound of +the name LeBlanc that they jumped to their feet +simultaneously and asked Howells to repeat the +name.</p> + +<p>“LeBlanc is the name. But why does that surprise +you so?” queried Mr. Howells in surprise.</p> + +<p>“What is his first name,” demanded Garry without +answering the question.</p> + +<p>“On the payroll he is listed as Baptiste.”</p> + +<p>“We did not get a very good look at him in the +dusk,” said Garry. “Would you mind describing +him for us, please. This is a peculiar situation, and +we will tell you about it after you have described +the man,” answered Garry rather agitatedly.</p> + +<p>“Why he is a swarthy chap about twenty-seven +or eight, just about the same age as Pingree. He +has black hair and mustache, and a jagged scar +on one side of his neck, probably a knife wound +from some lumber camp fight,” answered Howells.</p> + +<p>Garry sank back with a sigh of relief.</p> + +<p>“At any rate he is not the man we think he is. +The scar and the age settle that, although the rest +of the description fits him well enough to make him +a brother to Jean LeBlanc, the one man we do want +to run across in this neck of the woods,” replied +Garry.</p> + +<p>“Well, not that I want to raise any apprehension +on your part, or tell you something that is displeasing +to you, he is a brother of a man called Jean +LeBlanc. I happen to know that this is so, for one +night the lumberjacks were wrestling in front of +the bunkhouse and boasting about their exploits, +when this Baptiste came up and succeeded in throwing +several of the men with a rather vicious hold. +After he had thrown several of them he started +boasting about his brother Jean, who had taught +him the hold. I was standing at one side watching +the wrestling, which is how I happened to overhear +the matter. But why does the name of LeBlanc +bother you so?” he asked in conclusion.</p> + +<p>“That’s a rather long story,” answered Garry +“and perhaps I had better start by telling you our +names. These are my chums, Phil Durant and +Dick Wallace, while my name is Garfield Boone, +generally called Garry for short.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t suppose you are any relation to the Mr. +Boone who owns this tract where the summer logging +is going on are you? Most people of that +name in this state are somewhat related. In fact +I am a second or third cousin of his myself,” said +Howells with a smile.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I happen to be his son,” answered Garry.</p> + +<p>“Well, that is a coincidence. I suppose you are +going on to take a look at the cutting aren’t you. +This being your vacation time probably you are +camping and travelling around a bit,” and Howells +glanced at the knapsacks and rifles which the boys +had stacked near the door in the hall and which +could be plainly seen from the living room.</p> + +<p>Dick was about to say something when he caught +a meaning glance from Garry, which was also seen +by Phil, and which the boys interpreted as a desire +on the part of Garry to do any necessary explaining +that might have to be done.</p> + +<p>“Yes, we were in this vicinity and thought that +we would like to see how the experiment in summer +cutting was coming along,” he told Howells.</p> + +<p>“That’s fine, then I shall see you around there +a good deal as I am scaling. Of course coming +from a lumbering family, I don’t need to tell you +that scaling means measuring the timber that is cut. +I also do quite a bit of timber cruising, which, as +you know, means travelling through the cutting, +marking the trees that are fit to be cut. Your +father is very particular about his lumbering, and +he doesn’t do as many of the other timber owners +do, sweep clean through a tract of land, and make +it worthless as timber land for years to come. His +having certain trees marked for cutting means that +every year there will be a growth suitable to cut and +market and thus he is assured of a steady income +from his tracts.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps if you are not too busy every day, you +could show us something of the lumbering operations. +Although as you say, I come from a ‘lumber +family,’ I don’t know a great deal about timber +cutting. About the only time I have ever been at +the camps was at the spring drive, just to see the +fight for the river, and neither of my chums know +any more about it than I do. The first thing I +would like to know is what did you mean by ‘spiking +a tree’?” asked Garry.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know that I can explain that to you +without having you near a piece of big timber to +demonstrate what I mean, but I will try and tell +you as best I can. There is a certain way to cut a +tree, or rather there is a certain place where one always +starts to cut. This place is determined by the +diameter of the tree. If the tree is two feet thick, +the cutter measures up two feet from the ground +to start his cut. Of course he does not measure it +exactly, but long experience has taught him to estimate +almost within an inch where to start. You +know some trees are cut by axe; those are the +smaller ones, but the bigger ones are sawed nearly +all the way through, and then the axemen cut +through just enough with their axes to cause the +tree to break off and fall. ‘Spiking a tree’ means +to take an estimate where the sawyers will start, +and then drive several spikes in, using a nail set to +drive them into the tree out of sight. The hole +left will close up very rapidly, or a little dirt and +moss can be stuck in so cleverly as to defy detection.”</p> + +<p>“But what harm does that do? I suppose it might +kill the tree, but what difference does that make, +since it is going to be cut down directly?” quizzed +Phil who was an interested listener.</p> + +<p>“It doesn’t harm an old tree, but this is what it +does, or rather figure it out for yourselves. What +happens when the saw strikes three or four heavy +spikes, set in the tree just in the path of the blade?” +asked Howells.</p> + +<p>The truth flashed over the three boys in an instant, +and immediately they felt that they accomplished +one purpose of their mission to the woods. +They had discovered one of the reasons for the delay +in the cutting. If several saws were to be +spoiled that meant a delay in getting new ones.</p> + +<p>“Now here are two other things that a spike in +a tree will do. If spikes are driven in young trees, +several of them, that is trees that won’t be cut +for a few years, it means that it will cause the core +or heart of the tree to rot or break the grain. Then +when the tree is finally cut, a part of the lower +trunk, or best part of the tree for lumber purposes, +shatters just like so much glass when it falls. That’s +one thing a spike will do. Now here’s another +thing. Suppose that the mischief maker does not +drive his spikes in the tree where the cut will be +made, but climbs up twenty or thirty feet or so, +and drives a dozen or two in different parts of the +trunk of the tree. The tree trunk is cut safely and +then it is drawn to the sawmill where it is sawed +into planks. What happens when one of the big, expensive +circular saws rips through a dozen spikes? +It’s just goodbye to the saw and goodbye to a lot +of money, and means a delay of several minutes +until the saw can be replaced with another. And +when you are cutting timber on a time contract with +a penalty for every day’s delay overtime that you +take, a half an hour or so lost through trouble with +your sawmill means a big thing. Then there are +two other dangers. One is that the saw will fly off +and hurt the millmen when it hits the spikes, and +the other is that it sometimes will cause serious defects +in the entire machinery, so that instead of +just a few minutes’ delay to change saws, you waste +a day or maybe two in repairing the machinery. +So that’s that.” Howells concluded his long description +of all the trouble one little handful of spikes +could do, and then he looked rather searchingly at +the boys. Finally he seemed to have decided in his +own mind to say what he was thinking and he +looked at Garry.</p> + +<p>“I wonder if your father has any idea that +someone is trying to hurt his business? I don’t believe +for an instant that those two scoundrels were driving +those spikes just to make mischief. There is +something deeper than that behind the whole business. +There are scores of petty accidents occurring +every week that all mean delay. Sometimes when +the delays are totalled up they equal nearly half a +day, and in one summer that means a long delay, +a matter perhaps of two weeks. That two weeks +is sufficient to spoil the contract and take all the +profit away, but more than that, it means a loss of +capital invested, for I happen to know that your +father is cutting under a contract that provides a +heavy penalty for failure to deliver goods as they +are called for.”</p> + +<p>Garry debated with himself for a few moments, +wondering whether or not to take Howells into his +confidence and enlist his help. He realized that +Howells, if he were honest as he seemed, would be +an invaluable aid in discovering what the trouble at +the camp was. His knowledge of timbering was +extensive, Garry could see that with half an eye, +and Garry understood that he and his chums could +see lots of things happening right under their noses +and never guess the malicious significance of the +happenings.</p> + +<p>As he thought, Mrs. Howells settled the question +for him. Reaching down to one of the shelves +in the library table about which they were sitting, +she produced an album.</p> + +<p>“We are just old fashioned enough to have a family +album,” she laughed. “I thought perhaps you +would like to see a picture taken of your father a +great many years ago,” and turning to one of the +pages she showed Garry a picture that he recognized +immediately. It showed his father with a +sweet faced woman. “That is your father and Mr. +Howells’ mother. She was his favorite cousin and +she died a long time ago. This has always been in +Arthur’s possession.”</p> + +<p>Garry remembered having seen a counterpart of +the picture at home a long time ago, and he decided +that the timber sealer was not claiming any false +relationship.</p> + +<p>“I wonder how it is that we have never seen you +before,” he asked, turning to Howells.</p> + +<p>“Easy, we went west when I was a youngster, +and it was only this spring that we came back to +Maine. I did not say anything about my relationship, +for I want to go on my own hook. I am a graduate +of a forestry school, and I wanted to get actual +experience in the woods, which was why I asked +for and received the position of timber sealer. I +like to stand in my own shoes, and so I said nothing +about my relationship to the manager at the camp. +Then, too, I need money, as I have a small interest in +a little tract of young timber, and I am paying on +it a little at a time. By the time it is completely +paid for it will be ready to cut, and there will be a +handsome profit on the investment,” he answered.</p> + +<p>For a boy of his age, Garry was a pretty shrewd +judge of character, and he had been sizing up young +Howells while he was talking. So he made up his +mind to take him into his confidence in a limited +way, and so remarked:</p> + +<p>“Yes, my father does know that there is something +wrong at the camp, but he cannot put his +finger on the spot where the trouble is. Every time +he visits the camp things go along as smooth as +clockwork, but it is impossible to put in all this time +at this one thing when he has so many other irons +in the fire. We thought that perhaps we could visit +the camp for a while and find out what is wrong, +and report to him so that he could remedy the +trouble. But after hearing your story of the attempted +spiking, I am beginning to think that the +job is almost too much for us to handle. That +would have been something I would never have +dreamed of, and if the enemies in the camp, for enemies +there must be, know a trick like that, they must +have a bagfull of others of which we know nothing. +So you see that in a way we are helpless, and I am +going to ask that you aid us in this. I can promise +for my father that in case your aid is instrumental +in locating the trouble that it will not be forgotten. +What do you say? Will you help us?”</p> + +<p>“Indeed I will,” and Howells thrust forward his +hand. “You can count on me to the last ditch!”</p> + +<p>“Thanks,” said Garry as he took the proffered +hand. “Now there is one thing to do, and that is +to make sure that Baptiste LeBlanc is not in these +parts any more, for wherever the name of LeBlanc +gets hitched up with us there is trouble brewing!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER IV<br/>THE PERIL OF THE CIRCUS</h2> + +<p>Mrs. Howells pressed the boys to remain for +supper, saying they would find it much more pleasant +to eat in the house than to cook by the roadside +somewhere. It had got quite dark at this time, and +so they decided to accept the invitation so cordially +given.</p> + +<p>The fine meal was soon served, and as they ate, +Garry told of some of their adventures with Jean +LeBlanc, in order to explain why they were so +startled when that name was first mentioned by +Howells.</p> + +<p>Supper over they talked for some time and then +Garry proposed to his chums that they get their +packs and journey on for a bit till they could find +a place to throw their blankets for the night.</p> + +<p>The Howells protested vigorously at this, but +could offer them nothing as their cottage was not +large enough to accommodate them.</p> + +<p>The boys laughed and said they were so used to +sleeping in the open that it would never hurt them. +“If you are bound to sleep outdoors you can use +the back yard or you can spread your blankets on +the living room floor,” said Howells. “One can take +the couch there. You’ll have to toss for it, though.”</p> + +<p>After much pressure the boys decided to do this, +and accordingly goodnights were said. It was a +custom of the boys to draw lots to settle all arguments, +so hustling into the kitchen Garry raided +the broom of three straws of unequal length and +then brought them back for his chums to draw.</p> + +<p>Dick was the lucky chap to get the couch. With +a grin he spread his blankets and remarked to the +others that he hoped the floor would not be too hard.</p> + +<p>“What’s the diff?” inquired Phil. “There isn’t +much difference between the ground and a floor +and we aren’t in the woods so we can’t cut branches +to make one of nature’s mattresses with. Stop +your chatter. I’m off to sleep,” and indeed he was +in a few moments.</p> + +<p>To Garry however, sleep did not come so easily +for he was thinking of the events of the evening, +and wondering what he and his chums could do +to checkmate the schemes of the unknown enemies +that were causing all the trouble at the lumber camp. +But Garry was a healthy growing boy, and not to +be denied his sleep, so soon he consigned the cares +of the day to oblivion and in a few moments was +fast asleep.</p> + +<p>Howells was up before the boys, and started the +coffee, and in a few moments his wife was downstairs +and busying herself about the breakfast. They +let the boys sleep until it was almost ready, then +awoke them. The boys protested against all the +trouble they were causing their hosts, but their protests +were only half hearted for the smell of the +boiling coffee and the frying bacon were so tempting +that it would have taken a team of horses to +drive them away without eating.</p> + +<p>Breakfast over, they took their leave, first inquiring +about the way that lay ahead. They found that +they would go nearly twenty-five miles before coming +to another town, as the way ran through the +last of the farming country before striking the edge +of the big timber country.</p> + +<p>“The camp is ten miles or so beyond the village +that you will come to, and it will take you at least +a day to get to the village, so you will not reach +the camp until nearly noon of tomorrow. There’s +a good chance that you will get a lift, however, for +there is a circus there today, and you should find a +great many people on the road. Don’t be bashful +about hailing them and asking for a lift. It is a +customary thing to do in this part of the country. +I will see you in a couple of days, as I will go back +on duty at the camp then,” said Howells.</p> + +<p>“Just one thing if you don’t mind,” interposed +Garry. “When you come to the camp, do not let +on that you are already acquainted with us, because +if we are to work together we can do a lot better if +there is no inkling of our acquaintance.”</p> + +<p>“That’s a good idea, and that way it’ll be,” +agreed Howells.</p> + +<p>“What say, let’s take this in a hurry and see how +many miles we can cover this morning,” suggested +Dick.</p> + +<p>The others stopped short in their tracks.</p> + +<p>“Listen, Phil, unstrap your canteen while I feel +his pulse. There’s something the matter with Dick. +He wants to hurry. If it was later in the day I +would say that he had been a bit touched by the +sun, but it is early and cool, and I think he is just +sick,” said Garry solicitously.</p> + +<p>“Lazy Dick wants to hurry!” ejaculated Phil in +amazement. “What’s the big idea?”</p> + +<p>Dick turned red and lunged at his chums. He +was used to their ragging him on account of his +willingness to take the easiest way of doing things. +Of course they knew that he never shirked his duty +when called upon, and they never questioned his +bravery at any time, but he always got so fussed +when they ragged him about his weight and his +easy way of taking life, that they never let an opportunity +pass to tease him about it. After a short +scuffle, they stopped laughing and Garry said:</p> + +<p>“Seriously, Dick, why do you want to hurry? +We are well up on our schedule and you don’t need +to rush like mad.”</p> + +<p>“I just wanted to see what we could do if we +had to,” said Dick; “and furthermore, I wanted to +show you for once that I could walk as fast and as +long as either of you chaps, that’s all. Let’s go.”</p> + +<p>Dick set off at a swinging pace, and kept it up. +The boys fell in and kept pace with him, thinking +that he would soon tire of it; but when they had +covered three miles, and Dick had not abated a whit +his speed, Garry and Phil saw that he was in earnest. +Not to be outdone by him, they bent to their +walking and made excellent time. They were passing +a barn, when suddenly Garry stopped dead +short, gave a shout and then fell to laughter with +all his might. This time it was Dick’s turn to +assume a sarcastic attitude, and make side remarks +to Phil. Finally when Garry had controlled his +laughter so that he could speak, he said to Phil:</p> + +<p>“What do you think of me for a regular little +Sherlock Holmes? I’ve found out why Dick is trying +to set a pedestrian record this morning. Just +look at that barn!”</p> + +<p>Phil took one look at the glaring posters pasted +on the wall, then gave a shout.</p> + +<p>“Aha, the boy wants to go to the circus!”</p> + +<p>“Marvelous,” grunted Dick. “Own up, wouldn’t +you fellows like to see it yourself?”</p> + +<p>The boys teased him for a few minutes, then +they perceived that there was method in Dick’s +madness and they decided that it would be good fun +to see the circus if they could get there on time.</p> + +<p>“Only reason I wanted you chaps to hurry a little +was because I figured that if we covered a good +number of miles we would get to a point where people +would be on the way to the circus and we could +get a lift and arrive in time to see the show this +afternoon. Then we could get another start right +after it let out, and so fix it as to arrive at the camp +fairly early in the morning, covering our last ten +miles while it was early and cool,” he explained.</p> + +<p>“That’s pretty good dope at that, Dick. Let’s +go. We’ll see the circus and not waste any time +doing it, either.” And Garry set the pace as he finished +talking.</p> + +<p>They stopped at noon and prepared a hasty lunch +by the side of the road, after Dick had stopped at +a farm house and had his canteen filled with fresh +milk.</p> + +<p>By this time scores of automobiles and teams +were on the road, but practically every one of them +was filled to overflowing with adults and children, +all presumably bound for the circus. Finishing +their meal, they rested fifteen minutes, then Garry, +glancing at his watch, remarked: “We have still +ten miles to go, and it is now half-past twelve. The +circus probably begins at half-past two, so that unless +we get a ride we won’t get there in time to see +the show. We couldn’t cover the ten miles in two +hours, especially after having come as far as we +have this morning.”</p> + +<p>“I’m going to see that circus, though, even if we +have to wait for the evening performance,” announced +Dick. “What do you fellows think?”</p> + +<p>“I guess it would be all right,” answered Garry. +“There is no life or death matter to make us arrive +early in the morning at the camp, so we might as +well take it easy for the rest of the way.” Luck was +with them, however, for they had gone little more +than a mile when they heard a car coming behind +them. It proved to contain only a single occupant +who, as he neared the boys, slowed down and asked +if they did not want a ride. They were unanimous +in their answer.</p> + +<p>“On the way to the circus?” asked the driver.</p> + +<p>“We’re going beyond that, but we thought that +we would stop and see it if we reached there on +time, otherwise we would have seen the evening +performance.”</p> + +<p>“Lucky thing that I came along and happen to +be going to that place myself then,” chuckled the +driver, “for there isn’t going to be any evening +show. You see I happen to be connected with the +circus, and we have such a long jump for tomorrow’s +show that we cannot give a performance here +tonight.”</p> + +<p>“Good thing you came along then, for if we had +walked all this distance for nothing, I would have +given up in disgust,” remarked Dick.</p> + +<p>“How far have you come?” asked the circus +man.</p> + +<p>“We left Hilton this morning,” answered Garry.</p> + +<p>The driver looked somewhat incredulous at this +statement, then sizing up the appearance of the +boys, who were wearing their customary khaki +semi-uniform that they used as Rangers in the forest, +decided that they were hiking for the summer +and probably used to walking good distances in a +short time.</p> + +<p>“What are you chaps doing, walking across the +state or something?”</p> + +<p>Garry explained that they were forest rangers +off duty temporarily and were bound for a lumber +camp to pay it a visit.</p> + +<p>As they drove along they asked several questions +about the circus and circus life, and considerably +amused the man by referring to many things in a +way that circus people did not. The circus man told +them of the many strange phrases employed by circus +people, and the boys learned much of the talk +of the circus.</p> + +<p>They found, for instance, that circus people never +speak of the tent. It is always called a top. There +are the big top and the little tops. The only thing +on the circus lot to be called a tent is the cook tent.</p> + +<p>Several of the names applied to the performers +were amusing. A clown is always called a joy, and +if he is a new man with the circus he is called a +First of May, because it is on that date that many +contracts are made in the circus. Acrobats are +called kinkers, and the people who do work on the +high trapeze are called casters, and their work is +called a casting act.</p> + +<p>“Then there is the high diver, only we call it a +tank diving act. You won’t see that this afternoon, +for the diver fell a couple of days ago and broke his +arm. Funny; he’s been diving forty feet into an +eight foot tank for several years, and never got a +scratch, and then he slips on a banana peeling and +breaks his arm. It’s too bad, too, for the diving act +always goes big in these small towns. I’d give +twenty-five dollars for a diver this afternoon,” concluded +the man.</p> + +<p>“Hand over the twenty-five,” said Dick suddenly.</p> + +<p>“What do you mean,” asked the circus man in +surprise.</p> + +<p>“Just that you give me the twenty-five dollars +and I’ll do your high dive for you this afternoon.”</p> + +<p>The circus man looked at the other two boys as +if he doubted his ears, and Garry and Phil immediately +assured them that Dick was a first class swimmer +and diver.</p> + +<p>“Forty feet is not so much to Dick. He’s often +done better than that in the river at home,” Garry +told the circus man.</p> + +<p>“Yes, but you want to remember that this is an +eight foot square tank, and only eight feet deep,” +he told Dick.</p> + +<p>“That’s nothing, I’ll turn easily in eight feet. +Have done it in a little less,” Dick assured him.</p> + +<p>“All right. I’ll take you to see the owner when +we get there, and he and you can fix things up. +He’ll be glad to pay you that amount for the work, +for it’s a big attraction and we have advertised it a +lot. That’s my business with the circus—to do the +advertising.”</p> + +<p>In a little less than half an hour they had arrived +at the circus lot, and true to his word, the advertising +man carried Dick round to the ticket wagon and +introduced him to the manager and owner.</p> + +<p>It took Dick but a short time to convince the +owner that he could dive, particularly when he +offered to give an exhibition for him before the +show started. The only thing that the manager +insisted on was that Dick sign a statement relieving +the circus from any responsibility in case any +accident occurred.</p> + +<p>Dick readily signed this, and then promising to +be back in a short time to get some tights and get +dressed, they wandered around the lot. They left +their rifles and knapsacks in the ticket wagon, but +Garry kept his lariat with him.</p> + +<p>“What’s the idea?” asked Phil.</p> + +<p>“There’s very little chance of anything happening, +but I don’t want any of those riders to walk +off with this lariat by mistake,” he replied.</p> + +<p>This decided the boys to keep theirs with them +also, and accordingly they slung them over one +shoulder. Several curious glances were cast at +them as they wandered from show to show. The +owner had given them passes to everything, and +they didn’t waste any of them.</p> + +<p>Soon a bugle was heard blowing and in a moment +they met the advertising man who informed them +that called all the performers to be ready in a few +moments. “Your act will be the fourth on the program, +so you’d better go and get your togs on and +be ready,” he told Dick.</p> + +<p>Garry and Phil elected to go to their seats and +watch their chum do his act with the rest of the +spectators.</p> + +<p>“I’ll come and hunt you up as soon as I do the +dive and collect that twenty-five good old dollars. +I can use it very nicely one of these days,” Dick +said as he turned to follow the circus man to the +dressing place.</p> + +<p>While the circus was a small one, it boasted of +rather better things than the average road circus, +and among other things was a fairly good menagerie. +Garry and Phil looked at all the animals as +they passed through to the “big top.”</p> + +<p>Two cages contained unusually fine specimens of +lions, and near one was a caretaker, waiting for the +lions to be taken into the big performing cage, after +which he would clean the cage and have it ready on +the shaggy maned animal’s return from the ring.</p> + +<p>“Wicked looking beast, isn’t he,” Garry remarked +to the man who stood near the cage.</p> + +<p>“He is that, boss,” answered the man. “He’s a +a new one, and we don’t know him very well. We +had a nice old chap before him, too old and tired +and toothless to do any harm, but this one is young +and vicious. The trainer has a lot of trouble with +him, too.”</p> + +<p>A sound of band music made the boys hurry to +their seats, and soon the “Grand entry” was on.</p> + +<p>Several of the usual acts were put on, and then +razorbacks, as the circus workers are called, pulled +away some of the planking of the platform in the +center of the arena, disclosing a tank filled with +water.</p> + +<p>Soon the boys espied Dick advancing to the platform, +his chubby body enclosed in a glaring red +bathing suit. He mounted to the tank, and the +chums could see him gazing about trying to locate +them, but this he failed to do.</p> + +<p>The ringmaster made a short speech, telling a lot +of stuff about Dick that made the chums grin.</p> + +<p>“Guess one has to be a blood relation of Ananias +to be a ringmaster,” laughed Garry. “The only +diving Dick has ever done before the crowned +heads of Europe was before they were crowned.”</p> + +<p>After the laudatory speech, Dick climbed up the +high ladder and stood perched on the little square +platform at the top. As he had been told to do +outside the big top, he dropped a handkerchief +which slowly fluttered down to the ground below. +This is an old trick of high divers and is done +merely to accentuate the distance.</p> + +<p>Then the drummer started a long ruffle, and casting +one downward look, Dick tipped off the platform. +Both Phil and Garry were just a trifle nervous +as he leaped, although they were well aware +of his ability.</p> + +<p>But Dick hit the water as clean as a knife, and it +was only a matter of seconds before he appeared on +the surface of the water and climbed out dripping. +A mighty round of applause was given not only for +the fact that he had made a fine dive, but his youth +made him popular with the audience.</p> + +<p>The acts went on, and in a little while Dick came +wandering into the tent. The boys hailed him as +he neared the place where they were sitting, and in +a trice he had climbed up the rattling board seats to +a place beside his chums.</p> + +<p>“Well, I got my twenty-five, and we’ll have a +party with it some time. Also, I received an offer +to stay with the circus, which, naturally, I turned +down. So you see, Phil, you are not the only one +to have jobs offered them.” He alluded to the time +that a big league baseball scout had offered a contract +to Phil after seeing him pitch one game at +Commencement time at high school in his home +town. The music stopped and the ringmaster made +his customary speech about the next act, which was +the lion taming act.</p> + +<p>The music had just started again, when there +was a piercing shriek from a woman, and then some +one screamed:</p> + +<p>“The lion is loose!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER V<br/>EXTRA ENEMIES</h2> + +<p>Hundreds of people joined in the shrieking, and +a stampede from the seats started. Scores were +trampled. The music had stopped for an instant +until the leader, true to tradition, called the men to +order, and the musicians swung into a stirring +march. Circus hands, aided by the performers who +were on the platforms and in the rings, ran to the +sides of the tracks and endeavored to keep the people +in their seats.</p> + +<p>The three chums were aghast for a minute, then +Phil and Dick instinctively turned to Garry to see +what he would do. Garry had taken one look and +saw the beast at the far end of the tent, lashing his +tail and surveying the crowd, as though making up +its mind as to what course to pursue.</p> + +<p>The boys saw that Garry was hastily slipping his +lasso from his shoulder, and in a moment they had +understood what he was going to attempt, and followed +suit.</p> + +<p>“Now fellows, let’s try it. We may save a lot +of lives. I’ll try for his head, and you two try for +a foot each. I think we can catch him all right. +Let’s go!” and Garry led the way.</p> + +<p>Calling to everyone to sit still as they ran, and +swinging their lariats over their heads, they struggled +to the ground. Several people seeing them +make their way there, thought that it was perhaps +a part of the circus, and began to shout to each +other that it was a feature of the program. The +sight of the three boys making their way fearlessly +toward the beast did more than anything else to +quiet the people. Many sat back in their seats, +although others were escaping under the canvas +wall of the tent.</p> + +<p>It was to Phil, however, that the greatest honor +was to come. As he ran, swinging one arm, his +hand hit against a pocket in his coat, and he felt a +hard lump within. In an instant he remembered +that he bought pepper the day before to replenish +the condiment can that he generally carried in his +knapsack, but had not thought to take it out and +transfer the contents from the package to the can. +He reached into his pocket and brought out the can. +Hastily opening the top, he kept on his way toward +the lion, holding the package out in front of him. +The chums approached within a few feet of the +lion, who was showing signs of springing suddenly +at them. The effect of the boys’ advance on him +was to make him forget the crowds and center all +his attention on those that were nearest him—the +chums.</p> + +<p>The boys stopped short and were swinging their +lariats, when suddenly Phil darted ahead almost up +to the lion, and, with a well directed aim, emptied +the contents of the pepper package straight on the +eyes of the lion.</p> + +<p>The infuriated beast gave a roar of pain and +sprang, then fell to earth and stuck a great paw into +his eyes, as though to rub away the torturing stuff +that was blinding him.</p> + +<p>Garry, quick-witted, divined what Phil had done, +and at the same moment that the lion struck the +ground, ran forward and threw the noose of the +lariat over the animal’s head.</p> + +<p>The animal was nearly helpless, owing to its inability +to see, and in another moment the boys had +the rest of their lariats noosed about his feet.</p> + +<p>By this time the trainer and a number of the circus +helpers had arrived on the scene, and, dashing +in, they tied the lariats securely about the animal’s +feet.</p> + +<p>The crowd seeing that the animal was securely +fastened and helpless, first breathed a sigh of relief +and then became suddenly quiet. Many still thought +it was a part of the program, but a majority felt +sure that it was a striking piece of bravery that they +had just witnessed.</p> + +<p>Then cheer on cheer rolled through the tent, as +the audience applauded the brave trio of chums. All +the foregoing had taken much less time than the +minutes necessary to describe it. In a moment the +owner came puffing on the scene, and when he saw +who had accomplished the capture, he was speechless +for the moment.</p> + +<p>Then he said to the chums, as they stood watching +the animal being loaded into its cage:</p> + +<p>“This is twice today that you boys have done me +a good turn, but this second time far outmatches +the first. Will you please come back to the ticket +wagon with me.” Then to the menagerie head, +who had joined them: “I’d like you to come, too, +please, Jones.”</p> + +<p>The little group made its way to the ticket office, +where the owner first asked for an account of how +the beast had made its escape.</p> + +<p>“The only man who can tell you that is the roustabout +who cleans the animal’s cage. He was gashed +by the lion evidently as its escape was being made, +and that and very likely a heart stroke killed him +quickly. I think perhaps he thought it was near +time for the transfer to the arena cage to be made +and had unlocked the cage door, and the lion +pushed its way out, sir,” said Jones.</p> + +<p>The manager was silent for a moment. Then +he said:</p> + +<p>“No one can know how sorry I am that the man +lost his life, but I am thankful that the lion did no +other damage, either by starting a great panic or +by attacking some one of the audience. As for you +boys, I propose to make you a substantial reward.”</p> + +<p>“I assure you, sir,” began Garry, “we have no +thought of any reward for doing what we did. It +was luck on our part that enabled us to lasso him, +and we get our satisfaction in knowing that we perhaps +saved a great many lives.”</p> + +<p>“I hope you will accept something as a recompense +for your services. Had the lion done great +damage, I would have had to pay out many thousands +of dollars,” insisted the owner.</p> + +<p>“Let us ask you one question first. Was the +workman that was killed a family man?” asked +Garry.</p> + +<p>“I can tell you that in a minute.” Turning to the +ticket seller, he told him to look the man up. A +record of all the workers with their home addresses +was kept in a card index and in a moment the ticket +seller had ascertained that the dead man had a wife +living in a small town in New York State.</p> + +<p>“Of course we will take care of the widow, as +we have every worker insured, and then the +management always adds to the insurance,” said the +head of the circus.</p> + +<p>“Then I wish that you would just take whatever +you had thought of offering us in the way of a +reward and add to the amount. I think my chums +agree with me that this is the best thing that could +be done. Is that right?” and Garry turned to his +friends. Both Dick and Phil were emphatic in their +agreement.</p> + +<p>“Well, if that is the way you boys feel about it, +I will do so, but I will find some way to show you +that I appreciate the great service that you have +done me.”</p> + +<p>The owner asked them several other questions +and took their names and addresses, and again he +offered to take the boys along with them on the +tour. Of course they refused, explaining that they +were of the Ranger Service of the State and were +only on detached duty at the time.</p> + +<p>They remained for supper at the cook tent, and +watched the circus torn down and loaded in the +teams preparatory to travelling to the next stop.</p> + +<p>After a hearty goodbye from the manager and +owner they took their leave, and hiking beyond the +town spread their blankets for the night.</p> + +<p>They woke with the rising of the sun, and building +a fire soon had coffee, spider bread and bacon +going, and made a hearty breakfast.</p> + +<p>“According to my reckoning we are about ten +miles from the camp, and the woods will begin in +about a mile or two, so we had better get going. It +is now six o’clock and with three hours of easy hiking +we will make our destination,” said Garry. +“Now I think we ought to hold a council of war +as to how we shall conduct ourselves when we get +to the camp. I think it best that we just go to the +manager and tell him we are going to camp there +for awhile, either right at the lumber camp, or a +short distance in the woods. Of course we shall +give no inkling of the nature of our visit, not even +to the manager, at least until we have sized him up. +To my mind, everyone will be under suspicion until +he has proven that the suspicion is unfounded. We +can go all over the camp and keep our eyes open, +getting all the information we can. When we ask +questions we should ask them simply as though it +were from idle curiosity. I figure that in a short +time we ought to be able to tell who is acting suspiciously +and then bend all our efforts to watch +them and frustrate any mischief that they may be +up to. We shall, of course, get a lot of help from +Howells when he arrives, but even then I think we +ought to do everything possible ourselves to find +out what is the trouble at the camp.”</p> + +<p>They walked steadily but easily, and true to their +reckoning arrived at the camp a little after nine +o’clock. The boys looked about them curiously. +There were only three buildings, built of logs. One, +the smallest, was evidently the officers’ bunkhouse +and offices; the other was apparently the cookhouse, +for the boys could see a youth sitting on an upturned +tub in front of the door peeling potatoes, and +a thin wisp of smoke issued from the chimney. +Since it was mid-summer and hot, there would be +no need for a stove in any place but the kitchen. +The third house was a long, low log affair, bigger +by far than either of the others. This they decided +was the bunk house, where the lumberjacks lived.</p> + +<p>They made their way to the office and inquired +for the manager. On hearing the word “manager,” +a thin, sharpfaced man approached them, and giving +them a hasty glance, said in a sharp tone:</p> + +<p>“If you’re here to ask for permission to camp on +this tract you’re out of luck. This is a lumber operation +and not a free camp site for every fool from +the city.”</p> + +<p>“Just a minute, please. Hadn’t you better find out +our business before you make up your mind as to +what you will or won’t do?” asked Garry, as an +angry red flush overspread his face. Garry was an +extremely civil boy, and expected others to be the +same, and when he received uncourteous attention +was apt to resent it deeply.</p> + +<p>“Well, what do you want?” asked the manager, +still in an ungracious tone.</p> + +<p>“My name is Boone, and the owner of these cuttings +happens to be my father. Didn’t you get a +letter from him telling of our expected arrival?”</p> + +<p>A great change came over the manner of the +manager. A smirking smile took the place of the +frown and he advanced with outstretched hand.</p> + +<p>“I hope you will pardon me. I have been bothered +to death for the past few days by summer +campers asking to pitch tents and build cabins and +what not on the cutting, and I thought from your +appearance that you boys were more of the same +tribe,” he said with an attempt to smooth out the +awkward situation and make up by a show of cordiality +the blunder he realized he had made.</p> + +<p>Privately, Garry thought him very ill-mannered +and felt he should have made more inquiries before +showing his temper. Still he said nothing and +accepted the hand of the manager, who said his +name was Barrows.</p> + +<p>Garry then introduced his chums and explained +that they intended to stay awhile and camp somewhere +in the vicinity and watch the lumbering as +well as getting some fishing.</p> + +<p>“I understand that there are two lakes in the +neighborhood,” remarked Garry, “and so we ought +to get some good fishing.” At the mention of the +word lakes, Barrows looked sharply at the boys, +then said:</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes, you will get plenty of fishing, but you +will find that the small lake to the west of here is +better than the big one that lies to the north of us. +The state stocked the little lake sometime ago by +special request of your father, and I hear there are +some very good bass and pickerel to be found there. +The reports about the larger lake are not so encouraging. +Also there are two or three small streams,—brooks +perhaps it would be better to call them,—where +you will find some excellent trout. Then at +the small lake there is a good stretch of sandy beach +where you can swim whenever you want to. Altogether +you will find the small lake is the most likely +place for a summer playground.”</p> + +<p>For a moment Garry wondered at the insistence +of the manager in always bringing the “small” lake +into the conversation, but dismissed the matter with +the thought that the manager was simply trying to +make amends for his ungraciousness of the previous +moment by showing them where they could best enjoy +themselves. Later he was to find that he was +mistaken.</p> + +<p>The manager asked them what they intended to +do for living quarters. “I am sorry that I can’t +offer you quarters in the bunkhouse here, but they +are just built to accommodate the officers of the +camp; that is myself, the sealer, the timekeeper +and the bookkeeper. Of course you would not want +to live in the bunkhouse with the men, for they are +a rough lot. All I can suggest is that we makeshift +for you some way and I will send to town and dig +up a tent for you.”</p> + +<p>“If you will just loan us an axe apiece, and tell +us which spot we can cut a little timber from, we +can throw ourselves up a cabin in a short time, so +don’t bother about a tent. If necessary we can sleep +in the open till we get our shack fixed up,” answered +Garry.</p> + +<p>“Why, I can do better than that. I can let you +have a couple or three men to help you and do the +work if you can direct them as to the kind of cabin +you want.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t want to take any of the men away from +their work,” Garry told him, “but if we could have +two or three for a few minutes to help us throw up +the cabin after we cut the stuff it would help +greatly.”</p> + +<p>“I will go and mark out some of the trees that +you can cut. There is a small growth here that +isn’t exceptionally good lumber, it's rather scrubby, +but will do very well for a cabin. I’ll have to go +myself, for I left the cruiser go a few days to do +some business he had waiting him, and I have been +scaling myself. In fact I do that often. Whenever +he is cruising to mark trees for cutting I do the +measuring and that saves a lot of time, also it saves +the pay of an extra man. You ought to have a +good bit done by noontime and then after dinner I +will detail a couple of men to help you,” and the +manager led the way to the cookhouse, where there +were several extra axes.</p> + +<p>When they arrived at the cookhouse, they looked +about with quite a bit of curiosity. Two great +ranges stood at one end of the kitchen, and on one +of the ranges were two enormous kettles. The boys +could smell appetizing pea soup and judged that one +of the kettles contained this.</p> + +<p>The cook was an enormous man with a pair of +fierce black moustaches, and the one man on the +whole range who was regarded as being just a little +bit better than the boss or even the owner of the +timber tract. Lumberjacks always took care never +to pick a quarrel with him, and this went the same +for the manager and the camp officers.</p> + +<p>This is the same in every logging camp, for a +cook can pay up any grievances by cooking the food +in an inferior fashion. Camp owners and managers +always pay the greatest attention to the sort of man +they pick for this position, for while in a lumber +camp, there is never a widely varied menu, it must +be well cooked and plentiful.</p> + +<p>Nothing will drive the men away from a camp +quicker than poor cooking.</p> + +<p>The manager introduced the boys to the cook, +who shook hands with them, offering a hairy hand +which the chums privately thought resembled a +ham. For all his fierce looks he proved to be a +genial chap, and the three boys wondered whether +he was one of the ring of trouble makers or not. +They reserved any decision in their own minds to +await future developments, but they had decided +that everyone was under suspicion until he proved +that he was clear of any blame in the mysterious +occurrences that retarded progress at the lumber +camp.</p> + +<p>In every camp there is a cookee, as the helper to +the cook is universally called. His duty is to peel +potatoes, wash dishes, wait on the table—rather +set the tables than wait, for everything is piled on +at the beginning of the meal, and the only helping +that is done is when a dish has to be re-filled.</p> + +<p>The cookee was a surly looking chap of about +twenty-one years of age. He was slight of build +and had violent red hair. He just mumbled a word +or two when he was introduced, and went on with +his work, which was slicing bread for the dinner +hour that was near at hand. Garry and his friends +mentally put him down as one that might bear +watching as soon as they had located themselves.</p> + +<p>While the manager was asking the cook about +borrowing a couple of the axes that were stacked +in the corner, a black-browed chap came to the door +and asked for a pail of water to take out to where +several of the men were trimming trees. The +cookee brought the water and stepped outside with +the man. Garry and Phil were talking with the +manager and the cook, but Phil happened to be +standing near the door.</p> + +<p>He heard the sound of talking in the French +language and strained his ears to catch what was +being said. Phil was not eavesdropping because of +a natural desire to do so; it was merely that he was +on the watch every moment for a possible clue that +would lead them to the solution that they were in +quest of,—the riddle of the mishaps at the lumber +camp.</p> + +<p>What Phil heard was this:</p> + +<p>“Baptiste will be at the usual place at midnight +tonight.”</p> + +<p>Phil determined then and there that he would be +at the rendezvous, wherever it was, and hear what +transpired. He could hardly wait to get the others +with him so that he could impart to them the information +that he had just overheard.</p> + +<p>He hoped that something else would be said, but +at this moment the cook called for his helper, who +came hustling back into the shanty, and went about +preparing for the serving of the dinner.</p> + +<p>Phil went back to join his chums just in time to +hear the manager say:</p> + +<p>“Unless you boys want the fun of throwing up a +log house, I would suggest a much easier and +quicker way. You can cut enough poles for the +supports of the house, and then I’ll have some +sawed boards brought to the spot. Also there is +some tarred paper here that was brought here when +the camp started just for such an emergency. That +would mean that you could be all located before +nightfall. As for heat, I have a Sibley stove, one +of those small ones such as they use in army camps +for tents, that will do very well. It isn’t likely that +you will want it often, for we are in the hottest part +of the summer, and only on a cold, wet night will +you require heat. You won’t be here such a long +time, I presume, and we are in for a spell of good +weather according to the cook here, who is the camp +weather prophet.”</p> + +<p>Garry thought for a moment, and wondered what +made the manager presume they would be there +only a short time. He was anxious to get going +about the camp as soon as possible and see what +there was to pick up in the way of information, so +he decided that the board house would do as well as +one built entirely of logs.</p> + +<p>“That is a fine suggestion and we will accept. +Building a hut is nothing new to us, and we are +anxious to begin fishing and wandering about, so if +you will show us where we can cut enough good +heavy saplings for supports, we will start right at +it. We can have them cut and in place before dinner +and then the men can bring us the boards after +dinner and we will be all shipshape by nightfall,” +said Garry.</p> + +<p>“I think that is the best thing to do,” the manager +answered. “It is about an hour to dinner time, +and you will have ample time to do all that can be +done this forenoon.”</p> + +<p>So saying, Barrows led the way to a spot near +the camp, where there was a clump of saplings that +were not big enough to be used for sawed lumber.</p> + +<p>“You might as well pitch your shanty here as +anywhere, and it will save you from dragging your +saplings to any great distance. I’ll gash each of the +saplings that you will need. You will only want +ten as I figure it.”</p> + +<p>“No, we will want twelve so that we may have a +window,” interposed Garry.</p> + +<p>“That’s a fact,” answered the manager, looking +sharply at Garry. “I see that you know rather a +bit about shanty building. Do you know much about +logging operations? I suppose you do, however, +since you are of a family that has always made logging +a business.”</p> + +<p>Garry felt that the manager was asking this question +for a purpose, but he promptly answered:</p> + +<p>“No, we know very little about logging, surprising +as that may seem, since as you say it ought to +run in the blood. About the only thing we understand +about timbering operations is the log drive in +the spring. We were up once to watch the fight for +the river, and had a mighty exciting time, but the +entire business is something new to all of us.”</p> + +<p>Garry finished speaking and then looked sharply +but guardedly at Barrows. He thought he noticed +a relieved expression on the face of the manager.</p> + +<p>The three boys set about felling the saplings, +swinging their axes with a sure arm and hand. +Barrows lingered to watch them at work, although +Phil was on tenterhooks to have him get away in +order that he might impart to his chums the information +that he had gained from the sentence he +had overheard at the cook shanty.</p> + +<p>The poles being cut, four of them were erected +in an upright manner to form the main support of +the house. At the tops of these, four more were +placed horizontally to support the roof. Then in +the center of the front, two were erected to form the +sides of the door, while at a side two others, in vertical +position, allowed the making of a window.</p> + +<p>Still the manager made no show of leaving until +fortunately for Phil, who would have almost exploded +had he been forced to keep silent any longer, +he was called by the red headed cookee.</p> + +<p>“Now quick fellows, while I have a chance to tell +you. I have found one of the traitors in the camp; +it is the cookee. He is going to meet some one tonight +to hatch something out, and you chaps have +one guess as to who it is.”</p> + +<p>“Barrows?” hazarded Dick.</p> + +<p>“Wrong. Baptiste LeBlanc!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER VI<br/>THE LUMBER CAMP</h2> + +<p>“The LeBlancs again!” exploded Garry. “I +thought that we had seen the last of that outfit. It +seems that we are destined to run afoul of them. +Fortunately this Baptiste does not know about us, +unless he has run across his brother lately. That +does not seem likely, for Jean is safely beyond the +border still. There are few places where he is safe, +for he is wanted in several different parts of the +state. Still we must not take anything for granted. +We probably were seen by Baptiste when we were +instrumental in saving Howells from a bad beating +or worse the other night.”</p> + +<p>“How are we going to find out where the rendezvous +is tonight?” asked Dick.</p> + +<p>“It seems to me that the best thing to do is to +keep watch of the red headed cookee; that is, you +two chaps do that, while I will watch for the man +that told him of the appointment. You boys +haven’t seen him, so you cannot keep on his trail. +You can take turns keeping in the vicinity of the +cookee. If possible you might try and make acquaintance +with him, although I doubt if you will +go very far, since he seems to be a surly sort of a +chap. Still, there’s no harm in trying. When it +comes time for the meeting, I should say that it +would be best only for me to follow them. I can +understand what they are saying, and one of us +could follow unobserved, where three would be +spotted in a minute. You chaps can plead to being +tired after your hike and the work of building the +shack, and that will give us a chance to get to the +new shanty early, and so be unobserved.”</p> + +<p>At that moment they heard the sound of a tin +pan being vigorously beaten with a stick, and immediately +Dick set up a shout:</p> + +<p>“There’s the dinner signal, or my ears and stomach +fail me.”</p> + +<p>“For once I am ready to eat a good big meal. +You are not the only one with an appetite today, +Dick,” said Garry, and the three raced for the +cookhouse.</p> + +<p>As they neared the cook tent, they saw the lumberjacks +piling towards the place to eat. They were +a sizable group of men, brawny of arm and large of +frame.</p> + +<p>Most of them gave the boys a curious glance as +they flocked into the shanty. The boys thought +that they were to eat in the common dining room, +but found that they were to eat in a separate room +that had been partitioned off from the large room. +Here ate the manager, the timekeeper and cashier, +and when he was present, the timber scaler.</p> + +<p>The food that was served them was the same as +that given the men. Barrows explained this by saying +that it kept the men in a better humor if they +knew that the bosses were getting the same fare as +they.</p> + +<p>“Lumberjacks are just like so many children,” +Barrows said. “They are always on the lookout +for something to quarrel about, and are almost as +temperamental as grand opera stars. Just now +work is scarce, so they keep better behaved; but in +the winter time, when all the camps are going full +blast, you have to be careful and treat them properly, +else they will simply depart for some city +where there is a woods agency and be sent off to +another camp. That is one of the evils of lumbering, +the agencies. They often try to breed trouble +in the camps so that the men will quit. Then they +pack them off to another logging tract and collect +a commission from the camp owner for furnishing +him with men. If this was winter I would think +that was what was the trouble here.”</p> + +<p>Garry looked up in surprise. He had no idea +that Barrows would admit that everything was not +as it should be at the camp.</p> + +<p>He knew that the eyes of the manager were on +him, nevertheless he felt that an answer was expected +of him, or rather a question.</p> + +<p>“Why, is there anything the trouble at this camp? +From what I’ve seen I should say that everyone +was working busily and everything was lovely.”</p> + +<p>At this the manager brightened up considerably. +It seemed to be that this was the kind of a remark +that he was looking for, and he made haste to +answer:</p> + +<p>“Oh, there is nothing radically wrong here, I +only meant that occasionally there seemed to be a +sort of dissatisfied air on the part of the men, but it +may only be worry on my part.”</p> + +<p>Garry was certain that the entire conversation +was brought about in a manner to delve into the +feelings of the boys, and see how they regarded +everything. Garry did not believe that their mission +was penetrated, but thought that the guilty +conscience of the manager would make him see an +enemy in every person he did not know.</p> + +<p>The dinner was plain but good. It consisted of +pea soup, potatoes, some roasted beef, and coffee. +The fare at a lumber camp is anything but varied. +The aforementioned articles, roast pork, stew and +beans, with either white bread baked at the camp, +or great slabs of johnny cake with molasses in lieu +of syrup was the general thing. Coffee was served +at every meal.</p> + +<p>“For breakfast we have bacon and toast and +coffee in our dining room, because the men have all +eaten and started for work by the time we are ready +for breakfast,” said Barrows. “Now we will go +into the other room, and I will give you boys a general +introduction to the men. That will save you +any annoyance when you go about the camp.”</p> + +<p>He led the way into the larger room, and stepping +on a bench announced:</p> + +<p>“Men, these three boys are going to camp here +for awhile. This one,” pointing to Garry, “is the +son of the owner. The other two are his friends. +I wanted you to meet them so that you may do all +you can to make their visit here a good one.”</p> + +<p>Garry thought to himself, “Yes, you are also +showing us to those in your crew so they will watch +their step while we are around.” A good many of +the men just sized the boys up, a few hollered good-natured +remarks at them, while several pressed forward +and shook the hands of the boys, remarking +they had worked many years for Mr. Boone and +were glad to meet his son and his friends.</p> + +<p>The three chums took especial care to fix these +men in their minds, for the same thought came to +them all,—that if trouble arose, it was likely that +these men would prove loyal friends in need. Barrows +detailed some of the men to bring back the +necessary lumber for the shanty, and then the men +went back to their work for the afternoon.</p> + +<p>Soon they heard a chugging sound and presently +a tractor hove into sight, dragging a broad-wheeled +cart on which was the lumber. The manager came +up, leading a couple of men with some heavy rolls +of tarred paper, and all was ready to build the +shanty.</p> + +<p>Sandy, the big Airedale, was gravely watching +the boys when the men with the tar paper arrived, +and one of them seeing the dog, remarked:</p> + +<p>“How would you chaps like to go coon hunting +tonight, that is if your pup will trail a coon?”</p> + +<p>This was just what the boys did not want to do +that night, so Garry hastily made the excuse that +they were tired from their march and the work of +throwing up the shanty, but said they would be +glad to go the following night.</p> + +<p>This seemed all right to the men, who proceeded +to make friends with Sandy, that is as much as +that sedate dog would let them, for an Airedale +makes few friends outside of his own family circle.</p> + +<p>The work of putting up the shanty was done in a +short time since there were so many workers, and +the addition of two bunks made it complete.</p> + +<p>Barrows volunteered the information that there +was a spare table in the office, and a bench and a +couple of chairs that could be taken from the dining +room.</p> + +<p>“Then all we have to do is to cut some balsam +boughs for our bunks and we will be as snug as +bugs in a rug,” announced Phil.</p> + +<p>Phil and Dick were dispatched to get the boughs, +while Garry talked of inconsequential matters with +Barrows until their return.</p> + +<p>The rest of the afternoon was spent in wandering +about the cutting. It was a revelation to the +boys, the sight of the great timber falling in the +exact direction that it was wanted. The boys noted +that the cut was made just as Howells had told +them, and they wondered whether or not any spikes +would be encountered.</p> + +<p>The felling of a tree is an interesting process. +The swing begins on the side where the cutters do +not want the tree to fall. Then when the saw is +better than two-thirds of the way through the +trees, the swampers or axemen take their stand at +either side of the tree, and make a cut a trifle under +the line where the saw is coming through. This is +done to cause the tree to fall on that side. The +axemen work like clockwork, using a double bitted +axe,—that is one that has two blades,—and make +the chips positively fly, one drawing his axe away +just in time to let the other man make a blow. Just +as the moment comes for the tree to fall, the cry +of “tim-ber-r-r-r” is raised by one of the axemen +and this is the signal for all to be out of the way +as the great tree falls with a crash that shakes the +ground for many feet around.</p> + +<p>Following the falling of the timber, the trimmers +begin their work. Starting at the base end of the +tree, one on each side, they walk up the sides of the +fallen monarch of the forest, and trim the branches +off as far as they are able. Many of the branches +on the under side of the tree are broken in the fall, +others are only splintered and many of them are +just bent. A dozen men then seize their peavy +sticks, as they are called in Maine, or cant dogs in +some other places where lumbering is done, and roll +the tree over. A peavy stick is a heavy pole about +six feet long, with a sharp iron point at the end. +About a foot from this point is attached a loose +curved iron arm very much like one side of an ice-man’s +tongs. This swings back and forth from the +handle. The men prod the iron point into the trunk +of the tree, and then catch the swinging end of the +hook into the trunk. This gives them almost a +handle to the tree, and the long pole furnishes them +the necessary leverage. At a word from the man on +the end, all give a mighty heave, and the tree is +rolled over, when the remaining branches are +lopped off.</p> + +<p>The lumberjacks are experts in the use of the +peavy stick, and it is a pretty sight to see them load +a great trunk onto a flat car to be drawn away. +The method is almost the same as that used in turning +over a trunk,—only just half of the men fix +their sticks. They give it half a turn and then hold +it in position on the skids, while the other half get +a grip and start turning. In this way, turn and +turn about, they roll the log right up the skids and +onto the car.</p> + +<p>In this instance the trunks were not hauled to +the mill on a car; a chain was attached instead, and +then one of the baby tractors was used to drag it +over the ground to the mill. There were a half a +dozen of these tractors at the camp. Three were +constantly employed in dragging the cut timber to +the mill, while the other three were used to draw +the flat cars to the railroad tracks, a half a dozen +miles from the camp.</p> + +<p>After watching the felling of several trees, the +boys essayed trimming, and while they were by no +means unskillful at it, caused many a laugh among +the men because of the time they took. Whereas +they often took two or three strokes to take off a +branch, the skilled woodsmen with one swift, clean +cut, lopped off a good thick branch.</p> + +<p>The boys took their chaffing good naturedly and +thereby won a lot of regard from the jacks, many +of whom were ready to sneer at “city chaps.”</p> + +<p>From the timbering they went to the sawmill. +Here they found a busy whir of activity. Logs +were rolled onto the carriage and sent down the +plane, while the great circular saw bit its way +through the length of the tree like a hot knife +through a pat of butter.</p> + +<p>The carriage then runs back to where it started, +while a mechanical device shoves the log sideways +as many inches as is desired and the carriage starts +on its journey again. This is done until the log +has been “sliced into planks.” These are then piled +on one side, waiting for the flat cars to be loaded +and hauled away by the tractor.</p> + +<p>This operation that has been described entails +more labor than the winter logging, for then the +trees are simply cut and rolled to one side of the +river. This continues throughout the winter until +the cutting has been complete and then they wait +for the ice to go out. As soon as the ice breaks up, +the logs are tumbled into the river and floated down +the stream. For days they float down the river to +the mills below, which are always located on the +river banks, and here they are ground up and made +into pulp from which paper is later manufactured.</p> + +<p>The logs are distinguished one from another +when they reach their journey’s end by branding, +much as the horses that roam the feeding places in +the West are known by their brand. Every lumberman +has his mark, and a gash is made at one end +of the log, and on this is made the mark.</p> + +<p>For example, Garry’s father had his mark AB, +which stood for his initials. In this instance it was +not necessary to brand the lumber, for it all came +from the same cutting and was transported directly +to the same destination.</p> + +<p>After supper that night, the men gathered outside +their bunkhouses, playing cards or simply leaning +back against the wall and smoking. One of the +French Canadian lumberjacks produced a mouth organ, +and another a battered guitar, and those who +spoke the French joined in an old “chanson” or +song.</p> + +<p>Soon one of the Americans, seizing on a lull in +the conversation and singing, struck up an old-time +lumberjack song, and in a moment the whole camp +had joined in. The lumberjack songs are mostly +about camp events, the fight for the river at the +spring flood, some great battle that took place between +two rival lumber camps, for your true lumberjack +is as ready to fight as to eat.</p> + +<p>Where these songs come from, no one knows. +They are as old as the lumbering industry in Maine, +and generally are written with a chorus at the end. +One man sings the verse and then the camp joins in +the chorus in a thundering tone. There is generally +more noise than melody, at least in the choruses, +for a man that has a fair voice always sings +the verse part. Some of these songs are of a seemingly +endless duration, but the lumberjacks never +tire of singing them.</p> + +<p>As the men sang the moon came up, and made a +scene that was long to be remembered by the boys. +In spite of their enjoying the evening, they kept a +sharp eye on the movements of the red haired +cookee, although he made no move to disappear. +The boys figured that he probably would not until +the camp was asleep. Soon the men began to yawn, +and turn into the bunkhouse, while the boys bade +goodnight to the manager and repaired to their +own shack. They turned in, and as soon as all +seemed quiet, Phil started out, and walking in the +shadows, made for the spot he had picked that +afternoon as being a safe place to watch the exit +from the bunkhouse.</p> + +<p>Garry and Dick dropped off to sleep, and were +only awakened some time later by hearing Phil +climb into his bunk. In a moment they were wide +awake.</p> + +<p>“What news,” whispered Garry.</p> + +<p>“Go on to sleep,” advised Phil in a disappointed +tone. “The LeBlanc never showed up, and I’ve +lost three hours’ sleep for nothing. Goodnight!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER VII<br/>A NOCTURNAL VISITOR</h2> + +<p>It was in that dark hour that precedes the dawn, +which for some reason or other is always the blackest +of the night. The three boys were sleeping +soundly. Suddenly Phil awoke and sniffed the air. +For a moment or two he was dazed, then he gave +a shout.</p> + +<p>His cry of alarm woke the others, and they were +about to leap from their beds when Phil’s warning +shout prevented them.</p> + +<p>“What’s the trouble, Phil?” asked Garry. “Are +there snakes in the shack or are you just having a +nightmare? Whew!” Garry had no need to ask +any further questions.</p> + +<p>The nocturnal visitor was nothing more nor less +than a polecat, that little animal of the woods about +the size of a cat, but commonly called a skunk.</p> + +<p>Phil retained his presence of mind, and reached +to the bottom of his bunk and hauled out one of his +heavy shoepacks. With a well directed aim he +heaved it at the unwelcome little intruder, which at +that moment was near the door. The force of the +blow carried the animal out into the night, and then +the boys hopped out of their bunks and seized their +clothes. Keeping a wary eye, they dashed through +the door and out of the way. The animal by this +time was scampering away.</p> + +<p>Going back to the shack was almost out of the +question, for he had left his unmistakable scent +behind him.</p> + +<p>“There goes my night’s sleep all shot to pieces,” +exclaimed Phil in an aggravated tone. “First I go on +a wild goose chase to hear a plot and hear nothing, +then this comes up, and blooie, there is goodbye to +rest. Bet you I take a nap this morning. Wonder +if that smell will evaporate or will we have to build +a new shack. Also there is going to be a door on +the next one. I don’t want any more night visitors +like that chap.”</p> + +<p>“Hush a minute,” whispered Garry. To the ears +of the boys, trained by their work in the woods to +catch the slightest sound, came the soft noise as of +someone walking towards the bunkhouse. In a moment +Garry was flat on the ground, wiggling along +as does an Indian on the war path in a manner that +the boys had often practiced when they were Scouts.</p> + +<p>He was back in about five minutes. The others +were all curious to know what had made him act in +such a mysterious manner.</p> + +<p>“Someone was prowling about, and just a moment +ago went into the bunkhouse. I could hear +him when he dropped his shoes as he got ready to +crawl into the bunk. Here’s what I think. That +wood pussy may have wandered into the shack all +by his lonesome, but for my part I think it is the +first event in a campaign to make things so unpleasant +for us that we will cut short our visit and go +away,” whispered Garry.</p> + +<p>“They couldn’t have picked on anything much +better to make it unpleasant,” answered Dick. +“What will we do now?”</p> + +<p>By this time the first faint streaks of dawn appeared, +and in a little while the camp would be +astir.</p> + +<p>“It is almost morning, and now that we are wide +awake and up, we might as well stay so,” answered +Garry. “First thing we do this morning is to get +a few more boards and fashion a door for this +shack. Also I saw some heavy screening yesterday,—you +notice that all the windows are screened,—and +we will tack a double thickness of that over +the window. That will afford us some slight protection +against the invasion of more friends such as +the one that paid us an unwelcome call.”</p> + +<p>In a little while the camp was starting to come to +life. First appeared the cookee who favored the +boys with a knowing grin, then came the cook, who +immediately started the work of getting breakfast. +Finally, struggling into their clothes as they came +yawning through the doors, appeared the lumberjacks.</p> + +<p>Garry cautioned his chums to say nothing for +the moment about their experience of the night. +They passed several moments in chatting with those +of the lumberjacks with whom they thought they +might make friends that would perhaps stand them +in good stead later on. Garry was telling a funny +story and at its conclusion the men burst into a roar +of laughter.</p> + +<p>The red headed cookee happened to be passing +just as the men began to laugh, and he looked +sharply at the boys. While he was serving them +breakfast in the smaller room,—they happened to be +alone as Barrows had not yet arisen,—he remarked:</p> + +<p>“Understand you chaps didn’t sleep very well +last night.”</p> + +<p>“No, we didn’t,” answered Garry, looking up +quickly.</p> + +<p>“Well, better luck next time,” and still grinning +the cookee shambled out of the room.</p> + +<p>“Well!” exploded Garry. “If that chap didn’t go +and give himself clean away first shot out of the +gun!”</p> + +<p>“Looks as though your hunch about its being a +part of the campaign of ruthlessness was a fact,” +said Dick with a laugh.</p> + +<p>“Only question in my mind,” said Phil, “is did +he think of it himself as a sort of a practical joke, +or was he put up to it by Barrows?”</p> + +<p>“Looks pretty certain to me that Barrows was +the instigator of the matter,” answered Garry.</p> + +<p>When Barrows appeared, the boys explained the +matter to him, and asked him for the necessary lumber +with which to construct a door, also some +screening for the window. Barrows told them they +could go to the saw mill and select whatever they +wanted in the way of boards.</p> + +<p>As they were getting the boards, an old grizzled +lumberman chatted with them. He asked why they +wanted a door in that kind of weather, and Garry +told him the story.</p> + +<p>“They do leave a reg’lar trail behind them, don’t +they?” laughed the old man. “I’ll tell you what +you can do, though, and it will fix things up pretty +well. I always keep some sulphur on hand when +I’m in the woods. Occasionally you get a rash +from the browntail moths in the woods, and the +best thing for a cure is a poultice made with a little +sulphur. When you put your door on, take a few +extra boards and board up your window. Then +take the sulphur that I give you and put it in a pan +and set it on fire with a hot coal from the kitchen +range. Then you hop out and let the shack get +thoroughly filled with the fumes o’ the sulphur, and +you’ll find after a couple or three hours that you’ll +have your place fumigated as pretty as if you had +ten boards of health do the job for you.”</p> + +<p>The boys thanked the old timer, and left with +their lumber. A few minutes later he appeared on +the scene with his sulphur, and the work of boarding +the window and making a door being completed, +they did as he had directed and went on a +tour of the camp.</p> + +<p>As they were wandering about, with Sandy at +their heels, they were again approached by the man +who had wanted to go on a coon hunt. This time +they accepted his invitation, and arranged to go +that night.</p> + +<p>The day passed quickly, for there were many +things about the camp to attract their attention, and +they asked numerous questions of such of the lumberjacks +as seemed inclined to spend a moment or +two to answer them.</p> + +<p>As soon as it got dark, the coon hunter appeared +and asked if they were ready to go. He was accompanied +by one or two of his friends, and Garry +noticed that one of them carried a burlap bag.</p> + +<p>The boys secured their rifles, and were about to +join the party, when one of the men, noticing the +guns, said:</p> + +<p>“You don’t need your rifles, although you can +carry ’em if you want. We were aiming to catch +the coon alive and see if we couldn’t tame him for +a sort of pet around the camp. That’s what we +brought the bag for.”</p> + +<p>“Good,” answered Garry. “We aren’t much on +shooting animals just for the sake of shooting.”</p> + +<p>The trio of men led the way to where the man +called Tom had said he had seen a raccoon a few +days before. Sandy was eagerly sniffing at the +ground, and soon he gave vent to a low growl.</p> + +<p>“By gosh, I believe he’s got the scent already,” +chuckled one of the men. “It may be some other +kind of an animal, but I doubt it. All I’ve seen +around here is the raccoon, although there were a +few rabbits at different times. Still the raccoon is +the most likely to be out prowling at this time of +night.”</p> + +<p>Soon Sandy was off, with his nose close to the +ground. After a few moments he had left them +entirely, and they followed only by means of his +occasional barks. After almost half a mile of chasing, +they heard a series of wild barks, and knew that +Sandy had driven something to bay.</p> + +<p>In a few moments they had caught up to the +dog, and there sure enough he had something treed +and was venting his pleasure by loud and vociferous +barks.</p> + +<p>They peered up into the tree and could see nothing. +In the meantime one of the men had discovered +a hole at the foot of the tree.</p> + +<p>“Now one of you fellows get some branches, dry +ones of course, and we’ll soon have Mr. Coon all +trapped as nice as you please.”</p> + +<p>One of the men, assisted by Dick, soon gathered +an armful of dry sticks. Getting a boost from his +friend, Tom soon shinnied up the tree, and stopped +after he had gotten about fifteen feet up well into +the branches, for it was a small tree.</p> + +<p>“Here’s the upper end of the hollow,” he called +down. “Now you fellows start your fire at the hole +down there, while I spread the bag over this hole.”</p> + +<p>The smudge was soon started, and fanning it +with their coats, they drove the smoke into the hollow +tree trunk. They were always careful not to +let the flames of the fire get to the tree, or they +might have started a forest fire that would have +been disastrous. As a matter of fact, several bad +forest fires have started from an unskillful attempt +to smoke some animal out of a tree.</p> + +<p>Soon there was a shout from the man up the +tree. “I’ve got him!”</p> + +<p>The smoke had proved too much for Brer Raccoon, +and he had sought to escape by the hole at +the top, only to walk into the bag. In a moment +more Tom had descended the tree with a squirming, +snarling animal safely tied up in the bag.</p> + +<p>On their return to the camp they were greeted +by several of the jacks who had not yet gone to +bed. The catch was exhibited, and one of the men +produced an old dog collar from the bunkhouse. +The collar was snapped on the coon’s neck, a stout +rope was attached to the ring in the corner to be +later tied securely to a nail at the corner of the +bunkhouse.</p> + +<p>“There,” remarked Tom, surveying the result of +the night’s catch. “If you fellows will lay off and +not tease him, and shinny out a little food for him +once in a while, he’ll get tame as a kitten, and they +are a lot of fun when they get tame. Almost as +good as a monkey.”</p> + +<p>“We’ll have to keep Sandy tied up for a while +when he is not with us, or he’ll make short work +of that coon,” remarked Garry.</p> + +<p>“Oh, I’ll have ’em as friendly as two brothers in +a few days,” was Tom’s verdict.</p> + +<p>The boys later found that the man Tom had a +reputation for being quite a hand with animals of +every description, but future events will show why +Sandy and the coon never got well acquainted. +Things were on the verge of beginning to hum for +all hands.</p> + +<p>When the boys woke in the morning, they made +two startling discoveries. The first one was that +repeated calls failed to bring Sandy to them, and +the boys had never remembered the morning when +Sandy went so far abroad that a few whistles did +not bring him back on the run to join his companions.</p> + +<p>The second surprise was found when Garry +noticed a familiar looking roll of birch bark at the +entrance to the cabin, weighted down by a stone!</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER VIII<br/>WORD FROM THE HERMIT</h2> + +<p>“Look here, you chaps,” called Garry, as he +gazed at the little roll of bark, which he had not +yet picked up. The boys crowded around and +looked at him in amazement.</p> + +<p>“Without making any rash bets,” announced +Garry, “I’ll wager my best rifle against a plugged +nickel, that one of our friends has been in this +vicinity within the past few hours. Cast your eyes +on that roll of bark, and tell me if you dare that +we won’t find a funny cryptic little message in it!”</p> + +<p>“The Hermit!” burst out Dick and Phil almost +in one breath.</p> + +<p>“That’s my guess. Now we’ll see if we are +right,” and Garry stooped and picked up the little +roll from its resting place beneath the stone. “It’s +the Hermit, and it’s just the kind of a note I expected +to find. Listen to this. ‘Unseen watchers +often give the best aid. When you need me most, +I’ll be with you.’ And it’s signed with his old +mark, the lone pine with the crossmarked boulder,” +said Garry as he had finished reading.</p> + +<p>“Well, if that doesn’t beat anything I ever heard +of,” said Dick. “How in the name of all that’s +wonderful did he ever find us in this part of the +country?”</p> + +<p>“I think I can answer that,” interrupted Phil. +“He must have run across Nate Webster and +asked about us. It is likely that Nate told him +where we were going, and since he knew that we +were good friends, might have given him an inkling +of the business that we were here on. The +thing that puzzles me is why he should not have +waited and seen us, or even waked us up to say +howdy.”</p> + +<p>“Well, you know what a queer old codger he +was, and this latest stunt is typical of him. Much +as I would like to see him, I confess I would have +been a little bit disappointed if he had not done +something out of the ordinary,” replied Garry.</p> + +<p>“Wonder where he went after he left the note?” +queried Dick.</p> + +<p>“Oh, he’s probably somewhere out in the woods, +you know life in the open woods is nothing to him, +after all the years that he must have lived in them. +The main question now, since we can do nothing +about our friend the Hermit, as he will come in his +own good time, is to see what has happened to +Sandy. I cannot understand his going away. He +may have chased up some animal, and if so he will +be back. But it is unusual for him ever to stir +away from where we are sleeping until he knows +that we are up and about.”</p> + +<p>Throughout the morning they searched every +nook and corner of the camp, going almost to the +edge of the cutting operations, asking all the workers +they met whether or not the dog had been seen. +Their search was of no avail. The day dragged on, +still no Sandy, and each passing hour made the +chums more downcast.</p> + +<p>“I’m beginning to think that this is step number +two to drive us out,” gritted Garry between his +teeth. “I tell you this, boys, if it is so, and I’m +inclined to believe it more and more, if any harm +comes to Sandy through the machinations of this +crew that are trying to ruin Dad’s business, there’s +going to be one of the sweetest little wars started +that Barrows and his whole crew ever even +dreamed of.”</p> + +<p>“I’m with you, Garry. That dog was more than +human, and the best friend that a bunch of chums +like us could ever hope to have,” replied Dick as +he patted his friend on the shoulder. Phil said +nothing, but the others could see by the tightening +of the corners of his mouth,—the danger signal +when Phil was really aroused over anything,—that +he was with them to the end.</p> + +<p>“There doesn’t seem to be anything that we can +do. I’ve looked carefully over the ground for any +signs of a struggle, but I can find nothing. There +was some trickery of some kind to get Sandy away. +It may have been done only to steal him and possibly +sell him, but it may be that there was a foul +purpose in getting the dog away from us. The +time has come for real action. Let’s get going +early in the morning and keep our eyes and ears +sharply on the lookout. Phil, you watch the +cookee closely and see if there are any more midnight +appointments to be made. Dick, you look +out for the sawmill, and see if there is any funny +business being done with the saw. You know +enough about machinery to be able to detect if it is +working properly, and your common sense will tell +you if there seems to be a slackening up of production. +It stands to reason that the boss of the sawmill +must be in on this scheme, for more delay can +be caused here than anywhere else. It is unlikely +that there are many men in on this plot. Too many +would make it unsafe for the conspirators, they +couldn’t all keep their mouths shut. I’ll keep an +eye on Barrows and see what conferences he holds +with the men. I hope that Howells gets back here +soon, I feel that we need immediate advice from +someone who is more experienced in the lumbering +business than we are. Now let’s hop to it.”</p> + +<p>The two boys did as their leader had directed. +Phil ambled off to the cookhouse with the intention +of offering his services in peeling potatoes to the +cookee in order that he might have an excuse for +keeping near the fellow. Dick at once made for the +sawmill.</p> + +<p>When he arrived there, the busy hum of activity +seemed to be all about him. But as he watched he +became conscious of the fact that there seemed to +be several things that delayed the game. The man +who drove one of the tractors seemed to be having +continual trouble with the engine, and several minutes +on each trip were consumed in needless repairs. +Dick could see with half an eye that there was little +the trouble with the engine except that which was +created by the driver himself. The man kept up a +continual stream of grumbling at the way the engine +was acting, evidently to make the trouble +appear to be real.</p> + +<p>Once Dick saw that there was a loose wire connection +which the driver purposely overlooked, and +after he had watched the man waste ten minutes in +needless overhauling, he stepped up and offered his +services.</p> + +<p>The man refused with a growl and an oath. Dick +managed to restrain his temper, although he wanted +to tell the man how evident his stalling around was.</p> + +<p>“Oh, all right, I don’t mean to interfere with +your business, but your wire to your battery is unconnected,” +and Dick turned on his heel.</p> + +<p>Seeing that Dick really knew what he was talking +about, the driver attached the wire and in a +moment or two was off for another load of logs.</p> + +<p>“If he wastes that much time every trip,” thought +Dick to himself, “he might just as well try to bring +in the logs on his back. In the course of a week +that would mean almost a day’s production gone to +waste, and I haven’t watched long enough to know +how much time he takes on his trip.”</p> + +<p>Quite frequently the saw would be stopped for a +moment while the boss sawyer oiled up different +parts of the machinery. He did not seem to like +Dick’s watching him, but he was evidently a little +wiser than the driver, and attempted an explanation.</p> + +<p>“This is the last saw we have in the camp,” he +told Dick. “The ones that we ordered haven’t +shown up yet, and if anything goes wrong with this +one, we are hurt and hurt bad.”</p> + +<p>Dick pretended a great deal of ignorance about +the saw, but he could see that the sawyer regarded +him with some suspicion.</p> + +<p>Dick kept in the sawmill, but stayed as much as +possible in the background. After nearly an hour +of watching, a great log was rolled onto the +carriage, and glancing at his watch, the boss sawyer +called an assistant and gave him charge of the saw. +Then he hastened from the mill and started in the +direction of the camp, evidently to hold a conference +with Barrows. Dick was turning to saunter +out when he heard a terrific tearing sound as of +steel being ground between heavy rollers, then a +cry of pain from the sawyer. Dick turned and +rushed to the scene. The saw was still grinding +into the obstruction that was causing the noise, and +several pieces of flying steel were in the air. The +sawyer had his hands clasped to his face, and the +blood was streaming from between his fingers.</p> + +<p>Dick saw that there was no one with presence +of mind enough to throw the lever that shut off the +saw, and he ran and threw off the lever. Then he +returned to the injured man. The flying teeth of +the saw had cut his face in several places, but fortunately +his eyes were uninjured. That he had +escaped being blinded was almost a miracle.</p> + +<p>The thought that flashed through Dick’s mind +that here was an instance of what Howells had told +them, of the spiking a tree in the upper part where +it would hit the saw. Dick asked the old man who +had told them how to fumigate their shack the day +before if he could roll back the saw without starting +up the engine and causing more teeth to be +broken and start flying about the place.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the old timer had worked the +saw back so that Dick could examine it. It required +only a moment to see that the saw was +irreparably ruined. Most of the teeth had been +bent or broken off, and a further examination +showed that several parts of the saw carriage and +control had been broken or strained by the unwonted +burden that had been put on them.</p> + +<p>At this moment the boss sawyer and Barrows, the +manager, had come rushing up to the mill to inquire +what was the trouble. Garry was with them, +and Dick gave him a significant look, unobserved +by the others.</p> + +<p>“What’s all the trouble?” inquired Barrows +needlessly, for he could see with half an eye the +damage that had been wrought.</p> + +<p>“Seems as if your saw was a total wreck,” +answered Dick. “Must have struck a ton of metal +in the heart of that tree to do all that damage.”</p> + +<p>“Nonsense,” cried Barrows. “Whoever heard of +metal in a tree?”</p> + +<p>“Could it have been a defective saw?” inquired +Garry soberly, for the purpose of hearing what +reply Barrows would make.</p> + +<p>“Yes, that’s what it must have been, a defective +saw,” repeated the manager, parrot fashion.</p> + +<p>“Defective saw me eye,” broke in the old helper. +“That tree has been spiked and spiked good and +plenty. That’s the second saw that went that way +this summer. Tother time it nearly killed the sawyer +when the belt flew off and almost got him +tangled up in the machinery. There’s one sure +way to find out what caused it, and that’s to roll +her off the carriage and split off that place where +the saw started to eat through. If there isn’t a +spike there, you can have my month’s wages.”</p> + +<p>“You seem to know all about it, and perhaps we +shall find out why you know so much about the +matter,” and Barrows favored the old man with a +look that boded no good to him.</p> + +<p>In the face of the old timer’s statement, and +because Dick and Garry were looking at the manager +as though they expected him to take speedy +action, there was nothing for Barrows to do but +follow the suggestion and order the log rolled off. +This was done, and then several wedges were driven +in, and using the backs of single bitted axes, the +section of tree was soon split open. There plainly +revealed to view were several bent, cut and twisted +spikes!</p> + +<p>“That’s what broke your saw,” exclaimed the old +man. “Shame, too, a nice saw like that ruined and +the only one in the camp at that!”</p> + +<p>“That will do, Collins,” cut in Barrows sharply. +“Your opinion wasn’t asked. Besides, I am still +wondering how your knowledge of the spiking +seemed to prove so accurate.”</p> + +<p>“I was raised in the woods, and I know all the +little tricks. There’s dirty work afoot here somewhere,” +returned old Collins staunchly.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I guess you do know all the tricks, but I +know a good one, too; you go and get your pay +from the timekeeper and start on your way,” +ground out the manager.</p> + +<p>“Isn’t that just a trifle hasty, Mr. Barrows?” +cut in Garry.</p> + +<p>“Listen, my boy. With all due respect to the +son of my employer, I must say that I am manager +of this camp, and what I say goes. You know I +am protecting your father’s business, and there has +been so much funny business going on lately that +something must be done, and I am going to begin +by cutting out all the suspicious characters. In my +judgment Collins is such a character.”</p> + +<p>“Huh,” muttered Dick in an undertone. “A +fine protector you are, and you know that Collins is +innocent. He knows too much, that’s all.”</p> + +<p>Old Collins marched out of the mill section and +started toward the office. A moment later Dick +unobtrusively followed him. In a few seconds he +had caught up with the man and said goodbye to +him.</p> + +<p>“Goodbye, my lad, and let me give you a +warning. Tell your pal that his father’s business is +going to pot here. There’s something underfoot, +I don’t know what it is or why, but it’s there. Too +many accidents. You watch that Barrows and +watch the timekeeper, and keep an eye on the two +drivers with the moustaches. Throw in the cookee +for good measure, and you’ll have a precious lot of +rascals.”</p> + +<p>Dick tried to elicit further information, but +found that the old fellow either did not know anything +specific, or was crotchety and would not tell.</p> + +<p>There being nothing that could be done further, +the manager and Dick returned to the office, while +Garry went to the bunkhouse to see if he could +render any aid to the man who had been cut by the +flying particles of the saw.</p> + +<p>At the office they found waiting their acquaintance +of the attempted holdup, Arthur Howells. He +acted according to the agreement and waited till +they had been introduced.</p> + +<p>“This is our scaler and cruiser,” announced Barrows.</p> + +<p>Upon the boys professing ignorance of what the +duties of a scaler were, they received an invitation +from Howells to come with him after dinner and +watch the operations. Barrows heartily advised the +boys to go with him and learn something of the +way in which the trees were spotted and the lumber +measured.</p> + +<p>The chums knew well that the invitation was +solely for the purpose of getting them away from +the camp so that they could confer on what was +going on.</p> + +<p>After dinner they sought out Howells, and after +he had armed himself with a scaling stick, marked +off in measurements, which was used to measure +the trees, they wandered into the woods.</p> + +<p>“Now, boys, what news?” he asked.</p> + +<p>In a few words they told him of the events that +had transpired since their arrival.</p> + +<p>Howells was especially interested in the matter +of the spiked tree, and was indignant at the fact +that Collins had been discharged.</p> + +<p>“Why, the old man was as honest as the day is +long. He used to know your father a good many +years ago, Garry, and he would never do anything +that would harm him or his business,” Howells +said vehemently.</p> + +<p>“Next thing on the docket,” said Garry, “is to +ask what news you have.”</p> + +<p>“I have something that will knock the feet almost +out from under you. In addition to the trouble +caused by the breakage and wasting, there is something +even deeper yet. I always get the reports +from the receiving stations of the amount of +lumber that is sent out. I know after measuring, just +how much has gone out. Today my reports show +that all the timber that is cut here does not arrive +at its destination.</p> + +<p>“What do you mean?” said Garry.</p> + +<p>“Just what I mean is this. Somewhere, somehow, +your father’s lumber is being stolen en route +to its destination!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER IX<br/>THE BOYS LOSE AN ALLY</h2> + +<p>The words of Howells stunned the boys for a +moment. Then Garry delivered himself of a few +vehement words regarding the thieves.</p> + +<p>“We have been here only a couple of days or so, +and yet we find that this logging camp is a hive of +rascals and thieves. And still we have done nothing. +We must get to work and nip this thing in +the bud, else the whole summer’s work at the camp +here will have gone for naught, to say nothing of +the irreparable financial loss that will be caused to +Dad, not only from the penalties for failure to live +up to his contracts, but the money loss from the +stolen timber will mount up well into the hundreds +I am afraid. Now we must put a stop to this thing. +I believe that I will go out tomorrow and go to +town and ’phone Father that he had better make a +cleanup here at the camp. Perhaps we don’t know +just who the guilty parties are, but if we get rid of +the whole shooting match we can stop it. How +much timber would you estimate has been stolen?” +he concluded, turning to Howells.</p> + +<p>“I can’t say as to that. This last report is the +only one that I have received direct. Generally I +have been given what was supposed to be a duplicate +copy of the one sent to Barrows. This time I +happened to get the mail myself at the postoffice. +Generally one of Barrow’s men gets the mail, and +it is distributed. This letter was addressed to me +personally, and I have no doubt that the others +were also, but were opened and doctored up to +appear all right. That’s a prime bit of evidence if +we can secure the proof. Tampering with Uncle +Sam’s mail is a serious crime, and draws a long +prison term. Now as for your going out of the +woods tomorrow and ’phoning your father, Garry, +I would advise against it. Nothing very serious +can happen in the next few days. Little work can +be done until a new saw comes, and there will be +little shipping of timber except that which has been +waiting to be transported. In the meantime, if, as +your father is led to believe, this whole matter is a +move on the part of the big interests to crush him +in the lumber business, the firing of the present +manager and crew will have little effect. Your dad +evidently trusted Barrows, else he would not have +sent him here. If he is guilty, you may be sure that +the enemy, for such we must call them, made it +mighty well worth his while to turn traitor. What +is to prevent the next manager from being affected +in the same way? And even if a trustworthy manager +were secured, the big interests can always +bribe enough of the laborers to do all the necessary +damage that would be required to spoil the season. +My advice is to lay low for a few days and get evidence +that will get the ‘man higher up,’ the one who +is the instigator of this whole thing. Once you can +spike his guns, there will be no further danger of +trouble here, and also it will enable your father to +take court action that will restore him damages for +the stolen timber, and will also give him a chance +to sue those who have harmed him so that he can +make the penalties that will be inflicted in case +enough damage has already been done to make him +forfeit his contracts. I should say now that he was +a good three weeks behind his shipments, and that +is a whole lot in one season. He has guaranteed +to deliver a certain amount of timber at its destination +by the last of September. It is the middle of +August now, and he must make every minute +count from now on to get out the required amount. +Get the man responsible for this business and you +will have accomplished what you have set out to. +What do you think of my advice?”</p> + +<p>“Sounds logical, and I think we will follow it. +In the meantime I have a hunch now in regard to +that stolen timber. I think I can hitch up a few +things Barrows has tried to dissuade us from doing, +and a certain lake in this vicinity. That’s our next +work. Now what do you propose to do, Mr. +Howells?” asked Garry.</p> + +<p>“First thing I’m going to do is to go straight to +Barrows and tell him about the deficiency shown +by the records. That will do one of two things, I +believe; either show him up for a crook, or else +show that he is straight and start him investigating +the thefts. If the latter happens, which I am frank +to say I do not think will, then we have accomplished +a great deal of good.”</p> + +<p>Howells, however, had barely finished speaking, +when the red haired cookee appeared at the shack +and told him that Barrows wanted to see him at +the camp office immediately.</p> + +<p>Having delivered the message, the cookee sauntered +off, and Howells looked at the boys with a +puzzled stare.</p> + +<p>“Wonder what’s up now. Thought that we +talked over everything there was a little while ago. +Well, there’s no use in wondering. I’m off to see +his Royal Highness and find out what he wants. +I’ll see you after a little while.”</p> + +<p>Howells hustled off to the office and left the boys +to talk things over among themselves.</p> + +<p>“What did you mean, Garry, when you said that +you had a hunch about lakes and things?” inquired +Phil.</p> + +<p>“Why, you remember how insistent Barrows has +been that we make a sort of playground out of the +little lake, setting forth its advantages about swimming, +fishing and all that, and has done everything +that he can do to discourage us from going near the +big lake. I have let him believe that we took everything +he said for granted, so I thought that tonight, +if possible, we would make a trip to the big +lake and see what’s what,” Garry answered.</p> + +<p>“I’m wondering if Barrows is clever enough to +play the old trick used by conjurers and magicians?” +mused Phil.</p> + +<p>“What do you mean, magician?” queried Garry +with a puzzled look at his friend.</p> + +<p>“Why, you know a magician always directs the +attention of his audience to the thing that he is generally +going to do, figuring that the people will be +on the watch for a trick, and will be so busy trying +to find the hidden trick, that they look everywhere +but where the magician tells ’em to, and in the +meantime he has done his trick.”</p> + +<p>“I see,” exclaimed Garry. “You mean that Barrows +may figure that we will guess he has been discouraging +us about the big lake for the very purpose +of making us go there rather than to the +smaller body of water, where some sort of villainy +may be going on.”</p> + +<p>“That’s it exactly,” returned Phil.</p> + +<p>“I think you have a good hunch there, Phil, although +I rather think that Barrows is not clever +enough to dope out that trick. Still, there can be +no harm in watching both lakes. Suppose that we +take a little trip today to the small one, and then +tomorrow night we will hustle over to the big one +after the camp has turned in for the night. Guess +that will be our best plan. Now let’s wait for Barrows +and Howells to finish their conversation, and +we will trot over while I ask a few leading questions.”</p> + +<p>They waited a few minutes, talking over their +probable course of action, and were about to set out +for the office, when Howells appeared on the scene. +Rage and disappointment were depicted in his face, +and the boys were quick to take notice of this.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter? You look as though you +had bad news to bring us,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>“Well, it’s bad news for me, at any rate, and I +think also for you. I believe I have proof enough +that Barrows is a crook from the word go. I have +been discharged from my job as cruiser and scaler +and ordered to leave the place immediately.”</p> + +<p>“Why, I can hardly believe you, what’s it all +about?” asked Phil.</p> + +<p>“Well, it’s a short story. I had hardly gotten +inside the office, when Barrows told me I was +through. Naturally all other thoughts left my +head, that is about my errand, and I asked him why. +He replied that when he hired me he thought he +was getting an accurate scaler, and that the reports +showed that the amount of timber I had reported +was cut had not been delivered. Immediately I +knew that he was on to the fact that I was aware +of the shortage and was spiking my guns before I +could do or say anything. Now I know that I have +accurately measured all the timber that was cut in +this tract. I was at school long enough to learn +how to scale if I never learned anything else. Of +course we had words, and I forgot myself and +accused him of knowing that timber was disappearing, +and he was covering up by throwing the blame +on me. Of course there was nothing that I could +do, so I told him a few wholesome truths and +walked out of the office.”</p> + +<p>“Then that definitely settles Barrows’ status +here,” said Garry. “He knows that timber is being +stolen, and he wants to cover it up. I hope you did +not connect us in any way with you while you were +telling Barrows what you thought of him, did you +Art?”</p> + +<p>“You bet I didn’t. I kept my head that much, at +any rate.”</p> + +<p>“Well, we have lost a valuable ally since you +must go away. I suppose, though, we could hire +you as a guide and keep you here. Barrows could +make no objection then,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>“No, that would be the worst thing that you +could do. It would put Barrows on his guard, for +he would immediately leap to the conclusion that I +had told you everything. No, the wisest thing for +me to do is to hop out and go back to town. Then +in a few days I could get back here and see what I +could dig up in the way of stolen timber. I think +the most advisable thing to do would be to find out +from some of the railway stations near here where +timber is being shipped from, and in that way we +could get a line on where it is going. Then you +chaps on the inside can browse about a bit and find +out how it is stolen. Between us we can secure +evidence that will uncover the whole plot. I’m +going out now, before they get onto the fact that +we have had time to talk things over. In the meantime, +take my advice, and keep your eyes open +every minute. Eternal vigilance on your part is +going to be the price of success. Not that I believe +any harm will come to you. Barrows would not +dare attempt that; but he could move so stealthily +that you could not find out anything. Now I’ll say +goodbye and trot along. Good luck to you, and I +will contrive some way to get word to you of what +is going on.”</p> + +<p>Howells shook hands with the boys, and then +loped off to get his dunnage. The boys watched his +departure sadly, for they had counted a great deal +on the help that the young timberman could give +them.</p> + +<p>“Well, fellows, that puts it directly up to us +again. We will have to work on our own hook and +get to the bottom of this. Now let’s have action. +Tomorrow morning—it is too late now to do anything—we +will take a little trip to the small lake, +Kanamo Lake I think they call it; Dutton is the +name of the big one, and start our search there. +We will simply say that we are going off for some +fishing and swimming. Now we’ll go to the office, +and remember, not a word about knowing that +Howells was discharged.” And concluding his talk, +Garry led the way to the office.</p> + +<p>Barrows watched them narrowly as they came in, +but said nothing.</p> + +<p>“Thought we’d get a little information about +Kanamo Lake,” said Phil, as they seated themselves.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” chimed in Garry. “We are going off +there early tomorrow and have a little fishing and +perhaps a swim or two. We haven’t done anything +since we got here but watch the timber cutting, and +that isn’t a novelty any longer. What we especially +want to find out is whether there is any canoe or +boat on either of the lakes that we could use to get +some really good fishing.”</p> + +<p>“There isn’t a boat or canoe of any sort on either +Dutton or Kanamo,” answered the manager. “But +you will find that will not interfere with your fishing. +Part of the banks are well covered with reeds, +and early in the morning and after the sun has gone +down you can catch a fine mess of pickerel. +Throughout the day the bass can be caught from the +bank if you boys are any hand at making a good +long cast. I suppose as soon as the timber cutting +is done, the tourists will begin to swarm here for +summer camping, and then there will be plenty of +boats and few fish. That’s generally the way.” +The manager talked heartily as though relieved that +the conversation had taken the turn that it had, and +perhaps because of the information that the boys +were going to get away from the camp. It was +likely that he had expected some questioning because +of the discharge of the scaler. Evidently +thinking over the matter, he decided something in +his mind, and turning to Garry, remarked casually: +“I had hoped that the arrival of the scaler would +give me a little extra time so that I could do some +fishing with you and act as guide around here, but +I regret to say that I found him incompetent and +was obliged to discharge him. He was careless +about his measurements, or else did not know how +to measure properly, and all our records are messed +up so that it will take me several days to get them +straightened out. Fortunately I know pretty well +what’s been shipped and can check against the bills +of lading. Well, there goes the cook’s supper +call.”</p> + +<p>Following supper, the boys made excuses that +they wanted to get their fishing tackle in order and +retired early to their shack. They got to sleep +early, as they expected a strenuous day on the morrow, +and also hoped to be able to make a trip to +Dutton Lake at night, hence wanted sleep.</p> + +<p>Just as they were undressing, Dick uttered an +exclamation of disgust.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter, Dick, lose a button?” inquired +Phil.</p> + +<p>“No, confound it, lost that nice knife with my +name on it that I bought in Bangor.”</p> + +<p>“That’s too bad, lost your nice toy. Well, you +should worry, as you have your sensible scout knife +that will cut even if it hasn’t a nice name on it,” +laughed Phil.</p> + +<p>Early morning found them routed out with the +dawn, and as they hurried for the cookhouse to get +some supplies with which to cook a luncheon at +the lake, they heard the cook and his helper talking +about some marauder that had been captured the +night before and was locked up in the storehouse.</p> + +<p>Neither seemed to know much about it, but the +boys could see that the cookee was on tenterhooks, +and several times tried to get out, only to be called +by the cook and set to doing some necessary task +toward the getting of breakfast. This uneasiness +on the part of the cookee made the boys think that +possibly Baptiste LeBlanc had been caught, and decided +that when they had eaten they would have a +look at the prisoner.</p> + +<p>Barrows appeared when they were half way +through breakfast, and the chums at once began to +question him regarding the capture of the unknown +man and what he might have wanted there.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps he is the one who has been causing a +lot of trouble around here,” said Barrows. “I +haven’t seen him yet. Couple of the men found him +snooping around the office last night, and after +locking him up, woke me up and told me about him. +After I eat I am going to question him, and if you +want to get a little later start on your fishing trip, +you can come and take a look at him.”</p> + +<p>This was exactly what the boys wanted, and +they thanked Barrows for the invitation. They +made a hurried meal, and then after Barrows had +posted the notices for the section bosses for the day, +they went to the storehouse, which was the most +solid looking building in the camp, being built of +great logs with a thick double hasp and padlocks on +the door. Inside were kept the cooking supplies for +the camp.</p> + +<p>The manager produced a key, and throwing open +the door, called to the prisoner to come out.</p> + +<p>The three chums pressed forward eagerly to see +if they were right in their guess that LeBlanc or +his evil associate had been captured.</p> + +<p>What they did finally see nearly knocked them +off their feet. There was a shuffling sound as of +some one getting up, and then through the door +into the sunlight, walked The Hermit!</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER X<br/>THE FIRST HIKE</h2> + +<p>It was nearly a minute before the boys could find +their tongues. The hermit stood there blinking in +the sunlight, for it had been pitch black inside of +the storehouse.</p> + +<p>Finally Garry shouted:</p> + +<p>“Hello, Hermit. Where did you come from?”</p> + +<p>Barrows stared at the boys in surprise.</p> + +<p>“Do you know this man?” he asked sharply.</p> + +<p>“Of course we do,” replied the boys, almost +simultaneously. “It isn’t so long ago that he was +of great aid to us in our work on the fire patrol,” +added Garry. Immediately he could have kicked +himself, for he had by this statement let Barrows +know that the man might be of help to them again.</p> + +<p>“What are you trying to do around here?” +snapped Barrows, turning to the hermit. “Trying +to steal something, or set fire to the camp or something +of that sort?”</p> + +<p>“That will be just about enough, Mr. Barrows,” +interrupted Garry. “We happen to know this old +man, and I’ll vouch for him personally. It is probable +that he came here to visit us, and was wandering +about when your men, naturally thinking him +to be a marauder, seized him. You can take my +word for it that he’s all right.”</p> + +<p>Barrows evidently resented the way in which +Garry had spoken to him. “I think I am the best +judge of what to do in this camp, young man. I +am not satisfied with his presence here, and it is +my intention to have him taken to town and lodged +in jail there until I find out what’s at the bottom of +the broken saws and such occurrences in the camp.”</p> + +<p>“Now just one moment, Barrows,” said Garry +with a determined ring in his voice, and a snap in +his eyes that boded little good for Barrows. “I +am not one who will naturally trade on his being +the son of the man who owns this camp, but I give +you ample warning that if my word is doubted in +this matter, and this old man, who is as harmless +as a rabbit, is not freed immediately, I will go to +town this morning and take steps that will cause +your instant removal from this camp. I have never +asked my father to back me in anything that I was +not absolutely sure of, and you can rely on the fact +that he will take my word in this case, knowing +me as he does. Now Mr. Barrows, you may take +your choice in this matter and decide quickly.”</p> + +<p>The manager hesitated a moment, evidently trying +to decide just who had the upper hand in the +situation. Seeing this, Garry turned to Phil and +Dick, and said:</p> + +<p>“Boys, go pack up your dunnage and get ready +to leave in fifteen minutes.”</p> + +<p>The two chums turned on their heels without a +word, and were starting for the shack when Barrows, +seeing that he was beaten, called:</p> + +<p>“Never mind, boys, the old man will go free this +minute.”</p> + +<p>He said it with a bad grace, and the glances that +he covertly cast at the boys showed that he was enraged +at the turn affairs had taken. What made +him still angrier was the fact that the cook and two +or three men had gathered around and seen him +come out second best in the battle of words.</p> + +<p>He determined to make the best of a bad situation.</p> + +<p>“I am afraid that I spoke a little too hastily in +this thing,” he said, coming closer to Garry. “I +want you to remember that I am always trying to +protect your father’s interests here; that is what he +pays me for, and I thought that there might be +something peculiar in this chap’s showing up here +in the dead of night.”</p> + +<p>Garry, having won his point, and for the sake of +future peace and freedom from interference, resolved +to mollify the manager.</p> + +<p>“That’s all right, Mr. Barrows. Only I want to +tell you this,” and here Garry lowered his voice: +“The old chap is mentally unbalanced, and it was +largely for that reason that I did not want him to +be annoyed. He lives near a tract of wild land +where we patrolled early this summer, and was very +decent to us, tanning skins of animals that we shot, +and leaving us rabbits for eating. It is a pet trick +of his to wander about at night, and appear very +mysteriously, and as I propose to have him stay +with us a few days, I wish you would pass the word +that he is afflicted and caution the men not to tease +or annoy him.”</p> + +<p>Barrows assented grudgingly and then marched +off to the office.</p> + +<p>Left alone with the hermit, for the cook and the +others had departed for their customary tasks, the +boys eagerly asked the hermit what he meant by his +note, and if he had anything to tell them.</p> + +<p>“I didn’t mean to get caught,” he said. “I know +what you boys are here for. Nate told me a little +and I can make two and two equal four. I was +creeping through the woods last night to come and +leave a letter for you, when I heard some men talking, +and crept up to listen to them. They were just +getting ready to leave and all I heard was a man +saying that his brother would soon be there and +that he would know how to deal with those spies. +I couldn’t get a good look at the man, but he spoke +with an accent, and was a heavy, strongly built +man. That’s what I was going to write to you, +for I believe you are the ones that the men in the +secret meeting meant when they referred to spies.”</p> + +<p>The boys looked aghast at each other when they +heard the concluding words of their friend the +hermit. At once the same thought leaped into the +minds of all three. Man with an accent, heavily +built and strong appearing. Brother was coming to +help him. All put together it meant only one thing, +and that was voiced by Dick.</p> + +<p>“Jean LeBlanc!”</p> + +<p>The others echoed the name of their Nemesis +after Dick.</p> + +<p>“What’s that, did you speak of LeBlanc?” inquired +the hermit.</p> + +<p>“That’s just what we did,” replied Garry grimly. +“That man you described, unless we are very badly +mistaken, was Baptiste, a brother of Jean. And +if Jean is on the way, we must guard ourselves +every minute. And we must make every moment +count, for once he gets here he will make strenuous +efforts to get us in trouble, if not on his own hook, +then in cahoots with Barrows. Now let’s break for +the small lake. Suppose you stay with us a few +days, Hermit, and help us in our work.”</p> + +<p>“No, that would not be good tactics,” was the +reply of the hermit. “It would cause trouble to you +boys with that man who wished me lodged in +durance vile.”</p> + +<p>As was usual, the words of the hermit were anything +but those that would be naturally used by a +man that had lived the greater part of his life in the +deep woods, far removed from all human beings. +But the aged hermit was always surprising them, +if not by his talk, by his unusual actions.</p> + +<p>Garry had often thought that the old man was +wise in his conclusions, so he asked what could be +suggested.</p> + +<p>“I would say that you should go to the manager +and tell him that I had been offended by my reception +and consequently had refused to stay and visit +you, going off in a huff. Then that will give me +a chance to return to the forest and watch for the +coming of LeBlanc. I will guarantee that I will +not be captured again. I was too sure of myself +last night, since I did not know that the camp was +full of night spies, who held rendezvous in the dark +of the night. I will warn you in the usual way if +LeBlanc approaches. In the meantime, my instinct +tells me that the man with whom you quarreled, +Garry, is not to be trusted. Watch him. Now I +will go if you will give me some food to carry with +me for breakfast. I am hungry.”</p> + +<p>“There’s one thing I wish you would do first, +Hermit,” said Garry, calling him by the only name +they knew, and which appeared to please rather +than offend the old recluse, “and that is go to the +nearest town and mail a letter for us. There is no +one in the camp now that I would trust with a message, +and none of us who could get away. I should +have thought to do it yesterday when Howells left, +but forgot it in the excitement of his being discharged.”</p> + +<p>Borrowing Dick’s ever ready notebook, Garry +scribbled off a brief note to his father, advising him +to check carefully the shipments of timber, and telling +him in guarded words, that he had several clues +that properly trailed down would soon lead to the +unmasking of the traitors in the camp. He folded +the note and gave the hermit money with which to +buy a stamped envelope, and on another leaf of +paper wrote the address to which the note should +be sent.</p> + +<p>This the hermit promised to do at the earliest +possible opportunity. He then proposed that they +walk a few hundred yards out of the camp with +him, so that they might select a spot where notes +could be left without his having to penetrate the +dangers of the camp at night.</p> + +<p>This the boys agreed to do, and after a brisk +walk selected a tree with a hollow, half concealed +in it, and established that as the “postoffice.” The +hermit then took up his journey, while the boys +returned to the office to tell the manager, as they +had agreed to do, about the hermit’s leaving. When +Barrows heard their story he seemed relieved and +was apparently only too anxious to ingratiate himself +with the boys again, for he realized that he had +overstepped the mark a bit in his words with Garry +a short time previous.</p> + +<p>“You should have brought the old chap back, and +perhaps I could have persuaded him that it was all +a mistake,” but the boys were quick to detect the +false ring in his tone.</p> + +<p>“Now we are off to Kanamo Lake for our delayed +fishing trip, and so that you may not get uneasy +if we do not return by nightfall, let us tell you +that we are used to making camp wherever we happen +to be, and so will be all right. I only wish +there was a canoe on the lake, and we would take a +three or four-day hike, canoeing from spot to spot +on the lake, and camping wherever we saw fit,” +concluded Garry.</p> + +<p>“Sorry there isn’t. You might make a flatboat +out of some lumber, but there is nothing with which +to calk the seams, and the task of dragging the lumber +to the water would be almost too much to +bother with for the short time that you are going +to stay here,” replied Barrows.</p> + +<p>As the boys set out on their seven-mile hike to +the lake, they discussed the way in which Barrows +was continually bringing into the conversation the +suggestion that they were not going to stay very +long.</p> + +<p>“I wonder if that is a warning unintentionally +given, or is the wish just father to the thought?” +asked Garry. “I don’t remember ever saying anything +to Barrows about the length of time that we +intended to spend here.”</p> + +<p>“Maybe it is just the wish coming to surface as +you say. At any rate, let’s not worry about that +for awhile. We will have bridges enough to cross +when we come to them.”</p> + +<p>The chums pursued their way through the fragrant +woods, spicy with the smell of pine and balsam. +Occasionally they heard the whirr of wings +as a covey of grouse or partridge, frightened at the +sound of approaching footsteps, took wing and flew +away from the cover where they had been hiding. +The sound of the birds brought to the minds of the +trio the sad thought of the missing Sandy, for he +had the canine instinct of most dogs to flush a bird. +He had so often hunted with the boys that they +had taught him to retrieve a bird as does a regular +pointer or hunting dog.</p> + +<p>“Tell you what we’ll do when we get back to the +camp tonight,” announced Phil. “We’ll offer a +reward for the finding of Sandy. I think myself +that some of the lumberjacks, perhaps that chap +that took us coon hunting, recognized the value of +Sandy and stole him, determined to sell him and +make a few dishonest dollars. Sandy is worth more +to us than many people would want to pay for him, +and I think if we offered a big enough reward we +might get him back.”</p> + +<p>This was agreed on by the boys, and chatting +merrily of many things, they trekked through the +forest to the lake.</p> + +<p>They took turns setting the pace and so made +brisk time, even Dick keeping up without grumbling, +although there was no circus at the end of +the trail to lure him on to greater speed. However, +Dick smelled adventure in the air, and hence +all his seemingly lazy ways dropped and he dug to +the trail as if his life depended on it.</p> + +<p>Soon they reached the lake, which lay like a +jewel in the midst of the forest. For the most part +it was surrounded by trees, thick and green. At +the end of the trail was a slightly open spot, and a +stretch of sandy beach that seemed to beckon the +boys irresistibly.</p> + +<p>“Let’s take a short dip before we start exploring. +I haven’t had a swim for days, and I think it would +do us all a lot of good.” Garry had been sweeping +the edges of the lake with his field glasses, which he +had brought along, and could see nothing other +than an unbroken expanse of forest. Far down at +the end of the lake was a slight opening which +Garry judged was the outlet of the lake, although +since he had not consulted a map, he could not tell +much about it as regarded its direction and size.</p> + +<p>The others were also of Garry’s opinion, and Phil +then came to bat with another suggestion.</p> + +<p>“We must do a little fishing, also; for if we go +back empty handed from a lake that is supposed to +be filled with fish, we are apt to excite suspicion in +the mind of Barrows, and set him asking us questions +as to what we did while we were away. We +don’t need to spend the whole day at it, just catch +a decent mess and quit.”</p> + +<p>“Right you are, Phil,” answered Garry. “Now +for a swim, and last man in is no good.”</p> + +<p>The boys ripped off their clothes, and so used +were they to speedy disrobing, that all hit the water +with almost the same splash.</p> + +<p>“See that spot up the bank about three hundred +yards, where the ground begins to rise?” inquired +Dick, as he splashed about in the water. “Bet you +fellows anything I’ve got against anything you have +that I can give you chaps ten yards’ start and then +beat you there.”</p> + +<p>“Well, you sure thing artist, splash him good, +Phil,” shouted Garry, for Dick was an expert swimmer, +much better than either of the others, although +they were not unskilled in the aquatic art.</p> + +<p>Dick was thoroughly splashed, and with two +against one, was soon forced to holler quits.</p> + +<p>“Tell you what I’m going to do; I’m going to +swim up to that place and back, anyway. You fellows +can come or not, as you please,” and with a +long, sweeping, underhand stroke, his head almost +buried in the water, Dick sped away. The remaining +two contented themselves with paddling about +and noting the clearness of the water and the fine +sandy bottom. They got a stone and amused themselves +by throwing it some distance and then swimming +under water after it and recovering it. They +had been doing this for some moments, when suddenly +Garry, thinking that Dick, with his speed, had +been gone long enough to have done that distance +twice over, began to worry a bit, and called Phil’s +attention to the lapse of time. They decided to +swim up there and seek their missing comrade, who, +although they had perfect faith in his prowess as a +swimmer, might easily have been overtaken with a +cramp, and met with disaster.</p> + +<p>It was generally a rule that they keep an eye on +each other in the water, and it was a strict regulation +that a call for help be never made in jest.</p> + +<p>“Let’s go,” called Garry, and away they started. +They had made less than fifty yards, when borne on +the breeze came the sound of Dick’s voice.</p> + +<p>Garry stopped swimming for a moment, and began +to tread water, while he looked toward the spot +that had been Dick’s goal when he swam away. +Dick could be seen standing on the bank beckoning +wildly to them.</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER XI<br/>A LUCKY FIND</h2> + +<p>“Guess it’s nothing serious, Garry,” said Phil, +who had followed Garry’s lead and stopped swimming +long enough to see what the cause of the call +was. “It looks as though he had made a discovery +of some sort.”</p> + +<p>The chums put on an extra burst of speed, and +soon had reached the spot where Dick was standing.</p> + +<p>“What’s all the commotion about?” inquired +Garry half breathlessly, as they clambered up on +to the bank. “We thought you were calling for +help.”</p> + +<p>“I am truly sorry I frightened you, but I just +found something that we may need before our stay +at the camp is done,” and Dick led the way into +the woods for a few feet. “I got out on the bank +to rest a bit, and thought I saw signs of a camp +having been here at one time or another, so I nosed +around and tucked away in the brush I found this,” +and displacing some of the debris that had fallen +around the object, Dick disclosed a birch-bark +canoe, made after Indian fashion.</p> + +<p>“I should say that was a find,” exclaimed Garry. +“Now we can do all the exploring around here that +we want to, and if we find nothing here we can +portage the canoe across the woods to Dutton Lake +and continue our investigation.”</p> + +<p>They were disappointed, however, for on dragging +out the canoe, they found that a great hole +had been torn in the bottom.</p> + +<p>“Now wouldn’t that jar you. I wish I had +looked at it more carefully before I called to you,” +said Dick in a disappointed tone.</p> + +<p>“Let your Uncle Dudley take a look,” ordered +Garry. After a few moment’s investigation, he +straightened up. “It can be repaired easily with +what simple tools we have and a little help from +old Mother Nature. Our only trouble will be a +swim of about four miles. Two across to the point +that I noted when I looked through my glasses, and +two back to where we want to do our work, which +had better be here.”</p> + +<p>“I think I begin to see faint glimmerings of what +you intend to do,” said Phil, as he scanned the end +of the lake that came within his vision. Phil had +abnormally keen eyes, and could often see things +that the other boys required a glass to discern.</p> + +<p>“Well, Sherlock, what do I intend to do?” asked +Garry with a laugh.</p> + +<p>“It seems to me, if my eyes don’t fail me, that I +can see a sort of a white clump of woods about two +miles distant, at least the sunshine casts a brighter +glare than it does on the green of the pines and +spruces. Now to me that spells b-i-r-c-h. Am I +right?”</p> + +<p>“Right again. That’s just what I have in mind. +Let’s start. We ought to be able to have a fine +canoe by noon if we don’t loiter.”</p> + +<p>They swam back to where they had left their +clothes, and it was decided that Phil should stay +behind to guard their clothes, packs and rifles. +Garry got his hatchet and sheath off his belt, and +tucked his knife safely into the sheath of the axe +blade. Then by knotting two of the bandanna +handkerchiefs that they customarily wore about +their necks, he made a sort of a strap affair and +tied the axe securely on his back between his shoulder +blades. This left his arms perfectly free for +swimming, and then he and Dick set out with easy +strokes for their destination across the lake. They +took plenty of time and occasionally rolled over to +float on their backs so that they could rest. At +last, after several resting spells, which were mainly +for Garry’s benefit, as Dick could have done the +whole distance without fatiguing himself in the +slightest, they reached the clump of birches.</p> + +<p>Resting a few moments on the bank, they proceeded +to strip a good section of bark from one of +the birches. This was a simple matter, as all that +was necessary to do was to cut a girdle around the +tree a few inches from the bottom, and another +about three feet above. Then a vertical cut was +made between the two girdles, and after about +twenty minutes of prying the bark from the trunk +with the knife, the two taking turns at the task, +they had the roll of bark neatly cut off.</p> + +<p>“Now if we could only find a swampy place +around here where there would be some tamarack +trees, we could get a couple of the crooked roots for +which the tamarack is noted, and that would furnish +us with a rib for the canoe. As it is, we will +have to makeshift with that twisted birch branch +that I see, which Nature seemed to have put there +for our particular use today,” and Garry proceeded +to get the branch as he spoke.</p> + +<p>“We can roll this up and tie it with a strip of +handkerchief, and push it along with us on the +return swim. Then it will be a small job to repair +the canoe.”</p> + +<p>“What are you going to use to attach it to the +bottom of the canoe where it is broken,” asked +Dick.</p> + +<p>“I have something in my knapsack. For some +reason or other, while in Bangor, I bought a ball of +extra fine linen cord, and one day while we were in +the woods at Sourdehunq I needed some shoemaker’s +wax, and didn’t have it, so last time we were +in town I bought a piece. I never expected to use +it to repair a boat with, however, just bought the +stuff in case an occasion arose where we might +need it. Now it will come in handy,” and as he +finished, Garry slipped back into the water. The +return trip occupied somewhat longer, as the bark +was a bit unwieldy as they pushed it ahead of them.</p> + +<p>When they returned to the spot where they had +left Phil, the sun was almost in the center of the +sky, denoting it was near noon. They found that +Phil had improved the time while they were absent +and had started a fire and caught several good bass.</p> + +<p>“Best fishing here I ever saw. I don’t believe a +line has been thrown in this patch of water for +years, the fish just jump at the bait,” shouted Phil +with the true Isaac Walton enthusiasm.</p> + +<p>“I also got a couple of pickerel that were so foolish +as to leap at my bait, and have enough for dinner +and some to take back to the camp with us +tonight.”</p> + +<p>All were so eager to get at the business of fixing +the boat, that they hurried through lunch with +extra speed. Then they sped through the woods to +the spot where the old canoe had been found.</p> + +<p>As Garry prepared to repair the boat, he began +to laugh at something that seemed to be amusing +him greatly.</p> + +<p>“Let us in on the joke,” asked Phil. “You are +grinning there to yourself like a Cheshire cat.”</p> + +<p>“I was just thinking that either Barrows is a +fool or takes us for brainless idiots. The idea of +telling us that there was nothing in the camp with +which a boat could be calked, and there are only +some hundreds of square miles in the state just full +of the finest thing in the world. Nothing more +than the pitch on the pine trees all around us.”</p> + +<p>“I noticed it this morning when the manager +remarked about it, but thought it just as well to +keep my knowledge to myself,” remarked Dick.</p> + +<p>“All right, then, you fellows set to work with +your knives and dig a lot of those pitch lumps off +the trees and then start a fire and melt it in your +drinking cup. It will spoil the cup, but we can +easily get another one,” directed Garry.</p> + +<p>The boys immediately set about doing his bidding, +and as they worked, Garry got out his knapsack +and proceeded to rummage through it for the +linen cord and the shoemaker’s wax. Having +found them, he set to work to wax the cord thoroughly, +making it less likely to shrink. Next he +examined the broken rib of the canoe, and determined +how much of the birch branch he would +need to repair it. He took his knife and shaved a +long diagonal slant on the piece of rib in the canoe, +then matched the slant on the piece of branch. +Having fixed them so they would fit, he took a +piece of fishing line and wound it carefully around +the joint, starting several inches above where the +two pieces joined, and continuing for several inches +onto the firm wood beyond the spot where the repair +was made. This is called “splicing.” Most +boys have spliced a fishing pole or a broken bat in +much the same way.</p> + +<p>The rib having been spliced, the next step was +the patching of the hole. Garry got the birch bark, +and laid it over the gaping rent in the bottom of +the craft, and marked a line around so that it overlapped +the hole by about four inches. The extra +bark was then trimmed away, and he was ready to +sew it on. He took the awl blade of his knife and +punched a series of holes around, piercing both the +patch and the bark of the canoe. Having done this, +he called for the hot pitch and poured it on around +the edge of the hole. Then he firmly laid the patch +on, and as the pitch cooled it formed a sort of a +natural mucilage. Garry had previously waxed one +end of the cord so that it would be easy to stick it +through the holes, and working swiftly he threaded +the cord in. When the job was completed, he reversed +his steps, so that the result was a firmly +sewn patch.</p> + +<p>Nothing else remained to do but to daub hot +pitch liberally over the seam on both sides, and calk +the edges where the patch was attached to the +craft.</p> + +<p>“There,” said Garry, as he stepped back and +proudly surveyed his handiwork. “That’s a craft +that will be as seaworthy, or rather as lakeworthy, +if there is such a word, as one could want.”</p> + +<p>“Um, let me see,” mused Dick aloud, as he +looked over the canoe. “There’s one other quite +necessary thing to be done.”</p> + +<p>“Well, smarty, what is there to be done,” asked +Garry a trifle hotly.</p> + +<p>“I was just wondering whether we would rig up +a sail or have you a gas engine in your knapsack +with which to make this gallant ship navigate?” +asked Dick as he burst into laughter, in which he +was joined, first by Phil, and a bit later by Garry, +when he saw that the joke was on him.</p> + +<p>“Phil, you’re the handy man with the knife, what +say to a couple of paddles?” asked Garry after the +laughter had subsided.</p> + +<p>“Have ’em for you in an hour. That’s quick +work, however, and I won’t promise you a very +handsome product.”</p> + +<p>“We won’t bother about looks as long as they +will propel the canoe through the water. That remark +of Dick’s about the sail, although it was intended +to be humorous, isn’t such a bad idea either, +only there is no way that I can think of right now +to make a sail. We’ll browse around the camp +when we get back and see if we can dig up a bit of +canvas and make one of those lateen sails, you +know those triangular shaped affairs such as the +boats in the Mediterranean use,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>While he was talking, Phil had already set to +work to make a pair of paddles. “Now you chaps +watch me, and after I have fixed one with the axe, +or as much as one can do with an axe blade, I’ll get +to work with the knife,” he said.</p> + +<p>Phil selected spruce about five inches in diameter +and felled it to the ground.</p> + +<p>“I hate to spoil a perfectly good tree, but in this +case certainly necessity knows no law.”</p> + +<p>He chopped off two sections a little over five feet +in length, and then proceeded to hew one swiftly +into a board. This took some little time, despite +the fact that he worked at top speed every moment. +His last work with the axe was to fashion very +crudely the handle.</p> + +<p>“Now I am going to whittle just the top and a +place where the hand will come in contact with the +neck or shaft of the paddle. To try and smooth it +up would take too long, and all that really needs +to be smooth are the places where we will have to +hold it. If it was left rough we would soon accumulate +a crop of blisters. While I am whittling, you +chaps can fashion that other section into form as I +did.”</p> + +<p>After he had whittled enough, Phil sprang to +his feet and said, “If I am not mistaken, I saw an +old bottle near the remains of a campfire, and that +will be just what I want.” He sped away to where +he had seen the vestiges of some fisherman’s fire, +and soon found what he required. He smashed this +against a stone, and with the fragments scraped the +spots he had whittled smooth and free from lumps.</p> + +<p>The second paddle was not long in the making, +but the entire job had taken well over three hours. +“We have about three hours before it is time to eat, +and we might as well put our canoe to the test, and +see if it works,” announced Dick.</p> + +<p>“Time to eat! Don’t you ever think of anything +but eating?” demanded Garry.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; when I’m not thinking about time to +eat, I’m thinking about what to eat,” responded +Dick promptly.</p> + +<p>“Say, Phil, he’s hopeless. What say we make +for that outlet at the far end of the lake. We +might just as well do that as anything, since we +have no real plan of action. Then tomorrow we +can make a complete tour of the lake, and thus get +a comprehensive idea of the whole body of water.”</p> + +<p>The canoe was launched, and the boys climbed +in. Garry and Phil elected to paddle, leaving Dick +to sit in the middle.</p> + +<p>“If that patch will hold Dick up, you can be sure +it’s a good job, Garry,” laughed Phil, as they +pushed off.</p> + +<p>“So that was why you chaps were so kind as to +do all the paddling. I’m to be the happy little subject +of the experiment. Well, if I get a ducking +there is some consolation in the fact that you two +will follow suit,” said Dick good naturedly.</p> + +<p>Garry had done a fine bit of work, however, and +the craft proved to be all that they hoped it would. +They made it dance through the water and were +delighted to find that they could make much better +speed than in the ordinary wooden canoe. The +only thing necessary, however, was to keep perfectly +quiet, as the balance of a bark craft is a +much more precarious thing than that of a solid +factory made canoe.</p> + +<p>It took them but a short time to reach the outlet, +and they beached their boat and started on a +tour down the stream, which was a shallow, weedy +affair.</p> + +<p>Their early scout training, and their need of +vigilance during their patrolling of the woods when +on duty as fire rangers had made their powers of +observation especially keen, and it was second nature +almost for them to note signs of trail that +would be unseen by one unversed in the lore of the +woods and forests.</p> + +<p>They had walked about a quarter of a mile, when +Phil’s exclamation made them pause.</p> + +<p>“There’s fresh trail there, or I’m no good at sign +reading any more,” remarked Phil. The boys +gazed at the ground and quickly saw that Phil was +right.</p> + +<p>With no wasted words, they turned and followed +the slightly outlined trail. It took only a few minutes +for them to reach a crude log shack, one that +had evidently been constructed early that summer, +as the fresh cut logs showed.</p> + +<p>The door swung loose on crude rope hinges, and +after debating a moment they decided to enter: +They found practically nothing in the way of furniture. +There were no bunks, but a pile of boughs +had been thrown in each corner, and a rough table +had been built in a corner of the hut. On this reposed +several dirty tin dishes. The remains of the +food were still fresh, showing that someone had +eaten there within the past day or so.</p> + +<p>“That means that they are apt to be back at any +time, and so we’d better light out. It may be some +camper and it may be some enemy. I am inclined +to think it the latter, for a camper would have taken +some pains to make things just a little bit more comfortable,” +said Garry. “I think, however, we will +plan to keep watch of this place and see who happens +to occupy it.”</p> + +<p>“Well, I can tell you right now that it is someone +from the logging camp. One of those who are +mixed up in the trouble there. Look under that +table on the floor!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER XII<br/>DICK DISAPPEARS</h2> + +<p>The others bent forward curiously and gazed at +the floor. There, laying in a little mess of debris, +as though it had slipped from the pocket of some +one who had been sitting at the table, was the knife +with Dick’s name on it, that he had bought of the +sidewalk merchant in Bangor!</p> + +<p>“Isn’t that conclusive proof that it’s someone +from the camp?” demanded Dick as he rescued the +knife.</p> + +<p>“It surely is, and they are up to no good. Why +should anyone from the cutting have a place over +here? It’s a signal for us to get out and get out +quick. There’s one good thing, though, we can set +the hermit to watching over here and leave ourselves +free to go about other business. We’ll pace +out the distances and draw a rough map and leave it +in the tree postoffice so that the old fellow can come +over here and keep watch,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>Being careful to leave no traces of having been +in the cabin, they hastened outside. They had +hardly gone two feet, though, when Dick darted +back. He rejoined his companions almost instantly, +and answered their puzzled stare with this explanation:</p> + +<p>“I’ve just sacrificed my good knife. The thought +came to me that one of them, the man who found it, +might have remembered dropping it there, and +would at once know that someone had been in the +cabin if it was missing.”</p> + +<p>“Good headwork, Dick,” said Garry approvingly.</p> + +<p>They took it on the run back to where their +canoe was beached, and soon were on their way +back across the lake.</p> + +<p>“I wish that we had more time without fear of +interruption,” said Garry, “for it is likely that the +occupants of the cabin have a canoe hidden somewhere +along the bank of the lake. Safest thing +now, however, is to get back to the other side of +the lake, where we have an excuse for being.”</p> + +<p>“I am afraid that there will be little use in watching +that cabin, however, for it is quite probable +that Barrows will warn those who are living there +that we are swimming and fishing around the lake, +and advise them to seek a new hiding place,” observed +Phil.</p> + +<p>“That’s a fact,” answered Garry. “Still, there’s +no harm in trying. It was only by extreme carefulness +in watching for signs that we discovered that +trail. It was probably the one that the men use to +get water, and the cabin is well hidden. One would +not stumble on it casually in a long time.”</p> + +<p>It was sundown by this time, and they held a +council to decide whether they would camp there +for the night or go back to the lumber camp. They +were all anxious to visit the big lake, however, and +so it was decided to return.</p> + +<p>“After the camp is quiet we can skip out and +visit our other objective,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>Taking their fish out of the water, where they +had been placed to keep fresh, they trekked towards +home. It was about dark when they reached the +camp, and about the first person they met was Barrows. +He was all curiosity to know how they had +spent the day, and they returned equivocal answers, +being careful to make no mention of the canoe +which they had carefully hidden before starting +away from the lake.</p> + +<p>The manager admired the fish, and thanked the +boys for offering them to provide breakfast on the +coming day. Pleading their strenuous walk and +day as an excuse, they retired early to the shack.</p> + +<p>Here a campaign was speedily decided on. Dick +was to go back to the office and chat for a few +moments, while the others slipped out of camp. +This would make it appear that they were in the +neighborhood, and after a reasonable time, Dick +could return and retire for the night.</p> + +<p>Dick wandered back to the office to engage the +manager in a talk about fishing and the possibility +of a long hike to extend over a week or more, while +Garry and Phil made for the lake.</p> + +<p>The tote road that had been made to transport +the sawed lumber ran for a short distance along +the lakeside. Here there was a slightly wider place +made so that the tractors that met each other could +pass with ease. The ground was here covered with +broken branches and debris of all sorts, well +tramped into the ground. Garry flashed his lamp +about and searched for signs of any sort, but +seemed to find none. Then he went to the lake edge +and peered about.</p> + +<p>Some peculiar formation of rock made a sort of +a ledge that stood about three feet above the water. +This ledge interested Garry immensely, but he said +nothing as he wanted more time to puzzle out the +situation before coming to any definite conclusions. +At the point where the tote road had been widened, +there was a triple string of broad wheeled flat cars +loaded with lumber.</p> + +<p>“Now I wonder why these cars were left here,” +asked Phil.</p> + +<p>“That’s easy. The drivers knock off work at a +regular hour, and when that time comes, if they +have not gone very far on their trip, they simply +come back to the camp and wait until morning. +That is to prevent accidents which running in the +dark might bring about,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>“Hush, what’s that?” asked Phil. Both boys listened +intently. Far off across the lake they heard +a faint chugging noise. Sometimes it seemed to +cease altogether, then as the breeze stirred they +could hear it, getting fainter and fainter.</p> + +<p>“Phil, I’ve discovered the secret of the stolen +timber or I’m a Chinaman. That noise solves the +whole proposition. That sound that we heard is +the engine of a powerful motor boat. And Barrows +insisted that there was no kind of water transportation +on either lake. Now why should he lie about +it unless he had some ulterior motive in covering +up the presence of a boat? This is the answer or +I’ll return from our mission and tell Dad I’m not +bright enough to solve the mystery.”</p> + +<p>“What have you doped out,” asked Phil, as +Garry paused for a moment.</p> + +<p>“Just this. I’ll bet you a dollar to a doughnut +that the drivers that are in on this timber stealing +business have it so arranged that there is always a +load of cars waiting here overnight. That’s step +number one. Now we have a rock formation here +that makes a perfectly good wharf. Next you have +noticed that all the chips and bits of broken +branches strewn between the turnout here and that +strip of rock. That’s just to hide the footprints that +are made by the thieves. So far so good. How +does this strike you? That motor boat that we +heard is a big one, at least it had immense pulling +strength. I know enough about engines to tell from +the sound how good they are. That boat is probably +used to draw a raft across the lake. Just after +midnight, or some safe time during the dark hours, +a raft can be backed against that natural wharf +there, and in half an hour enough lumber can be +carried from the flat cars to the raft to make it a +profitable night’s work. Why, the whole thing is +as plain as a pikestaff. Phil, we’ve got everything +nearly dead to rights now!”</p> + +<p>“What’s the next step then, old timer? Shall we +hike out and write, or wire your father to come on +so we can show him what’s going on?” questioned +Phil.</p> + +<p>“Not yet a bit, there’s still something else we +must find out. Is this a part of the treachery to +ruin Dad’s enterprise here, or is it a private bit of +work on the part of Barrows?”</p> + +<p>“How’s this for a guess? The people that are +behind Barrows, meaning those that have bribed +him to play false to the trust your father put in +him, may have outlined this whole scheme, and +offered to give Barrows as his pay what he can +make off the stolen timber. At the rate that it has +been disappearing, one-fifth and one-quarter at a +time, as the report that Howells received would +show, and at the price which lumber is bringing today, +that would be pretty good pay for one summer. +Chances are that the interests that are opposing +Mr. Boone are paying all the expenses. +Their only idea is to put him out of business for +breaking up their combination and going into business +on his own hook. If that’s the kind of men +they are, I don’t blame your father for getting out +of the combination.”</p> + +<p>“I think you have the right idea, Phil. My, I +wish we had our canoe over here. We could paddle +across the lake and investigate the other side +and see what is done with the timber once it is +rafted over the water,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>“No use in wishing. Best thing we can do is hike +for home and turn in. Then tomorrow we can +make arrangements to go on, say a three day hike. +We can portage the canoe across country, and hide +out along the bank until nightfall. The moon is in +its last quarter now, and by night after tomorrow +it will be dark. We can paddle out well into the +lake and wait for what transpires. When we hear +the raft and motor boat coming we can paddle far +enough to be unobserved and then follow it by +sound. The boat will probably travel without lights +for two reasons. First, it is safe enough as there is +probably no other craft on the lake, and secondly, +they will not want to attract any undue attention. +Then we can note the spot where the raft docks, +and in the morning can follow it to whatever rail +spur the stuff is taken. With what help Howells +may be able to give us on the outside, we ought to +have the thing pretty well in hand. What do you +think of my suggestion?” asked Phil almost breathlessly, +as he concluded.</p> + +<p>“Phew, that’s the longest speech I ever heard you +make, Phil, but you sure said something every minute. +That’s what we’ll do. Now let’s get back.”</p> + +<p>The whole occurrence had taken less than an +hour and a half, and when they reached the camp +they noted that a light was still burning in the +manager’s office. On arriving at their shack they +were somewhat surprised to find that Dick was not +there.</p> + +<p>“He’s doing a good job,” laughed Garry. +“Either he is really interested in what Barrows has +to say, or he is playing to give us time to do what +we wanted to. Well, he can stay there all night +if he wants to, I’m going to roll into my blanket +and dream sweet dreams. Dick’s a night hawk +anyway most of the time. Goodnight.” And Garry +yawned and soon was fast asleep. Later development +will show that it would have been wise on +the part of the boys to look in on the manager at +that time. Had they done so, their work would +have been greatly simplified. However, they were +not mind readers and so days of trouble were in +store for them.</p> + +<p>Morning came, and when Garry, always the first +one to awake, tumbled out of bed, he cast one look +at Dick’s bunk, and then rushing over to the other +side of the shack, vigorously shook Phil.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter?” demanded Phil in a +startled voice, sitting upright in his bunk. “Anything +the trouble?”</p> + +<p>“That’s what I cannot tell you right this minute, +Phil, but Dick hasn’t been here all night!”</p> + +<p>Phil leaped out of his bunk and looked at the +spot where their companion usually slept. The +blankets were still neatly in place, and it needed +only a glance to see that no one had used it that +night.</p> + +<p>The boys hurried into their clothes and rushed +to the office building where Barrows and the camp +officers slept. No one was stirring, and Garry was +about to pound on the door when he saw the +cookee coming from the cookhouse with a pail in +each hand for the morning cooking water.</p> + +<p>Garry called to him and asked if he had seen +Dick that morning.</p> + +<p>“Naw,” was the grouchy answer. “Why should +I have seen him? I don’t know anything about +him.”</p> + +<p>The sound of the voices awakened Barrows and +he came and stuck his head out of the window.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter?” he asked.</p> + +<p>“Why, Dick hasn’t been around all night, and +we were looking for him. Have you seen him +since last night?” asked Garry.</p> + +<p>“I haven’t seen him since the three of you went +to your shack last night!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER XIII<br/>THE CIPHER</h2> + +<p>The boys were dumbfounded by Barrows’ +answer.</p> + +<p>“What’s that you say?” demanded Garry.</p> + +<p>“I said I had not seen him since the three of you +went to your shack last night to turn in. Isn’t that +plain enough?” reiterated the manager.</p> + +<p>“Well, all we know is that just after we got to +the shack, Dick left to come back here and have a +chat with you and get some information about the +country, as we had some little thought of taking a +week’s hike up into the wild lands that lie to the +northwest.”</p> + +<p>“If he started for this office he never got here, for +I sat up late trying to straighten out the tangle that +Howells left behind him. No one came near the +office all that time. Perhaps your chum has gone +off on some little private expedition.”</p> + +<p>Garry was quick to notice that there was a malicious +ring in the manager’s voice. At once the +uncomfortable feeling overcame him that their night’s +work had been discovered. Garry was at a loss +what course to pursue. He could make no accusation +of any kind, for Dick might have stumbled on +some clue that took him off on the trail.</p> + +<p>“Well, you can understand that we are a little +bit worried over the matter, especially since this is +strange country to Dick. He might have wandered +into the woods and got lost.” Garry knew that this +was next to impossible, but he could think of nothing +better to say at the moment.</p> + +<p>“My advice is that you wait a bit, and you will +probably find that he is all right. He’ll very likely +show up in a little while. I wouldn’t worry,” said +Barrows.</p> + +<p>There was nothing to do for the moment but take +the manager’s advice, and the boys returned to the +shack.</p> + +<p>“Phil, there’s bad business afoot here somewhere. +At such a time as this, Dick would not have gone +off to follow a clue without leaving us some sort +of a note or even a sign. He could leave a half a +dozen different signs that we all know to denote +trouble. He hasn’t taken anything with him. His +rifle is still there and so is his pack. If it were +some mission of danger that he had gone on he +would at least have taken his rifle. Now what +shall we do?”</p> + +<p>“Let’s give him till noon in case it was such a +hurried matter that he had not time to run back for +his rifle. We might even wait until six o’clock. +You know we have always made it a rule that we +should never be gone more than twenty-four hours +on a search without letting the others know in some +way that we are safe. Sundown tonight would not +be exactly twenty-four hours, but it would be near +enough,” advised Phil. Garry agreed that this was +sound advice and they went off to breakfast. They +found Barrows was almost through.</p> + +<p>“Why don’t you fellows start out this morning +and look for him? One of you could go in one +direction and one in the other. If you know anything +of the woods, you could soon find signs of +him if he were wandering about,” suggested Barrows.</p> + +<p>Garry told him that they had decided to wait +until nightfall before getting really worried. At +this the manager allowed a satisfied gleam to show +in his eyes. Both the boys were narrowly watching +him, and noted this. After breakfast they came +back to the shack, and once safe inside, Garry whispered +to Phil:</p> + +<p>“Watch every move from now on. That business +of Barrows telling us to go in different directions +on such a wild goose chase was entirely too +obvious. He wants us to get separated. Keep your +rifle close by you every minute, and tonight we’ll +establish a watch same as we have done in the +woods when there was danger near. First thing +this morning is to go to the spot where we agreed +to leave notes for the hermit, and leave a letter telling +him what has happened and asking him to take +a look at the shack on the other side of Kanamo +Lake.”</p> + +<p>Hastily writing the note, and watching that they +were not followed they slipped out of the camp and +ran to the appointed postoffice.</p> + +<p>Garry reached his hand in as a matter of course, +and was surprised to find that there was a note in +the natural receptacle.</p> + +<p>He brought it out, and with Phil leaning over his +shoulder, read it. It contained a distinct shock for +both. Here was what they read:</p> + +<p>“Attacked by men and letter to your father +stolen. Hit on head and left lying in road. Use +all caution. The Bear is in the woods.”</p> + +<p>The usual lone pine symbol was attached.</p> + +<p>“Well, we are discovered, Garry,” said Phil. +“Barrows must have had the hermit followed and +has read the letter. I wouldn’t be a bit surprised +if he knew what we talked about last night. Question +now is whether he was instrumental in bringing +about Dick’s absence.”</p> + +<p>“I am afraid that we have sort of made a mess +of things, Phil. We haven’t given Barrows enough +credit, or else we have been too sure of ourselves. +There is a good chance, however, and this note +makes me think it highly likely that Jean LeBlanc +may have captured Dick again. You know he +seems determined to do him harm, even more so +than us, for he and Dick have tangled up three or +four times now, and each time Dick has managed +to elude him and make more or less of a fool of +him. This naturally would make an even more +implacable enemy of the vengeful halfbreed. Let’s +get back to camp and wait awhile. We will pry +about the entire camp to see if there is any sign of +Dick, and also we will be safer for the time being. +Don’t think I am cowardly, only we want to take +no chances if we are to help Dick and at the same +time complete our mission here.”</p> + +<p>They returned to the camp, and as they walked, +Garry tore the hermit’s note into tiny, indistinguishable +fragments, throwing each tiny particle to the +winds.</p> + +<p>The day dragged on, although they tried to make +it pass quickly by searching through the camp. +Night came at last, and they turned in. Before +retiring they arranged for alternate watches, and +also decided that on the morrow they would insist +that a message be sent for Mr. Boone. The boys +had almost decided that rather than allow Dick to +fall into greater danger by protracting the time of +a systematic search, they would tell what they had +learned to Mr. Boone and let him force the issue of +the stolen timber.</p> + +<p>It was nearly eleven o’clock and Phil, who was on +watch, was about to wake Garry for his turn at +sentry duty, when he heard a cautious fumbling at +the door, and the sound of a low malediction when +the intruder found that it was locked. There was +silence for a moment, and then Phil heard the +sound of someone breathing heavily at the window. +He crept noiselessly to Garry’s bunk, and holding +his hand over his chum’s mouth lest he make a sudden +noise, shook him awake. Garry was aroused in +an instant, and all sleep vanished. He knew from +feeling Phil’s hands against his mouth that caution +was needed.</p> + +<p>Having roused Garry, Phil crept back to the window +just in time to hear a faint swish. Instantly +he knew that the intruder was cutting the double +thickness of heavy mosquito bar with a knife, and +guided by the sound, clubbed his rifle and brought +it down with full force. There was a howl of pain, +and the sound of someone running away at top +speed.</p> + +<p>“Must have clipped that chap either on the head +or the hand,” whispered Phil. “Guess he won’t be +here again tonight.”</p> + +<p>“Looks as though the war was on. You roll in +and I’ll watch for a couple of hours now. Good +thing we used our old trick of sentry work, or we +might be in a bad position right now,” answered +Garry.</p> + +<p>For another hour nothing happened. Then there +was a pounding at the door and Barrows’ voice was +heard calling the names of Garry and Phil. Suspecting +a trick, both boys reached for their rifles, +and after lighting a candle, Garry covered the door +with his rifle while Phil opened it.</p> + +<p>Barrows stepped in and seemed to be taken back +by the sight of the rifle leveled at his head.</p> + +<p>“Why the military greeting?” he asked with an +attempt at good humor.</p> + +<p>“Taking no chances,” answered Garry briefly, +for he had a feeling that it was almost time to tear +the mask away. “We had one visitor here tonight, +and we didn’t know what to expect.”</p> + +<p>Garry explained his statement about the visitor +by briefly telling of the attempt that had been made +to enter the cabin an hour previously. Barrows +passed this off by offering the suggestion that some +of the lumbermen were naturally ruffians, and might +have wanted to commit burglary.</p> + +<p>“What I woke you up for was to tell you that a +man has come here with a note that he refuses to +deliver to anyone but you boys. He’s at my office +now, and all he will say is that your friend Dick’s +safety depends on obeying what is in the note. Of +course I could have summoned some of the men and +had him overpowered, but thought you boys might +like to handle the matter for yourselves.”</p> + +<p>The boys put on their shoes and coats, for they +had gone to bed almost fully dressed, and prepared +to follow Barrows.</p> + +<p>“Careful now,” whispered Garry, as he passed +Phil.</p> + +<p>There seemed to be little need for caution, however, +for they were unmolested on their way. At +the office they found an unkempt dirty looking individual.</p> + +<p>“Be these the boys,” he asked of Barrows, pointing +a dirty finger at Garry and Phil.</p> + +<p>“Yes, these are the ones. Now state your business +and do it quick,” snapped Barrows.</p> + +<p>“This letter tells the hull story,” answered the +man in a hoarse voice, and he handed a crumpled +piece of paper to Garry.</p> + +<p>The leader of the Rangers took the note and read +it in silence, then handed it over to Phil.</p> + +<p>What they read was this:</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-right:2em;'>“Have been captured by Jean LeBlanc. Have +been forced to write this letter to you. LeBlanc +wants a thousand dollars for my freedom. You +are either to bring it with you, or make arrangements +for its delivery at a spot known to the bearer +of this letter. Warn you that any attempt to molest +bearer will result in serious injury or worse to me. +You know I would not ask this unless I were in +grave peril. Don’t fail me. Follow bearer’s directions.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-right:2em;'>“Being emergency will ask ransom emphatically.</p> + +<p style='text-align:right; margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0;'>“<span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Dick Wallace</span>.”</p> + +<p>“That’s Dick’s writing, sure enough. He must +have been tortured into writing that letter, else he +would never have done it,” said Garry between his +teeth. “Now Barrows, the time has come for a +showdown. What do you know about this matter? +Speak up, and speak up quick!”</p> + +<p>“What should I know about it. I don’t know +what’s in the letter about your friend,” answered +Barrows taken back by the tone of Garry’s grim +voice.</p> + +<p>“How do you know it’s about our friend?” demanded +Garry quick as a flash.</p> + +<p>“Why, the bearer here told me that it had to do +with one of the three boys who were staying here,” +answered Barrows weakly.</p> + +<p>“I think you’re lying, Barrows, but I can’t prove +it. Here, read the letter.”</p> + +<p>He handed the crumpled note over to the +manager, who took it and read it in silence. Then he +burst into a protest.</p> + +<p>“I never heard of this Jean LeBlanc. Why do +you connect me with the matter? I never even +heard the name LeBlanc.”</p> + +<p>“You had a Baptiste LeBlanc working for you +until Howells insisted that he be discharged, didn’t +you?” continued Garry implacably.</p> + +<p>“Why, there may have been a man of that name. +I remember Howells insisting that a man be discharged, +but I never pay much attention to the +names of the lumberjacks, at least to their last +names. I leave that to the timekeeper and the section +bosses. You misunderstand me entirely. I +am ready to give you all my help. What do you +propose to do?”</p> + +<p>“First place I am going to start back with this +man here and look into the matter. Of course we +have no money to take with us, but I am going to +be assured that Dick is safe. You will get the necessary +ransom from the bank at town, and thirty-six +hours from now you will start with it to some +place where this man will appoint. We will be +there at the time with Dick. In the meantime telegraph +my father to get here with all speed. Now, +Barrows, I’m putting this matter up to you. If you +fail in any way it will be so much the worse for you. +I’m trusting you only because I have to in an +emergency. Don’t fall down, or we’ll make you +the sorriest man you could ever dream of being. +Phil, keep these men covered with your rifle until I +go back and get our packs. Don’t let them stir out +of your sight or move a finger.”</p> + +<p>Garry concluded his words, and tearing a leaf +from his notebook, wrote hastily for several moments, +then left the cabin. Barrows made as +though he would follow, but a menacing gesture +from Phil made him keep his seat.</p> + +<p>Once outside the cabin, Garry sped away into the +woods like a deer. He was extremely cautious with +every step, however, lest a snag or root trip him +and disable him at this crucial moment. The note +that he had written contained explicit directions to +the hermit to get word to Mr. Boone by telegraph, +and then see if he could pick up their trail and follow +them. He knew the old man was an expert at +trailing, and Garry wrote that he would leave signs +on the way from the hollow tree postoffice.</p> + +<p>The return to the camp was somewhat slower, +for he stopped occasionally to blaze an X in a tree, +or dig a slight hole in the ground with his toe. He +wished that he had time to make a more distinct +trail, but there was the danger that a plain one +might be noted by one of Barrows’ aides, and obliterated. +He was trusting that the hermit could +find it, versed as he was in all the lore of the +woods.</p> + +<p>Back at the office with his knapsack and that of +Phil, he asked what had transpired while he was +gone. Phil told him that a meeting place had been +agreed on.</p> + +<p>“Now,” said Garry sharply, “can you lead us +where you came from in the dark?”</p> + +<p>“Guess I can, came here in the dark,” was the +surly response of the guide.</p> + +<p>“Then start travelling. Now, Barrows, first sign +of any treachery from anyone in the camp will +mean that first I’ll shoot this guide and second anyone +within range of my rifle. Now hike,” this last +remark being addressed to the man.</p> + +<p>Out of the camp toward the northeast led the +way, and as they walked Indian file, they took every +step as though it were a path strewn with glass. +Once outside the camp, having been bothered by no +one, Garry called a halt.</p> + +<p>Keeping a sharp eye on the guide, Garry whispered +to Phil:</p> + +<p>“Notice anything funny about that note of +Dick’s?”</p> + +<p>“Not particularly, except that I took exceptional +care to be sure that it was Dick’s writing,” answered +Phil.</p> + +<p>“Did you remember the last line?” he questioned +further.</p> + +<p>“I think I could repeat it over by heart.”</p> + +<p>“Then use your head and look for the very obvious +code in the last six words,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>Phil repeated them aloud two or three times, then +fell silent. Then he gave vent to a low exclamation.</p> + +<p>“Why, it’s as plain as the nose on your face. +It’s just the first initials and they spell Beware!”</p> + +<p>“Exactly; that’s step number one. Now the +second thing is the note itself. It was written on +brown paper. Safe thing to write such a letter on, +anyone might have it in his possession. The queer +part is that on the shelf high over Barrows’ desk +was a bundle of report blanks wrapped in the same +identical kind of paper, only the wrapper was torn. +I couldn’t think of any way to clear the office, but +I bet I could have matched this scrap to the torn +place in the report!”</p> + +<p>“Then you think that Dick has been at the camp +all the time?” queried Phil half incredulously.</p> + +<p>“Don’t think it, I’m sure of it.”</p> + +<p>“What are we to do, then?” asked Phil.</p> + +<p>“I have that all doped out. We’ll let this chap +lead us a couple of miles or so further on and then +overpower him and tie him up and leave him there +while we double back and search the camp.”</p> + +<p>Garry gave the order to march again, and they +started on their way. Had Garry been gifted with +second sight, he would never have left the spot +where they had held the conference, for they had +gone only a short distance when the guide asked +them to halt.</p> + +<p>“What’s it worth to you fellows if I tell you all +about this business? You ain’t going to meet your +friend where I’m taking you; it was just to get +you away from the camp that I led you out here. +But you can’t make me tell anything, or LeBlanc +would kill me. But I’ll take a chance for money.”</p> + +<p>This sudden development puzzled Garry. He +did not know exactly what to make of it, so he decided +to temporize for a few minutes, and gain time +to think.</p> + +<p>“Where is LeBlanc now?” he asked.</p> + +<p>“Right there at the camp was where I last saw +him.”</p> + +<p>The answer was such a surprise that Garry’s +guard was lowered for a moment, then there was a +scurry and rush of feet, and a half a dozen forms +leaped out from behind the trees near them, and +before either boy could make a move with his rifle, +they were in the hands of the enemy.</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER XIV<br/>DICK’S MISFORTUNE</h2> + +<p>Now what of Dick all this time? Let us go back +to the night when Garry and Phil had started for +the Dutton Lake to see what could be found out +about the stolen timber.</p> + +<p>Barrows, of course, had not told the truth when +he said that he had not seen Dick after they had +gone to their shack.</p> + +<p>He had come into the office as had been agreed +upon, and engaged Barrows in conversation about +fishing. Barrows had chatted cordially for a brief +while, and then excused himself for a moment to +give orders to one of the section bosses whom he +heard outside.</p> + +<p>Dick heard him give the order to work on the +coming day, delivered in a loud tone of voice, and +almost instantly after the close of the conversation +he came into the office again.</p> + +<p>The conversation was picked up where they had +left off, and they chatted like old friends for nearly +a half an hour.</p> + +<p>Finally, Dick heard the cookie calling for Barrows +to come out a moment, and Barrows obeyed +the summons. Knowing that the cookie was suspected +of being in league with the traitors in the +camp, Dick walked softly to the door and tried to +hear what was being said, but as they were several +feet from the entrance to the office, and speaking in +the most cautious whispers, he could distinguish +nothing that was being said. Suddenly the cookie +darted away, and Barrows re-entered the cabin and +stood leaning against the door.</p> + +<p>“Speaking about fish,” he remarked, looking +malevolently at Dick, “they are foolish things since +they always take bait. Now did you three boys +take me for a fool entirely, and did you think that +I would take any bait that was offered me? I know +every move you made since you have been here, +including your letter to Boone. Why, you poor, +useless boy, I am playing for too big stakes here +to let a pack of mere children balk me. Your work +was clever if it had been against an ignorant man, +but you’re done now.”</p> + +<p>Dick’s heart sank. He knew that a cog had +slipped somewhere. They had been too sure of +themselves. Barrows kept on talking in the same +strain until Dick began to realize that he was +merely talking against time. He rose to his feet +and prepared to make a dash for the door, but realization +came too late, for the door was thrown open +and in stepped the arch enemy of the boys, Jean +LeBlanc.</p> + +<p>“So, mon ami, we meet again. This is a mos’ +pleasant meeting, but you are not to escape so easily +this time.”</p> + +<p>There was hatred in the halfbreed’s voice and in +his eyes. Dick shivered inwardly, although he let +no sign of fear be shown in his face or actions.</p> + +<p>“All the better to have you here this time, LeBlanc, +you just walk into our hands; and this time +you will see the inside of a jail for sure,” said Dick +boldly.</p> + +<p>LeBlanc’s face darkened with rage. He made as +though to reach for the knife that hung in his belt, +but Barrows stopped him.</p> + +<p>“That will do, LeBlanc, I’ll handle this matter in +my own way. Remember you’re working for me, +and you do as I say or get out, and I’ll find another +man for the job.”</p> + +<p>Dick was astonished at the way LeBlanc subsided. +Evidently Barrows was a much braver man +than they had given him credit for being; at any +rate, he seemed to be the absolute master of the +halfbreed.</p> + +<p>“Yes, ma frien’, you are the boss, but perhaps +another time, when I am not working for you, I +will take care of this one. Now what we do with +him.”</p> + +<p>“We will put him in the cellar under the storehouse +for the present, then when we have captured +his friends, we will have them taken to Misery +Camp.”</p> + +<p>“Taking the others will be an easy matter, will it +not? We shall just surround them like that and +take them,” and he snapped his fingers with a derisive +gesture.</p> + +<p>“That’s just what we won’t do. Why do you +suppose I am going to the trouble of all this secrecy +for? If it had been merely a matter of capturing +them, it would have been done long ago. But they +have been on their guard most of the time, and this +camp is full of lumberjacks that worked for old +man Boone. If they got wise to anything, they +would have me strung up to a tree in no time, and +one of the worst riots in the history of the lumber +business would have been pulled off in this camp. +No, sir, I am saving my skin.”</p> + +<p>“Why not get rid of those who would help +them?” inquired Jean.</p> + +<p>“I am, just as fast as I can. Everything was all +right till these boys showed up to play amateur detective. +Now we must make a grand cleanup and +work fast. Things are getting too hot.”</p> + +<p>“I, Jean LeBlanc, am giving you warning. The +bes’ thing to do is to slip a knife in a place where it +would do the most good. Every time they have +cross my path, they have won, and Jean LeBlanc +is not one who is easily beaten in anything.”</p> + +<p>“Bah, you make me tired, LeBlanc. They may +have had a little luck and a lot of help, or else you +didn’t know how to do your work. I’m here to tell +you that Gene Barrows will not be fooled.”</p> + +<p>Dick had been sitting silently all this time, drinking +in the conversation of the two men. They +seemed not to be noticing him, and in a desperate +attempt to make his escape, he darted for the door +and succeeded in getting outside. But his triumph +was short lived, for he had no more than attained +the outside air, when he was seized by an iron grip +by two men, and hauled ignominiously back into +the office. He saw at once that his captors were +LeBlanc’s brother, Baptiste, and the unknown chap +who had been implicated with Baptiste in the attack +on Howells.</p> + +<p>Dick reddened with rage at the laughter of his +enemies, and vowed to himself that somehow, somewhere, +he would pay them for their taunts.</p> + +<p>“Come, we are wasting time; the others may be +back from their little spying expedition at any +moment. Grab him, you two,” directed Barrows. +Baptiste and the unknown, whose name Dick later +learned was Fearon, seized him in no gentle grasp. +One of them clasped a hard, dirty hand over his +mouth to prevent any outcry, and they walked him +across the camp to the storehouse.</p> + +<p>Barrows produced the key and threw open the +door. Once inside, the door was carefully closed, +and Barrows produced a candle which he lighted. +Dick was searched and his knife and matches were +taken away.</p> + +<p>Two heavy molasses barrels were rolled away, +disclosing a trap in the floor. This was raised and +a rude ladder was seen to lead below. Dick was +mercilessly bundled down the hole, little care being +taken as to whether or not he broke his neck as he +slipped down the damp ladder.</p> + +<p>Then he heard the clatter of the trap door as it +fell, and he was left alone in the dark.</p> + +<p>Once before Dick had been in a tight hole, and +the lack of knife and matches had almost been his +undoing. Thereafter he had guarded against this +happening again. To this end he had contrived a +secret pocket in the lapel of his coat, where a knife +always reposed. Also inside of the sweatband of +his hat were several matches rolled tightly in waterproof +silk.</p> + +<p>He got out the matches, and lighting one, looked +about him. He surveyed the room with a quick +glance, for the matches were too precious to use +too many of them. His quick survey showed that +the underground room was bare of any furnishing; +there was not even a blanket to sleep on. He +lighted a second match and inspected the floor, discovering +that both floor and walls were constructed +of hand-hewed logs, and knew that it would take a +week to dig through them with nothing but a pocket +knife with which to work.</p> + +<p>The underground room was damp and musty, +and Dick shivered.</p> + +<p>He wondered how long it would be before they +took him out, and he began to do calisthenics vigorously +to restore some warmth to his already +chilled body.</p> + +<p>For a time he thought of crawling up the ladder +and trying out his knife on the trap door, but he +had noted that it was of triple thickness of inch +boards and would probably blunt and dull his knife +without making any great impression.</p> + +<p>There was one hope that someone might come +into the storehouse above and he could rap on the +door and let them know he was a prisoner there.</p> + +<p>After some moments of reflection, he decided +that this would also be unavailing, for the cook +must also be one of the traitors. It was not possible +that he would be unaware of the secret room, and +was in all probability a member of the gang.</p> + +<p>Dick was a healthy boy, and soon his eyes grew +drowsy with sleep. He laid himself down on the +hard floor, and as soon as his bones got accustomed +to the floor, dropped off to sleep, sensibly refusing +to worry and letting the morrow bring what it +would.</p> + +<p>His last thought as he fell asleep was the hope +that his companions would not fall into a trap as +he had, although he half expected that he would be +awakened any moment by the sound of the trap +door opening, and the entry of his chums as prisoners.</p> + +<p>But when he awoke in the morning, he found +that he was still alone. He unscrewed the cover of +his watch face, and felt the hands, finding that it +was nearly eight o’clock. So far no one had come, +and he wondered if he was to be given anything to +eat. Two weary hours dragged on, and then the +trap was opened, and a pack of food lowered to +him, together with a pail of coffee. He looked up +and saw the cook and cookee peering down at him. +Evidently they were going to take no chances of +a surprise on his part, hence their coming in pairs.</p> + +<p>Dick called to them to ask when he was to be +taken out, but they had evidently been instructed to +hold no words with him, for they quickly lowered +the trap and the barrels were again rolled into place. +Dick’s last sight as the trap closed was the leering +face of the cookee. He managed to eat his food in +the dark, and resolved to ask for a blanket when +next they came to bring him food.</p> + +<p>The day dragged as though on leaden feet, but +no one appeared again. Dick thought that dinner +would be brought to him, but none came, and he +figured that perhaps there were too many watchers +who would be inquisitive if they saw cooked food +being carried to the storehouse. Perhaps Garry and +Phil were on the watch. This gave Dick a thrill, +for if his thoughts were true it meant that they had +not been trapped in any way.</p> + +<p>Frequently he unscrewed the face of his watch +and felt the hands to note the time. He resolved +that his first step when he got back to civilization +would be to buy a watch that had a radium dial so +he could tell time in the dark.</p> + +<p>Dick had no idea but that he would get out, for +he was one whose courage did not fail. Then, too, +he trusted in the cleverness of his companions to +get him out of the scrape.</p> + +<p>He was squatting on the floor Hindu fashion, +about eleven o’clock, thinking that he would soon +lie down and try to get some sleep, when the trap +was opened, and Barrows’ voice bade him come up +the ladder.</p> + +<p>He obeyed only too gladly, for the darkness and +the chill of the cellar were beginning to get his +nerve. In the storehouse he found that Barrows +was accompanied by the LeBlanc brothers. This +made any chance of a rough and tumble fight with +the manager and possible dash for freedom out of +the question.</p> + +<p>“Now there will be no fooling on your part, but +you will sit down at this case here and write a note +to your friends telling them that you have been captured +by LeBlanc and are being held for ransom. +That will please them, eh, Jean?”</p> + +<p>LeBlanc gave a wolfish grin. “At least it make +them hurry to rescue their friend. They do not +like me, those boys, any more than I like them.”</p> + +<p>“Suppose I refuse to write that note, what then?” +demanded Dick.</p> + +<p>“Why, I think we will let LeBlanc handle that +end of it,” said Barrows.</p> + +<p>Jean LeBlanc’s face wore a diabolic smile as he +took from his mouth the big-bowled pipe that he +was smoking.</p> + +<p>“Once I saw an Indian torture a man to get from +him a secret,” he said. “It was oh, so easy. All +that he did was to thrust the man’s fingers, one by +one, into the pipe bowl, and after the fifth finger, +the man gave in.”</p> + +<p>Dick shuddered in spite of himself. He had +heard of this Indian method of torture, and knew +that LeBlanc was not only capable of doing it, but +would take a fiendish pleasure in the operation.</p> + +<p>“Then if that fails, which I doubt, I give you +warning that your chums will be seized on some +pretext and sent out seemingly to jail with LeBlanc +as their guard, and once away from the camp, will +be given to him to do as he pleases,” said Barrows. +“Now do you think you will write that letter?”</p> + +<p>Dick had resolved on submitting to the torture +before writing the letter, but this last threat made +him change his mind. He could afford to take no +chances with the safety, and perhaps the lives, of +his chums, by refusing to write. In the meantime +his mind was busy trying to conjure up some way +of warning them that it was a trap.</p> + +<p>He took the scrap of paper that was offered to +him, and began to write. As the letter drew near +its close, he hastily constructed the cryptogram +which our readers are already aware of.</p> + +<p>Barrows took the note and read it carefully, turning +it over to see that there was not other writing +on the back, and scanning it for some sign of warning. +Dick was afraid that he would decipher the +simple code, but was relieved when Barrows crumpled +the note to give it the appearance of having been +carried some few hours, and then put it in his +pocket.</p> + +<p>He was ordered back into the cellar, and there +was nothing to do but obey. The trap was closed +and he heard the rolling of barrels, then all was +still.</p> + +<p>Dick wondered what plot was in the wind, but +was unable to puzzle it out. He finally decided +that it was only another private scheme of Barrows +to get money, and a thousand dollars would be a +pretty good haul.</p> + +<p>He gave up trying to solve the riddle, and lying +on the floor stared into the darkness.</p> + +<p>There was one chance in a thousand that one of +them might come alone in the morning to bring him +food, and he resolved to climb up the ladder the +moment he heard footsteps above him, and with his +pocket knife try to fight his way to freedom.</p> + +<p>With this comforting thought, he dropped off to +sleep.</p> + +<p>Following the writing of the note, Barrows +slipped back to his office and told LeBlanc to make +one attempt to seize the boys, then if that failed, +they would use their ruse to attract them from the +camp.</p> + +<p>How this attempt succeeded has already been +told, and all LeBlanc got for his pains was a smash +on the hand where Phil’s clubbed rifle had hit him.</p> + +<p>He hastened back cursing, and told Barrows of +the failure, and after being upbraided was told to +go to the rendezvous where the capture of the boys +was to be made.</p> + +<p>Barrows then went to the cookhouse, where the +unkempt individual that was to act as bearer was +waiting, and gave him his final instructions.</p> + +<p>“Now,” said the vindictive manager, “we shall +see who wins, a pack of mere children, or Gene +Barrows!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER XV<br/>MISERY CAMP</h2> + +<p>Now let us return to Garry and Phil, whom we +left struggling in the hands of their captors. Only +one voice did they recognize in the orders that were +given, but this was enough to let them know that +they were in the worst kind of trouble. It was the +voice of LeBlanc.</p> + +<p>“Phil, that’s LeBlanc’s voice or I’m crazy,” ejaculated +Garry.</p> + +<p>“Absolutement, ma frien’s. It is LeBlanc. Once +again I have you, and I think this time you do not +go until we have settled several old scores that I +have mark up against you.”</p> + +<p>As he spoke, several men took hold of the boys +even more roughly, and in a few moments their +hands had been bound tightly behind their backs.</p> + +<p>LeBlanc gave the order to march, and the strange +procession wended its way through the woods. It +was almost pitch dark, but they seemed to be following +a well defined trail, and the leader was sure +of every step. An unknown man grasped the arm +of each boy and guided them so that they would +not bump into a tree, and at the same time prevented +a chance of escape.</p> + +<p>The boys took things philosophically, for there +was nothing that could be done with so many odds +against them, and the darkness would have hindered +any chance of flight. They knew that they could +not take more than a dozen steps without smashing +into the trees, and would soon be captured. They +resolved, the same train of thought running +through the minds of both of the captives, to wait +for daylight before sizing matters up.</p> + +<p>LeBlanc kept hurrying the men along, and they +covered nearly a half a dozen miles before a halt +was called. Now the first flush of day was appearing +in the sky, and soon there would be light enough +for them to see in what manner of hands they had +fallen.</p> + +<p>When dawn finally broke, both boys looked in +amazement at the strange figures that the light of +day revealed.</p> + +<p>LeBlanc, of course, they recognized at once, and +they had half expected to see his brother. But all +the others,—there were half a dozen not counting +the halfbreed,—were total strangers. The men +were for the most part large and swarthy, unkempt +of hair and ragged as to clothes. Their garments +were torn and dirty, and here and there was a raggedly +sewn patch where the clothes threatened to +give way entirely.</p> + +<p>They were taciturn men, and said little or nothing +to each other, and when they did, it was in a +low tone. They paid absolutely no attention to any +order of LeBlanc, always turning to one of their +number for confirmation.</p> + +<p>This man, evidently the leader, was a perfect +giant of a man. He stood, so the boys judged, at +least six feet four inches, and was correspondingly +large of frame.</p> + +<p>His face, what could be seen of it, for he wore a +black, flowing, tangled beard, was tanned by the +sun, as one who lived entirely in the open. His followers +evidently respected, or at least feared him, +for whenever he gave an order, they sprang to do +his bidding.</p> + +<p>Garry and Phil wondered who they were and +what their business was,—whether they were hunters +or what.</p> + +<p>A fire was built and a meagre breakfast made. +Phil and Garry were glad of the food, for they +were both hungry and tired. The eating done, evident +preparations were made to continue the march. +Both boys were cruelly tired. They had passed a +strenuous day and night, and now they wanted to +sleep. But this was evidently not to be.</p> + +<p>They were slightly surprised also when they +learned from the conversation that LeBlanc was not +to continue to the destination of the others.</p> + +<p>“Now, King, you will take these boys to Misery +Camp, and keep them until you hear from those +who have given you instructions. They will let you +know what to do, and you will be ver’ careful not +to let them make the conge, to get away, for then +you will have me, Jean LeBlanc, to deal with.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll keep my bargain, fer the fact that I give +my word, an’ a King allers keeps his word; but +never think that I fear ye, Frenchman, fer I fear +no man livin’!”</p> + +<p>LeBlanc kept silence, and took his way back to +the camp, while the weary march forward was resumed. +Short rests were given at long intervals +and the boys were thankful for the scant few minutes +that were allowed.</p> + +<p>The men walked with the long swinging lope of +the true woodsman, and often the boys thought they +would drop by the side of the road from weariness.</p> + +<p>At noon a halt was called, and one of the men +disappeared, to return after several minutes with a +half dozen grouse. The boys then knew immediately +that these men were outlaws of some sort, +who paid no attention to the law, for the close +season was on all grouse and pheasant.</p> + +<p>A fire was built and one of the men skinned the +birds preparatory to roasting them over the coals. +Coffee was made and they were about to drink it +black, when Garry bethought himself of the sugar +and condensed milk in his knapsack. Thinking that +a few favors on his part would perhaps return to +them later on, he offered it to the men. The boy’s +hands were untied, and he rummaged through his +pack until he found the articles.</p> + +<p>The men took them without a word and used +them. They divided the food fairly with all present.</p> + +<p>Garry tried to engage the men in conversation, +but all attempts failed. The rest and the dinner +occupied about an hour and then the march began +again.</p> + +<p>“See here,” said Garry to the man addressed as +King. “When are you going to give us a decent +rest? We’re played out.”</p> + +<p>“Well, you can be played out ef you want; you’ve +got eight miles ahead of you yet till we get to Misery +Camp,” answered King.</p> + +<p>“What is Misery Camp, and who are you fellows +anyway?” again asked Garry.</p> + +<p>“Misery Camp is where we live, and we fellows +be squatters. Now shut up and walk,” and King +relapsed into silence.</p> + +<p>Light instantly broke over the boys. They had +often heard of the squatters scattered over the +woods of Maine, queer nomadic people, who gleaned +a precarious and lean living from the woods. Game +and fish laws meant nothing to them. Birds of all +sorts were shot, and woe be unto the deer that ran +across the path of the squatter. Some little cultivation +was carried on, in the way of corn and +potatoes.</p> + +<p>Wearily they trudged on. The last mile was +almost agony to Phil and Garry, but they clenched +their teeth and carried on, determined if possible +to show no sign of weakening in front of these +strange creatures of the woods.</p> + +<p>At last Misery Camp was sighted. It was a +patch of land that had been cleared away, evidently +the logs that were cut being used to make the habitations +of the squatters. A score of ragged children +and some slatternly women came out to meet +them, looking curiously at the boys. They were +thrust into one of the cabins, and a guard established +at the door.</p> + +<p>The weary boys dropped on the rude pallets and +fell asleep almost instantly. So tired were they +that it was the following morning before they +awoke. They stretched their arms and legs, and +then tried to open the door. The guard let them +out, and warned them that any attempt at flight +would be followed immediately by a shot.</p> + +<p>“An’ I ain’t missed a squirrel in five year,” +boasted their guard, who was a boy of about their +own age.</p> + +<p>Privately the boys resolved to make an escape as +soon as possible, but not while the rifle of the guard +was trained on them, for they doubted neither his +ability to shoot as well as he said he could, nor the +fact that he would not hesitate to do as he threatened.</p> + +<p>They looked over the clearing with some curiosity. +It fitted its name well, for misery seemed to +be on every side. King, who appeared to be that +in fact as well as in name, called the boys to his +own shack for breakfast. Here they found that the +squatter leader had opened their knapsacks, and the +contents were strewn over a rude table.</p> + +<p>Both boys jumped to see if their wireless ’phone +had been broken by the curious squatter, but were +relieved to find that it had not been touched.</p> + +<p>“What’s that there contrivance?” asked King, +pointing to the radio-phone.</p> + +<p>“That’s a wireless telephone,” answered Garry. +As he answered he had a vision of a way out of +their difficulty, but subsequent conversation soon +proved that they would not be able to put the plan +into execution.</p> + +<p>“I seen a telephone onct,” said the squatter, “but +it had wires. You don’t mean that that thing will +talk without a wire, do you?”</p> + +<p>“Yes it does. Would you like to have us set it +up, and talk through it, and have a message come +through the air?” asked Garry, eagerly awaiting +the answer, for he thought that if he could get the +wireless up he could signal some way for help.</p> + +<p>“No, I don’t. I don’t believe that ye can talk +through the air without a wire, but ye might be +able to an’ I ain’t agoin’ to take no chances.”</p> + +<p>The squatter did not seem interested in the contents +of the knapsack except for the little medicine +case that Garry always carried. The boy noted, +too, that all the foodstuff was gone.</p> + +<p>“What be these things, medicine?” asked King.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” answered Garry briefly.</p> + +<p>“Got anything that’s good for chills and fever?” +demanded the man.</p> + +<p>“Not that I know of; most of that stuff is for +use in an accident. You see it’s mostly antiseptic +and bandage and stuff,” answered Garry.</p> + +<p>King picked up a bottle that was marked poison +and had the familiar skull and crossbones in red +ink.</p> + +<p>“What’s this stuff with the red printin’?” he +questioned.</p> + +<p>“That’s iodine; can’t you read?” Phil broke into +the conversation.</p> + +<p>“No, can’t read, never went to school. What’s it +for?”</p> + +<p>“Why, it’s to put on bad cuts so that you won’t +get blood poisoning, and it’s good if you strain your +wrist or finger or something like that.” answered +Garry.</p> + +<p>“Wall, you don’t say so. Wonder if ’twould do +this finger o’ mine any good? I hurt it the other +day when I slipped near the brook where I was getting +water. It’s my trigger finger too, and that’s +a bad one to have hurt.”</p> + +<p>Garry assured him that there was nothing better +than the iodine and offered to paint it for him.</p> + +<p>The squatter evidently decided that it could do +no harm, and so Garry inspected the swollen finger +and liberally painted it.</p> + +<p>“That will help take the swelling out, and it will +be all right in a couple of days,” said Garry, as he +put the cork back in the bottle and laid it on the +table.</p> + +<p>Then he noticed that a ragged youngster about +three years old had been watching the process with +wide open eyes. Inquiry developed that it was the +squatter’s child, and it was evident that the youngster +was the one thing that the squatter king was +really fond of. He told Garry and Phil that the +mother had died a year before, when they had been +driven off a timber tract by the lumbermen. Here +the squatter launched into a tirade against the lumber +owners.</p> + +<p>The squatter idea is a peculiar one. They claim +that the woods were made for man to take as he +found them and could not understand the right of +anyone to drive them out; yet they are responsible +for great damage to the woods. As, for instance, +at this place, a couple of acres of fine timber had +been ruthlessly cut to make cabins for the nesters +or squatters, and to provide a place for the scanty +crop of potatoes and corn. Then too, many of the +great forest fires are started by the squatters. There +is one case on record in Maine where the squatters +set fire to a whole mountain side, because they said +that the blueberries would grow better on the +burned-over ground.</p> + +<p>Also the depredations against deer are numerous. +Many a fine moose or stag has been brought down +to provide food for the nomads.</p> + +<p>The talk went back to the medicine again, and +the squatter asked what the skull meant on the +bottle.</p> + +<p>“That’s put on to warn you that it’s poison,” +Garry informed him.</p> + +<p>The work of painting his finger seemed to mollify +the old man somewhat, and he drew a little out +of his shell, and Garry, seeing the opportunity, +asked him why they had been brought there.</p> + +<p>The squatter then told them that LeBlanc had +appeared on the scene a day or two before and told +them that unless they agreed to keep some boys +who would be brought there prisoners, they would +be driven from the clearing by the lumberjacks. +The squatters knew what this meant, since they +had planted their corn for the summer, and moving +meant that the lumberjacks would burn down +the cabins and start them away. They knew from +experience that it was useless to fight, for the +enemy, so they considered the lumberjacks, would +outnumber them ten to one.</p> + +<p>Garry saw through the whole scheme and +guessed that Barrows had known of their presence +at the clearing and had kept them in mind for some +time when he might require them to help in some +of his schemes.</p> + +<p>The squatter king took his rifle and offered to +show the boys where their planting was done, and +more for the sake of getting a little exercise than +for any especial desire to see the corn patch, they +agreed.</p> + +<p>The other squatters eyed them as they passed in +company with old King, but said nothing. Some +of the youngsters started to follow, but a mere +threatening look was enough to set them scurrying +away.</p> + +<p>“You seem to be the boss around here,” remarked +Garry.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I’m a King by name, and I aim to be king +of these people so long as I breathe,” answered the +man gravely; and Garry, looking at his immense +frame and stern eye, thought he had a good chance +of continuing in his royal capacity.</p> + +<p>They were looking at the corn patch with only +a pretended interest, when they heard a scream +from King’s cabin.</p> + +<p>“That’s my baby,” said King in a frightened +tone. “Something’s hurt her!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER XVI<br/>GARRY SAVES A LIFE</h2> + +<p>They rushed back to the cabin and a sight met +their eyes that stunned them all.</p> + +<p>The youngster with childish curiosity, had +climbed up on the table and captured the bottle of +iodine. It was immediately evident that the child +had drunk some of the poison, for its lips were +stained. There was no telling how much the child +had drunk, for the bottle had fallen to the floor, +spilling some of the liquid over the floor.</p> + +<p>The old man seized his child in his arms, and +tears began to roll down his cheeks.</p> + +<p>“Oh, she’s going to die, she’s going to die,” he +moaned.</p> + +<p>Garry’s brain spun with thought.</p> + +<p>“Quick,” he shouted to the old man. “There’s +one thing that will save her. What did you do with +that foodstuff you took out of the pack there?”</p> + +<p>The sharpness of his tone startled the old man +into activity. The words of Garry that there was +one way to save her galvanized him into action.</p> + +<p>“It’s up there on the shelf back of you. Can ye +save my baby? Hurry! Save her an’ there’s +nothin’ on this earth I won’t do for ye!”</p> + +<p>Garry had fortunately remembered that he had +in his knapsack a package of cornstarch that they +had brought to make thickening for gravy in case +they did any cooking. Garry, and for that matter +both of his chums, were pastmasters in the art of +first aid to the injured. They knew that the antidote +for iodine was cornstarch.</p> + +<p>Rushing to the shelf, Garry snatched the package +and tore open the top. His eyes fell on a can of +mustard and he seized that.</p> + +<p>On the ground outside the door Garry had noted +a campfire with an old tin pail swung across it on +a branch held up by forked sticks. Working with +the speed of an express train, he dashed through +the door and grabbed the pail of hot water.</p> + +<p>Back in the cabin, he took a tin cup from the +table, and hastily melting some of the mustard, +made an emetic. This he gently forced the frightened +child to swallow. Soon the emetic had the +desired effect, and by this time Garry had moistened +the cornstarch to the consistency of cream.</p> + +<p>While the frightened squatter looked on helplessly, +Garry fed the cornstarch to the baby, who +seemed instinctively to trust the boy, and made little +fuss over taking the pasty drink.</p> + +<p>Throughout the morning Garry, with almost the +skill of a trained nurse, watched the child’s breathing +and kept count of her pulse. As nothing developed +to show that the child was in any danger, +Garry privately formed the opinion that the iodine +had not gotten much further than the inside of her +mouth, and that the burn of the poison had prevented +her from drinking any great quantity of it. +Then, too, the stain on the floor, where the liquid +had sunk into the rough boards, was large enough +to denote that most of the contents of the small +bottle were on the floor and had not been swallowed +by the child.</p> + +<p>As the youngster brightened up, the relief of the +father was almost pitiful to see. He grasped the +hand of Garry and in broken, halting words +thanked him for saving the life of the baby. At +the door was a throng of curious squatters, and +when they saw that the King baby was going to +live, gradually broke away and returned to their +duties. All this time Phil had stood by ready to +lend a hand, in case Garry needed assistance.</p> + +<p>“Boys,” said the old man, “I’ve never broken my +word before, but this is one time that I’m going to. +It will mean that we’ll be driven off here, but that +can’t be helped. You can go away whenever you +want to. My promise to that Frenchman ain’t +nothin’ to me since you’ve saved my baby.”</p> + +<p>This was what Garry had hoped would happen. +He did not want to trade the baby’s safety for freedom, +but there was still Dick to consider. He +might be and probably was in grave danger at that +moment, and it behooved the boys to return as +speedily as possible to the lumber camp to set in +motion the machinery to effect Dick’s release, for +they had decided that Dick was probably a prisoner +at the camp. Of course they did not know of the +hidden room under the storehouse, where, at that +moment, their friend was still languishing.</p> + +<p>“I’ll make you a promise now,” said Garry. “It +happens that my father owns this tract of land, and +I’ll give you my word that you will not be forced +to move from here for the rest of the summer. Of +course the logging will soon extend in this direction +and you will be forced off, but until that happens +you can stay here unmolested. Now we’re +going back to start a young war at the camp, and +release a chum of ours who is held prisoner there.”</p> + +<p>“You better stay here for awhile, for part of the +word of the Frenchman was that another boy would +be brought here to be kept. Now if you boys stay +here and pretend to be prisoners when LeBlanc +comes with your friend, you can wait till he goes +and then all be freed together. In case there’s any +trouble comes, I guess my men and I can take care +of it.”</p> + +<p>“That’s fine,” said Garry. “I don’t think there’s +anything better that can be done. When did you +expect LeBlanc to come with the other boy?”</p> + +<p>“The Frenchman was aiming to get back here by +tomorrow night,” replied King. “He’d have to +start in the night time, which will probably be tonight, +and get here some time tomorrow afternoon.”</p> + +<p>“How will LeBlanc be able to find his way in the +dark?” asked Garry.</p> + +<p>“I left one of my men behind to meet him and +guide him,” answered the old man. Then a thought +struck him, and he asked:</p> + +<p>“What are you all such powerful enemies for?”</p> + +<p>Garry then told him some of the adventures that +they had encountered, and the part that the halfbreed +had played in them. When he came to the +tale of how LeBlanc had kidnapped little Patty +Graham, the old man’s eyes flashed fire.</p> + +<p>“He’s a treacherous weazel, that halfbreed. I +don’t mind some of the other things he did, but any +man that will steal a person’s baby ought to be cut +into pieces. I’ll tell you that. When he comes +here with your friend, we’ll just tie him up and +keep him here and you can do what you want to +with him.”</p> + +<p>This seemed like a stroke of real luck for the +boys. It would mean LeBlanc would be safely held +until time for them to have him taken to prison to +pay the much deserved penalty for his crimes, and +at the same time would rid them of a dangerous +enemy, as well as lessening by one the allies of the +rascally Barrows.</p> + +<p>The rest of the day passed quickly, and they told +the squatter king many of the things of the outside +world. He had heard little or nothing of the great +cities, and had never seen a moving picture nor ridden +in a railroad train. But he knew the woods as +few men do, except perhaps the Hermit, although +there was no comparison between this giant of the +woods, who could neither read nor write, and the +old recluse, who was eternally surprising the boys +with a quotation from some poet, or a snatch of +Latin.</p> + +<p>“Now, Phil,” said Garry, when they were left +alone for awhile by the squatter, “let’s plan a war +campaign. As soon as Dick gets here, we will let +him have a good rest, and then hike for the camp. +We’ll make it to get to the small lake without anyone +seeing us, and there we’ll get the canoe and +portage it through the woods to the other lake. +There we can hide out and get the dope on the timber +thieves. Once we have done that, we have only +to draw in the strings, and we’ll have the whole +job done.”</p> + +<p>Phil assented to this as the wisest course to follow, +and night coming on, they turned in. The +squatter had insisted on giving up his own cabin to +them, which although poor and bare, was the best +one on the clearing.</p> + +<p>They whiled away the next day waiting the +arrival of Dick, and hoping that no change would +be made in the plans of Barrows to prevent Dick’s +being sent to Misery Camp.</p> + +<p>It was late afternoon when a man whom the +squatter king had sent into the woods to act as +lookout came running back.</p> + +<p>“He’s got a young fellow with him,” he told the +squatter leader.</p> + +<p>“Is it the Frenchman?” demanded the old man.</p> + +<p>“Yes, it’s a Frenchman, but,” and here the boys +met with a disappointment. “It’s not the one that +came the other time, but a fellow that looks like +him.”</p> + +<p>“Tough luck; that’s Baptiste, not Jean. Look +King, I’ve changed my mind about having him captured. +Let him go back and let the camp think +that we are held prisoners safely here. That will +allow us to work with greater freedom. Now we’ll +duck under cover and you meet the halfbreed and +bring Dick here.”</p> + +<p>“Just as you say,” said the old man. “All you +have to do around here from now on is to say the +word, and everyone in Misery will do just as you +order. I will, and I’ll see to it that the others toe +the line.”</p> + +<p>“Funny he don’t come,” muttered Garry.</p> + +<p>“Oh, he won’t be here for a time yet,” said the +chap who had brought the warning. “I was in a +tree top, and could see way down to a clearing, and +saw them there taking a rest. Ain’t nobody on the +clearin’ here that can run as fast as I can, and I +came quicker than ever to tell you about it.”</p> + +<p>“Had we better let Baptiste see us so that he will +know we are still here, Garry?” asked Phil.</p> + +<p>“That’s a good suggestion. Suppose you station +a guard with a rifle outside the door, King, and let +Baptiste have a peek at us when he gets here,” +directed Garry turning to the squatter.</p> + +<p>“That’s what I’ll do. Here you, Job,” turning +to the youth who had brought news of the coming +of Baptiste and Dick. “You take your stand outside +there like as if you were guardin’t the door. +Now I’ll get out o’ here and meet them.”</p> + +<p>The squatter king hastened out, while Job stood +before the shack door with his rifle clutched in his +hands. Garry and Phil, with some excitement, +waited the coming of Dick.</p> + +<p>In a few moments they heard someone approaching, +and King threw open the door. “Here’s your +friend,” he whispered, and thrust someone in. Bewilderment +spread over the faces of the boys.</p> + +<p>It was not Dick who entered the cabin, but Art +Howells!</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER XVII<br/>A GOOD DEED REWARDED</h2> + +<p>The dumbfounded boys could only stare at +Howells.</p> + +<p>“Where did you come from and where is Dick?” +cried Garry, when he had recovered his voice sufficiently +to speak.</p> + +<p>“If you will untie my hands first, I will feel +better and be able to think. My wrists are all raw +from trying to work the ropes off, but the man +that tied me up knew his business too well,” said +Howells.</p> + +<p>Since the boys’ belongings had been restored +them by King, they had their knives, and it was a +small matter to cut the bonds.</p> + +<p>“Now what do you mean by Dick being with +me?” asked Howells.</p> + +<p>“Why, Dick has been a prisoner at the camp, and +we were given to understand that he was to be +brought here to join us. We were prisoners here +ourselves; fell into a foolish trap because we were +too sure of ourselves. Fortunately, because of a +good turn that we were able to do, we have been +set free by the squatter chief,” answered Garry.</p> + +<p>“What do you mean free, with an armed guard +outside the door?” demanded Art. “I should say +you were pretty closely kept in confinement.”</p> + +<p>“That is only a ruse so the suspicion of whoever +brought any prisoner here would not be raised. As +soon as he goes we will be free to do what we +please. Now how did you come to be captured?” +went on Garry.</p> + +<p>“Oh, I made a fool blunder too. I wanted to see +you chaps to tell you that a lot of lumber was being +shipped from a place called Harrison. It’s about +five miles away from Dutton Lake, so that seems to +show that the lake figures in the stealing of the +timber. I crawled into camp one night and went +to your shack, and walked in expecting to find you +sleeping there. Instead I ran right into the arms +of a couple of huskies who had me overpowered +before I knew what was going on. I found out in +a few minutes that the pair were LeBlanc and that +precious scoundrel that tried to do me up that night +you chaps appeared so providentially on the scene.”</p> + +<p>“Did Barrows say anything about what had been +going on in the camp, or drop any word that would +give us a hint as to his plans?” put in Phil.</p> + +<p>“No, he was very closemouthed. There was a +swarthy chap with him, who from your description +I take to be Jean LeBlanc. All that was said was +that I should be taken to a place called Misery +Camp. From the looks of this place I judge that is +where I am now. What have you run into, a squatter +camp?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, you’ve hit the nail on the head.”</p> + +<p>Garry was about to speak further, when the door +opened and the squatter chief came in.</p> + +<p>“That fellow is gone, and you kin come out any +time you want,” was the welcome news that he +brought. The three followed him into the sunlight +and then decided that a start should be made for +the lumber camp at once.</p> + +<p>“That is, unless you are too tired to start now, +Art,” said Garry.</p> + +<p>“Oh, I’m feeling fit as a fiddle. I don’t know +that I’d care to walk all the way back, but we can +save time by going part of the way,” remarked Art +cheerfully.</p> + +<p>The packs were brought out and soon all was +ready for the return trip. They were surprised at +the appearance of King with his rifle, and feared +for a moment that he had thought better of allowing +them to go and was going to make them prisoners +again.</p> + +<p>“Just decided that I’ll go with you fellows. If +there’s goin’t to be fightin’, and I think there is, I +want to be in it. Besides, you won’t be safe wanderin’ +around through strange country alone. I’ll +see that you get where you want to go in safety, +and mebbe you’ll find that a little bit of extra help +won’t come in amiss? Do you want me to come?” +concluded King.</p> + +<p>The light of battle was in the old man’s eyes, and +Garry at once decided that he might prove a valuable +ally in case trouble arose and welcomed him to +come with them.</p> + +<p>“We’ll take a little different way back, so we +won’t be liable to run into any of that gang from +the camp. We’ll go until you fellows get tired, +then eat, and you can roll in while I watch for +you.”</p> + +<p>This was what they wanted to do, and so they +agreed to follow his advice entirely on the return +trip.</p> + +<p>“What about some of the men coming to your +place to see if we are all right, or if they bring Dick +with them, what then?” questioned Garry.</p> + +<p>“In case any o’ them come here from now on, +they’ll get a treat they won’t like. I told my men +to seize anyone who came, and if the fat boy comes, +he is to be guided to a place where me and my men +know, and then he can join us,” answered King.</p> + +<p>The squatter seemed to have covered everything +necessary, and off started the quartet. King led +them on a roundabout trail, and they walked until +darkness fell, when Howells declared that he would +like to rest.</p> + +<p>For fear of possible detection by some prowler +from the camp, no fire was built, and a cold bite was +eaten. King refused to let any of the others do +any work, and himself gathered enough boughs for +them all to sleep on. Garry insisted that when King +had watched for a while, he waken either himself +or Phil, and they could provide a relief for a while. +King protested that he was able to watch the entire +night, but Garry reminded him that on the coming +day there might be strenuous work, and he would +not want to be handicapped by fatigue. This finally +made the old man agree to waken Garry at midnight +and let him stand a watch.</p> + +<p>True to his word, King shook Garry about midnight.</p> + +<p>“Don’t believe there’s any real need o’ watchin’, +everything been quiet so far; but there’s nothin’ +like bein’ on the safe side.”</p> + +<p>Garry looked to see that his rifle was loaded and +ready, then took a seat under a tree where he could +be comfortable and yet hear anything. King laid +down on the ground, scorning the boughs, and was +fast asleep in a moment.</p> + +<p>After about two hours Garry began to feel +drowsy, and rather than run the risk of dropping +off to sleep, he woke Phil, who had had a good +sleep and was able to stand sentry for the rest of +the night.</p> + +<p>After they had eaten in the morning, the old man +asked what the next step was.</p> + +<p>Garry had been thinking it over as they ate, and +so he asked King if he knew the region around +Kanamo Lake. King answered that he knew every +inch of the territory in that part of the state, and +so it was decided that he lead them by a roundabout +route to the lake shore. Here they could hide +out in a safe place, and after dark could portage +the canoe across the timberland to Dutton Lake. +Garry was determined to try and catch the thieves +at work that night. Then plans could be made for +a raid on the camp and the rescue of Dick could +be effected.</p> + +<p>It was almost nightfall when they reached the +lake shore, and they thought best to turn in for a +while before making for the spot where they had +concealed the canoe.</p> + +<hr style='border:none;border-bottom:1px solid black;width:40%' /> + +<p>To return now to Dick, who had been left all +this time in the cellar. Food was brought to him +on occasion, but always by two or three in +company, and he had no opportunity of trying to fight +his way from the cellar. Once when the cook and +cookee came, he attempted to bribe them to let him +escape, but they turned a deaf ear to his words.</p> + +<p>Back at the office, Barrows was having a council +with his henchmen. These consisted of the two +LeBlancs, the cookee and the boss sawyer.</p> + +<p>“Things are beginning to get too brisk here, so +we’ll make a good cleanup and light out,” said Barrows. +“I didn’t expect when we started this thing +that there would be all the trouble that has since +come upon us. We’ve all done enough now to land +us in prison, what with this kidnapping and everything. +Catching Howells around here was what +has made me suspicious. There’s no telling what +he has done on the outside. He may have written +to Boone and told him what was going on, and that +would sure spill the beans, for Boone would probably +order me off the place and give me my walking +papers. Then we would be all done. What I propose +is this: We have already cut a good bit of +timber and that has been sawed, thanks to the saw I +had hidden in the storehouse. We would have +wasted time, as usual, waiting for another, but this +suits my ends better. All this timber has been left +on the tote road, and tonight we’ll make a number +of trips and clean it up. Tomorrow night we’ll +make a grand cleanup and then fire the sawmill and +wreck the machinery and light out. By the time +they have things ready to fix up, Boone will be too +late to keep his contracts and my work will have +been done,” Barrows concluded as he rubbed his +hands in evil satisfaction over his treachery.</p> + +<p>“And the boys?” inquired Jean LeBlanc softly.</p> + +<p>“I know what’s on your mind, LeBlanc. Ugh, +I’d hate to have you for an enemy. I suppose you +want to stick a knife in them and put them out of +the way.”</p> + +<p>“That would be safest. They know too much,” +answered the halfbreed.</p> + +<p>“Well, I have a better plan than that. You +remember we wrote a letter to decoy them away and +mentioned a ransom. What’s to prevent us from +really getting one from old man Boone? We could +stick him up for a big sum, and that would be clear +profit aside from what the Carson people are paying +us. King will keep them till we arrange things +and then we could free them. After that, LeBlanc, +you can do what you like; it will be out of my +hands then. Now we’ll start for the lake. Will the +boat be there at the usual time?” and he turned to +the boss sawyer.</p> + +<p>“Usual time,” laconically answered the man.</p> + +<p>The door was thrown open, and a man walked +into the room.</p> + +<p>“So it’s the Carson people that are back of you +this time, eh, Barrows? Guess I got here just in +time!”</p> + +<p>The men gasped in amazement, for there stood +“Moose” Boone.</p> + +<p>In the face of this crisis, the only one to keep +his head was LeBlanc.</p> + +<p>“Seize him,” he whispered sibilantly to his +brother, in French.</p> + +<p>Before Mr. Boone could make a move, he was +grabbed by the powerful brothers. One of them +clasped a hand over his mouth, and without a word, +as though they had practiced for this very moment, +Jean snatched a soiled bandanna from his pocket, +and in another minute Mr. Boone was effectually +gagged.</p> + +<p>Barrows also had sprung into action. Rummaging +around under the pine table that served as a +desk, he brought forth a length of rope, and soon +Boone was tightly bound.</p> + +<p>“Carry him over to the storehouse. Don’t put +him in the cellar. This makes things better. We +can keep him prisoner for several days and clean +up. Lively now,” ordered Barrows.</p> + +<p>“Moose” Boone was carried to the storehouse +and unceremoniously dumped. He lay on the floor +thinking how foolish he had been to come alone to +a camp where he knew there was treachery afoot, +but now it was too late to cry over spilled milk. He +wondered where the boys were, since he had seen +no sign of them about the camp.</p> + +<p>His reason for coming was the note that Garry +had sent him, and which the hermit had succeeded +in having posted.</p> + +<p>He twisted around several times in an effort to +relieve the pain in his arms and feet from lying tied +on the hard floor.</p> + +<p>Nearly two hours passed, and then the door was +softly unlocked and opened. In stepped the cook. +Mr. Boone wondered what was to happen now, and +he received the surprise of his life when the cook +fished out his knife and proceeded to cut the bonds +that bound him.</p> + +<p>“Have you come to the conclusion that this was +a fool thing to do? I am thankful, of course, and +will see that you are let go when the rest of this +gang is rounded up,” said Boone.</p> + +<p>The cook did not speak until he had cut the +bonds.</p> + +<p>“First, Mr. Boone, I’ll tell you something and +then I’ll show you someone. I don’t suppose you +will remember a cold spring day nearly twenty-five +years ago on the Umculcos, when you risked your +own life to save a lumberjack that was trying to +ride a log and fell into the river with the logs +crushing down about him?”</p> + +<p>Boone’s mind travelled swiftly back to the day, +although he had not given it a thought for years.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I remember pulling a man out, and then +falling sick from the cold, and when I got well the +man I had pulled out was gone,” he answered.</p> + +<p>“Well, I was the man you pulled out. I left the +camp because I was only a fool young fellow and +they made so much fun of me for falling in that I +picked up and got out. I never knew you were the +man until I saw you tonight and hitched your name +up with the man who saved me. Now I’ll show +you something like I promised.”</p> + +<p>He rolled the barrels away and raised the trap. +“Come up,” he called into the darkness.</p> + +<p>Dick awoke from a troubled sleep and painfully +crawled up the ladder. It took a few moments for +his eyes to get accustomed to the light, and then he +looked as though he saw a ghost.</p> + +<p>“Uncle,” he almost shouted, for so it was that +he always addressed Mr. Boone.</p> + +<p>They clasped hands with a hearty good will and +were about to exchange notes when the door was +thrown open and Barrows and the two LeBlancs +entered.</p> + +<p>Each held a revolver with a steady hand.</p> + +<p>“So, cook, you’ve turned traitor, have you? +Well, it just makes another prisoner. Now Boone, +it’s no use trying to do anything. Most of the +men in the camp are in my pay, and just to be sure +that we clean up tonight and tomorrow night as we +had planned, we have seized all the men we are not +sure of and have them herded in the bunkhouse +and under heavy guard. This time we’ll succeed!”</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII<br/>THE CAPTURE</h2> + +<p>We left Garry, Phil and Howells with the squatter +king on the lake shore waiting for darkness. +When it fell, they retrieved the canoe from its hiding +place and started across the timberland to +Dutton Lake. The trip occupied nearly three hours, +although they made excellent speed.</p> + +<p>The faint light of the stars pierced the blackness +of the forest, so they did not have to stumble +along, although the greatest of caution was exercised +every moment.</p> + +<p>They reached the lake without encountering a +person, and then launched the canoe. They did not +dare trust the weight of the four to the frail craft, +and so it was planned that King and Phil should +remain behind, while Art and Garry paddled out +into the lake. They did not have to wait a great +while until the chugging of the powerful engine in +the motor boat was heard.</p> + +<p>Paddling with the noiseless stroke of the +Indians, they followed after a reasonable time had +elapsed. They had taken only a few strokes when +Art whispered:</p> + +<p>“Here, we’re going at this thing wrong. When +that raft is loaded and starts back across the water, +it will make too much speed for us to follow. Suppose +we start now for the other side of the lake. +Then we can lie off shore and wait for its arrival +and see who meets the raft to unload it. That will +complete your evidence, and we’ll duck out for the +camp and somehow get hold of Dick. What say?”</p> + +<p>Without a word, Garry, who was paddling stern, +gave his paddle a twist and the canoe turned in its +course. They reached the other side and then lay +off shore as agreed, giving the paddles an occasional +twist to keep the canoe from drifting, for a gentle +breeze was stirring the lake.</p> + +<p>After a long wait they heard the approach of the +motor boat, which, as was customary, was running +without lights. Far down the shore they saw a +light appear as though some one were flashing a +lamp. It was probably to guide the boat to its destination +in the darkness. When the boat reached +its objective point, they paddled noiselessly to +within a few feet of it, and beached the canoe. +Walking with the stealth of Indians, they came +close to where the boat was being unloaded.</p> + +<p>“By jove, I know that voice,” whispered Garry, +as he heard a man ask:</p> + +<p>“So this is how the trick is done? Pretty clever, +I call it. Steal the timber and then raft it across to +where you have your trucks waiting and hustle it +to the railroad spur. Mighty good work on the +part of Barrows.</p> + +<p>“That’s Carson himself; used to be associated +with Father,” whispered Garry. He and Howells +were hiding back of a tree, well away from danger +of being seen. At that moment Carson struck a +match to light his pipe.</p> + +<p>“Get a good look at him, we will want to identify +him in court if necessary,” said Garry. +Howells nudged him to make him understand that +he had done so.</p> + +<p>“Now wait here,” whispered Garry. Howells +watched in amazement as Garry crept to the water’s +edge and noiselessly waded in. He made no sound +as he swam. When he came back, dripping wet, +Howells wanted to ask a score of questions, but +forebore for fear of being heard.</p> + +<p>He was about to come closer and whisper, when a +form crept up to them and a low voice said:</p> + +<p>“So we meet again.”</p> + +<p>It was Baptiste LeBlanc. The Frenchman then +lifted his voice and called for the others. But he +did not get very far. Howells struck with all his +strength and his hard knuckles took the halfbreed +on the point of the jaw. LeBlanc dropped like a +stone.</p> + +<p>“Come, Garry, this way quick,” called Art. There +was no need of whispering now, for the men who +had been unloading had heard the alarm and there +was the sound of rushing feet.</p> + +<p>“Into the canoe, Art. They can’t follow us,” +said Garry.</p> + +<p>Howells had intended a dash into the woods, +where there was less likelihood of being caught, but +he obeyed Garry, knowing that he had some plan +in view. They pushed the canoe into the water, +springing into it as they did. It was lucky that +Howells was an experienced canoeist, else the frail +boat would have been overturned. As it was, they +got a good start, and in a moment were bending +to their paddles with all their might and strength.</p> + +<p>“What’s to stop them following us in the motor +boat? We should have taken to the woods,” remonstrated +Art.</p> + +<p>“Faster, I’ll tell you later,” answered Garry +breathlessly. At that minute they heard loud imprecations +from the shore.</p> + +<p>By this time they were well away from shore and +out of danger of a possible shot.</p> + +<p>Garry began to laugh.</p> + +<p>“No wonder they are shouting and cursing there. +I swam to the boat that time I left you and cut the +wires on the engine; and to be sure, I took out the +spark plugs, and have them in my pocket. It will +be some time before they get that boat into condition +to chase us!”</p> + +<p>“Good boy,” said Art admiringly.</p> + +<p>The return across the lake was without eventful +occurrence, however, for with them was the hermit.</p> + +<p>Garry greeted him warmly. “What news?” he +asked.</p> + +<p>“I fear I am the bearer of bad news,” said the +hermit.</p> + +<p>“Your father has come to the camp and been +caught, so I judge from what I heard said by two +men a while ago as I lay close to the road that +leads here. Also many of the lumberjacks are kept +captive in one of the shacks, and a heavy guard has +been set over them. I think we had better go for +help; we can’t battle them alone, our numbers are +too few.”</p> + +<p>Garry was for going at once to the rescue of his +father, but the others restrained him.</p> + +<p>“We can’t do anything there, and we can be of +great help on the outside. There is a sheriff in +town, and we can get word to him, and have him +round up a posse sufficiently large to capture the +whole outfit,” advised Art.</p> + +<p>Reluctantly Garry agreed that this was the wisest +thing to do.</p> + +<p>“King, guide us around so that we can avoid the +camp, but get to the road that leads to town. We’ll +get a posse and give them a battle,” directed Garry.</p> + +<p>Without a word, King led the way, and the +others followed.</p> + +<hr style='border:none;border-bottom:1px solid black;width:40%' /> + +<p>In the meantime, Mr. Boone and Dick had been +led from the storehouse and taken to the bunkhouse, +where the rest of the prisoners were.</p> + +<p>There were shouts of welcome when some of the +old woodsmen saw Mr. Boone. Although he was +the owner of the timber tract, and their employer, +they hailed him as “Moose” and shook his hand +energetically.</p> + +<p>“By gosh. I’m ashamed to look you in the face, +Moose,” cried one of the lumberjacks. “To think we +let a bunch like that crowd outside there put it over +on us; men that have fought with rifle and peavy +stick when some crowd tried to steal the river from +us. Gosh, if we had a few axes and peavy sticks +now we could get out there and make that bunch +look sick, but all have rifles and revolvers. Barrows +must’ve had a regular armory with him.”</p> + +<p>They were still talking and trying without success +to puzzle a way out of their predicament, when +Dick gave a shout of joy.</p> + +<p>“There’s my knapsack. That lets me see light +right now!”</p> + +<p>The men looked at him in astonishment. How a +mere knapsack could help them was not to be understood.</p> + +<p>“That was chucked in here by one of the men +yesterday, before we were captured. He saw it in +the shack, and remembering it belonged to one of +you, took it for safe keeping. It was Tom there, +who brought it.”</p> + +<p>Tom was the man who had taken them on the +coon hunt, and one they had been suspicious of, but +here he was with the loyal men.</p> + +<p>Dick hurriedly opened the knapsack. Yes, there +it was, safe and sound, the wireless outfit!</p> + +<p>“Now one of you fellows get up there and dig a +hole in the roof; it only need be a small one, that +I can slide this aerial up through. It ought not to +take more than an hour.”</p> + +<p>“We haven’t any knife,” said one of the men. +“They took away all our knives and matches from +us.”</p> + +<p>Dick secured his knife from its secret pocket in +the lapel, and handed it to one of the men.</p> + +<p>“One of you set to work, and the others keep +talking so that the guards outside will not become +suspicious and look in here.”</p> + +<p>“Are you going to try something with the radio-phone,” +asked Mr. Boone, who was the only one +who grasped what Dick’s intentions were.</p> + +<p>“Yes; it’s our only chance. I happened to notice +that there were two aerials over houses in the last +town we passed through before coming to the camp, +and I saw some radio apparatus in a store window, +so evidently some one there has an outfit. Fortunately +I have the receiving apparatus here as well +as a sender, and we can find out if my message is +received by anyone.”</p> + +<p>As he talked, he adjusted the apparatus, ready to +send his plea for help through space and hope that +someone would be listening in.</p> + +<p>“Hurry!” he called to the man who was boring +through the board roof with the knife. “It’s almost +time for the usual radio broadcasting stations to +stop sending, and I want to get someone while they +are still listening in, just as the broadcasting station +closes.”</p> + +<p>“There, guess that’s all right, unless you want it +a little bigger,” said the man who had been working.</p> + +<p>Dick looked up at the hole and saw that it would +do all right.</p> + +<p>Most of the men were frankly incredulous. The +thought of talking through a ’phone that had no +wires was a riddle to them, as few or none of them +knew anything about radio.</p> + +<p>One of them suggested that instead of wasting +time with such a “fool contrivance,” they try to tear +away the boards from the roof and take a chance on +overpowering the guards. This was discouraged +by the others who, though they were by no means +cowardly, knew it would be foolhardy to face guns +with only their bare hands.</p> + +<p>“Let’s give the boy a chance with his infernal +machine first,” advised a grizzled old lumberjack. +“Then if it don’t work, we can try something else.”</p> + +<p>Dick adjusted the aerial, and then tuning up, got +ready to talk into the transmitter.</p> + +<p>“Some of you men keep talking over there by the +door, and the rest of you get near the windows and +block anyone from seeing in. Don’t talk too loud, +just enough to cover my voice.”</p> + +<p>For nearly ten minutes Dick repeated over and +over again:</p> + +<p>“S. O. S. Send a sheriff with large posse to +Boone’s camp. Owner and some of men held prisoners. +Answer if you get message.”</p> + +<p>Then there was a crackling sound in the receivers +that were clasped to his head, and with a thrill he +knew that someone was trying to get him.</p> + +<p>He adjusted the tuning apparatus with trembling +fingers. The voice still sputtered and crackled. +Finally he got the right wave length, and heard a +welcome voice.</p> + +<p>“Hello, are you sending help call?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” almost shouted Dick. “Who are you?”</p> + +<p>“Brown talking. My father is sheriff. Are you +in earnest?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, surely. Hurry posse on way. You’ll need +thirty or forty men. We are held prisoners in bunkhouse +here. Captors are all armed. Be careful. +This is last call; act quick, as I’m going to pack up +radio for fear I will be discovered and apparatus +broken. Goodnight.”</p> + +<p>“Going for Dad now, goodnight,” came the +voice. There was a sputter, then silence.</p> + +<p>Dick turned to the men, his face gleaming with +pleasure.</p> + +<p>“There will be a posse on the way in a short time. +The radio worked,” he announced.</p> + +<p>The little group of men burst into a cheer and +were silenced only by the threat of the guards outside +to come in and make them stop.</p> + +<p>Feeling that they had done all that could be +done, they prepared to turn in and wait the coming +of the morn with its posse headed by Sheriff Brown.</p> + +<p>The men rolled in, but Dick was too excited to +sleep, and he told Mr. Boone, in a low tone, of all +that had transpired since they had reached the camp. +Of course he was unable to tell of the way in which +the timber was stolen, as he had not seen his chums +when they returned from their expedition that night +he was captured.</p> + +<p>Mr. Boone was silent for some few minutes after +Dick had concluded his talk. He was worried about +Garry and Phil, and Dick, noting his silence, asked +him what the trouble was.</p> + +<p>When he found the reason for Mr. Boone’s +worry, he endeavored to cheer him up.</p> + +<p>“The chances are that they have not fallen into +the hands of anyone at the camp here, else they +would have been brought here with us. I am certain +that they have discovered some clue and are +following it up. Very likely they are searching for +me, as they of course do not know I am here.”</p> + +<p>Being ignorant of all that had transpired, Dick +did not know how near at that moment his chums +were.</p> + +<p>As they talked, they were being guided towards +the road by King. It was necessary to make a +wide detour in order to avoid running into a stray +member of the camp traitors’ party.</p> + +<p>Garry was well satisfied with part of the night’s +work. In the first place, he had proof that Carson, +his father’s business enemy, was at the bottom of +the whole mess, and in the second place, he felt that +he had so effectively disabled the motor launch that +no more timber would be stolen that night. By the +next day, he expected to have the whole gang +rounded up.</p> + +<p>They finally reached the road, and were half way +to the town, when they heard the sound of what +they thought was a large auto truck coming towards +them.</p> + +<p>When they drew near the truck, they saw a dozen +rifles leveled at them, and a stern voice told them to +halt. They feared for a moment that they had +walked into a new trap.</p> + +<p>One of the men leaped from the truck and asked +them who they were and what their business was.</p> + +<p>“My name is Boone,” answered Garry, acting as +the spokesman for his little party. “I am on my +way to try and locate the sheriff of the county, as +my father and friends are held prisoner at the +Boone lumber cutting camp.”</p> + +<p>“Well, I’m the sheriff, and I’m on my way there +now. We’ll look you over in a moment and see if +you’re all right.”</p> + +<p>The words of the sheriff surprised Garry.</p> + +<p>“How did you know that you were wanted at the +camp?”</p> + +<p>“My boy picked a message out of the air with his +radio, and that’s how we found out,” answered the +sheriff.</p> + +<p>Garry gave a shout of joy. “Good for Dick, he +managed somehow to get a chance to use his wireless.”</p> + +<p>“Now,” said the sheriff, “lower the muzzles of +those rifles and come forward slowly. My men +have you covered and you have no chance for any +monkey business.”</p> + +<p>Knowing that they could soon convince the sheriff +of their statements, they did as they were bade. +When they came into the light cast by the headlights +of the truck, the sheriff at once recognized +Art Howells.</p> + +<p>“Hello, Art, guess that is all I want to know. +These fellows all right? I know you well enough +to take your word for it.”</p> + +<p>“They are absolutely O.K., Sheriff,” answered +Art. “We were on our way to summon you when +you met us.”</p> + +<p>Howells’ words satisfied the sheriff, and they +proceeded to get acquainted all around. Garry +asked if that was the pretext of the posse, for he +counted only fifteen men, and was relieved when he +was told that another truck with the same number +of men was following them, but had been obliged +to stop for a short time on account of engine +trouble.</p> + +<p>As they spoke they heard the rumble of an engine +and a short time later the second truck hove +into view.</p> + +<p>“It lacks about an hour and a half of daylight, so +I think we ought to be getting on. If possible we +can surprise them in the dark, that would win half +the battle for us. Not that I expect there will be +much of a fight, when they see that the law is after +them,” said the sheriff.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think I would trust the authority of the +law half as much as our rifles,” said Garry. “Those +men are desperate, some of them, and if they see +prison staring them in the face, they will fight all +the harder, figuring that they might as well be +taken for sheep as for lambs,” said Garry. “Besides, +they have two bad men with them, meaning +the two halfbreeds, Jean and Baptiste LeBlanc. +Jean is already wanted for a half a dozen serious +crimes, including kidnapping and setting fire to forests; +also he is an escaped jail bird. With that +kind, it means fight to the end before being taken.”</p> + +<p>“Come to think of it, I’ve seen a notice in my +office offering a reward for his capture. I’d like to +get that chap, and I could use the reward,” said the +sheriff.</p> + +<p>They had ridden as they talked, and soon were +on the outskirts of the camp.</p> + +<p>But something had gone wrong. A volley of +shots whistled at them from cover, and they were +forced to beat a short retreat instead of springing +a surprise on their quarry as they had intended +to do.</p> + +<p>“Now, that’s funny; how did they get on to +that?” muttered the sheriff.</p> + +<p>It later developed that Barrows had posted +sentinels in the woods along the road, and as soon as +their approach was noted, they had, by a pre-arranged +signal, passed the word of the coming to +the posse.</p> + +<p>This word having been received at the camp, +hasty preparations had been made to receive them. +The prisoners, about twenty in all, had been +marched at the points of guns to the storehouse, +and there were forced to enter the storehouse. +There was hardly room enough for them, and little +air, but they were crowded in like so many sardines +in a can, while the enemy fortified themselves in the +log bunkhouse.</p> + +<p>The opening volley of shots had come from the +sentinels who had closed in and fired as they ran +for shelter to the bunkhouse.</p> + +<p>“Well, we’re stumped for a minute now,” said +the sheriff. “They could hold us off for a long time +in that bunkhouse. It is built of solid logs, and bullets, +unless they were aimed at the windows, would +have no effect on that wood. We’ve got to think +up some way of rushing ’em or smoking ’em out. +Anyone got a plan in mind?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir, I think I have,” spoke up Phil. “As +soon as it gets just a little bit lighter we can rush +one of the trucks back through the woods to the +sawmill, and there we can sheath the truck with +some of that timber. A very thick bulwark can be +made, and that will halt the bullets. Half of the +men can stay near the bunkhouse drawing fire with +their rifles while the truck is being fixed.”</p> + +<p>“But what good is that going to do us?” broke +in the sheriff.</p> + +<p>“Just let me finish. I know that there are three +or four sticks of dynamite at the sawmill, that were +part of the lot bought to blast away the stumps +where the mill and camp shacks were built. With +what wire I have in my pack, and some of the batteries +from my wireless, I can rig up a small mine +at the side of the log hut, where there is no window. +The shield on the truck would be to allow us to get +there in safety.”</p> + +<p>“But wouldn’t that be an awful thing to do, +Phil?” asked Garry. “We couldn’t blow those men +up without warning.”</p> + +<p>“No, that isn’t my idea. I would have one of the +party carry a flag of truce into the camp and explain +to the men what had been done, and give them two +minutes to surrender. If they did not, then go +ahead and blow her up. Few would be hurt, and +those only slightly. The blast would make a breach +in the wall through which we could wage a more +even battle, if it comes to an actual fight. But I +think the fear of the dynamite would be enough to +do the trick. Besides, we could promise that the +lumberjacks would be allowed to go in peace; only +the principals would be held. If those jacks were +the kind that would play traitor to the camp they +were working for, they would double cross Barrows +to save their own skins.”</p> + +<p>“By gosh, boy, I believe you have struck the very +idea. At any rate, it’s worth a trial. I’ll go with +you in the truck with some of the men, and leave +the deputy here with the others.”</p> + +<p>The plan was put into execution, and the truck +made a dash over the uneven ground past the bunkhouse. +A volley of shots greeted them as they tore +past, and two of the men uttered exclamations of +pain. Fortunately they had only the merest flesh +wounds, which Phil bound for them with a small +first aid bandage that he had in his pocket.</p> + +<p>The barrier was built in record time at the sawmill, +and Phil rescued the dynamite from its hiding +place. He had feared for a moment that it might +have been removed, but evidently in the haste of +fortifying themselves in the bunkhouse, no one of +the enemy had thought of it.</p> + +<p>The return to the bunkhouse then started. When +within a striking distance of it, the truck was turned +around and, throwing his clutch into reverse, the +driver skillfully backed it towards the log house.</p> + +<p>Several shots were fired, then there was a silence. +Evidently those inside the building were at loss to +understand what this peculiar form of attack meant.</p> + +<p>Phil knew that his job would be a perilous one, +but he knew his duty was to do what he had planned. +The barrier was raised up and he slipped to the +ground. He felt a measure of safety in the thought +that the enemy could see what was going on, and +would be unlikely to send spies out, since the men +of the posse in the other truck could pick them off +if they came out.</p> + +<p>Phil raided his radio set for the necessary wire, +and fixed the dynamite against the log house. +There was only one detonator left, and Phil was not +sure it was a good one, but he felt so certain that +there would be no need of setting it off that he did +not particularly care.</p> + +<p>His plan was for the man who bore the flag of +truce to promise safe conduct for one man to go +and look at the arrangement and then go back and +tell the others that it was so. The inspector would +be under cover of the rifles of the posse all the time, +so would have no chance of wrecking the dynamite +mine.</p> + +<p>When it was finally in place, he gave the order +for the truck to back away slowly, paying out the +wire that was to be used to set off the detonator +from the battery at the other end if the need really +arose.</p> + +<p>Garry then volunteered to act as the truce bearer, +but here King stepped in.</p> + +<p>“I’ve been athinkin’ that you shouldn’t go. Suppose +they once got you in the shack; they could +send a man out and tell us that they would harm +you if you didn’t give orders to git out o’ the way. +They know that your pa would rather lose the +whole camp than have you harmed. Now with me +it would be different; they’d know that I didn’t +count for much with you folks, I’d be like one o’ +the sheriff’s men only, and could bargain better. +Better let me go, only promise if anythin’ happens +to me you’ll take care of my baby.”</p> + +<p>The crude logic of the old timer appealed to +them all except Garry, who felt that he should take +the danger, since Phil had done his share in braving +bullets to fix the charge.</p> + +<p>However, the sheriff decided the matter, and since +he was the real head of the posse and the law representative +of the county, his decision went.</p> + +<p>One of the men produced a white handkerchief +and tied it to a stick. Then holding the flag of +truce aloft, King, the squatter, headed for the log +house. The posse held their breaths for a moment, +thinking that those in the shack would fear a trick +and shoot him; but he advanced in safety and they +saw the door of the shack open long enough to +admit him.</p> + +<p>When King arrived at the shack, he was met by +Barrows, who demanded to know what message +was sent. In a few words King told them, then he +added some words of his own. These were directed +to the lumberjacks. King spun a yarn out of whole +cloth and told the jacks, who by this time were +almost ready to desert the ship, that another posse +was on the way.</p> + +<p>Barrows was for disregarding the message as a +trick, but King clinched the argument by offering +immunity to all the lumberjacks except the bosses +and camp officers. They demanded that one of +their number go and see if the dynamite was really +there.</p> + +<p>Barrows and his lieutenants were not strong +enough to cope with the lumberjacks, and it was +finally agreed that one lumberjack and the red +headed cookee go and inspect the blasting apparatus. +Each faction—for there were two now in the +log house—insisted on having a representative sent, +for neither was willing to trust the word of the +other. King agreed to remain behind as a hostage +for the safety of the messengers.</p> + +<p>The two set out on their quest, and in a few minutes +were back, post haste.</p> + +<p>“It’s there, boss; enough to blow us all into the +next world,” gasped the cookee, who was now +frightened half to death.</p> + +<p>His words being corroborated, the lumberjacks +insisted on an immediate surrender. Barrows saw +that the jig was up, and he ordered an evacuation. +Jean LeBlanc’s face was livid, and he spat out a +torrent of abuse at Barrows. But for all his braggadocio, +Barrows was a coward under the skin, and +he saw there was nothing to be gained by a fight +except a longer prison term. Even now he was +figuring on bargaining with Mr. Boone for his freedom, +by giving away the interests who had hired +him to do their dirty work.</p> + +<p>Once outside the door, they found the guns of the +men in the trucks trained on them, and they were +marching quietly to be disarmed and probably +bound, when suddenly, with a loud scream of defiance, +Jean LeBlanc turned and bounded away with +the speed of a stricken deer. A dozen shots flew +after him, and one must have struck him, for they +heard him give a screech of pain, then he reached +the sanctuary of the woods, and dodging for safety +from tree to tree dashed for the lake. Three of the +men took after him, but he had taken them by such +great surprise when he fled, that he got a flying +start.</p> + +<p>LeBlanc reached the lake and dived in. He had +seen at the same moment as the men who were following, +the one chance to save his hide. The motor +boat had been repaired, and in it were three or four +of the men concerned in the timber thefts. Among +them was Jean’s brother Baptiste.</p> + +<p>Swimming under water, the halfbreed made for +the craft. The men in the launch opened fire on +the pursuers. A rope was thrown to Jean by his +brother, which he grasped, and then without taking +the time to haul him aboard, the boat put about and +made for the other side of the lake.</p> + +<p>Shot after shot was exchanged, but LeBlanc, as +well as those in the motor boat, seemed to bear +charmed lives.</p> + +<p>Once again, Jean LeBlanc had foiled justice and +made his escape.</p> + +<p>The chagrined pursuers returned to the late +scene of hostilities, and found that order had been +restored. The lumberjacks who had been promised +immunity had been disarmed and herded together, +waiting the word to leave the camp.</p> + +<p>The ringleaders had been tied up to prevent any +more escapes, and Mr. Boone and Dick, together +with the other prisoners, had been removed from +the stifling air of the storehouse.</p> + +<p>Warm was the greeting between father and son +and between the chums who were together once +again, unharmed and happy. After the greetings +were over, the traitorous lumberjacks were ordered +to get their packs and leave within fifteen minutes +under the guidance of the posse, while the prisoners +were put on the trucks to be taken to the county +jail.</p> + +<p>“So ends the battle of Boone’s camp, and all the +excitement. My boys, I can’t tell you how proud I +am of you; but had I known the perils that were +in store for you, I would never have started you on +this mission. But you have covered yourselves with +glory, and I’m proud of you. Now I must get a +manager that will serve my interests, get this camp +going and do what I can to try and retrieve what I +have lost through the rascally Barrows. I am +afraid that I am financially hurt unless we can bring +Carson to book and make him stand this loss.”</p> + +<p>“With our evidence I think you can,” said Garry. +“And now what would you give for a real manager +that would serve you and no one else?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, but I would give almost anything +in reason for such a man.”</p> + +<p>“Then,” said Garry, “there’s your man,” and he +pointed to Art Howells.</p> + +<p>Garry’s father heartily agreed.</p> + +<p>“Now,” said Mr. Boone, “I’d like to get a look +at this hermit of yours.”</p> + +<p>The boys looked around for the old man, but, +mysterious as ever, he had disappeared!</p> + +<h2>CHAPTER XIX<br/>CONCLUSION</h2> + +<p>So the quest of the boys to discover the Timber +Thieves was ended. Mr. Boone hailed Garry’s suggestion +with delight, and Howells, who protested +that he had done nothing to deserve the big promotion, +was installed as camp manager, with the faithful +lumberjacks as a nucleus, to get the camp going +full blast again.</p> + +<p>“And you can depend, Moose Boone, on our +doing everything we can to make up for what has +happened before,” one of the old timers shouted.</p> + +<p>Only one remained to be rewarded for his help. +That was King, the squatter. Mr. Boone immediately +agreed when Garry told him of the promise +that had been made, and offered to send some food +and clothes to Misery Camp.</p> + +<p>A suggestion by Dick proved good. He asked +why the Misery Camp men could not be hired to +take some of the places left vacant by the men who +had turned traitor. This was put to King and he +thought it over a minute.</p> + +<p>Then he said:</p> + +<p>“Squatters hain’t lazy; it’s just that every man’s +hand is turned against ’em because they haven’t got +homes and land o’ their own; but you people seem +different. I’ll have all the men here in a couple o’ +days, ready to go to work and earn a livin’.”</p> + +<p>It took some time for all to tell their stories. +Since Garry and Phil had worked separately from +Dick, they had to tell him all that befell them since +the evening they had left to go and visit the scene +of the timber stealing; and Dick was made to tell +how he had become a captive.</p> + +<p>In the telling of their stories to each other, the +whole story was unfolded to Mr. Boone, and at the +end of the stories he again congratulated them on +the successful way in which they had carried out his +mission.</p> + +<p>“Now I suppose it’s back to the patrol on Sourdehunq,” +said Garry. “We have forgotten for some +time that we are Rangers, and we still have a +month or so to work for the protection of the forests. +It will seem kind of quiet there after all this +excitement, for I don’t believe that much can happen +there now.”</p> + +<p>But further adventures were in store for the +boys—how they were given another mission to +accomplish; the great good fortune that came to +Phil; the explanation of the mystery that surrounded +the hermit, and the final reward for their +summer’s work. All will be told in the next and +last book of the Ranger Boys series, entitled, “<span style='font-variant:small-caps'>The +Ranger Boys and Their Reward</span>.”</p> + +<p>THE END</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Ranger Boys Series</p> + +<p>BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE</p> + +<p>A new series of copyright titles telling of the +adventures of three boys with the Forest Rangers +in the state of Maine.</p> + +<p>Handsome Cloth Binding. +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by +the Publishers.</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 East 23rd Street, New York</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Radio Boys Series</p> + +<p>BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE</p> + +<p>A new series of copyright titles for +boys of all ages.</p> + +<p>Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RADIO BOYS' SEARCH FOR THE INCA'S TREASURE</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price +by the Publishers</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Boy Troopers Series</p> + +<p>BY CLAIR W. HAYES</p> + +<p>Author of the Famous "Boy Allies" Series.</p> + +<p>The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police.</p> + +<p>All Copyrighted Titles.</p> + +<p>Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs.</p> + +<p>PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by +the Publishers.</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Golden Boys Series</p> + +<p>By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D. +Dean of Pennsylvania Military College.</p> + +<p>A new series of instructive copyright stories for +boys of High School Age.</p> + +<p>Handsome Cloth Binding. +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by +the Publishers.</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 East 23rd Street, New York</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Boy Scouts Series</p> + +<p>BY HERBERT CARTER</p> + +<p>For Boys 12 to 16 Years</p> + +<p>All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p>PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p>New Stories of Camp Life</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMPFIRE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Scouting With The Silver Fox Patrol.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Scouting through the Big Game Country.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The New Test for the Silver Fox Patrol.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Search for the Lost Tenderfoot.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Secret of the Hidden Silver Mine.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Marooned Among the Game-Fish Poachers.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A story of Burgoyne's Defeat in 1777.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS ALONG THE SUSQUEHANNA;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Silver Fox Patrol Caught in a Flood.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS ON WAR TRAILS IN BELGIUM;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Caught Between Hostile Armies.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SCOUTS AFOOT IN FRANCE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, With The Red Cross Corps at the Marne.</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price +by the Publishers</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>Our Young Aeroplane Scout Series</p> + +<p>(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</p> + +<p>BY HORACE PORTER</p> + +<p>For Boys 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p>All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles</p> + +<p>PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p>A Series of Remarkable Stories of the Adventures of Two +Boy Flyers in The European War Zone.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN FRANCE AND BELGIUM;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Saving The Fortunes of the Trouvilles.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN GERMANY.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN RUSSIA;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Lost on the Frozen Steppes.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN TURKEY;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Bringing the Light to Yusef.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ENGLAND;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Twin Stars In the London Sky Patrol.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ITALY;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Flying with the War Eagles of the Alps.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT VERDUN;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Driving Armored Meteors Over Flaming Battle Fronts.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE BALKANS;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Wearing the Red Badge of Courage Among Warring Legions.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE WAR ZONE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Serving Uncle Sam In the Great Cause of the Allies.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS FIGHTING TO THE FINISH;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or Striking Hard Over the Sea for the Stars and Stripes.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT THE MARNE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Hurrying the Huns from Allied Battle Planes.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN AT THE VICTORY;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Speedy High Flyers Smashing the Hindenburg Line.</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price +by the Publishers</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Jack Lorimer Series</p> + +<p>BY WINN STANDISH</p> + +<p>For Boys 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p>All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles</p> + +<p>PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p>CAPTAIN JACK LORIMER; or, The Young Athlete of Millvale High.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;'>Jack Lorimer is a fine example of the all-around American +high-school boys. His fondness for clean, honest +sport of all kinds will strike a chord of sympathy among +athletic youths.</p> + +<p>JACK LORIMER'S CHAMPIONS; or, Sports on Land and Lake.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;'>There is a lively story woven in with the athletic achievements, +which are all right, since the book has been O.K'd. +by Chadwick, the Nestor of American Sporting Journalism.</p> + +<p>JACK LORIMER'S HOLIDAYS; or, Millvale High in Camp.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;'>It would be well not to put this book into a boy's hands +until the chores are finished, otherwise they might be +neglected.</p> + +<p>JACK LORIMER'S SUBSTITUTE; or, The Acting Captain of the Team.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;'>On the sporting side, this book takes up football, wrestling, +and tobogganing. There is a good deal of fun in this book +and plenty of action.</p> + +<p>JACK LORIMER, FRESHMAN; or, From Millvale High to Exmouth.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;'>Jack and some friends he makes crowd innumerable happenings +into an exciting freshman year at one of the leading +Eastern colleges. The book is typical of the American +college boy's life, and there is a lively story, interwoven +with feats on the gridiron, hockey, basketball and other +clean honest sports for which Jack Lorimer stands.</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price +by the Publishers</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Boy Allies</p> + +<p>(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</p> + +<p>With the Navy</p> + +<p>BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE</p> + +<p>For Boys 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p>All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles</p> + +<p>PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p>Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, +meet each other in an unusual way soon after the declaration +of war. Circumstances place them on board the British cruiser, +"The Sylph," and from there on, they share adventures with +the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, the author, +is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably the +many exciting adventures of the two boys.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Vanishing Submarine.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM'S CRUISERS;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Fall of the Russian Empire.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Fall of the German Navy.</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price +by the Publishers</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Boy Allies</p> + +<p>(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</p> + +<p>With the Army</p> + +<p>BY CLAIR W. HAYES</p> + +<p>For Boys 12 to 16 Years.</p> + +<p>All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles</p> + +<p>PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p>In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads +unable to leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the +soldiers of the Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. +Their experiences and escapes are many, and furnish plenty +of good, healthy action that every boy loves.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Through Lines of Steel.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Twelve Days Battle Along the Marne.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Alsne.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, With the Italian Army In the Alps.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Struggle to Save a Nation.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Saving France from the Enemy.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE GREAT ADVANCE;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, Driving the Enemy Through France and Belgium.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH;</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> or, The Closing Days of the Great World War.</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price +by the Publishers</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Navy Boys Series</p> + +<p>A series of excellent stories of adventure on +sea and land, selected from the works of popular +writers; each volume designed for boys' +reading.</p> + +<p><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Handsome Cloth Bindings</span></p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS IN DEFENCE OF LIBERTY.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A story of the burning of the British schooner Gaspee in 1772.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By William P. Chipman.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS ON LONG ISLAND SOUND.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A story of the Whale Boat Navy of 1776.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS AT THE SIEGE OF HAVANA.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> Being the experience of three boys serving under Israel Putnam</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> in 1772.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS WITH GRANT AT VICKSBURG.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A boy's story of the siege of Vicksburg.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH PAUL JONES.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A boy's story of a cruise with the Great Commodore in 1776.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS ON LAKE ONTARIO.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of two boys and their adventures in the War of 1812.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE ON THE PICKERING.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A boy's story of privateering in 1780.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS IN NEW YORK BAY.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A story of three boys who took command of the schooner "The Laughing</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> Mary," the first vessel of the American Navy.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS IN THE TRACK OF THE ENEMY.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of a remarkable cruise with the Sloop of War "Providence"</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> and the Frigate "Alfred."</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By William P. Chipman.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS' DARING CAPTURE.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of how the navy boys helped to capture the British Cutter</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> "Margaretta," in 1775.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By William P. Chipman.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE TO THE BAHAMAS.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The adventures of two Yankee Middies with the first cruise of an</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> American Squadron in 1775.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By William P. Chipman.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH COLUMBUS.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The adventures of two boys who sailed with the great Admiral in the</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> discovery of America.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By Frederick A. Ober.</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Boy Spies Series</p> + +<p>These stories are based on important historical +events, scenes wherein boys are prominent +characters being selected. They are the +romance of history, vigorously told, with careful +fidelity to picturing the home life, and accurate +in every particular.</p> + +<p><span style='font-variant:small-caps'>Handsome Cloth Bindings</span></p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A story of the part they took in its defence.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By William P. Chipman.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A story of two boys at the siege of Boston.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> to drive the British from that State.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of General Marion and his young spies.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> in the Siege of Yorktown.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of how the young spies helped the Continental</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> Army at Valley Forge.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of the part they took in its brave defence.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By William P. Chipman.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> General Washington.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'> By James Otis.</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers.</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street, New York</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Girl Chum's Series</p> + +<p>ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.</p> + +<p>ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.</p> + +<p>A carefully selected series of books for +girls, written by popular authors. These +are charming stories for young girls, well +told and full of interest. Their simplicity, +tenderness, healthy, interesting motives, +vigorous action, and character painting will +please all girl readers.</p> + +<p>HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>BENHURST CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MAJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring Corning.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow.</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers.</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street, New York</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Girl Comrade's Series</p> + +<p>ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS.</p> + +<p>ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES.</p> + +<p>A carefully selected series of books for +girls, written by popular authors. These +are charming stories for young girls, well +told and full of interest. Their simplicity, +tenderness, healthy, interesting motives +vigorous action, and character painting will +please all girl readers.</p> + +<p>HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER By I. R. Thurston.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fanny E. Newberry.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L. Rouse.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie B. Newberry.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>HELEN BEATON. COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S. Robbins.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry.</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers.</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street. New York</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>Marjorie Dean High School Series</p> + +<p>BY PAULINE LESTER</p> + +<p>Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean College Series</p> + +<p>These are clean, wholesome stories that will be of great +interest to all girls of high school age.</p> + +<p>All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles</p> + +<p>PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL FRESHMAN</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SOPHOMORE</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL JUNIOR</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SENIOR</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price +by the Publishers</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>Marjorie Dean College Series</p> + +<p>BY PAULINE LESTER.</p> + +<p>Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean High School Series.</p> + +<p>Those who have read the Marjorie Dean High +School Series will be eager to read this new series, +as Marjorie Dean continues to be the heroine in +these stories.</p> + +<p>All Clothbound. Copyright Titles.</p> + +<p>PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE FRESHMAN</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SOPHOMORE</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE JUNIOR</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SENIOR</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by +the Publishers.</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 East 23rd Street, New York</p> + +<hr class='pb' /> + +<p>The Girl Scouts Series</p> + +<p>BY EDITH LAVELL</p> + +<p>A new copyright series of Girl Scouts stories by +an author of wide experience in Scouts' craft, as +Director of Girl Scouts of Philadelphia.</p> + +<p>Clothbound, with Attractive Color Designs.</p> + +<p>PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH.</p> + +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GIRL SCOUTS AT MISS ALLEN'S SCHOOL</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GIRL SCOUTS AT CAMP</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GIRL SCOUTS' GOOD TURN</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GIRL SCOUTS' CANOE TRIP</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em;margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0'>THE GIRL SCOUTS' RIVALS</p> + +<p>For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by +the Publishers.</p> + +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> + +<p>114-120 East 23rd Street, New York</p> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber +Thieves, by Claude A. Labelle + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 39916-h.htm or 39916-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/9/9/1/39916/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/39916-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg b/39916-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea4b2d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/39916-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg diff --git a/39916-h/images/illus-tpg.jpg b/39916-h/images/illus-tpg.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..97b1528 --- /dev/null +++ b/39916-h/images/illus-tpg.jpg diff --git a/39916.txt b/39916.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fac3dc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/39916.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6810 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves, by +Claude A. Labelle + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves + +Author: Claude A. Labelle + +Release Date: June 4, 2012 [EBook #39916] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + + + + + +[Illustration: The guard let them out, and warned them that any attempt +at flight would be followed immediately by a shot.] + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES + +By CLAUDE A. LABELLE + +Author of + + "The Ranger Boys to the Rescue," + "The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit," + "The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers," + "The Ranger Boys and Their Reward." + +[Illustration] + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +Publishers New York + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS SERIES + +A Series of Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years of Age + +By CLAUDE A. LABELLE + + The Ranger Boys to the Rescue + The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit + The Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers + The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber Thieves + The Ranger Boys and Their Reward + +Copyright, 1922 + +By A. L. BURT COMPANY + +Made in "U. S. A." + + + + +THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES. + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE START OF NEW ADVENTURES + + +"Bangor, Bangor, all change for Portland, Boston and way stations," +shouted the trainman. + +"Here we are, boys," shouted Garry Boone. "Wake up, Dick, let's get our +packs and rifles. We will be in the station in a few seconds now. My, +but I'll be glad to see Dad again. And he promises us some real action, +too. I wonder what trouble he is in. You remember he hinted at something +of the sort in the letter that he wrote us at Hobart." + +"Well, we'll know in a few minutes now, for your father will be waiting +for us at the Bangor House. Don't fret over what he wants, Garry, just +be glad that we have a chance to get into action of some kind. These +past few weeks have gotten me so that I am not happy if we don't have a +few scrapes to get in and out of," remarked the second of the trio of +boys. + +Dick Wallace, a plump, heavyset chap, yawned and rubbed the sleep from +his eyes, and then got up and stretched his cramped limbs. He had been +napping for more than an hour. + +At that moment the train drew into the station with a screeching of +brakes, and the boys, having dug out their knapsacks and rifles from +between the seats where they had stowed them, soon were off the train +and walking briskly toward the Bangor House. + +"Why not take a car, there ought to be one along in a minute or two," +half grumbled Dick. It must be explained that Dick, because of his +weight, took the easiest method of doing anything whenever possible. + +This does not mean that he ever shirked his duty, or that he was +incapable of walking whenever he had to. As a matter of fact, he had +made long hikes in the woods without ever batting an eyelash, but he +believed in doing such things only when they were necessary. + +"Trust Dick to want a street car and something to eat the minute he gets +to a city," laughed Garry. + +"Yes, I bet he is starving right now," jibed Phil Durant. "All he has +had to eat since lunchtime is an apple, three bananas, and I don't know +how many bags of peanuts. If the train boy hadn't made a sale all the +afternoon except to Dick he would have made a day's pay anyway." + +"That reminds me that it is almost supper time now," said Dick. He had +heard his chums rag him so many times about his appetite, that their +remarks rolled off him as does water off a duck's back. "I move we +postpone hearing what Dad Boone has to tell us until after we have +eaten. Then he can tell us what he wants, and after that perhaps we can +all go to a movie show." + +There was no car in sight, so they continued their walk, and soon were +at the doors of the Bangor House, a large, well-appointed hotel. The +boys cut a strange figure as they walked through the lobby, for they +were clad in broad brimmed Stetson army hats, khaki coats cut like +hunters' jackets, with big roomy pockets, and khaki trousers stuffed +into the tops of shoepacks, which are nothing more than heavy moccasins +with an extra leather sole. + +Each boy carried a knapsack on his back, and attached to this was a +lariat. In addition, a stout forest hatchet was thrust through the belt +that girdled them, and each boy carried a rifle. + +Many curious looks were cast in their direction as they walked to the +desk where Garry asked if Mr. Boone was registered there. + +In a few moments the clerk had telephoned up to Garry's father and +immediately was told to send the boys up. Following in the wake of the +bell boy they ascended to the room, where Mr. Boone was waiting. + +He greeted the boys heartily and commented on their healthy appearance, +for the sun and open air had made them as tanned as any woodsman. + +Greetings over, Mr. Boone remarked: + +"Before I tell you boys why I have sent for you, I suggest that we get +our dinner and then come back to the room." + +"Welcome words!" uttered Dick enthusiastically. + +"I thought that would about hit the spot with you, Dick," laughed Mr. +Boone. + +"Yes," said Garry, "he is starving to death; he hasn't had anything to +eat for nearly an hour and a half." + +Leading the way, Mr. Boone headed the boys toward the dining room, while +they unanimously ordered a fine steak, and soon were busily eating. + +As they eat, let us look them over and get acquainted with them. Those +of our readers who have read the three volumes preceding this one, "The +Ranger Boys to the Rescue," "The Ranger Boys Find the Hermit," and "The +Ranger Boys and the Border Smugglers," already know our heroes. Others +must be introduced. + +The leader of the trio is Garfield Boone. He is generally known as +Garry. The stout boy with the long distance appetite is Dick Wallace, +close friend of Garry, and ward of Mr. Boone. The third is Phil Durant, +a boy of French Canadian parentage. The three boys live in a small Maine +town, only a few miles from Portland, the principal city of the Pine +Tree State, as our northernmost commonwealth is known. + +They have just completed their junior year in high school, and it has +been decided that Garry and Dick shall go to a military school the +coming fall, while Phil will have to remain and finish at the high +school. + +Hence they wanted to spend their last vacation together, and had picked +on the idea of taking a camping trip to the woods. Mr. Boone, father of +Garry, who owned extensive lumber tracts in the Maine woods and was +connected with some of the big paper mills of the state, came to bat +with an idea that pleased the boys immensely. + +It was to this effect. That instead of going on a mere camping trip +which might prove to be tiresome before it was concluded, that the boys +become attached to the Forest Ranger Service as an extraordinary Unit of +this woodcraft outfit. + +Their duties would be the same as those of the older Rangers; that is, +to guard the forests from the fire peril that constantly menaced the +timber lands of the state. In this service there were two branches, the +men who act as lookouts, having an unchanged station, and the patrol men +who travel over a certain set course watching that fire does not start +and keeping careless campers from starting fires in dangerous spots. + +In a few days the boys had outfitted themselves and were on their way to +their first station on the Sourdehunq Mountain, a tract of timberland +owned by Mr. Boone. They had no thought of any adventure other than that +which might be caused by the discovery of a fire, but on their second +night on the trail they find the guide they had hired, one Jean LeBlanc, +a French Canadian halfbreed, trying to steal their supplies. + +They drive him away, and later find the halfbreed is inimical to them +because of a fancied grievance he has against the elder Boone. They also +make a staunch friend in the person of Nate Webster, an old Maine guide. +Later Webster replaces the Deputy Ranger, Anderson by name, who has +proved incompetent, and Anderson joins forces with LeBlanc and becomes +an enemy of the Ranger Boys, and nearly succeeds in doing them great +harm. + +Another friend is made in the person of an old hermit, who on several +occasions warns the boys of impending peril by sending them cryptic +notes. + +On one occasion Jean LeBlanc kidnaps the little daughter of a family by +the name of Graham, who are camping in the woods. With the aid of a note +from the hermit, the boys are able to rescue her and capture LeBlanc. +The latter, however, escapes and makes much trouble for the boys, +finally setting fire to the woods. + +He and Anderson escape by climbing a sheer cliff. Still later the boys +are asked by the Customs Secret Service to get evidence of a gang of +smugglers on the Canadian border. This they do and the gang is seized, +all except LeBlanc who dodges back across the boundary and is hence safe +from arrest since he is on Canadian territory and not amenable to the +United States law. + +During a rainy season, they seek out the hermit and find him; that is, +Dick finds him. One of their greatest adventures during the search for +the gang of border smugglers is the finding, with the aid of an old map, +of a tourmaline mine. The boys get a deed to the mineral rights of the +land, and plan at a later date to mine the gems and make a handsome +income for themselves. + +It must also be explained that there is a mystery connected with Dick. +His father was a college professor of geology and botany, and a +classmate of Mr. Boone. He had a fall from a horse that destroyed his +memory, and before an operation could be performed, disappeared. Dick's +mother had died when he was a baby, and so being without parents or +home, Mr. Boone had become his guardian, bringing him up with his own +son, Garry. + +Now that we have a brief sketch of the boys and their previous +activities, let us see what Mr. Boone's need of them is. + +"Here is the whole story, boys," said Mr. Boone as they finished their +dinner and returned to his room. "As you know, I have extensive +interests not only in the timberland but in the mills that manufacture +paper. Recently I severed connections with several of the mills, and put +all my eggs in one basket, so to speak, by investing my funds all in one +mill. Of course it is impossible to do business on a big scale without +making many business enemies, or at least determined rivals. I have a +good many such, and I have been given to understand that several of them +have pooled their resources and become connected with the mills from +which I withdrew my money. + +"Of course I have not enough work in my one mill to take care of all the +timber that I can cut, so I contract to supply other mills, necessarily +becoming a rival of some of the other timber owners. + +"Then, too, I have recently decided to start an experiment in summer +lumbering. You know, of course, that Maine's lumber cutting season has +always been in the winter because the logs could be cut and hauled over +the snow to the rivers and then when the spring unleashed the ice-bound +rivers, the logs could be driven down to the mills. However, I am +figuring on getting out lumber for building during the summer and in the +winter getting the logs for the pulp mills to grind ready for the making +of paper. I have several important contracts with a time limit; that is, +the necessary amount of lumber must be gotten out by a certain date else +I forfeit my profit and large damages besides. + +"Lately I have seen from my reports that the lumber is not being gotten +out on schedule time. Whenever I come and look it over, or send a +representative, everything goes like clockwork, but the moment that I +turn my back a saw breaks, making a week's delay, or a tractor is +broken, or something else happens. Unfortunately my financial affairs at +the present time are in such shape that I must devote the greater part +of my time to keeping the wheels going. This necessitates my being much +of the time in Boston and New York, hence I cannot be at the cutting +operations all the time. + +"I have changed managers, but still no good comes of it. Now I am +confident that the morale of my camp is being undermined by some +business rivals, and that there is underground work of some sort going +on. Since your success in getting that gang of smugglers, the complete +story of which I have already heard, I believe that you boys can find +out what is going on at the camp to hinder my contracts. + +"I have thought that you boys might go to the vicinity of the cutting +and sawmills and camp there. You would have the freedom of the camp, as +I would write the manager who you were, and then you could use your eyes +and ears and see what was what. + +"I should suggest that you display a great deal of ignorance about +lumbering operations and sawmill work, so that your presence would not +excite undue suspicion. Further than that I can give you no +instructions, for if I knew what the matter was I would not have to call +on you for assistance. I am simply relying on you to be able to do as +good a job for me as you have done for the Ranger Service and the +Customs Department. In other words, you will have to work out your own +salvation, and I am sure that you can produce for me the results that I +want." + +Mr. Boone concluded his long explanation and then leaned back, letting +the matter sink in. Then he asked, "Well, boys, what do you think of the +proposition? Are you willing to undertake it? Not that there will be any +danger attached, but do you feel yourselves confident of making a +success of the venture?" + +The eyes of the three boys sparkled. They discounted Mr. Boone's belief +that there would be no danger attached, for they felt that the +proposition offered a chance for much excitement, and this was what they +wanted. Thrilling adventures were for them the spice of life after what +they had experienced that summer. Garry answered for the others. "Will +we do it? You bet we will, and we'll succeed!" + + + + +CHAPTER II + +TO THE RESCUE + + +After the conclusion of their talk with Mr. Boone, the boys went out to +take in a motion picture show, after finding there would be time to see +the last performance. + +On the way to the theatre, they stopped for a moment to watch a street +fakir selling knives under the flaring light of a gasoline torch. + +"Here you are, here's a fine knife with your name and address inlaid in +the handle!" he was shouting. + +"I think I'll get one of those for myself," said Dick to his chums. + +"What do you want of one, you have your good heavy scout knife, haven't +you?" queried Garry. + +"Oh, I just want it as a curiosity for use when we come out of the +woods; we won't want to carry a great knife like that in civilian +clothes," replied Dick. + +"We'll miss the first of the show if you wait," remarked Garry. + +"Let the youngster have his way, Garry," interrupted Phil with a laugh. + +The street salesman made the name plate and quickly screwed the +transparent handle back on the knife. Dick handed over the money and +soon they were on the way to the movies. + +They received a fine surprise when they reached there, for the picture +being shown was one in which they had taken small parts when they +encountered a crew of motion picture actors while they were at their +first station in the woods, and when they had some stirring adventures +the time Jean LeBlanc set fire to the woods, the motion picture people +had been rescued by the boys. The picture was a decidedly good one and +they enjoyed it. + +The chums chattered during the play in a subdued tone, especially when +there flashed on the screen the parts where they were playing roles. The +water scene where Dick did some fine swimming was particularly good. + +After the picture was over, they edged out through the crowd and +returned to the hotel and were about to go up to their rooms when Garry +had an idea. + +"Say, boys, we are not going on such a secret affair now that we cannot +have Sandy with us, so I am going to telegraph Nate and ask if he will +bring us the dog tomorrow, or let us know by wire if he cannot." + +Sandy was the big Airedale dog owned by Garry, a canine that possessed +almost as much sense as some humans. When they had gone on their mission +to the border to capture the smugglers, they had left the dog in Nate's +keeping, as they were afraid that the sight of the dog would bring to +mind who they were to any of their enemies, and they had made several in +the course of their sojourn in the Maine woods. + +To speak was to act with Garry, and he promptly made his way to the desk +where the familiar blue lettered lamp was aglow. + +The work of writing the message was short and then they went to their +rooms, first stopping in to say good night to Mr. Boone, and advising +him to see the motion picture the next day so that he could see them in +their small parts. + +This Mr. Boone promised to do, and soon all were sleeping the sound +sleep of healthy boys with never a worry or care. + +Morning came, and with it the boys arose and hastened to the dining room +to make the most of the brief opportunity that they would have for the +excellent hotel fare. They spent a part of the forenoon in overhauling +and looking over their radio-phone equipment to see that it was all in +perfect condition, for they had a hunch that it would come in very +useful when they arrived at the cutting tract. This was to be proven +true at a later date. + +About ten o'clock they received a wire from Nate saying that he would +arrive in Bangor about noon and would bring the Airedale with him. True +to his promise in the telegram, the old guide appeared at the hotel +shortly after the noon hour set in and with him was Sandy. The boys were +seated in some of the arm chairs that dotted the lobby, and in less than +a moment the dog had found his friends, and nearly knocked over half a +dozen people in his haste and eagerness to reach the trio, for despite +the fact that an Airedale is called a one man dog, he distributed his +friendship equally among the three chums. + +The boys were fully as glad to see their four-footed friend as he was to +welcome them, and they cuffed and patted him strenuously. + +"Wall, boys, there's your pup, safe and sound as the day I took charge +of him. And let me tell you, he is some dog. Saved me a considerable sum +of money tother day, too," announced Nate. + +"Tell us about it," asked Garry, as the three crowded around the old +"State of Mainer" and shook hands with him heartily. + +"There ain't a whole lot to tell, 'cepting that a few days ago I sold a +small tract of land that I had to a queer old codger who doesn't believe +in banks, and who paid me in bills. I believe in banks myself, but it +was late when I made the deal so I had to stow the money away in the +house. I locked it up as well as I could in a small desk in the sitting +room, and went on to bed. 'Bout twelve o'clock I heard a tearing around +downstairs and Sandy barking fit to raise the dead. I hopped downstairs +as soon as I could reach for a rifle that stood in the corner of my +bedroom, just in time to see Sandy going through an open window. I +chased out after him, but someone was just driving away in an automobile +as I got out of the window. Sandy ran the car down the road a piece, but +came back beaten and tuckered out. He was fast, but not quite fast +enough to catch the car, going at the rate it was. Well, I got back in +through the window and looked around. The window had been forced open, +and the burglar was just evidently about to force open the desk, for +there were scratches about the lock and a heavy screwdriver was laying +on the floor. I figure Sandy heard him from the kitchen, where he +generally slept, and came in and drove him off just in time to save my +money. So that's all there is to that, but he is a mighty fine dog, and +I hate to let go of him, even to his owner." + +The boys patted Sandy again and again as they listened to Nate's story. + +"Did you find any trace of the robber?" asked Garry. + +"Nary a sign except the footprints on the lawn under the window. I +figure it must have been someone that knew I got paid for the land that +evening, and that I kept a little valuable stuff in the desk, but there +is no proof or nothing to work on to determine who it might be. I don't +care anyway, as long as the invader didn't get my money," replied Nate. + +The boys invited Nate to lunch with them, and this invitation he +accepted, and calling Mr. Boone they went into the dining room. In a few +moments they were joined by "Moose" Boone and the greeting between the +two old friends was pleasant to see. + +During the luncheon hour they told Nate of the new work the boys were +going on, and while he expressed himself as sorry that they were not +immediately going back on the fire patrol, he agreed that they, if +anyone, could solve the mystery of the stolen timber and mishaps at the +logging camp. + +After luncheon the boys decided that since a day or two extra would not +make any great difference in their plans, they would walk to the camp +instead of riding in the hot stuffy train. They decided to start that +afternoon, as soon as the sun began to lower, and make about ten miles +of their fifty mile journey, sleeping out under the open as soon as it +got too dark to walk any farther. + +Garry's father agreed that they could take what little extra time was +needed to walk, and so it was settled. + +The first business of the afternoon was to visit a large grocery store +and purchase enough provisions to last them on the trip, for they would +do their cooking over an open fire along the way. + +"We'll just buy enough to carry us over for two days, for we ought to +reach the logging camp by late afternoon of the day after tomorrow," +announced Garry, the chosen leader of the trio on all expeditions. + +"This suits me to a T," remarked Dick. "Then we won't have to carry so +much extra stuff in our packs, and in this hot weather a few pounds +saved is a boon." + +"Trust Dick not to want to carry too heavy a pack," laughed Phil. + +"That's nothing to laugh about," protested Dick hotly, "that's just good +common sense. It's----" + +Then he perceived that his chums were ragging him a bit so he grinned +and turning on his heel started for the door, followed by the two +laughing boys. + +The buying of the groceries took but a short time, and soon the bags +were packed and they were ready for their trip. + +Goodbyes were said to Nate and Mr. Boone, and the trio set out on their +long hike. + +"Good luck, boys, and I sincerely hope that you find what you are +looking for, because my affairs are in a ticklish position just at +present and unless I find the cause of the disturbance and thefts at the +camp, I will be in a very serious way," said Mr. Boone as he shook hands +with the three boys. + +"Guess they can settle the matter if anyone can," remarked Nate as he +bade the boys goodbye. "They have done some pretty fine work for boys +lately and I look to see them get to the nigger in the wood-pile and +roust him out pretty shortly. Then mebbe they can come back and take +over the patrol for the rest of the summer. + +"We're good for about eight miles tonight, fellows," said Garry as they +started, "for it will be at least three hours before it gets too dark to +walk any farther," said Garry. + +"Have you the route all set in your mind?" asked Phil. + +"Yes, I looked over a road map very carefully this morning, and the +manager at the hotel garage gave me some other directions so that we +cannot go very far wrong," answered Garry. + +They passed well out of Bangor and were going along a country road, just +as the sun was setting, when a chugging automobile was heard back of +them. Soon a ramshackle old flivver drew up near them, driven by a young +farmer lad. + +He sized up the boys, then stopped his machine and asked: + +"Going far?" + +"On to Colter," answered Garry. + +"Gosh, that's a pretty good spell to walk," answered the farmer boy. +"I'm going on about four miles more; would you like a lift for that +distance?" + +"You bet we would," broke in Dick. + +This brought a laugh from the others, and they accepted the lift, for it +meant saving almost an hour on their way. + +They piled into the old flivver, and soon were rolling speedily along +the road. Despite its aged and decrepit appearance the car made +excellent time, and the boys commented on this. + +"Yep, she's a pretty good old boat," answered the boy. "I don't have +much time to tinker with the looks of the thing on the outside, but I +manage to keep the engine in pretty good condition. You can't keep a +farm car looking up to time every minute. Well, I turn in here in a +minute, so I guess this is as far as you can ride, unless another car +comes along. Will you come in and have a bite to eat?" + +The chums thanked him cordially but refused his invitation, saying that +they would cook their own meal an hour or so later. + +Garry looked up at the sun and then remarked to his chums: + +"It will be dark in two hours, and we can make just about six miles in +that time without exerting ourselves too much. We haven't done much of +anything all day so if we want to let out a bit we can tack on an extra +mile in that time and so save ourselves a bit of extra walking tomorrow. +Let's go." + +Hitching up their packs, the trio of chums set off at a brisk pace. The +setting of the sun made it much cooler and the walking was pleasant. +They passed through a small village and were well on the outskirts where +the houses were beginning to get scattered, and they were deciding how +far to proceed before picking a spot to camp for the night when they +heard a call for help and the sounds of a scuffle. In the gathering +gloom they could not see where the trouble was, but hastening towards +the spot from where the voices seemed to come, they approached a bend in +the road, and turning, saw two men attacking a third. + +The attackers seemed to be rough specimens of humanity, while the third +was a young man, fairly well dressed. This gave the affair the aspect of +a robbery instead of a quarrel among a lot of ruffians, so calling his +chums to hurry, Garry threw his rifle to his shoulder and shouted to the +attacking party to throw up their hands. + +The surprised thugs took one look at the business-like rifle in Garry's +hands, and then deciding that they might perchance overpower him seemed +to be on the verge of rushing toward him when Phil and Dick turned the +bend in the road. Seeing that they were outnumbered, and with no thought +of the fact that the boys might fire on them, they turned on their heels +and ran. Garry was about to send a shot flying after them when the young +man who had been the subject of the attack called to Garry to let them +go. + +Just then he toppled over and fell at full length at Garry's feet. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +A NEW ALLY + + +Garry hastily unstrapped his canteen and unloosing the stopper, poured +some of the water on the man's face. At the same time, Dick, showing a +surprising amount of speed for one so undeniably stout, sprang to help +Garry and unloosed the man's shirt collar. + +In a few moments the man had been revived, and when he had come to, +Garry asked him if he had been shot or stabbed or wounded in any way. + +"No," replied the man weakly. "One of those jacks hit me on the head +with a club, and I guess I just got groggy. I wonder if you boys could +help me home, I live a few hundred yards down the road." + +"Indeed we will, you wait just a moment and we will improvise something +to carry you on," replied Phil. + +"No, you won't have to do that, just give me an arm to lean on; that +will do very nicely." + +The boys did as he wished, and in a few minutes of easy walking they +came to a neat little cottage, set back a few yards from the door with a +number of flower beds scattered over the little lawn. + +"Oh Grace," called the man, and soon a pretty young woman came to the +door. When she saw her husband, for so he proved to be, leaning on the +arm of Garry she flew down the path and asked anxiously what was the +matter. + +"Nothing at all. Just wait till we get in the house and I will tell you +all about it," said the stranger. Then turning to the boys, he asked +them to come in. + +Anxious to hear what the cause of attack was, and why the man had wanted +the rascals to escape, the trio accepted his invitation, and soon were +sitting in the attractive little living room of the cottage. + +"Now I suppose you boys who so kindly helped me out of a nasty hole +would like to know what the whole business is about, wouldn't you?" +asked the owner of the cottage. + +"We are rather curious," answered Garry speaking for the others. + +"My name is Howells, Arthur first name, generally called Art by my +friends, and I am a timber scaler by occupation. I am scaling on the +Boone cutting a few miles from here, and the chaps who attacked me were, +until a few days ago, lumber jacks employed on the cutting. One morning +I found them 'spiking a tree,' and forthwith sent a report to the office +with a demand that they be fired. For that reason they met me tonight +and attempted to get satisfaction by giving me a sound beating. Perhaps +it would have been worse had you boys not come along so opportunely. I +don't think they would have murdered me, but could have easily put me +out of commission so that I could not work, and that is one thing that I +must do now of all times." + +"But why did you want us to let them escape. I should think you would +have wanted them put safely under lock and key for such an unwarranted +attack," demanded Garry. + +"Yes, Arthur," chimed in his wife. "I would have had them arrested and +given a good long sentence. They might have killed you or crippled you." + +"There's just one reason. One of them was Dave Pingree, son of old Daddy +Pingree who lives in the village near here. You know the son is a +worthless scoundrel, but old Daddy has had so much trouble that I didn't +want to bring any more on him by having his son arrested, bad as he is, +and as richly as he deserves to be jailed. The other one was a stranger +to these parts, half breed Canadian by the name of LeBlanc, who picked +up Pingree somewhere in the woods, and who has been his constant +companion for the past few weeks, at least since the cutting operations +of the Boone tract were started," concluded Howells. + +The three boys were so startled at the sound of the name LeBlanc that +they jumped to their feet simultaneously and asked Howells to repeat the +name. + +"LeBlanc is the name. But why does that surprise you so?" queried Mr. +Howells in surprise. + +"What is his first name," demanded Garry without answering the question. + +"On the payroll he is listed as Baptiste." + +"We did not get a very good look at him in the dusk," said Garry. "Would +you mind describing him for us, please. This is a peculiar situation, +and we will tell you about it after you have described the man," +answered Garry rather agitatedly. + +"Why he is a swarthy chap about twenty-seven or eight, just about the +same age as Pingree. He has black hair and mustache, and a jagged scar +on one side of his neck, probably a knife wound from some lumber camp +fight," answered Howells. + +Garry sank back with a sigh of relief. + +"At any rate he is not the man we think he is. The scar and the age +settle that, although the rest of the description fits him well enough +to make him a brother to Jean LeBlanc, the one man we do want to run +across in this neck of the woods," replied Garry. + +"Well, not that I want to raise any apprehension on your part, or tell +you something that is displeasing to you, he is a brother of a man +called Jean LeBlanc. I happen to know that this is so, for one night the +lumberjacks were wrestling in front of the bunkhouse and boasting about +their exploits, when this Baptiste came up and succeeded in throwing +several of the men with a rather vicious hold. After he had thrown +several of them he started boasting about his brother Jean, who had +taught him the hold. I was standing at one side watching the wrestling, +which is how I happened to overhear the matter. But why does the name of +LeBlanc bother you so?" he asked in conclusion. + +"That's a rather long story," answered Garry "and perhaps I had better +start by telling you our names. These are my chums, Phil Durant and Dick +Wallace, while my name is Garfield Boone, generally called Garry for +short." + +"I don't suppose you are any relation to the Mr. Boone who owns this +tract where the summer logging is going on are you? Most people of that +name in this state are somewhat related. In fact I am a second or third +cousin of his myself," said Howells with a smile. + +"Yes, I happen to be his son," answered Garry. + +"Well, that is a coincidence. I suppose you are going on to take a look +at the cutting aren't you. This being your vacation time probably you +are camping and travelling around a bit," and Howells glanced at the +knapsacks and rifles which the boys had stacked near the door in the +hall and which could be plainly seen from the living room. + +Dick was about to say something when he caught a meaning glance from +Garry, which was also seen by Phil, and which the boys interpreted as a +desire on the part of Garry to do any necessary explaining that might +have to be done. + +"Yes, we were in this vicinity and thought that we would like to see how +the experiment in summer cutting was coming along," he told Howells. + +"That's fine, then I shall see you around there a good deal as I am +scaling. Of course coming from a lumbering family, I don't need to tell +you that scaling means measuring the timber that is cut. I also do quite +a bit of timber cruising, which, as you know, means travelling through +the cutting, marking the trees that are fit to be cut. Your father is +very particular about his lumbering, and he doesn't do as many of the +other timber owners do, sweep clean through a tract of land, and make it +worthless as timber land for years to come. His having certain trees +marked for cutting means that every year there will be a growth suitable +to cut and market and thus he is assured of a steady income from his +tracts." + +"Perhaps if you are not too busy every day, you could show us something +of the lumbering operations. Although as you say, I come from a 'lumber +family,' I don't know a great deal about timber cutting. About the only +time I have ever been at the camps was at the spring drive, just to see +the fight for the river, and neither of my chums know any more about it +than I do. The first thing I would like to know is what did you mean by +'spiking a tree'?" asked Garry. + +"I don't know that I can explain that to you without having you near a +piece of big timber to demonstrate what I mean, but I will try and tell +you as best I can. There is a certain way to cut a tree, or rather there +is a certain place where one always starts to cut. This place is +determined by the diameter of the tree. If the tree is two feet thick, +the cutter measures up two feet from the ground to start his cut. Of +course he does not measure it exactly, but long experience has taught +him to estimate almost within an inch where to start. You know some +trees are cut by axe; those are the smaller ones, but the bigger ones +are sawed nearly all the way through, and then the axemen cut through +just enough with their axes to cause the tree to break off and fall. +'Spiking a tree' means to take an estimate where the sawyers will start, +and then drive several spikes in, using a nail set to drive them into +the tree out of sight. The hole left will close up very rapidly, or a +little dirt and moss can be stuck in so cleverly as to defy detection." + +"But what harm does that do? I suppose it might kill the tree, but what +difference does that make, since it is going to be cut down directly?" +quizzed Phil who was an interested listener. + +"It doesn't harm an old tree, but this is what it does, or rather figure +it out for yourselves. What happens when the saw strikes three or four +heavy spikes, set in the tree just in the path of the blade?" asked +Howells. + +The truth flashed over the three boys in an instant, and immediately +they felt that they accomplished one purpose of their mission to the +woods. They had discovered one of the reasons for the delay in the +cutting. If several saws were to be spoiled that meant a delay in +getting new ones. + +"Now here are two other things that a spike in a tree will do. If spikes +are driven in young trees, several of them, that is trees that won't be +cut for a few years, it means that it will cause the core or heart of +the tree to rot or break the grain. Then when the tree is finally cut, a +part of the lower trunk, or best part of the tree for lumber purposes, +shatters just like so much glass when it falls. That's one thing a spike +will do. Now here's another thing. Suppose that the mischief maker does +not drive his spikes in the tree where the cut will be made, but climbs +up twenty or thirty feet or so, and drives a dozen or two in different +parts of the trunk of the tree. The tree trunk is cut safely and then it +is drawn to the sawmill where it is sawed into planks. What happens when +one of the big, expensive circular saws rips through a dozen spikes? +It's just goodbye to the saw and goodbye to a lot of money, and means a +delay of several minutes until the saw can be replaced with another. And +when you are cutting timber on a time contract with a penalty for every +day's delay overtime that you take, a half an hour or so lost through +trouble with your sawmill means a big thing. Then there are two other +dangers. One is that the saw will fly off and hurt the millmen when it +hits the spikes, and the other is that it sometimes will cause serious +defects in the entire machinery, so that instead of just a few minutes' +delay to change saws, you waste a day or maybe two in repairing the +machinery. So that's that." Howells concluded his long description of +all the trouble one little handful of spikes could do, and then he +looked rather searchingly at the boys. Finally he seemed to have decided +in his own mind to say what he was thinking and he looked at Garry. + +"I wonder if your father has any idea that someone is trying to hurt his +business? I don't believe for an instant that those two scoundrels were +driving those spikes just to make mischief. There is something deeper +than that behind the whole business. There are scores of petty accidents +occurring every week that all mean delay. Sometimes when the delays are +totalled up they equal nearly half a day, and in one summer that means a +long delay, a matter perhaps of two weeks. That two weeks is sufficient +to spoil the contract and take all the profit away, but more than that, +it means a loss of capital invested, for I happen to know that your +father is cutting under a contract that provides a heavy penalty for +failure to deliver goods as they are called for." + +Garry debated with himself for a few moments, wondering whether or not +to take Howells into his confidence and enlist his help. He realized +that Howells, if he were honest as he seemed, would be an invaluable aid +in discovering what the trouble at the camp was. His knowledge of +timbering was extensive, Garry could see that with half an eye, and +Garry understood that he and his chums could see lots of things +happening right under their noses and never guess the malicious +significance of the happenings. + +As he thought, Mrs. Howells settled the question for him. Reaching down +to one of the shelves in the library table about which they were +sitting, she produced an album. + +"We are just old fashioned enough to have a family album," she laughed. +"I thought perhaps you would like to see a picture taken of your father +a great many years ago," and turning to one of the pages she showed +Garry a picture that he recognized immediately. It showed his father +with a sweet faced woman. "That is your father and Mr. Howells' mother. +She was his favorite cousin and she died a long time ago. This has +always been in Arthur's possession." + +Garry remembered having seen a counterpart of the picture at home a long +time ago, and he decided that the timber sealer was not claiming any +false relationship. + +"I wonder how it is that we have never seen you before," he asked, +turning to Howells. + +"Easy, we went west when I was a youngster, and it was only this spring +that we came back to Maine. I did not say anything about my +relationship, for I want to go on my own hook. I am a graduate of a +forestry school, and I wanted to get actual experience in the woods, +which was why I asked for and received the position of timber sealer. I +like to stand in my own shoes, and so I said nothing about my +relationship to the manager at the camp. Then, too, I need money, as I +have a small interest in a little tract of young timber, and I am paying +on it a little at a time. By the time it is completely paid for it will +be ready to cut, and there will be a handsome profit on the investment," +he answered. + +For a boy of his age, Garry was a pretty shrewd judge of character, and +he had been sizing up young Howells while he was talking. So he made up +his mind to take him into his confidence in a limited way, and so +remarked: + +"Yes, my father does know that there is something wrong at the camp, but +he cannot put his finger on the spot where the trouble is. Every time he +visits the camp things go along as smooth as clockwork, but it is +impossible to put in all this time at this one thing when he has so many +other irons in the fire. We thought that perhaps we could visit the camp +for a while and find out what is wrong, and report to him so that he +could remedy the trouble. But after hearing your story of the attempted +spiking, I am beginning to think that the job is almost too much for us +to handle. That would have been something I would never have dreamed of, +and if the enemies in the camp, for enemies there must be, know a trick +like that, they must have a bagfull of others of which we know nothing. +So you see that in a way we are helpless, and I am going to ask that you +aid us in this. I can promise for my father that in case your aid is +instrumental in locating the trouble that it will not be forgotten. What +do you say? Will you help us?" + +"Indeed I will," and Howells thrust forward his hand. "You can count on +me to the last ditch!" + +"Thanks," said Garry as he took the proffered hand. "Now there is one +thing to do, and that is to make sure that Baptiste LeBlanc is not in +these parts any more, for wherever the name of LeBlanc gets hitched up +with us there is trouble brewing!" + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +THE PERIL OF THE CIRCUS + + +Mrs. Howells pressed the boys to remain for supper, saying they would +find it much more pleasant to eat in the house than to cook by the +roadside somewhere. It had got quite dark at this time, and so they +decided to accept the invitation so cordially given. + +The fine meal was soon served, and as they ate, Garry told of some of +their adventures with Jean LeBlanc, in order to explain why they were so +startled when that name was first mentioned by Howells. + +Supper over they talked for some time and then Garry proposed to his +chums that they get their packs and journey on for a bit till they could +find a place to throw their blankets for the night. + +The Howells protested vigorously at this, but could offer them nothing +as their cottage was not large enough to accommodate them. + +The boys laughed and said they were so used to sleeping in the open that +it would never hurt them. "If you are bound to sleep outdoors you can +use the back yard or you can spread your blankets on the living room +floor," said Howells. "One can take the couch there. You'll have to toss +for it, though." + +After much pressure the boys decided to do this, and accordingly +goodnights were said. It was a custom of the boys to draw lots to settle +all arguments, so hustling into the kitchen Garry raided the broom of +three straws of unequal length and then brought them back for his chums +to draw. + +Dick was the lucky chap to get the couch. With a grin he spread his +blankets and remarked to the others that he hoped the floor would not be +too hard. + +"What's the diff?" inquired Phil. "There isn't much difference between +the ground and a floor and we aren't in the woods so we can't cut +branches to make one of nature's mattresses with. Stop your chatter. I'm +off to sleep," and indeed he was in a few moments. + +To Garry however, sleep did not come so easily for he was thinking of +the events of the evening, and wondering what he and his chums could do +to checkmate the schemes of the unknown enemies that were causing all +the trouble at the lumber camp. But Garry was a healthy growing boy, and +not to be denied his sleep, so soon he consigned the cares of the day to +oblivion and in a few moments was fast asleep. + +Howells was up before the boys, and started the coffee, and in a few +moments his wife was downstairs and busying herself about the breakfast. +They let the boys sleep until it was almost ready, then awoke them. The +boys protested against all the trouble they were causing their hosts, +but their protests were only half hearted for the smell of the boiling +coffee and the frying bacon were so tempting that it would have taken a +team of horses to drive them away without eating. + +Breakfast over, they took their leave, first inquiring about the way +that lay ahead. They found that they would go nearly twenty-five miles +before coming to another town, as the way ran through the last of the +farming country before striking the edge of the big timber country. + +"The camp is ten miles or so beyond the village that you will come to, +and it will take you at least a day to get to the village, so you will +not reach the camp until nearly noon of tomorrow. There's a good chance +that you will get a lift, however, for there is a circus there today, +and you should find a great many people on the road. Don't be bashful +about hailing them and asking for a lift. It is a customary thing to do +in this part of the country. I will see you in a couple of days, as I +will go back on duty at the camp then," said Howells. + +"Just one thing if you don't mind," interposed Garry. "When you come to +the camp, do not let on that you are already acquainted with us, because +if we are to work together we can do a lot better if there is no inkling +of our acquaintance." + +"That's a good idea, and that way it'll be," agreed Howells. + +"What say, let's take this in a hurry and see how many miles we can +cover this morning," suggested Dick. + +The others stopped short in their tracks. + +"Listen, Phil, unstrap your canteen while I feel his pulse. There's +something the matter with Dick. He wants to hurry. If it was later in +the day I would say that he had been a bit touched by the sun, but it is +early and cool, and I think he is just sick," said Garry solicitously. + +"Lazy Dick wants to hurry!" ejaculated Phil in amazement. "What's the +big idea?" + +Dick turned red and lunged at his chums. He was used to their ragging +him on account of his willingness to take the easiest way of doing +things. Of course they knew that he never shirked his duty when called +upon, and they never questioned his bravery at any time, but he always +got so fussed when they ragged him about his weight and his easy way of +taking life, that they never let an opportunity pass to tease him about +it. After a short scuffle, they stopped laughing and Garry said: + +"Seriously, Dick, why do you want to hurry? We are well up on our +schedule and you don't need to rush like mad." + +"I just wanted to see what we could do if we had to," said Dick; "and +furthermore, I wanted to show you for once that I could walk as fast and +as long as either of you chaps, that's all. Let's go." + +Dick set off at a swinging pace, and kept it up. The boys fell in and +kept pace with him, thinking that he would soon tire of it; but when +they had covered three miles, and Dick had not abated a whit his speed, +Garry and Phil saw that he was in earnest. Not to be outdone by him, +they bent to their walking and made excellent time. They were passing a +barn, when suddenly Garry stopped dead short, gave a shout and then fell +to laughter with all his might. This time it was Dick's turn to assume a +sarcastic attitude, and make side remarks to Phil. Finally when Garry +had controlled his laughter so that he could speak, he said to Phil: + +"What do you think of me for a regular little Sherlock Holmes? I've +found out why Dick is trying to set a pedestrian record this morning. +Just look at that barn!" + +Phil took one look at the glaring posters pasted on the wall, then gave +a shout. + +"Aha, the boy wants to go to the circus!" + +"Marvelous," grunted Dick. "Own up, wouldn't you fellows like to see it +yourself?" + +The boys teased him for a few minutes, then they perceived that there +was method in Dick's madness and they decided that it would be good fun +to see the circus if they could get there on time. + +"Only reason I wanted you chaps to hurry a little was because I figured +that if we covered a good number of miles we would get to a point where +people would be on the way to the circus and we could get a lift and +arrive in time to see the show this afternoon. Then we could get another +start right after it let out, and so fix it as to arrive at the camp +fairly early in the morning, covering our last ten miles while it was +early and cool," he explained. + +"That's pretty good dope at that, Dick. Let's go. We'll see the circus +and not waste any time doing it, either." And Garry set the pace as he +finished talking. + +They stopped at noon and prepared a hasty lunch by the side of the road, +after Dick had stopped at a farm house and had his canteen filled with +fresh milk. + +By this time scores of automobiles and teams were on the road, but +practically every one of them was filled to overflowing with adults and +children, all presumably bound for the circus. Finishing their meal, +they rested fifteen minutes, then Garry, glancing at his watch, +remarked: "We have still ten miles to go, and it is now half-past +twelve. The circus probably begins at half-past two, so that unless we +get a ride we won't get there in time to see the show. We couldn't cover +the ten miles in two hours, especially after having come as far as we +have this morning." + +"I'm going to see that circus, though, even if we have to wait for the +evening performance," announced Dick. "What do you fellows think?" + +"I guess it would be all right," answered Garry. "There is no life or +death matter to make us arrive early in the morning at the camp, so we +might as well take it easy for the rest of the way." Luck was with them, +however, for they had gone little more than a mile when they heard a car +coming behind them. It proved to contain only a single occupant who, as +he neared the boys, slowed down and asked if they did not want a ride. +They were unanimous in their answer. + +"On the way to the circus?" asked the driver. + +"We're going beyond that, but we thought that we would stop and see it +if we reached there on time, otherwise we would have seen the evening +performance." + +"Lucky thing that I came along and happen to be going to that place +myself then," chuckled the driver, "for there isn't going to be any +evening show. You see I happen to be connected with the circus, and we +have such a long jump for tomorrow's show that we cannot give a +performance here tonight." + +"Good thing you came along then, for if we had walked all this distance +for nothing, I would have given up in disgust," remarked Dick. + +"How far have you come?" asked the circus man. + +"We left Hilton this morning," answered Garry. + +The driver looked somewhat incredulous at this statement, then sizing up +the appearance of the boys, who were wearing their customary khaki +semi-uniform that they used as Rangers in the forest, decided that they +were hiking for the summer and probably used to walking good distances +in a short time. + +"What are you chaps doing, walking across the state or something?" + +Garry explained that they were forest rangers off duty temporarily and +were bound for a lumber camp to pay it a visit. + +As they drove along they asked several questions about the circus and +circus life, and considerably amused the man by referring to many things +in a way that circus people did not. The circus man told them of the +many strange phrases employed by circus people, and the boys learned +much of the talk of the circus. + +They found, for instance, that circus people never speak of the tent. It +is always called a top. There are the big top and the little tops. The +only thing on the circus lot to be called a tent is the cook tent. + +Several of the names applied to the performers were amusing. A clown is +always called a joy, and if he is a new man with the circus he is called +a First of May, because it is on that date that many contracts are made +in the circus. Acrobats are called kinkers, and the people who do work +on the high trapeze are called casters, and their work is called a +casting act. + +"Then there is the high diver, only we call it a tank diving act. You +won't see that this afternoon, for the diver fell a couple of days ago +and broke his arm. Funny; he's been diving forty feet into an eight foot +tank for several years, and never got a scratch, and then he slips on a +banana peeling and breaks his arm. It's too bad, too, for the diving act +always goes big in these small towns. I'd give twenty-five dollars for a +diver this afternoon," concluded the man. + +"Hand over the twenty-five," said Dick suddenly. + +"What do you mean," asked the circus man in surprise. + +"Just that you give me the twenty-five dollars and I'll do your high +dive for you this afternoon." + +The circus man looked at the other two boys as if he doubted his ears, +and Garry and Phil immediately assured them that Dick was a first class +swimmer and diver. + +"Forty feet is not so much to Dick. He's often done better than that in +the river at home," Garry told the circus man. + +"Yes, but you want to remember that this is an eight foot square tank, +and only eight feet deep," he told Dick. + +"That's nothing, I'll turn easily in eight feet. Have done it in a +little less," Dick assured him. + +"All right. I'll take you to see the owner when we get there, and he and +you can fix things up. He'll be glad to pay you that amount for the +work, for it's a big attraction and we have advertised it a lot. That's +my business with the circus--to do the advertising." + +In a little less than half an hour they had arrived at the circus lot, +and true to his word, the advertising man carried Dick round to the +ticket wagon and introduced him to the manager and owner. + +It took Dick but a short time to convince the owner that he could dive, +particularly when he offered to give an exhibition for him before the +show started. The only thing that the manager insisted on was that Dick +sign a statement relieving the circus from any responsibility in case +any accident occurred. + +Dick readily signed this, and then promising to be back in a short time +to get some tights and get dressed, they wandered around the lot. They +left their rifles and knapsacks in the ticket wagon, but Garry kept his +lariat with him. + +"What's the idea?" asked Phil. + +"There's very little chance of anything happening, but I don't want any +of those riders to walk off with this lariat by mistake," he replied. + +This decided the boys to keep theirs with them also, and accordingly +they slung them over one shoulder. Several curious glances were cast at +them as they wandered from show to show. The owner had given them passes +to everything, and they didn't waste any of them. + +Soon a bugle was heard blowing and in a moment they met the advertising +man who informed them that called all the performers to be ready in a +few moments. "Your act will be the fourth on the program, so you'd +better go and get your togs on and be ready," he told Dick. + +Garry and Phil elected to go to their seats and watch their chum do his +act with the rest of the spectators. + +"I'll come and hunt you up as soon as I do the dive and collect that +twenty-five good old dollars. I can use it very nicely one of these +days," Dick said as he turned to follow the circus man to the dressing +place. + +While the circus was a small one, it boasted of rather better things +than the average road circus, and among other things was a fairly good +menagerie. Garry and Phil looked at all the animals as they passed +through to the "big top." + +Two cages contained unusually fine specimens of lions, and near one was +a caretaker, waiting for the lions to be taken into the big performing +cage, after which he would clean the cage and have it ready on the +shaggy maned animal's return from the ring. + +"Wicked looking beast, isn't he," Garry remarked to the man who stood +near the cage. + +"He is that, boss," answered the man. "He's a a new one, and we don't +know him very well. We had a nice old chap before him, too old and tired +and toothless to do any harm, but this one is young and vicious. The +trainer has a lot of trouble with him, too." + +A sound of band music made the boys hurry to their seats, and soon the +"Grand entry" was on. + +Several of the usual acts were put on, and then razorbacks, as the +circus workers are called, pulled away some of the planking of the +platform in the center of the arena, disclosing a tank filled with +water. + +Soon the boys espied Dick advancing to the platform, his chubby body +enclosed in a glaring red bathing suit. He mounted to the tank, and the +chums could see him gazing about trying to locate them, but this he +failed to do. + +The ringmaster made a short speech, telling a lot of stuff about Dick +that made the chums grin. + +"Guess one has to be a blood relation of Ananias to be a ringmaster," +laughed Garry. "The only diving Dick has ever done before the crowned +heads of Europe was before they were crowned." + +After the laudatory speech, Dick climbed up the high ladder and stood +perched on the little square platform at the top. As he had been told to +do outside the big top, he dropped a handkerchief which slowly fluttered +down to the ground below. This is an old trick of high divers and is +done merely to accentuate the distance. + +Then the drummer started a long ruffle, and casting one downward look, +Dick tipped off the platform. Both Phil and Garry were just a trifle +nervous as he leaped, although they were well aware of his ability. + +But Dick hit the water as clean as a knife, and it was only a matter of +seconds before he appeared on the surface of the water and climbed out +dripping. A mighty round of applause was given not only for the fact +that he had made a fine dive, but his youth made him popular with the +audience. + +The acts went on, and in a little while Dick came wandering into the +tent. The boys hailed him as he neared the place where they were +sitting, and in a trice he had climbed up the rattling board seats to a +place beside his chums. + +"Well, I got my twenty-five, and we'll have a party with it some time. +Also, I received an offer to stay with the circus, which, naturally, I +turned down. So you see, Phil, you are not the only one to have jobs +offered them." He alluded to the time that a big league baseball scout +had offered a contract to Phil after seeing him pitch one game at +Commencement time at high school in his home town. The music stopped and +the ringmaster made his customary speech about the next act, which was +the lion taming act. + +The music had just started again, when there was a piercing shriek from +a woman, and then some one screamed: + +"The lion is loose!" + + + + +CHAPTER V + +EXTRA ENEMIES + + +Hundreds of people joined in the shrieking, and a stampede from the +seats started. Scores were trampled. The music had stopped for an +instant until the leader, true to tradition, called the men to order, +and the musicians swung into a stirring march. Circus hands, aided by +the performers who were on the platforms and in the rings, ran to the +sides of the tracks and endeavored to keep the people in their seats. + +The three chums were aghast for a minute, then Phil and Dick +instinctively turned to Garry to see what he would do. Garry had taken +one look and saw the beast at the far end of the tent, lashing his tail +and surveying the crowd, as though making up its mind as to what course +to pursue. + +The boys saw that Garry was hastily slipping his lasso from his +shoulder, and in a moment they had understood what he was going to +attempt, and followed suit. + +"Now fellows, let's try it. We may save a lot of lives. I'll try for his +head, and you two try for a foot each. I think we can catch him all +right. Let's go!" and Garry led the way. + +Calling to everyone to sit still as they ran, and swinging their lariats +over their heads, they struggled to the ground. Several people seeing +them make their way there, thought that it was perhaps a part of the +circus, and began to shout to each other that it was a feature of the +program. The sight of the three boys making their way fearlessly toward +the beast did more than anything else to quiet the people. Many sat back +in their seats, although others were escaping under the canvas wall of +the tent. + +It was to Phil, however, that the greatest honor was to come. As he ran, +swinging one arm, his hand hit against a pocket in his coat, and he felt +a hard lump within. In an instant he remembered that he bought pepper +the day before to replenish the condiment can that he generally carried +in his knapsack, but had not thought to take it out and transfer the +contents from the package to the can. He reached into his pocket and +brought out the can. Hastily opening the top, he kept on his way toward +the lion, holding the package out in front of him. The chums approached +within a few feet of the lion, who was showing signs of springing +suddenly at them. The effect of the boys' advance on him was to make him +forget the crowds and center all his attention on those that were +nearest him--the chums. + +The boys stopped short and were swinging their lariats, when suddenly +Phil darted ahead almost up to the lion, and, with a well directed aim, +emptied the contents of the pepper package straight on the eyes of the +lion. + +The infuriated beast gave a roar of pain and sprang, then fell to earth +and stuck a great paw into his eyes, as though to rub away the torturing +stuff that was blinding him. + +Garry, quick-witted, divined what Phil had done, and at the same moment +that the lion struck the ground, ran forward and threw the noose of the +lariat over the animal's head. + +The animal was nearly helpless, owing to its inability to see, and in +another moment the boys had the rest of their lariats noosed about his +feet. + +By this time the trainer and a number of the circus helpers had arrived +on the scene, and, dashing in, they tied the lariats securely about the +animal's feet. + +The crowd seeing that the animal was securely fastened and helpless, +first breathed a sigh of relief and then became suddenly quiet. Many +still thought it was a part of the program, but a majority felt sure +that it was a striking piece of bravery that they had just witnessed. + +Then cheer on cheer rolled through the tent, as the audience applauded +the brave trio of chums. All the foregoing had taken much less time than +the minutes necessary to describe it. In a moment the owner came puffing +on the scene, and when he saw who had accomplished the capture, he was +speechless for the moment. + +Then he said to the chums, as they stood watching the animal being +loaded into its cage: + +"This is twice today that you boys have done me a good turn, but this +second time far outmatches the first. Will you please come back to the +ticket wagon with me." Then to the menagerie head, who had joined them: +"I'd like you to come, too, please, Jones." + +The little group made its way to the ticket office, where the owner +first asked for an account of how the beast had made its escape. + +"The only man who can tell you that is the roustabout who cleans the +animal's cage. He was gashed by the lion evidently as its escape was +being made, and that and very likely a heart stroke killed him quickly. +I think perhaps he thought it was near time for the transfer to the +arena cage to be made and had unlocked the cage door, and the lion +pushed its way out, sir," said Jones. + +The manager was silent for a moment. Then he said: + +"No one can know how sorry I am that the man lost his life, but I am +thankful that the lion did no other damage, either by starting a great +panic or by attacking some one of the audience. As for you boys, I +propose to make you a substantial reward." + +"I assure you, sir," began Garry, "we have no thought of any reward for +doing what we did. It was luck on our part that enabled us to lasso him, +and we get our satisfaction in knowing that we perhaps saved a great +many lives." + +"I hope you will accept something as a recompense for your services. Had +the lion done great damage, I would have had to pay out many thousands +of dollars," insisted the owner. + +"Let us ask you one question first. Was the workman that was killed a +family man?" asked Garry. + +"I can tell you that in a minute." Turning to the ticket seller, he told +him to look the man up. A record of all the workers with their home +addresses was kept in a card index and in a moment the ticket seller had +ascertained that the dead man had a wife living in a small town in New +York State. + +"Of course we will take care of the widow, as we have every worker +insured, and then the management always adds to the insurance," said the +head of the circus. + +"Then I wish that you would just take whatever you had thought of +offering us in the way of a reward and add to the amount. I think my +chums agree with me that this is the best thing that could be done. Is +that right?" and Garry turned to his friends. Both Dick and Phil were +emphatic in their agreement. + +"Well, if that is the way you boys feel about it, I will do so, but I +will find some way to show you that I appreciate the great service that +you have done me." + +The owner asked them several other questions and took their names and +addresses, and again he offered to take the boys along with them on the +tour. Of course they refused, explaining that they were of the Ranger +Service of the State and were only on detached duty at the time. + +They remained for supper at the cook tent, and watched the circus torn +down and loaded in the teams preparatory to travelling to the next stop. + +After a hearty goodbye from the manager and owner they took their leave, +and hiking beyond the town spread their blankets for the night. + +They woke with the rising of the sun, and building a fire soon had +coffee, spider bread and bacon going, and made a hearty breakfast. + +"According to my reckoning we are about ten miles from the camp, and the +woods will begin in about a mile or two, so we had better get going. It +is now six o'clock and with three hours of easy hiking we will make our +destination," said Garry. "Now I think we ought to hold a council of war +as to how we shall conduct ourselves when we get to the camp. I think it +best that we just go to the manager and tell him we are going to camp +there for awhile, either right at the lumber camp, or a short distance +in the woods. Of course we shall give no inkling of the nature of our +visit, not even to the manager, at least until we have sized him up. To +my mind, everyone will be under suspicion until he has proven that the +suspicion is unfounded. We can go all over the camp and keep our eyes +open, getting all the information we can. When we ask questions we +should ask them simply as though it were from idle curiosity. I figure +that in a short time we ought to be able to tell who is acting +suspiciously and then bend all our efforts to watch them and frustrate +any mischief that they may be up to. We shall, of course, get a lot of +help from Howells when he arrives, but even then I think we ought to do +everything possible ourselves to find out what is the trouble at the +camp." + +They walked steadily but easily, and true to their reckoning arrived at +the camp a little after nine o'clock. The boys looked about them +curiously. There were only three buildings, built of logs. One, the +smallest, was evidently the officers' bunkhouse and offices; the other +was apparently the cookhouse, for the boys could see a youth sitting on +an upturned tub in front of the door peeling potatoes, and a thin wisp +of smoke issued from the chimney. Since it was mid-summer and hot, there +would be no need for a stove in any place but the kitchen. The third +house was a long, low log affair, bigger by far than either of the +others. This they decided was the bunk house, where the lumberjacks +lived. + +They made their way to the office and inquired for the manager. On +hearing the word "manager," a thin, sharpfaced man approached them, and +giving them a hasty glance, said in a sharp tone: + +"If you're here to ask for permission to camp on this tract you're out +of luck. This is a lumber operation and not a free camp site for every +fool from the city." + +"Just a minute, please. Hadn't you better find out our business before +you make up your mind as to what you will or won't do?" asked Garry, as +an angry red flush overspread his face. Garry was an extremely civil +boy, and expected others to be the same, and when he received +uncourteous attention was apt to resent it deeply. + +"Well, what do you want?" asked the manager, still in an ungracious +tone. + +"My name is Boone, and the owner of these cuttings happens to be my +father. Didn't you get a letter from him telling of our expected +arrival?" + +A great change came over the manner of the manager. A smirking smile +took the place of the frown and he advanced with outstretched hand. + +"I hope you will pardon me. I have been bothered to death for the past +few days by summer campers asking to pitch tents and build cabins and +what not on the cutting, and I thought from your appearance that you +boys were more of the same tribe," he said with an attempt to smooth out +the awkward situation and make up by a show of cordiality the blunder he +realized he had made. + +Privately, Garry thought him very ill-mannered and felt he should have +made more inquiries before showing his temper. Still he said nothing and +accepted the hand of the manager, who said his name was Barrows. + +Garry then introduced his chums and explained that they intended to stay +awhile and camp somewhere in the vicinity and watch the lumbering as +well as getting some fishing. + +"I understand that there are two lakes in the neighborhood," remarked +Garry, "and so we ought to get some good fishing." At the mention of the +word lakes, Barrows looked sharply at the boys, then said: + +"Oh, yes, you will get plenty of fishing, but you will find that the +small lake to the west of here is better than the big one that lies to +the north of us. The state stocked the little lake sometime ago by +special request of your father, and I hear there are some very good bass +and pickerel to be found there. The reports about the larger lake are +not so encouraging. Also there are two or three small streams,--brooks +perhaps it would be better to call them,--where you will find some +excellent trout. Then at the small lake there is a good stretch of sandy +beach where you can swim whenever you want to. Altogether you will find +the small lake is the most likely place for a summer playground." + +For a moment Garry wondered at the insistence of the manager in always +bringing the "small" lake into the conversation, but dismissed the +matter with the thought that the manager was simply trying to make +amends for his ungraciousness of the previous moment by showing them +where they could best enjoy themselves. Later he was to find that he was +mistaken. + +The manager asked them what they intended to do for living quarters. "I +am sorry that I can't offer you quarters in the bunkhouse here, but they +are just built to accommodate the officers of the camp; that is myself, +the sealer, the timekeeper and the bookkeeper. Of course you would not +want to live in the bunkhouse with the men, for they are a rough lot. +All I can suggest is that we makeshift for you some way and I will send +to town and dig up a tent for you." + +"If you will just loan us an axe apiece, and tell us which spot we can +cut a little timber from, we can throw ourselves up a cabin in a short +time, so don't bother about a tent. If necessary we can sleep in the +open till we get our shack fixed up," answered Garry. + +"Why, I can do better than that. I can let you have a couple or three +men to help you and do the work if you can direct them as to the kind of +cabin you want." + +"I don't want to take any of the men away from their work," Garry told +him, "but if we could have two or three for a few minutes to help us +throw up the cabin after we cut the stuff it would help greatly." + +"I will go and mark out some of the trees that you can cut. There is a +small growth here that isn't exceptionally good lumber, it's rather +scrubby, but will do very well for a cabin. I'll have to go myself, for +I left the cruiser go a few days to do some business he had waiting him, +and I have been scaling myself. In fact I do that often. Whenever he is +cruising to mark trees for cutting I do the measuring and that saves a +lot of time, also it saves the pay of an extra man. You ought to have a +good bit done by noontime and then after dinner I will detail a couple +of men to help you," and the manager led the way to the cookhouse, where +there were several extra axes. + +When they arrived at the cookhouse, they looked about with quite a bit +of curiosity. Two great ranges stood at one end of the kitchen, and on +one of the ranges were two enormous kettles. The boys could smell +appetizing pea soup and judged that one of the kettles contained this. + +The cook was an enormous man with a pair of fierce black moustaches, and +the one man on the whole range who was regarded as being just a little +bit better than the boss or even the owner of the timber tract. +Lumberjacks always took care never to pick a quarrel with him, and this +went the same for the manager and the camp officers. + +This is the same in every logging camp, for a cook can pay up any +grievances by cooking the food in an inferior fashion. Camp owners and +managers always pay the greatest attention to the sort of man they pick +for this position, for while in a lumber camp, there is never a widely +varied menu, it must be well cooked and plentiful. + +Nothing will drive the men away from a camp quicker than poor cooking. + +The manager introduced the boys to the cook, who shook hands with them, +offering a hairy hand which the chums privately thought resembled a ham. +For all his fierce looks he proved to be a genial chap, and the three +boys wondered whether he was one of the ring of trouble makers or not. +They reserved any decision in their own minds to await future +developments, but they had decided that everyone was under suspicion +until he proved that he was clear of any blame in the mysterious +occurrences that retarded progress at the lumber camp. + +In every camp there is a cookee, as the helper to the cook is +universally called. His duty is to peel potatoes, wash dishes, wait on +the table--rather set the tables than wait, for everything is piled on +at the beginning of the meal, and the only helping that is done is when +a dish has to be re-filled. + +The cookee was a surly looking chap of about twenty-one years of age. He +was slight of build and had violent red hair. He just mumbled a word or +two when he was introduced, and went on with his work, which was slicing +bread for the dinner hour that was near at hand. Garry and his friends +mentally put him down as one that might bear watching as soon as they +had located themselves. + +While the manager was asking the cook about borrowing a couple of the +axes that were stacked in the corner, a black-browed chap came to the +door and asked for a pail of water to take out to where several of the +men were trimming trees. The cookee brought the water and stepped +outside with the man. Garry and Phil were talking with the manager and +the cook, but Phil happened to be standing near the door. + +He heard the sound of talking in the French language and strained his +ears to catch what was being said. Phil was not eavesdropping because of +a natural desire to do so; it was merely that he was on the watch every +moment for a possible clue that would lead them to the solution that +they were in quest of,--the riddle of the mishaps at the lumber camp. + +What Phil heard was this: + +"Baptiste will be at the usual place at midnight tonight." + +Phil determined then and there that he would be at the rendezvous, +wherever it was, and hear what transpired. He could hardly wait to get +the others with him so that he could impart to them the information that +he had just overheard. + +He hoped that something else would be said, but at this moment the cook +called for his helper, who came hustling back into the shanty, and went +about preparing for the serving of the dinner. + +Phil went back to join his chums just in time to hear the manager say: + +"Unless you boys want the fun of throwing up a log house, I would +suggest a much easier and quicker way. You can cut enough poles for the +supports of the house, and then I'll have some sawed boards brought to +the spot. Also there is some tarred paper here that was brought here +when the camp started just for such an emergency. That would mean that +you could be all located before nightfall. As for heat, I have a Sibley +stove, one of those small ones such as they use in army camps for tents, +that will do very well. It isn't likely that you will want it often, for +we are in the hottest part of the summer, and only on a cold, wet night +will you require heat. You won't be here such a long time, I presume, +and we are in for a spell of good weather according to the cook here, +who is the camp weather prophet." + +Garry thought for a moment, and wondered what made the manager presume +they would be there only a short time. He was anxious to get going about +the camp as soon as possible and see what there was to pick up in the +way of information, so he decided that the board house would do as well +as one built entirely of logs. + +"That is a fine suggestion and we will accept. Building a hut is nothing +new to us, and we are anxious to begin fishing and wandering about, so +if you will show us where we can cut enough good heavy saplings for +supports, we will start right at it. We can have them cut and in place +before dinner and then the men can bring us the boards after dinner and +we will be all shipshape by nightfall," said Garry. + +"I think that is the best thing to do," the manager answered. "It is +about an hour to dinner time, and you will have ample time to do all +that can be done this forenoon." + +So saying, Barrows led the way to a spot near the camp, where there was +a clump of saplings that were not big enough to be used for sawed +lumber. + +"You might as well pitch your shanty here as anywhere, and it will save +you from dragging your saplings to any great distance. I'll gash each of +the saplings that you will need. You will only want ten as I figure it." + +"No, we will want twelve so that we may have a window," interposed +Garry. + +"That's a fact," answered the manager, looking sharply at Garry. "I see +that you know rather a bit about shanty building. Do you know much about +logging operations? I suppose you do, however, since you are of a family +that has always made logging a business." + +Garry felt that the manager was asking this question for a purpose, but +he promptly answered: + +"No, we know very little about logging, surprising as that may seem, +since as you say it ought to run in the blood. About the only thing we +understand about timbering operations is the log drive in the spring. We +were up once to watch the fight for the river, and had a mighty exciting +time, but the entire business is something new to all of us." + +Garry finished speaking and then looked sharply but guardedly at +Barrows. He thought he noticed a relieved expression on the face of the +manager. + +The three boys set about felling the saplings, swinging their axes with +a sure arm and hand. Barrows lingered to watch them at work, although +Phil was on tenterhooks to have him get away in order that he might +impart to his chums the information that he had gained from the sentence +he had overheard at the cook shanty. + +The poles being cut, four of them were erected in an upright manner to +form the main support of the house. At the tops of these, four more were +placed horizontally to support the roof. Then in the center of the +front, two were erected to form the sides of the door, while at a side +two others, in vertical position, allowed the making of a window. + +Still the manager made no show of leaving until fortunately for Phil, +who would have almost exploded had he been forced to keep silent any +longer, he was called by the red headed cookee. + +"Now quick fellows, while I have a chance to tell you. I have found one +of the traitors in the camp; it is the cookee. He is going to meet some +one tonight to hatch something out, and you chaps have one guess as to +who it is." + +"Barrows?" hazarded Dick. + +"Wrong. Baptiste LeBlanc!" + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE LUMBER CAMP + + +"The LeBlancs again!" exploded Garry. "I thought that we had seen the +last of that outfit. It seems that we are destined to run afoul of them. +Fortunately this Baptiste does not know about us, unless he has run +across his brother lately. That does not seem likely, for Jean is safely +beyond the border still. There are few places where he is safe, for he +is wanted in several different parts of the state. Still we must not +take anything for granted. We probably were seen by Baptiste when we +were instrumental in saving Howells from a bad beating or worse the +other night." + +"How are we going to find out where the rendezvous is tonight?" asked +Dick. + +"It seems to me that the best thing to do is to keep watch of the red +headed cookee; that is, you two chaps do that, while I will watch for +the man that told him of the appointment. You boys haven't seen him, so +you cannot keep on his trail. You can take turns keeping in the vicinity +of the cookee. If possible you might try and make acquaintance with him, +although I doubt if you will go very far, since he seems to be a surly +sort of a chap. Still, there's no harm in trying. When it comes time for +the meeting, I should say that it would be best only for me to follow +them. I can understand what they are saying, and one of us could follow +unobserved, where three would be spotted in a minute. You chaps can +plead to being tired after your hike and the work of building the shack, +and that will give us a chance to get to the new shanty early, and so be +unobserved." + +At that moment they heard the sound of a tin pan being vigorously beaten +with a stick, and immediately Dick set up a shout: + +"There's the dinner signal, or my ears and stomach fail me." + +"For once I am ready to eat a good big meal. You are not the only one +with an appetite today, Dick," said Garry, and the three raced for the +cookhouse. + +As they neared the cook tent, they saw the lumberjacks piling towards +the place to eat. They were a sizable group of men, brawny of arm and +large of frame. + +Most of them gave the boys a curious glance as they flocked into the +shanty. The boys thought that they were to eat in the common dining +room, but found that they were to eat in a separate room that had been +partitioned off from the large room. Here ate the manager, the +timekeeper and cashier, and when he was present, the timber scaler. + +The food that was served them was the same as that given the men. +Barrows explained this by saying that it kept the men in a better humor +if they knew that the bosses were getting the same fare as they. + +"Lumberjacks are just like so many children," Barrows said. "They are +always on the lookout for something to quarrel about, and are almost as +temperamental as grand opera stars. Just now work is scarce, so they +keep better behaved; but in the winter time, when all the camps are +going full blast, you have to be careful and treat them properly, else +they will simply depart for some city where there is a woods agency and +be sent off to another camp. That is one of the evils of lumbering, the +agencies. They often try to breed trouble in the camps so that the men +will quit. Then they pack them off to another logging tract and collect +a commission from the camp owner for furnishing him with men. If this +was winter I would think that was what was the trouble here." + +Garry looked up in surprise. He had no idea that Barrows would admit +that everything was not as it should be at the camp. + +He knew that the eyes of the manager were on him, nevertheless he felt +that an answer was expected of him, or rather a question. + +"Why, is there anything the trouble at this camp? From what I've seen I +should say that everyone was working busily and everything was lovely." + +At this the manager brightened up considerably. It seemed to be that +this was the kind of a remark that he was looking for, and he made haste +to answer: + +"Oh, there is nothing radically wrong here, I only meant that +occasionally there seemed to be a sort of dissatisfied air on the part +of the men, but it may only be worry on my part." + +Garry was certain that the entire conversation was brought about in a +manner to delve into the feelings of the boys, and see how they regarded +everything. Garry did not believe that their mission was penetrated, but +thought that the guilty conscience of the manager would make him see an +enemy in every person he did not know. + +The dinner was plain but good. It consisted of pea soup, potatoes, some +roasted beef, and coffee. The fare at a lumber camp is anything but +varied. The aforementioned articles, roast pork, stew and beans, with +either white bread baked at the camp, or great slabs of johnny cake with +molasses in lieu of syrup was the general thing. Coffee was served at +every meal. + +"For breakfast we have bacon and toast and coffee in our dining room, +because the men have all eaten and started for work by the time we are +ready for breakfast," said Barrows. "Now we will go into the other room, +and I will give you boys a general introduction to the men. That will +save you any annoyance when you go about the camp." + +He led the way into the larger room, and stepping on a bench announced: + +"Men, these three boys are going to camp here for awhile. This one," +pointing to Garry, "is the son of the owner. The other two are his +friends. I wanted you to meet them so that you may do all you can to +make their visit here a good one." + +Garry thought to himself, "Yes, you are also showing us to those in your +crew so they will watch their step while we are around." A good many of +the men just sized the boys up, a few hollered good-natured remarks at +them, while several pressed forward and shook the hands of the boys, +remarking they had worked many years for Mr. Boone and were glad to meet +his son and his friends. + +The three chums took especial care to fix these men in their minds, for +the same thought came to them all,--that if trouble arose, it was likely +that these men would prove loyal friends in need. Barrows detailed some +of the men to bring back the necessary lumber for the shanty, and then +the men went back to their work for the afternoon. + +Soon they heard a chugging sound and presently a tractor hove into +sight, dragging a broad-wheeled cart on which was the lumber. The +manager came up, leading a couple of men with some heavy rolls of tarred +paper, and all was ready to build the shanty. + +Sandy, the big Airedale, was gravely watching the boys when the men with +the tar paper arrived, and one of them seeing the dog, remarked: + +"How would you chaps like to go coon hunting tonight, that is if your +pup will trail a coon?" + +This was just what the boys did not want to do that night, so Garry +hastily made the excuse that they were tired from their march and the +work of throwing up the shanty, but said they would be glad to go the +following night. + +This seemed all right to the men, who proceeded to make friends with +Sandy, that is as much as that sedate dog would let them, for an +Airedale makes few friends outside of his own family circle. + +The work of putting up the shanty was done in a short time since there +were so many workers, and the addition of two bunks made it complete. + +Barrows volunteered the information that there was a spare table in the +office, and a bench and a couple of chairs that could be taken from the +dining room. + +"Then all we have to do is to cut some balsam boughs for our bunks and +we will be as snug as bugs in a rug," announced Phil. + +Phil and Dick were dispatched to get the boughs, while Garry talked of +inconsequential matters with Barrows until their return. + +The rest of the afternoon was spent in wandering about the cutting. It +was a revelation to the boys, the sight of the great timber falling in +the exact direction that it was wanted. The boys noted that the cut was +made just as Howells had told them, and they wondered whether or not any +spikes would be encountered. + +The felling of a tree is an interesting process. The swing begins on the +side where the cutters do not want the tree to fall. Then when the saw +is better than two-thirds of the way through the trees, the swampers or +axemen take their stand at either side of the tree, and make a cut a +trifle under the line where the saw is coming through. This is done to +cause the tree to fall on that side. The axemen work like clockwork, +using a double bitted axe,--that is one that has two blades,--and make +the chips positively fly, one drawing his axe away just in time to let +the other man make a blow. Just as the moment comes for the tree to +fall, the cry of "tim-ber-r-r-r" is raised by one of the axemen and this +is the signal for all to be out of the way as the great tree falls with +a crash that shakes the ground for many feet around. + +Following the falling of the timber, the trimmers begin their work. +Starting at the base end of the tree, one on each side, they walk up the +sides of the fallen monarch of the forest, and trim the branches off as +far as they are able. Many of the branches on the under side of the tree +are broken in the fall, others are only splintered and many of them are +just bent. A dozen men then seize their peavy sticks, as they are called +in Maine, or cant dogs in some other places where lumbering is done, and +roll the tree over. A peavy stick is a heavy pole about six feet long, +with a sharp iron point at the end. About a foot from this point is +attached a loose curved iron arm very much like one side of an ice-man's +tongs. This swings back and forth from the handle. The men prod the iron +point into the trunk of the tree, and then catch the swinging end of the +hook into the trunk. This gives them almost a handle to the tree, and +the long pole furnishes them the necessary leverage. At a word from the +man on the end, all give a mighty heave, and the tree is rolled over, +when the remaining branches are lopped off. + +The lumberjacks are experts in the use of the peavy stick, and it is a +pretty sight to see them load a great trunk onto a flat car to be drawn +away. The method is almost the same as that used in turning over a +trunk,--only just half of the men fix their sticks. They give it half a +turn and then hold it in position on the skids, while the other half get +a grip and start turning. In this way, turn and turn about, they roll +the log right up the skids and onto the car. + +In this instance the trunks were not hauled to the mill on a car; a +chain was attached instead, and then one of the baby tractors was used +to drag it over the ground to the mill. There were a half a dozen of +these tractors at the camp. Three were constantly employed in dragging +the cut timber to the mill, while the other three were used to draw the +flat cars to the railroad tracks, a half a dozen miles from the camp. + +After watching the felling of several trees, the boys essayed trimming, +and while they were by no means unskillful at it, caused many a laugh +among the men because of the time they took. Whereas they often took two +or three strokes to take off a branch, the skilled woodsmen with one +swift, clean cut, lopped off a good thick branch. + +The boys took their chaffing good naturedly and thereby won a lot of +regard from the jacks, many of whom were ready to sneer at "city chaps." + +From the timbering they went to the sawmill. Here they found a busy whir +of activity. Logs were rolled onto the carriage and sent down the plane, +while the great circular saw bit its way through the length of the tree +like a hot knife through a pat of butter. + +The carriage then runs back to where it started, while a mechanical +device shoves the log sideways as many inches as is desired and the +carriage starts on its journey again. This is done until the log has +been "sliced into planks." These are then piled on one side, waiting for +the flat cars to be loaded and hauled away by the tractor. + +This operation that has been described entails more labor than the +winter logging, for then the trees are simply cut and rolled to one side +of the river. This continues throughout the winter until the cutting has +been complete and then they wait for the ice to go out. As soon as the +ice breaks up, the logs are tumbled into the river and floated down the +stream. For days they float down the river to the mills below, which are +always located on the river banks, and here they are ground up and made +into pulp from which paper is later manufactured. + +The logs are distinguished one from another when they reach their +journey's end by branding, much as the horses that roam the feeding +places in the West are known by their brand. Every lumberman has his +mark, and a gash is made at one end of the log, and on this is made the +mark. + +For example, Garry's father had his mark AB, which stood for his +initials. In this instance it was not necessary to brand the lumber, for +it all came from the same cutting and was transported directly to the +same destination. + +After supper that night, the men gathered outside their bunkhouses, +playing cards or simply leaning back against the wall and smoking. One +of the French Canadian lumberjacks produced a mouth organ, and another a +battered guitar, and those who spoke the French joined in an old +"chanson" or song. + +Soon one of the Americans, seizing on a lull in the conversation and +singing, struck up an old-time lumberjack song, and in a moment the +whole camp had joined in. The lumberjack songs are mostly about camp +events, the fight for the river at the spring flood, some great battle +that took place between two rival lumber camps, for your true lumberjack +is as ready to fight as to eat. + +Where these songs come from, no one knows. They are as old as the +lumbering industry in Maine, and generally are written with a chorus at +the end. One man sings the verse and then the camp joins in the chorus +in a thundering tone. There is generally more noise than melody, at +least in the choruses, for a man that has a fair voice always sings the +verse part. Some of these songs are of a seemingly endless duration, but +the lumberjacks never tire of singing them. + +As the men sang the moon came up, and made a scene that was long to be +remembered by the boys. In spite of their enjoying the evening, they +kept a sharp eye on the movements of the red haired cookee, although he +made no move to disappear. The boys figured that he probably would not +until the camp was asleep. Soon the men began to yawn, and turn into the +bunkhouse, while the boys bade goodnight to the manager and repaired to +their own shack. They turned in, and as soon as all seemed quiet, Phil +started out, and walking in the shadows, made for the spot he had picked +that afternoon as being a safe place to watch the exit from the +bunkhouse. + +Garry and Dick dropped off to sleep, and were only awakened some time +later by hearing Phil climb into his bunk. In a moment they were wide +awake. + +"What news," whispered Garry. + +"Go on to sleep," advised Phil in a disappointed tone. "The LeBlanc +never showed up, and I've lost three hours' sleep for nothing. +Goodnight!" + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +A NOCTURNAL VISITOR + + +It was in that dark hour that precedes the dawn, which for some reason +or other is always the blackest of the night. The three boys were +sleeping soundly. Suddenly Phil awoke and sniffed the air. For a moment +or two he was dazed, then he gave a shout. + +His cry of alarm woke the others, and they were about to leap from their +beds when Phil's warning shout prevented them. + +"What's the trouble, Phil?" asked Garry. "Are there snakes in the shack +or are you just having a nightmare? Whew!" Garry had no need to ask any +further questions. + +The nocturnal visitor was nothing more nor less than a polecat, that +little animal of the woods about the size of a cat, but commonly called +a skunk. + +Phil retained his presence of mind, and reached to the bottom of his +bunk and hauled out one of his heavy shoepacks. With a well directed aim +he heaved it at the unwelcome little intruder, which at that moment was +near the door. The force of the blow carried the animal out into the +night, and then the boys hopped out of their bunks and seized their +clothes. Keeping a wary eye, they dashed through the door and out of the +way. The animal by this time was scampering away. + +Going back to the shack was almost out of the question, for he had left +his unmistakable scent behind him. + +"There goes my night's sleep all shot to pieces," exclaimed Phil in an +aggravated tone. "First I go on a wild goose chase to hear a plot and +hear nothing, then this comes up, and blooie, there is goodbye to rest. +Bet you I take a nap this morning. Wonder if that smell will evaporate +or will we have to build a new shack. Also there is going to be a door +on the next one. I don't want any more night visitors like that chap." + +"Hush a minute," whispered Garry. To the ears of the boys, trained by +their work in the woods to catch the slightest sound, came the soft +noise as of someone walking towards the bunkhouse. In a moment Garry was +flat on the ground, wiggling along as does an Indian on the war path in +a manner that the boys had often practiced when they were Scouts. + +He was back in about five minutes. The others were all curious to know +what had made him act in such a mysterious manner. + +"Someone was prowling about, and just a moment ago went into the +bunkhouse. I could hear him when he dropped his shoes as he got ready to +crawl into the bunk. Here's what I think. That wood pussy may have +wandered into the shack all by his lonesome, but for my part I think it +is the first event in a campaign to make things so unpleasant for us +that we will cut short our visit and go away," whispered Garry. + +"They couldn't have picked on anything much better to make it +unpleasant," answered Dick. "What will we do now?" + +By this time the first faint streaks of dawn appeared, and in a little +while the camp would be astir. + +"It is almost morning, and now that we are wide awake and up, we might +as well stay so," answered Garry. "First thing we do this morning is to +get a few more boards and fashion a door for this shack. Also I saw some +heavy screening yesterday,--you notice that all the windows are +screened,--and we will tack a double thickness of that over the window. +That will afford us some slight protection against the invasion of more +friends such as the one that paid us an unwelcome call." + +In a little while the camp was starting to come to life. First appeared +the cookee who favored the boys with a knowing grin, then came the cook, +who immediately started the work of getting breakfast. Finally, +struggling into their clothes as they came yawning through the doors, +appeared the lumberjacks. + +Garry cautioned his chums to say nothing for the moment about their +experience of the night. They passed several moments in chatting with +those of the lumberjacks with whom they thought they might make friends +that would perhaps stand them in good stead later on. Garry was telling +a funny story and at its conclusion the men burst into a roar of +laughter. + +The red headed cookee happened to be passing just as the men began to +laugh, and he looked sharply at the boys. While he was serving them +breakfast in the smaller room,--they happened to be alone as Barrows had +not yet arisen,--he remarked: + +"Understand you chaps didn't sleep very well last night." + +"No, we didn't," answered Garry, looking up quickly. + +"Well, better luck next time," and still grinning the cookee shambled +out of the room. + +"Well!" exploded Garry. "If that chap didn't go and give himself clean +away first shot out of the gun!" + +"Looks as though your hunch about its being a part of the campaign of +ruthlessness was a fact," said Dick with a laugh. + +"Only question in my mind," said Phil, "is did he think of it himself as +a sort of a practical joke, or was he put up to it by Barrows?" + +"Looks pretty certain to me that Barrows was the instigator of the +matter," answered Garry. + +When Barrows appeared, the boys explained the matter to him, and asked +him for the necessary lumber with which to construct a door, also some +screening for the window. Barrows told them they could go to the saw +mill and select whatever they wanted in the way of boards. + +As they were getting the boards, an old grizzled lumberman chatted with +them. He asked why they wanted a door in that kind of weather, and Garry +told him the story. + +"They do leave a reg'lar trail behind them, don't they?" laughed the old +man. "I'll tell you what you can do, though, and it will fix things up +pretty well. I always keep some sulphur on hand when I'm in the woods. +Occasionally you get a rash from the browntail moths in the woods, and +the best thing for a cure is a poultice made with a little sulphur. When +you put your door on, take a few extra boards and board up your window. +Then take the sulphur that I give you and put it in a pan and set it on +fire with a hot coal from the kitchen range. Then you hop out and let +the shack get thoroughly filled with the fumes o' the sulphur, and +you'll find after a couple or three hours that you'll have your place +fumigated as pretty as if you had ten boards of health do the job for +you." + +The boys thanked the old timer, and left with their lumber. A few +minutes later he appeared on the scene with his sulphur, and the work of +boarding the window and making a door being completed, they did as he +had directed and went on a tour of the camp. + +As they were wandering about, with Sandy at their heels, they were again +approached by the man who had wanted to go on a coon hunt. This time +they accepted his invitation, and arranged to go that night. + +The day passed quickly, for there were many things about the camp to +attract their attention, and they asked numerous questions of such of +the lumberjacks as seemed inclined to spend a moment or two to answer +them. + +As soon as it got dark, the coon hunter appeared and asked if they were +ready to go. He was accompanied by one or two of his friends, and Garry +noticed that one of them carried a burlap bag. + +The boys secured their rifles, and were about to join the party, when +one of the men, noticing the guns, said: + +"You don't need your rifles, although you can carry 'em if you want. We +were aiming to catch the coon alive and see if we couldn't tame him for +a sort of pet around the camp. That's what we brought the bag for." + +"Good," answered Garry. "We aren't much on shooting animals just for the +sake of shooting." + +The trio of men led the way to where the man called Tom had said he had +seen a raccoon a few days before. Sandy was eagerly sniffing at the +ground, and soon he gave vent to a low growl. + +"By gosh, I believe he's got the scent already," chuckled one of the +men. "It may be some other kind of an animal, but I doubt it. All I've +seen around here is the raccoon, although there were a few rabbits at +different times. Still the raccoon is the most likely to be out prowling +at this time of night." + +Soon Sandy was off, with his nose close to the ground. After a few +moments he had left them entirely, and they followed only by means of +his occasional barks. After almost half a mile of chasing, they heard a +series of wild barks, and knew that Sandy had driven something to bay. + +In a few moments they had caught up to the dog, and there sure enough he +had something treed and was venting his pleasure by loud and vociferous +barks. + +They peered up into the tree and could see nothing. In the meantime one +of the men had discovered a hole at the foot of the tree. + +"Now one of you fellows get some branches, dry ones of course, and we'll +soon have Mr. Coon all trapped as nice as you please." + +One of the men, assisted by Dick, soon gathered an armful of dry sticks. +Getting a boost from his friend, Tom soon shinnied up the tree, and +stopped after he had gotten about fifteen feet up well into the +branches, for it was a small tree. + +"Here's the upper end of the hollow," he called down. "Now you fellows +start your fire at the hole down there, while I spread the bag over this +hole." + +The smudge was soon started, and fanning it with their coats, they drove +the smoke into the hollow tree trunk. They were always careful not to +let the flames of the fire get to the tree, or they might have started a +forest fire that would have been disastrous. As a matter of fact, +several bad forest fires have started from an unskillful attempt to +smoke some animal out of a tree. + +Soon there was a shout from the man up the tree. "I've got him!" + +The smoke had proved too much for Brer Raccoon, and he had sought to +escape by the hole at the top, only to walk into the bag. In a moment +more Tom had descended the tree with a squirming, snarling animal safely +tied up in the bag. + +On their return to the camp they were greeted by several of the jacks +who had not yet gone to bed. The catch was exhibited, and one of the men +produced an old dog collar from the bunkhouse. The collar was snapped on +the coon's neck, a stout rope was attached to the ring in the corner to +be later tied securely to a nail at the corner of the bunkhouse. + +"There," remarked Tom, surveying the result of the night's catch. "If +you fellows will lay off and not tease him, and shinny out a little food +for him once in a while, he'll get tame as a kitten, and they are a lot +of fun when they get tame. Almost as good as a monkey." + +"We'll have to keep Sandy tied up for a while when he is not with us, or +he'll make short work of that coon," remarked Garry. + +"Oh, I'll have 'em as friendly as two brothers in a few days," was Tom's +verdict. + +The boys later found that the man Tom had a reputation for being quite a +hand with animals of every description, but future events will show why +Sandy and the coon never got well acquainted. Things were on the verge +of beginning to hum for all hands. + +When the boys woke in the morning, they made two startling discoveries. +The first one was that repeated calls failed to bring Sandy to them, and +the boys had never remembered the morning when Sandy went so far abroad +that a few whistles did not bring him back on the run to join his +companions. + +The second surprise was found when Garry noticed a familiar looking roll +of birch bark at the entrance to the cabin, weighted down by a stone! + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +WORD FROM THE HERMIT + + +"Look here, you chaps," called Garry, as he gazed at the little roll of +bark, which he had not yet picked up. The boys crowded around and looked +at him in amazement. + +"Without making any rash bets," announced Garry, "I'll wager my best +rifle against a plugged nickel, that one of our friends has been in this +vicinity within the past few hours. Cast your eyes on that roll of bark, +and tell me if you dare that we won't find a funny cryptic little +message in it!" + +"The Hermit!" burst out Dick and Phil almost in one breath. + +"That's my guess. Now we'll see if we are right," and Garry stooped and +picked up the little roll from its resting place beneath the stone. +"It's the Hermit, and it's just the kind of a note I expected to find. +Listen to this. 'Unseen watchers often give the best aid. When you need +me most, I'll be with you.' And it's signed with his old mark, the lone +pine with the crossmarked boulder," said Garry as he had finished +reading. + +"Well, if that doesn't beat anything I ever heard of," said Dick. "How +in the name of all that's wonderful did he ever find us in this part of +the country?" + +"I think I can answer that," interrupted Phil. "He must have run across +Nate Webster and asked about us. It is likely that Nate told him where +we were going, and since he knew that we were good friends, might have +given him an inkling of the business that we were here on. The thing +that puzzles me is why he should not have waited and seen us, or even +waked us up to say howdy." + +"Well, you know what a queer old codger he was, and this latest stunt is +typical of him. Much as I would like to see him, I confess I would have +been a little bit disappointed if he had not done something out of the +ordinary," replied Garry. + +"Wonder where he went after he left the note?" queried Dick. + +"Oh, he's probably somewhere out in the woods, you know life in the open +woods is nothing to him, after all the years that he must have lived in +them. The main question now, since we can do nothing about our friend +the Hermit, as he will come in his own good time, is to see what has +happened to Sandy. I cannot understand his going away. He may have +chased up some animal, and if so he will be back. But it is unusual for +him ever to stir away from where we are sleeping until he knows that we +are up and about." + +Throughout the morning they searched every nook and corner of the camp, +going almost to the edge of the cutting operations, asking all the +workers they met whether or not the dog had been seen. Their search was +of no avail. The day dragged on, still no Sandy, and each passing hour +made the chums more downcast. + +"I'm beginning to think that this is step number two to drive us out," +gritted Garry between his teeth. "I tell you this, boys, if it is so, +and I'm inclined to believe it more and more, if any harm comes to Sandy +through the machinations of this crew that are trying to ruin Dad's +business, there's going to be one of the sweetest little wars started +that Barrows and his whole crew ever even dreamed of." + +"I'm with you, Garry. That dog was more than human, and the best friend +that a bunch of chums like us could ever hope to have," replied Dick as +he patted his friend on the shoulder. Phil said nothing, but the others +could see by the tightening of the corners of his mouth,--the danger +signal when Phil was really aroused over anything,--that he was with +them to the end. + +"There doesn't seem to be anything that we can do. I've looked carefully +over the ground for any signs of a struggle, but I can find nothing. +There was some trickery of some kind to get Sandy away. It may have been +done only to steal him and possibly sell him, but it may be that there +was a foul purpose in getting the dog away from us. The time has come +for real action. Let's get going early in the morning and keep our eyes +and ears sharply on the lookout. Phil, you watch the cookee closely and +see if there are any more midnight appointments to be made. Dick, you +look out for the sawmill, and see if there is any funny business being +done with the saw. You know enough about machinery to be able to detect +if it is working properly, and your common sense will tell you if there +seems to be a slackening up of production. It stands to reason that the +boss of the sawmill must be in on this scheme, for more delay can be +caused here than anywhere else. It is unlikely that there are many men +in on this plot. Too many would make it unsafe for the conspirators, +they couldn't all keep their mouths shut. I'll keep an eye on Barrows +and see what conferences he holds with the men. I hope that Howells gets +back here soon, I feel that we need immediate advice from someone who is +more experienced in the lumbering business than we are. Now let's hop to +it." + +The two boys did as their leader had directed. Phil ambled off to the +cookhouse with the intention of offering his services in peeling +potatoes to the cookee in order that he might have an excuse for keeping +near the fellow. Dick at once made for the sawmill. + +When he arrived there, the busy hum of activity seemed to be all about +him. But as he watched he became conscious of the fact that there seemed +to be several things that delayed the game. The man who drove one of the +tractors seemed to be having continual trouble with the engine, and +several minutes on each trip were consumed in needless repairs. Dick +could see with half an eye that there was little the trouble with the +engine except that which was created by the driver himself. The man kept +up a continual stream of grumbling at the way the engine was acting, +evidently to make the trouble appear to be real. + +Once Dick saw that there was a loose wire connection which the driver +purposely overlooked, and after he had watched the man waste ten minutes +in needless overhauling, he stepped up and offered his services. + +The man refused with a growl and an oath. Dick managed to restrain his +temper, although he wanted to tell the man how evident his stalling +around was. + +"Oh, all right, I don't mean to interfere with your business, but your +wire to your battery is unconnected," and Dick turned on his heel. + +Seeing that Dick really knew what he was talking about, the driver +attached the wire and in a moment or two was off for another load of +logs. + +"If he wastes that much time every trip," thought Dick to himself, "he +might just as well try to bring in the logs on his back. In the course +of a week that would mean almost a day's production gone to waste, and I +haven't watched long enough to know how much time he takes on his trip." + +Quite frequently the saw would be stopped for a moment while the boss +sawyer oiled up different parts of the machinery. He did not seem to +like Dick's watching him, but he was evidently a little wiser than the +driver, and attempted an explanation. + +"This is the last saw we have in the camp," he told Dick. "The ones that +we ordered haven't shown up yet, and if anything goes wrong with this +one, we are hurt and hurt bad." + +Dick pretended a great deal of ignorance about the saw, but he could see +that the sawyer regarded him with some suspicion. + +Dick kept in the sawmill, but stayed as much as possible in the +background. After nearly an hour of watching, a great log was rolled +onto the carriage, and glancing at his watch, the boss sawyer called an +assistant and gave him charge of the saw. Then he hastened from the mill +and started in the direction of the camp, evidently to hold a conference +with Barrows. Dick was turning to saunter out when he heard a terrific +tearing sound as of steel being ground between heavy rollers, then a cry +of pain from the sawyer. Dick turned and rushed to the scene. The saw +was still grinding into the obstruction that was causing the noise, and +several pieces of flying steel were in the air. The sawyer had his hands +clasped to his face, and the blood was streaming from between his +fingers. + +Dick saw that there was no one with presence of mind enough to throw the +lever that shut off the saw, and he ran and threw off the lever. Then he +returned to the injured man. The flying teeth of the saw had cut his +face in several places, but fortunately his eyes were uninjured. That he +had escaped being blinded was almost a miracle. + +The thought that flashed through Dick's mind that here was an instance +of what Howells had told them, of the spiking a tree in the upper part +where it would hit the saw. Dick asked the old man who had told them how +to fumigate their shack the day before if he could roll back the saw +without starting up the engine and causing more teeth to be broken and +start flying about the place. + +In a few minutes the old timer had worked the saw back so that Dick +could examine it. It required only a moment to see that the saw was +irreparably ruined. Most of the teeth had been bent or broken off, and a +further examination showed that several parts of the saw carriage and +control had been broken or strained by the unwonted burden that had been +put on them. + +At this moment the boss sawyer and Barrows, the manager, had come +rushing up to the mill to inquire what was the trouble. Garry was with +them, and Dick gave him a significant look, unobserved by the others. + +"What's all the trouble?" inquired Barrows needlessly, for he could see +with half an eye the damage that had been wrought. + +"Seems as if your saw was a total wreck," answered Dick. "Must have +struck a ton of metal in the heart of that tree to do all that damage." + +"Nonsense," cried Barrows. "Whoever heard of metal in a tree?" + +"Could it have been a defective saw?" inquired Garry soberly, for the +purpose of hearing what reply Barrows would make. + +"Yes, that's what it must have been, a defective saw," repeated the +manager, parrot fashion. + +"Defective saw me eye," broke in the old helper. "That tree has been +spiked and spiked good and plenty. That's the second saw that went that +way this summer. Tother time it nearly killed the sawyer when the belt +flew off and almost got him tangled up in the machinery. There's one +sure way to find out what caused it, and that's to roll her off the +carriage and split off that place where the saw started to eat through. +If there isn't a spike there, you can have my month's wages." + +"You seem to know all about it, and perhaps we shall find out why you +know so much about the matter," and Barrows favored the old man with a +look that boded no good to him. + +In the face of the old timer's statement, and because Dick and Garry +were looking at the manager as though they expected him to take speedy +action, there was nothing for Barrows to do but follow the suggestion +and order the log rolled off. This was done, and then several wedges +were driven in, and using the backs of single bitted axes, the section +of tree was soon split open. There plainly revealed to view were several +bent, cut and twisted spikes! + +"That's what broke your saw," exclaimed the old man. "Shame, too, a nice +saw like that ruined and the only one in the camp at that!" + +"That will do, Collins," cut in Barrows sharply. "Your opinion wasn't +asked. Besides, I am still wondering how your knowledge of the spiking +seemed to prove so accurate." + +"I was raised in the woods, and I know all the little tricks. There's +dirty work afoot here somewhere," returned old Collins staunchly. + +"Yes, I guess you do know all the tricks, but I know a good one, too; +you go and get your pay from the timekeeper and start on your way," +ground out the manager. + +"Isn't that just a trifle hasty, Mr. Barrows?" cut in Garry. + +"Listen, my boy. With all due respect to the son of my employer, I must +say that I am manager of this camp, and what I say goes. You know I am +protecting your father's business, and there has been so much funny +business going on lately that something must be done, and I am going to +begin by cutting out all the suspicious characters. In my judgment +Collins is such a character." + +"Huh," muttered Dick in an undertone. "A fine protector you are, and you +know that Collins is innocent. He knows too much, that's all." + +Old Collins marched out of the mill section and started toward the +office. A moment later Dick unobtrusively followed him. In a few seconds +he had caught up with the man and said goodbye to him. + +"Goodbye, my lad, and let me give you a warning. Tell your pal that his +father's business is going to pot here. There's something underfoot, I +don't know what it is or why, but it's there. Too many accidents. You +watch that Barrows and watch the timekeeper, and keep an eye on the two +drivers with the moustaches. Throw in the cookee for good measure, and +you'll have a precious lot of rascals." + +Dick tried to elicit further information, but found that the old fellow +either did not know anything specific, or was crotchety and would not +tell. + +There being nothing that could be done further, the manager and Dick +returned to the office, while Garry went to the bunkhouse to see if he +could render any aid to the man who had been cut by the flying particles +of the saw. + +At the office they found waiting their acquaintance of the attempted +holdup, Arthur Howells. He acted according to the agreement and waited +till they had been introduced. + +"This is our scaler and cruiser," announced Barrows. + +Upon the boys professing ignorance of what the duties of a scaler were, +they received an invitation from Howells to come with him after dinner +and watch the operations. Barrows heartily advised the boys to go with +him and learn something of the way in which the trees were spotted and +the lumber measured. + +The chums knew well that the invitation was solely for the purpose of +getting them away from the camp so that they could confer on what was +going on. + +After dinner they sought out Howells, and after he had armed himself +with a scaling stick, marked off in measurements, which was used to +measure the trees, they wandered into the woods. + +"Now, boys, what news?" he asked. + +In a few words they told him of the events that had transpired since +their arrival. + +Howells was especially interested in the matter of the spiked tree, and +was indignant at the fact that Collins had been discharged. + +"Why, the old man was as honest as the day is long. He used to know your +father a good many years ago, Garry, and he would never do anything that +would harm him or his business," Howells said vehemently. + +"Next thing on the docket," said Garry, "is to ask what news you have." + +"I have something that will knock the feet almost out from under you. In +addition to the trouble caused by the breakage and wasting, there is +something even deeper yet. I always get the reports from the receiving +stations of the amount of lumber that is sent out. I know after +measuring, just how much has gone out. Today my reports show that all +the timber that is cut here does not arrive at its destination. + +"What do you mean?" said Garry. + +"Just what I mean is this. Somewhere, somehow, your father's lumber is +being stolen en route to its destination!" + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +THE BOYS LOSE AN ALLY + + +The words of Howells stunned the boys for a moment. Then Garry delivered +himself of a few vehement words regarding the thieves. + +"We have been here only a couple of days or so, and yet we find that +this logging camp is a hive of rascals and thieves. And still we have +done nothing. We must get to work and nip this thing in the bud, else +the whole summer's work at the camp here will have gone for naught, to +say nothing of the irreparable financial loss that will be caused to +Dad, not only from the penalties for failure to live up to his +contracts, but the money loss from the stolen timber will mount up well +into the hundreds I am afraid. Now we must put a stop to this thing. I +believe that I will go out tomorrow and go to town and 'phone Father +that he had better make a cleanup here at the camp. Perhaps we don't +know just who the guilty parties are, but if we get rid of the whole +shooting match we can stop it. How much timber would you estimate has +been stolen?" he concluded, turning to Howells. + +"I can't say as to that. This last report is the only one that I have +received direct. Generally I have been given what was supposed to be a +duplicate copy of the one sent to Barrows. This time I happened to get +the mail myself at the postoffice. Generally one of Barrow's men gets +the mail, and it is distributed. This letter was addressed to me +personally, and I have no doubt that the others were also, but were +opened and doctored up to appear all right. That's a prime bit of +evidence if we can secure the proof. Tampering with Uncle Sam's mail is +a serious crime, and draws a long prison term. Now as for your going out +of the woods tomorrow and 'phoning your father, Garry, I would advise +against it. Nothing very serious can happen in the next few days. Little +work can be done until a new saw comes, and there will be little +shipping of timber except that which has been waiting to be transported. +In the meantime, if, as your father is led to believe, this whole matter +is a move on the part of the big interests to crush him in the lumber +business, the firing of the present manager and crew will have little +effect. Your dad evidently trusted Barrows, else he would not have sent +him here. If he is guilty, you may be sure that the enemy, for such we +must call them, made it mighty well worth his while to turn traitor. +What is to prevent the next manager from being affected in the same way? +And even if a trustworthy manager were secured, the big interests can +always bribe enough of the laborers to do all the necessary damage that +would be required to spoil the season. My advice is to lay low for a few +days and get evidence that will get the 'man higher up,' the one who is +the instigator of this whole thing. Once you can spike his guns, there +will be no further danger of trouble here, and also it will enable your +father to take court action that will restore him damages for the stolen +timber, and will also give him a chance to sue those who have harmed him +so that he can make the penalties that will be inflicted in case enough +damage has already been done to make him forfeit his contracts. I should +say now that he was a good three weeks behind his shipments, and that is +a whole lot in one season. He has guaranteed to deliver a certain amount +of timber at its destination by the last of September. It is the middle +of August now, and he must make every minute count from now on to get +out the required amount. Get the man responsible for this business and +you will have accomplished what you have set out to. What do you think +of my advice?" + +"Sounds logical, and I think we will follow it. In the meantime I have a +hunch now in regard to that stolen timber. I think I can hitch up a few +things Barrows has tried to dissuade us from doing, and a certain lake +in this vicinity. That's our next work. Now what do you propose to do, +Mr. Howells?" asked Garry. + +"First thing I'm going to do is to go straight to Barrows and tell him +about the deficiency shown by the records. That will do one of two +things, I believe; either show him up for a crook, or else show that he +is straight and start him investigating the thefts. If the latter +happens, which I am frank to say I do not think will, then we have +accomplished a great deal of good." + +Howells, however, had barely finished speaking, when the red haired +cookee appeared at the shack and told him that Barrows wanted to see him +at the camp office immediately. + +Having delivered the message, the cookee sauntered off, and Howells +looked at the boys with a puzzled stare. + +"Wonder what's up now. Thought that we talked over everything there was +a little while ago. Well, there's no use in wondering. I'm off to see +his Royal Highness and find out what he wants. I'll see you after a +little while." + +Howells hustled off to the office and left the boys to talk things over +among themselves. + +"What did you mean, Garry, when you said that you had a hunch about +lakes and things?" inquired Phil. + +"Why, you remember how insistent Barrows has been that we make a sort of +playground out of the little lake, setting forth its advantages about +swimming, fishing and all that, and has done everything that he can do +to discourage us from going near the big lake. I have let him believe +that we took everything he said for granted, so I thought that tonight, +if possible, we would make a trip to the big lake and see what's what," +Garry answered. + +"I'm wondering if Barrows is clever enough to play the old trick used by +conjurers and magicians?" mused Phil. + +"What do you mean, magician?" queried Garry with a puzzled look at his +friend. + +"Why, you know a magician always directs the attention of his audience +to the thing that he is generally going to do, figuring that the people +will be on the watch for a trick, and will be so busy trying to find the +hidden trick, that they look everywhere but where the magician tells 'em +to, and in the meantime he has done his trick." + +"I see," exclaimed Garry. "You mean that Barrows may figure that we will +guess he has been discouraging us about the big lake for the very +purpose of making us go there rather than to the smaller body of water, +where some sort of villainy may be going on." + +"That's it exactly," returned Phil. + +"I think you have a good hunch there, Phil, although I rather think that +Barrows is not clever enough to dope out that trick. Still, there can be +no harm in watching both lakes. Suppose that we take a little trip today +to the small one, and then tomorrow night we will hustle over to the big +one after the camp has turned in for the night. Guess that will be our +best plan. Now let's wait for Barrows and Howells to finish their +conversation, and we will trot over while I ask a few leading +questions." + +They waited a few minutes, talking over their probable course of action, +and were about to set out for the office, when Howells appeared on the +scene. Rage and disappointment were depicted in his face, and the boys +were quick to take notice of this. + +"What's the matter? You look as though you had bad news to bring us," +said Garry. + +"Well, it's bad news for me, at any rate, and I think also for you. I +believe I have proof enough that Barrows is a crook from the word go. I +have been discharged from my job as cruiser and scaler and ordered to +leave the place immediately." + +"Why, I can hardly believe you, what's it all about?" asked Phil. + +"Well, it's a short story. I had hardly gotten inside the office, when +Barrows told me I was through. Naturally all other thoughts left my +head, that is about my errand, and I asked him why. He replied that when +he hired me he thought he was getting an accurate scaler, and that the +reports showed that the amount of timber I had reported was cut had not +been delivered. Immediately I knew that he was on to the fact that I was +aware of the shortage and was spiking my guns before I could do or say +anything. Now I know that I have accurately measured all the timber that +was cut in this tract. I was at school long enough to learn how to scale +if I never learned anything else. Of course we had words, and I forgot +myself and accused him of knowing that timber was disappearing, and he +was covering up by throwing the blame on me. Of course there was nothing +that I could do, so I told him a few wholesome truths and walked out of +the office." + +"Then that definitely settles Barrows' status here," said Garry. "He +knows that timber is being stolen, and he wants to cover it up. I hope +you did not connect us in any way with you while you were telling +Barrows what you thought of him, did you Art?" + +"You bet I didn't. I kept my head that much, at any rate." + +"Well, we have lost a valuable ally since you must go away. I suppose, +though, we could hire you as a guide and keep you here. Barrows could +make no objection then," said Garry. + +"No, that would be the worst thing that you could do. It would put +Barrows on his guard, for he would immediately leap to the conclusion +that I had told you everything. No, the wisest thing for me to do is to +hop out and go back to town. Then in a few days I could get back here +and see what I could dig up in the way of stolen timber. I think the +most advisable thing to do would be to find out from some of the railway +stations near here where timber is being shipped from, and in that way +we could get a line on where it is going. Then you chaps on the inside +can browse about a bit and find out how it is stolen. Between us we can +secure evidence that will uncover the whole plot. I'm going out now, +before they get onto the fact that we have had time to talk things over. +In the meantime, take my advice, and keep your eyes open every minute. +Eternal vigilance on your part is going to be the price of success. Not +that I believe any harm will come to you. Barrows would not dare attempt +that; but he could move so stealthily that you could not find out +anything. Now I'll say goodbye and trot along. Good luck to you, and I +will contrive some way to get word to you of what is going on." + +Howells shook hands with the boys, and then loped off to get his +dunnage. The boys watched his departure sadly, for they had counted a +great deal on the help that the young timberman could give them. + +"Well, fellows, that puts it directly up to us again. We will have to +work on our own hook and get to the bottom of this. Now let's have +action. Tomorrow morning--it is too late now to do anything--we will +take a little trip to the small lake, Kanamo Lake I think they call it; +Dutton is the name of the big one, and start our search there. We will +simply say that we are going off for some fishing and swimming. Now +we'll go to the office, and remember, not a word about knowing that +Howells was discharged." And concluding his talk, Garry led the way to +the office. + +Barrows watched them narrowly as they came in, but said nothing. + +"Thought we'd get a little information about Kanamo Lake," said Phil, as +they seated themselves. + +"Yes," chimed in Garry. "We are going off there early tomorrow and have +a little fishing and perhaps a swim or two. We haven't done anything +since we got here but watch the timber cutting, and that isn't a novelty +any longer. What we especially want to find out is whether there is any +canoe or boat on either of the lakes that we could use to get some +really good fishing." + +"There isn't a boat or canoe of any sort on either Dutton or Kanamo," +answered the manager. "But you will find that will not interfere with +your fishing. Part of the banks are well covered with reeds, and early +in the morning and after the sun has gone down you can catch a fine mess +of pickerel. Throughout the day the bass can be caught from the bank if +you boys are any hand at making a good long cast. I suppose as soon as +the timber cutting is done, the tourists will begin to swarm here for +summer camping, and then there will be plenty of boats and few fish. +That's generally the way." The manager talked heartily as though +relieved that the conversation had taken the turn that it had, and +perhaps because of the information that the boys were going to get away +from the camp. It was likely that he had expected some questioning +because of the discharge of the scaler. Evidently thinking over the +matter, he decided something in his mind, and turning to Garry, remarked +casually: "I had hoped that the arrival of the scaler would give me a +little extra time so that I could do some fishing with you and act as +guide around here, but I regret to say that I found him incompetent and +was obliged to discharge him. He was careless about his measurements, or +else did not know how to measure properly, and all our records are +messed up so that it will take me several days to get them straightened +out. Fortunately I know pretty well what's been shipped and can check +against the bills of lading. Well, there goes the cook's supper call." + +Following supper, the boys made excuses that they wanted to get their +fishing tackle in order and retired early to their shack. They got to +sleep early, as they expected a strenuous day on the morrow, and also +hoped to be able to make a trip to Dutton Lake at night, hence wanted +sleep. + +Just as they were undressing, Dick uttered an exclamation of disgust. + +"What's the matter, Dick, lose a button?" inquired Phil. + +"No, confound it, lost that nice knife with my name on it that I bought +in Bangor." + +"That's too bad, lost your nice toy. Well, you should worry, as you have +your sensible scout knife that will cut even if it hasn't a nice name on +it," laughed Phil. + +Early morning found them routed out with the dawn, and as they hurried +for the cookhouse to get some supplies with which to cook a luncheon at +the lake, they heard the cook and his helper talking about some marauder +that had been captured the night before and was locked up in the +storehouse. + +Neither seemed to know much about it, but the boys could see that the +cookee was on tenterhooks, and several times tried to get out, only to +be called by the cook and set to doing some necessary task toward the +getting of breakfast. This uneasiness on the part of the cookee made the +boys think that possibly Baptiste LeBlanc had been caught, and decided +that when they had eaten they would have a look at the prisoner. + +Barrows appeared when they were half way through breakfast, and the +chums at once began to question him regarding the capture of the unknown +man and what he might have wanted there. + +"Perhaps he is the one who has been causing a lot of trouble around +here," said Barrows. "I haven't seen him yet. Couple of the men found +him snooping around the office last night, and after locking him up, +woke me up and told me about him. After I eat I am going to question +him, and if you want to get a little later start on your fishing trip, +you can come and take a look at him." + +This was exactly what the boys wanted, and they thanked Barrows for the +invitation. They made a hurried meal, and then after Barrows had posted +the notices for the section bosses for the day, they went to the +storehouse, which was the most solid looking building in the camp, being +built of great logs with a thick double hasp and padlocks on the door. +Inside were kept the cooking supplies for the camp. + +The manager produced a key, and throwing open the door, called to the +prisoner to come out. + +The three chums pressed forward eagerly to see if they were right in +their guess that LeBlanc or his evil associate had been captured. + +What they did finally see nearly knocked them off their feet. There was +a shuffling sound as of some one getting up, and then through the door +into the sunlight, walked The Hermit! + + + + +CHAPTER X + +THE FIRST HIKE + + +It was nearly a minute before the boys could find their tongues. The +hermit stood there blinking in the sunlight, for it had been pitch black +inside of the storehouse. + +Finally Garry shouted: + +"Hello, Hermit. Where did you come from?" + +Barrows stared at the boys in surprise. + +"Do you know this man?" he asked sharply. + +"Of course we do," replied the boys, almost simultaneously. "It isn't so +long ago that he was of great aid to us in our work on the fire patrol," +added Garry. Immediately he could have kicked himself, for he had by +this statement let Barrows know that the man might be of help to them +again. + +"What are you trying to do around here?" snapped Barrows, turning to the +hermit. "Trying to steal something, or set fire to the camp or something +of that sort?" + +"That will be just about enough, Mr. Barrows," interrupted Garry. "We +happen to know this old man, and I'll vouch for him personally. It is +probable that he came here to visit us, and was wandering about when +your men, naturally thinking him to be a marauder, seized him. You can +take my word for it that he's all right." + +Barrows evidently resented the way in which Garry had spoken to him. "I +think I am the best judge of what to do in this camp, young man. I am +not satisfied with his presence here, and it is my intention to have him +taken to town and lodged in jail there until I find out what's at the +bottom of the broken saws and such occurrences in the camp." + +"Now just one moment, Barrows," said Garry with a determined ring in his +voice, and a snap in his eyes that boded little good for Barrows. "I am +not one who will naturally trade on his being the son of the man who +owns this camp, but I give you ample warning that if my word is doubted +in this matter, and this old man, who is as harmless as a rabbit, is not +freed immediately, I will go to town this morning and take steps that +will cause your instant removal from this camp. I have never asked my +father to back me in anything that I was not absolutely sure of, and you +can rely on the fact that he will take my word in this case, knowing me +as he does. Now Mr. Barrows, you may take your choice in this matter and +decide quickly." + +The manager hesitated a moment, evidently trying to decide just who had +the upper hand in the situation. Seeing this, Garry turned to Phil and +Dick, and said: + +"Boys, go pack up your dunnage and get ready to leave in fifteen +minutes." + +The two chums turned on their heels without a word, and were starting +for the shack when Barrows, seeing that he was beaten, called: + +"Never mind, boys, the old man will go free this minute." + +He said it with a bad grace, and the glances that he covertly cast at +the boys showed that he was enraged at the turn affairs had taken. What +made him still angrier was the fact that the cook and two or three men +had gathered around and seen him come out second best in the battle of +words. + +He determined to make the best of a bad situation. + +"I am afraid that I spoke a little too hastily in this thing," he said, +coming closer to Garry. "I want you to remember that I am always trying +to protect your father's interests here; that is what he pays me for, +and I thought that there might be something peculiar in this chap's +showing up here in the dead of night." + +Garry, having won his point, and for the sake of future peace and +freedom from interference, resolved to mollify the manager. + +"That's all right, Mr. Barrows. Only I want to tell you this," and here +Garry lowered his voice: "The old chap is mentally unbalanced, and it +was largely for that reason that I did not want him to be annoyed. He +lives near a tract of wild land where we patrolled early this summer, +and was very decent to us, tanning skins of animals that we shot, and +leaving us rabbits for eating. It is a pet trick of his to wander about +at night, and appear very mysteriously, and as I propose to have him +stay with us a few days, I wish you would pass the word that he is +afflicted and caution the men not to tease or annoy him." + +Barrows assented grudgingly and then marched off to the office. + +Left alone with the hermit, for the cook and the others had departed for +their customary tasks, the boys eagerly asked the hermit what he meant +by his note, and if he had anything to tell them. + +"I didn't mean to get caught," he said. "I know what you boys are here +for. Nate told me a little and I can make two and two equal four. I was +creeping through the woods last night to come and leave a letter for +you, when I heard some men talking, and crept up to listen to them. They +were just getting ready to leave and all I heard was a man saying that +his brother would soon be there and that he would know how to deal with +those spies. I couldn't get a good look at the man, but he spoke with an +accent, and was a heavy, strongly built man. That's what I was going to +write to you, for I believe you are the ones that the men in the secret +meeting meant when they referred to spies." + +The boys looked aghast at each other when they heard the concluding +words of their friend the hermit. At once the same thought leaped into +the minds of all three. Man with an accent, heavily built and strong +appearing. Brother was coming to help him. All put together it meant +only one thing, and that was voiced by Dick. + +"Jean LeBlanc!" + +The others echoed the name of their Nemesis after Dick. + +"What's that, did you speak of LeBlanc?" inquired the hermit. + +"That's just what we did," replied Garry grimly. "That man you +described, unless we are very badly mistaken, was Baptiste, a brother of +Jean. And if Jean is on the way, we must guard ourselves every minute. +And we must make every moment count, for once he gets here he will make +strenuous efforts to get us in trouble, if not on his own hook, then in +cahoots with Barrows. Now let's break for the small lake. Suppose you +stay with us a few days, Hermit, and help us in our work." + +"No, that would not be good tactics," was the reply of the hermit. "It +would cause trouble to you boys with that man who wished me lodged in +durance vile." + +As was usual, the words of the hermit were anything but those that would +be naturally used by a man that had lived the greater part of his life +in the deep woods, far removed from all human beings. But the aged +hermit was always surprising them, if not by his talk, by his unusual +actions. + +Garry had often thought that the old man was wise in his conclusions, so +he asked what could be suggested. + +"I would say that you should go to the manager and tell him that I had +been offended by my reception and consequently had refused to stay and +visit you, going off in a huff. Then that will give me a chance to +return to the forest and watch for the coming of LeBlanc. I will +guarantee that I will not be captured again. I was too sure of myself +last night, since I did not know that the camp was full of night spies, +who held rendezvous in the dark of the night. I will warn you in the +usual way if LeBlanc approaches. In the meantime, my instinct tells me +that the man with whom you quarreled, Garry, is not to be trusted. Watch +him. Now I will go if you will give me some food to carry with me for +breakfast. I am hungry." + +"There's one thing I wish you would do first, Hermit," said Garry, +calling him by the only name they knew, and which appeared to please +rather than offend the old recluse, "and that is go to the nearest town +and mail a letter for us. There is no one in the camp now that I would +trust with a message, and none of us who could get away. I should have +thought to do it yesterday when Howells left, but forgot it in the +excitement of his being discharged." + +Borrowing Dick's ever ready notebook, Garry scribbled off a brief note +to his father, advising him to check carefully the shipments of timber, +and telling him in guarded words, that he had several clues that +properly trailed down would soon lead to the unmasking of the traitors +in the camp. He folded the note and gave the hermit money with which to +buy a stamped envelope, and on another leaf of paper wrote the address +to which the note should be sent. + +This the hermit promised to do at the earliest possible opportunity. He +then proposed that they walk a few hundred yards out of the camp with +him, so that they might select a spot where notes could be left without +his having to penetrate the dangers of the camp at night. + +This the boys agreed to do, and after a brisk walk selected a tree with +a hollow, half concealed in it, and established that as the +"postoffice." The hermit then took up his journey, while the boys +returned to the office to tell the manager, as they had agreed to do, +about the hermit's leaving. When Barrows heard their story he seemed +relieved and was apparently only too anxious to ingratiate himself with +the boys again, for he realized that he had overstepped the mark a bit +in his words with Garry a short time previous. + +"You should have brought the old chap back, and perhaps I could have +persuaded him that it was all a mistake," but the boys were quick to +detect the false ring in his tone. + +"Now we are off to Kanamo Lake for our delayed fishing trip, and so that +you may not get uneasy if we do not return by nightfall, let us tell you +that we are used to making camp wherever we happen to be, and so will be +all right. I only wish there was a canoe on the lake, and we would take +a three or four-day hike, canoeing from spot to spot on the lake, and +camping wherever we saw fit," concluded Garry. + +"Sorry there isn't. You might make a flatboat out of some lumber, but +there is nothing with which to calk the seams, and the task of dragging +the lumber to the water would be almost too much to bother with for the +short time that you are going to stay here," replied Barrows. + +As the boys set out on their seven-mile hike to the lake, they discussed +the way in which Barrows was continually bringing into the conversation +the suggestion that they were not going to stay very long. + +"I wonder if that is a warning unintentionally given, or is the wish +just father to the thought?" asked Garry. "I don't remember ever saying +anything to Barrows about the length of time that we intended to spend +here." + +"Maybe it is just the wish coming to surface as you say. At any rate, +let's not worry about that for awhile. We will have bridges enough to +cross when we come to them." + +The chums pursued their way through the fragrant woods, spicy with the +smell of pine and balsam. Occasionally they heard the whirr of wings as +a covey of grouse or partridge, frightened at the sound of approaching +footsteps, took wing and flew away from the cover where they had been +hiding. The sound of the birds brought to the minds of the trio the sad +thought of the missing Sandy, for he had the canine instinct of most +dogs to flush a bird. He had so often hunted with the boys that they had +taught him to retrieve a bird as does a regular pointer or hunting dog. + +"Tell you what we'll do when we get back to the camp tonight," announced +Phil. "We'll offer a reward for the finding of Sandy. I think myself +that some of the lumberjacks, perhaps that chap that took us coon +hunting, recognized the value of Sandy and stole him, determined to sell +him and make a few dishonest dollars. Sandy is worth more to us than +many people would want to pay for him, and I think if we offered a big +enough reward we might get him back." + +This was agreed on by the boys, and chatting merrily of many things, +they trekked through the forest to the lake. + +They took turns setting the pace and so made brisk time, even Dick +keeping up without grumbling, although there was no circus at the end of +the trail to lure him on to greater speed. However, Dick smelled +adventure in the air, and hence all his seemingly lazy ways dropped and +he dug to the trail as if his life depended on it. + +Soon they reached the lake, which lay like a jewel in the midst of the +forest. For the most part it was surrounded by trees, thick and green. +At the end of the trail was a slightly open spot, and a stretch of sandy +beach that seemed to beckon the boys irresistibly. + +"Let's take a short dip before we start exploring. I haven't had a swim +for days, and I think it would do us all a lot of good." Garry had been +sweeping the edges of the lake with his field glasses, which he had +brought along, and could see nothing other than an unbroken expanse of +forest. Far down at the end of the lake was a slight opening which Garry +judged was the outlet of the lake, although since he had not consulted a +map, he could not tell much about it as regarded its direction and size. + +The others were also of Garry's opinion, and Phil then came to bat with +another suggestion. + +"We must do a little fishing, also; for if we go back empty handed from +a lake that is supposed to be filled with fish, we are apt to excite +suspicion in the mind of Barrows, and set him asking us questions as to +what we did while we were away. We don't need to spend the whole day at +it, just catch a decent mess and quit." + +"Right you are, Phil," answered Garry. "Now for a swim, and last man in +is no good." + +The boys ripped off their clothes, and so used were they to speedy +disrobing, that all hit the water with almost the same splash. + +"See that spot up the bank about three hundred yards, where the ground +begins to rise?" inquired Dick, as he splashed about in the water. "Bet +you fellows anything I've got against anything you have that I can give +you chaps ten yards' start and then beat you there." + +"Well, you sure thing artist, splash him good, Phil," shouted Garry, for +Dick was an expert swimmer, much better than either of the others, +although they were not unskilled in the aquatic art. + +Dick was thoroughly splashed, and with two against one, was soon forced +to holler quits. + +"Tell you what I'm going to do; I'm going to swim up to that place and +back, anyway. You fellows can come or not, as you please," and with a +long, sweeping, underhand stroke, his head almost buried in the water, +Dick sped away. The remaining two contented themselves with paddling +about and noting the clearness of the water and the fine sandy bottom. +They got a stone and amused themselves by throwing it some distance and +then swimming under water after it and recovering it. They had been +doing this for some moments, when suddenly Garry, thinking that Dick, +with his speed, had been gone long enough to have done that distance +twice over, began to worry a bit, and called Phil's attention to the +lapse of time. They decided to swim up there and seek their missing +comrade, who, although they had perfect faith in his prowess as a +swimmer, might easily have been overtaken with a cramp, and met with +disaster. + +It was generally a rule that they keep an eye on each other in the +water, and it was a strict regulation that a call for help be never made +in jest. + +"Let's go," called Garry, and away they started. They had made less than +fifty yards, when borne on the breeze came the sound of Dick's voice. + +Garry stopped swimming for a moment, and began to tread water, while he +looked toward the spot that had been Dick's goal when he swam away. Dick +could be seen standing on the bank beckoning wildly to them. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A LUCKY FIND + + +"Guess it's nothing serious, Garry," said Phil, who had followed Garry's +lead and stopped swimming long enough to see what the cause of the call +was. "It looks as though he had made a discovery of some sort." + +The chums put on an extra burst of speed, and soon had reached the spot +where Dick was standing. + +"What's all the commotion about?" inquired Garry half breathlessly, as +they clambered up on to the bank. "We thought you were calling for +help." + +"I am truly sorry I frightened you, but I just found something that we +may need before our stay at the camp is done," and Dick led the way into +the woods for a few feet. "I got out on the bank to rest a bit, and +thought I saw signs of a camp having been here at one time or another, +so I nosed around and tucked away in the brush I found this," and +displacing some of the debris that had fallen around the object, Dick +disclosed a birch-bark canoe, made after Indian fashion. + +"I should say that was a find," exclaimed Garry. "Now we can do all the +exploring around here that we want to, and if we find nothing here we +can portage the canoe across the woods to Dutton Lake and continue our +investigation." + +They were disappointed, however, for on dragging out the canoe, they +found that a great hole had been torn in the bottom. + +"Now wouldn't that jar you. I wish I had looked at it more carefully +before I called to you," said Dick in a disappointed tone. + +"Let your Uncle Dudley take a look," ordered Garry. After a few moment's +investigation, he straightened up. "It can be repaired easily with what +simple tools we have and a little help from old Mother Nature. Our only +trouble will be a swim of about four miles. Two across to the point that +I noted when I looked through my glasses, and two back to where we want +to do our work, which had better be here." + +"I think I begin to see faint glimmerings of what you intend to do," +said Phil, as he scanned the end of the lake that came within his +vision. Phil had abnormally keen eyes, and could often see things that +the other boys required a glass to discern. + +"Well, Sherlock, what do I intend to do?" asked Garry with a laugh. + +"It seems to me, if my eyes don't fail me, that I can see a sort of a +white clump of woods about two miles distant, at least the sunshine +casts a brighter glare than it does on the green of the pines and +spruces. Now to me that spells b-i-r-c-h. Am I right?" + +"Right again. That's just what I have in mind. Let's start. We ought to +be able to have a fine canoe by noon if we don't loiter." + +They swam back to where they had left their clothes, and it was decided +that Phil should stay behind to guard their clothes, packs and rifles. +Garry got his hatchet and sheath off his belt, and tucked his knife +safely into the sheath of the axe blade. Then by knotting two of the +bandanna handkerchiefs that they customarily wore about their necks, he +made a sort of a strap affair and tied the axe securely on his back +between his shoulder blades. This left his arms perfectly free for +swimming, and then he and Dick set out with easy strokes for their +destination across the lake. They took plenty of time and occasionally +rolled over to float on their backs so that they could rest. At last, +after several resting spells, which were mainly for Garry's benefit, as +Dick could have done the whole distance without fatiguing himself in the +slightest, they reached the clump of birches. + +Resting a few moments on the bank, they proceeded to strip a good +section of bark from one of the birches. This was a simple matter, as +all that was necessary to do was to cut a girdle around the tree a few +inches from the bottom, and another about three feet above. Then a +vertical cut was made between the two girdles, and after about twenty +minutes of prying the bark from the trunk with the knife, the two taking +turns at the task, they had the roll of bark neatly cut off. + +"Now if we could only find a swampy place around here where there would +be some tamarack trees, we could get a couple of the crooked roots for +which the tamarack is noted, and that would furnish us with a rib for +the canoe. As it is, we will have to makeshift with that twisted birch +branch that I see, which Nature seemed to have put there for our +particular use today," and Garry proceeded to get the branch as he +spoke. + +"We can roll this up and tie it with a strip of handkerchief, and push +it along with us on the return swim. Then it will be a small job to +repair the canoe." + +"What are you going to use to attach it to the bottom of the canoe where +it is broken," asked Dick. + +"I have something in my knapsack. For some reason or other, while in +Bangor, I bought a ball of extra fine linen cord, and one day while we +were in the woods at Sourdehunq I needed some shoemaker's wax, and +didn't have it, so last time we were in town I bought a piece. I never +expected to use it to repair a boat with, however, just bought the stuff +in case an occasion arose where we might need it. Now it will come in +handy," and as he finished, Garry slipped back into the water. The +return trip occupied somewhat longer, as the bark was a bit unwieldy as +they pushed it ahead of them. + +When they returned to the spot where they had left Phil, the sun was +almost in the center of the sky, denoting it was near noon. They found +that Phil had improved the time while they were absent and had started a +fire and caught several good bass. + +"Best fishing here I ever saw. I don't believe a line has been thrown in +this patch of water for years, the fish just jump at the bait," shouted +Phil with the true Isaac Walton enthusiasm. + +"I also got a couple of pickerel that were so foolish as to leap at my +bait, and have enough for dinner and some to take back to the camp with +us tonight." + +All were so eager to get at the business of fixing the boat, that they +hurried through lunch with extra speed. Then they sped through the woods +to the spot where the old canoe had been found. + +As Garry prepared to repair the boat, he began to laugh at something +that seemed to be amusing him greatly. + +"Let us in on the joke," asked Phil. "You are grinning there to yourself +like a Cheshire cat." + +"I was just thinking that either Barrows is a fool or takes us for +brainless idiots. The idea of telling us that there was nothing in the +camp with which a boat could be calked, and there are only some hundreds +of square miles in the state just full of the finest thing in the world. +Nothing more than the pitch on the pine trees all around us." + +"I noticed it this morning when the manager remarked about it, but +thought it just as well to keep my knowledge to myself," remarked Dick. + +"All right, then, you fellows set to work with your knives and dig a lot +of those pitch lumps off the trees and then start a fire and melt it in +your drinking cup. It will spoil the cup, but we can easily get another +one," directed Garry. + +The boys immediately set about doing his bidding, and as they worked, +Garry got out his knapsack and proceeded to rummage through it for the +linen cord and the shoemaker's wax. Having found them, he set to work to +wax the cord thoroughly, making it less likely to shrink. Next he +examined the broken rib of the canoe, and determined how much of the +birch branch he would need to repair it. He took his knife and shaved a +long diagonal slant on the piece of rib in the canoe, then matched the +slant on the piece of branch. Having fixed them so they would fit, he +took a piece of fishing line and wound it carefully around the joint, +starting several inches above where the two pieces joined, and +continuing for several inches onto the firm wood beyond the spot where +the repair was made. This is called "splicing." Most boys have spliced a +fishing pole or a broken bat in much the same way. + +The rib having been spliced, the next step was the patching of the hole. +Garry got the birch bark, and laid it over the gaping rent in the bottom +of the craft, and marked a line around so that it overlapped the hole by +about four inches. The extra bark was then trimmed away, and he was +ready to sew it on. He took the awl blade of his knife and punched a +series of holes around, piercing both the patch and the bark of the +canoe. Having done this, he called for the hot pitch and poured it on +around the edge of the hole. Then he firmly laid the patch on, and as +the pitch cooled it formed a sort of a natural mucilage. Garry had +previously waxed one end of the cord so that it would be easy to stick +it through the holes, and working swiftly he threaded the cord in. When +the job was completed, he reversed his steps, so that the result was a +firmly sewn patch. + +Nothing else remained to do but to daub hot pitch liberally over the +seam on both sides, and calk the edges where the patch was attached to +the craft. + +"There," said Garry, as he stepped back and proudly surveyed his +handiwork. "That's a craft that will be as seaworthy, or rather as +lakeworthy, if there is such a word, as one could want." + +"Um, let me see," mused Dick aloud, as he looked over the canoe. +"There's one other quite necessary thing to be done." + +"Well, smarty, what is there to be done," asked Garry a trifle hotly. + +"I was just wondering whether we would rig up a sail or have you a gas +engine in your knapsack with which to make this gallant ship navigate?" +asked Dick as he burst into laughter, in which he was joined, first by +Phil, and a bit later by Garry, when he saw that the joke was on him. + +"Phil, you're the handy man with the knife, what say to a couple of +paddles?" asked Garry after the laughter had subsided. + +"Have 'em for you in an hour. That's quick work, however, and I won't +promise you a very handsome product." + +"We won't bother about looks as long as they will propel the canoe +through the water. That remark of Dick's about the sail, although it was +intended to be humorous, isn't such a bad idea either, only there is no +way that I can think of right now to make a sail. We'll browse around +the camp when we get back and see if we can dig up a bit of canvas and +make one of those lateen sails, you know those triangular shaped affairs +such as the boats in the Mediterranean use," said Garry. + +While he was talking, Phil had already set to work to make a pair of +paddles. "Now you chaps watch me, and after I have fixed one with the +axe, or as much as one can do with an axe blade, I'll get to work with +the knife," he said. + +Phil selected spruce about five inches in diameter and felled it to the +ground. + +"I hate to spoil a perfectly good tree, but in this case certainly +necessity knows no law." + +He chopped off two sections a little over five feet in length, and then +proceeded to hew one swiftly into a board. This took some little time, +despite the fact that he worked at top speed every moment. His last work +with the axe was to fashion very crudely the handle. + +"Now I am going to whittle just the top and a place where the hand will +come in contact with the neck or shaft of the paddle. To try and smooth +it up would take too long, and all that really needs to be smooth are +the places where we will have to hold it. If it was left rough we would +soon accumulate a crop of blisters. While I am whittling, you chaps can +fashion that other section into form as I did." + +After he had whittled enough, Phil sprang to his feet and said, "If I am +not mistaken, I saw an old bottle near the remains of a campfire, and +that will be just what I want." He sped away to where he had seen the +vestiges of some fisherman's fire, and soon found what he required. He +smashed this against a stone, and with the fragments scraped the spots +he had whittled smooth and free from lumps. + +The second paddle was not long in the making, but the entire job had +taken well over three hours. "We have about three hours before it is +time to eat, and we might as well put our canoe to the test, and see if +it works," announced Dick. + +"Time to eat! Don't you ever think of anything but eating?" demanded +Garry. + +"Yes, sir; when I'm not thinking about time to eat, I'm thinking about +what to eat," responded Dick promptly. + +"Say, Phil, he's hopeless. What say we make for that outlet at the far +end of the lake. We might just as well do that as anything, since we +have no real plan of action. Then tomorrow we can make a complete tour +of the lake, and thus get a comprehensive idea of the whole body of +water." + +The canoe was launched, and the boys climbed in. Garry and Phil elected +to paddle, leaving Dick to sit in the middle. + +"If that patch will hold Dick up, you can be sure it's a good job, +Garry," laughed Phil, as they pushed off. + +"So that was why you chaps were so kind as to do all the paddling. I'm +to be the happy little subject of the experiment. Well, if I get a +ducking there is some consolation in the fact that you two will follow +suit," said Dick good naturedly. + +Garry had done a fine bit of work, however, and the craft proved to be +all that they hoped it would. They made it dance through the water and +were delighted to find that they could make much better speed than in +the ordinary wooden canoe. The only thing necessary, however, was to +keep perfectly quiet, as the balance of a bark craft is a much more +precarious thing than that of a solid factory made canoe. + +It took them but a short time to reach the outlet, and they beached +their boat and started on a tour down the stream, which was a shallow, +weedy affair. + +Their early scout training, and their need of vigilance during their +patrolling of the woods when on duty as fire rangers had made their +powers of observation especially keen, and it was second nature almost +for them to note signs of trail that would be unseen by one unversed in +the lore of the woods and forests. + +They had walked about a quarter of a mile, when Phil's exclamation made +them pause. + +"There's fresh trail there, or I'm no good at sign reading any more," +remarked Phil. The boys gazed at the ground and quickly saw that Phil +was right. + +With no wasted words, they turned and followed the slightly outlined +trail. It took only a few minutes for them to reach a crude log shack, +one that had evidently been constructed early that summer, as the fresh +cut logs showed. + +The door swung loose on crude rope hinges, and after debating a moment +they decided to enter: They found practically nothing in the way of +furniture. There were no bunks, but a pile of boughs had been thrown in +each corner, and a rough table had been built in a corner of the hut. On +this reposed several dirty tin dishes. The remains of the food were +still fresh, showing that someone had eaten there within the past day or +so. + +"That means that they are apt to be back at any time, and so we'd better +light out. It may be some camper and it may be some enemy. I am inclined +to think it the latter, for a camper would have taken some pains to make +things just a little bit more comfortable," said Garry. "I think, +however, we will plan to keep watch of this place and see who happens to +occupy it." + +"Well, I can tell you right now that it is someone from the logging +camp. One of those who are mixed up in the trouble there. Look under +that table on the floor!" + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +DICK DISAPPEARS + + +The others bent forward curiously and gazed at the floor. There, laying +in a little mess of debris, as though it had slipped from the pocket of +some one who had been sitting at the table, was the knife with Dick's +name on it, that he had bought of the sidewalk merchant in Bangor! + +"Isn't that conclusive proof that it's someone from the camp?" demanded +Dick as he rescued the knife. + +"It surely is, and they are up to no good. Why should anyone from the +cutting have a place over here? It's a signal for us to get out and get +out quick. There's one good thing, though, we can set the hermit to +watching over here and leave ourselves free to go about other business. +We'll pace out the distances and draw a rough map and leave it in the +tree postoffice so that the old fellow can come over here and keep +watch," said Garry. + +Being careful to leave no traces of having been in the cabin, they +hastened outside. They had hardly gone two feet, though, when Dick +darted back. He rejoined his companions almost instantly, and answered +their puzzled stare with this explanation: + +"I've just sacrificed my good knife. The thought came to me that one of +them, the man who found it, might have remembered dropping it there, and +would at once know that someone had been in the cabin if it was +missing." + +"Good headwork, Dick," said Garry approvingly. + +They took it on the run back to where their canoe was beached, and soon +were on their way back across the lake. + +"I wish that we had more time without fear of interruption," said Garry, +"for it is likely that the occupants of the cabin have a canoe hidden +somewhere along the bank of the lake. Safest thing now, however, is to +get back to the other side of the lake, where we have an excuse for +being." + +"I am afraid that there will be little use in watching that cabin, +however, for it is quite probable that Barrows will warn those who are +living there that we are swimming and fishing around the lake, and +advise them to seek a new hiding place," observed Phil. + +"That's a fact," answered Garry. "Still, there's no harm in trying. It +was only by extreme carefulness in watching for signs that we discovered +that trail. It was probably the one that the men use to get water, and +the cabin is well hidden. One would not stumble on it casually in a long +time." + +It was sundown by this time, and they held a council to decide whether +they would camp there for the night or go back to the lumber camp. They +were all anxious to visit the big lake, however, and so it was decided +to return. + +"After the camp is quiet we can skip out and visit our other objective," +said Garry. + +Taking their fish out of the water, where they had been placed to keep +fresh, they trekked towards home. It was about dark when they reached +the camp, and about the first person they met was Barrows. He was all +curiosity to know how they had spent the day, and they returned +equivocal answers, being careful to make no mention of the canoe which +they had carefully hidden before starting away from the lake. + +The manager admired the fish, and thanked the boys for offering them to +provide breakfast on the coming day. Pleading their strenuous walk and +day as an excuse, they retired early to the shack. + +Here a campaign was speedily decided on. Dick was to go back to the +office and chat for a few moments, while the others slipped out of camp. +This would make it appear that they were in the neighborhood, and after +a reasonable time, Dick could return and retire for the night. + +Dick wandered back to the office to engage the manager in a talk about +fishing and the possibility of a long hike to extend over a week or +more, while Garry and Phil made for the lake. + +The tote road that had been made to transport the sawed lumber ran for a +short distance along the lakeside. Here there was a slightly wider place +made so that the tractors that met each other could pass with ease. The +ground was here covered with broken branches and debris of all sorts, +well tramped into the ground. Garry flashed his lamp about and searched +for signs of any sort, but seemed to find none. Then he went to the lake +edge and peered about. + +Some peculiar formation of rock made a sort of a ledge that stood about +three feet above the water. This ledge interested Garry immensely, but +he said nothing as he wanted more time to puzzle out the situation +before coming to any definite conclusions. At the point where the tote +road had been widened, there was a triple string of broad wheeled flat +cars loaded with lumber. + +"Now I wonder why these cars were left here," asked Phil. + +"That's easy. The drivers knock off work at a regular hour, and when +that time comes, if they have not gone very far on their trip, they +simply come back to the camp and wait until morning. That is to prevent +accidents which running in the dark might bring about," said Garry. + +"Hush, what's that?" asked Phil. Both boys listened intently. Far off +across the lake they heard a faint chugging noise. Sometimes it seemed +to cease altogether, then as the breeze stirred they could hear it, +getting fainter and fainter. + +"Phil, I've discovered the secret of the stolen timber or I'm a +Chinaman. That noise solves the whole proposition. That sound that we +heard is the engine of a powerful motor boat. And Barrows insisted that +there was no kind of water transportation on either lake. Now why should +he lie about it unless he had some ulterior motive in covering up the +presence of a boat? This is the answer or I'll return from our mission +and tell Dad I'm not bright enough to solve the mystery." + +"What have you doped out," asked Phil, as Garry paused for a moment. + +"Just this. I'll bet you a dollar to a doughnut that the drivers that +are in on this timber stealing business have it so arranged that there +is always a load of cars waiting here overnight. That's step number one. +Now we have a rock formation here that makes a perfectly good wharf. +Next you have noticed that all the chips and bits of broken branches +strewn between the turnout here and that strip of rock. That's just to +hide the footprints that are made by the thieves. So far so good. How +does this strike you? That motor boat that we heard is a big one, at +least it had immense pulling strength. I know enough about engines to +tell from the sound how good they are. That boat is probably used to +draw a raft across the lake. Just after midnight, or some safe time +during the dark hours, a raft can be backed against that natural wharf +there, and in half an hour enough lumber can be carried from the flat +cars to the raft to make it a profitable night's work. Why, the whole +thing is as plain as a pikestaff. Phil, we've got everything nearly dead +to rights now!" + +"What's the next step then, old timer? Shall we hike out and write, or +wire your father to come on so we can show him what's going on?" +questioned Phil. + +"Not yet a bit, there's still something else we must find out. Is this a +part of the treachery to ruin Dad's enterprise here, or is it a private +bit of work on the part of Barrows?" + +"How's this for a guess? The people that are behind Barrows, meaning +those that have bribed him to play false to the trust your father put in +him, may have outlined this whole scheme, and offered to give Barrows as +his pay what he can make off the stolen timber. At the rate that it has +been disappearing, one-fifth and one-quarter at a time, as the report +that Howells received would show, and at the price which lumber is +bringing today, that would be pretty good pay for one summer. Chances +are that the interests that are opposing Mr. Boone are paying all the +expenses. Their only idea is to put him out of business for breaking up +their combination and going into business on his own hook. If that's the +kind of men they are, I don't blame your father for getting out of the +combination." + +"I think you have the right idea, Phil. My, I wish we had our canoe over +here. We could paddle across the lake and investigate the other side and +see what is done with the timber once it is rafted over the water," said +Garry. + +"No use in wishing. Best thing we can do is hike for home and turn in. +Then tomorrow we can make arrangements to go on, say a three day hike. +We can portage the canoe across country, and hide out along the bank +until nightfall. The moon is in its last quarter now, and by night after +tomorrow it will be dark. We can paddle out well into the lake and wait +for what transpires. When we hear the raft and motor boat coming we can +paddle far enough to be unobserved and then follow it by sound. The boat +will probably travel without lights for two reasons. First, it is safe +enough as there is probably no other craft on the lake, and secondly, +they will not want to attract any undue attention. Then we can note the +spot where the raft docks, and in the morning can follow it to whatever +rail spur the stuff is taken. With what help Howells may be able to give +us on the outside, we ought to have the thing pretty well in hand. What +do you think of my suggestion?" asked Phil almost breathlessly, as he +concluded. + +"Phew, that's the longest speech I ever heard you make, Phil, but you +sure said something every minute. That's what we'll do. Now let's get +back." + +The whole occurrence had taken less than an hour and a half, and when +they reached the camp they noted that a light was still burning in the +manager's office. On arriving at their shack they were somewhat +surprised to find that Dick was not there. + +"He's doing a good job," laughed Garry. "Either he is really interested +in what Barrows has to say, or he is playing to give us time to do what +we wanted to. Well, he can stay there all night if he wants to, I'm +going to roll into my blanket and dream sweet dreams. Dick's a night +hawk anyway most of the time. Goodnight." And Garry yawned and soon was +fast asleep. Later development will show that it would have been wise on +the part of the boys to look in on the manager at that time. Had they +done so, their work would have been greatly simplified. However, they +were not mind readers and so days of trouble were in store for them. + +Morning came, and when Garry, always the first one to awake, tumbled out +of bed, he cast one look at Dick's bunk, and then rushing over to the +other side of the shack, vigorously shook Phil. + +"What's the matter?" demanded Phil in a startled voice, sitting upright +in his bunk. "Anything the trouble?" + +"That's what I cannot tell you right this minute, Phil, but Dick hasn't +been here all night!" + +Phil leaped out of his bunk and looked at the spot where their companion +usually slept. The blankets were still neatly in place, and it needed +only a glance to see that no one had used it that night. + +The boys hurried into their clothes and rushed to the office building +where Barrows and the camp officers slept. No one was stirring, and +Garry was about to pound on the door when he saw the cookee coming from +the cookhouse with a pail in each hand for the morning cooking water. + +Garry called to him and asked if he had seen Dick that morning. + +"Naw," was the grouchy answer. "Why should I have seen him? I don't know +anything about him." + +The sound of the voices awakened Barrows and he came and stuck his head +out of the window. + +"What's the matter?" he asked. + +"Why, Dick hasn't been around all night, and we were looking for him. +Have you seen him since last night?" asked Garry. + +"I haven't seen him since the three of you went to your shack last +night!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +THE CIPHER + + +The boys were dumbfounded by Barrows' answer. + +"What's that you say?" demanded Garry. + +"I said I had not seen him since the three of you went to your shack +last night to turn in. Isn't that plain enough?" reiterated the manager. + +"Well, all we know is that just after we got to the shack, Dick left to +come back here and have a chat with you and get some information about +the country, as we had some little thought of taking a week's hike up +into the wild lands that lie to the northwest." + +"If he started for this office he never got here, for I sat up late +trying to straighten out the tangle that Howells left behind him. No one +came near the office all that time. Perhaps your chum has gone off on +some little private expedition." + +Garry was quick to notice that there was a malicious ring in the +manager's voice. At once the uncomfortable feeling overcame him that +their night's work had been discovered. Garry was at a loss what course +to pursue. He could make no accusation of any kind, for Dick might have +stumbled on some clue that took him off on the trail. + +"Well, you can understand that we are a little bit worried over the +matter, especially since this is strange country to Dick. He might have +wandered into the woods and got lost." Garry knew that this was next to +impossible, but he could think of nothing better to say at the moment. + +"My advice is that you wait a bit, and you will probably find that he is +all right. He'll very likely show up in a little while. I wouldn't +worry," said Barrows. + +There was nothing to do for the moment but take the manager's advice, +and the boys returned to the shack. + +"Phil, there's bad business afoot here somewhere. At such a time as +this, Dick would not have gone off to follow a clue without leaving us +some sort of a note or even a sign. He could leave a half a dozen +different signs that we all know to denote trouble. He hasn't taken +anything with him. His rifle is still there and so is his pack. If it +were some mission of danger that he had gone on he would at least have +taken his rifle. Now what shall we do?" + +"Let's give him till noon in case it was such a hurried matter that he +had not time to run back for his rifle. We might even wait until six +o'clock. You know we have always made it a rule that we should never be +gone more than twenty-four hours on a search without letting the others +know in some way that we are safe. Sundown tonight would not be exactly +twenty-four hours, but it would be near enough," advised Phil. Garry +agreed that this was sound advice and they went off to breakfast. They +found Barrows was almost through. + +"Why don't you fellows start out this morning and look for him? One of +you could go in one direction and one in the other. If you know anything +of the woods, you could soon find signs of him if he were wandering +about," suggested Barrows. + +Garry told him that they had decided to wait until nightfall before +getting really worried. At this the manager allowed a satisfied gleam to +show in his eyes. Both the boys were narrowly watching him, and noted +this. After breakfast they came back to the shack, and once safe inside, +Garry whispered to Phil: + +"Watch every move from now on. That business of Barrows telling us to go +in different directions on such a wild goose chase was entirely too +obvious. He wants us to get separated. Keep your rifle close by you +every minute, and tonight we'll establish a watch same as we have done +in the woods when there was danger near. First thing this morning is to +go to the spot where we agreed to leave notes for the hermit, and leave +a letter telling him what has happened and asking him to take a look at +the shack on the other side of Kanamo Lake." + +Hastily writing the note, and watching that they were not followed they +slipped out of the camp and ran to the appointed postoffice. + +Garry reached his hand in as a matter of course, and was surprised to +find that there was a note in the natural receptacle. + +He brought it out, and with Phil leaning over his shoulder, read it. It +contained a distinct shock for both. Here was what they read: + +"Attacked by men and letter to your father stolen. Hit on head and left +lying in road. Use all caution. The Bear is in the woods." + +The usual lone pine symbol was attached. + +"Well, we are discovered, Garry," said Phil. "Barrows must have had the +hermit followed and has read the letter. I wouldn't be a bit surprised +if he knew what we talked about last night. Question now is whether he +was instrumental in bringing about Dick's absence." + +"I am afraid that we have sort of made a mess of things, Phil. We +haven't given Barrows enough credit, or else we have been too sure of +ourselves. There is a good chance, however, and this note makes me think +it highly likely that Jean LeBlanc may have captured Dick again. You +know he seems determined to do him harm, even more so than us, for he +and Dick have tangled up three or four times now, and each time Dick has +managed to elude him and make more or less of a fool of him. This +naturally would make an even more implacable enemy of the vengeful +halfbreed. Let's get back to camp and wait awhile. We will pry about the +entire camp to see if there is any sign of Dick, and also we will be +safer for the time being. Don't think I am cowardly, only we want to +take no chances if we are to help Dick and at the same time complete our +mission here." + +They returned to the camp, and as they walked, Garry tore the hermit's +note into tiny, indistinguishable fragments, throwing each tiny particle +to the winds. + +The day dragged on, although they tried to make it pass quickly by +searching through the camp. Night came at last, and they turned in. +Before retiring they arranged for alternate watches, and also decided +that on the morrow they would insist that a message be sent for Mr. +Boone. The boys had almost decided that rather than allow Dick to fall +into greater danger by protracting the time of a systematic search, they +would tell what they had learned to Mr. Boone and let him force the +issue of the stolen timber. + +It was nearly eleven o'clock and Phil, who was on watch, was about to +wake Garry for his turn at sentry duty, when he heard a cautious +fumbling at the door, and the sound of a low malediction when the +intruder found that it was locked. There was silence for a moment, and +then Phil heard the sound of someone breathing heavily at the window. He +crept noiselessly to Garry's bunk, and holding his hand over his chum's +mouth lest he make a sudden noise, shook him awake. Garry was aroused in +an instant, and all sleep vanished. He knew from feeling Phil's hands +against his mouth that caution was needed. + +Having roused Garry, Phil crept back to the window just in time to hear +a faint swish. Instantly he knew that the intruder was cutting the +double thickness of heavy mosquito bar with a knife, and guided by the +sound, clubbed his rifle and brought it down with full force. There was +a howl of pain, and the sound of someone running away at top speed. + +"Must have clipped that chap either on the head or the hand," whispered +Phil. "Guess he won't be here again tonight." + +"Looks as though the war was on. You roll in and I'll watch for a couple +of hours now. Good thing we used our old trick of sentry work, or we +might be in a bad position right now," answered Garry. + +For another hour nothing happened. Then there was a pounding at the door +and Barrows' voice was heard calling the names of Garry and Phil. +Suspecting a trick, both boys reached for their rifles, and after +lighting a candle, Garry covered the door with his rifle while Phil +opened it. + +Barrows stepped in and seemed to be taken back by the sight of the rifle +leveled at his head. + +"Why the military greeting?" he asked with an attempt at good humor. + +"Taking no chances," answered Garry briefly, for he had a feeling that +it was almost time to tear the mask away. "We had one visitor here +tonight, and we didn't know what to expect." + +Garry explained his statement about the visitor by briefly telling of +the attempt that had been made to enter the cabin an hour previously. +Barrows passed this off by offering the suggestion that some of the +lumbermen were naturally ruffians, and might have wanted to commit +burglary. + +"What I woke you up for was to tell you that a man has come here with a +note that he refuses to deliver to anyone but you boys. He's at my +office now, and all he will say is that your friend Dick's safety +depends on obeying what is in the note. Of course I could have summoned +some of the men and had him overpowered, but thought you boys might like +to handle the matter for yourselves." + +The boys put on their shoes and coats, for they had gone to bed almost +fully dressed, and prepared to follow Barrows. + +"Careful now," whispered Garry, as he passed Phil. + +There seemed to be little need for caution, however, for they were +unmolested on their way. At the office they found an unkempt dirty +looking individual. + +"Be these the boys," he asked of Barrows, pointing a dirty finger at +Garry and Phil. + +"Yes, these are the ones. Now state your business and do it quick," +snapped Barrows. + +"This letter tells the hull story," answered the man in a hoarse voice, +and he handed a crumpled piece of paper to Garry. + +The leader of the Rangers took the note and read it in silence, then +handed it over to Phil. + +What they read was this: + + "Have been captured by Jean LeBlanc. Have been forced to write this + letter to you. LeBlanc wants a thousand dollars for my freedom. You + are either to bring it with you, or make arrangements for its + delivery at a spot known to the bearer of this letter. Warn you that + any attempt to molest bearer will result in serious injury or worse + to me. You know I would not ask this unless I were in grave peril. + Don't fail me. Follow bearer's directions. + + "Being emergency will ask ransom emphatically. + + "Dick Wallace." + +"That's Dick's writing, sure enough. He must have been tortured into +writing that letter, else he would never have done it," said Garry +between his teeth. "Now Barrows, the time has come for a showdown. What +do you know about this matter? Speak up, and speak up quick!" + +"What should I know about it. I don't know what's in the letter about +your friend," answered Barrows taken back by the tone of Garry's grim +voice. + +"How do you know it's about our friend?" demanded Garry quick as a +flash. + +"Why, the bearer here told me that it had to do with one of the three +boys who were staying here," answered Barrows weakly. + +"I think you're lying, Barrows, but I can't prove it. Here, read the +letter." + +He handed the crumpled note over to the manager, who took it and read it +in silence. Then he burst into a protest. + +"I never heard of this Jean LeBlanc. Why do you connect me with the +matter? I never even heard the name LeBlanc." + +"You had a Baptiste LeBlanc working for you until Howells insisted that +he be discharged, didn't you?" continued Garry implacably. + +"Why, there may have been a man of that name. I remember Howells +insisting that a man be discharged, but I never pay much attention to +the names of the lumberjacks, at least to their last names. I leave that +to the timekeeper and the section bosses. You misunderstand me entirely. +I am ready to give you all my help. What do you propose to do?" + +"First place I am going to start back with this man here and look into +the matter. Of course we have no money to take with us, but I am going +to be assured that Dick is safe. You will get the necessary ransom from +the bank at town, and thirty-six hours from now you will start with it +to some place where this man will appoint. We will be there at the time +with Dick. In the meantime telegraph my father to get here with all +speed. Now, Barrows, I'm putting this matter up to you. If you fail in +any way it will be so much the worse for you. I'm trusting you only +because I have to in an emergency. Don't fall down, or we'll make you +the sorriest man you could ever dream of being. Phil, keep these men +covered with your rifle until I go back and get our packs. Don't let +them stir out of your sight or move a finger." + +Garry concluded his words, and tearing a leaf from his notebook, wrote +hastily for several moments, then left the cabin. Barrows made as though +he would follow, but a menacing gesture from Phil made him keep his +seat. + +Once outside the cabin, Garry sped away into the woods like a deer. He +was extremely cautious with every step, however, lest a snag or root +trip him and disable him at this crucial moment. The note that he had +written contained explicit directions to the hermit to get word to Mr. +Boone by telegraph, and then see if he could pick up their trail and +follow them. He knew the old man was an expert at trailing, and Garry +wrote that he would leave signs on the way from the hollow tree +postoffice. + +The return to the camp was somewhat slower, for he stopped occasionally +to blaze an X in a tree, or dig a slight hole in the ground with his +toe. He wished that he had time to make a more distinct trail, but there +was the danger that a plain one might be noted by one of Barrows' aides, +and obliterated. He was trusting that the hermit could find it, versed +as he was in all the lore of the woods. + +Back at the office with his knapsack and that of Phil, he asked what had +transpired while he was gone. Phil told him that a meeting place had +been agreed on. + +"Now," said Garry sharply, "can you lead us where you came from in the +dark?" + +"Guess I can, came here in the dark," was the surly response of the +guide. + +"Then start travelling. Now, Barrows, first sign of any treachery from +anyone in the camp will mean that first I'll shoot this guide and second +anyone within range of my rifle. Now hike," this last remark being +addressed to the man. + +Out of the camp toward the northeast led the way, and as they walked +Indian file, they took every step as though it were a path strewn with +glass. Once outside the camp, having been bothered by no one, Garry +called a halt. + +Keeping a sharp eye on the guide, Garry whispered to Phil: + +"Notice anything funny about that note of Dick's?" + +"Not particularly, except that I took exceptional care to be sure that +it was Dick's writing," answered Phil. + +"Did you remember the last line?" he questioned further. + +"I think I could repeat it over by heart." + +"Then use your head and look for the very obvious code in the last six +words," said Garry. + +Phil repeated them aloud two or three times, then fell silent. Then he +gave vent to a low exclamation. + +"Why, it's as plain as the nose on your face. It's just the first +initials and they spell Beware!" + +"Exactly; that's step number one. Now the second thing is the note +itself. It was written on brown paper. Safe thing to write such a letter +on, anyone might have it in his possession. The queer part is that on +the shelf high over Barrows' desk was a bundle of report blanks wrapped +in the same identical kind of paper, only the wrapper was torn. I +couldn't think of any way to clear the office, but I bet I could have +matched this scrap to the torn place in the report!" + +"Then you think that Dick has been at the camp all the time?" queried +Phil half incredulously. + +"Don't think it, I'm sure of it." + +"What are we to do, then?" asked Phil. + +"I have that all doped out. We'll let this chap lead us a couple of +miles or so further on and then overpower him and tie him up and leave +him there while we double back and search the camp." + +Garry gave the order to march again, and they started on their way. Had +Garry been gifted with second sight, he would never have left the spot +where they had held the conference, for they had gone only a short +distance when the guide asked them to halt. + +"What's it worth to you fellows if I tell you all about this business? +You ain't going to meet your friend where I'm taking you; it was just to +get you away from the camp that I led you out here. But you can't make +me tell anything, or LeBlanc would kill me. But I'll take a chance for +money." + +This sudden development puzzled Garry. He did not know exactly what to +make of it, so he decided to temporize for a few minutes, and gain time +to think. + +"Where is LeBlanc now?" he asked. + +"Right there at the camp was where I last saw him." + +The answer was such a surprise that Garry's guard was lowered for a +moment, then there was a scurry and rush of feet, and a half a dozen +forms leaped out from behind the trees near them, and before either boy +could make a move with his rifle, they were in the hands of the enemy. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +DICK'S MISFORTUNE + + +Now what of Dick all this time? Let us go back to the night when Garry +and Phil had started for the Dutton Lake to see what could be found out +about the stolen timber. + +Barrows, of course, had not told the truth when he said that he had not +seen Dick after they had gone to their shack. + +He had come into the office as had been agreed upon, and engaged Barrows +in conversation about fishing. Barrows had chatted cordially for a brief +while, and then excused himself for a moment to give orders to one of +the section bosses whom he heard outside. + +Dick heard him give the order to work on the coming day, delivered in a +loud tone of voice, and almost instantly after the close of the +conversation he came into the office again. + +The conversation was picked up where they had left off, and they chatted +like old friends for nearly a half an hour. + +Finally, Dick heard the cookie calling for Barrows to come out a moment, +and Barrows obeyed the summons. Knowing that the cookie was suspected of +being in league with the traitors in the camp, Dick walked softly to the +door and tried to hear what was being said, but as they were several +feet from the entrance to the office, and speaking in the most cautious +whispers, he could distinguish nothing that was being said. Suddenly the +cookie darted away, and Barrows re-entered the cabin and stood leaning +against the door. + +"Speaking about fish," he remarked, looking malevolently at Dick, "they +are foolish things since they always take bait. Now did you three boys +take me for a fool entirely, and did you think that I would take any +bait that was offered me? I know every move you made since you have been +here, including your letter to Boone. Why, you poor, useless boy, I am +playing for too big stakes here to let a pack of mere children balk me. +Your work was clever if it had been against an ignorant man, but you're +done now." + +Dick's heart sank. He knew that a cog had slipped somewhere. They had +been too sure of themselves. Barrows kept on talking in the same strain +until Dick began to realize that he was merely talking against time. He +rose to his feet and prepared to make a dash for the door, but +realization came too late, for the door was thrown open and in stepped +the arch enemy of the boys, Jean LeBlanc. + +"So, mon ami, we meet again. This is a mos' pleasant meeting, but you +are not to escape so easily this time." + +There was hatred in the halfbreed's voice and in his eyes. Dick shivered +inwardly, although he let no sign of fear be shown in his face or +actions. + +"All the better to have you here this time, LeBlanc, you just walk into +our hands; and this time you will see the inside of a jail for sure," +said Dick boldly. + +LeBlanc's face darkened with rage. He made as though to reach for the +knife that hung in his belt, but Barrows stopped him. + +"That will do, LeBlanc, I'll handle this matter in my own way. Remember +you're working for me, and you do as I say or get out, and I'll find +another man for the job." + +Dick was astonished at the way LeBlanc subsided. Evidently Barrows was a +much braver man than they had given him credit for being; at any rate, +he seemed to be the absolute master of the halfbreed. + +"Yes, ma frien', you are the boss, but perhaps another time, when I am +not working for you, I will take care of this one. Now what we do with +him." + +"We will put him in the cellar under the storehouse for the present, +then when we have captured his friends, we will have them taken to +Misery Camp." + +"Taking the others will be an easy matter, will it not? We shall just +surround them like that and take them," and he snapped his fingers with +a derisive gesture. + +"That's just what we won't do. Why do you suppose I am going to the +trouble of all this secrecy for? If it had been merely a matter of +capturing them, it would have been done long ago. But they have been on +their guard most of the time, and this camp is full of lumberjacks that +worked for old man Boone. If they got wise to anything, they would have +me strung up to a tree in no time, and one of the worst riots in the +history of the lumber business would have been pulled off in this camp. +No, sir, I am saving my skin." + +"Why not get rid of those who would help them?" inquired Jean. + +"I am, just as fast as I can. Everything was all right till these boys +showed up to play amateur detective. Now we must make a grand cleanup +and work fast. Things are getting too hot." + +"I, Jean LeBlanc, am giving you warning. The bes' thing to do is to slip +a knife in a place where it would do the most good. Every time they have +cross my path, they have won, and Jean LeBlanc is not one who is easily +beaten in anything." + +"Bah, you make me tired, LeBlanc. They may have had a little luck and a +lot of help, or else you didn't know how to do your work. I'm here to +tell you that Gene Barrows will not be fooled." + +Dick had been sitting silently all this time, drinking in the +conversation of the two men. They seemed not to be noticing him, and in +a desperate attempt to make his escape, he darted for the door and +succeeded in getting outside. But his triumph was short lived, for he +had no more than attained the outside air, when he was seized by an iron +grip by two men, and hauled ignominiously back into the office. He saw +at once that his captors were LeBlanc's brother, Baptiste, and the +unknown chap who had been implicated with Baptiste in the attack on +Howells. + +Dick reddened with rage at the laughter of his enemies, and vowed to +himself that somehow, somewhere, he would pay them for their taunts. + +"Come, we are wasting time; the others may be back from their little +spying expedition at any moment. Grab him, you two," directed Barrows. +Baptiste and the unknown, whose name Dick later learned was Fearon, +seized him in no gentle grasp. One of them clasped a hard, dirty hand +over his mouth to prevent any outcry, and they walked him across the +camp to the storehouse. + +Barrows produced the key and threw open the door. Once inside, the door +was carefully closed, and Barrows produced a candle which he lighted. +Dick was searched and his knife and matches were taken away. + +Two heavy molasses barrels were rolled away, disclosing a trap in the +floor. This was raised and a rude ladder was seen to lead below. Dick +was mercilessly bundled down the hole, little care being taken as to +whether or not he broke his neck as he slipped down the damp ladder. + +Then he heard the clatter of the trap door as it fell, and he was left +alone in the dark. + +Once before Dick had been in a tight hole, and the lack of knife and +matches had almost been his undoing. Thereafter he had guarded against +this happening again. To this end he had contrived a secret pocket in +the lapel of his coat, where a knife always reposed. Also inside of the +sweatband of his hat were several matches rolled tightly in waterproof +silk. + +He got out the matches, and lighting one, looked about him. He surveyed +the room with a quick glance, for the matches were too precious to use +too many of them. His quick survey showed that the underground room was +bare of any furnishing; there was not even a blanket to sleep on. He +lighted a second match and inspected the floor, discovering that both +floor and walls were constructed of hand-hewed logs, and knew that it +would take a week to dig through them with nothing but a pocket knife +with which to work. + +The underground room was damp and musty, and Dick shivered. + +He wondered how long it would be before they took him out, and he began +to do calisthenics vigorously to restore some warmth to his already +chilled body. + +For a time he thought of crawling up the ladder and trying out his knife +on the trap door, but he had noted that it was of triple thickness of +inch boards and would probably blunt and dull his knife without making +any great impression. + +There was one hope that someone might come into the storehouse above and +he could rap on the door and let them know he was a prisoner there. + +After some moments of reflection, he decided that this would also be +unavailing, for the cook must also be one of the traitors. It was not +possible that he would be unaware of the secret room, and was in all +probability a member of the gang. + +Dick was a healthy boy, and soon his eyes grew drowsy with sleep. He +laid himself down on the hard floor, and as soon as his bones got +accustomed to the floor, dropped off to sleep, sensibly refusing to +worry and letting the morrow bring what it would. + +His last thought as he fell asleep was the hope that his companions +would not fall into a trap as he had, although he half expected that he +would be awakened any moment by the sound of the trap door opening, and +the entry of his chums as prisoners. + +But when he awoke in the morning, he found that he was still alone. He +unscrewed the cover of his watch face, and felt the hands, finding that +it was nearly eight o'clock. So far no one had come, and he wondered if +he was to be given anything to eat. Two weary hours dragged on, and then +the trap was opened, and a pack of food lowered to him, together with a +pail of coffee. He looked up and saw the cook and cookee peering down at +him. Evidently they were going to take no chances of a surprise on his +part, hence their coming in pairs. + +Dick called to them to ask when he was to be taken out, but they had +evidently been instructed to hold no words with him, for they quickly +lowered the trap and the barrels were again rolled into place. Dick's +last sight as the trap closed was the leering face of the cookee. He +managed to eat his food in the dark, and resolved to ask for a blanket +when next they came to bring him food. + +The day dragged as though on leaden feet, but no one appeared again. +Dick thought that dinner would be brought to him, but none came, and he +figured that perhaps there were too many watchers who would be +inquisitive if they saw cooked food being carried to the storehouse. +Perhaps Garry and Phil were on the watch. This gave Dick a thrill, for +if his thoughts were true it meant that they had not been trapped in any +way. + +Frequently he unscrewed the face of his watch and felt the hands to note +the time. He resolved that his first step when he got back to +civilization would be to buy a watch that had a radium dial so he could +tell time in the dark. + +Dick had no idea but that he would get out, for he was one whose courage +did not fail. Then, too, he trusted in the cleverness of his companions +to get him out of the scrape. + +He was squatting on the floor Hindu fashion, about eleven o'clock, +thinking that he would soon lie down and try to get some sleep, when the +trap was opened, and Barrows' voice bade him come up the ladder. + +He obeyed only too gladly, for the darkness and the chill of the cellar +were beginning to get his nerve. In the storehouse he found that Barrows +was accompanied by the LeBlanc brothers. This made any chance of a rough +and tumble fight with the manager and possible dash for freedom out of +the question. + +"Now there will be no fooling on your part, but you will sit down at +this case here and write a note to your friends telling them that you +have been captured by LeBlanc and are being held for ransom. That will +please them, eh, Jean?" + +LeBlanc gave a wolfish grin. "At least it make them hurry to rescue +their friend. They do not like me, those boys, any more than I like +them." + +"Suppose I refuse to write that note, what then?" demanded Dick. + +"Why, I think we will let LeBlanc handle that end of it," said Barrows. + +Jean LeBlanc's face wore a diabolic smile as he took from his mouth the +big-bowled pipe that he was smoking. + +"Once I saw an Indian torture a man to get from him a secret," he said. +"It was oh, so easy. All that he did was to thrust the man's fingers, +one by one, into the pipe bowl, and after the fifth finger, the man gave +in." + +Dick shuddered in spite of himself. He had heard of this Indian method +of torture, and knew that LeBlanc was not only capable of doing it, but +would take a fiendish pleasure in the operation. + +"Then if that fails, which I doubt, I give you warning that your chums +will be seized on some pretext and sent out seemingly to jail with +LeBlanc as their guard, and once away from the camp, will be given to +him to do as he pleases," said Barrows. "Now do you think you will write +that letter?" + +Dick had resolved on submitting to the torture before writing the +letter, but this last threat made him change his mind. He could afford +to take no chances with the safety, and perhaps the lives, of his chums, +by refusing to write. In the meantime his mind was busy trying to +conjure up some way of warning them that it was a trap. + +He took the scrap of paper that was offered to him, and began to write. +As the letter drew near its close, he hastily constructed the cryptogram +which our readers are already aware of. + +Barrows took the note and read it carefully, turning it over to see that +there was not other writing on the back, and scanning it for some sign +of warning. Dick was afraid that he would decipher the simple code, but +was relieved when Barrows crumpled the note to give it the appearance of +having been carried some few hours, and then put it in his pocket. + +He was ordered back into the cellar, and there was nothing to do but +obey. The trap was closed and he heard the rolling of barrels, then all +was still. + +Dick wondered what plot was in the wind, but was unable to puzzle it +out. He finally decided that it was only another private scheme of +Barrows to get money, and a thousand dollars would be a pretty good +haul. + +He gave up trying to solve the riddle, and lying on the floor stared +into the darkness. + +There was one chance in a thousand that one of them might come alone in +the morning to bring him food, and he resolved to climb up the ladder +the moment he heard footsteps above him, and with his pocket knife try +to fight his way to freedom. + +With this comforting thought, he dropped off to sleep. + +Following the writing of the note, Barrows slipped back to his office +and told LeBlanc to make one attempt to seize the boys, then if that +failed, they would use their ruse to attract them from the camp. + +How this attempt succeeded has already been told, and all LeBlanc got +for his pains was a smash on the hand where Phil's clubbed rifle had hit +him. + +He hastened back cursing, and told Barrows of the failure, and after +being upbraided was told to go to the rendezvous where the capture of +the boys was to be made. + +Barrows then went to the cookhouse, where the unkempt individual that +was to act as bearer was waiting, and gave him his final instructions. + +"Now," said the vindictive manager, "we shall see who wins, a pack of +mere children, or Gene Barrows!" + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +MISERY CAMP + + +Now let us return to Garry and Phil, whom we left struggling in the +hands of their captors. Only one voice did they recognize in the orders +that were given, but this was enough to let them know that they were in +the worst kind of trouble. It was the voice of LeBlanc. + +"Phil, that's LeBlanc's voice or I'm crazy," ejaculated Garry. + +"Absolutement, ma frien's. It is LeBlanc. Once again I have you, and I +think this time you do not go until we have settled several old scores +that I have mark up against you." + +As he spoke, several men took hold of the boys even more roughly, and in +a few moments their hands had been bound tightly behind their backs. + +LeBlanc gave the order to march, and the strange procession wended its +way through the woods. It was almost pitch dark, but they seemed to be +following a well defined trail, and the leader was sure of every step. +An unknown man grasped the arm of each boy and guided them so that they +would not bump into a tree, and at the same time prevented a chance of +escape. + +The boys took things philosophically, for there was nothing that could +be done with so many odds against them, and the darkness would have +hindered any chance of flight. They knew that they could not take more +than a dozen steps without smashing into the trees, and would soon be +captured. They resolved, the same train of thought running through the +minds of both of the captives, to wait for daylight before sizing +matters up. + +LeBlanc kept hurrying the men along, and they covered nearly a half a +dozen miles before a halt was called. Now the first flush of day was +appearing in the sky, and soon there would be light enough for them to +see in what manner of hands they had fallen. + +When dawn finally broke, both boys looked in amazement at the strange +figures that the light of day revealed. + +LeBlanc, of course, they recognized at once, and they had half expected +to see his brother. But all the others,--there were half a dozen not +counting the halfbreed,--were total strangers. The men were for the most +part large and swarthy, unkempt of hair and ragged as to clothes. Their +garments were torn and dirty, and here and there was a raggedly sewn +patch where the clothes threatened to give way entirely. + +They were taciturn men, and said little or nothing to each other, and +when they did, it was in a low tone. They paid absolutely no attention +to any order of LeBlanc, always turning to one of their number for +confirmation. + +This man, evidently the leader, was a perfect giant of a man. He stood, +so the boys judged, at least six feet four inches, and was +correspondingly large of frame. + +His face, what could be seen of it, for he wore a black, flowing, +tangled beard, was tanned by the sun, as one who lived entirely in the +open. His followers evidently respected, or at least feared him, for +whenever he gave an order, they sprang to do his bidding. + +Garry and Phil wondered who they were and what their business +was,--whether they were hunters or what. + +A fire was built and a meagre breakfast made. Phil and Garry were glad +of the food, for they were both hungry and tired. The eating done, +evident preparations were made to continue the march. Both boys were +cruelly tired. They had passed a strenuous day and night, and now they +wanted to sleep. But this was evidently not to be. + +They were slightly surprised also when they learned from the +conversation that LeBlanc was not to continue to the destination of the +others. + +"Now, King, you will take these boys to Misery Camp, and keep them until +you hear from those who have given you instructions. They will let you +know what to do, and you will be ver' careful not to let them make the +conge, to get away, for then you will have me, Jean LeBlanc, to deal +with." + +"I'll keep my bargain, fer the fact that I give my word, an' a King +allers keeps his word; but never think that I fear ye, Frenchman, fer I +fear no man livin'!" + +LeBlanc kept silence, and took his way back to the camp, while the weary +march forward was resumed. Short rests were given at long intervals and +the boys were thankful for the scant few minutes that were allowed. + +The men walked with the long swinging lope of the true woodsman, and +often the boys thought they would drop by the side of the road from +weariness. + +At noon a halt was called, and one of the men disappeared, to return +after several minutes with a half dozen grouse. The boys then knew +immediately that these men were outlaws of some sort, who paid no +attention to the law, for the close season was on all grouse and +pheasant. + +A fire was built and one of the men skinned the birds preparatory to +roasting them over the coals. Coffee was made and they were about to +drink it black, when Garry bethought himself of the sugar and condensed +milk in his knapsack. Thinking that a few favors on his part would +perhaps return to them later on, he offered it to the men. The boy's +hands were untied, and he rummaged through his pack until he found the +articles. + +The men took them without a word and used them. They divided the food +fairly with all present. + +Garry tried to engage the men in conversation, but all attempts failed. +The rest and the dinner occupied about an hour and then the march began +again. + +"See here," said Garry to the man addressed as King. "When are you going +to give us a decent rest? We're played out." + +"Well, you can be played out ef you want; you've got eight miles ahead +of you yet till we get to Misery Camp," answered King. + +"What is Misery Camp, and who are you fellows anyway?" again asked +Garry. + +"Misery Camp is where we live, and we fellows be squatters. Now shut up +and walk," and King relapsed into silence. + +Light instantly broke over the boys. They had often heard of the +squatters scattered over the woods of Maine, queer nomadic people, who +gleaned a precarious and lean living from the woods. Game and fish laws +meant nothing to them. Birds of all sorts were shot, and woe be unto the +deer that ran across the path of the squatter. Some little cultivation +was carried on, in the way of corn and potatoes. + +Wearily they trudged on. The last mile was almost agony to Phil and +Garry, but they clenched their teeth and carried on, determined if +possible to show no sign of weakening in front of these strange +creatures of the woods. + +At last Misery Camp was sighted. It was a patch of land that had been +cleared away, evidently the logs that were cut being used to make the +habitations of the squatters. A score of ragged children and some +slatternly women came out to meet them, looking curiously at the boys. +They were thrust into one of the cabins, and a guard established at the +door. + +The weary boys dropped on the rude pallets and fell asleep almost +instantly. So tired were they that it was the following morning before +they awoke. They stretched their arms and legs, and then tried to open +the door. The guard let them out, and warned them that any attempt at +flight would be followed immediately by a shot. + +"An' I ain't missed a squirrel in five year," boasted their guard, who +was a boy of about their own age. + +Privately the boys resolved to make an escape as soon as possible, but +not while the rifle of the guard was trained on them, for they doubted +neither his ability to shoot as well as he said he could, nor the fact +that he would not hesitate to do as he threatened. + +They looked over the clearing with some curiosity. It fitted its name +well, for misery seemed to be on every side. King, who appeared to be +that in fact as well as in name, called the boys to his own shack for +breakfast. Here they found that the squatter leader had opened their +knapsacks, and the contents were strewn over a rude table. + +Both boys jumped to see if their wireless 'phone had been broken by the +curious squatter, but were relieved to find that it had not been +touched. + +"What's that there contrivance?" asked King, pointing to the +radio-phone. + +"That's a wireless telephone," answered Garry. As he answered he had a +vision of a way out of their difficulty, but subsequent conversation +soon proved that they would not be able to put the plan into execution. + +"I seen a telephone onct," said the squatter, "but it had wires. You +don't mean that that thing will talk without a wire, do you?" + +"Yes it does. Would you like to have us set it up, and talk through it, +and have a message come through the air?" asked Garry, eagerly awaiting +the answer, for he thought that if he could get the wireless up he could +signal some way for help. + +"No, I don't. I don't believe that ye can talk through the air without a +wire, but ye might be able to an' I ain't agoin' to take no chances." + +The squatter did not seem interested in the contents of the knapsack +except for the little medicine case that Garry always carried. The boy +noted, too, that all the foodstuff was gone. + +"What be these things, medicine?" asked King. + +"Yes," answered Garry briefly. + +"Got anything that's good for chills and fever?" demanded the man. + +"Not that I know of; most of that stuff is for use in an accident. You +see it's mostly antiseptic and bandage and stuff," answered Garry. + +King picked up a bottle that was marked poison and had the familiar +skull and crossbones in red ink. + +"What's this stuff with the red printin'?" he questioned. + +"That's iodine; can't you read?" Phil broke into the conversation. + +"No, can't read, never went to school. What's it for?" + +"Why, it's to put on bad cuts so that you won't get blood poisoning, and +it's good if you strain your wrist or finger or something like that." +answered Garry. + +"Wall, you don't say so. Wonder if 'twould do this finger o' mine any +good? I hurt it the other day when I slipped near the brook where I was +getting water. It's my trigger finger too, and that's a bad one to have +hurt." + +Garry assured him that there was nothing better than the iodine and +offered to paint it for him. + +The squatter evidently decided that it could do no harm, and so Garry +inspected the swollen finger and liberally painted it. + +"That will help take the swelling out, and it will be all right in a +couple of days," said Garry, as he put the cork back in the bottle and +laid it on the table. + +Then he noticed that a ragged youngster about three years old had been +watching the process with wide open eyes. Inquiry developed that it was +the squatter's child, and it was evident that the youngster was the one +thing that the squatter king was really fond of. He told Garry and Phil +that the mother had died a year before, when they had been driven off a +timber tract by the lumbermen. Here the squatter launched into a tirade +against the lumber owners. + +The squatter idea is a peculiar one. They claim that the woods were made +for man to take as he found them and could not understand the right of +anyone to drive them out; yet they are responsible for great damage to +the woods. As, for instance, at this place, a couple of acres of fine +timber had been ruthlessly cut to make cabins for the nesters or +squatters, and to provide a place for the scanty crop of potatoes and +corn. Then too, many of the great forest fires are started by the +squatters. There is one case on record in Maine where the squatters set +fire to a whole mountain side, because they said that the blueberries +would grow better on the burned-over ground. + +Also the depredations against deer are numerous. Many a fine moose or +stag has been brought down to provide food for the nomads. + +The talk went back to the medicine again, and the squatter asked what +the skull meant on the bottle. + +"That's put on to warn you that it's poison," Garry informed him. + +The work of painting his finger seemed to mollify the old man somewhat, +and he drew a little out of his shell, and Garry, seeing the +opportunity, asked him why they had been brought there. + +The squatter then told them that LeBlanc had appeared on the scene a day +or two before and told them that unless they agreed to keep some boys +who would be brought there prisoners, they would be driven from the +clearing by the lumberjacks. The squatters knew what this meant, since +they had planted their corn for the summer, and moving meant that the +lumberjacks would burn down the cabins and start them away. They knew +from experience that it was useless to fight, for the enemy, so they +considered the lumberjacks, would outnumber them ten to one. + +Garry saw through the whole scheme and guessed that Barrows had known of +their presence at the clearing and had kept them in mind for some time +when he might require them to help in some of his schemes. + +The squatter king took his rifle and offered to show the boys where +their planting was done, and more for the sake of getting a little +exercise than for any especial desire to see the corn patch, they +agreed. + +The other squatters eyed them as they passed in company with old King, +but said nothing. Some of the youngsters started to follow, but a mere +threatening look was enough to set them scurrying away. + +"You seem to be the boss around here," remarked Garry. + +"Yes, I'm a King by name, and I aim to be king of these people so long +as I breathe," answered the man gravely; and Garry, looking at his +immense frame and stern eye, thought he had a good chance of continuing +in his royal capacity. + +They were looking at the corn patch with only a pretended interest, when +they heard a scream from King's cabin. + +"That's my baby," said King in a frightened tone. "Something's hurt +her!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +GARRY SAVES A LIFE + + +They rushed back to the cabin and a sight met their eyes that stunned +them all. + +The youngster with childish curiosity, had climbed up on the table and +captured the bottle of iodine. It was immediately evident that the child +had drunk some of the poison, for its lips were stained. There was no +telling how much the child had drunk, for the bottle had fallen to the +floor, spilling some of the liquid over the floor. + +The old man seized his child in his arms, and tears began to roll down +his cheeks. + +"Oh, she's going to die, she's going to die," he moaned. + +Garry's brain spun with thought. + +"Quick," he shouted to the old man. "There's one thing that will save +her. What did you do with that foodstuff you took out of the pack +there?" + +The sharpness of his tone startled the old man into activity. The words +of Garry that there was one way to save her galvanized him into action. + +"It's up there on the shelf back of you. Can ye save my baby? Hurry! +Save her an' there's nothin' on this earth I won't do for ye!" + +Garry had fortunately remembered that he had in his knapsack a package +of cornstarch that they had brought to make thickening for gravy in case +they did any cooking. Garry, and for that matter both of his chums, were +pastmasters in the art of first aid to the injured. They knew that the +antidote for iodine was cornstarch. + +Rushing to the shelf, Garry snatched the package and tore open the top. +His eyes fell on a can of mustard and he seized that. + +On the ground outside the door Garry had noted a campfire with an old +tin pail swung across it on a branch held up by forked sticks. Working +with the speed of an express train, he dashed through the door and +grabbed the pail of hot water. + +Back in the cabin, he took a tin cup from the table, and hastily melting +some of the mustard, made an emetic. This he gently forced the +frightened child to swallow. Soon the emetic had the desired effect, and +by this time Garry had moistened the cornstarch to the consistency of +cream. + +While the frightened squatter looked on helplessly, Garry fed the +cornstarch to the baby, who seemed instinctively to trust the boy, and +made little fuss over taking the pasty drink. + +Throughout the morning Garry, with almost the skill of a trained nurse, +watched the child's breathing and kept count of her pulse. As nothing +developed to show that the child was in any danger, Garry privately +formed the opinion that the iodine had not gotten much further than the +inside of her mouth, and that the burn of the poison had prevented her +from drinking any great quantity of it. Then, too, the stain on the +floor, where the liquid had sunk into the rough boards, was large enough +to denote that most of the contents of the small bottle were on the +floor and had not been swallowed by the child. + +As the youngster brightened up, the relief of the father was almost +pitiful to see. He grasped the hand of Garry and in broken, halting +words thanked him for saving the life of the baby. At the door was a +throng of curious squatters, and when they saw that the King baby was +going to live, gradually broke away and returned to their duties. All +this time Phil had stood by ready to lend a hand, in case Garry needed +assistance. + +"Boys," said the old man, "I've never broken my word before, but this is +one time that I'm going to. It will mean that we'll be driven off here, +but that can't be helped. You can go away whenever you want to. My +promise to that Frenchman ain't nothin' to me since you've saved my +baby." + +This was what Garry had hoped would happen. He did not want to trade the +baby's safety for freedom, but there was still Dick to consider. He +might be and probably was in grave danger at that moment, and it +behooved the boys to return as speedily as possible to the lumber camp +to set in motion the machinery to effect Dick's release, for they had +decided that Dick was probably a prisoner at the camp. Of course they +did not know of the hidden room under the storehouse, where, at that +moment, their friend was still languishing. + +"I'll make you a promise now," said Garry. "It happens that my father +owns this tract of land, and I'll give you my word that you will not be +forced to move from here for the rest of the summer. Of course the +logging will soon extend in this direction and you will be forced off, +but until that happens you can stay here unmolested. Now we're going +back to start a young war at the camp, and release a chum of ours who is +held prisoner there." + +"You better stay here for awhile, for part of the word of the Frenchman +was that another boy would be brought here to be kept. Now if you boys +stay here and pretend to be prisoners when LeBlanc comes with your +friend, you can wait till he goes and then all be freed together. In +case there's any trouble comes, I guess my men and I can take care of +it." + +"That's fine," said Garry. "I don't think there's anything better that +can be done. When did you expect LeBlanc to come with the other boy?" + +"The Frenchman was aiming to get back here by tomorrow night," replied +King. "He'd have to start in the night time, which will probably be +tonight, and get here some time tomorrow afternoon." + +"How will LeBlanc be able to find his way in the dark?" asked Garry. + +"I left one of my men behind to meet him and guide him," answered the +old man. Then a thought struck him, and he asked: + +"What are you all such powerful enemies for?" + +Garry then told him some of the adventures that they had encountered, +and the part that the halfbreed had played in them. When he came to the +tale of how LeBlanc had kidnapped little Patty Graham, the old man's +eyes flashed fire. + +"He's a treacherous weazel, that halfbreed. I don't mind some of the +other things he did, but any man that will steal a person's baby ought +to be cut into pieces. I'll tell you that. When he comes here with your +friend, we'll just tie him up and keep him here and you can do what you +want to with him." + +This seemed like a stroke of real luck for the boys. It would mean +LeBlanc would be safely held until time for them to have him taken to +prison to pay the much deserved penalty for his crimes, and at the same +time would rid them of a dangerous enemy, as well as lessening by one +the allies of the rascally Barrows. + +The rest of the day passed quickly, and they told the squatter king many +of the things of the outside world. He had heard little or nothing of +the great cities, and had never seen a moving picture nor ridden in a +railroad train. But he knew the woods as few men do, except perhaps the +Hermit, although there was no comparison between this giant of the +woods, who could neither read nor write, and the old recluse, who was +eternally surprising the boys with a quotation from some poet, or a +snatch of Latin. + +"Now, Phil," said Garry, when they were left alone for awhile by the +squatter, "let's plan a war campaign. As soon as Dick gets here, we will +let him have a good rest, and then hike for the camp. We'll make it to +get to the small lake without anyone seeing us, and there we'll get the +canoe and portage it through the woods to the other lake. There we can +hide out and get the dope on the timber thieves. Once we have done that, +we have only to draw in the strings, and we'll have the whole job done." + +Phil assented to this as the wisest course to follow, and night coming +on, they turned in. The squatter had insisted on giving up his own cabin +to them, which although poor and bare, was the best one on the clearing. + +They whiled away the next day waiting the arrival of Dick, and hoping +that no change would be made in the plans of Barrows to prevent Dick's +being sent to Misery Camp. + +It was late afternoon when a man whom the squatter king had sent into +the woods to act as lookout came running back. + +"He's got a young fellow with him," he told the squatter leader. + +"Is it the Frenchman?" demanded the old man. + +"Yes, it's a Frenchman, but," and here the boys met with a +disappointment. "It's not the one that came the other time, but a fellow +that looks like him." + +"Tough luck; that's Baptiste, not Jean. Look King, I've changed my mind +about having him captured. Let him go back and let the camp think that +we are held prisoners safely here. That will allow us to work with +greater freedom. Now we'll duck under cover and you meet the halfbreed +and bring Dick here." + +"Just as you say," said the old man. "All you have to do around here +from now on is to say the word, and everyone in Misery will do just as +you order. I will, and I'll see to it that the others toe the line." + +"Funny he don't come," muttered Garry. + +"Oh, he won't be here for a time yet," said the chap who had brought the +warning. "I was in a tree top, and could see way down to a clearing, and +saw them there taking a rest. Ain't nobody on the clearin' here that can +run as fast as I can, and I came quicker than ever to tell you about +it." + +"Had we better let Baptiste see us so that he will know we are still +here, Garry?" asked Phil. + +"That's a good suggestion. Suppose you station a guard with a rifle +outside the door, King, and let Baptiste have a peek at us when he gets +here," directed Garry turning to the squatter. + +"That's what I'll do. Here you, Job," turning to the youth who had +brought news of the coming of Baptiste and Dick. "You take your stand +outside there like as if you were guardin't the door. Now I'll get out +o' here and meet them." + +The squatter king hastened out, while Job stood before the shack door +with his rifle clutched in his hands. Garry and Phil, with some +excitement, waited the coming of Dick. + +In a few moments they heard someone approaching, and King threw open the +door. "Here's your friend," he whispered, and thrust someone in. +Bewilderment spread over the faces of the boys. + +It was not Dick who entered the cabin, but Art Howells! + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +A GOOD DEED REWARDED + + +The dumbfounded boys could only stare at Howells. + +"Where did you come from and where is Dick?" cried Garry, when he had +recovered his voice sufficiently to speak. + +"If you will untie my hands first, I will feel better and be able to +think. My wrists are all raw from trying to work the ropes off, but the +man that tied me up knew his business too well," said Howells. + +Since the boys' belongings had been restored them by King, they had +their knives, and it was a small matter to cut the bonds. + +"Now what do you mean by Dick being with me?" asked Howells. + +"Why, Dick has been a prisoner at the camp, and we were given to +understand that he was to be brought here to join us. We were prisoners +here ourselves; fell into a foolish trap because we were too sure of +ourselves. Fortunately, because of a good turn that we were able to do, +we have been set free by the squatter chief," answered Garry. + +"What do you mean free, with an armed guard outside the door?" demanded +Art. "I should say you were pretty closely kept in confinement." + +"That is only a ruse so the suspicion of whoever brought any prisoner +here would not be raised. As soon as he goes we will be free to do what +we please. Now how did you come to be captured?" went on Garry. + +"Oh, I made a fool blunder too. I wanted to see you chaps to tell you +that a lot of lumber was being shipped from a place called Harrison. +It's about five miles away from Dutton Lake, so that seems to show that +the lake figures in the stealing of the timber. I crawled into camp one +night and went to your shack, and walked in expecting to find you +sleeping there. Instead I ran right into the arms of a couple of huskies +who had me overpowered before I knew what was going on. I found out in a +few minutes that the pair were LeBlanc and that precious scoundrel that +tried to do me up that night you chaps appeared so providentially on the +scene." + +"Did Barrows say anything about what had been going on in the camp, or +drop any word that would give us a hint as to his plans?" put in Phil. + +"No, he was very closemouthed. There was a swarthy chap with him, who +from your description I take to be Jean LeBlanc. All that was said was +that I should be taken to a place called Misery Camp. From the looks of +this place I judge that is where I am now. What have you run into, a +squatter camp?" + +"Yes, you've hit the nail on the head." + +Garry was about to speak further, when the door opened and the squatter +chief came in. + +"That fellow is gone, and you kin come out any time you want," was the +welcome news that he brought. The three followed him into the sunlight +and then decided that a start should be made for the lumber camp at +once. + +"That is, unless you are too tired to start now, Art," said Garry. + +"Oh, I'm feeling fit as a fiddle. I don't know that I'd care to walk all +the way back, but we can save time by going part of the way," remarked +Art cheerfully. + +The packs were brought out and soon all was ready for the return trip. +They were surprised at the appearance of King with his rifle, and feared +for a moment that he had thought better of allowing them to go and was +going to make them prisoners again. + +"Just decided that I'll go with you fellows. If there's goin't to be +fightin', and I think there is, I want to be in it. Besides, you won't +be safe wanderin' around through strange country alone. I'll see that +you get where you want to go in safety, and mebbe you'll find that a +little bit of extra help won't come in amiss? Do you want me to come?" +concluded King. + +The light of battle was in the old man's eyes, and Garry at once decided +that he might prove a valuable ally in case trouble arose and welcomed +him to come with them. + +"We'll take a little different way back, so we won't be liable to run +into any of that gang from the camp. We'll go until you fellows get +tired, then eat, and you can roll in while I watch for you." + +This was what they wanted to do, and so they agreed to follow his advice +entirely on the return trip. + +"What about some of the men coming to your place to see if we are all +right, or if they bring Dick with them, what then?" questioned Garry. + +"In case any o' them come here from now on, they'll get a treat they +won't like. I told my men to seize anyone who came, and if the fat boy +comes, he is to be guided to a place where me and my men know, and then +he can join us," answered King. + +The squatter seemed to have covered everything necessary, and off +started the quartet. King led them on a roundabout trail, and they +walked until darkness fell, when Howells declared that he would like to +rest. + +For fear of possible detection by some prowler from the camp, no fire +was built, and a cold bite was eaten. King refused to let any of the +others do any work, and himself gathered enough boughs for them all to +sleep on. Garry insisted that when King had watched for a while, he +waken either himself or Phil, and they could provide a relief for a +while. King protested that he was able to watch the entire night, but +Garry reminded him that on the coming day there might be strenuous work, +and he would not want to be handicapped by fatigue. This finally made +the old man agree to waken Garry at midnight and let him stand a watch. + +True to his word, King shook Garry about midnight. + +"Don't believe there's any real need o' watchin', everything been quiet +so far; but there's nothin' like bein' on the safe side." + +Garry looked to see that his rifle was loaded and ready, then took a +seat under a tree where he could be comfortable and yet hear anything. +King laid down on the ground, scorning the boughs, and was fast asleep +in a moment. + +After about two hours Garry began to feel drowsy, and rather than run +the risk of dropping off to sleep, he woke Phil, who had had a good +sleep and was able to stand sentry for the rest of the night. + +After they had eaten in the morning, the old man asked what the next +step was. + +Garry had been thinking it over as they ate, and so he asked King if he +knew the region around Kanamo Lake. King answered that he knew every +inch of the territory in that part of the state, and so it was decided +that he lead them by a roundabout route to the lake shore. Here they +could hide out in a safe place, and after dark could portage the canoe +across the timberland to Dutton Lake. Garry was determined to try and +catch the thieves at work that night. Then plans could be made for a +raid on the camp and the rescue of Dick could be effected. + +It was almost nightfall when they reached the lake shore, and they +thought best to turn in for a while before making for the spot where +they had concealed the canoe. + + * * * * * + +To return now to Dick, who had been left all this time in the cellar. +Food was brought to him on occasion, but always by two or three in +company, and he had no opportunity of trying to fight his way from the +cellar. Once when the cook and cookee came, he attempted to bribe them +to let him escape, but they turned a deaf ear to his words. + +Back at the office, Barrows was having a council with his henchmen. +These consisted of the two LeBlancs, the cookee and the boss sawyer. + +"Things are beginning to get too brisk here, so we'll make a good +cleanup and light out," said Barrows. "I didn't expect when we started +this thing that there would be all the trouble that has since come upon +us. We've all done enough now to land us in prison, what with this +kidnapping and everything. Catching Howells around here was what has +made me suspicious. There's no telling what he has done on the outside. +He may have written to Boone and told him what was going on, and that +would sure spill the beans, for Boone would probably order me off the +place and give me my walking papers. Then we would be all done. What I +propose is this: We have already cut a good bit of timber and that has +been sawed, thanks to the saw I had hidden in the storehouse. We would +have wasted time, as usual, waiting for another, but this suits my ends +better. All this timber has been left on the tote road, and tonight +we'll make a number of trips and clean it up. Tomorrow night we'll make +a grand cleanup and then fire the sawmill and wreck the machinery and +light out. By the time they have things ready to fix up, Boone will be +too late to keep his contracts and my work will have been done," Barrows +concluded as he rubbed his hands in evil satisfaction over his +treachery. + +"And the boys?" inquired Jean LeBlanc softly. + +"I know what's on your mind, LeBlanc. Ugh, I'd hate to have you for an +enemy. I suppose you want to stick a knife in them and put them out of +the way." + +"That would be safest. They know too much," answered the halfbreed. + +"Well, I have a better plan than that. You remember we wrote a letter to +decoy them away and mentioned a ransom. What's to prevent us from really +getting one from old man Boone? We could stick him up for a big sum, and +that would be clear profit aside from what the Carson people are paying +us. King will keep them till we arrange things and then we could free +them. After that, LeBlanc, you can do what you like; it will be out of +my hands then. Now we'll start for the lake. Will the boat be there at +the usual time?" and he turned to the boss sawyer. + +"Usual time," laconically answered the man. + +The door was thrown open, and a man walked into the room. + +"So it's the Carson people that are back of you this time, eh, Barrows? +Guess I got here just in time!" + +The men gasped in amazement, for there stood "Moose" Boone. + +In the face of this crisis, the only one to keep his head was LeBlanc. + +"Seize him," he whispered sibilantly to his brother, in French. + +Before Mr. Boone could make a move, he was grabbed by the powerful +brothers. One of them clasped a hand over his mouth, and without a word, +as though they had practiced for this very moment, Jean snatched a +soiled bandanna from his pocket, and in another minute Mr. Boone was +effectually gagged. + +Barrows also had sprung into action. Rummaging around under the pine +table that served as a desk, he brought forth a length of rope, and soon +Boone was tightly bound. + +"Carry him over to the storehouse. Don't put him in the cellar. This +makes things better. We can keep him prisoner for several days and clean +up. Lively now," ordered Barrows. + +"Moose" Boone was carried to the storehouse and unceremoniously dumped. +He lay on the floor thinking how foolish he had been to come alone to a +camp where he knew there was treachery afoot, but now it was too late to +cry over spilled milk. He wondered where the boys were, since he had +seen no sign of them about the camp. + +His reason for coming was the note that Garry had sent him, and which +the hermit had succeeded in having posted. + +He twisted around several times in an effort to relieve the pain in his +arms and feet from lying tied on the hard floor. + +Nearly two hours passed, and then the door was softly unlocked and +opened. In stepped the cook. Mr. Boone wondered what was to happen now, +and he received the surprise of his life when the cook fished out his +knife and proceeded to cut the bonds that bound him. + +"Have you come to the conclusion that this was a fool thing to do? I am +thankful, of course, and will see that you are let go when the rest of +this gang is rounded up," said Boone. + +The cook did not speak until he had cut the bonds. + +"First, Mr. Boone, I'll tell you something and then I'll show you +someone. I don't suppose you will remember a cold spring day nearly +twenty-five years ago on the Umculcos, when you risked your own life to +save a lumberjack that was trying to ride a log and fell into the river +with the logs crushing down about him?" + +Boone's mind travelled swiftly back to the day, although he had not +given it a thought for years. + +"Yes, I remember pulling a man out, and then falling sick from the cold, +and when I got well the man I had pulled out was gone," he answered. + +"Well, I was the man you pulled out. I left the camp because I was only +a fool young fellow and they made so much fun of me for falling in that +I picked up and got out. I never knew you were the man until I saw you +tonight and hitched your name up with the man who saved me. Now I'll +show you something like I promised." + +He rolled the barrels away and raised the trap. "Come up," he called +into the darkness. + +Dick awoke from a troubled sleep and painfully crawled up the ladder. It +took a few moments for his eyes to get accustomed to the light, and then +he looked as though he saw a ghost. + +"Uncle," he almost shouted, for so it was that he always addressed Mr. +Boone. + +They clasped hands with a hearty good will and were about to exchange +notes when the door was thrown open and Barrows and the two LeBlancs +entered. + +Each held a revolver with a steady hand. + +"So, cook, you've turned traitor, have you? Well, it just makes another +prisoner. Now Boone, it's no use trying to do anything. Most of the men +in the camp are in my pay, and just to be sure that we clean up tonight +and tomorrow night as we had planned, we have seized all the men we are +not sure of and have them herded in the bunkhouse and under heavy guard. +This time we'll succeed!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +THE CAPTURE + + +We left Garry, Phil and Howells with the squatter king on the lake shore +waiting for darkness. When it fell, they retrieved the canoe from its +hiding place and started across the timberland to Dutton Lake. The trip +occupied nearly three hours, although they made excellent speed. + +The faint light of the stars pierced the blackness of the forest, so +they did not have to stumble along, although the greatest of caution was +exercised every moment. + +They reached the lake without encountering a person, and then launched +the canoe. They did not dare trust the weight of the four to the frail +craft, and so it was planned that King and Phil should remain behind, +while Art and Garry paddled out into the lake. They did not have to wait +a great while until the chugging of the powerful engine in the motor +boat was heard. + +Paddling with the noiseless stroke of the Indians, they followed after a +reasonable time had elapsed. They had taken only a few strokes when Art +whispered: + +"Here, we're going at this thing wrong. When that raft is loaded and +starts back across the water, it will make too much speed for us to +follow. Suppose we start now for the other side of the lake. Then we can +lie off shore and wait for its arrival and see who meets the raft to +unload it. That will complete your evidence, and we'll duck out for the +camp and somehow get hold of Dick. What say?" + +Without a word, Garry, who was paddling stern, gave his paddle a twist +and the canoe turned in its course. They reached the other side and then +lay off shore as agreed, giving the paddles an occasional twist to keep +the canoe from drifting, for a gentle breeze was stirring the lake. + +After a long wait they heard the approach of the motor boat, which, as +was customary, was running without lights. Far down the shore they saw a +light appear as though some one were flashing a lamp. It was probably to +guide the boat to its destination in the darkness. When the boat reached +its objective point, they paddled noiselessly to within a few feet of +it, and beached the canoe. Walking with the stealth of Indians, they +came close to where the boat was being unloaded. + +"By jove, I know that voice," whispered Garry, as he heard a man ask: + +"So this is how the trick is done? Pretty clever, I call it. Steal the +timber and then raft it across to where you have your trucks waiting and +hustle it to the railroad spur. Mighty good work on the part of Barrows. + +"That's Carson himself; used to be associated with Father," whispered +Garry. He and Howells were hiding back of a tree, well away from danger +of being seen. At that moment Carson struck a match to light his pipe. + +"Get a good look at him, we will want to identify him in court if +necessary," said Garry. Howells nudged him to make him understand that +he had done so. + +"Now wait here," whispered Garry. Howells watched in amazement as Garry +crept to the water's edge and noiselessly waded in. He made no sound as +he swam. When he came back, dripping wet, Howells wanted to ask a score +of questions, but forebore for fear of being heard. + +He was about to come closer and whisper, when a form crept up to them +and a low voice said: + +"So we meet again." + +It was Baptiste LeBlanc. The Frenchman then lifted his voice and called +for the others. But he did not get very far. Howells struck with all his +strength and his hard knuckles took the halfbreed on the point of the +jaw. LeBlanc dropped like a stone. + +"Come, Garry, this way quick," called Art. There was no need of +whispering now, for the men who had been unloading had heard the alarm +and there was the sound of rushing feet. + +"Into the canoe, Art. They can't follow us," said Garry. + +Howells had intended a dash into the woods, where there was less +likelihood of being caught, but he obeyed Garry, knowing that he had +some plan in view. They pushed the canoe into the water, springing into +it as they did. It was lucky that Howells was an experienced canoeist, +else the frail boat would have been overturned. As it was, they got a +good start, and in a moment were bending to their paddles with all their +might and strength. + +"What's to stop them following us in the motor boat? We should have +taken to the woods," remonstrated Art. + +"Faster, I'll tell you later," answered Garry breathlessly. At that +minute they heard loud imprecations from the shore. + +By this time they were well away from shore and out of danger of a +possible shot. + +Garry began to laugh. + +"No wonder they are shouting and cursing there. I swam to the boat that +time I left you and cut the wires on the engine; and to be sure, I took +out the spark plugs, and have them in my pocket. It will be some time +before they get that boat into condition to chase us!" + +"Good boy," said Art admiringly. + +The return across the lake was without eventful occurrence, however, for +with them was the hermit. + +Garry greeted him warmly. "What news?" he asked. + +"I fear I am the bearer of bad news," said the hermit. + +"Your father has come to the camp and been caught, so I judge from what +I heard said by two men a while ago as I lay close to the road that +leads here. Also many of the lumberjacks are kept captive in one of the +shacks, and a heavy guard has been set over them. I think we had better +go for help; we can't battle them alone, our numbers are too few." + +Garry was for going at once to the rescue of his father, but the others +restrained him. + +"We can't do anything there, and we can be of great help on the outside. +There is a sheriff in town, and we can get word to him, and have him +round up a posse sufficiently large to capture the whole outfit," +advised Art. + +Reluctantly Garry agreed that this was the wisest thing to do. + +"King, guide us around so that we can avoid the camp, but get to the +road that leads to town. We'll get a posse and give them a battle," +directed Garry. + +Without a word, King led the way, and the others followed. + + * * * * * + +In the meantime, Mr. Boone and Dick had been led from the storehouse and +taken to the bunkhouse, where the rest of the prisoners were. + +There were shouts of welcome when some of the old woodsmen saw Mr. +Boone. Although he was the owner of the timber tract, and their +employer, they hailed him as "Moose" and shook his hand energetically. + +"By gosh. I'm ashamed to look you in the face, Moose," cried one of the +lumberjacks. "To think we let a bunch like that crowd outside there put +it over on us; men that have fought with rifle and peavy stick when some +crowd tried to steal the river from us. Gosh, if we had a few axes and +peavy sticks now we could get out there and make that bunch look sick, +but all have rifles and revolvers. Barrows must've had a regular armory +with him." + +They were still talking and trying without success to puzzle a way out +of their predicament, when Dick gave a shout of joy. + +"There's my knapsack. That lets me see light right now!" + +The men looked at him in astonishment. How a mere knapsack could help +them was not to be understood. + +"That was chucked in here by one of the men yesterday, before we were +captured. He saw it in the shack, and remembering it belonged to one of +you, took it for safe keeping. It was Tom there, who brought it." + +Tom was the man who had taken them on the coon hunt, and one they had +been suspicious of, but here he was with the loyal men. + +Dick hurriedly opened the knapsack. Yes, there it was, safe and sound, +the wireless outfit! + +"Now one of you fellows get up there and dig a hole in the roof; it only +need be a small one, that I can slide this aerial up through. It ought +not to take more than an hour." + +"We haven't any knife," said one of the men. "They took away all our +knives and matches from us." + +Dick secured his knife from its secret pocket in the lapel, and handed +it to one of the men. + +"One of you set to work, and the others keep talking so that the guards +outside will not become suspicious and look in here." + +"Are you going to try something with the radio-phone," asked Mr. Boone, +who was the only one who grasped what Dick's intentions were. + +"Yes; it's our only chance. I happened to notice that there were two +aerials over houses in the last town we passed through before coming to +the camp, and I saw some radio apparatus in a store window, so evidently +some one there has an outfit. Fortunately I have the receiving apparatus +here as well as a sender, and we can find out if my message is received +by anyone." + +As he talked, he adjusted the apparatus, ready to send his plea for help +through space and hope that someone would be listening in. + +"Hurry!" he called to the man who was boring through the board roof with +the knife. "It's almost time for the usual radio broadcasting stations +to stop sending, and I want to get someone while they are still +listening in, just as the broadcasting station closes." + +"There, guess that's all right, unless you want it a little bigger," +said the man who had been working. + +Dick looked up at the hole and saw that it would do all right. + +Most of the men were frankly incredulous. The thought of talking through +a 'phone that had no wires was a riddle to them, as few or none of them +knew anything about radio. + +One of them suggested that instead of wasting time with such a "fool +contrivance," they try to tear away the boards from the roof and take a +chance on overpowering the guards. This was discouraged by the others +who, though they were by no means cowardly, knew it would be foolhardy +to face guns with only their bare hands. + +"Let's give the boy a chance with his infernal machine first," advised a +grizzled old lumberjack. "Then if it don't work, we can try something +else." + +Dick adjusted the aerial, and then tuning up, got ready to talk into the +transmitter. + +"Some of you men keep talking over there by the door, and the rest of +you get near the windows and block anyone from seeing in. Don't talk too +loud, just enough to cover my voice." + +For nearly ten minutes Dick repeated over and over again: + +"S. O. S. Send a sheriff with large posse to Boone's camp. Owner and +some of men held prisoners. Answer if you get message." + +Then there was a crackling sound in the receivers that were clasped to +his head, and with a thrill he knew that someone was trying to get him. + +He adjusted the tuning apparatus with trembling fingers. The voice still +sputtered and crackled. Finally he got the right wave length, and heard +a welcome voice. + +"Hello, are you sending help call?" + +"Yes," almost shouted Dick. "Who are you?" + +"Brown talking. My father is sheriff. Are you in earnest?" + +"Yes, surely. Hurry posse on way. You'll need thirty or forty men. We +are held prisoners in bunkhouse here. Captors are all armed. Be careful. +This is last call; act quick, as I'm going to pack up radio for fear I +will be discovered and apparatus broken. Goodnight." + +"Going for Dad now, goodnight," came the voice. There was a sputter, +then silence. + +Dick turned to the men, his face gleaming with pleasure. + +"There will be a posse on the way in a short time. The radio worked," he +announced. + +The little group of men burst into a cheer and were silenced only by the +threat of the guards outside to come in and make them stop. + +Feeling that they had done all that could be done, they prepared to turn +in and wait the coming of the morn with its posse headed by Sheriff +Brown. + +The men rolled in, but Dick was too excited to sleep, and he told Mr. +Boone, in a low tone, of all that had transpired since they had reached +the camp. Of course he was unable to tell of the way in which the timber +was stolen, as he had not seen his chums when they returned from their +expedition that night he was captured. + +Mr. Boone was silent for some few minutes after Dick had concluded his +talk. He was worried about Garry and Phil, and Dick, noting his silence, +asked him what the trouble was. + +When he found the reason for Mr. Boone's worry, he endeavored to cheer +him up. + +"The chances are that they have not fallen into the hands of anyone at +the camp here, else they would have been brought here with us. I am +certain that they have discovered some clue and are following it up. +Very likely they are searching for me, as they of course do not know I +am here." + +Being ignorant of all that had transpired, Dick did not know how near at +that moment his chums were. + +As they talked, they were being guided towards the road by King. It was +necessary to make a wide detour in order to avoid running into a stray +member of the camp traitors' party. + +Garry was well satisfied with part of the night's work. In the first +place, he had proof that Carson, his father's business enemy, was at the +bottom of the whole mess, and in the second place, he felt that he had +so effectively disabled the motor launch that no more timber would be +stolen that night. By the next day, he expected to have the whole gang +rounded up. + +They finally reached the road, and were half way to the town, when they +heard the sound of what they thought was a large auto truck coming +towards them. + +When they drew near the truck, they saw a dozen rifles leveled at them, +and a stern voice told them to halt. They feared for a moment that they +had walked into a new trap. + +One of the men leaped from the truck and asked them who they were and +what their business was. + +"My name is Boone," answered Garry, acting as the spokesman for his +little party. "I am on my way to try and locate the sheriff of the +county, as my father and friends are held prisoner at the Boone lumber +cutting camp." + +"Well, I'm the sheriff, and I'm on my way there now. We'll look you over +in a moment and see if you're all right." + +The words of the sheriff surprised Garry. + +"How did you know that you were wanted at the camp?" + +"My boy picked a message out of the air with his radio, and that's how +we found out," answered the sheriff. + +Garry gave a shout of joy. "Good for Dick, he managed somehow to get a +chance to use his wireless." + +"Now," said the sheriff, "lower the muzzles of those rifles and come +forward slowly. My men have you covered and you have no chance for any +monkey business." + +Knowing that they could soon convince the sheriff of their statements, +they did as they were bade. When they came into the light cast by the +headlights of the truck, the sheriff at once recognized Art Howells. + +"Hello, Art, guess that is all I want to know. These fellows all right? +I know you well enough to take your word for it." + +"They are absolutely O.K., Sheriff," answered Art. "We were on our way +to summon you when you met us." + +Howells' words satisfied the sheriff, and they proceeded to get +acquainted all around. Garry asked if that was the pretext of the posse, +for he counted only fifteen men, and was relieved when he was told that +another truck with the same number of men was following them, but had +been obliged to stop for a short time on account of engine trouble. + +As they spoke they heard the rumble of an engine and a short time later +the second truck hove into view. + +"It lacks about an hour and a half of daylight, so I think we ought to +be getting on. If possible we can surprise them in the dark, that would +win half the battle for us. Not that I expect there will be much of a +fight, when they see that the law is after them," said the sheriff. + +"I don't think I would trust the authority of the law half as much as +our rifles," said Garry. "Those men are desperate, some of them, and if +they see prison staring them in the face, they will fight all the +harder, figuring that they might as well be taken for sheep as for +lambs," said Garry. "Besides, they have two bad men with them, meaning +the two halfbreeds, Jean and Baptiste LeBlanc. Jean is already wanted +for a half a dozen serious crimes, including kidnapping and setting fire +to forests; also he is an escaped jail bird. With that kind, it means +fight to the end before being taken." + +"Come to think of it, I've seen a notice in my office offering a reward +for his capture. I'd like to get that chap, and I could use the reward," +said the sheriff. + +They had ridden as they talked, and soon were on the outskirts of the +camp. + +But something had gone wrong. A volley of shots whistled at them from +cover, and they were forced to beat a short retreat instead of springing +a surprise on their quarry as they had intended to do. + +"Now, that's funny; how did they get on to that?" muttered the sheriff. + +It later developed that Barrows had posted sentinels in the woods along +the road, and as soon as their approach was noted, they had, by a +pre-arranged signal, passed the word of the coming to the posse. + +This word having been received at the camp, hasty preparations had been +made to receive them. The prisoners, about twenty in all, had been +marched at the points of guns to the storehouse, and there were forced +to enter the storehouse. There was hardly room enough for them, and +little air, but they were crowded in like so many sardines in a can, +while the enemy fortified themselves in the log bunkhouse. + +The opening volley of shots had come from the sentinels who had closed +in and fired as they ran for shelter to the bunkhouse. + +"Well, we're stumped for a minute now," said the sheriff. "They could +hold us off for a long time in that bunkhouse. It is built of solid +logs, and bullets, unless they were aimed at the windows, would have no +effect on that wood. We've got to think up some way of rushing 'em or +smoking 'em out. Anyone got a plan in mind?" + +"Yes, sir, I think I have," spoke up Phil. "As soon as it gets just a +little bit lighter we can rush one of the trucks back through the woods +to the sawmill, and there we can sheath the truck with some of that +timber. A very thick bulwark can be made, and that will halt the +bullets. Half of the men can stay near the bunkhouse drawing fire with +their rifles while the truck is being fixed." + +"But what good is that going to do us?" broke in the sheriff. + +"Just let me finish. I know that there are three or four sticks of +dynamite at the sawmill, that were part of the lot bought to blast away +the stumps where the mill and camp shacks were built. With what wire I +have in my pack, and some of the batteries from my wireless, I can rig +up a small mine at the side of the log hut, where there is no window. +The shield on the truck would be to allow us to get there in safety." + +"But wouldn't that be an awful thing to do, Phil?" asked Garry. "We +couldn't blow those men up without warning." + +"No, that isn't my idea. I would have one of the party carry a flag of +truce into the camp and explain to the men what had been done, and give +them two minutes to surrender. If they did not, then go ahead and blow +her up. Few would be hurt, and those only slightly. The blast would make +a breach in the wall through which we could wage a more even battle, if +it comes to an actual fight. But I think the fear of the dynamite would +be enough to do the trick. Besides, we could promise that the +lumberjacks would be allowed to go in peace; only the principals would +be held. If those jacks were the kind that would play traitor to the +camp they were working for, they would double cross Barrows to save +their own skins." + +"By gosh, boy, I believe you have struck the very idea. At any rate, +it's worth a trial. I'll go with you in the truck with some of the men, +and leave the deputy here with the others." + +The plan was put into execution, and the truck made a dash over the +uneven ground past the bunkhouse. A volley of shots greeted them as they +tore past, and two of the men uttered exclamations of pain. Fortunately +they had only the merest flesh wounds, which Phil bound for them with a +small first aid bandage that he had in his pocket. + +The barrier was built in record time at the sawmill, and Phil rescued +the dynamite from its hiding place. He had feared for a moment that it +might have been removed, but evidently in the haste of fortifying +themselves in the bunkhouse, no one of the enemy had thought of it. + +The return to the bunkhouse then started. When within a striking +distance of it, the truck was turned around and, throwing his clutch +into reverse, the driver skillfully backed it towards the log house. + +Several shots were fired, then there was a silence. Evidently those +inside the building were at loss to understand what this peculiar form +of attack meant. + +Phil knew that his job would be a perilous one, but he knew his duty was +to do what he had planned. The barrier was raised up and he slipped to +the ground. He felt a measure of safety in the thought that the enemy +could see what was going on, and would be unlikely to send spies out, +since the men of the posse in the other truck could pick them off if +they came out. + +Phil raided his radio set for the necessary wire, and fixed the dynamite +against the log house. There was only one detonator left, and Phil was +not sure it was a good one, but he felt so certain that there would be +no need of setting it off that he did not particularly care. + +His plan was for the man who bore the flag of truce to promise safe +conduct for one man to go and look at the arrangement and then go back +and tell the others that it was so. The inspector would be under cover +of the rifles of the posse all the time, so would have no chance of +wrecking the dynamite mine. + +When it was finally in place, he gave the order for the truck to back +away slowly, paying out the wire that was to be used to set off the +detonator from the battery at the other end if the need really arose. + +Garry then volunteered to act as the truce bearer, but here King stepped +in. + +"I've been athinkin' that you shouldn't go. Suppose they once got you in +the shack; they could send a man out and tell us that they would harm +you if you didn't give orders to git out o' the way. They know that your +pa would rather lose the whole camp than have you harmed. Now with me it +would be different; they'd know that I didn't count for much with you +folks, I'd be like one o' the sheriff's men only, and could bargain +better. Better let me go, only promise if anythin' happens to me you'll +take care of my baby." + +The crude logic of the old timer appealed to them all except Garry, who +felt that he should take the danger, since Phil had done his share in +braving bullets to fix the charge. + +However, the sheriff decided the matter, and since he was the real head +of the posse and the law representative of the county, his decision +went. + +One of the men produced a white handkerchief and tied it to a stick. +Then holding the flag of truce aloft, King, the squatter, headed for the +log house. The posse held their breaths for a moment, thinking that +those in the shack would fear a trick and shoot him; but he advanced in +safety and they saw the door of the shack open long enough to admit him. + +When King arrived at the shack, he was met by Barrows, who demanded to +know what message was sent. In a few words King told them, then he added +some words of his own. These were directed to the lumberjacks. King spun +a yarn out of whole cloth and told the jacks, who by this time were +almost ready to desert the ship, that another posse was on the way. + +Barrows was for disregarding the message as a trick, but King clinched +the argument by offering immunity to all the lumberjacks except the +bosses and camp officers. They demanded that one of their number go and +see if the dynamite was really there. + +Barrows and his lieutenants were not strong enough to cope with the +lumberjacks, and it was finally agreed that one lumberjack and the red +headed cookee go and inspect the blasting apparatus. Each faction--for +there were two now in the log house--insisted on having a representative +sent, for neither was willing to trust the word of the other. King +agreed to remain behind as a hostage for the safety of the messengers. + +The two set out on their quest, and in a few minutes were back, post +haste. + +"It's there, boss; enough to blow us all into the next world," gasped +the cookee, who was now frightened half to death. + +His words being corroborated, the lumberjacks insisted on an immediate +surrender. Barrows saw that the jig was up, and he ordered an +evacuation. Jean LeBlanc's face was livid, and he spat out a torrent of +abuse at Barrows. But for all his braggadocio, Barrows was a coward +under the skin, and he saw there was nothing to be gained by a fight +except a longer prison term. Even now he was figuring on bargaining with +Mr. Boone for his freedom, by giving away the interests who had hired +him to do their dirty work. + +Once outside the door, they found the guns of the men in the trucks +trained on them, and they were marching quietly to be disarmed and +probably bound, when suddenly, with a loud scream of defiance, Jean +LeBlanc turned and bounded away with the speed of a stricken deer. A +dozen shots flew after him, and one must have struck him, for they heard +him give a screech of pain, then he reached the sanctuary of the woods, +and dodging for safety from tree to tree dashed for the lake. Three of +the men took after him, but he had taken them by such great surprise +when he fled, that he got a flying start. + +LeBlanc reached the lake and dived in. He had seen at the same moment as +the men who were following, the one chance to save his hide. The motor +boat had been repaired, and in it were three or four of the men +concerned in the timber thefts. Among them was Jean's brother Baptiste. + +Swimming under water, the halfbreed made for the craft. The men in the +launch opened fire on the pursuers. A rope was thrown to Jean by his +brother, which he grasped, and then without taking the time to haul him +aboard, the boat put about and made for the other side of the lake. + +Shot after shot was exchanged, but LeBlanc, as well as those in the +motor boat, seemed to bear charmed lives. + +Once again, Jean LeBlanc had foiled justice and made his escape. + +The chagrined pursuers returned to the late scene of hostilities, and +found that order had been restored. The lumberjacks who had been +promised immunity had been disarmed and herded together, waiting the +word to leave the camp. + +The ringleaders had been tied up to prevent any more escapes, and Mr. +Boone and Dick, together with the other prisoners, had been removed from +the stifling air of the storehouse. + +Warm was the greeting between father and son and between the chums who +were together once again, unharmed and happy. After the greetings were +over, the traitorous lumberjacks were ordered to get their packs and +leave within fifteen minutes under the guidance of the posse, while the +prisoners were put on the trucks to be taken to the county jail. + +"So ends the battle of Boone's camp, and all the excitement. My boys, I +can't tell you how proud I am of you; but had I known the perils that +were in store for you, I would never have started you on this mission. +But you have covered yourselves with glory, and I'm proud of you. Now I +must get a manager that will serve my interests, get this camp going and +do what I can to try and retrieve what I have lost through the rascally +Barrows. I am afraid that I am financially hurt unless we can bring +Carson to book and make him stand this loss." + +"With our evidence I think you can," said Garry. "And now what would you +give for a real manager that would serve you and no one else?" + +"I don't know, but I would give almost anything in reason for such a +man." + +"Then," said Garry, "there's your man," and he pointed to Art Howells. + +Garry's father heartily agreed. + +"Now," said Mr. Boone, "I'd like to get a look at this hermit of yours." + +The boys looked around for the old man, but, mysterious as ever, he had +disappeared! + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +CONCLUSION + + +So the quest of the boys to discover the Timber Thieves was ended. Mr. +Boone hailed Garry's suggestion with delight, and Howells, who protested +that he had done nothing to deserve the big promotion, was installed as +camp manager, with the faithful lumberjacks as a nucleus, to get the +camp going full blast again. + +"And you can depend, Moose Boone, on our doing everything we can to make +up for what has happened before," one of the old timers shouted. + +Only one remained to be rewarded for his help. That was King, the +squatter. Mr. Boone immediately agreed when Garry told him of the +promise that had been made, and offered to send some food and clothes to +Misery Camp. + +A suggestion by Dick proved good. He asked why the Misery Camp men could +not be hired to take some of the places left vacant by the men who had +turned traitor. This was put to King and he thought it over a minute. + +Then he said: + +"Squatters hain't lazy; it's just that every man's hand is turned +against 'em because they haven't got homes and land o' their own; but +you people seem different. I'll have all the men here in a couple o' +days, ready to go to work and earn a livin'." + +It took some time for all to tell their stories. Since Garry and Phil +had worked separately from Dick, they had to tell him all that befell +them since the evening they had left to go and visit the scene of the +timber stealing; and Dick was made to tell how he had become a captive. + +In the telling of their stories to each other, the whole story was +unfolded to Mr. Boone, and at the end of the stories he again +congratulated them on the successful way in which they had carried out +his mission. + +"Now I suppose it's back to the patrol on Sourdehunq," said Garry. "We +have forgotten for some time that we are Rangers, and we still have a +month or so to work for the protection of the forests. It will seem kind +of quiet there after all this excitement, for I don't believe that much +can happen there now." + +But further adventures were in store for the boys--how they were given +another mission to accomplish; the great good fortune that came to Phil; +the explanation of the mystery that surrounded the hermit, and the final +reward for their summer's work. All will be told in the next and last +book of the Ranger Boys series, entitled, "The Ranger Boys and Their +Reward." + +THE END + + + + +The Ranger Boys Series + +BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE + +A new series of copyright titles telling of the adventures of three boys +with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE + THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT + THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS + THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES + THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Radio Boys Series + +BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + +A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER + THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS + THE RADIO BOYS' SEARCH FOR THE INCA'S TREASURE + THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Boy Troopers Series + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +Author of the Famous "Boy Allies" Series. + +The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police. + +All Copyrighted Titles. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL + THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST + THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY + THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY 114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Golden Boys Series + +By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D. Dean of Pennsylvania Military College. + +A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School +Age. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL + THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS + THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS + THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS + THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Boy Scouts Series + +BY HERBERT CARTER + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +New Stories of Camp Life + + THE BOY SCOUTS' FIRST CAMPFIRE; + or, Scouting With The Silver Fox Patrol. + THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE BLUE RIDGE; + or, Marooned Among the Moonshiners. + THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE TRAIL; + or, Scouting through the Big Game Country. + THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE MAINE WOODS; + or, The New Test for the Silver Fox Patrol. + THE BOY SCOUTS THROUGH THE BIG TIMBER; + or, The Search for the Lost Tenderfoot. + THE BOY SCOUTS IN THE ROCKIES; + or, The Secret of the Hidden Silver Mine. + THE BOY SCOUTS ON STURGEON ISLAND; + or, Marooned Among the Game-Fish Poachers. + THE BOY SCOUTS DOWN IN DIXIE; + or, The Strange Secret of Alligator Swamp. + THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE BATTLE OF SARATOGA; + A story of Burgoyne's Defeat in 1777. + THE BOY SCOUTS ALONG THE SUSQUEHANNA; + or, The Silver Fox Patrol Caught in a Flood. + THE BOY SCOUTS ON WAR TRAILS IN BELGIUM; + or, Caught Between Hostile Armies. + THE BOY SCOUTS AFOOT IN FRANCE; + or, With The Red Cross Corps at the Marne. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +Our Young Aeroplane Scout Series + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +BY HORACE PORTER + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +A Series of Remarkable Stories of the Adventures of Two Boy Flyers in +The European War Zone. + + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN FRANCE AND BELGIUM; + or, Saving The Fortunes of the Trouvilles. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN GERMANY. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN RUSSIA; + or, Lost on the Frozen Steppes. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN TURKEY; + or, Bringing the Light to Yusef. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ENGLAND; + or, Twin Stars In the London Sky Patrol. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN ITALY; + or, Flying with the War Eagles of the Alps. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT VERDUN; + or, Driving Armored Meteors Over Flaming Battle Fronts. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE BALKANS; + or, Wearing the Red Badge of Courage Among Warring Legions. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN THE WAR ZONE; + or, Serving Uncle Sam In the Great Cause of the Allies. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS FIGHTING TO THE FINISH; + or Striking Hard Over the Sea for the Stars and Stripes. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS AT THE MARNE; + or, Hurrying the Huns from Allied Battle Planes. + OUR YOUNG AEROPLANE SCOUTS IN AT THE VICTORY; + or, Speedy High Flyers Smashing the Hindenburg Line. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Jack Lorimer Series + +BY WINN STANDISH + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +CAPTAIN JACK LORIMER; or, The Young Athlete of Millvale High. + + Jack Lorimer is a fine example of the all-around American high-school + boys. His fondness for clean, honest sport of all kinds will strike a + chord of sympathy among athletic youths. + +JACK LORIMER'S CHAMPIONS; or, Sports on Land and Lake. + + There is a lively story woven in with the athletic achievements, which + are all right, since the book has been O.K'd. by Chadwick, the Nestor + of American Sporting Journalism. + +JACK LORIMER'S HOLIDAYS; or, Millvale High in Camp. + + It would be well not to put this book into a boy's hands until the + chores are finished, otherwise they might be neglected. + +JACK LORIMER'S SUBSTITUTE; or, The Acting Captain of the Team. + + On the sporting side, this book takes up football, wrestling, and + tobogganing. There is a good deal of fun in this book and plenty of + action. + +JACK LORIMER, FRESHMAN; or, From Millvale High to Exmouth. + + Jack and some friends he makes crowd innumerable happenings into an + exciting freshman year at one of the leading Eastern colleges. The + book is typical of the American college boy's life, and there is a + lively story, interwoven with feats on the gridiron, hockey, + basketball and other clean honest sports for which Jack Lorimer + stands. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Navy + +BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other +in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place +them on board the British cruiser, "The Sylph," and from there on, they +share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, +the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably +the many exciting adventures of the two boys. + + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL; + or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet. + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS; + or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON; + or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA; + or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16. + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA; + or, The Vanishing Submarine. + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC; + or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar. + THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND; + or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM'S CRUISERS; + or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32; + or, The Fall of the Russian Empire. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS; + or, The Fall of the German Navy. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Army + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + +In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to +leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the +Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and +escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every +boy loves. + + THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE; + or, Through Lines of Steel. + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE; + or, Twelve Days Battle Along the Marne. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS; + or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians. + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES; + or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Alsne. + THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL; + or, With the Italian Army In the Alps. + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN; + or, The Struggle to Save a Nation. + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME; + or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded. + THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN; + or, Saving France from the Enemy. + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES; + or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS; + or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE; + or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE GREAT ADVANCE; + or, Driving the Enemy Through France and Belgium. + THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH; + or, The Closing Days of the Great World War. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +The Navy Boys Series + +A series of excellent stories of adventure on sea and land, selected +from the works of popular writers; each volume designed for boys' +reading. + +Handsome Cloth Bindings + + THE NAVY BOYS IN DEFENCE OF LIBERTY. + A story of the burning of the British schooner Gaspee in 1772. + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS ON LONG ISLAND SOUND. + A story of the Whale Boat Navy of 1776. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS AT THE SIEGE OF HAVANA. + Being the experience of three boys serving under Israel Putnam + in 1772. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS WITH GRANT AT VICKSBURG. + A boy's story of the siege of Vicksburg. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH PAUL JONES. + A boy's story of a cruise with the Great Commodore in 1776. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS ON LAKE ONTARIO. + The story of two boys and their adventures in the War of 1812. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE ON THE PICKERING. + A boy's story of privateering in 1780. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS IN NEW YORK BAY. + A story of three boys who took command of the schooner "The Laughing + Mary," the first vessel of the American Navy. + By James Otis. + THE NAVY BOYS IN THE TRACK OF THE ENEMY. + The story of a remarkable cruise with the Sloop of War "Providence" + and the Frigate "Alfred." + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS' DARING CAPTURE. + The story of how the navy boys helped to capture the British Cutter + "Margaretta," in 1775. + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE TO THE BAHAMAS. + The adventures of two Yankee Middies with the first cruise of an + American Squadron in 1775. + By William P. Chipman. + THE NAVY BOYS' CRUISE WITH COLUMBUS. + The adventures of two boys who sailed with the great Admiral in the + discovery of America. + By Frederick A. Ober. + + + + +The Boy Spies Series + +These stories are based on important historical events, scenes wherein +boys are prominent characters being selected. They are the romance of +history, vigorously told, with careful fidelity to picturing the home +life, and accurate in every particular. + +Handsome Cloth Bindings + + THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF NEW ORLEANS. + A story of the part they took in its defence. + By William P. Chipman. + THE BOY SPIES AT THE DEFENCE OF FORT HENRY. + A boy's story of Wheeling Creek in 1777. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES AT THE BATTLE OF BUNKER HILL. + A story of two boys at the siege of Boston. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES AT THE SIEGE OF DETROIT. + A story of two Ohio boys in the War of 1812. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES WITH LAFAYETTE. + The story of how two boys joined the Continental Army. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES ON CHESAPEAKE BAY. + The story of two young spies under Commodore Barney. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES WITH THE REGULATORS. + The story of how the boys assisted the Carolina Patriots + to drive the British from that State. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES WITH THE SWAMP FOX. + The story of General Marion and his young spies. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES AT YORKTOWN. + The story of how the spies helped General Lafayette + in the Siege of Yorktown. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES OF PHILADELPHIA. + The story of how the young spies helped the Continental + Army at Valley Forge. + By James Otis. + THE BOY SPIES OF FORT GRISWOLD. + The story of the part they took in its brave defence. + By William P. Chipman. + THE BOY SPIES OF OLD NEW YORK. + The story of how the young spies prevented the capture of + General Washington. + By James Otis. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street, New York + + + + +The Girl Chum's Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives, +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + + BENHURST CLUB, THE. By Howe Benning. + BERTHA'S SUMMER BOARDERS. By Linnie S. Harris. + BILLOW PRAIRIE. A Story of Life in the Great West. By Joy Allison. + DUXBERRY DOINGS. A New England Story. By Caroline B. Le Row. + FUSSBUDGET'S FOLKS. A Story For Young Girls. By Anna F. Burnham. + HAPPY DISCIPLINE, A. By Elizabeth Cummings. + JOLLY TEN, THE; and Their Year of Stories. By Agnes Carr Sage. + KATIE ROBERTSON. A Girl's Story of Factory Life. By M. E. Winslow. + LONELY HILL. A Story For Girls. By M. L. Thornton-Wilder. + MAJORIBANKS. A Girl's Story. By Elvirton Wright. + MISS CHARITY'S HOUSE. By Howe Benning. + MISS ELLIOT'S GIRLS. A Story For Young Girls. By Mary Spring Corning. + MISS MALCOLM'S TEN. A Story For Girls. By Margaret E. Winslow. + ONE GIRL'S WAY OUT. By Howe Benning. + PEN'S VENTURE. By Elvirton Wright. + RUTH PRENTICE. A Story For Girls. By Marion Thorne. + THREE YEARS AT GLENWOOD. A Story of School Life. By M. E. Winslow. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street, New York + + + + +The Girl Comrade's Series + +ALL AMERICAN AUTHORS. + +ALL COPYRIGHT STORIES. + +A carefully selected series of books for girls, written by popular +authors. These are charming stories for young girls, well told and full +of interest. Their simplicity, tenderness, healthy, interesting motives +vigorous action, and character painting will please all girl readers. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + + A BACHELOR MAID AND HER BROTHER By I. R. Thurston. + ALL ABOARD. A Story For Girls. By Fanny E. Newberry. + ALMOST A GENIUS. A Story For Girls. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + ANNICE WYNKOOP, Artist. Story of a Country Girl. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + BUBBLES. A Girl's Story. By Fannie B. Newberry. + COMRADES. By Fannie E. Newberry. + DEANE GIRLS, THE. A Home Story. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + HELEN BEATON. COLLEGE WOMAN. By Adelaide L. Rouse. + JOYCE'S INVESTMENTS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + MELLICENT RAYMOND. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + MISS ASHTON'S NEW PUPIL. A School Girl's Story. By Mrs. S. S. Robbins. + NOT FOR PROFIT. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + ODD ONE, THE. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + SARA, A PRINCESS. A Story For Girls. By Fannie E. Newberry. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 East 23d Street. New York + + + + +Marjorie Dean High School Series + +BY PAULINE LESTER + +Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean College Series + +These are clean, wholesome stories that will be of great interest to all +girls of high school age. + +All Cloth Bound. Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH + + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL FRESHMAN + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SOPHOMORE + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL JUNIOR + MARJORIE DEAN, HIGH SCHOOL SENIOR + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 EAST 23rd STREET, NEW YORK + + + + +Marjorie Dean College Series + +BY PAULINE LESTER. + +Author of the Famous Marjorie Dean High School Series. + +Those who have read the Marjorie Dean High School Series will be eager +to read this new series, as Marjorie Dean continues to be the heroine in +these stories. + +All Clothbound. Copyright Titles. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE FRESHMAN + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SOPHOMORE + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE JUNIOR + MARJORIE DEAN, COLLEGE SENIOR + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + +The Girl Scouts Series + +BY EDITH LAVELL + +A new copyright series of Girl Scouts stories by an author of wide +experience in Scouts' craft, as Director of Girl Scouts of Philadelphia. + +Clothbound, with Attractive Color Designs. + +PRICE, 65 CENTS EACH. + + THE GIRL SCOUTS AT MISS ALLEN'S SCHOOL + THE GIRL SCOUTS AT CAMP + THE GIRL SCOUTS' GOOD TURN + THE GIRL SCOUTS' CANOE TRIP + THE GIRL SCOUTS' RIVALS + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the +Publishers. + +A. L. BURT COMPANY + +114-120 East 23rd Street, New York + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Ranger Boys Outwit the Timber +Thieves, by Claude A. Labelle + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RANGER BOYS *** + +***** This file should be named 39916.txt or 39916.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/9/9/1/39916/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This book was +produced from images made available by the HathiTrust +Digital Library.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/39916.zip b/39916.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f37529 --- /dev/null +++ b/39916.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b5a134 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #39916 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/39916) |
